Class 12 Physics TB
Uploaded by
Devansh TiwaryClass 12 Physics TB
Uploaded by
Devansh Tiwary2
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.
Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
4
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.
Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.
Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?
We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
Your success is our dream-come-true
I wish you all the best.
Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
5
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.
Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain
Physics Team
Teachers SME DTP
Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Tamanna Arora
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan Kanchan Kumari
Pritesh Ranjan Pushp Raj Singh
Ravneet Wadhwa
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.
Suraj Bhan Singh
Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran
Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.
The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 47
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 63
Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 77
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 95
Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 109
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 198
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 124
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 149
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 159
Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 169
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 181
Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 191
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 201
7
Teacher’s Note:
“ Electrostatics & Capacitors forms the backbone of your aptitude in Physics. Mastering
this topic involves exposure and mastery of several dimensions of Physics. So, this
chapter not only exposes you to a fresh variety of problems but it also serves as a good
revision of majority of problems done in mechanics. This chapter also becomes the basis
of understanding the entire Electrodynamics module. Finally, NEET and other competi-
tive exams always have about 2 to 3 questions from this chapter .”
"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,
Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
9
Chapter 01
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS
1. ELECTRIC CHARGE (iii) Charge is always associated with mass, i.e., charge
can not exist without mass though mass can exist
1.1 Definition without charge.
(iv) Charge is conserved : Charge can neither be created
Charge is the property associated with matter due to which
it produces and experiences electrical and magnetic effects. nor be destroyed.
1.2 Type (v) Invariance of charge : The numerical value of an
elementary charge is independent of velocity.
There exists two types of charges in nature
(vi) Charge produces electric field and magnetic field : A
(i) Positive charge charged particle at rest produces only electric field in
(ii) Negative charge the space surrounding it. However, if the charged
particle is in unaccelerated motion it produces both
Charges with the same electrical sign repel each other, and
electric and magnetic fields. And if the motion of
charges with opposite electrical sign attract each other.
charged particle is accelerated it not only produces
electric and magnetic fields but also radiates energy in
the space surrounding the charge in the form of
electromagnetic waves.
(vii) Charge resides on the surface of conductor : Charge
1.3 Unit and dimensional formula
resides on the outer surface of a conductor because
S.I. unit of charge is coulomb (C), like charges repel and try to get as far away as possible
from one another and stay at the farthest distance
1mC 10 3
C, 1C 106 C, 1nC 109 C . from each other which is outer surface of the
conductor. This is why a solid and hollow
C.G.S. unit of charge is e.s.u. 1C = 3 × 109 esu conducting sphere of same outer radius will hold
maximum equal charge and a soap bubble expands
Dimensional formula [Q] = [AT]. on charging.
1.4 Point Charge (viii) Quantization of charge : When a physical quantity
can have only discrete values rather than any value,
Whose spatial size is negligible as compared to other
distances. the quantity is said to be quantised. The smallest
charge that can exist in nature is the charge of an
1.5 Properties of charge electron. If the charge of an electron
(i) Charge is a Scalar Quantity : Charges can be added
or subtracted algebrically.
"e" 1.61019 C is taken as elementary unit i.e.
quanta of charge the charge on any body will be
(ii) Charge is transferable : If a charged body is put in
some integral multiple of e i.e., Q = ± ne with n = 0,
contact with an uncharged body, uncharged body
1, 2, 3 ......
becomes charged due to transfer of electrons from
Charge on a body can never be 0.5 e, ±17.2 e or ±10–5 e
one body to the other.
etc.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 10
1.6 Comparison of Charge and Mass negatively charged. However, ebonite on rubbing with
wool becomes negatively charged making the wool
We are familiar with role of mass in gravitation, and we have
positively charged. Clouds also become charged by
just studied some features of electric charge. We can
friction. In charging by friction in accordance with
compare the two as shown below :
conservation of charge, both positive and negative
Charge Mass charges in equal amounts appear simultaneously due
to transfer of electrons from one body to the other.
1. Electric charge can be 1. Mass of a body is a
(ii) By electrostatic induction : If a charged body is
positive, negative or zero. positive quantity. brought near an uncharged body, the charged body
will attract opposite charge and repel similar charge
2. Charge carried by a body 2. Mass of a body increases present in the uncharged body. As a result of this
does not depend upon with its velocity as one side of neutral body (closer to charged body)
becomes oppositely charged while the other is
m0 similarly charged. This process is called electrostatic
velocity of the body. m where c
1 2 / c2 induction.
is velocity of light in
vaccum, m is the mass of
the velocity and m0 is
rest mass of the body.
3. Charge is quantized. 3. The quantization of mass
is yet to be established.
4. Electric charge is always 4. Mass is not conserved as
conserved. it can be changed into
energy and vice–versa.
5. Force between charges 5. The gravitational force
can be attractive or between two masses is
repulsive, according as always attractive.
charges are unlike or like Note :-
charges. Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.
(iii) Charging by conduction : Take two conductors, one
charged and other uncharged. Bring the conductors
1.7 Methods of Charging
in contact with each other. The charge (whether –e
A body can be charged by following methods : or + e) under its own repulsion will spread over both
the conductors. Thus the conductors will be charged
(i) By friction : In friction when two bodies are rubbed with the same sign. This is called as charging by
together, electrons are transferred from one body to conduction (through contact).
the other. As a result of this one body becomes
positively charged while the other negatively charged,
e.g., when a glass rod is rubbed with silk, the rod
becomes positively charged while the silk becomes
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 11
(1) Uncharged electroscope
+ + –
+ + + + – –
+ + + + + – – –
– – – + + + – –
+ + + + – – + +
+ + – –
+ – –
+ + – – + +
+ + + +
–
–
+ + –
–
+ + –
–
+ + –
+ + + + –
+ + + + – –
– – ––
+ + + +
+ + + + –– ––
(A) (B) (C)
Charging by conduction Charging by induction
(2) Charged electroscope
– –
+ + – – – –
+ + – – – – – –
+ – – – – – + ++ – –
+ + + – – – – + – –
+ + –– –– +
+ + + +
– –
+ + – – + +
–
Note : - –
–
–
–
A truck carrying explosives has a metal chain touching –
–
–
the ground, to conduct away the charge produced by +
+ +
+ – – +
+ +
+
+ + –– –– + +
friction. + + –– –– + +
(A) (B) (C)
1.8 Electroscope
It is a simple apparatus with which the presence of electric 2. COULOMB’S LAW
charge on a body is detected (see figure). When metal
If two stationary and point charges Q1 and Q2 are kept at a
knob is touched with a charged body, some charge is
distance r, then it is found that force of attraction or
transferred to the gold leaves, which then diverges due
repulsion between them is proportional to the product of
to repulsion. The separation gives a rough idea of the
the two charges and inversely proportional to the square of
amount of charge on the body. If a charged body is the distance between them. Mathematically, Coulomb’s law
brought near a charged electroscope the leaves will also
can be written as
diverge is the charge on body is similar to that on
electroscope and will usually converge if opposite. If the q1q 2
induction effect is strong enough leaves after converging Fk
r2
may again diverge.
where k is a proportionality constant.
In case of unncharged electroscope, if the charged body is In SI units k has the value, k = 8.988 × 109 N m2/C2
brought is contact, the electroscope gets charged and the 9.0 × 109 N m2/C2
leaves diverge. when a charged body is brought near
electroscope (but not is contact), different charges appear
on different parts of electroscope (as shown in figure).
resulling in divergence of leaves.
(a) The direction of force is always along the line joining
the two charges.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 12
(b) The force is repulsive if the charges have the same
sign and attractive if their signs are opposite.
(c) This force is conservative in nature.
(d) This is also called inverse square law.
2.1 Variation of k Hence in the presence of medium
Constant k depends upon system of units and medium Fair 1 QQ
Fm . 12 2
between the two charges. K 40 K r
2.1.1 Effect of units
Here 0 K 0 r (permittivity of medium)
Q1Q 2
(a) In C.G.S. for air k 1, F Dyne Medium K
r2
Vacuum / air 1
2
1 Nm Water 80
(b) In S.I. for air k 9 109 ,
4 0 C2
Mica 6
1 Q1Q 2 Glass 5–10
F . 2 Newton (1 Newton = 105 Dyne)
40 r Metal
Note :-
2.2 Vector form of coulomb’s law
0 Absolute permittivity of air or free space It is helpful to adopt a convention for subscript notation.
F12 = force on 1 due to 2 F21 = force on 2 due to 1
12 C2
Farad
= 8.85 10 2
. Suppose the position vectors of two charges q1 and q2 are
Nm m
r1 and r2 , then, electric force on charge q1 due to charge q2
1 3 4 2
Dimension is M L T A is,
1 q1q 2
0 Relates with absolute magnetic permeability F12 r1 r2
40 r1 r2 3
0 and velocity of light (c) according to the
1
following relation c
0 0
2.1.2 Effect of medium
(a) When a dielectric medium is completely filled in
between charges rearrangement of the charges inside
the dielectric medium takes place and the force
between the same two charges, decreases by a factor
of K known as dielectric constant. K is also called
relative permittivity r of the medium (relative means
with respect to free space). Similarly, electric force on q2 due to charge q1 is
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 13
2.3 Principle of superposition
1 q1q 2
F21 r2 r1
40 r2 r1 3
According to the principle of super position, total force
acting on a given charge due to number of charges is the
Force is a vector, so in vector form the Coulomb’s law is vector sum of the individual forces acting on that charge
written as due to all the charges.
Consider number of charge Q1, Q2, Q3…are applying force
1 q1q 2
F12 ˆr12 on a charge Q
40 r 2
Net force on Q will be
Fnet F1 F2 ......... Fn 1 Fn
where r̂12 is a unit vector directed toward q1 from q2.
Note : - The magnitude of the resultant of two electric force is
given by
ˆr12 ˆr21
F F12 F22 2 F1F2 cos and the force direction is given
1 q1q 2 1 q 2 q1
F12 rˆ12 rˆ21 F2 sin
40 r 2 40 r 2 by tan
F1 F2 cos
1 q 2 q1
r̂21 F21
40 r 2
F2 F
F1
3. ELECTRIC FIELD
A positive charge or a negative charge is said to create its
Remember convention for r̂ . field around itself. Thus space around a charge in which
another charged particle experiences a force is said to have
Here q1 and q2 are to be substituted with sign. Position
electrical field in it.
vector of charges q 1 and q 2 are r1 x1ˆi y1ˆj z1kˆ and
3.1 Electric field intensity ( E )
r2 x 2 ˆi y2 ˆj z 2 kˆ respectively, where (x 1, y1, z 1) and
The electric field intensity at any point is defined as the
(x 2, y2, z 2) are the co-ordinates of charges q1 and q2. force experienced by a unit positive charge placed at that
F
point. E
q0
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 14
Where q 0 0 so that presence of this charge may not
affect the source charge Q and its electric field is not changed,
therefore expression for electric field intensity can be better
E E12 E 22 2E1E 2 cos and the direction is given by
F
written as E lim
q 0 q
0 0
E 2 sin
tan
E1 E 2 cos
(a) Unit and Dimensional formula : It’s S.I. unit –
Newton volt Joule 3.4 Point Charge
and
coulomb meter coulomb meter
Point charge produces its electric field at a point P which is
C.G.S. unit = Dyne/stat coulomb. distance r from it given by
Dimension : [E] = [MLT–3 A–1]
Q
EP (Magnitude)
(b) Direction of electric field : Electric field (intensity) 40 r 2
E is a vector quantity. Electric field due to a positive
charge is always away from the charge and that due
to a negative charge is always towards the charge
For + ve point charge, E is directed away from it.
For – ve point charge, E is directed towards it.
3.5 Continuous charge distributions
There are infinite number of ways in which we can spread a
continuous charge distribution over a region of space. Mainly
3.2 Relation between electric force and electric field three types of charge distributions will be used. We define
three different charge densities.
In an electric field E a charge (Q) experiences a force
F QE . If charge is positive then force is directed in the Symbol Definition SI units
direction of field while if charge is negative force acts on it (lambda) = Charge per unit length C/m
in the opposite direction of field
(sigma) = Charge per unit area C/m2
(rho) = Charge per unit volume C/m3
If a total charge q is distributed along a line of length , over
3.3 Super position of electric field
a surface area A or throughout a volume V, we can calculate
The resultant electric field at any point is equal to the vector
charge densities from.
sum of electric fields at that point due to various charges.
E E1 E 2 E3 ... q q q
, ,
The magnitude of the resultant of two electric fields are A V
given by
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 15
3.6 Properties of Electric Field Lines
1. Electric field lines originate from a positive charge &
terminate on a negative charge.
2. The number of field lines originating/terminating on
a charge is proportional to the magnitude of the
charge.
9. Field lines always flow from higher potential to lower
potential.
10. If in a region electric field is absent, there will be no
field lines.
3.7 Motion of Charged Particle in an Electric Field
3. The number of Field Lines passing through (a) When charged particle initially at rest is placed in
perpendicular unit area will be proportional to the the uniform field :
magnitude of Electric Field there. Let a charge particle of mass m and charge Q be initially at
rest in an electric field of strength E
4. Tangent to a Field line at any point gives the direction
of Electric Field at that point. This will be the
instantaneous path charge will take if kept there.
Fig. (A)
5. Two or more field lines can never intersect each
other.
[they cannot have multiple directions]
6. Uniform field lines are straight, parallel & uniformly
placed.
7. Field lines cannot form a loop. Fig. (B)
(i) Force and acceleration : The force experienced by
the charged particle is F = QE. Positive charge
experiences force in the direction of electric field while
negative charge experiences force in the direction
opposite to the field. [Fig. (A)]
F QE
8. Electric field lines originate & terminate perpendicular Acceleration produced by this force is a
m m
to the surface of the conductor. Electric field lines do
Since the field E is constant the acceleration is
not exist inside a conductor. constant, thus motion of the particle is uniformly
accelerated.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 16
(ii) Velocity : Suppose at point A particle is at rest and in Since the motion of the particle is accelerated along y-axis,
time t, it reaches the point B [Fig. (B)] we will use equation of motion for uniform acceleration to
S = Separation between A and B 1 2
determine displacement y. From S ut at
2
(a) By using = u + at,
E 1 2
0Q t, We have u = 0 (along y-axis) so y at
m 2
i.e., displacement along y-axis will increase rapidly with time
QEt
(since y t2)
m
From displacement along x-axis t = x/u
(b) By using 2 u 2 2 as,
2
1 QE x
QE So y ; this is the equation of parabola
2 0 2 S 2 m u
m
which shows y x 2
2QES
v (ii) Velocity at any instant : At any instant t, x u and
m
(iii) Momentum : Momentum p = mv, QEt
y
m
QEt
p m QEt
m So Q2 E2 t 2
2x 2y u 2
(iv) Kinetic energy : Kinetic energy gained by the particle m2
in time t is
2
1 1 QEt Q2 E 2 t 2
K m 2 m
2 2 m 2m
(b) When a charged particle enters with an initial
velocity at right angle to the uniform field
If is the angle made by v with x-axis than
When charged particle enters perpendicularly in an
electric field, it describe a parabolic path as shown
y QEt
(i) Equation of trajectory : Throughout the motion tan .
x mu
particle has uniform velocity along x-axis and
horizontal displacement (x) is given by the equation
x = ut 4. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL ENERGY
4.1 Potential energy of 2 charges system
It is always change in potential energy that is defined as
U = – Wconservative force = – WCoulomb force
Potential energy is defined for a system of charges in a
particular configuration.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 17
Consider a system of two charges q1 and q2. Suppose, the 4.2 Electron volt (eV)
charge q1 is fixed and the charge q2 is taken from a point A
to B. It is the practical unit of energy used in atomic and nuclear
physics. As electron volt is defined as “the energy acquired
by a particle having one quantum of charge i.e., when
accelerated by 1volt” i.e.
1J
1eV 1.6 10 19 C 1.6 10 19 J 1.6 10 12 erg
C
4.3 Potential energy of a system of n charges
In a system of n charges electric potential energy is calculated
The electric force on the charge q2 is F q1q 2 rˆ
for each pair and then all energies so obtained are added
40 r 2
1 Q1Q 2 Q 2 Q3
The total work done as the charge q2 moves from A to B is algebraically. i.e. U ........... and
40 r12 r23
r in case of continuous distribution of charge. As
2
q1q 2 q1q 2 1 1
W 4 0 r 2
dr
40 r1 r2 dU dQ.V U V dQ , where V is the potential at the
r
1
point where dQ change is being added.
The change in potential energy U(r2) – U(r1) is, therefore,
q1q 2 1 1
U r2 U r1 W
40 r2 r1
Ass The potential energy of the two-charge system is assumed
to be zero when they have infinite separation.
The potential energy when the separation is r is e.g. Electric potential energy for a system of three charges
q1q 2 1 1 q1q 2 1 Q1Q 2 Q 2 Q3 Q 3Q1
U(r) = U(r) – U() Potential energy =
40 r12 r23 r31
40 r 40 r
The potential energy depends essentially on the separation 5. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
between the charges and is independent of the spatial
location of the charged particles. Suppose, a test charge q is moved in an electric field from a
point A to a point B while all the other charges in question
Above Equation gives the electric potential energy of a pair remain fixed. If the electric potential energy changes by UB
of charges. – UA due to this displacement, we define the potential
difference between the point A and the point B as
Note :-
* Electric potential energy is a scalar quantity so in
the above formula take sign of Q1 and Q2.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 18
U U U A Wext Note :-
V i.e. VB VA B KE 0
q q q
At the centre of two equal and opposite charge
Conversely, if a charge q is taken through a potential V = 0 but E 0.
difference VB – VA, the electric potential energy is increased At the centre of the line joining two equal and
by UB – UA = q(VB – VA).
similar charge V 0, E = 0.
Also Wext = q(VB – VA) [KE = 0]
If left free to move,
Potential difference between two points give us an idea about
work which has to be done in moving a charge between those Positive charge will always move from higher to
points. lower potential points.
5.1 Electric Potential due to a point charge Negative charge will always move from lower to
higher potential points.
Consider a point charge Q placed at a point A.
(Because this motion will decrease potential energy
The potential at P is, of a system)
6. RELATION BETWEEN ELECTRIC FIELD & POTENTIAL
In an electric field rate of change of potential with distance
U U Q Q is known as potential gradient. It is a vector quantity and
VP V P VP
q 40 r 4 0 r it’s direction is opposite to that of electric field. Potential
gradient relates with electric field according to the following
( V is taken as 0)
dV
relation E ; This relation gives another unit of
The electric potential due to a system of charges may be dr
obtained by finding potentials due to the individual charges
using equation and then adding them. Thus, volt
electric field is . In the above relation negative sign
meter
1 Q
V
40
ri indicates that in the direction of electric field potential
i decreases.
Electric potential is a scalar quantity, hence sign of charges
is to taken in expression it is denoted by V
5.2 Unit and dimensional formula
Joule
S. I. unit = volt
Coulomb
[V] = [ML2T–3A–1] In space around a charge distribution we can also write
5.3 Types of electric potential E E x ˆi E y ˆj E z kˆ
According to the nature of charge potential is of two types
dV dV dV
where E x , Ey and E z
(i) Positive potential : Due to positive charge. dx dy dz
(ii) Negative potential : Due to negative charge.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 19
Suppose A, B and C are three points in an uniform electric field (4) For a uniform electric field, the equipotential surfaces
as shown in below figure. are a family of plane perpendicular to the field lines.
(i) Potential difference between point A and B is (5) A metallic surface of any shape is an equipotential
surface e.g. When a charge is given to a metallic
B surface, it distributes itself in a manner such that its
V B VA E . dr every point comes at same potential even if the object
A is of irregular shape and has sharp points on it.
Since displacement is in the direction of electric field, hence
= 0o
(6) Equipotential surfaces can never cross each other.
B B
So, V B VA E . dr cos 0 E . dr Ed It is a common misconception that the path traced
A A
by a positive test charge is a field line but actually
the path traced by a unit positive test charge
6. 1 Equipotential Surface or Lines represents a field line only when it moves along a
(1) If every point of a surface is at same potential, then it straight line.
is said to be an equipotential surface. Regarding
7. ELECTRIC DIPOLE
equipotential surface following points should be kept
in mind :
7.1 General information
(2) The direction of electric field is perpendicular to the
equipotential surfaces or lines. System of two equal and opposite charges separated by a
(3) The equipotential surfaces produced by a point small fixed distance is called a dipole.
charge or a spherical charge distribution are a family
of concentric spheres.
A B
–q +q Dipole axis
(i) Dipole axis : Line joining negative charge to positive
charge of a dipole is called its axis. It may also be
termed as its longitudinal axis.
(ii) Equatorial axis : Perpendicular bisector of the dipole
is called its equatorial or transverse axis as it is
perpendicular to length.
(iii) Dipole length : The distance between two charges is
known as dipole length (d)
(iv) Dipole moment : It is a quantity which gives
information about the strength of dipole. It is a vector
quantity and is directed from negative charge to
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 20
positive charge along the axis. It is denoted as p and k(qd) cos kp cos
Vp p qd .
is defined as the product of the magnitude of either of d2 d2
r 2 cos 2 r cos 2
2
the charge and the dipole length. 4 4
i.e. p q d since r >> d
kp cos 1 p cos
Vp .
Its S.I. unit is coulomb-metre another units is Debye (1 r 2 4 0 r 2
Debye = 3.3 × 10–30 C × m) and its dimensions are M0L1T1A1.
is angle with the axis of dipole ; r is distance from centre of
Note :- dipole.
(b) Electric Field due to dipole
A region surrounding a stationary electric dipole (i) For points on the axis
has electric field only.
Let the point P be at distance r from the centre of the dipole
When a dielectric is placed in an electric field, its on the side of the charge q, as shown in fig (a). Then
atoms or molecules are considered as tiny dipoles. q
E q p̂
7.2 Electric field and potential due to an electric dipole 40 (r a ) 2
where p̂ is the unit vector along the dipole axis (from –q to
(a) Electric Potential due to a dipole
q). Also
q
E q p̂
4 0 (r a ) 2
(a) a point on the axis.
The total field at P is
q 1 1
E E q E q p̂
k(q) k(q) 40 (r a )
2
(r a ) 2
VP
AP BP
r >> d (distance ‘r’ is large as compared to d) q 4a r
p̂
4 0 (r a 2 ) 2
2
AP OP ; BP OP
For r > > a
OP r d / 2 c os , O P r d / 2 c os
4qa
k(q) k(q) E p̂ (r >> a) ...(i)
Vp 4 0 r 3
(r d / 2 cos ) (r d / 2cos )
1 1 (ii) For points on the equatorial plane
k( q) .
r d / 2 cos r d / 2 cos The magnitudes of the electric fields due to the two charges
+ q and –q are given by
r d / 2 cos r d / 2 cos kq d cos q 1
kq E q
2 d2 40 r a 2
2
2 d 2 r 2
cos 2
r cos 4
4 q 1
E q
4 0 r 2 a 2 and are equal.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 21
Consider an electric dipole in placed in a uniform electric
field such that dipole (i.e. p ) makes an angle with
the direction of electric field as shown
(a) Net force on electric dipole Fnet 0
(b) a point on the equatorial plane of the dipole. p is the
(b) Torque pE sin p E
dipole moment vector of magnitude p = q × 2a and
directed from –q to q. (ii) Work : From the above discussion it is clear that in
an uniform electric field dipole tries to align itself in
The directions of E+q and E–q are as shown in fig. (b). Clearly, the direction of electric field (i.e. equilibrium position).
the components normal to the dipole axis cancel away. The To change it’s angular position some work has to be
components along the dipole axis add up. The total electric
done.
field is opposite to p̂ . We have
Suppose an electric dipole is kept in an uniform electric
E = – (E+q + E–q) cos p̂ field by making an angle 1 with the field, if it is again
turn so that it makes an angle 2 with the field, work
2qa done in this process is given by the formula
p̂
4 0 (r 2 a 2 )3 / 2
At large distances (r >> a), this reduces to
2qa
E p̂ (r >> a) ...(ii)
4 0 r 3
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the dipole field at large
distances does not involve q and a separately ; it depends
on the product qa. In terms of p, the electric field of a dipole at
large distances takes simple forms : W pE cos 1 cos 2
At a point on the dipole axis
(iii) Potential energy : In case of a dipole (in a uniform
2p 2kp
E 3 (r a) field), potential energy of dipole is defined as work
40r 3 r done in rotating a dipole from a direction
At a point on the equatorial plane perpendicular to the field to the given direction i.e. if
1 = 90o and 2 = then
p kp
E 3
(r a)
40r r3 E
7.3 Electric Dipole in uniform electric field
(i) Force and Torque : If a dipole is placed in a uniform
field such that dipole (i.e. p ) makes an angle with
direction of field, then two equal and opposite force
W = U = U – U 90° = – pE cos
act on dipole and constitute a couple whose tendency
is to rotate the dipole. Hence a torque is developed in
it and dipole tries to align it self in the direction of field. U = – pE cos [U(90°) = 0] or U p.E
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 22
GAUSS’S LAW
1. ELECTRIC FLUX 1.2 Unit and Dimension
Flux is a scalar quantity.
1.1 Definition
N.m 2
Electric flux is measure of the field lines crossing a surface. S.I. unit : (volt × m) or
C
N 2
It is sclear quanity with SI unit -m or V-m 3 –3 –1
C It’s Dimensional formula : (ML T A )
“The number of field lines passing through perpendicular 1.3 Types of flux
unit area will be proportional to the magnitude of Electric
Field there” (Theory of Field Lines) For a closed body outward flux is taken to be positive, while
inward flux is taken to be negative.
N
E N E A
A
E
Electric Flux, A EA n
Body Body
=
A
E Positive–flux Negative–flux
(A) (B)
2. GAUSS’S LAW
As increases, flux through area A decreases. If we draw a
vector of magnitude A along the positive normal, it is called 2.1 Definition
the area vector, A corresponding to the area A.
According to Gauss’s law, total electric flux through a closed
1
surface enclosing a charge is times the magnitude of
0
A
E the charge enclosed.
E
1
A i.e. net (Qenc.)
0
Qen
Electric Flux, A EA cos E . A i.e.
E .dA 0 .
(Assuming Electric Field is uniform over whole area)
Note : -
Note :-
If Electric field is not constant over the area of cross Gauss’s law is only applicable for a closed surface.
section, then
E . dA
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 23
2.2 Gaussian Surface Note :-
Although we derived gauss law for a spherical surface it is
The closed surface on which Gauss law is applicable is
valid for any shape of gaussian surface and for any charge
defined as a Gaussian surface.
kept anywhere inside the surface.
Note :-
Gaussian surface can be of any shape & size, only 2.4 Coulomb’s law from Gauss’s law
condition is that it should be closed.
We choose an imaginary sphere (Gaussian surface) of
Gaussian surface is hypothetical in nature. It does radius r centred on the charge +q. Due to symmetry, E must
not have a physical existence.
have the same magnitude at any point on the surface, and E
2.3 Deriving Gauss’s law from Coulomb’s law points radially outward, parallel to dA . Hence we write the
integral in Gauss’s law as
+Q r
q
Lets take a spherical gaussian surface with charge ‘+Q’ kept
at the centre.
net E .dA E dA E dA E 4r 2
We know field lines for a +ve charge are always radially
outward. Qenclosed = q
q q
Angle between dA & E is zero.
Thus, E 4r 2 0
or E
40 r 2
From the definition of the electric field, the force on a point
r E
charge q0 located at a distance r from the charge q is F = q0E.
+Q dA Therefore,
1 qq 0
F=
kQ Q 4πε 0 r 2
E
r2 4 0 r 2
which is Coulomb’s law.
Q
Net flux E.dA
dA 3. APPLICATIONS OF GAUSS’S LAW
4 0 r 2
Using Gauss’s law to derive ‘E’ due to various charge
Q Q Q distributions.
4 0 r 2 dA 4 r2
. 4r 2
0
0
3.1 Electric Field due to a Line Charge
Hence Net flux = Q/0. Consider an infinite line which has a linear charge density .
Using Gauss’s law, let us find the electric field at a distance
‘r’ from the line charge.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 24
The cylindrical symmetry tells us that the field strength
Note : -
will be the same at all points at a fixed distance r from the
line. Thus, if the charges are positive. The field lines are If the charge is positive, the field is away from the
directed radially outwards, perpendicular to the line charge. plane.
+ ds To calculate the field E at P. Choose a cylinder of area of
cross-section A through the point P as the Gaussian surface.
S2 E
The flux due to the electric field of the plane sheet of charge
passes only through the two circular caps of the cylinder.
E
ds
S1 E
ds
According to Gauss law E.dS qin / 0
A
S3 E
I circular
E.dS
II circular
E.dS
cylindrical
E.dS
0
surface surface surface
+ ds
A
The appropriate choice of Gaussian surface is a cylinder of or EA EA 0
0
radius r and length L. On the flat end faces, S2 and S3, E is
perpendicular dS , which means flux is zero on them. On the
E
curved surface S1, E is parallel to dS , so that E.dS = EdS. or 2 0
The charge enclosed by the cylinder is Q = L. Applying
Gauss’s law to the curved surface, we have
Note :-
L 2k We see that the field is uniform and does not depend
E dS E 2rL or E on the distance from the charge sheet. This is true as
0 2 0 r r
long as the sheet is large as compared to its distance
Note :- from P.
This is the field at a distance r from the line. It is directed
3.3 Uniform Spherical Charge Distribution
away from the line if the charge is positive and towards the
3.3.1 Outside the Sphere
line if the charge is negative.
P is a point outside the sphere at a distance r from the centre.
3.2 Electric Field due to a Plane Sheet of Charge
Q P
+ +
++ + dS + +r
++ +
++ + + R +
E'
+
+ +
E + P E
A'
+
A + + +
dS dS
Gaussian
Consider a large plane sheet of charge with surface charge
Surface
density (charge per unit area) . We have to find the electric
field E at a point P in front of the sheet.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 25
Q Q
According to Gauss law, E .ds
or E 4r 2
0 + + +
+Q
0
+ + + +
Electric field at P (Outside sphere) + + +
+ R ++ P
+ + + +
1 Q R 2 + +
E out . + + + + +
and + +
4 0 r 2 0 r 2 + +
+ + +
r
1 Q R 2
Vout E.dr .
40 r 0 r 3.4.1 Outside the sphere at P (r R)
Q Q
Q A
Note :
According to Gauss law E .ds
or E 4r 2 0
4R
2 0
1 Q r
1 Q
3.3.2 At the surface of sphere E out . 2 and Vout E.dr .
40 r
4 0 r
At surface r = R
1 Q 1 Q R Q
So, E s . and Vs . using
40 R 2 0 40 R 0 4 3
R
3
3.3.3 Inside the sphere
Inside the conducting charged sphere electric field is zero R 3 R 3
E out and Vout V() 0
and potential remains constant every where and equals to 3 0 r 2 3 0 r
the potential at the surface.
3.4.2 At the surface of sphere
Q At surface r = R
Ein = 0 and Vin = constant = Vs
4 0 R
1 Q R 1 Q R 2
Graphical variation of electric field and potential with Es . 2 and Vs .
40 R 30 4 0 R 30
distance
3.4.3 Inside the sphere
E – r graph V – r graph
At a distance r from the centre. (r R)
R R q in Qr 3 Qr 3
O O
E in .ds or E 4 r 2
0 0 R 3 in
0 R 3
E Vs
1 Qr r
E in . Ein r and
E in = 0 40 R 3 30
O r O r
r=R
3.4 Uniform Spherical Volume Charge Distribution
r
Vin E.dr
1 Q 3R r 3R r
2 2
2 2
R
4 0 2R 3 6 0
We consider a spherical uniformly charge distribution of
radius R in which total charge Q is uniformly distributed
+ +
throughout the volume. + + R+ +
+ + +
+ ++
The charge density + r +
+ + +
+ +
total ch arg e Q 3Q + + + +
+ +
total volume 4 R 3 4R 3 + + ++
3
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 26
Note :-
Gaussian surface
3 1 Q 3
At centre (r = 0). Vcentre . Vs
2 40 R 2
Q
i.e., Vcentre > Vsurface > Vout
Conductor
Graphical variation of electric field and potential with
distance
Q en
E – r graph V – r graph E.dA
0
E 0 Qen 0
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + R + + +
R Charge cannot remain inside so it comes outside dotted
+O + +O +
+ + + +
+ +
+ + + +
+ + surface.
+ + + + + +
E Vc
Vs + + + +
Q
+
+
O
r=R
r O
r=R
r + +
+
+ +
4. ELECTROSTATIC OF CONDUCTORS + + + ++
4. 1 Properties of Conductors
4. Electrostatic potential is constant throughout the volume
1. Inside a conductor, electrostatic field is zero of the conductor and has the same value (as inside) on its
surface
Consider a conductor, neutral or charged. There may also
be an external electrostatic field. In the static situation the This follows from results 1 and 2 above. Since E = 0 inside
electric field is zero everywhere inside the conductor. As the conductor and has no tangential component on the
long as electric field is not zero, the free charge carriers surface, no work is done in moving a small test charge within
would experience force and drift. In the static situation, the the conductor and on its surface. That is, there is no potential
free charges have so distributed themselves that the electric difference between any two points inside or on the surface
field is zero everywhere inside. Electrostatic field is zero of the conductor. Hence, the result. If the conductor is
inside a conductor. charged, electric field normal to the surface exists ; this means
potential will be different for the surface and a point just
2. At the surface of a charged conductor, electrostatic field
outside the surface.
must be normal to the surface at every point
In a system of conductors of arbitrary size, shape and charge
If E were not normal to the surface, it would have some non-
configuration, each conductor is characterised by a constant
zero component along the surface. Free charges on the
value of potential, but this constant may differ from one
surface of the conductor would then experience force and
conductor to the other.
move. In the static situation, therefore, E should have no
tangential component. Thus electrostatic field at the surface 5. Electric field at the surface of a charged conductor
of a charged conductor must be normal to the surface at
every point. (For a conductor without any surface charge
density, field is zero even at the surface). E n̂
0
3. The charge kept in the material of a conductor will come to
its outermost surface. where is the surface charge density and n̂ is a unit vector
normal to the surface in the outward direction.
We know electric field at all points inside the material of a
conductor is zero. This means ‘E’ at all points on the For > 0,electric field is normal to the surface outward ; for
Gaussian surface is zero. < 0, electric field is normal to the surface inward.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 27
2
4.3 Cases of Earthing a Conductor
0
+++ +
+ 1
+ +
Conductor
+ 0 r1
+ +
+ Q1
+
+ + + Q2
3 1. Firstly do charge distribution before earthing.
0 2. After charge distribution, assume some ‘x’ charge flown to
ground (after earthing).
4.2 Cases of Concentric Shells 3. Do re-distribution of charge.
Initially 4. Take a point on the conductor (which is earthed) & do net
potential of it equals 0. Calculate x.
+++ +++
+ + – – –+ + + + – – –+ +
+ –– – + + –– – +
+ –– + + r2 –– + + –– + + r2 –– +
+– + –+ +– + –+
+ –– ++ r + – +
+ – + + –– ++ r1 +
+ –
–+
+ – + + – + – + + –
r1 + –– ++ Q + – + + –– ++ Q + – P x
– –
b a + Q1 – ++ + Q1 – ++
1 1
+ +
r2 + + – – –+ + + + – – –+ +
+++ +++
Q1 Q1 + Q2 +(Q1 + Q2 – x)
Q2 kQ1 k Q1 k Q1 Q 2 x
VP 0 x = Q1 + Q2
r2 r2 r2
Final distribution
r2
+
+
r1
+ –+– + + + P
+ + +Q1
+
+
Q1 –Q1
+
+
++ ++
+ +
+ + + +
+
b a r1 + Charge is flown from outer surface because as long as Q1
+
+ remains on inner shell, ‘– Q1’ will be induced on inner shell.
+ +
+ + + + r2
+
+
– Q1
+ + + + +
+
r1
(Q 1 + Q2) r2 +Q1
Q1
–Q1
Q2
+Q1 + Q2
kQ1 k Q1 k Q1 Q 2 Net charge should be
Va conserved (isolated system)
r1 r2 r2 +++
+ + – – –+ +
+ –– – +
+ –– + + + + –– +
kQ1 k Q1 k Q1 Q 2 +– –+
+ +
+– –+
+ +
Vb – ++
+ – +
P+
+
r2 r2 r2 –
+ – (Q+ +– +x)+
+
+
+ 1 – +
+ + –(Q – x) – ++
1
(Refer Section 3.3) +++++
Q1 + Q2 – x
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 28
Final charges
k Q1 x k Q1 x k Q1 Q2 x
VP 0
r1 r2 r2
Q1 x Q1 x Q1 Q2 x r1 r2
0
r1 r2 r2
Q1 Q 2 x r
x Q1 Q 2 1 Q Q2
r1 r2 r1 r2 Final common potential = k 1 .
r1 r2
+++ +
Note :- + + + + – – – –+++
– – + –
+ + –– – +
As it can be seen not all charge on the surface flows to – + +– + +– –– +
+– + –
+
+– + + + + x – ++
ground. When the outermost conductor is earthed then r1 + + – + –
+ – + – +
r2 + P – R
the charge residing on the outermost surface of outer Q1 + – + Q1 +– + + – (Q – x)
+ –
– +
–
+ –(Q – x) – – +
1
conductor will flow to ground. + – Q1 +
Q2 + 1 +
(Q1 + Q2) + ++
Q2 + Q1
4.4 Connection of Charged conductors VP = VR
k Q1 x k Q1 x k Q1 Q 2
VP
Steps r1 r2 r2
1. Do charge distribution before connection.
k Q1 x k Q1 x k Q1 Q 2
2. Assume ‘x’ charge flows from one conductor to another. VR
r2 r2 r2
3. Do redistribution of charges. VP = VR
4. Equate net potential of conductor (1) equal to net potential
k Q1 x k Q1 x 1 1
of conductor (2). Q1 x 0
r1 r2 r1 r2
x = Q1
Q1 Q2 This indicates that all the charge on shell (1) will flow to
shell (2).
r1 r2
5. SELF ENERGY OF CHARGED SPHERE
Assumption : Distance between them is very large. Consider a uniformly charged sphere of radius R having
a total charge Q. The electric potential energy of this
sphere is equal to the work done in bringing the charges
+ + Q1 + + Q2 from infinity to assemble the sphere.
+ + + +
r1 r2
+ + + + 3Q 2
U
+ + + + + + 200 R
+++
+ + ++++
+ Q1 – x
+ + + Q2 + x + ++ +
+ + + + ++++ ++
r1 r2
+ x +
+ Q2
+ + P + + R U
80 R
k Q1 x k Q2 x
++
Q1r2 Q2 r1 ++ +
VP VR x +
+
+
+
r1 r2 r1 r2 + +
+
++ + ++
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 29
6. ENERGY DENSITY Q1 Q2
(Q1 – q) q x (Q2 – x)
The energy stored per unit volume around a point in an
U 1 (1) (2)
electric field is given by u e 0 E 2 . If in place
Volume 2
of vacuum some medium of dielectric constant K is present
1 Gaussian surface
then u e K0 E .
2
2
Since the field lines are parallel, the net flux through the
7. PLATE THEORY gaussian surface will be zero, surface (1) & (2) be inside
the material of the conductor.
7.1 Charged Conducting Plate Hence it can be said that net charge enclosed will be zero
Q r 2 which implies the charges appearing on the facing
Net Flux en (cylindrical Gaussian surface)
surfaces are equal & opposite to each other.
0 0
r 2 Q1 Q2
Er 2
0 (Q1 – q) +q –q (Q2 + q)
+ (1) (2)
(3) (4)
+ × ×
P R
Conductor + r
+ x E P Net electric field at any point ‘P’ or ‘R’ has to be zero.
+ (Enet)P = 0
There are 4 distributions, the net field at P should be zero.
E
0 Q q q
E P 1 1 E P 2
2 0 2A 0 2A0
Net electric field at point P, near a conducting surface,
having surface charge distribution ‘’ is given by [/0]. q Q2 q
E P 3 E P 4
2A0 2A0
7.2 Parallel Plate Theory
To find charge distribution on each surface of plates
E P 1 E P 3 E P 2 E P 4
Q1 Q2 Q1 q q q Q q
This shows 2
A A 2A0 2A0 2A 0 2A 0
Q1 Q 2
q so final distributions would be
(1) (2) 2
Conductor Conductor –
Two conducting plates having area ‘A’ (area is large as + + – +
compared to distance, so that field is uniform) and the + + – +
thickness of plates is small so that charge only appears on
+ + – +
parallel faces.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 30
Note :- Inside the conductor
When charged conducting plates are placed parallel to E = E1 – E2 = 0 or E1 = E2
each other, the two outermost surfaces get equal charges
and the facing surfaces get equal and opposite charges. Outside the conductor E E1 E 2 . Thus,
0
7.3 Force on a charged conductor E1 E 2
2 0
To find force on a charged conductor (due to repulsion of
To find force, imagine charged part XY (having charge
like charges) imagine a small part XY to be cut and just
dA placed in the cavity MN having field E2). Thus force
separated from the rest of the conductor MLN. The field in
the cavity due to the rest of the conductor is E2, while field 2
dF = (dA)E2 or dF dA . The force per unit area or
due to small part is E1. Then 2 0
dF 2
E2 electric pressure is P = . (Electrostatic pressure)
E1 dA 2 0
X E2 2
M
+ +
+ Y The force is always outwards as (+ ) is positive i.e.,
+
+
+ + +
+ + whether charged positively or negatively, this force will
N
+
+ E2 + +
+ + try to expand the charged body.
+ +
+
E1 +
+ +
L +
Inside +
+ + + A soap bubble or rubber balloon expands on given charge
E=0 +
+
+
+ +
+ +
to it (charge of any kind + or –).
(A) + +
(B)
CAPACITORS
C.G.S. unit is Stat Farad. 1F = 9× 1011 Stat Farad.
1. CAPACITANCE
Dimension : [C] = [M–1 L–2 T4A2].
1.1 Definition
2. CAPACITOR
We know that charge given to a conductor increases it’s potential
i.e., Q V Q = CV 2.1 Definition
Where C is a proportionality constant, called capacity or A capacitor is a device that stores electric energy. It is also
capacitance of conductor. Hence capacitance is the ability named condenser.
of conductor to hold the charge (and associated electrical
or
energy).
A capacitor is a pair of two conductors of any shape, which
1.2 Unit and dimensional formula are close to each other and have equal and opposite charge.
+Q –Q
Coulomb + –
S.I. unit is = Farad (F) –
Volt +
+ –
Smaller S.I. units are mF, F, nF and pF + –
+ –
1mF 10 3
F, 1F 106 F, 1nF 10 9 F, 1pF 10 12 F +
–
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 31
2.2 Symbol 2.5 Energy stored
The symbol of capacitor are shown below When a capacitor is charged by a voltage source (say
battery) it stores the electric energy.
or
U 1
Energy density = E2 .
2.3 Capacitance vol. 2 0
The capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the magnitude If C = Capacitance of capacitor; Q = Charge on
of the charge Q on the positive plate divided by the capacitor and V = Potential difference across capacitor
magnitude of the potential difference V between the plates 1 1 Q2
i.e., C = Q/V. then energy stored in capacitor U CV 2 QV .
2 2 2C
Note :-
Note : -
Capacitance of a capacitor is constant for the given
In charging capacitor by battery half the energy supplied
dimensions & medium.
is stored in the capacitor and remaining half energy (1/2
QV) is lost in the form of heat.
2.4 Charge on capacitor
Net charge on a capacitor is always zero, but when we speak 2.6 Types of capacitors
of the charge Q on a capacitor, we are referring to the
Capacitors are of mainly three types as described in given
magnitude of the charge on each plate.
table :
Parallel Plate Capacitor Spherical Capacitor Cylindrical Capacitor
It consists of two parallel metallic It consists of two concentric conducting It consists of two concentric cylinders
plates (may be circular, rectangular, spheres of radii a and b (a < b). Inner of radii a and b (a < b), inner cylinder is
square) separated by a small distance sphere is given charge +Q, while outer given charge +Q while outer cylinder is
sphere is given charge –Q [by battery] given charge –Q. Common length of the
cylinders is l then
A = area of plate
Q = Magnitude of charge
+Q –Q
+ –
+ –
– – – b a q–q
– –Q
+ air – + –
+ +
A – +Q –
+ –
– + + b–
–
+ – a +
– + –
+ – – + + + –
d –
–
–
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 32
0 A ab 20
Capacitance : C Capacitance C = 4 0 Capacitance C
d ba b
n
a
In the presence of dielectric In the presence of dielectric In the presence of dielectric
medium (dielectric constant K) medium (dielectric constant K) medium (dielectric constant K)
C
K0 A
C 4 0 K
ab 2 0 K
C
d ba b
ln
a
2.7 Capacity of an isolated spherical conductor Note:-
When charge Q is given to a spherical conductor of radius
R, then potential at the surface of sphere is
1 Q A
V .
40 R
d
+++++ Q
+
+++++
++
R
++++
O Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor depends
upon the effective overlapping area of plates
+
++
++ + +
Q C A , separation between the plates C 1/ d
Hence it’s capacity C 4 0 R
V and dielectric medium filled between the plates.
While it is independent of charge given, potential
1 raised or nature of metals and thickness of plates.
C 4 0 R .R
9 109 The distance between the plates is kept small to avoid
in C.G.S. C = R fringing or edge effect (non-uniformity of the field)
at the bounderies of the plates.
2.8 Force between the Plates of a Parallel Plate Capacitor
Field due to charge on one plate on the other is E ,
20
hence the force F = QE
Spherical conductor is equivalent to a spherical
capacitor with it’s outer sphere of infinite radius.
A spherical capacitor behaves as a parallel plate
capacitor if it’s spherical surfaces have large radii
and are close to each other.
The intensity of electric field between the plates of a
parallel plate capacitor (E = /0) does not depends
2 2 A Q2
F A A | F | upon the distance between them.
20 2 0 2 0 2 0 A
Radial and non-uniform electric field exists between
the spherical surfaces of spherical capacitor.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 33
3. GROUPING OF CAPACITORS
Series grouping Parallel grouping
(1) Charge on each capacitor remains same and equals (1) Potential difference across each capacitor remains
to the main charge supplied by the battery same and equal to the applied potential difference
+Q1 – Q1
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
C1 C2 C3 Q1
+Q –Q +Q –Q +Q –Q +Q2 – Q2
+ – + – + – + –
+ – + – + – + –
+ – + – + – + –
Q + – + – + – Q2 + –
V = V1 + V2 + V3 V1 V2 V3 Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 Q Q3 +Q3 – Q3
+ –
+ –
+ – + –
+ –
V
V
1 1 1 1
(2) Equivalent capacitance (2) Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3
Ceq C1 C 2 C3
(3) If two capacitors having capacitances C1 and C2 are (3) If two capacitors having capacitance C1 and C2
connected in series then respectively are connected in parallel then
C2 C1 C1 C2
V1 .V and V2 .V Q1 .Q and Q 2 .Q
C1 C2 C1 C 2 C1 C2 C1 C 2
(4) If n identical capacitors each having capacitances C (4) If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel
are connected in series with supply voltage V then Equivalent capacitance Ceq = nC and Charge on each
C Q
Equivalent capacitance Ceq and Potential capacitor Q .
n n
V
difference across each capacitor V .
n
Note :- Note :-
Two capacitors are in series when charge leaving Two capacitors are in parallel when their positive
one capacitor directly enters into another capacitor, plates are connected and negative plates are also
undivided and undisturbed. connected with each other.
In series combination equivalent capacitance is always In parallel combination, equivalent capacitance is
lesser than that of either of the individual capacitors. always greater than the individual capacitance.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 34
3.1 Simple Circuits (Series & parallel)
Suppose equivalent capacitance is to be determined in the following networks between points A and B
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 35
4. DIELECTRIC 1 1
Ei E1 i 1
k k
Dielectrics are insulating (non-conducting) materials which
transmits electric effect without conducting. We know that 4.3 Dielectric breakdown and dielectric strength
in every atom, there is a positively charged nucleus and a
negatively charged electron cloud surrounding it. The two If a very high electric field is created in a dielectric, the outer
electrons may get detached from their parent atoms. The
oppositely charged regions have their own centres of charge.
dielectric then behaves like a conductor. This phenomenon
The centre of positive charge is the centre of mass of is known as dielectric breakdown.
positively charged protons in the nucleus. The centre of
negative charge is the centre of mass of negatively charged The maximum value of electric field (or potential gradient)
that a dielectric material can tolerate without it’s electric
electrons in the atoms/molecules.
breakdown is called it’s dielectric strength.
4.1 Polarization of a dielectric slab S.I. unit of dielectric strength of a material is V/m but practical
unit is kV/mm.
It is the process of inducing equal and opposite charges on
the two faces of the dielectric on the application of electric 4.4 Variation of Different Variables (Q, C, V, E and U)
field. of Parallel Plate Capacitor
Suppose we have an air filled charged parallel plate capacitor
having variables as follows :
Charge : Q,
Q
Surface charge density : ,
A
0 A
Capacitance : C
d
Suppose a dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of a
capacitor. As shown in the figure.
Induced electric field inside the dielectric is Ei, hence this
induced electric field decreases the main field E to E – Ei i.e.,
New electric field between the plates will be Enet = E – Ei.
4.2 Dielectric constant
After placing a dielectric slab in an electric field. The net
field is decreased in that region hence
If E = Original electric field and Enet = Net electric field. Then Potential difference across the plates : V = E . d
E Q
K where K is called dielectric constant K is also Electric field between the plates : E
E net 0 A0
known as relative permittivity ( r ) of the material.
1 Q2 1
The value of K is always greater than one. For vacuum there Energy stored : U CV 2 QV
2 2C 2
is no polarization and hence E = E’ and K = 1
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 36
Quantity Battery is Removed Battery Remains connected
Capacity C’ = KC C’ = KC
Charge Q’ = Q (Charge is conserved) Q’ = KQ
Potential V’ = V/K V’ = V (Since Battery maintains
the potential difference)
Intensity E ’ = E/K E’=E
Energy U ’ = U/K U ’ = KU
Note : - (ii) the property that charge given to a hollow conductor
If nothing is said it is to be assumed that battery is transferred to outer surface and is distributed
is disconnected.
uniformly over it.
5. VAN DE GRAFF ELECTROSTATIC GENERATOR Construction : The essential parts of Van de graff generator
are shown in fig. S is large spherical conducting shell of
A van de graff generator is a device used for building up radius equal to a few meters. This is supported by a
high potential differences of the order of a few million conducting shell of radius equal to a few metres. This is
volts. Such high potential differences are used to accelerate supported at a suitable height (of several metres above
charged particles like electrons, protons, ions etc. needed the ground) over the insulating pillars p1, p2. A long narrow
for various experiments of Nuclear Physics.
belt of insulating material like, silk, rubber or rayon is
It was desighned by Van de graff in the year 1931. wrapped around two pulleys P1 and P2. P1 is at the ground
level and P2 is at the centre of S. The belt is kept moving
Principle : This generator is based on
continuously over the pulleys with the help of a motor
(not shown). B1 and B2 are two sharply pointed metal
(i) the action of sharp points, i.e., the phenomenon of
corona discharge. combs fixed as shown. B1 is called the spray comb and B2
is called the collecting comb.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 37
Now, the capacity of spherical shell c = 4 0 R, where R is
radius of the shell.
Q Q
As V V 4 R
C 0
Hence the potential V of the spherical shell goes on
increasing with increase in Q.
6
The breakdown field of air is about 3 × 10 V/m. The
moment the potential of spherical shell exceeds this value,
air around S is ionised and leakage of charge starts. The
leakage is minimised by housing the generator assembly
The positive ions to be accelerated are produced in a
inside a steel chamber filled with nitrogen or methane at
discharge tube D. The ion source lies at the head of the
high pressures.
tube inside the spherical shell. The other end of the tube
carrying the target nucleus is earthed. If q is the charge on the ion to be accelerated and V is the
potential difference developed across the ends of the
The generator is enclosed in a steel chamber C filled with
discharge tube, then energy acquired by the ions = qV.
nitrogen or methane at high pressure in order to minimise
The ions hit the target with this energy and carry out the
leakage in a steel spherical conductor.
artificial transmutation etc.
Working : The spray comb is given a positive potential
4
6. COMBINATION OF DROPS
( 10 volt) w.r.t. the earth by high tension source H.T. Due
to discharging action of sharp points, a positively charged Suppose we have n identical drops each having – Radius
electric wind is set up, which sprays positive charge on – r, Capacitance – c, Charge – q, Potential – v and Energy – u.
the belt (corona discharge). As the belt moves, and reaches If these drops are combined to form a big drop of –
the comb., a negative charge is induced on the sharp ends Radius – R, Capacitance – C, Charge – Q, Potential – V
of collecting comb B2 and an equal positive charge is and Energy – U then –
induced on the farther end of B2. This positive charge
(i) Charge on big drop :
shifts immediately to the outer surface of S. Due to
discharging action of sharp points of B2, a negatively Q = nq
charged electric wind is set up. This neutralises the positive (ii) Radius of big drop : Volume of big drop = n volume of a
charge on the belt. The uncharged belt returns down, single drop i.e.,
collects the positive charge from B1, which in turn is
collected by B2. This is repeated. Thus, the postive charge 4 4
R 3 n r 3 , R n1/ 3 r
3 3
on S goes on accumulating.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 38
(iii) Capacitance of big drop : Step 3 :
Write the charges appearing on each of the plates of the
C = n1/3c capacitors. The charge conservation principle may be used.
The facing surfaces of a capacitor will always have equal
(iv) Potential of big drop :
and opposite charges. Assume variables Q1, Q2 ..... etc. for
charges wherever needed. Mark the polarity across each
Q nq circuit element corresponding to higher (+) & lower (–)
V
C n1/ 3 c potential ends.
Step 4 :
V n 2 / 3 The algebraic sum of all the potential differences along a
closed loop in a circuit is zero.
While using this rule, one starts from a point on the loop
Energy of big drop : U 1 CV 2 1 n1/ 3 c n 2 / 3
2
(v) and goes along the loop, either clockwise or anticlockwise,
2 2
to reach the same point again. Any potential difference
encountered (from –ve to +ve) is taken to be positive and
U n5 / 3 u any potential drop (from +ve to –ve) is taken to be negative.
The net sum of all these potential differences should be
Note :- zero.
The loop law follows directly from the fact that electrostatic
It is a very common misconception that a capacitor force is a conservative force and the work done by it in
stores charge but actually a capacitor stores electric any closed path is zero.
energy in the electrostatic field between the plates.
Step 5 :
Two plates of unequal area can also form a capacitor
Number of variables Q1, Q2, etc. must be the same as the
but effective overlapping area is considered. number of equations obtained (loop equation). The
Q
equivalent capacitance Ceq , where V is the potential
7. CHARGE DISTRIBUTION METHOD V
difference across the assumed battery terminals.
(Circuit Solving method)
Sometimes it may not be easy to find the equivalent 8. WHEATSTONE BRIDGE BASED CIRCUIT
capacitance of a combination using the equations for
series-parallel combinations. We may then use the general If in a network five capacitors are arranged as shown in
method as follows : following figure, the network is called wheatstone bridge
Step 1 : C1 C3
type circuit. If it is balanced then hence C5 is
C 2 C4
Identify the two points between which the equivalent removed and equivalent capacitance between A and B
capacitance is to be calculated. Call any one of them as A
and the other as B. (i)
Step 2 :
Connect (mentally) a battery between A and B with the
positive terminal connected to A and the negative terminal
to B. Send a charge +Q from the positive terminal of the
battery and –Q from the negative terminal of the battery.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 39
(ii) 10. INFINITE NETWORK OF CAPACITORS
(i) Suppose the effective capacitance between A and B is CR.
Since the network is infinite, even if we remove one pair of
capacitors from the chain, remaining network would still have
infinite pair of capacitors, i.e., effective capacitance between
X and Y would also be CR
(iii)
C1C2 CC
CAB 3 4
C1 C2 C3 C 4
9. EXTENDED WHEATSTONE BRIDGE
The given figure consists of two wheatstone bridge connected
together. One bridge is connected between points AEGHFA
and the other is connected between points EGBHFE.
This problem is known as extended wheatstone bridge problem, Hence equivalent capacitance between A and B
it has two branches EF and GH to the left and right of which
C1 C2 C R
symmetry in the ratio of capacities can be seen. C AB CR
C1 C 2 CR
It can be seen that ratio of capacitances in branches AE
and EG is same as that between the capacitances of the C2 C
CAB 1 4 1 1
branches AF and FH. Thus, in the bridge AEGHFA; the 2 C2
branch EF can be removed. Similarly in the bridge EGBHFE
branch GH can be removed (ii) For what value of C0 in the circuit shown below will the net
effective capacitance between A and B be independent of
the number of sections in the chain?
2C
C AB
3
Suppose there are n sections between A and B and the
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 40
network is terminated by C0 with equivalent capacitance
C1 C2 C0
CR. Now if we add one more sections to the network Hence C0 C02 C2 C0 C1C2 0
between D and C (as shown in the following figure), the C1 C2 C0
equivalent capacitance of the network C R will be
independent of number of sections if the capacitance C2 C
On simplification C0 1 4 1 1
between D and C still remains C0 i.e., 2 C2
11. CIRCUITS WITH EXTRA WIRE (PLATE NUMBERING METHOD)
If there is no capacitor in any branch of a network then every point of this branch will be at same potential. Suppose equivalent
capacitance is to be determine in following cases
A A C
C C C C B C C 56
(i) B C
A B
A B A A 12 34 A 5 6 B 43
C
B B 12
+ –
CAB = 3C
A 3 4 3 4
A B
C C C
(ii) C C
1
2
A B A B A B
C C C
A B
A 5 6 5 6
No p.d. across vertical branch so it is removed
CAB = 2C
C C
A B
1 2
C
C C 12
C
(iii) 4 A B
A B A 3 B 34
C
56
C A C
B + –
5 6
CAB = 3C
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 41
C C C C
A B
1 2 5
C
6 2 3 5
1 C 4 C 6
3 C
C C
A A 4
B Parallel
(iv) B A 7 8 B
C 7 8
A B C + C =2 C –
+
A C
Hence equivalent capacitance between A and B is 5C/3.
Series Parallel
2C/3
C
2C 2C 5C
+C=
2C × C 2C 3 3
=
C 2C + C 3 C
A B
A B
+ –
+ –
(v) Since there is no capacitor in the path APB, the points A, P and B are electrically same i.e., the input and output points are
directly connected (short circuited).
C C
A B
C
P
Thus, entire charge will prefer to flow along path APB. It means that the capacitors connected in the circuit will not receive any
charge for storing. Thus equivalent capacitance of this circuit is zero.
12. USING SYMMETRY BETWEEN TWO POINTS
1. Symmetry is always defined between 2 points.
2. Equivalent (symmetric) paths have same number, value
and order of circuit elements along it.
3. When two or more paths in any network are equivalent,
then charges flowing through those paths will be same.
This technique makes the circuit easy to comprehend.
Between A & B, paths (1) & (3) are symmetric q1 = q3
(ii)
(i)
Paths (1) & (3) are symmetric between A & B thus equal
charge will flow in them.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 42
4. If the combination of elements in the network is symmetric w.r.t. battery ends, then the distribution of charge at one end will be
same as is on the other end.
13. BATTERY SUPERPOSITION METHOD Combined effect
In a circuit involving multiple batteries, the charge flowing
will be the superposition effect of each battery.
Note : -
Effect of 10V battery When more than 2 batteries are present, take individual
effect of battery, assuming other batteries absent. And
then superimpose to get total effect.
14. Series and Parallel (with dielectrics)
14.1 When dielectric is partially filled between the plates
Effect of 5V battery If a dielectric slab of thickness t (t < d) is inserted between
the plates as shown below, then E = Main electric field
between the plates, Ei= Induced electric field in dielectric.
E’ = (E – Ei) = The reduced value of electric field in the
dielectric. Potential difference between the two plates of
capacitor is given by
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 43
0 A
C
t
d
E
V E d t E t E d t .t
K
C ' (In this case capacitor is said to be short circuited)
t t Q t
V E d t d t d t
K K A K 14.3 Advance case of compound dielectrics
0 0
Now capacitance of the capacitor If several dielectric medium filled between the plates of a
parallel plate capacitor in different ways as shown.
Q 0 A (i) The system can be assumed to be made up of two capacitors
C C
V dt
t C1 and C2 which may be said to connected in series
K
K 1 0 A K A 1 1 1
0 A C1 , C 2 2 0 and
C d d Ceq C1 C 2
t t t
d t1 t 2 t 3 ...... 1 2 3 ...... 2 2
K
1 K 2 K 3
2K1K 2 0 A 2K1 K 2
Ceq . Also K eq
K1 K 2 d K 1 K2
(ii) In this case these two capacitors are in parallel and
0 A
C
t1 t t t
2 3 4
K
1 K 2 K 3 K 4
14.2 When a metallic slab is inserted between the plates K 1 0 A K A
C1 , C2 2 0
2d 2d
K K2 0 A
Hence, Ceq = C1 + C2 Ceq 1 . d
2
Capacitance K1 K 2
Also K eq
2
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 44
(iii) In this case C1 and C2 are in series while this combination A
K 3 0
is in parallel with C3
and C3 2 K 30 A
d 2d
K1 0 A K 2 0 A
Hence, C eq
C1C 2
C3 d d k 30 A
C1 C 2 k1 0 A k 2 0 A 2d
d d
kk k A
Ceq 1 2 3 . 0
k1 k 2 2 d
A A k kk
K1 0 K1 0 Also k eq 3 1 2
K A
2 2 0 , C 2 K 20 A 2 k1 k 2
C1 2
d d d d
2 2
15. WHEN SEPARATION BETWEEN THE PLATES IS CHANGING
1
If separation between the plates changes then it’s capacitance also changes according to C . The effect on other variables
d
depends on the fact that whether the charged capacitor is disconnected from the battery or battery is still connected.
15.1 Separation is increasing
Quantity Battery is removed Battery remains connected
1
Capacity Decreases because C i.e., C’ < C Decreases i.e., C’ < C
d
Charge Remains constant because a battery Decreases because battery is present i.e., Q’ < Q
is not present i.e., Q’ = Q Remaining charge (Q – Q’) goes back to the
battery.
Potential difference Increases because V Q V 1 i.e., V V V’ = V (Since Battery maintains the potential
C C
difference)
Q Q
Electric field Remains constant because E i.e., E’ = E Decrease because E E Q i.e., E’ < E
0 A0 A0
2
1
Energy Increases because U Q U 1 i.e., U’ > U Decreases because U CV2 U C i.e., U’ < U
2C C 2
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 45
15.2 Separation is decreasing
Quantity Battery is removed Battery remains connected
Capacity Increases because C 1 i.e., C ' C Increases i.e., C’ > C
d
Charge Remains constant because battery is Increases because battery is present i.e., Q’ > Q
not present i.e., Q’ = Q Remaining charge (Q’ – Q) supplied from the
battery.
Q 1
Potential difference Decreases because V V i.e., V’ < V V’ = V (Since Battery maintains the potential
C C
difference)
Q
Electric field Remains constant because E i.e., E’ = E Increases because E Q E Q i.e., E’ > E
0 A0 A0
Q2 1 1
Energy Decreases because U U i.e. U’ < U Increases because U CV 2 U C i.e., U’ > U
2C C 2
16. FORCE ON DIELECTRIC Note : -
When dielectric is placed near the charged capacitor Force doesn’t depend on the amount of dielectric
(rectangular plates), it experiences force towards the inside the plates.
capacitor, due to fringing field just outside the plates.
Force becomes zero when Dielectric is in middle
of plates.
(b) Battery disconnected (Q remains same)
(a) Battery connected (V remains same)
Q 2 d K 1
F
2 0 b x K 1
2
Note : -
Force depends on x (amount of dielectric inside
the capacitor plates).
1 0 bV K 1
2
F (towards capacitor)
2 d
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 46
Charge on capacitors redistributed and new charge on
17. REDISTRIBUTION OF CHARGE BETWEEN
C1 C2
TWO CAPACITORS them will be Q '1 Q , Q '2 Q
C1 C2 C1 C2
When a charged capacitor is connected across an
uncharged capacitor, then redistribution of charge occur Q1 Q 2 C1V1 C 2 V2
The common potential V and loss
to equalize the potential difference across each capacitor. C1 C2 C1 C 2
Some energy is also wasted in the form of heat. C1C 2
of energy U V1 V2 2
Suppose we have two charged capacitors C1 and C2 after 2 C1 C 2
disconnecting these two from their respective batteries.
These two capacitors are connected to each other as shown Note : -
below (positive plate of one capacitor is connected to
positive plate of other while negative plate of one is Two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are charged to
connected to negative plate of other) potential of V1 and V2 respectively. After disconnecting
from batteries they are again connected to each other
with reverse polarity i.e., positive plate of a capacitor
connected to negative plate of other. So common
Q1 Q2 C1V1 C2 V2
potential V .
C1 C2 C1 C2
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 47
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
kQ 2 2 kQ 2
(a) (b)
a2 a2
A particle of mass m and charge (–q) enters the region
between the two charged plates initially, moving along
2 kQ 2 3 kQ2
X-axis with speed Vx as shown in fig. The length of (c) 2 (d)
a a2
each plate is L and an uniform electric field E is
maintained between the plates. Show that the vertical Sol. (d)
deflection of the particle at the far edge of the plate is
Suppose net force is to be calculated on the charge which
qEL2 is kept at A. Two charges kept at B and C are applying force
. on that particular charge, with direction as shown in the
2mv x2
figure.
Sol. Force on particle towards upper plate B, Fy = qE vertical
qE
acceleration of particle, a y
m
Initial vertical velocity voy = 0
Speed of particle along X-axis = vx (constant) Q2
Since Fb Fc F k
a2
L
Time taken by particle between the plates, t
vx
So, Fnet FB2 FC2 2 FB FC cos 60
1 2
From relation s= ut + at , vertical deflection
2 3 kQ 2
Fnet 3 F
a2
2
1 1 qE L qEL2
y 0 a yt2 0 y Example - 3
2 2 m v x 2mv 2x
A spherical conducting shell of inner radius r1, and outer
Example - 2 radius r2 has a charge ‘Q’. A charge ‘q’ is placed at the
centre of the shell.
Three equal charges each +Q, placed at the (a) What is the surface charge density on the
corners of an equilateral triangle of side a. What
(i) inner surface (ii) outer surface of the shell ?
1
will be the force on any charge k (b) Write expression for the electric field at a point
4 0 x > r2 from the centre of the shell.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 48
Sol. (a) Charge Q resides on outer surface of spherical Sol. A dipole has two equal and opposite charges with dipole
conducting shell. Due to charge q placed at centre,
moment p q 2l , directed from – q to + q.
charge induced on inner surface is –q and on outer
surface it is +q. So, total charge on inner surface –q Given qA = 2.5 × 10–7 C, qB = – 2.5 × 10–7 C
and on outer surface it is Q + q.
2l = AB = 30 cm = 0.30 m
Electric dipole moment
p q.2l , directed from – q to + q.
= (2.5 × 10–7 C) (0.30 m)
= 7.5 × 10–8 Cm along BA
= 7.5 × 10–8 Cm directed along negative z-axis.
Example - 5
A cube of side b has a charge q at each of its vertices.
Determine the potential and electric field due to this
q charge-array at the centre of the cube.
Surface charge density on inner surface =
4r12
Sol. O is the centre of cube ABCDEFGH. Charge q is placed at
Qq each of eight corners of the cube.
Surface charge density on outer surface
4r22 Electric Potential :
(b) For external points, whole charge acts at centre, so
electric field at distance x > r2. E ( x ) 1 Qq .
4 0 x 2
Example - 4
A system has two charges q A = 2.5 × 10 –7 C and
qB = – 2.5 × 10–7 C located at points A = (0, 0, – 15 cm)
and B = (0, 0, + 15 cm) respectively. What are the total
charge and electric dipole moment of the system?
Side of cube = b
Length of each diagonal = b 2 b 2 b 2 3b
Distance of each corner from centre O.
3b
= half the diagonal = .
2
Potential at O due to charge at each corner
1 q
= 4 ( 3 b / 2)
0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 49
1 2q
4 0 3 b
Net potential at O due to all 8 charges at corners of
the cube
1 2q 1 16q
V 8 .
4 0 3 b 4 0 3 b
Electric Field : The electric field at O due to charges at all
corners of the cube is zero, since, electric fields due to
charges at opposite corners such as A and H,G and D, B
and E, F and C are equal and opposite. By proper calculations
Example - 6
106
| EA | 9 109 2 = 0.72 × 107 N/C
Four charges are placed on corners of a square as shown 5
in figure having side of 5 cm. If Q is one micro coulomb, 102
2
then electric field intensity at centre will be
2 10 6
| E B | 9 109 2
1.44 10 7 N / C ;
5
10 2
2
2 10 6
| E C | 9 109 2
1.44 10 7 N / C
5
10 2
2
(a) 1.02 × 107 N/C upwards
(b) 2.04 × 107 N/C downwards
(c) 2.04 × 107 N/C upwards 10 6
| E D | 9 10 9 2
0.72 10 7 N / C ;
5
(d) 1.02 × 107 N/C downwards 10 2
2
Sol : (a)
|EC| > |EA| so resultant of EC & EA is ECA = EC – EAdirected So, |ECA| = |EC| – | EA| = 0.72 × 107 N/C and |EBD| = |EB| – |ED|
toward Q
= 0.72 × 107 N/C.
Also |EB| > |ED| so resultant of EB and ED i.e.
Hence from equation – (i)
EBD = EB – ED directed toward –2Q charge
E = 1.02 × 107 N/C upwards.
hence Net electric field at centre is
E E CA 2 E BD 2 ...(i)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 50
Example - 7
1 q 3 q 2 q 3 q 1 q 2 q1 1
mv
2
Two point char ges q1 = q 2 = 2C are fixed at 40 (r32 )f (r31 )f (r21 )f 2
x1 = + 3m and x2 = – 3m as shown in figure. A third particle
of mass 1 g and charge q3 = – 4C are released from rest Here, (r21)i = (r21)f. Substituting the proper values, we have
at y = 4.0 m. All these charge are on a frictionless plane.
Find the speed of the particle as it reaches the origin.
( 4)(2) ( 4)(2)
(9.0 109 ) 10 (9.0 10 )
12 9
(5.0) (5.0)
(4) (2) (4) (2) 1
10 10 v
12 3 2
(3.0) (3.0) 2
3 16 3 16 1
(9 10 ) (9 10 ) 10 v
3 2
5 3 2
2 1
(9 103 ) (16) 103 v 2
Sol. How to proceed : Here, the charge q3 is attracted towards 15 2
q1 and q2 both. So, the net force on q3 is towards origin.
v = 6.2 m/s
Example - 8
In x-y co-ordinate system if potential at a point
P (x, y) is given by V = axy; where a is a constant, if r is
the distance of point P from origin then electric field at P
is proportional to
(a) r (b) r–1
(c) r—2 (d) r2
Sol. : (a)
By this force charge is accelerated towards origin, but
this accleration is not constant. So, to obtain the speed dV dV
By using E , Ex ay ,
of particle at origin by kinematics we will have to first dr dx
find the acceleration at same intermediate position and
then will have to integrate in with proper limits. On the
other hand it is easy to use energy conservation principle dV
Ey ax
as the only forces are conservative. dy
Let v be the speed of particle at origin. From conservation
of mechanical energy, Ui + Ki = Uf + Kf or
Electric field at point P, E E2x E2y a x 2 y2 ar
1 q 3q 2 q 3q 1 q 2 q1
0
4 0 (r32 )i (r31 )i (r21 )i i.e., E r
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 51
Example - 9 Example - 10
A point particle of mass M is attached to one end of a A point charge Q is placed outside a hollow spherical
conductor of radius R, at a distance (r > R) from its
massless rigid non-conducting rod of length L. Another centre C. The field at C due to the induced charges on
point particle of the same mass is attached to other end
1
of the rod. The two particles carry charges +q and – q the conductor is k 4
respectively. This arrangement is held in a region of a 0
uniform electric field E such that the rod makes a small (a) Zero
angle (say of about 5 degrees) with the field direction
(see figure). What will be the minimum time, needed for the Q
(b) k
r R
2
rod to become parallel to the field after it is set free
Q
(c) k directed towards Q
r2
Q
(d) k directed away from Q
r2
Sol. (c)
A according to the figure show below. The total field at C
mL mL must be zero. The field at C due to the point charge is E =
(a) t 2 (b) t
2 pE 2 2 qE
Q
k towards left. The field at C due to the induced charges
r2
3 mL 2mL
(c) t (d) t kQ
2 2 pE pE must be towards right i.e. directed towards Q.
r2
Sol. : (b)
In the given situation system oscillate in electric field with
maximum angular displacement . It’s time period of
oscillation (similar to dipole)
I
T 2 where I = moment of inertia of the system
pE
and p qL
Hence the minimum time needed for the rod becomes parallel
Example-11
T I A long thin rod lies along the x-axis with one end at the
to the field is t
4 2 pE origin. It has a uniform charge density C/m. Assuming
it to infinite in length, the electric field at point x = – a
on the x-axis will
2 2
L L ML2
Here I M M
2 2 2 (a) a (b) 2 a
0 0
2
ML2 ML (c) 4 a (d) a
t 0 0
2 2 qL E 2 2qE
Ans. (d)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 52
Sol.
For infinite length
Electric field at a point along axis
4 0 r
r=a
E
4 0 a
Q Q
(a) tan1 (b) cot 1
Example - 12 0 mg 2 0 mg
Two infinite plane parallel sheets separated by a distance Q Q
(c) tan1 (d) cot 1
d have equal and opposite uniform charge densities . 2 0 mg 0 mg
Electric field at a point between the sheets is
Ans. (c)
Sol.
(a) Zero (b)
0
2
(c) 2 (d)
0 0
Ans. (b)
Sol.
At equilibrium of Pendulum
Electric field at point between the sheets
T sin = Fe
= EI – EII
T cos = mg
E1 Fe QE
2 0 tan
mg mg
EII Q
2 0 tan
2 0 mg
Q
2 0 2 0 0 tan 1
0 mg
2
Example-13
Example - 14
An infinite plane with uniformly distributed positive
charge has surface charge density . A small metallic A solid sphere of radius R has a uniform distribution of
sphere S of mass m and charge +Q is attached to a thread electric charge in its volume. At a distance x from its centre
and tied to a point P on the sheet AB. The angle which PS for x < R, the electric field is directly proportional to
2
makes with the plane AB is given by (a) 1/x (b) 1/x
2
(c) x (d) x
Ans. (c)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 53
Sol. Example - 16
Depict the equipotential surfaces for a system of two
identical positive point charges placed a distance ‘d’ apart.
Sol. Equipotential surfaces due to two identical charges is
shown in fig.
Q
Inside the solid sphere E k . .x
R3
Ex
Q 4 Example - 17
Q' x3
4
R 3
3
An electrostatic field line cannot be discountinous,
3
why ?
Q
Q' .x 3
R3 Sol. Electrostatic field line originates from positive charge and
Q' Q terminates on negative charge i.e., it cannot abruptly start
E k. k. x or end in the space so electric field line is always continuous
x2 R3
(directed from higher to lower potential).
Example - 15
Example - 18
Two very long line charges of uniform charge density
and – are placed along same line with the separation Find the electrostatic potential at equatorial point of an
between the nearest ends being 2a as shown in figure electric dipole.
.The electric field intensity at the point O is
Sol. Let P be a point on the equator of an electric dipole formed
of charges –q and +q at separation 2a.
The distance of point P from centre of dipole = r
AP = BP = er2 a 2
(a) a (b) 4 a
1 q q
Electrostatics potential at P, VP 4 BP AP
(c) 3 a (d) 8 a 0
Ans. (a)
Sol.
E1 = E 2 = ; Net - electric field at 0
4 0 a
= E1 E 2 2 =
4 0 a 2 0 a
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 54
Example - 20
1 q q
VP 4 2 2 2 2 0
0 r a r a (i) Two point charges 4Q and Q are separated by a
distance 1 m in air. At what point on the line joining
Thus, electrostatic potential at each equatorial point of an the charges is the electric field intensity zero ?
electric dipole is zero.
(ii) Also calculate the electrostatic potential energy of
Example - 19 the charges if Q = 2 × 10–7 C.
A regular hexagon of side 0.10 m has a charge 5 C at
each of its vertices. Calculate the potential at the centre Sol. (i) Let x be the distance of point P from charge 4Q where
of the hexagon. electric field intensity is zero, then
Sol. The potential due to similar charges is additive.
E E1 E 2 0
Let O be the centre of the hexagon.
As E1 and E2 are oppositely directed.
In magnitude,
1 4Q 1 Q 4 1
4 x 2 4 (1 x ) 2 x 2 (1 x ) 2
0 0
x2 = 4(1 – x)2 x = 2 (1 – x)
If we take (+) sign x = 2 (1 – x).
In triangle OAB, all angles are 60º, so 2
This gives x m = 66.7 cm
3
OA = OB = AB = a
If we take (–) sign, x = – 2(1 – x) x = 2 m, Which is not
So, in a regular hexagon distance of each corner from centre
is equal to the side of the cube possible since the charges are having same sign, the
point must lie between the two charges. Hence the
r = OA = OB = OC = OD = OE = OF = a = 0.10 m
answer will be only 66.7cm.
1 q (ii) Electrostatic potential energy,
The net potential at O, V = 6 .
4 0 a
1 (4Q)(Q) 1 4Q 2
U
Here q = 5C = 5 × 10–6 C, a = 0.10 m 4 0 r 4 0 r
106
V = 6 × 9 × 109 × 5 × = 2.7 × 106 volt 4 (2 107 )2
0.10 9
= 9 × 10 × = 1.44 × 10–3 J
(1)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 55
Example - 21 10 108 4 10 8
0
x x 0.70
Two point charges 10 × 10–8 C and – 4 × 10– 8 C are
10 4
separated by a distance of 70 cm in air as shown in
figure. x x 0.70
7
x m = 1.167 m
6
Thus electric potential is zero at distances x = 0.5 m and
(i) Find at what distance from point A would the electric 1.167 m from charge q1 = 10 × 10–8 C.
potential be zero. (ii) Electrostatic potential energy of system
(ii) Also calculate the electrostatic potential energy of
the system. 1 q1q 2 (10 10 8 )(4 10 8 )
U = 9 × 109 ×
4 0 r 0.70
Sol. (i) The electric potential due to opposite charges is
= 5.14 × 10–5 J
subtractive. To find the electric potential, the sign of
the charge is retained in the formula. Example - 22
Let x be the distance of point P from A at which q
electric potential is zero Three particles, each having a charge of 10 C are
placed at the corners of an equilateral triangle of side
1 q1 1 q2
i.e., V 4 x 4 (0.70 x ) 0 10cm. The electrostatic potential energy of the system
0 0
1
1 10 108 1 (4 108 ) is (Given 9 109 N m2 / C )
0 4 0
40 x 40 (0.70 x )
(a) Zero (b) Infinite
(c) 27 J (d) 100 J
Sol. (c) Potential energy of the system,
10 4
x 0.70 x
7.0 – 10x = 4x
17.0
or 14 x = 7.0 or x 0.5 m
14
1 q1 q2
Also V 4 x x 0.70 0
0
U 9 10 9
10 10 6 2
3 27 J
0.1
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 56
Example - 23 Example - 24
A conducting sphere of radius R is charged to a potential of
Infinite charges are lying at x = 1, 2, 4, 8…meter on X- V volt. Then the electric field at a distance r (> R) from the
axis and the value of each charge is Q, find the value of centre of the sphere would be
intensity of electric field at point x = 0 due to these
charges . Also find the value of potential at this point if RV V
(a) (b)
the value of Q is 1 mC. r2 r
(a) 12 × 109 Q N/C, 1.8 × 104 V rV R2V
(c) (d)
(b) Zero, 1.2 × 104 V R2 r3
Ans. (a)
(c) 6 × 109 Q N/C, 9 × 103 V Sol. Conducting sphere
(d) 4 × 109 Q N/C , 6 × 103 V
Sol. : (a)
By the superposition, Net electric field at origin
If r > R
1 1 1 1 1 Q Q
E kQ 2 2 2 2 ... V= . = k.
1 2 4 8 4 0 R R
1 1 1 V .R Q
E kQ 1 ... Q= E = k.
4 16 64 k r2
1 1 1 VR VR
1 ... is an infinite geometrical progression it’ss E = k. 2
E= 2
4 16 64 kr r
a
sum can be obtained by using the formula S ; Example - 25
1 r
Where a = First term, r = Common ratio.
An arc of radius r carries charge. The linear density of
1 charge is and the arc subtends an angle /3 at the centre.
Here a = 1 and r so, What is electric potential at the centre
4
1 1 1 1 4
1 ... . (a) 4 (b) 8
4 16 64 1 1/ 4 3 0 0
Hence E 9 10 9 Q 4 12 10 9 Q N / C (c) 12 (d) 16
3 0 0
Electric potential at origin Ans. (c)
Sol.
1 1106 1106 1106 1106
V ...
40 1 2 4 8
1 1 1
9 109 106 1 ..............
2 4 8
1 V = K =
9 10 3
= 1.8 × 104 volt 3
1
1 1
2 V = K V= .
3 4 0 3
V=
12 0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 57
Example - 26
(a) Plot a graph comparing the variation of potential
‘V’ and electric field ‘E’ due to a point charge ‘Q’ as
a function of distance ‘R’ from the point charge.
(b) Find the ratio of the potential differences that must
be applied across the parallel and the series
combination of two identical capacitors so that
the energy stored, in the two cases, becomes the Sol. The points A and B are equidistant from the centre of square
same. where charge q = 500 C is located ; therefore, points A and
Sol. (a) The graph of variation of potential and electric field
B are at the same potential i.e., VA = VB.
due to a point charge Q with distance R from the point
charge is shown in fig. Work done in moving charge q0 = 10C from A to B is
W = q0 (VB – VA) = 0
Example - 28
An electric dipole with a dipole moment 4 × 10–9 Cm is
aligned at 30º with the direction of a uniform electric
field of magnitude 5 × 104 NC–1. Calculate the magnitude
(b) Let C be capacitance of each capacitor. of the torque acting on the dipole.
C Sol. A dipole placed in a uniform electric field, experiences a
In series arrangement, net capacitance Cs .
2 torque = pE sin which tends to align the dipole parallel
In parallel arrangement, net capacitance, Cp = 2C to the direction of field.
1 Torque = pE sin
Energy stored U CV 2
2 Here p = 4 × 10–9 C-m, E = 5 × 104 NC–1, = 30º
If VS and VP are potential differences applied across Torque = 4 × 10–9 × 5 × 104 sin 30º
series and parallel arrangements, then given
Us = Up 1
4 × 10–9 × 5 × 104 × = 10–4 Nm
2
1 1
CSVS2 C p Vp2
2 2 Example - 29
Vp Cs C/2 1 The distance of the field point on the axis of a small
V C 2C 2 dipole is doubled. By what factor will the electric field,
S p
due to the dipole change ?
Example - 27
1 2p 1
Sol. For a small dipole, Eaxis = 4 3 3
A 500 C charge is at the centre of a square of side 0 r r
10 cm. Find the work done in moving the charge of
When the distance r is doubled, the electric field strength
10 C between two diagonally opposite points on the
becomes 1/8 times the original field.
square.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 58
Example - 31 At point P, these electric fields are directed along the same
direction so
A positive charge is fixed at the origin of coordinates. An
electric dipole, which is free to move and rotate, is placed
on the positive x–axis. Its moment is directed away from E E1 E 2 n̂ .........(1)
0
the origin. The dipole will :
(a) Move towards the origin In the interior of conductor electric field is zero. If we
(b) Move away from the origin consider a point Q near hole but inside the conductor, then
(c) Rotate by /2 electric field E1 changes direction, while electric field E 2
(d) Rotate by due to rest of conductor remains the same in magnitude as
well as in direction. The net field at Q is
Ans. (a)
Einside = E2 – E1 = 0 E1 = E2 ...........(2)
Sol.
From (1) 2E 2
0
-q charge is near the +Q as compare to +q, so attractive
force will be greater than repulsive force. Therefore, dipole
moves towards the origin. E2 n̂
2 0
Example - 31
The electric field strength of the hole will be due to rest of
conductor and is given by
A small metallic charged sphere is placed at the centre
of large uncharged spherical shell and the two are
E2 n̂
connected by a wire. Will any charge flow on the outer 2 0
shell ?
Example - 33
Sol. Yes, the whole charge will flow to the outer shell ; because
charge always resides on outer surface of a conductor. The electric field component in the fig. shown are
Ex = x1/2, Ey = Ez = 0, in which = 800 N/Cm1/2.
Example - 32 Calculate (a) the electric flux through the cube
(b) the charge within the cube. The side of cube
A hollow charged conductor has a tiny hole cut into its a = 0.1 m.
surface. Show that the electric field in the hole is , where
is unit vector in the outward normal direction and is Sol. According to the question only the electric field has only
the surface charge density near the hole. X-component, Y and Z-components are zero; so electric
flux diverging along Y and Z-axis is zero since E S =
Sol. Consider a hollow conductor (of any shape) having hole ES cos 90º = 0. The electric flux diverging along X-axis
AB at its surface. Consider a point P near the hole just from faces (1) and (2) exists.
outside the conductor. First we consider the conductor with
The electric field at face (1) (where x = a) is
hole filled up.
E1 = x1/2 = a1/2
The electric field at point P due to whole conductor
.
This electric field may be considered as the superposition
of two electric fields :
(i) The electric field due to filled up hole E1.
(ii) The electric field due to rest of charged conductor E2.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 59
The electric field at face (2) (where x = 2a) is Example-35
E2 = x1/2 = (2a)1/2
A Van de Graaff type generator is capable of building up
The electric flux through faces (1) and (2) are potential difference of 15 × 106 V. The dielectric strength
of the gas surrounding the electrode is
1 E S E1 S cos 180º = –a1/2 (a2) = –a5/2 5 × 107 Vm–1. What is the minimum radius of the
spherical shell required ?
2 E 2 S E 2 S cos 0 = (2a)1/2. a2 × 1 = 2 a5/2
Sol. Due to a charged shell (radius R), the maximum electric field
is at the surface of the shell. If maximum charge is Q, then
Net electric flux = 1 + 2 = ( 2 1) a5/2
1 Q
E max
= ( 2 1) × 800 × (0.1)5/2 = (1.414 – 1) × 800 × (0.1)2 0.10 40 R 2 .........(1)
min
= 0.41 × 8 × 0.316 = 1.05 Nm2 C–1
1 Q
Also the ptoential V ........(2)
(b) If q is net charge enclosed by cubical surface, then 4 0 R min
by Gauss-Theorem
V
q From (1) and (2) R min
q 0 E max
0
Here V = 15 × 106 V, Emax = 5 × 107 Vm–1
–12 –12
or q = 8.854 × 10 × 1.05 = 9.27 × 10 C
V 15 106
Example- 34 = Rmin = = 3 × 10–1 m = 30 cm.
E max 5 107
A chargd air capacitor has stored energy U0. What will
be the energy stored when air is replaced by a dielectric Example-36
of dielectric constant K, charge Q remaining the
same. Keeping the voltage of the charging source constant,
what would be the percentage change in the energy stored
Q2 in a parallel plate capacitor if the separation between its
Sol. Energy stored in dielectric filled capacitor U = .
2C plates were to be decreased by 10% ?
The capacitance of air capacitor = Cair 1
Sol. Energy stored in a capacitor for a fixed voltage, U CV 2 .
The capacitance of dielectric capacitor, C = K . Cair, 2
A
Q2 Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor C 0 . If the
U d
2KCair
separation between the plates is decreased by 10 %, new
10
Q2 separation, d d = 0.9 d.
Energy stored in air capacitor, U 0 . 100
2Cair
0 A C 10
New capacitance C ' C
U 0.9d 0.9 9
U 1
U 0 % change in energy is
U0 K K
C ' C C'
U 100% 1 100%
1 C C
That is, energy stored is reduced to times.
K 10
1 100 = 11.1%
9
i.e., energy stored increases by 11.1 %.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 60
Example - 37 As C2 and C3 have resultant capacitance C’ equal to C1
= 100 pF, so the charge Q is equally divided among two
(a) Obtain the equivalent capacitance of the following
Q
network of capacitors. branches ; charge on C1 is Q1 1108 C = 10–8 C
2
(b) For a 300 V supply, determine the charge and voltage
across each capacitor. Charge in branch C2 and C3 is also 1 × 10–8 C. As charge
in series remains same, so charges on C2 and C3 are
equal to 1 × 10–8 C.
Q2 = Q3 = 10–8 C
Q 108
Potential across C1 V1 1 = 100 V
C1 100 1012
Q 108
Potential across, C 2 = 50 V
C2 200 1012
Q 108
Potential across, C3 = 50 V
C3 200 1012
Sol. (a) Given, C1 = C4 = 100 pF,
Example - 38
C2 = C3 = 200 pF.
The capacitors C2 and C3 are connected in series. Find the total energy stored in the capacitors in the given
network :
Their equivalent capacitance
C 2 C3 200 200
C' 100 pF
C2 C3 200 200
The combination of C2 and C3 (i.e., C’) is connected in
parallel with C1, therefore, equivalent capacitane of C1
and C’,
C’’ = C1 + C’ = 100 + 100 = 200 F
The capacitance C’’ is in series with C4, hence equivalent Sol. The equivalent capacitance of C 1 and C 2 in series
CC 2 2
capacitance between A and B C' 1 2 1F
C1 C 2 2 2
C '' C4 200 100 200
C pF = 66.7 pF C' is in parallel with C3, so equivalent capacitance of C1, C2
C '' C4 200 100 3
and C3 is
200 C' ' is in series with C4 ; their equivalent capacitance
(b) Total charge, Q = CV = 1012 F (300V)
3
C 4C" 2 2
C" ' 1F
= 2 × 10–8 coulomb C 4 C" 2 2
As C4 is connected in series with battery, charge on C4
This is in parallel with C5 ; So equivalent capacitance across
is, Q4 = 2 × 10–8 C
AB is CAB = 1 + 1 = 2 F
Potential difference across C4 is V4
1 1
Energy stored C AB V 2 2 1 0 6 (6 )2
Q4 2 10 8 C 2 2
= = 200 V
C 4 100 1012 F
= 36 × 10–6 J
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 61
Example - 39 Example - 40
Find the equivalent capacitance of the combination between Find the equivalent capacitance between points A and B.
points A & B using charge distribution method.
C
Sol.
C C C
C
A B
C C
C
Sol.
C C
C C
Assume a battery of potential V across A & B. Do the charge A B
C C
distribution in the circuit.
1 1 2 C
C1
C C C 2
C/2
C
C
A B
C C
C 3C 3C
C C2
2 2 2
Variables : Q, q
3C/2
Loops : (ABCFA), (FCDEF)
C
Loop (A B C F A) C
A B
Qq q C/2
0 0 0 Q 4q ...(i)
3C C
1 1 2 8 3C
C3
Loop (F C D E F) C C 3C 3C 8
q Q
V 0 0 4 q Q 4 CV ...(ii)
C 4C
Using equations (i) and (ii) ;
CV
q , Q 2CV
2
Equivalent capacitance between A and B is, C 3C 7C 7C
Ceq
2 8 8 8
Q 2CV
Ceq 2C
V V
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 62
Example - 41 Ans. (d)
Sol.
Charge Q on a capacitor varies with voltage V as shown
in the figure, where Q is taken along the X-axis and V
along the Y-axis. The area of triangle OAB represents
Area of Triangle OAB
= Area under V-Q graph
1
OB AB
2
(a) Capacitance 1
(b) Capacitive reactance QV
2
(c) Magnetic field between the plates
(d) Energy stored in the capacitor = U = Energy stored in Capacitor.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 63
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Coulomb’s Law 7. Two pith balls each of mass 1 gm and each carrying a charge
1. Two point charges repel each other with a force of 100 N. of 1C are attached to ends of a silk threads 1m long the
One of the charges is increased by 10% and other is other ends of which are attached to a fixed point in gravity
decreased by 10%. The new force of repulsion at the same free space.The force between them will be
distance will be
(a) 2.25 × 10–5 N (b) 2.25 × 10–3 N
(a) 55 N (b) 77 N
(c) 4.25 × 10–3 N (d) 12.25 × 10–3 N
(c) 99 N (d) 100 N
8. If a charge q is placed at the centre of the line joining two
2. A charge q1 exerts some force on a second charge q2. If a equal charges Q such that the system is in equilibrium, then
third charge q3 is brought near, the force of q1 exerted on q2 the value of q is
will :
(a) Q/2 (b) – Q/2
(a) increase (b) decrease
(c) Q/4 (d) – Q/4
(c) remains unchanged (d) none of these
9. Three charges – q1, + q 2 and – q 3 are placed as shown in
3. The ratio of the electric force between two electrons to the the figure. The x-component of the force on – q 1 is
gravitational force between them is of the order of
proportional to
(a) 1042 (b) 1040
(c) 1036 (d) 1032
4. Two point charges +2 coulomb and +6 coulomb repel each
other with a force of 12 N. If a charge of –4 coulomb is given
to each of these charges then the force will be
(a) 4 N (repulsive) (b) 4 N (attractive)
(c) 8 N (repulsive) (d) 8 N (attractive)
5. Two point charges q1 = + 2C and q2 = – 1C are separated by
a distance d. The position on the line joining the two charges
where a third charge q = + 1C will be in equilibrium is at a
distance
(a) d / 2 from q1 between q1 & q2 q2 q3 q2 q3
(a) 2
2
cos (b) 2
sin
b a b a2
(b) d / 2 from q1 away from q2
q2 q3 q2 q3
(c) 2
2
cos (d) 2
sin
(c) d / 2 – 1 from q2 between q1 & q2 b a b a2
10. A charge Q is placed at each of the opposite corners of a
(d) d / 2 – 1 from q2 away q1 square. A charge q is placed at each of the other two corners.
6. Two free charges q and 4q are placed at a distance d apart. If the net electrical force on Q is zero, then the Q/q equals
A third charge Q is placed between them at a distance x
from charge q such that the system is in equilibrium. Then, (a) 2 2 (b) –1
(a) Q = –4q/9, x = d/3 (b) Q = –4q/9, x = d/4
1
(c) Q = –4q/3, x = d/3 (d) Q = –4q/3, x = d/4 (c) 1 (d)
2
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 64
11. Two charges, each equal to q, are kept at x = –a and x = a on
q
the x–axis. A particle of mass m and charge q 0 is placed
2
at the origin. If charge q0 is given a small displacement y (y
<< a) along the y –axis, the net force acting on the particle
is proportional to
(a) y (b) –y
1 1
(c) y (d) y
Electric Field
(a) E remains unchanged, V changes
12. Two point charges q1 = 4 C & q2 = 9 C are placed 20 cm
apart. The electric field due to them will be zero on the line (b) both E and V change
joining them at a distance of
(c) E and V remain unchanged
(a) 8 cm from q1 (b) 8 cm from q2
(c) 80/13 cm from q1 (d) 80/13 cm from q2
(d) E changes, V remains unchanged
13. Charge of +q, +2q, + q and –q are placed at the corners of a
square ABCD, calculate the electric field at the intersection 16. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a common
of the diagonals of the square when q = 5/3 × 10–9 C and point by two massless strings of length l are initially a
each side square of is 10 cm. distance d (d << l) apart because of their mutual repulsion.
The charge begins to leak from both the spheres at a constant
rate. As a result charges approach each other with a velocity
v. Then as a function of distance x between them,
(a) v x–1 (b) v x1/2
(c) v x (d) v x–1/2
4
17. A charged oil drop is suspended in uniform field of 3×10
V/m, so that it neither falls nor rises. The charge on the
drop will be
3 –1 -2 –1
(a) 2.1 × 10 Vm (b) 9.1 × 10 Vm (take the mass of the charge = 9.9 × 10
–15 2
kg and g = 10 m/s )
(c) 1.8 × 104 Vm–1 (d) 0.9 × 104 Vm–1 –18 –18
(a) 3.3 × 10 C (b) 3.2 × 10 C
14. Two point charges + 8 q and –2 q are located at x = 0 and x
–18 –18
= L respectively. The location of a point on the x-axis at (c) 1.6× 10 C (d) 4.8 × 10 C
which the net electric field due to these two point charges
18. A charged particle of mass m kg, charge q is released from
is zero is
rest in a uniform electric field E. The kinetic energy of the
(a) 2L (b) L/4
particle after time t seconds is
(c) 8L (d) 4L
15. Charges are placed on the vertices of a square as shown. (a) 2 E2r2/mq (b) Eq2m/2r2
Let E be the electric field and V the potential at the centre. (c) E2q2t2/2m (d) Eqm/2t
If the charges on A and B are interchanged with those on D
and C respectively, then
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 65
19. In a uniformly charged sphere of total charge Q and radius 20. The electric field strength due a uniformly charged ring of
R, the electric field E is plotted as function of distance radius R at a distance x from its centre on its axis carrying
from the centre. The graph which would correspond to the charge Q has somewhere maximum value on the axis. This
above will be is at distance
(a) x = R (b) x 2 R
R
(c) x (d) x 3 R
2
21. A point charge q is placed at a distance r from the centre of
an uncharged conducting sphere of radius R (< r). The
(a) potential at any point on the sphere is
1 q
(a) Zero (b) 4 r
0
1 qR 1 qr 2
(c) 4 2 (d)
0 r 4 0 R
22. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S, which makes
an angle with a large charged conducting sheet P, as
shown in the figure. The surface charge density of the
sheet is proportional to
(b)
(c) (a) cos (b) cot
(c) sin (d) tan
23. A thin semi-circular ring of radius r has a positive charge q
distributed uniformly over it. The net field E at the centre
O is
(d)
q q ˆj
(a) ĵ (b)
42 0 r 2 4 0 r 2
2
q ˆj q
(c) (d) ĵ
2 0 r 2
2
2 0 r 2
2
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 66
24. The magnitude of the average electric field normally 28. If the electric flux entering and leaving an enclosed surface
present in the atmosphere just above the surface of the respectively is 1 and 2, the electric charge inside the
Earth is about 150 N/C, directed inward towards the center surface will be
of the Earth. This gives the total net surface charge carried
by the Earth to be: 1 2
[Given 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2, RE = 6.37 × 106 m] (a) (2 – 1) 0 (b)
0
(a) +670 kC (b) – 670 kC
(c) – 680 kC (d) + 680 kC 2 1
(c) (d) (1 + 2) 0
0
25. A spherically symmetric charge distribution is
characterised by a charge density having the following 29. Three charges 2q, –q, –q are located at the vertices of an
variation: equilateral triangle. At the circumcentre of the triangle
r (a) field is zero but potential is non-zero
(r) O 1 for r R
R (b) field is non-zero but potential is zero
(r) 0 for r > R (c) both field and potential are zero
Where r is the distance from the centre of the charge (d) both field and potential are non-zero
distribution and O is a constant. The electric field at an 30. Four charges +q, +q, –q and –q are placed respectively at
internal point (r < R) is: the corners A, B, C & D of a square of side a. The potential
and field at the centre O of the square are respectively
O r r 2 O r r 2
(a) 3 3 4R (b) 4 3 4R 1
O O 4 0 times
O r r 2 O r r2
(c) 3 4R (d) 12
O O 3 4R
Electric Potential and Potential Energy
26. Two equal charges q are placed at a distance of ‘2 a’ and a
third charge – 2q is placed at the midpoint. The potential
energy of the system is
q2 6 q2
(a) (b)
80 a 80 a
4 2q
(a) zero, 4q/a2 (b) zero ,
2 2
7q 9q a2
(c) (d)
80 a 80 a
(c) 4 2q / a ; 4q / a 2 (d) 4 2 q ; 4 2q / a 2
Q
27. Let (r) r be the charge density distribution for a
R 4
solid sphere of radius R and total charge Q. For a point P 31. Two charges of 4 C each are placed at the corners A and
inside the sphere at distance r1 from the centre of the sphere, B of an equilateral triangle of side length 0.2 m in air. The
the magnitude of electric field is
1 N m2
electric potential at C is 9 109
(a) zero (b)
Q 40 C2
40 r12
(a) 9 × 104 V (b) 18 × 104 V
Qr12 Qr12 (c) 36 × 104 V (d) 72 × 104 V
(c) (d)
4 0 R 4 3 0 R 4
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 67
–3
32. An electric charge 10 C is placed at the origin (0, 0) of X- Statement 2 : The electric field at a distance r (r < R) from
Y coordinate system. Two points A and B are situated at
r
( 2, 2) and (2, 0) respectively. The potential difference the centre of the sphere is 3
0
between the points A and B will be
(a) 9 V (b) zero (a) Statement 1 is false, Statement 2 is true.
(c) 2 V (d) 4.5 V (b) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is false.
33. Uniform electric field of intensity 5 volt/m acts parallel to x
(c) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true, Statement 2 is
axis. A charge of 2C is moved from 0 to A (1,1), to B
(2, 1) and finally to D (3,0) in this field. Work done in this the correct explanation for Statement 1.
process is : (d) Statement 1 is true, Statement 2 is true, Statement 2 is
(a) 60 joule (b) 40 joule not the correct explanation for Statement 1.
(c) 30 joule (d) zero
38. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a charge
34. Two concentric, thin metallic spheres of radii R1 and R2 (R1 > q. Another charge Q is placed at the centre of the shell.
R2) bear charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Then the potential The electrostatic potential at a point P at a distance R/2
1 from the centre of the shell is
at radius r between R1 and R2 will be K 4
0 2Q 2Q q
(a) 4 R (b) 4 R 4 R
(a) K (Q1 + Q2) / r (b) K (Q1/r + Q2/R2) 0 0 0
(c) K (Q2/r + Q1/R1) (d) K (Q1/R1 + Q2/R2) 2Q q q Q q
(c) 4 R 4 R (d)
35. A hollow hemisphere of radius R is charged uniformly with 0 0 4 0 R
surface density of charge . What will be the potential at
centre ? Relation of potential and field
R 39. The variation of potential is maximum if one goes
(a) 2 (b) 4
0 0
(a) along the line of force
4R (b) Perpendicular to line of force
(c) 2 (d) 3
0 0 (c) in any direction
36. A solid sphere of radius R is charged uniformly through (d) at 45° with the direction of field line
out the volume. At what distance from its surface is the
electric potential 1/4 of the potential at the centre ? 40. The electric potential in a certain region of space is given
(a) 8R/3 (b) R/3 by V = –3x2 + 2x, where x is in meter and V is in volt, in this
region the equipotential surface are
(c) 5R/3 (d) 2R/3
37. This question has statement 1 and statement 2. Of the four (a) plane parallel to XY plane
choices given after the statements, choose the one that (b) planes parallel to YZ plane
best describes the two statements.
An insulating solid sphere of radius R has a uniform (c) concentric cylinders with axis as x–axis
positive charge density . As a result of this uniform charge (d) concentric spheres concentrated at origin.
distribution, there is a finite value of electric potential at
the centre of the sphere, at the surface of the sphere and 41. Which of the following may be discontinuous across a
also at a point outside the sphere. The electric potential at charged conducting surface ?
infinite is zero.
(a) Electric potential
Statement-1 : When a charge q is taken from the centre to
the surface of the sphere its potential energy changes by (b) Electric intensity
q (c) Both electric intensity and potential
30 . (d) None of these
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 68
42. In uniform electric field Electric Dipole
(a) All points are at same potential 47. Three charges are arranged on the vertices of an equilateral
(b) no two points can have same potential triangle as shown. The dipole moment of the combination is
(c) pair of points separated by same distance must have
same difference of potential
(d) none of these
43. Let V and E be the potential and electric field respectively at
a point due to charge distribution. Which of the following
assertion in true.
(a) if V = 0 then E must be zero
(b) V 0, then E can not be zero
(c) if E 0, V can not be zero
(d) if V = 0, E may be zero (a) zero (b) 2qd
(c) 3 qd (d) 3qd
44. Electric potential in an electric field is given as V K , (K
r 48. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30º to a non-
uniform electric field. The dipole will experience
being constant), if position vector r 2 ˆi 3 ˆj 6 k,
ˆ then
electric field will be (a) a translational force only in the direction of the field
(b) a translational force only in a direction normal to the
(a) 2 ˆi 3 ˆj 6 kˆ K
243
(b) 2 ˆi 3 ˆj 6 kˆ K
343
direction of the field
(c) a torque as well as a translational force
(c)
K
243
3 ˆi 2 ˆj 6 kˆ (d)
K
343
6 ˆi 2 ˆj 3kˆ 49.
(d) a torque only
There exists a non-uniform electric field along x-axis as shown
in figure. The field increases at a uniform rate along positive
45. Assume that an electric field E 30x 2 ˆi exists in space. x-axis. A dipole is placed inside the field as shown. For the
Then the potential difference VA – VO’ Where VO is the dipole which one of the following statement is correct
potential at the origin and VA the potential at x = 2 m is :
(a) –120 J/c (b) – 80 J/c
(c) 80 J/c (d) 120 J/c
46. The potential at a point x (measured in m) due to some
charges situated on the x-axis is given by :
2
V (x) = 20/(x – 4) volt
The electric field E at x = 4m is given by
5
(a) V / m and in the –ve x direction
3
(a) Dipole moves along positive x-axis and undergoes a
clockwise rotation
5
(b) V / m and in the +ve x direction (b) Dipole moves along negative x-axis after undergoing a
3
clockwise rotation
10 (c) Dipole moves along positive x-axis after under going an
(c) V / m and the –ve x direction
9 anticlockwise rotation
(d) Dipole moves along negative x-axis and undergoes an
10 anticlockwise rotation
(d) V / m and in the +ve x direction
9
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 69
50. A charge q is placed at (1, 2, 1) and other charge –q is Electric Flux and Guass’s Law
placed at (0, 1, 0) such that they form an electric dipole.
56. The electric field in a region of space is given by,
There exist a uniform electric field E 2iˆ 3jˆ . What is
torque experienced by the dipole. E E 0 ˆi 2E 0 ˆj where E0 = 100 N/C. The flux of this field
through a circular surface of radius 0.02 m parallel to the
(a) q 3iˆ 2ˆj kˆ N.m
(b) q 3iˆ 2ˆj kˆ N.m Y–Z plane is nearly :
(a) 3.14 Nm2/C (b) 0.02 Nm2/C
(c) q 3iˆ 2ˆj kˆ N.m
(d) q ˆi 2ˆj kˆ N.m
(c) 0.005 Nm2/C (d) 0.125 Nm2/C
51. An electric dipole is fixed at the origin of coordinates. Its 57. A cube of side 10 cm encloses a charge of 0.1 C at its
moment is directed in the positive x–direction. A positive
centre. What is number of lines of force through each face
charge is moved from the point (r, 0) to the point (–r, 0) by
of the cube.
external agent. In this process, the work done by the agent is
(a) Positive and inversely proportional to r (a) 1.13 × 1011 (b) 1.13 × 106
(b) Positive and inversely proportional to r2. (c) 1.13 × 1013 (d) 1883
(c) negative and inversely proportional to r 58. A positive point charge q is placed just outside the centre
(d) Negative and inversely proportional to r . 2 of the flat face of a hemispherical surface in air. The electric
52. Two short dipoles each of dipole moment p are placed at flux through the flat face is
origin. The dipole moment of one dipole is along x axis,
while that of other is along y axis. The electric field at point
(a, 0) is given by
2p p
(a) 4 a (b)
0 40 a 3
5p
(c) (d) zero
40 a 3
53. Electric potential at equatorial point of a small dipole with q q
(a) (b) 2
dipole moment p (At r, distance from the dipole) is 0 0
q
p (c) zero (d) 2
(a) Zero (b) 0
4 0 r 2
59. The electric field in the region is radially outwards and has
p 2p the magnitude of E = kr. The charge contained in a sphere of
(c) (d) radius a is
4 0 r 3 4 0 r 3
54. The distance between H+ and Cl– ions in HCl molecule is 4
(a) 0 a 3 (b) 4 k0 a 3
1.28Å. What will be the potential due to this dipole at a 3
distance of 12Å on the axis of dipole.
2
(a) 0.13 V (b) 1.3 V (c) k 0 a 3 (d) 4 k0 a 2
3
(c) 13 V (d) 130 V
60. The electrostatic potential inside a charged spherical ball
55. An electric dipole of dipole moment p is placed in uniform is given by = ar2 + b where r is the distance from the
centre a, b are constants. Then the charge density inside
electric field E , with p parallel to E . It is then rotated by
an angle of . The work done is the ball is
(a) pE sin (b) pE cos (a) –6a or (b) –24 a0
(c) pE (1 – cos ) (d) pE (1 – sin) (c) –6a 0 (d) –24 a0r
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 70
61. A charge of 5 × 10–10 C is given to a metal cylinder of length
1 2qQ 1
10 m, placed in air. The electric intensity at a distance of 0.2 (a) 1 (b) zero
40 a 5
m from its axis is
(a) 4.5 V/m (b) 45 V/m
1 2qQ 1 1 2qQ 2
(c) 450 V/m (d) 100 V/m (c) 1 (d) 1
40 a 5 40 a 5
62. The field at a distance r from a long string of charge per unit
length is 66. Two charge particles having charges 1C and –1C and of
mass 50 gm each are held at rest while their separation is 2
k k meter. Find the speed of the particles when their separation
(a) (b)
r2 r is 1 meter.
(a) 0.20 m/s (b) 0.6 m/s
k 2k
(c) (d) (c) 0.3 m/s (d) 0.4 m/s
2r r
63. Two large conducting plates parallel to each other are placed 1
close to each other. The inner surfaces of two plates have 67. An alpha nucleus of energy mv2 bombards a heavy nuclear
2
surface charge densities and –. The other surfaces are
target of charge Ze. Then the distance of closest approach for
without charge. The electric field has the magnitude.
the alpha nucleus will be proportional to
2 (a) v
2
(b) 1/m
(a) in the region between the plates
0 4
(c) 1/v (d) 1/Ze
68. A charged particle q is shot towards another charged particle
(b) in the region between the plates Q which is fixed, with a speed v. it approaches Q upto a
0
closest distance r and then returns. If q was given a speed
2v, the closest distance of approach would be
(c) in the region outside the plates
0
(d) zero in the region between the plates
-
= - =
2 0 2 0 0
(a) r (b) 2r
Energy Conservation Law (c) r/2 (d) r/4
64. An electron of 100 eV is fired directly towards a metal plate Conductor
having surface charge density of –2 × 10–6 Cm–2. What is
69. A metal sphere of radius 10 cm is given a charge of 12C.
the distance from where the electron be projected so that
The force acting on unit area of its surface due to its own
its just fails to strike the plate.
charge is
(a) 0.22 mm (b) 0.33 mm
(a) 5.157 × 102 N/m2 (b) 5.15 × 103 N/m2
(c) 0.44 mm (d) 0.66 mm
(c) 5.15 × 10–2 N/m2 (d) 5.15 × 10–3 N/m2
65. Two positive charges of magnitude q are placed at the ends
of a side 1 of a square of side 2a. Two negative charges of 70. The outward pull on a metal plate of an area 0.01m2 having
the same magnitude are kept at the other corners. Starting a charge density of 50 C/m2 is
from rest, if a charge Q moves from the middle of side 1 to
(a) 1.4 N (b) 2.4 N
the centre of square, its kinetic energy at the centre of square
is (c) 0.4 N (d) 1.8 N
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 71
71. A conducting sphere of radius R and carrying charge Q is 77. The distance between two plates of a parallel plate
joined to an uncharged conducting sphere of radius 2R. condenser is slowly increased. A graph is plotted between
The charge flowing between them would be capacity C and the distance d. Which graph is correct ?
Q Q
(a) (b)
2 3
2Q Q
(c) (d)
3 4
72. Two charged metallic spheres of radii r1 and r2 are touched
and separated. What is the ratio of their surface charge
density.
(a) A (b) B
1 r2 1 r1 (c) C (d) D
(a) r (b) r 78. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging battery
2 1 2 2
is then disconected. If the plates of the capacitor are moved
farther apart by means of insulating handles
1 1 r2 r1
(c) 1 (d) r r (a) the charge on the capacitor increases
2 2 1 2
(b) the voltage across the plates decreases
73. What is the largest charge a metal ball of 1mm radius can (c) the capacitance increases
hold? Dielectric strength of air is 3×106 Vm–1.
(d) the electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor increases
(a) 3nC (b) 2nC
79. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two circular plates
(c) 1/2 nC (d) 1/3nC separated by a distance of 5 mm and with a dielectric of
dielectric constant 2.2 between them. When the electric
74. If two conducting spheres are separately charged and then field in the dielectric is 3 × 104 V/m, the charge density of
brought in contact the positive plate will be close to :
(a) The total energy of the two spheres is conserved. (a) 3 × 10–7 C/m2 (b) 3 × 104 C/m2
(b) The total charge on the two spheres is conserved. (c)6 × 104 C/m2 (d) 6 × 10–7 C/m2
(c) Both the total energy and the total charge are conserved. Spherical Capacitor
(d) The final potential is always the mean of the original
80. A spherical conductor has a capacity of 2F. Its radius will
potential of the two spheres. be (0 = 8.85 × 10–12 S.I. units)
75. Two spherical conductors A and B of radii 1 mm and 2 mm (a) 1.8 m (b) 1800 m
are separated by a distance of 5 cm and are uniformly (c) 1.8 × 104 m (d) 0.018 m
charged. If the spheres are connected by a conducting wire 81. Capacitance (in F) of a spherical conductor having radius 1
then in equilibrium condition, the ratio of the magnitude of m, is
the electric fields at the surfaces of spheres A and B is (a) 1.1 × 10
–10
(b) 10
–6
–9 –3
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 9 × 10 (d) 10
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 Equivalatent Capacitance
Parallel Plate Capacitor 82. Two capacitors of capacitances 3F and 6F are connected
in series across a P.D. of 400 volt. The P.D. across each
76. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is C. Its capacity condenser is respectively :
when the separation between the plate is halved will be
800 400 600 500
(a) 4 C (b) 2 C (a) Volt, Volt (b) Volt, Volt
3 3 3 3
(c) C/2 (d) C/4
700 400
(c) Volt, Volt (d) none of these
3 3
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 72
83. A 5 F capacitor is fully charged across a 12 V battery. It is 88. Four metallic plates, each having area A are placed as shown.
then disconnected from the battery and connected to an The distance between the consecutive plates is d. Alternate
uncharged capacitor. If the voltage across the capacitor
plates are connected to points A & B. The equivalent
becomes 3 V then the capacitance of the uncharged
capacitor will be capacitance of the system is
(a) 3 F (b) 15 F
(c) 25 F (d) 60 F
84. Two capacitors C1 and C2 are charged to 120 and 200 V
respectively. It is found that by connecting them together (a) 0A/d (b) 20A/d
the potential on each one can be made zero. Then (c) 30A/d (d) 40A/d
(a) 5C1 = 3C2 (b) 3C1 = 5C2 Dielectric Breakdown
(c) 3C1 + 5C2 = 0 (d) 9C1 = 4C2
89. Two capacitors marked 10F, 400 volt and 4F, 100 volt are
85. In the figure, the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
connected in series. What is the maximum safe potential
that can be applied when these capacitor are joined in series.
(a) 400 volt (b) 100 volt
(c) 200 volt (d) 140 volt
C1C 2 C 2C3 C3C1 Capacitor with Dielectric
(a) C1 + C2 + C3 (b)
C1 C 2 C3
90. A parallel plate capacitor has plate separation of d and
C1C 2C3 2d
(c) C C C C C C (d) none of these capacitance of 25 F. If a metallic foil of thickness is
1 2 2 3 3 1 7
86. In the given circuit below, the charge in C on the capacitor introduced between the plates with same cross sectional
having capacity of 5F area as of plate, the new capacitance would become
(a) 15 F (b) 35 F
(c) 87.5 F (d) 7.25 F
91. There are four capacitors which have same plate area,
dielectric medium but different distances between the plates.
A graph is plotted between charge and potential as shown.
Which one of them have large plate separation ?
(a) 4.5 (b) 7
(c) 9 (d) 15
87. (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4
92. A capacitor connected to a 10 V battery collects a charge of
40 microcoulomb with air as dielectric and 100 microcoulomb
with oil as dielectric. The dielectric constant of the oil is
(a) 4 (b) 0.4
(a) C/10 (b) 10C/3
(c) 2.5 (d) 1.0
(c) 3C/10 (d) 9C
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 73
93. A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a 2mTC 2mTs
capacitance of 9 pF. The separation between its plates is d. (a) (b)
s C
The space between the plate is now filled with two
dielectrics. One of the dielectrics has dielectric constant K1 3mTC mTC
= 3 and thickness d/3 while the other one has dielectric (c) (d)
2s 2s
constant K2 = 6 and thickness 2d/3. Capacitance of the
98. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the region between the plates
capacitor is now
is filled by a dielectric slab. The capacitor is charged from a
(a) 1.8 pF (b) 45 pF
cell and then disconnected from it. The slab is now taken out.
(c) 40.5 pF (d) 20.25 pF
94. A parallel plate condenser has a capacity C. The space (a) The potential difference across the capacitor is reduced
between the plates is half filled by oil of dielectric constant (b) The potential difference across the capacitor is
k as shown in the figure. The ratio of new capacity to the
original capacity is : increased
(c) The energy stored in te capacitor is reduced
(d) No work is done by an external agent in taking the slab
out
99. An air capacitor of capacity C = 10 F is connected to a
constant voltage battery of 12 V. Now the space between
the plates is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant 5. The
charge that flows now from battery to the capacitor is
(a) K : 1 (b) (1 + K) : 1
(a) 120 C (b) 699 C
1 K 1
(c) :1 (d) (1 K ) : (c) 480 C (d) 24 C
2 2
95. A parallel plate capacitor with a slab of dilectric constant 3 100. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the region between the plates
filling the whole space between the plates is charged to is filled by a dielectric slab. The capacitor is charged from
certain potential and isolated. Then the slab is drawn out a cell and then disconnected from it. The slab is now taken
and another slab of equal thickness but dielectric constant
out.
2 is introduced between the plates. The ratio of the energy
stored in the capacitor later to that stored initially is (a) The potential difference across the capacitor is reduced
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2 (b) The potential difference across the capapcitor is
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4 increased
96. The capacities of two conductors are C1 and C2 and their
(c) The energy stored in the capacitor is reduced
respective potentials are V1 and V2. If they are connected
by a thin wire then the loss of energy will be (d) No work is done by an external agent in taking the slab
out
C1C 2 (V1 V2 ) C1C 2 (V1 V2 )
(a) (b) 101. For the circuit shown, which of the following statements
2(C1 C 2 ) 2(C1 C 2 )
is true ?
C1C 2 (V1 V2 ) 2 (C1 C 2 ) (V1 V2 )
(c) (d)
2(C1 C 2 ) C1C 2
97. A fully charged capacitor has a capacitance C. It is
discharged through a small coil of resistance wire embedded (a) With S1 closed, V1 = 15 V, V2 = 20 V
in a thermally insulated block of specific heat capacity s (b) With S3 closed, V1 = V2 = 25 V
and mass m. If the temperature of the block is raised to T. (c) With S1 and S2 closed, V1 = V2 = 0
Then the potential difference V across the capacitance is (d) With S1 and S3 closed, V1 = 30 V, V2 = 20 V
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 74
102. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two plates of length 105. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric
l, width and separated by distance d. A dielectric slab constant K between the plates has a capacity C and is
(dielectric constant K) that fits exactly between the plates charged to a potential V volts. The dielectric slab is slowly
is held near the edge of the plates. It is pulled into the
removed from between the plates and then reinserted. The
U net work done by the system in this process is
capacitor by a force F = – where U is the energy of
x
the capacitor when dielectric is inside the capacitor up to 1
distance x (See figure). If the charge on the capacitor is Q (a) K 1 CV 2 2
(b) CV (K – 1)/K
2
then the force on the dielectric when it is near the edge
is: (c) (K – 1) CV
2
(d) zero
106. Combination of two identical capacitors, a resistor R and a
DC voltage source of voltage 6 V is used in an experiment
on C-R circuit. It is found that for a parallel combination of
the capacitor, the time in which the voltage of the fully
charged combination reduces to half its original voltage is
10 s. For series combination the time needed for reducing
the voltage of the fully charged series combination by half
would be
(a) 20s (b) 10s
(c) 5s (d) 2.5s
2 2
Q Q
(a) (K 1) (b) K Numerical Answer Type Questions
2dl 2 0 2dl 2 0
107. 1012 particles (nuclei of helium) fall per second on a
Q2d
(c) (K 1) (d) None neutral sphere. Calculate the time (in second) in which
2l 2 0
the sphere gets charged by 2 C .
103. A resistor R and 2F capacitor in series is connected
through a switch to 200 V direct supply. Across the 108. An infinite number of charges, each equal to q, are placed
capacitor is a neon bulb that lights up at 120V. Calculate
along the x axis at x 1, x 2, x 4, x 8, etc. The
the value of R to make the bulb light up 5 s after the switch
has been closed (log10 2.5 =0.4) electric field at the point x 0 due to the set of charges
(a) 1.7×10 5
(b) 2.7×10 6
q
(c) 3.3×10 7
(d) 1.3×104 is n . Find n .
0
104. Let C be the capacitance of a capacitor discharging through
a resistor R. Suppose t1 is the time taken for the energy 109. Two infinite linear charges are placed parallel to each other
stored in the capacitor to reduce to half its initial value and
at a distance 0.1m from each other. If the linear charge
t2 is the time taken for the charge to reduce to one-fourth
density on each is 5 C / m, then the force (in N / m)
t1
its initial value. Then the ratio will be acting on a unit length of each linear charge will be
t2
110. A uniform electric field E 500 N / C passes through a
1
(a) 1 (b) hemispherical surface of radius R 1.2 m as shown in
2
the figure. The net electric flux (in SI units) through the
1 hemispherical surface only is N . Find the value of N .
(c) (d) 2
4
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 75
114. A uniformly charged sphere is placed inside a charged
hollow sphere as shown in the figure. O is the centre of
hollow sphere and C is the centre of solid sphere. The
3
magnitude of charge on both the spheres is 4 7 C .
The electric field at point P which lies just outside the
hollow sphere is given by 3 K N / C . Find the value of
pˆ
111. Two short dipoles pkˆ and k are located at 0, 0,0 1
2 . (Here, K 4
0
and (1 m, 0, 2 m), respectively. The resultant electric field
np ˆ
due to the two dipoles at the point (1m, 0, 0) is 32 k .
0
Find n.
112. A charged particle enters at point A and comes out from
point B. Its velocity vector makes angle and with
electric field at these two points, respectively. The ratio
of kinetic energy of the charged particle at these two points
KB
will be (Given 60 and 30
KA
115. A hexagon of side 8 cm has a charge 4 C at each of its
vertices. The potential at the centre of the hexagon is
y 106 volt . Find y .
116. Three charges q, q and Q are located at the vertices
of a right-angled isosceles triangle. If the total interaction
q
energy is zero, then Q . Find
p r
An electric field given by E 4iˆ 3 y 2 ˆj pierces
2
113.
Gaussian’s cube of side 1m placed at origin such that its
three sides represents x, y and z axes. The net charge
enclosed within the cube is given by ne0 . Find the value
of n .
117. An electric field (30iˆ 20 ˆj )Vm1 exists in space. If the
potential at the origin is zero, then find the potential (in
volt) at (5 m,3 m).
118. In the given circuit, if charge on 6 F capacitor is 10 C,
then the charge (in C on 4 F capacitor will be
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 76
120. A capacitor of 2 F is charged as shown in the diagram.
When the switch S is turned to position 2, the percentage
of its stored energy dissipated is
119. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks
in series. One of the blocks has thickness d1 and dielectric
constant k1 and the other has thickness d 2 and dielectric 121. Two parallel plates of area 0.1 m2 each are at separation
of 10 mm . One-fourth of the space between them is filled
constant k2 as shown in the figure. This arrangement
with a dielectric of dielectric constant 4 as shown in the
can be thought as a dielectric slab of thickness
figure. The equivalent capacitance between terminals A
d d1 d 2 and effective dielectric constant k . Then
and B is given by 0 (in SI units). Find .
k is (Given:
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 77
EXERCISE -2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. In figure is shown a system of four capacitors connected
across a 10 V battery. Charge that will flow from switch S (a)
when it is closed is : (2015 Online)
(b)
(a) 5 C from b to a (b) 20 C from a to b
(c) zero (d) 5 C from a to b
2. A wire, of length L (=20 cm), is bent into a semicircular arc.
If the two equal halves, of the arc, were each to be uniformly
(c)
charged with charges Q, [|Q| = 1030. Coulomb where
is the permittivity (in SI units) of free space] the net electric
field at the centre O of the semicircular arc would be :
(2015 Online)
(d)
(a) (50 × 103 N/C) ˆj (b) (50 × 103 N/C) î
(c) (25 × 103 N/C) ˆj (d) (25 × 103 N/C) î
3. In the given circuit, charge Q2 on the 2F capacitor changes
as C is varied from 1F to 3F. Q2 as a function of ‘C’ is 4. A uniformly charged solid sphere of radius R has potential
given properly by : (figures are drawn schematically and
V0 (measured with respect to ) on its surface. For this
are not to scale) (2015)
sphere the equipotential surfaces with potentials
3V0 5V0 3V0 V0
, , and have radius R1, R2, R3 and R4
2 4 4 4
respectively. Then (2015)
(a) R1 = 0 and R2 < (R4 – R3)
(b) R1 0 and (R2 – R1) > (R4 – R3)
(c) R1 = 0 and R2 > (R4 – R3)
(d) none of these
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 78
5. The region between two concentric spheres of radii ‘a’ 8. Three capacitors each of 4 µF are to be connected in such
and ‘b’, respectively (see figure), has volume charge a way that the effective capacitance is 6 µF. This can be
A done by connecting them : (2016 Online Set-1)
density , where A is a constant and r is the distance (a) all in series
r
from the centre. At the centre of the spheres is a point (b) two in series and one in parallel
charge Q. The value of A such that the electric field in the (c) all in parallel
region between the spheres will be constant, is : (2016) (d) two in parallel and one in series
9. Figure shows a network of capacitors where the numbers
indicates capacitances in micro Farad. The value of
capacitance C if the equivalent capacitance between point
A and B is to be 1 F is : (2016 Online Set-2)
Q 2Q
(a) 2 b2 a 2
(b) a 2 b2
2Q Q
(c) 2 (d)
a 2a 2
6. A combination of capacitors is set up as shown in the
figure. The magnitude of the electric field, due to a point
charge Q (having a charge equal to the sum of the charges 31 32
(a) F (b) F
on the 4 F and 9 F capacitors), at a point distant 30 m 23 23
from it, would equal: (2016) 33 34
(c) F (d) F
23 23
10. Within a spherical charge distribution of charge density
(r), N equipotential surfaces of potential
V0 , V0 V, V0 2V, ………. V0 NV (V 0), are
drawn and have increasing radii r0 , r1 , r2 ,.......rN ,
respectively. If the difference in the radii of the surfaces is
constant for all values of V0 and V then :
(2016 Online Set-2)
(a) (r) r (b) (r) constant
(a) 360 N/C (b) 420 N/C 1
1
(c) 480 N/C (d) 240 N/C (c) (r ) (d) (r)
7. The potential (in volts) of a charge distribution is given r r2
by 11. An electric dipole has a fixed dipole moment p , which
V(z) = 30 - 5z2 for |z| < 1 m
V(z) = 35 -10 |z| for |z| >1 m.
makes angle with respect to x-axis. When subjected to
V(z) does not depend on x and y. If this potential is
an electric field E1 E i , it experiences a torque T1 k .
generated by a constant charge per unit volume ρ0 (in
units of 0) which is spread over a certain region, then
When subjected to another electric field E 2 3 E j it
choose the correct statement. (2016 Online Set-1)
(a) ρ0 =10 0 for |z| < 1 m and ρ0 = 0 elsewhere
(b) ρ0 = 20 0 in the entire region experiences a torque T2 T1 . The angle is : (2017)
(c) ρ0 = 40 0 in the entire region (a) 30° (b) 45°
(d) ρ0 = 20 0 for |z| < 1 m and ρ0 = 0 elsewhere (c) 60° (d) 90°
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 79
12. A capacitance of 2 F is required in an electrical circuit 16. Four closed surfaces and corresponding charge
across a potential difference of 1.0 kV. A large number of 1 distributions are shown below.
F capacitors are available which can withstand a potential
difference of not more than 300 V. The minimum number of
capacitors required to achieve this is : (2017)
(a) 32 (b) 2
(c) 16 (d) 24
13. In the given circuit diagram when the current reaches
steady state in the circuit, the charge on the capacitor of
capacitance C will be : (2017)
Let the respective electric fluxes through the surfaces be
1 , 2 , 3 and 4 . Then : (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 1 2 3 4
(c) 1 2 3 4 (d) 1 3 ; 2 4
17. A combination of parallel plate capacitors is maintained at
r1 a certain potential difference. (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) CE (b) CE
1 r
r
r1 r2
(c) CE (d) CE
2 r
r r2
r
14. There is a uniform electrostatic field in a region. The
potential at various points on a small sphere centered at P, When a 3 mm thick slab is introduced between all the
in the region, is found to vary between the limits 589.0 V to plates, in order to maintain the same potential difference,
589.8 V. What is the potential at a point on the sphere the distance between the plates is increased by 2.4 mm.
whose radius vector makes an angle of 60° with the Find the dielectric constant of the slab.
direction of the field ? (2017 Online Set-1) (a) 3 (b) 4
(a) 589.5 V (b) 589.2 V (c) 5 (d) 6
(c) 589.4 V (d) 589.6 V 18. Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of respective
radii a,b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities
15. The energy stored in the electric field produced by a metal and +, - and + respectively. The potential of shell
sphere is 4.5 J. If the sphere contains 4 µC charge, its B is : (2018)
1
radius will be : Take: 9 109 N m 2 / C2
40 b2 c2 b 2 c2
(a) b + a (b) c + a
(2017 Online Set-1) 0 0
(a) 20 mm (b) 32 mm
a 2 b2 a 2 b2
(c) 28 mm (d) 16 mm (c) a + c (d) b + c
0 0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 80
19. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 90 pF is connected 22. The equivalent capacitance between A and B in the circuit
to a battery of emf 20V. If a dielectric material of dielectric given below, is : (2018 Online Set-1)
5
constant k is inserted between the plates, the
3
magnitude of the induced charge will be : (2018)
(a) 2.4 nC (b) 0.9 nC
(c) 1.2 nC (d) 0.3 nC
20. A body of mass m and charge q is connected to a spring of
spring constant k. It is oscillating along x-direction about
its equilibrium position, taken to be at x = 0, with an
amplitude A. An electric field E is applied along the x- (a) 2.4 F (b) 4.9 F
direction. Which of the following statements is correct ?
(2018 Online Set-1) (c) 3.6 F (d) 5.4 F
qE 23. A parallel plate capacitor with area 200 cm2 and separation
(a) The new equilibrium position is at a distance from
2k between the plates 1.5 cm, is connected across a battery
x =0. of emf V. If the force of attraction between the plates is
25×10-6 N, the value of V is approximately :
1 1 q2E2
(b) The total energy of the system is m2 A 2 +
2 2 k -12 C
2
0 = 8.85×10 (2018 Online Set-2)
N.m 2
1 1 q2E2
(c) The total energy of the system is m2 A 2 -
2 2 k (a) 250 V (b) 100 V
2qE (c) 300 V (d) 150 V
(d) The new equilibrium position is at a distance
k
from x =0. 24. A capacitor C1 = 1.0 F is charged up to a voltage V = 60
V by connecting it to battery B through switch (1). Now C1
a is disconnected from battery and connected to a circuit
21. A charge Q is placed at a distance above the centre of
2 consisting of two uncharged capacitors C2 = 3.0 F and
the square surface of edge a as shown in the figure C3 = 6.0 F through switch (2), as shown in the figure.
The sum of final charges on C2 and C3 is :
(2018 Online Set-2)
The electric flux through the square surface is :
(2018 Online Set-1)
Q Q (a) 40 C (b) 36 C
(a) (b) 2
0 0
(c) 20 C (d) 54 C
Q Q
(c) 3 (d) 6
0 0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 81
25. A solid ball of radius R has a charge density given by
r
= o 1- for 0 r R. ,where r is distance from the
R
centre of the ball. The electric field outside the ball is
(2018 Online Set-2)
0 R 3 0 R 3
(a) (b)
0 r 2 12 0 r 2
40 R 3 30 R 3 (2019)
(c) (d)
3 0 r 2 4 0 r 2 K 0 a 2 K 0 a 2
ln K
26. Two identical conducting spheres A and B, carry equal
(a)
2d K 1 (b)
d K 1
charge. They are separated by a distance much larger than
their diameters, and the force between them is F. A third K 0 a 2 1 K 0 a 2
identical conducting sphere, C, is uncharged. Sphere C is (c) ln K (d)
first touched to A, then to B, and then removed. As a d 2 d
result, the force between A and B would be equal to : 29. For a uniformly charged ring of radius R, the electric
field on its axis has the largest magnitude at a distance
(2018 Online Set-3) h from its centre. Then value of h is: (2019)
3F R R
(a) F (b) (a) (b)
4 5 2
3F F
(c) R (d) R 2
(c) (d)
8 2
30. Two, point charges q1
10 C and q2 25 C are
27. In the following circuit, the switch S is closed at t =0. The placed on the x-axis at x = 1 m and x = 4 m respectively. The
charge on the capacitor C1 as a function of time will be electric field (in V/m) at a point y = 3 m on y-axis is,
C1C2
given by Ceq = C + C (2018 Online Set-3) 1
2 take 9 109 Nm 2C 2 (2019)
1
4 0
(a) 63iˆ 27 ˆj 10
2
(b) 63iˆ 27 ˆj 10
2
(c) 81iˆ 81 ˆj 10 (d) 81iˆ 81 ˆj 10
2 2
31. A parallel plate capacitor with square plates is filled with
four dielectrics of dielectric constants K1, K2, K3, and K4
arranged as shown in the figure. The effective dielectric
constant K will be:
(a) C1E [1-exp (-tR/C1)] (b) C2E [1-exp (-t/RC2)]
(c) CeqE [1-exp (-t/RCeq)] (d) CeqE exp (-t/RCeq)
28. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two square plates of
side ‘a’, separated by a distance d (d<<a). The lower
triangular portion is filled with a dielectric of dielectric
constant K, as shown in the figure. Capacitance of this
capacitor is:
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 82
34. Two electric dipoles, A, B with respective dipole moments
K1 K3 K 2 K 4
a) K d A 4qaiˆ and dB 2q aiˆ are placed on the x-axis
K1 K 2 K 3 K 4
with a separation R, as shown in the figure
K1 K 2 K3 K 4
K
(b)
2 K1 K 2 K3 K 4
K1 K 2 K3 K 4 The distance from A at which both of them produce the
(c) K same potential is: (2019)
K1 K 2 K 3 K 4
R 2R
K1 K 4 K 2 K3 (a)
2 1
(b)
2 1
(d) K
2 K1 K 2 K 3 K 4
32. A parallel plate capacitor is of area 6 cm2 and a separation R 2R
(c) (d)
3 mm. The gap is filled with three dielectric materials of 2 1 2 1
equal thickness (see figure) with dielectric constants
35. Charges “q and +q located at A and B, respectively,
K1 = 10, K2 = 12 and K3 = 14. The dielectric constant of
constitute an electric dipole. Distance AB = 2a, O is the
a single material which when fully inserted in the above
midpoint of the dipole and OP is perpendicular to AB. A
capacitor gives the same capacitance would be:
charge Q is placed at P where OP = y and y 2a . The
charge Q experiences an electrostatic force F. If Q is now
moved along the equatorial line to P2 such that OP2 =
y y
, the force on Q will be close to 2a
3 3
(2019)
(a) 4 (b) 14
(c) 12 (d) 36
33. A charge Q is distributed over three concentric spherical
shells of radii a, b, c a b c such that their surface
charge densities are equal to one another. The total
potential at a point at distance r from their common centre,
where r<a, would be: (2019)
(2019)
Q ab bc ca
(a) F
12 0 abc (a) 3 F (b)
3
Q a 2 b2 c 2 (c) 9 F (d) 27 F
36. Four equal point charges Q each are placed in the xy
4 0 a 3 b3 c 3
(b) plane at (0, 2), (4, 2), (4, “2) and (0, “2). The work required
to put a fifth charge Q at the origin of the coordinate
Q system will be: (2019)
(c)
4 0 a b c Q2 1 Q2 1
(a) 1 (b) 1
4 0 3 4 0 5
Q a b c
(d)
4 0 a2 b2 c2 Q2 Q2
(c) (d)
2 2 0 4 0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 83
37. A parallel plate capacitor having capacitance 12 pF is
charged by a battery to a potential difference of 10 V
between its plates. The charging battery is now
disconnected and a porcelain slab of dielectric constant
6.5 is slipped between the plates. The work done by the
capacitor on the slab is: (2019) (a)
(a) 692 pJ (b) 508 pJ
(c) 560 pJ (d) 600 pJ
38. The given graph shows variation (with distance r from
centre) of:
(b)
(2019)
(c)
(a) Electric field of a uniformly charged sphere
(b) Potential of a uniformly charged spherical shell
(c) Potential of a uniformly charged sphere
(d) Electric field of a uniformly charged spherical shell (d)
39. In the figure shown below, the charge on the left plate of
the 10 μF capacitor is 30 μC. The charge (in μC) on the 41. An electric field of 1000 V /mis applied to an electric
right plate of the 6 μF capacitor is: dipoleat angle of 45°. The value of electric dipole moment
is 10 –29 Cm. What is the potential energy of the
electricdipole? (2019)
(a) –20 × 10–18 J (b) –7 × 10–27 J
(c) –10 × 10–29 J (d) –9 × 10–20 J
42. In the given circuit, after the switch ‘S’ is turned from
position ‘A’ to position ‘B’, the energy dissipated in the
circuit in terms of capacitance ‘C’ and the total charge ‘Q’
is _____. (2019)
(2019)
40. Seven capacitors, each of capacitance 2 μF, are to
beconnected in a configuration to obtain an
6
effectivecapacitance of F . Which of the
13
combinations, shownin figures below, will achieve the 1 Q2 3 Q2
desired value? (2019) (a) (b)
8 C 8 C
5 Q2 3 Q2
(c) (d)
8 C 4 C
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 84
43. Determine the electric dipole moment of the system of 46. In a Frank-Hertz experiment, an electron of energy 5.6 eV
three charges, placed on the vertices of an equilateral passes through mercury vapour and emerges with an
triangle, as shown in the figure: (2019) energy 0.7 eV. The minimum wavelength of photons emitted
by mercury atoms is close to : (2019)
(a) 1700 nm (b) 2020 nm
(c) 220 nm (d) 250 nm
47. The bob of a simple pendulum has mass 2 g and a charge
of 5.0 μC. It is at rest in a uniform horizontal electric field of
intensity 2000 V/m. At equilibrium, the angle that the
pendulum makes with the vertical is: (take g = 10 m/s2)
(2019)
(a) tan (2.0)
–-1
(b) tan (0.2)
–-1
(c) tan–-1(5.0) (d) tan–-1(0.5)
ˆ ˆ
(a) 3 q j i 48. Voltage rating of a parallel plate capacitor is 500 V. Its
2 dielectric can withstand a maximum electric field of 106 V/
iˆ ˆj m. The plate area is 10–4 m2. What is the dielectric constant
(b) q
2 if the capacitance is 15 pF? (given 0 = 8.86 × 10–12 C2 m2)
(2019)
(c) 2qljˆ
(a) 3.8 (b) 8.5
(d) 3qljˆ
(c) 4.5 (d) 6.2
44. Two satellites, A and B, have masses m and 2m
49. A solid conducting sphere, having a charge Q, is
respectively.A is in a circular orbit of radius R and B is in
surrounded by an uncharged conducting hollow spherical
a circular orbit of radius 2R around the earth. The ratio of
shell. Let the potential difference between the surface of
their kinetic energies, TA / TB, is (2019)
the solid sphere and that of the outer surface of the hollow
1 shell be V. If the shell is now given a charge of –4 Q, the
(a) (b) 1
2 new potential difference between the same two surfaces
1 is nV, where n is: (2019)
(c) 2 (d) 50. A positive point charge is released from rest at a distancer0
2
from a positive line charge with uniform density. Thespeed
45. A block kept on a rough inclined plane, as shown in the (v) of the point charge, as a function of instantaneous
figure, remains at rest upto a maximum force 2 N down the distance r from line charge, is proportional to: (2019)
inclined plane. The maximum external force up the inclined
plane that does not move the block is 10 N. The coefficient
of static friction between the block and the plane is : [Take
g = 10 m/s2] (2019)
r
(a) ve r / r0 (b) v ln
r0
r r
3 3 (c) v ln (d) v
(a) (b) r0 r0
2 4 51. A parallel plate capacitor has 1 μF capacitance. One of
its two plates is given + 2μC charge and the other plate,
1 2 +4μCcharge. The potential difference developed across
(c) (d)
2 3 the capacitor is : (2019)
(a) 3 V (b) 1 V
(c) 5 V (d) 2 V
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 85
52. An electric dipole is formed by two equal and opposite 55. A capacitor with capacitance 5 F is charged to 5 C .
charges q with separation d. The charges have same mass
If the plates are pulled apart to reduce the capacitance to
m. It is kept in a uniform electric field E. If it is slightly
rotated from its equilibrium orientation, then its angular 2 F , how much work is done? (2019)
frequency is : (2019)
(a) 6.25 10 6 J (b) 3.75 10 6 J
qE 2qE
(a) (b) (c) 2.16 10 6 J (d) 2.55 106 J
md md
56. Determine the charge on the capacitor (in C ) in the
qE qE
(c) 2 (d) following circuit :(2019)
md 2md
53. The electric field in a region is given by
E Ax B iˆ, where E is in NC–1 and x is in metres.
The values ofconstants are A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI
unit. If thepotential atx = 1 is V1 and that at x = –5 is V2,
then V1- V2 (2019)
(a) 320 V (b) –48 V
(c) 180 V (d) –520 V 57. The parallel combination of two air filled parallel plate
54. A system of three charges are placed as shown in the capacitors of capacitance C and nC is connected to a
figure: battery of voltage, V. When the capacitors are fully
charged, the battery is removed and after that a dielectric
material of dielectric constant K is placed between the two
plates of the first capacitor. The new potential difference
of the combined system is: (2019)
nV
(a) (b) V
K n
V n 1 V
If D d , the potential energy of the system is best (c)
K n
(d)
K n
given by (2019)
58. Four point charges q, q, q and q are placed on
1 q 2 qQd
4 0 d
(a) y-axis at y 2d , y d , y d and y 2 d ,
2D2
respectively. The magnitude of the electric field E at a
point on the x-axis at x = D, with D d , will behave as:
1 q 2 2qQd
(b)
4 0 d
D2 (2019)
1 q 2 qQd 1 1
2 (a) E (b) E
4 0 d D3
(c) D
D
1 q 2 qQd 1 1
(c) E (d) E
(d)
4 0 d 2 D4 D2
D
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 86
59. A uniformly charged ring of radius 3a and total charge q is 62. A simple pendulum of length L is placed between the plates
placed in xy-plane centred at origin. A point charge q is of a parallel plate capacitor having electric field E, as shown
moving towards the ring along the z-axis and has speed in figure. Its bob has mass m and charge q. The time
vat z = 4a. The minimum value of v such that it crosses period of the pendulum is given by: (2019)
theorigin is : (2019)
1/ 2
2 4 q2 2 1 q2
(a) (b)
m 15 4 0 a m 5 4 0 a
1/ 2 1/ 2
2 2 q2 2 1 q2
(c) (d)
m 15 4 0 a m 15 4 0 a
60. Figure shows charge (q) versus voltage (V) graph for
seriesand parallel combination of two given capacitors.
Thecapacitances are :
L L
2 2
qE 2 q2 E 2
(a)
g (b) g
m m2
L L
2 2 1/ 2
qE 2 qE 2
(c)
g (d) g
m
m
63. Shown in the figure is a shell made of a conductor. It has
inner radius a and outer radius b, and carries charge Q. At
its centre is a dipole P as shown. In this case:
(2019)
(a) 40 μF and 10 μF (b) 60 μF and 40 μF
(c) 50 μF and 30 μF (d) 20 μF and 30 μF
61. In free space, a particle A of charge 1 C is held fixed at a
point P. Another particle B of the same charge and m a s s (2019)
4 g is kept at a distance of 1 mm from P. If B is released, (a) surface change density on the inner surface is uniform
then its velocity at a distance of 9 mm from P is :(2019) Q
and equal to 2
1 4 a 2
Take 9 109 Nm 2 C 2
4 0 (b) electric field outside the shell is the same as that of a
point charge at the centre of the shell.
(a) 1.0 m/s (b) 3.0 10 4 m / s (c) surface charge density on the outer surface depends
on P
(c) 2.0 103 m / s (d) 1.5 10 2 m / s
(d) surface charge density on the inner surface of the
shell is zero everywhere.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 87
64. A point dipole p p0 xˆ is kept at the origin. The 3R
1 a
potential and electric field due to this dipole on the y-axis (a) (b) 1
a 8 R 4
24
at a distance d are, respectively : (Take V = 0 at infinity)
(2019)
R
(c)
1
(d) a
P a2 R 4
3
P P
(a) , (b) 0, 67. In the given circuit, the charge on 4 F capacitor will be:
4 0 d 2 4 0 d 3 4 0 d 3
P P P
(c) 0, (d) ,
4 0 d 3 4 0 d 2 4 0 d 3
65. Two identical parallel plate capacitors, of capacitance C
each, have plates of area A, separated by a distance d.
The space between the plates of the two capacitors, is
filled with three dielectrics, of equal thickness and dielectric
constants K1, K2 and K3. The first capacitors is filled as
shown in Fig. I, and the second one is filled as shown in
Fig. II. If these two modified capacitors are charged by
the same potential V, the ratio of the energy stored in the (2019)
two, would be (E1 refers to capacitors (I) and E 2 to (a) 5.4C (b) 9.6C
capacitors (II) : (2019) (c) 13.4C (d) 24C
68. Two infinite planes each with uniform surface charge
density C / m 2 are kept in such a way that the angle
between them is 300 . The electric field in the region
shown between them is given by; (2020)
E1 K1 K 2 K 3
(a)
E2 K1 K 2 K 3 K 2 K 3 K 3 K1 K1 K 2
E1 K1 K 2 K 3 K 2 K 3 K 3 K1 K1 K 2
(b)
E2 K1 K 2 K 3
3 1
1 y x
E 9K K K (a)
2 0 2 2
(c) E K K K
1 1 2 3
2 1 2 3 K 2 K3 K3 K1 K1 K 2
3 1
E1 K1 K 2 K 3 K 2 K 3 K 3 K1 K1 K 2 1 y x
(d) (b)
2 0 2 2
E2 9 K1 K 2 K 3
66. Let a total charge 2Q be distributed in a sphere of radius
3 1
R, with the charge density given by r kr , where r 1 y x
(c)
2 0 2 2
is the distance from the centre. Two charges A and B, of –
Q each, are placed on diametrically opposite points, at
equal distance, a, from the centre. If A and B do not 3 1
1 y x
experience any force, the: (2019) (d)
2 0 2 2
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 88
69. A parallel plate capacitor has plates of area A separated 71. Effective capacitance of parallel combination of two
by distance ‘d’ between them. It is filled with a dielectric capacitors C1 and C2 is 10 μF. When these capacitor are
which has a dielectric constant varies individually connectes to a voltage source of 1 V, the
energy stored in the capacitor C2 is 4 times of that in C1. If
as k x k 1 x , where ’x’ is the distance these capacitors are connected in series, their effective
capacitance will be: (2020)
measured from one of the plates. If d 1 , the total
capacitance of the system is best given by the expression: (a) 1.6μF (b) 3.2μF
(2020)
(c) 4.2μF (d) 8.4μF
72. If finding the electric field around a surface is given by
q
E enclosed is applicable. In the formula is
0 A 0
permittivity of free space, A is area of Gaussian and qenc is
charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface. This equation
can be used in which of the following equation? (2020)
(a) Only when the Gaussian surface is an equipotential
A 0 k d
2
Ak 0 d surface.
(a) 1
(b) 1 2
d 2 d
(b) Only when E constant on the surface..
A 0 k 2 d Ak 0
(c) 1
d 2
(d) 1 d
d (c) Equipotential surface and E is constant on the
70. Three charged particles A, B and, C with charge –4q, + 2q surface.
and –2q are present on the circumference of a circle of
radius 5ØQÜ. The charges particles A, C and centre O of (d) for any choice of Gaussian surfaces.
the circle formed an equilateral triangle as shown in figure. 73. Consider two charged metallic spheres S1and S2 of radii
Electric field at O along x– direction is: (2020) r1 andr2 respectively. The electric fields E1(on S1) and
E1 r1
E2(on S2) on their surfaces are such that
E2 r2 . Then
the ratio V 1(on S 1) /V 2 (on S 2 ) of the electrostatic
potentials on each sphere is (2020)
2
r1 r1
(a) (b)
r2 r2
3
r2 r1
(c) (d)
r1 r2
3q 2 3q 74. A particle of mass m and q charge is released from rest in
(a) (b) uniform electric field. If there is no other force on the
4 0 d 2 0 d 2 particle, the dependence of its speed V on the distance x
travelled by it is correctly given by (graphs are schematic
3q 3 3q and not drawn to scale) (2020)
(c) (d)
0 d 2 4 0 d 2
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 89
(a)
0a 2 a
(a) 1
d 2d
0a2 3 a
(b) (b) 1
d 2d
a2 a
(c) 0d 1 2d
0a 2 a
(d) 1
d 4d
76. A solid sphere having a radius R and uniform charge
density . If a sphere of radius R/2is carved out of it as
shown in the figure. Find the ratio of the magnitude of
electric fieldat point A and B (2020)
(c)
17 18
(a) (b)
54 54
18 21
(d) (c) (d)
34 34
77.
An electric dipole of moment p iˆ 3 ˆj 2 kˆ 10
29
Cm at the origin (0,0,0).The electric field due to this dipole
at r iˆ 3 ˆj 5kˆ is parallel to [Note that r . p 0 ]
(2020)
(a) iˆ 3 ˆj 2kˆ
75. A capacitor is made of two square plates each of
side ‘a’ making a very small angle between them, (b) iˆ 3 ˆj 2kˆ
as shown in figure. The capacitance will be close to (c) iˆ 3 ˆj 2kˆ
(2020)
(d) iˆ 3 ˆj 2kˆ
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 90
An electric field E 4 xiˆ y 2 1 ˆj N / C , passes through
81. A small point mass carrying some positive charge on it,
78.
is released from the edge of a table. There is a uniform
the box shown in figure. The flux of the electric field electric field in this region in the horizontal direction.
through surface ABCD and BCGF are marked as 1 and Which of the following options then correctly describe
the trajectory of the mass ? (Curves are drawn
Nm2 schematically and are not to scale). (2020)
2 , then difference between 1 2 is .
C
(a)
(2020)
79. A charged particle (mass m and charge q) moves along X
axis with velocity V0. When it passes through the origin it
enters a region having uniform electric field E Ejˆ which
extend upto x = d. Equation of path of electron in the
region x > d is : (2020)
(b)
qEd 2
(a) y x
mV02
qEd d
(b) y mV 2 2 x
0 (c)
qEd
(c) y mV 2 x d
0
qEd
(d) y mV 2 x
0
80. A 5F capacitor is charged fully by a 220V supply. It is
then disconnected from the supply and is connected in (d)
series to another uncharged 2.5 F capacitor. If the energy
X
change during the charge redistribution is J then
100
value of X to the nearest integer is ………….. (2020)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 91
82. A charge Q is distributed over two concentric conducting
85. Two isolated conducting spheres S1 and S2 of radius
thin spherical shells radii r and R (R > r). If the surface
charge densities on the two shells are equal, the electric 2 1
potential at the common centre is : (2020) R and R have 12 C and 3C charges,
3 3
respectively, and are at a large distance from each other.
They are now connected by a conducting wire. A long
time after this is done the charges on S1 and S2 are
respectively : (2020)
(a) 6 C and 3 C
(b) 4.5 C on both
1 (2R r) (c) 4.5 C and 4.5 C
(a) Q
4 0 (R 2 r 2 )
(d) 3 C and 6 C
1 (R r) 86. In the circuit shown in the figure, the total charge is
(b) Q
4 0 (R 2 r 2 ) 750 C and the voltage across capacitor C 2 is 20 V.
1 (R r) Then the charge on capacitor C 2 is : (2020)
(c) Q
4 0 2(R 2 r 2 )
1 (R 2r) Q
(d)
4 0 2(R 2 r 2 )
83. A 10 F capacitor is fully charged to a potential difference
of 50V. After removing the source voltage it is connected
to an uncharged capacitor in parallel. Now the potential
difference across them becomes 20 V. The capacitance of
the second capacitor is : (2020)
(a) 15 F (b) 20 F
(a) 650 C (b) 450 C
(c) 10 F (d) 30 F
84. An ideal cell of emf 10 V is connected in circuit shown in (c) 590 C (d) 160 C
figure. Each resistance is 2. The potential difference
87. Concentric metallic hollow spheres of radii R and 4 R hold
(in V) across the capacitor when it is fully charged is ...
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Given that surface charge
densities of the concentric spheres are equal, the potential
difference V (R) – V (4R) is : (2020)
3Q2 3Q1
(a) (b)
40 R 40 R
3Q1 Q2
(c) (d)
160 R 40 R
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 92
88. Two charged thin infinite plane sheets of uniform surface 89. Two point charges 4q and –q are fixed on the x-axis at
charge density + and - , where + > - , intersect d d
x = - and x = , respectively. If a third point charges
at right angle. Which of the following best represents the 2 2
electric field lines for this system: (2020) ‘q’ is taken from the origin to x = d along the semicircle as
(a) shown in the figure, the energy of the charge will; (2020)
q2
(b) (a) decrease by
40 d
4q 2
(b) decrease by
30 d
3q 2
(c) increase by
40 d
2q 2
(d) increase by
30 d
90. A particle of charge q and mass m is subjected to an electric
field E = E0 (1 – ax2) in thex-direction, where a and E0 are
(c) constants. Initially the particle was at rest at x =0.
Otherthan the initial position the kinetic energy of the
particle becomes zero when the distanceof the particle
from the origin is: (2020)
2
(a) (b) a
a
3 1
(c) (d)
a a
91. A capacitor C is fully charged with voltage V0. After
disconnecting the voltage source, itis connected in
parallel with another uncharged capacitor of capacitance
(d) C
. The energyloss in the process after the charge is
2
distributed between the two capacitors is: (2020)
1 1
(a) CV02 (b) CV02
2 4
1
(c) 1 CV02
2
(d) CV0
3 6
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 93
92. Two capacitors of capacitances C and 2C are charged to 94. Ten charges are placed on the circumference of a circle of
potential differences V and 2V, respectively. These are radius R with constant angular separation between
then connected in parallel in such a manner that the successive charges. Alternate charges 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 have
positive terminal of one is connected to the negative charge (+q) each, while 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 have charge (–q)
terminal of the other. The final energy of this configuration each. The potential V and the electric field E at the centre
is : (2020) of the circle are respectively. (Take V = 0 at infinity)
(2020)
9 (a) V = 0; E = 0
(a) zero (b) CV 2
2
10q 10q
(b) V ;E
25 3 4 0 R 4 0 R 2
(c) CV 2 (d) CV 2
6 2
10q
93. A solid sphere of radius R carries a charge Q + q distributed
(c) V 0; E
uniformly over its volume. A very small point like piece of 4 0 R 2
it of mass m gets detached from the bottom of the sphere
and falls down vertically under gravity. This piece carries
charge q. If it acquires a speed when it has fallen 10q
(d) V ;E0
through a vertical height y (see figure), then : (assume the 4 0 R
remaining portion to be spherical). (2020)
95. In the circuit shown, charge on the 5 F capacitor is :
(2020)
qQ
(a) 2 2y g
4 0 R (R y) m
(a) 5.45 C (b) 18.00 C
QqR (c) 10.90 C (d) 16.36 C
(b) 2 2y 3
g
4 0 R (R y) m 96. A parallel plate capacitor has plate of length ’, width ‘w’
and separation of plates is ‘d’. It is connected to a battery
qQ of emf V.A dielectric slab of the same thickness ‘d’ and
(c) 2 2y g of dielectric constant k = 4 is being inserted between the
4 0 R (R y) m plates of the capacitor. At what length of the slab inside
plates, will the energy stored in the capacitor be two
times the initial energy stored ? (2020)
qQ
(d) 2 2y 2
g (a) 21/3 (b) 1/2
4 0 R ym
(c) 1/4 (d) 1/3
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 94
97. Charges Q1 and Q2 are at points A and B of a right angle 98. Consider the force F on a charge ‘q’ due to a uniformly
triangle OAB (see figure). The resultant electric field at charged spherical shell of radius R carrying charge Q
point O is perpendicular to the hypotenuse, then Q1/Q2is distributed uniformly over it. Which one of the following
proportional to: (2020) statements is true for F, if ‘q’ is placed at distance r from
the centre of the shell? (2020)
1 qQ
(a) F 0 for r R
4 0 R 2
1 qQ
(b) F for r R
4 0 r 2
1 qQ
(c) F for all r
4 0 r 2
1 qQ
(d) F for r R
4 0 R 2
x2 99. Two identical electric point dipoles have dipole moments
(a)
x1
p1 pi and p2 pi and are held on the x axis at
x22 distance ‘a’ from each other. When released, they move
(b) 2 along the x-axis with the direction of their dipole moments
x1 remaining unchanged. If the mass of each dipole is ‘m’,
their speed when they are infinitely far apart is: (2020)
x13
(c) 3 p 3 p 1
x2
(a) (b)
a 2 0 ma a 0 ma
x1
(d)
x2 p 1 p 2
(c) (d)
a 2 0 ma a 0 ma
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 95
EXERCISE -3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Objective Question (One Answer Correct ) 6. A proton and an -particle are situated at r distance apart.
At very large distance apart when released, the kinetic
1. A charge +q is fixed at each of the points x = x0, x = 3x0,
energy of proton will be
x = 5x0, ..... ad inf. on the x axis, and a charge –q is fixed at
each of the points x = 2x0, x = 4x0, x = 6x0, ...... ad inf. Here x0
2ke2 8 ke 2
is a positive constant. Take the electric potential at a point (a) (b)
due to a charge Q at a distance r from it to be Q/(40r). r 5 r
Then, the potential at the origin due to the above system
of charges is ke2 8 ke2
(c) (d)
r r
q
(a) 0 (b) 8 x In2 7. Two identical particles of same mass each m are having
0 0
same magnitude of charge Q. One particle is initially at rest
q In2 on a frictionless horizontal plane and the other particle is
(c) (d) 4 x projected directly towards the first particle from a very
0 0
large distance with a velocity v. The distance of closest
2. Two equal negative charges –q are fixed at points (0, –a) approach of the particle will be
and (0, a) on y-axis. A positive charge Q is released from
rest at the point (2a, 0) on the x-axis. The charge Q will 1 4Q2 1 2Q2
(a) (b)
(a) execute simple harmonic motion about the origin 4 0 m 2 4 0 m 2
(b) move to the origin remain at rest
(c) move to infinity 1 Q2 1 4 Q2
(c) (d)
4 0 m 2 2 4 0 m 2 2
(d) execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion
3. Two point charges +q and –q are held fixed at (–d, 0) and 8. An alpha particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through
(d, 0) respectively of a x-y co-ordinate system. Then 180° by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance of closest
approach is of the order of
(a) the electric field E at all points on the x-axis has the
(a) 1 Å (b) 10–10 cm
same direction
–12 –15
(c) 10 cm (d) 10 cm
(b) work has to be done in bringing at a test charge from
to the origin 9. An electric dipole is placed at origin and is directed along the
x-axis. At a point P far away from the dipole the electric
(c) electric field at all point on y-axis is along x-axis field is parallel to y-axis. OP makes an angle with x axis,
(d) the dipole moment is 2qd along the x-axis then
4. The charge Q and -2Q are placed at some distance .The (a) tan 3 (b) tan 2
locus of points in the plane of the charges where the
potential is zero will be 1
(a) straight line (b) circle (c) tan (d) = 45°
2
(c) a parabola (d) an ellipse 10. The electric dipole is situated in an electric field as shown
5. How should three charges q, 2q and 8q be arranged on a 9 in adjacent figure. The dipole and the electric field are
cm long line such that the potential energy of the system both in the plane of the paper. The dipole is rotated about
is minimum ? an axis perpendicular to the plane of the paper about its
axis at a point A in anti-clockwise direction. If the angle of
(a) q at a distance of 3 cm from 2q
rotation is measured with respect to the direction of the
(b) q at a distance of 5 cm from 2q electric field, then the torque for different values of the
(c) 2q at a distance of 7 cm from q angle of rotation will be represented in fig. given below
by the (clockwise torque +ve)
(d) 2q at a distance of 9 cm from q
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 96
(d)
(a) Curve (1) (b) Curve (2)
13. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric fied.
(c) Curve (3) (d) Curve (4) The lines of force follow the path (s) shown in figure as
11. An electric dipole is situated in an electric field of uniform
intensity E whose dipole moment is p and moment of inertia
is I. If the dipole is displaced slightly from the equilibrium
position, then the angular frequency of its oscillations is
1/ 2 3/ 2
pE pE
(a) (b) (a) 1 (b) 2
I I
(c) 3 (d) 4
1/ 2 1/ 2
I p 14. Two equal charges are separated by a distance d. A third
(c) (d) charge placed on a perpendicular bisector at x distance
pE IE
will experience maximum coulomb force when
12. Two identical point charges are placed at a separation of
d d
d. P is a point on the line joining the charges, at a distance (a) x (b) x
x from any one charge. The field at P is E, E is plotted 2 2
against x for values of x from close to zero to slightly less d d
than d. Which of the following represents the resulting (c) x (d) x
2 2 2 3
curve 15. If an electron has an initial velocity in a direction different
from that of an uniform electric field, the path of the electron is
(a) A straight line (b) A circle
(c) An ellipse (d) A parabola
16. A particle of specific charge (q/m) enters into uniform
(a) electric field E along the centre line, with velocity
qE
v 2q . After how much time it will collide with one
md
of the plates (figure)
(b)
d
(c) (a) Not possible (b) 2 V
md 2 md
(c) (d)
qE qE
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 97
17. A wire is bent in the form of a regular hexagon of side a and 21. A particle of mass ‘m’ and charge ‘q’ is accelerated through
a total charge Q is distributed uniformly over it. One side
a potential difference of V volt, its energy will be
of the hexagon is removed. The electric field due to the
remaining sides at the centre of the hexagon is
(a) qV (b) mqV
Q Q
(a) (b) q q
12 3 0 a 2
16 3 0 a 2 (c) V (d)
m mV
Q Q
(c) 2 (d) A ring of charge with radius of 50 cm has gap of 0.002 m.
8 2 0 a 8 2 0 a 2 22.
If the ring carries a charge of 1 C. What is the electric field
18. In the figure shown, if the linear charge density is , then the
at the centre.
net electric field at O will be
(a) 8.5 × 107 N/C (b) 7.2 × 107 N/C
(c) 3.2 × 107 N/C (d) 4.5 × 107 N/C
23. A thin conducting ring of radius r has an electric charge + Q,
if a point charge q is placed at the centre of the ring, then
tension of the wire of ring will be
Qq Qq
(a) (b)
80 r 2 4 0 r 2
k
(a) Zero (b)
R
Qq Qq
(c) 2 2 (d)
2 k 8 0 r 4 2 0 r 2
2 k
(c) (d)
R R
24. n small drops of same size are charged to V volt each. If
19. An electron moves round a circular path of radius 0.1 m
about an infinite linear charge of density +1 C/m. The they coalesce to form a single large drop, then its potential
speed of the electron will be will be
(a) 5.6 × 103 m/s (b) 2.8 × 105 m/s –1
(a) Vn (b) V n
(c) 5.6 × 107 m/s (d) 2.8 × 107 m/s
1/3 2/3
(c) V n (d) V n
20. An electron having charge e and mass m starts from lower
plate of two metallic plates separated by a distance d, if 25. A solid conducting sphere having a charge Q is surrounded
the potential difference between the plates is V, the time
taken by the electron to reach the upper plate is given by by an uncharged concentric conducting hollow spherical
(ignore gravity) shell. Let the potential difference between the surface of
the solid sphere and that of the outer surface of the hollow
2md 2 md 2 shell be V. If the shell is now given a change of –3Q, the
(a) (b)
eV eV
new potential difference between the same two surfaces is
(a) V (b) 2V
md 2 2md 2
(c) (d)
2eV eV (c) 4V (d) –2V
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 98
26. A uniformly charged and infinitely long line having a linear 29. Figure shows two concentric, conducting shells of radii r
charge density is placed at a normal distance y from a and 2r. The outer shell is given a charge Q. The amount of
point O. Consider an imaginary sphere of radius R with O charge that will appear on outer surface of inner shell if
as centre and R>y .Electric flux through the surface of the inner shell is grounded
sphere is
2 R
(a) Zero (b)
0 Q Q
(a) (b)
2 2
2 R 2 y 2 2 R 2 y 2 (c) – 2Q (d) + 2Q
(c) (d)
0 0 30. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to
a battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Another
27. A charge Q is distributed uniformly on a ring of radius r. A
capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to a
sphere of equal radius r is constructed with its centre at
potential difference 2V. The charging battery is now
the periphery of the ring. The flux of electric field through
disconnected and the capacitors are connected in parallel
the sphere is
to each other in such a way that the positive terminal of
one is connected to the negative terminal of the other. The
final energy of the configuration is
3
(a) zero (b) CV 2
2
25 9
(c) CV 2 (d) CV 2
6 2
Q 2Q 31. A parallel plate capacitor of capacity C 0 is charged to a
(a) 3 (b) 3
0 0
potential V0
Q 3Q
(c) 2 (d) 4 (i) The energy stored in the capacitor when the battery is
0 0 disconnected and the separation is doubled E1
28. A hollow sphere of radius 2R is charged to V volt and (ii) The energy stored in the capacitor when the charging
another small sphere of radius R is charged to V/2 volt. battery is kept connected and the separation
Then the smaller sphere is placed inside the bigger sphere between the capacitor plates is doubled is E2. Then
without changing the net charge on each sphere. The E1/E2 value is
potential difference between the two spheres would be
(a) 4 (b) 3/2
(a) 3V/2 (b) V/4
(c) 2 (d) ½
(c) V/2 (d) V
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 99
32. An infinite number of identical capacitors each of (a) – q, + q, – q, + q (b) – 2q, + 2q, – 2q, +q
capacitance 1F are connected as in adjoining figure. Then (c) – q, + 2q, – 2q, + q (d) None of these
the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
36. Four plates, each of area A and each side are placed parallel
to each other at a distance d. A battery is connected between
the combinations 1 and 3 and 2 and 4. The modulus of
charge on plate 2 is
(a) 1 F (b) 2 F
1
(c) 2 F (d)
2 0 A 3 0 A
33. A finite ladder is constructed by connecting several (a) E (b) E
d d
sections of 2F, 4F capacitor combinations as shown in
the figure. It is terminated by a capacitor of capacitance C. 2 0 A 0 A
What value should be chosen for C such that the equivalent (c) E (d) E
3d d
capacitance of the ladder between the points A and B
becomes independent of the number of sections in between 37. Five capacitors are connected as shown in the diagram. If
the p.d. between A and B is 22 V, the emf of the cell is
(a) 4 F (b) 2 F
(c) 18 F (d) 6 F
34. A capacitor of capacitance C1 = 1 F can with stand maximum (a) 26 V (b) 42 V
voltage V1 = 6kV (kilo-volt) and another capacitor of
(c) 38 V (d) 46 V
capacitance C2 = 3 F can withstand maximum voltage
38. Find the equivalent capacitance between X and Y.
V2 = 4 kV. When the two capacitors are connected in series,
the combined system can withstand a maximum voltage of
(a) 4 kV (b) 6 kV
(c) 8 kV (d) 10 kV
35. Five identical plates are connected across a battery as
follows. If the charge on plate 1 be +q, then the charges on
the plates 2, 3, 4 and 5 are
(a) 3 F (b) 4 F
(c) 5 F (d) 6 F
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 100
39. Find the equivalent capacitance between X and Y. 43. A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose
permittivity varies with the applied voltage according to
the law r = V where =1V–1.The capacitor without
dielectric is charged to voltage V0=156 volt is connected in
parallel with first nonlinear uncharged capacitor. What is
final voltage across the capacitors.
(a) 6 volt (b) 30 volt
(c) 12 volt (d) 4 volt
(a) C (b) 5C
44. A system of three parallel plates each of area A are separated
(c) 2C (d) 3C by distance d1 and d2. The space between them is filled
40. Two identical metal plates are given positive charges Q1 with dielectric of permittivities 1 and 2. The permitivity of
and Q2 (< Q1) respectively. If they are now brought close free space is 0. The equivalent capacitance of system is
together to form a parallel plate capacitor with capacitance
C, the potential difference between them is 0 2 d 0 A
(a) (Q1 + Q2)/2C (b) (Q1 + Q2)/C (a) d d (b) d d
1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
(c) (Q1 – Q2)/C (d) (Q1 – Q2)/2C
41. A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The 1 2 0 d 12 A
plates are pulled apart with a uniform speed. If x is the (c) d d (d) d d
1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2
separation between the plates, the time rate of change of
electrostatic energy of capacitor is proportional to 45. The space between two plates of a condenser is filled with
(a) x–2 (b) x two dielectric media of thickness t1 and t2 and dielectric
(c) x–1 (d) x2 constant k1 and k2 respectively. The capacity of the
condenser is given by :
42. Seven capacitors each of capacitance 2 F are connected
in a configuration to obtain an effective capacitance 10/
11 F. Which of the following combination will achieve
the desired result be ?
(a)
(b)
t t
(a) C 0 A 1 2
K1 k 2
(b) C = (K1 + K2) 0 A/(t1 k1 + t2 k2)
(c)
(c) C = 0 A / [(t1/k1) + (t2/k2)]
A
(d) (K1 – K2) 0 K K (t1 + t2)
1 2
(d)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 101
46. A parallel plate capacitor with air in between the plates has (a)
capacitance of 9 F .The separation between the plates is
d .The space between the plates is now filled with two
dielectrics .One of the dielectric has dielectric constant
k1=3 with thickness d/3 and other one has dielectric constant
k2=6 and thickness 2d/3.The new capacitance will be
(a)1.8 F (b) 20.25 F
(c) 40.5 F (d) 45 F
(b)
47. Condenser A has a capacity of 15F when it is filled with a
medium of dielectric constant 15. Another condenser B has
a capacity of 1F with air between the plates. Both are
charged separately by a battery of 100 V. After charging,
both are connected in parallel without the battery and the
dielectric medium being removed. The common potential
now is
(a) 400 V (b) 800 V (c)
(c) 1200 V (d) 1600 V
48. An uncharged capacitor with a solid dielectric is connected
to a similar air capacitor charged to a potential of V0. If the
common potential after sharing of charges becomes V, then
the dielectric constant of the dielectric must be
V0
(a)
V
(a) Both C2 and C3 > C1 (b) C3 > C1 but C2 < C1
V (c) Both C2 and C-3 < C1 (d) C1 = C2 = C3
(b) V
0 51. The expression for the capacity of the capacitor formed
by compound dielectric placed between the plates of a
V0 V parallel plate capacitor as shown in figure, will be (area of
(c)
V plate = A)
(d)
V0 V
V0
49. The magnitude of electric field E in the annular region of a
charged cylindrical capacitor
(a) is same throughout
(b) is higher near the outer cylinder than near the inner
cylinder
0 A 0 A
(c) varies as 1/r where r is the distance from the axis (a) (b)
d1 d 2 d 3 d1 d 2 d 3
2
(d) varies as 1/r where r is the distance from the axis
K1 K 2 K 3 K1 K 2 K 3
50. The capacitance of a parallel plate condenser is C 1
(fig. a). A dielectric of dielectric constant K is inserted as
0 A K1K 2 K 3 AK1 AK 2 AK 3
shown in figure (b) and (c). If C2 and C3 are the capacitances (c) (d) 0
in figure (b) and (c), then d1d 2 d3 d1 d2 d3
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 102
52. The space between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor 58. Two identical thin rings, each of radius R metres, are
is filled completely with a dielectric substance having coaxially placed a distance R metres apart. If Q1 coul, and
dielectric constant 4 and thickness 3 mm. The distance Q2 coul, are respectively the charges uniformly spread on
between the plates in now increased by inserting a second the two rings, the work done in moving a charge q from the
sheet of thickness 5 mm and dielectric constant K. If the centre of one ring to that of the other is
capacitance of the capacitor so formed is one-half of the
(a) zero
original capacitance, the value of K is
(a) 10/3 (b) 20/3
q(Q1 Q2 ) ( 2 1)
(c) 5/3 (d) 15/3 (b)
(4 20 R)
53. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the plates are kept vertical.
The upper half of the space between the plates is filled
with a dielectric with dielectric constant K and the lower q 2(Q1 Q 2 )
half with a dielectric with dielectric constant 2K. The ratio (c)
(40 R)
of the charge density on the upper half of the plates to the
charge density on the lower half of the plates will be equal to
q(Q1 Q 2 ) ( 2 1)
(a) 1 (b) 2 (d)
(4 20 R)
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2
54. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the region between the plates Using the following passage, solve Q. 59 to Q 61
is filled by a dielectric also. The capacitor is connected to Three large plates A,B and C are placed parallel to each
a cell and the slab is taken out. other and charges are given as shown below
(a) Some charge is drawn from the cell
(b) Some charge is returned to the cell –3C 4C 5C
(c) The potential difference across the capacitor is
reduced
(d) No work is done by an external agent in taking the
slab out
55. If we increase ‘d’ of a parallel plate condensor to ‘2d’ and
fill wax to the whole empty space between its two plate,
then capacitance increase from 1PF to 2PF. What is the
dielectric constant of wax.
(a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 6 (d) 8 A B C
56. A capacitor is connected across another charged capacitor. Then answer the following questions
The energy in the two capacitors will: 59. The charge that appears on the left surface of plate B is
(a) be equal to the energy in the initial capacitor
(a) –3C (b) 3C
(b) Be less than that in the initial capacitor (c) 6C (d) 5C
(c) Be more than that in the initial capacitor 60. The charge on the inner surface of plate C if the plate B is
(d) Be more or less depending on the relative capacities of earthed
the two capacitors
(a) –3C (b) 3C
57. A parallel combination of 0.1 M resistor and a 10 F (c) 6C (d) 5C
capacitor is connected across a 1.5 V source of negligible
resistance. The time required for the capacitor to get 61. The charge on left surface of B if B and C are both earthed
charged upto 0.75 V is approximately (in second) (a) –3C (b) 3C
(a) infinite (b) loge 2 (c) 6C (d) 5C
(c) log10 2 (d) zero
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 103
True/False 71. Two fixed, equal, positive charges, each of magnitude
–5
5 × 10 coul are located at points A and B separated by a
62 . A small metal ball is suspended in a uniform electric field distance of 6 m. An equal and opposite charge moves
with the help of an insulated thread. If high energy X- ray towards them along the line COD, the perpendicular
beam falls on the ball, the ball will be deflected in the bisector of the line AB.
direction of the field.
63. A ring of radius R carries uniformly distributed charge + Q.
A point charge – q is placed on the axis of the ring at a
distance 2R from the centre of the ring and released from
rest. The particle executes a simple harmonic motion along
the axis of the ring.
Integer Type Questions
64. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge Q distributed in its
volume with charge density = kra, where k and a are constant
and r is the distance from its centre. If the electric field are
r = R/2 is 1/8 times that at r = R. What is the value of a.
The moving charge, when it reaches the point C at a
65. Two point charges 4C and –10C are placed 10 cm apart
distance of 4m from O, has a kinetic energy of 4 joules.
in air. An electric slab of large length and breadth but of
Calculate the distance of the farthest point D which the
thickness 5 cm is placed between them. Calculate the force
(in newton) of attraction between the charges if the relative negative charge will reach before returning towards C.
permittivity of the dielectric is 9. 72. A thin fixed ring of radius 1 metre has a positive charge
–5
66. The linear charge density on a dielectric ring of radius R is 1 × 10 coulomb uniformly distributed over it. A particle of
–6
mass 0. 9 gm and having a negative charge of 1 × 10
coulomb is placed on the axis at a distance of 1 cm from the
varying with angle as 0 cos where 0 is
2 centre of the ring. Show that the motion of the negatively
constant .What is potential at the centre O of the ring. charged particle is approximately simple harmonic.
67. A potential difference is applied to the plates of a capacitor Calculate the time period of oscillations.
filled with an insulator with stored energy as U. The 73. A non-conducting disc of radius a and uniform positive
capacitor is disconnected and the insulator is pulled out surface charge density is placed on the ground with its
now. The work done in pulling out the insulator against axis vertical. A particle of mass m and positive charge q is
the electric field is 4U.What is the dielectric constant of dropped, along the axis of the disc from a height H with zero
the insulator. initial velocity. The particle has q/m = 40g/.
68. A charge of 1 C is given to one plate of a parallel-plate (a) Find the value of H if the particle just reaches the disc.
capacitor of capacitance 0.1 F and a charge of 2C is
(b) Sketch the potential energy of the particle as a function
given to the other plate. Find the potential difference, in
of its height and find its equilibrium position.
volts developed between the plates.
69. A capacitor having a capacitance of 100F is charged to a 74. Three concentric spherical metallic shells, A, B and C of
potential difference of 50 V. The charging battery is radii a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities ,
disconnected and a dielectric slab of dielectric constant – and respectively.
2.5 is inserted. What charge in millicoloumb would have (i) Find the potential of the three shells A, B and C.
produced this potential difference in absence of the (ii) If the shells A and C are at the same potential, obtain
dielectric slab. the relation between the radii a, b and c.
Subjective Question a2
VA a b c , VB b c ,
0 0 b
70. Three particles, each of mass 1 gm and carrying a charge
q, are suspended from a common point by insulated
massless strings, each 100 cm long. If the particles are in a 2 b2
VC c
equilibrium and are located at the corners of an equilateral 0 c c
triangle of side length 3 cm, calculate the charge q on each
2
particle. (Take g = 10 m/s ). (iii) a + b = c
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 104
75. (a) A charge of Q is uniformly distributed over a spherical 81. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitances C and 2C are
volume of radius R. Obtain an expression for the connected in parallel and charged to a potential difference
energy of the system. V. The battery is then disconnected and the region between
(b) What will be the corresponding expression for the the plates of capacitor C is completely filled with a material
energy needed to completely disassemble the planet of dielectric constant K. The potential difference across
earth against the gravitational pull amongst its the capacitors now becomes ...........
constituent particles ? 82. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with plate
Assume the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density. area A and separation d, is C. The space between the plates
Calculate this energy, given the product of the mass is filled with two wedges of dielectric constants K1 and K2
31
and the radius of the earth to be 2.5 × 10 kg-m. respectively (figure). Find the capacitance of the resulting
capacitor.
(c) If the same charge of Q as in part (a) above is given to
a spherical conductor of the same radius R, what will
be the energy of the system ?
76. A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive charge
density per unit length is located in the y-z plane with its
centre at the origin O. A particle of mass m and positive
charge q is projected from the point P (R 3,0, 0) on the
positive x-axis directly towards O, with an initial speed v.
Find the smallest (non-zero) value of the speed v such 83. Three identical capacitors C1, C2 and C3 have a capacitance
that the particle does not return to P. of 1.0 F each and they are uncharged initially. They are
77. A charge Q is distributed over two concentric hollow spheres connected in a circuit as shown in the figure and C1 is
of radii r and R (> r) such that the surface densities are equal. then filled completely with a dielectric material of relative
Find the potential at the common centre. permittivity r. The cell electromotive force (emf) V0 = 8 V.
78. Two fixed charges – 2Q and Q are located at the points First the switch S1 is closed while the switch S2 is kept
with coordinates (–3a, 0) and (+3a, 0) respectively in the x- open. When the capacitor C3 is fully charged, S1 is opened
y plane. and S2 is closed simultaneously. When all the capacitors
reach equilibrium, the charge on C3 is found to be 5C.
(a) Show that all points in the x-y plane where the electric
The value of r = ________.
potential due to the two charges is zero, lie on a circle
Find its radius and the location of its centre.
(b) Give the expression V (x) at a general point on the x-axis
and sketch the function V (x) on the whole x-axis.
(c) If a particle of charge +q starts form rest at the centre
of the circle, show by a short quantative argument
that the particle eventually crosses the circle. Find its
speed when it does so. 84. The figure shows two identical parallel plate capacitors
79. Three point charges q, 2q and 8q are to be placed on a connected to a battery with the switch S closed. The switch
9 cm long straight line. Find the positions where the is now opened and the free space between the plates of
charges should be placed such that the potential energy the capacitors is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant
of this system is minimum. In this situation, what is the (or relative permittivity) 3. Find the ratio of the total
electric field at the position of the charge q due to the electrostatic energy stored in both capacitors before and
other two charges ? after the introduction of the dielectric
80. Two isolated metallic solid spheres of radii R and 2R are
charged such that both of these have same charge density
. The spheres are located for away from each other and
connected by a thin conducting wire. Find the new charge
density on the bigger sphere.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 105
85. Two parallel plate capacitors A and B have the same 89. A small sphere of mass m and having charge q is suspended
–4
separation d = 8.85 × 10 m between the plates. The plate by a light thread
2 2
areas of A and B are 0.04 m and 0.02 m respectively. A (a) Tension in thread must reduce if another charged sphere
slab of dielectric constant (relative permittivity) K = 9 has is placed vertically below it
dimensions such that it can exactly fill the space between
(b) Tension in thread is greater that weight mg if another
the plates of capacitor B.
charged sphere is held in same horizontal line in which first
sphere stays in equilibrium
(c) Tension in thread is always equal to weight mg
(d) Tension may increase to double its original value if
another charge is below it
90. The correct options is(are)
(a) charge cannot exist without mass but mass can exist
(i) The dielectric slab is placed inside A as shown in figure without charge
(a). A is then charged to a potential difference of 110 V. (b) charge is conserved but mass is not conserved
Calculate the capacitance of A and the energy stored (c) charge is independent of state of rest or motion
in it. (d) mass is independent of state of rest or motion
(ii) The battery is disconnected and the dielectric slab is 91. A deuteron and an alpha particle are placed in uniform
removed from A. Find the work done by the external electric field .The forces acting on them are F1 and F2 and
agency in removing the slab from A. their acceleration are a1 and a2 respectively.
(iii) The same dielectric slab is now placed inside B, filling (a) F1 = F2 (b) a1 = a2
it completely. The two capacitors A and B are then
(c) F1 F2 (d) a1 a2
connected as shown in figure (c). Calculate the energy
92. The electric field in a region is directed outward and is
stored in the system.
proportional to the distance r from the origin. Taking electric
86. A charge q is placed at the centre of the line joining two
potential to be zero at origion
equal charges Q. The system of the three charges will be
in equilibrium if q is equal to : (a) it is uniform in the region
(a) – Q/2 (b) – Q/4 (b) it is propotional to r
(c) + Q/4 (d) + Q/2 (c) it is proportional to r2
87. A conducting sphere S1 of radius r is attached to an insulating (d) it decreases as one goes away from origin
handle. Another conducting sphere S2 of radius R is mounted 93. Ring with uniform charge Q and radius R is placed in y–z
on an insulating stand, S2 is initially uncharged. plane with its centre at origin. Then
S1 is given a charge Q brought into contact with S2 and (a) the electric field at origin is maximum
removed. S1 is recharged such that the charge on it is
kQ
again Q and it is again brought into contact with S2 and (b) The potential at origin is
R
removed. This procedure is repeated n times.
(a) Find the electrostatic energy of S2 after n such contacts kQ
(c) the field at the point (x, 0, 0) is
with S1. R 2 X2
(b) What is the limiting value of this energy as n ? (d) maximum value of electric field on the axis will be
Objective Question (one or more correct answer) q
6 3 0 R 2
88. A dielectric slab of thickness d is inserted in a parallel
plate capacitor whose negative plate is at x = 0 and 94. Two metallic spheres have same radii. One of them is solid
positive plate is at x = 3d. The slab is equidistant from the and other is hollow. They are charged to same potential.
plates. The capacitor is given some charge. As x goes from The charge on former is q1 and on later is q2. We have
0 to 3d (a) q1 = q2
(a) the magnitude of the electric field remains the same (b) Electric field inside both of them is zero.
(b) the direction of the electric field remains the same (c) Electrostatic potential in both the spheres at an inside
point is same as on surface
(c) the electric potential increases continuously
(d) Charge in both is effectively concentrated at the centre
(d) the electric potential increases at first then decreases for field strength at an external point.
and again increases
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 106
95. A spherical charged conductor has surface charge density. 100. In a uniformly charge dielectric sphere a very thin tunnel
The electric field on its surface is E and electric potential of has been made along the diameter shown in figure. A
the conductor is V. Now the radius of the sphere is halved particle with charge –q having mass m is released from rest
keeping the charge to be constant.The new value of electric at one end of the tunnel for the situation described, mark
field and potential would be out the correct statements
(a) 4E (b) 2V (a) Charge particle will perform SHM about the centre of
sphere as mean position
(c) 2E (d) 4V
96. With regards to Gauss’s law and electric flux which of the 20 mR 3
(b) The time period of the particle is 2
following statements are correct. Qq
(a) Electric flux through closed surface is equal to total flux (c) speed of the particle crossing the mean position is
due to all charges enclosed within that surface . Qq
(b) Gauss’s law is applicable only when there is symmetrical 40Rm
distribution of charges
(d) Particle will perform oscillations but not SHM
(c) Electric field appearing in the Gauss’s law is resultant
electric field due to all the charges present inside as well 101. An electric charge (q = 20 × 10–9C) is placed at a point (1, 2, 4).
outside the given closed surface At the point (3, 2, 1) the electric
(a) Field will increase by a factor K if the space between the
(d) Electric field calculated by Gauss’s law is the field due
points is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant K
to only those charges which are enclosed inside the
Gaussian surface. (b) Field will be along y axis
97. In uniform electric field equipotential surfaces must (c) Potential will be 49.9 volt
(a) be plane surfaces (d) Field will have no y component.
102. In the circuit shown in steady state
(b) be normal to the direction of the field
(c) be spaced that surfaces having equal difference in
potential are equally spaced
(d) have decreasing potential along field
98. When the separation between two charges in increased
(a) electric potential energy increases
(b) electric potential energy decreases
(a) charge across 4F capacitor is 20 C
(c) force between them decreases
(b) charge across 4F capacitor is 10 C
(d) electric potential energy may increase or decreases (c) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 5 Volt
99. Two point charges 2q and 8q are placed at distance d (d) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 10 Volt
apart. A third charge –q is placed at distance d/3 from 2q 103. A dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of an isolated
on line joining the charges 2q and 8q. Then charged capacitor. Which of the following quantities will
change.
(a) Electric potential energy of the system is maximum
(a) the electric field in the capacitor
(b) Electric potential energy of system is minimum
(b) the charge on the capacitor
(c) charge –q is in unstable equilibrium (c) the potential difference between the plates
(d) charge –q is in stable equilibrium (d) the stored energy in the capacitor
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 107
104. Two conducting spheres of unequal radii are given charges
such that they have the same charge density. If they are
brought in contact
(a) some heat will be produced
(b) charge will flow from larger to smaller sphere
(c) charge will flow from smaller to larger sphere
(a) electric field near A in the cavity = electric field near B
(d) no charge will be exchanged between the spheres
in the cavity
105. A parallel plate air capacitor is connected to a battery. The
(b) charge density at A = charge density at B
quantities charge, voltage, electric field and energy
associated with this capacitor are given by Q0, V0, E0 and (c) potential at A = potential at B
U0 respectively. A dielectric slab is now introduced to fill
(d) total electric field flux through the surface of the cavity
the space between the plates with the battery still in
is q/0
connection. The corresponding quantities now given by
Q, V, E and U are related to the previous one as
Match the Column Type Questions
(a) Q > Q0 (b) V > V0
109. Consider the situation shown below. The switch S is open
(c) E > E0 (d) U > U0 for a long time and then closed. Then match the columns
106. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging
battery is then disconnected. If the plates of the capacitor
are moved farther apart by means of insulating handles
(a) the charge on the capacitor increases
(b) the voltage across the plates increases
(c) the capacitance increases Column-1 Column-2
(d) the electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor increases 1
(a) Charge flown through (P) CE 2
107. A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate 2
separation d is charged to potential difference V and then battery when switch is
the battery is disconnected. A slab of dielectric constant closed
K is then inserted between the plates of the capacitor so 1
as to fill the space between the plates. If Q, E and W denote (b) Change in energy stored (Q) CE 2
4
respectively, the magnitude of charge on each plate, the
in capacitor
electric field between the plates (after the slab is inserted),
and work done on the system, in question, in the process 1
(c) Heat developed in system (R) CE 2
of inserting the slab, then 8
0 AV 0 KAV CE
(a) Q (b) Q (d) Work done by battery (S)
d d 2
110. In case of an isolated parallel plate capacitor there is effect
on its capacity when a dielectric is introduced or plate
V 0 AV 2 1
(c) E (d) W 1 K separation is changed. Match Column-1 with column-2 for
Kd 2d the statements in Column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
108. An elliptical cavity is carved within a perfect conductor. A
(a) When the plates of (P) Work done by external
positive charge q is placed at the centre of the cavity. The
parallel plate capacitor agent is negative
points A and B are on the cavity surface as shown in the
are pulled apart keeping
figure. Then
charge constant
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 108
(b) When the plates of (Q) Work done by battery 113. The electric potential V at any point x, y, z (all in metres) in
2
parallel plate capacitor is positive space is given by V = 4x volts. The electric field at the
are pulled apart keeping point (1m, 0,2m) is ................ V/m.
it potential constant 114. Five identical capacitor plates, each of area A, are arranged
(c) When a dielectric slab (R) Electric potential such that adjacent plates are at a distance d apart, the
is gradually inserted energy of the system plates are connected to a source of emf V as shown in the
between the plates of decreases figure.
parallel plate capacitor
and its potential is kept
constant
(d) When a dielectric slab (S) Work done by external
is gradually inserted agent is positive
between the plates of an
isolated parallel plate
capacitor
111. Different shaped charged bodies and their corresponding The charge on plate 1 is ......... and on plate 4 is ..........
electric fields are mentioned Match the Column 1 with 115. Five point charges, each of value + q coul, are placed on five
Column 2. vertices of a regular hexagon of side L metres. The magnitude
Column-1 Column-2 of the force on the point charge of value – q coul. placed at
(a) Spherical charged (P) At centre electric field the centre of the hexagen is ............ newton.
conductor is zero
(b) Infinite plane sheet of (Q) Electric field is uniform
charge
(c) Uniformly charged ring (R) Electric field is
discontiunous at the
surface
(d) Sphere with uniform (S) At the surface electric
volume distribution of field is continous and
charge maximum.
116. An infinite number of electric charges each equal to 5 nano-
Fill in the blanks coulomb (magnitude) are placed along X-axis at
x = 1cm, x = 2 cm, x = 4 cm, x = 8 cm ………. and so on. In the
112. A point charge q moves from point P to point S along the setup if the consecutive charges have opposite sign, then
path PQRS (fig.) in a uniform electric field E pointing parallel the electric field in Newton/Coulomb at x = 0 is
to the positive direction of the x-axis. The coordinates of
the points P, Q, R and S are (a, b, O), 1
9 109 N m 2 / c2
(2a, O, O) (a, –b, O) and (O, O, O) respectively. The work 40
done by the field in the above process is given by the
expression.......... (a) 12 × 104 (b) 24 × 104
(c) 36 × 104 (d) 48 × 104
117. Two small balls having equal positive charges Q (coulomb)
on each are suspended by two insulating strings of equal
length L (metre) from a hook fixed to a stand. The whole
set up is taken in a satellite into space where there is no
gravity (state of weightlessness). The angle between the
two strings is ............ and the tension in each string is
.......... newtons.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 109
EXERCISE -4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
1. Four point charges + 8mC, –1mC, – 1mC, and + 8mC are 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(a) k k k 2 k (b) k k k 2 k
27 3 3 27 1 2 3 1 2 3
fixed at the points m, m, m and + m
2 2 2 2
–4
respectively on the y-axis. A particle of mass 6 × 10 kg and 1 k1 k 2 k1 k 3 k k
charge + 0.1 C moves along the -x direction. Its speed at x = (c) k k k 2 k 3 (d) k 2 3
1 2 k1 k 2 k 2 k 3
+ is V0. Find the least value of V0 for which the particle
will cross the origin. Find also the kinetic energy of the 4. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The capacitor
particle at the origin. Assume that space is gravity free. Given A has a charge q on it whereas B is uncharged. The charge
appearing on the capacitor B a long time after the switch is
1 9 2 2
9 × 10 Nm /C . (2000) closed is (2001)
40
2. Three charges Q, +q and +q are placed at the vertices of a
right-angled isosceles triangle as shown. The net electrostatic
energy of the configuration is zero if Q is equal to (2000)
(a) zero (b) q/2
(c) q (d) 2q
q 2q
(a) (b) 5. Three positive charges of equal value q are placed at the
1 2 2 2 vertices of an equilateral triangle. The resulting lines of
(c) –2q (d) +q force should be sketched as in (2001)
3. A parallel plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and
capacitance C is filled with three different dielectric
materials having dielectric constants k1, k2 and k3 as
shown. If a single dielectric material is to be used to have
the same capacitance C in this capacitor then its dielectric (a) (b)
constant k is given by (2000)
(c) (d)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 110
6. A uniform electric field pointing in positve x-direction exists
in a region. Let A be the origin, B be the point on the x-
axis at x = +1 cm and C be the point on the y-axis at y = +1
cm. Then the potentials at the points A, B and C satisfy :
(a) VA < VB (b) VA > VB (2001)
(a) (b)
(c) VA < VC (d) VA > VC
–3
7. A small ball of mass 2 × 10 kg having a charge of 1 C is
suspended by a string of length 0.8 m. Another identical
ball having the same charge is kept at the point of
suspension. Determine the minimum horizontal velocity
which should be imparted to the lower ball, so that it can
make complete revolution. (JEE 2001)
8. Two equal point charges are fixed at x = –a and x = + a on the
x-axis. Another point charge Q is placed at the origin. The (c) (d)
change in the electrical potential energy of Q, when it is
displaced by a small distance x along the x-axis, is
approximately proportional to (2002)
2
(a) x (b) x 12. A positive point charge q is fixed at origin. A dipole with a
3
(c) x (d) 1/x dipole moment p is placed along the x-axis far away from
9. Two identical capacitors, have the same capacitance C. the origin with p pointing along positive x-axis. Find : (a)
One of them is charged to potential V1 and the other to V2. the kinetic energy of the dipole when it reaches a distance
The negative ends are also connected, the decrease in d from the origin, and (b) the force experienced by the
energy of the combined system is (2002) charge q at this moment. (JEE 2003)
13. There are two large parallel metallic plates S1 and S2 carrying
1 1
(a)
4
C V12 V22 (b)
4
C V12 V22 surface charge densities 1 and 2 respectively (1 > 2)
placed at a distance d apart in vacuum. Find the work done
by the electric field in moving a point charge q a distance
1 1
C V1 V2 C V1 V2 a (a < d) from S1 towards S2 along a line making an angle /
2 2
(c) (d)
4 4 4 with the normal to the plates. (JEE 2004)
10. Charges +q and –q are located at the corners of a cube of 14. Consider the charge configuration and a spherical Gaussian
side as show in the figure. Find the work done to separate surface as shown in the figure. When calculating the flux
the charges to infinite distance. (2003) of the electric field over the spherical surface, the electric
field will be due to (JEE 2004)
11. A metallic shell has a point charge q kept inside its cavity.
(a) q2 (b) only the positive charges
Which one of the following diagrams correctly represents
the electric lines of forces ? (JEE 2003) (c) all the charges (d) +q1 and –q1
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 111
15. Six charges of equal magnitude, 3 positive and 3 negative 19. Positive and negative point charges of equal magnitude
are to be placed on PQRSTU corners of a regular hexagon,
a
are kept at 0,0, and 0,0, respectively. The work
such that field at the centre is double that of what it would a
have been if only one +ve charge is placed at R. (2004) 2 2
done by the electric field when another positive point
charge is moved from (–a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is (2007)
(a) positive
(b) negative
(c) zero
(d) depends on the path connecting the initial and final
positions
20. A long, hollow conducting cylinder is kept coaxially
(a) +, +, +, –, –, – (b) –, +, +, +, –, – inside another long, hollow conducting cylinder of
(c) –, +, +, –, +, – (d) +, –, +, –, +, – larger radius. Both the cylinders are initially electrically
16. A conducting bubble of radius a, thickness t (t << a) has neutral. (JEE 2007)
potential V. Now the bubble collapses into a droplet. Find (a) a potential difference appears between the two cylinders
the potential of the droplet. (JEE 2005) when a charge density is given to the inner cylinder
17. Three infinitely long charge sheets are placed as shown in (b) a potential difference appears between the two
figure. The electric field at point P is (JEE 2005) cylinders when a charge density is given to the outer
cylinder
(c) no potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when a uniform line charge is kept along the axis
of the cylinders
(d) no potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when same charge density is given to both the
2 2
(a) k̂ (b) k̂ cylinders
0 0
21. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positive point
4 4 charge is placed outside the sphere. The net charge on the
(c) k̂ (d) k̂
0 0 sphere is then (JEE 2007)
18. For spherical symmetrical charge distribution, variation of (a) negative and distributed uniformly over the surface of
electric potential with distance from centre is given in the sphere
diagram. Given that (JEE 2006) (b) negative and appears only at the point on the sphere
closest to the point charge
q q
V for r R 0 and V for r R 0 (c)negative and distributed non-uniformly over the entire
40 R 0 40 r
surface of the sphere
(d) zero
22. A spherical portion has been removed from a solid sphere
having a charge distributed uniformly in its volume as
shown in the figure. The electric field inside the emptied
space is (JEE 2007)
Then which option(s) are correct
(a) Total charge within 2R0 is q
(b) Total electrostatic energy for r R0 is zero
(c) At r = R0 electric field is discontinuous
(a) zero everywhere (b) non-zero and uniform
(d) There will be no charge anywhere except at r = R0 (c) non-uniform (d) zero only at its centre
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 112
q q 2q
23. Consider a system of three charges , and placed
3 3 3
at points A, B and C respectively, as shown in the figure.
Take O to be the centre of the circle of radius R and angle
CAB = 60° (2008)
25. The electric field at r = R is (2008)
(a) independent of a
(b) directly proportional to a
(c) directly proportional to a2
(d) inversely proportional to a
26. For a = 0, the value of d (maximum value of as shown in
the figure) is (2008)
q
(a) The electric field at point O is directed along
80 R 2
3Ze 3Ze
the negative x–axis (a) (b)
4R 3 R 3
(b) The potential energy of the system is zero
(c) The magnitude of the force between the charges at C
4Ze Ze
q2 (c) (d) .
and B is 3R 3 3R 3
54 0 R 2
27. The electric field within the nucleus is generally observed
q to be linearly dependent on r. This implies (2008)
(d) The potential at point O is
12 0 R
R
24. Statement I : For practical purposes, the earth is used as a (a) a = 0 (b) a
reference at zero potential in electrical circuits. 2
Statement II : The electrical potential of a sphere of radius 2R
(c) a = R (d) a
R with charge Q uniformly distributed on the surface is 3
Q 28. A parallel plate capacitor C with plates of unit area and
given by 4 R . (2008) separation d is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant
0
K = 2. The level of liquid is d/3 initially. Suppose the liquid
(a) Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II level decreases at a constant speed v, the time constant as
is the correct explanation for Statement–I. a function of time t is (2008)
(b) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II
is not a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(c) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false.
(d) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
Using the following passage, solve Q. 25 to Q 26
The nuclear charge (Ze) is non-uniformly distributed within
a nucleus of radius R. The charge density (r) (charge per
6 0 R (15d 9vt) 0 R
unit volume) is dependent only on the radial distance r (a) (b)
5d 3vt 2d 2 3dvt 9v 2 t 2
from the centre of the nucleus as shown in figure. The
electric field is only along the radial direction. 6 0 R (15d 9vt) 0 R
(c) (d)
5d 3vt 2d 2 3dvt 9v 2 t 2
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 113
29. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii R, 2R 32. A few electric field lines for a system of two charges Q1
and 3R are given charges Q1, Q2 and Q3, respectively. It is and Q2 fixed at two different points on the x–axis are shown
found that the surface charge densities on the outer in the figure. These lines suggest that (2010)
surfaces of the shells are equal. Then, the ratio of the
charges given to the shells, Q1 : Q2 : Q3, is (2009)
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 3 : 5
(c) 1 : 4 : 9 (d) 1 : 8 : 18
a
30. A disk of radius having a uniformly distributed charge
4
(a) |Q1| > |Q2|
a
6C is placed in the x–y plane with its centre at , 0, 0 .
2 (b) |Q1| < |Q2|
A rod of length a carrying a uniformly distributed charge (c) at a finite distance to the left of Q1 the electric field is
zero
a 5a
8C is placed on the x–axis from x to x . Two point
4 4 (d) at a finite distance to the right of Q2 the electric field is
zero
charges –7C and 3C are placed at a , a , 0 and
4 4 33. A tiny spherical oil drop carrying a net charge q is balanced
in still air with a vertical uniform electric field of strength
3a 3a , respectively. Consider a cubical surface
, ,0 81
4 4 105 Vm 1 . When the field is switched off, the drop
7
a a a is observed to fall with terminal velocity 2×10–3 ms–1. Given
formed by six surfaces x , y , z . The g=9.8 ms–2, viscosity of the air = 1.8×10–5 Ns m–2 and the
2 2 2
electric flux through this cubical surface is (2009) density of oil = 900 kg m–3, the magnitude of q is (2010)
(a) 1.6×10–19 C (b) 3.2×10–19 C
(c) 4.8×10–19 C (d) 8.0×10–19 C
34. A uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R carries
uniform surface charge density of per unit area. It is
made of two hemispherical shells, held together by pressing
them with force F. F is proportional to (2010)
2C 2C
(a) (b)
0 0
1 2
(a) 1 2 R 2 (b) R
10C 12C 0 0
(c) (d)
0 0
1 2
(c) 1
2
(d)
31. Under the influence of the coulomb field of charge +Q, a 0 R 0 R 2
charge – q is moving around it in an elliptical orbit. Find
35. A spherical metal shell A of radius RA and a solid metal
out the correct statement(s). (2009)
sphere B of radius RB (<RA) are kept far apart and each is
(a) The angular momentum of the charge – q is constant given charge +Q. Now they are connected by a thin metal
wire. Then (2011)
(b) The linear momentum of the charge –q is constant
(a) Einside
A 0 (b) QA > QB
(c) The angular velocity of the charge –q is constant
A R B
(d) The linear speed of the charge – q is constant (c) R (d) E on
A
surface
E on
B
surface
B A
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 114
36. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct? (2011)
(a) If the electric field due to a point charge varies as r–2.5
instead of r–2, then the Gauss’s law will still be valid
(b) The Gauss’s law can be used to calculate the field
distribution around an electric dipole
(c) If the electric field between two point charges is zero
somewhere, then the sign of the two charges is the same
(d) The work done by the external force in moving a unit
positive charge from point A at potential VA to point B at (a) The net electric flux crossing the plane x = + a/2 is equal
potential VB is (VB – VA) to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = –a/2
37. Consider an electric field E E 0 x,ˆ where E0 is a constant. (b) The net electric flux crossing the plane y = + a/2 is more than
The flux through the shaded area (as shown in the figure) the net electric flux crossing the plane y = –a/2
due to this field is (2011)
q
(c) The net electric flux crossing the entire region is
0
(d) The net electric flux crossing the plane z = + a/2 is equal
to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = + a/2
40. Consider a thin spherical shell of radius R with its centre at
the origin carrying uniform positive surface charge density.
The variation of the magnitude of the electric field |E (r)|
and the electric potential V (r) with the distance r from the
centre, is best represented by which graph ? (2012)
(a) 2E0a2 (b) 2 E0 a 2
E0 a 2
(c) E0a2 (d)
2
(a)
38. A 2F capacitor is charged as shown in the figure. The
percentage of its stored energy dissipated after the switch
S is turned to position 2 is (2011)
(b)
(c)
(a) 0% (b) 20%
(c) 75% (d) 80%
39. A cubical region of side a has its centre at the origin. It
encloses three fixed point charges, –q at (0, –a/4, 0), +3q at
(0, 0, 0) and –q at (0, +a/4, 0). Choose the correct option(s). (d)
(2012)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 115
41. Two large vertical and parallel metal plates having a (a) the electrostatic field is zero
separation of 1 cm are connected to a DC voltage source of (b) the electrostatic potential is contant
potential difference X. A proton is released at rest midway
(c) the electrostatic field is constant in magnitude
between the two plates. It is found to move at 45° to the
vertical just after release. Then X is nearly (d) the electrostatic field has same direction
(a) 1 × 10–5 V (b) 1 × 10–7 V 45. In a given circuit a charge of 80C is given to the upper
(c) 1 × 10 V
–9
(d) 1 × 10 V –10 plate of the 4F capacitor. Then in steady state, the charge
42. An infinitely long solid cylinder of radius R has a uniform on upper plate of the 3F capacitor is (2013)
volume charge . It has a sphererical cavity of radius R/2
with its centre on the axis of the cylinders, as shown in the
figure. The magnitude of the electric field at the point P,
which is at a distance 2R from the axis of the cylinder, is
23 R
given by the expression 16k . The value of k is (2012)
(a) + 32 C (b) + 40 C
(c) + 48 C (d) + 80 C
43. Two non-conducting solid spheres of radii R and 2R, having 46. In the circuit shown in the figure, there are two parallel
uniform volume charge densities 1 and 2 respectively, plate capacitors each of capacitance C. The switch S1 and
touch each other. The net electric field at a distance 2 R pressed first to fully charge the capacitor C1 and then
from the centre of the smaller sphere, along the line joining released. The switched S2 is then pressed to charge the
1 capacitor C2. After some time, S2 is released and then S3 is
the centre of the spheres, is zero. The ratio can be
2 pressed. After some time. (2013)
(2013)
32
(a) –4 (b)
25
32
(c) (d) 4
25
44. Two non-conducting sphere of radii R1 and R2 and carrying
uniform volume charge densities + and –, respectively,
are placed such that they partially overlap, as shown in the
figure. At all points in the overlapping region. (2013)
(a) the charge on the upper plate of C1 is 2 CV0
(b) the charge on the upper plate of C1 is CV0
(c) the charge on the upper plate of C2 is 0
(d) the charge on the upper plate of C2 is –CV0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 116
47. A parallel plate capacitor has a dielectric slab of dielectric 50. Four charges Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 of same magnitude are fixed
constant K between its plates that covers 1/3 of the area of along the x axis at x = – 2a, –a, +a and +2a, respectively. A
its plates, as shown in the figure. The total capacitance of positive charge q is placed on the positive y axis at a distance
the capacitor is C while that of the portion with dielectric in b> 0. Four options of the signs of these charges are given in
between is C1. When the capacitor is charged, the plate area List I. The direction of the forces on the charge q is given in
covered by the dielectric gets charge Q1 and the rest of the List II. Match List I with List II and select the correct answer
area gets charge Q2. The electric field in the dielectric is E1 using the code given below the lists. (2014)
and that in the other partion is E2. Choose the correct option/
options, ignoring edge effects. (2014)
List I List II
P. Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 all positive 1. +x
Q. Q1, Q2 positive; Q3, Q4 negative 2. –x
E1 E1 1
(a) E 1 (b) E K R. Q1, Q4 positive; Q2, Q3 negative 3. +y
2 2
S. Q1, Q3 positive; Q2, Q4 negative 4. –y
Q1 3 C 2K Codes :
(c) Q K (d) C K
2 1 (a) P -3, Q-1, R-4, S-2 (b) P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
48. Let E1 (r), E2 (r) and E3 (r) be the respective electric fields at (c) P-3, Q-1, R-2, S-4 (d) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3
a distance r from a point charge Q, an infinitely long wire 51. The figure below depict two situations in which two
with constant linear charge density and an infinite plane infinitely long static line charges of constant positive line
with uniform surface charge density . If E1 (r0) = E2 (r0) = E3 charge density are kept parallel to each other. In their
(r0) at a given distance r0, then (2014) resulting electric field, point charges q and –q are kept in
equilibrium between them. The point charges are confined
to move in the x-direction only. If they are given a small
(a) Q 4r02 (b) r0
2 displacement about their equilibrium positions, then the
(c) E1(r0/2) = 2 E2 (r0/2) (d) E2 (r0/2) = 4E3 (r0/2) correct statement(s) is (are) (2015)
49. Charges Q, 2Q and 4Q are uniformly distributed in three
dielectric solid spheres 1,2 and 3 of radii R/2, R and 2R
respectively, as shown in figure. If magnitudes of the electric
fields at point P at a distance R from the centre of spheres 1,
2 and 3 are E1, E2 and E3 respectively, then ( 2014)
(a) Both charges execute simple harmonic motion
(b) Both charges will continue moving in the direction of
their displacement
(c) Charge +q executes simple harmonic motion while charge
q continues moving in the direction of its displacement.
(a) E1 > E2 > E3 (b) E3 > E1 > E2
(d) Charge –q executes simple harmonic motion while charge
(c) E2 > E1 > E3 (d) E3 > E2 > E1 +q continues moving in the direction of its displacement.
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 117
52. An infinitely long uniform line charge distribution of charge 54. A parallel plate capacitor having plates of area S and
per unit length lies parallel to the y-axis in the y-z plane at plate separated d, has capacitance C 1 in air. When
two dielectrics of different relative primitivities (
3 and ) are introduced between the two plates
z= a (see figure.) If the magnitude of the flux of the
2 as shown in the figure, the capacitance becomes C 2.
electric field through the rectangular surface ABCD lying in C2
The ratio C is (2015)
L 1
the xy plane with its centre at the origin is n (0 =
0
permittivity of free space), then the value of n is (2015)
(a) 6/5 (b) 5/3
53. Consider a uniform spherical charge distribution of radius (c) 7/5 (d) 7/3
R1 centred at the origin O. In this distribution, a spherical
55. An infinite line charge of uniform electric charge density
cavity of radius R2, Centred at P with distance OP = a = R1 –
lies along the axis of an electrically conducting infinite
R2 (see figure) is made. If the electric field inside the cavity
cylindrical shell of radius R. At time t = 0, the space inside
at position r is E r , then the correct statement(s) is the cylinder is filled with a material of permittivity and
(are) (2015) electrical conductivity . The electrical conduction in the
material follows Ohm’s law. Which one of the following
graphs best describes the subsequent variation of the
magnitude of current density j(t) at any point in the
material? (2016)
(a)
(a) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of R2 but
its direction depend on r
(b) E is uniform, its magnitude depends on R2 and its
direction depend on
(c) E is uniform, its r magnitude is independent of a but
its direction depend on a
(d) E is uniform and both its magnitude and direction (b)
depend on a
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 118
56. Which one of the following statements is correct? (2016)
(a) The balls will execute simple harmonic motion between
the two plates
(b) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying
(c) the opposite charge they went up with
(c) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying
the same charge they went up with
(d) The balls will stick to the top plate and remain there
57. The average current in the steady state registered by the
ammeter in the circuit will be (2016)
(a) proportional to V02
(d)
(b) proportional to V01/2
(c) proportional to the potential V0
Using the following passage, solve Q. 56 to Q 57 (d) zero
Consider an evacuated cylindrical chamber of height h 58. A length-scale (l) depends on the permittivity () of a
having rigid conducting plates at the ends and an dielectric material, Boltzmann constant (kB), the absolute
insulating curved surface as shown in the figure. A number temperature (T), the number per unit volume (n) of certain
of spherical balls made of a light weight and soft material charged particles, and the charge (q) carried by each of
and coated with a conducting material are placed on the the particles. Which of the following expression(s) for l
bottom plate. The balls have a radius r << h . Now a high is(are) dimensionally correct? (2016)
voltage source (HV) is connected across the conducting
plates such that the bottom plate is at + V0 and the top nq 2 k B T
(a) l (b) l 2
plate at –V0. Due to their conducting surface, the balls k B T nq
will get charged, will become equipotential with the plate
and are repelled by it. The balls will eventually collide
with the top plate, where the coefficient of restitution can q2 q2
(c) l 2/3 (d) l 1/3
be taken to be zero due to the soft nature of the material of n k B T n k B T
the balls. The electric field in the chamber can be
considered to be that of a parallel plate capacitor. Assume 59. A rigid uniform bar AB of length L is slipping from its
that there are no collisions between the balls and the vertical position on a frictionless floor (as shown in the
interaction between them is negligible. (Ignore gravity) figure). At some instant of time, the angle made by the bar
with the vertical is . Which of the following statements
abour its motion is/are correct ? (2017)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 119
(a) Instantaneous torque about the point in contact with 61. In process 2, total energy dissipated across the resistance
the floor is proportional is sin ED is : (2017)
(b) the trajectory of the point A is parabola
1 1 2 1 2
(c) The mid point of the bar will fall vertically downwar (a) E D CV0 (b) E D 3 CV0
3 2 2
(d) When the bar makes an angle with the vertical, the
displacement of its mid-point from the initial position is 1
(c) E D 3CV02 (d) E D CV02
proportional to (1 – cos ) 2
Using the following passage, solve Q. 60 to Q 61 62. An infinitely long thin non-conducting wire is parallel to
the z-axis and carries a uniform line charge density . It
Consider a simple RC circuit as shown in figure 1.
pierces a thin non-conducting spherical shell of radius R
Process 1 : In the circuit the switch Sis closed at t = 0 and in such a way that the arc PQ subtends an angle 120° at
the capacitor is fully charged to voltage V0 (i.e. charging the centre O of the spherical shell, as shown in the figure.
continues for time T>>RC). In the process some The permittivity of free space is 0 . Which of the following
dissipation (E D) occurs across the resistance R. The
statements is (are) true ? (2018)
amount of energy finally stored in the fully charged
capacitor is Ec.
Process 2 : In a different process the voltage is first set to
V0
and maintained for a charging time T>>RC. Then the
3
2V0
voltage is raised to without discharging the capacitor
3
and again maintained for a time t>>RC. The process is
repeated one more time by raising the voltage to V0 and
the capacitor is charged to the same final voltage V0 as in
process 1.
These two processes are depicted in figure 2.
(a) The electric flux through the shell is 3R / 0
(b) The z-component of the electric field is zero at all the
points on the surface of the shell
(c) The electric flux through the shell is 2R / 0
(d) The electric field is normal to the surface of the shell at
all points
60. In process 1, the energy stored in the capacitor EC and
heat dissipated across resistance ED are related by : 63. The electric field E is measured at a point P(0, 0, d)
generated due to various charge distributions and the
(2017) dependence of E on d is found to be different for
(a) EC = ED ln2 (b) EC = ED different charge distributions. List-I contains different
relations between E and d. List-II describes different
1 electric charge distributions, along with their locations.
(c) EC = 2ED (d) E C ED Match the functions in List-I with the related charge
2
distributions in List-II. (2018)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 120
List-I List-II 65. In the circuit shown, initially there is no charge on
capacitors and keys S1 and S2 are open. The values of the
(P) E is independent 1. A point charge Q at the origin
of d capacitors are C1 = 10F , C2 = 30F and C3 = C 4
1 = 80F . Which of the statement(s) is/are correct? (2019)
(Q) E 2. A small dipole with point
d
charges Q at (0, 0, l) and –Q at
(0, 0, –l). Take 2l <<d
1
(R) E 3. An infinite line charge
d2
coincident with the x-axis with
uniform linear charge density .
1
(S) E 4. Two infinite wires carrying
d3
uniform linear charge density
parallel to the x-axis. The one
along (y = 0, z = l) has a charge
density + and and the one along
(y = 0, z = -l) has a charge density
–. Take 2l<<d. (a) The key S1 is kept closed for long time such that
5. Infinite plane charge capacitors are fully charged. Now key S2 is closed, at
coincident with the xy-plane with
uniform surface charge density.
this time the instantaneous current across 30 resistor
64. A thin spherical insulating shell of radius R carries a (between points P & Q) will be 0.2A (round off to 1st
uniformly distributed charge such that the potential at decimal place).
its surface is V 0 . A hole with small area
(b) If key S1 is kept closed for long time such that
4 R 2 ( 1) is made on the shell without affecting capacitors are fully charged, the voltage across the
the rest of the shell. Which one of the following statement capacitor C1 will be 4V.
is correct? (2019)
(a) The ratio of the potential at the center of the shell to (c) At time t = 0, the key S1 is closed, the instantaneous
current in the closed circuit will be 25 mA
1
that of the point at R from center towards the hole will
2 (d) if key S1 is kept closed for long time such that
1 capacitors are fully charged, the voltage difference
be
1 2 between points P and Q will be 10V.
(b) The potential at the centre of shell is reduced by
66. A charged shell of radius R carries a total charge Q.
2V0 .
Given as the flux of electric field through a closed
(c) The magnitude of electric field at the center of the
cylindrical surface of height h, radius r and with its
V0
shell is reduced by centre same as that of the shell. Here, centre of the
2R
cylinder is a point on the axis of the cylinder which is
(d) The magnitude of electric field at a point, located on a equidistant from its top and bottom surfaces. Which
line passing through the hole and shell’s center, on a
distance 2R from the center of the spherical shell will be of the following option(s) is/are correct? [ 0 is the
V0 permittivity of free space] (2019)
reduced by
2R
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 121
4R Q
(a) If h 2R and r 5 then 5 69. ˆ NC 1 is
A uniform electric field, E 400 3y
0
applied in a region. A charged particle of mass m carrying
3R Q positive charge q is projected in this region with an initial
(b) If h 2R and r 5 then 5
0
speed of 2 10 106 ms 1. This particle is aimed to
8R 3R hit a target T, which is 5 m away from its entry p o i n t
(c) If h and r then 0
5 5 into the field as shown schematically in the figure.
(d) If h 2R and r R then
Q q
0 Take 1010 Ckg 1. Then – (2020)
m
67. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C has spacing d
between two plates having area A. The region between
the plates is filled with N dielectric layers, parallel to its
plates, each with thickness d . The dielectric
N
m
constant of themth layer is K m K 1 . For a very
N
K 0 A
large N(>103), the capacitance C is .The value
d In2 (a) the particle will hit T is projected at an angle 45º from
the horizontal
of α will be ___.[ 0 is the permittivity of free space]
(b) the particle will hit T if projected either at an angle 30º
(2019) or 60º from the horizontal
68. An electric dipole with dipole moment
2
p0
i j is held
(c) time taken by the particle to hit T could be
5
s as well
fixed at the origin O in the presence of an uniform electric 6
field of magnitude E-0. If the potential is constant on a 5
circle of radius R centered at the origin as shown in figure, as s
2
then the correct statement(s) is/are: ( ε 0 is permittivity of
free space. R>>dipole size) (2019) 5
(d) time taken by the particle to hit T is s
3
70. A circular disc of radius R carries surface charge density
r
(r) 0 1 , where 0 is a constant and r is
R
the distance from the center of the disc. Electric flux
through a large spherical surface that encloses the
(a) The magnitude of total electric field on any two points charged disc completely is 0 . Electric flux through
of the circle will be same.
R
(b) Total electric field at point A is E A 2E0 i j another spherical surface of radius
4
and concentric
1/3
p0 0
(c) R= with the disc is . Then the ratio is ………. . -
4πε 0 E 0
(2020)
(d) Total electric field at point B is EB 0
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 122
71. Two large circular discs separated by a distance of 0.01
m are connected to a battery via a switch as shown in
the figure. Charged oil drops of density 900 kg m–3 are
released through a tiny hole at the center of the top
disc. Once some oil drops achieve terminal velocity, the
switch is closed to apply a voltage of 200 V across
the discs. As a result, an oil drop of radius 8 × 10–7m
stops moving vertically and floats between the discs.
The number of electrons present in this oil drop is
________. (neglect the buoyancy force, take
acceleration due to gravity =10 ms–2 and charge on an
electron (e) 1.6 × 10–19 C)
73. Two identical non-conducting solid spheres of same
mass and charge are suspended in air from a common
point by two non-conducting, massless strings of same
length. At equilibrium, the angle between the strings
is . The spheres are now immersed in a dielectric liquid
of density 800 kg m –3 and dielectric constant 21. If the
angle between the strings remains the same after the
(2020) immersion, then (2020)
(a) electric force between the spheres remains
72 . A point charge q of mass m is suspended vertically by a
unchanged
string of length l. A point dipole of dipole moment p is
now brought towards q from infinity so that the (b) electric force between the spheres reduces
charge moves away. The final equilibrium position of (c) mass density of the spheres is 840 kg m–3
the system including the direction of the dipole, the angles (d) the tension in the strings holding the spheres remains
and distances is shown in the figure below. If the unchanged
work done in bringing the dipole to this position is
N × (mgh), where g is the acceleration due to gravity, 74. Two capacitors with capacitance values C1 = 2000 10pF
then the value of N is ____ . (Note that for three coplanar and C2 = 3000 15pF are connected in series. The voltage
F applied across this combination is V = 5.00 0.02 V . The
forces keeping a point mass in equilibrium, is the
sin percentage error in the calculation of the energy stored
same for all forces, where F is any one of the forces and in this combination of capacitors is _______. (2020)
is the angle between the other two forces) (2020)
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS 123
ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S
LAW & CAPACITORS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Chapter 02
125
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1. ELECTRIC CURRENT 9. Current due to translatory motion of charge : If n particle
each having a charge q, pass through a given area in time
“The flow of charge in a definite direction constitutes the t then
electric current and the time rate of flow of charge through
any cross-section of a conductor is the measure of current”. + +
i.e., + +
+ +
net charge flown q dq
Electric current , I=
time taken t dt If n particles each having a charge q pass per second per
unit area, the current associated with cross-sectional area A
1. Though the “electric current represents the direction of flow is i = nqA
of positive charge”.
If there are n particle per unit volume each having a charge
2. Yet it is treated as a scalar quantity. q and moving with velocity v, the current thorough, cross
section A is i = nqvA
3. Current follows, the laws of scalar addition (added
algebraically) and not the laws of vector addition. 10. Current due to rotatory motion of charge : If a point
charge q is moving in a circle of radius r with speed v
4. Because the angle between the wires carrying currents does (frequency , angular speed and time period T) then
not affect the total current in the circuit.
q qv qω
corresponding current i = qν = = =
5. Ampere of current means the flow of 6.25 10 18 T 2πr 2π
electrons/sec through any cross–section of the conductor.
r q
6. The conventional direction of current is taken to be the
direction of flow of positive charge, i.e. field and is opposite
to the direction of flow of negative charge as shown below.
11. Current carriers : The charged particles whose flow in a
definite direction constitutes the electric current are called
+ + – – current carriers. In different situation current carriers are
i i
+ + – –
different.
F F (i) Solids : In solid conductors like metals current carriers
are free electrons.
7. The net charge in a current carrying conductor is zero. (ii) Liquids : In liquids current carriers are positive and
negative ions.
8. For a given conductor current does not change with change
in cross-sectional area. In the following figure i1 = i2 = i3 (iii) Gases : In gases current carriers are positive ions and
free electrons.
(iv) Semi conductor : In semi conductors current carriers are
i1 i2 i3 holes and free electrons.
(v) The amount of charge flowing through a crossection of a
conductor from t = ti to t = tf is given by :
tf
q I dt
ti
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 126
12. Graphs
3. DRIFT VELOCITY
(i) Slope of Q vs t graph gives instantaneous current.
“If u1 , u2 , u3 , ...un are random thermal velocities of n free
Q
electrons in the metal conductor, then the average thermal
velocity of electrons is
. Slope = dQ = i ins
u1 u2 u3 ... un
0
dt n
t
t' As a result, there will be no net flow of electrons of charge
in one particular direction in a metal conductor, hence no
(ii) Area under the I vs t graph gives net charge flown. current”.
“Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which
I
the free electrons get drifted towards the positive end of
the conductor under the influence of an external electric
field ”.
(Qnet)
–4 –1
1. The drift velocity of electons is of the order of 10 ms .
t
t1 t2 2. If V is the potential difference applied across the ends of the
conductor of length l, the magnitude of electric field set up is
2. CURRENT CARRIERS Potential difference V
E
length
(a) Current carriers in solid conductors :
1. In solid conductors like metals, the valence electrons of the E
atoms do not remain attached to individual atoms but are
free to move throughout the volume of the conductor which
– +
are also known as free electrons.
2. Under the effect of an external electric field, the valence
electrons move in a definite direction causing electric current
in the conductors. 3. Each free electrons in the conductor experience a force,
3. Thus, free electrons are the current carriers in solid F e E.
conductors.
4. The acceleration of each electron is
(b) Current carriers in liquids :
1. In an electrolyte like CuSO4, NaCl etc., there are positively eE
a .
m
and negatively charged ions (like Cu , SO4 , Na , Cl ).
5. At any instant of time, the velocity acquired by electron
2. These are forced to move in definite directions under
having thermal velocity u1 will be
the effect of an external electric field, causing electric
current.
v1 u1 a1
3. Thus, in liquids, the current carriers are positively and
where 1 is the time elapsed since it has suffered its last
negatively charged ions.
collision with ion/atom of the conductor it is also known as
(c) Current carriers in gases :
relaxation time.
1. Ordinarily, the gases are insulators of electricity.
6. Similarly, the velocities acquired by other electrons in the
2. They can be ionized by applying a high potential difference conductor will be
at low pressure
3. Thus, positive ions and electrons are the current carriers in v 2 u 2 a 2 , v3 u 3 a3 , ....., v n u n an .
gases.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 127
7. The average velocity of all the free electrons in the 3.1 Relaxation time ()
conductor under the effect of external electric field is the
The time interval between two successive collisions of
drift velocity vd of the free electrons. electrons with the positive ions in the metallic lattice is
defined as relaxation time
v v 2 ... v n
Thus, vd 1
n mean free path
.
r.m.s. velocity of electrons v rms
u a1 u 2 a2 ... u n an
1
n
With rise in temperature vrms increases consequently
u u 2 ... u n 1 2 ... n decreases.
1 a 0 a a
n n 3.2 Mobility
1 2 ... n Drift velocity per unit electric field is called mobility of
where, = average time that has elapsed
n vd m2
since each electron suffered its last collision with the ion/ electron i.e. It’s unit is
E volt sec
atom of conductor and is called average relaxation time.
–14 1. Mobility of charge carrier (), responsible for current is
8. Its value is the order of 10 second.
defined as the magnitude of drift velocity of charge per unit
9. Putting the value of a in the above relation, we have electic filed applied, i.e.,
e E drift velocity v d q E / m q
vd
m electric field E E m
eE e e
Average drift speed, vd 2. Mobility of electron, e
m me
The negative sign show that vd is opposite to the direction 3. The total current in the conducting material is the sum of
the currents due to positive current carriers and negative
of E .
current carriers.
10. If cross-section is constant, I µ J i.e. for a given cross-
vd e E
sectional area, greater the current density, larger will be
2 –1 –1 –1 –1
current. 4. SI unit of mobility is m S V or ms N C
11. The drift velocity of electrons is small because of the 3.3 Relation between Current and Drift Velocity
frequent collisions suffered by electrons.
1. Consider a conductor (say a copper wire) of length l and of
12. The small value of drift velocity produces a large amount
uniform area of cross-section
of electric current, due to the presence of extremely large
number of free electrons in a conductor. The propagation Volume of the conductor = Al.
of current is almost at the speed of light and involves 2. If n is the number density of electrons, i.e., the number of
electromagnetic process. It is due to this reason that the free electrons per unit volume of the conductor, then total
electric bulb glows immediately when switch is on. number of free electrons in the conducture = Aln.
13. In the absence of electric field, the paths of electrons 3. Then total charge on all the free electrons in the conductor,
between successive collisions are straight line while in
presence of electric field the paths are generally curved. q Ane
4. The electric field set up across the conductor is given by
N xd
14. Free electron density in a metal is given by n A E = V/l (in magnitude)
A
5. Due to this field, the free electrons present in the conductor
where N A = Avogrado number, x = number of free
will begin to move with a drift velocity vd towards the left
electrons per atom, d = density of metal and A = Atomic
hand side as shown in figure
weight of metal.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 128
V m
or
I A n e 2 = R = a constant for a given conductor for a
given value of n, l and at a given temperature. It is known as
the electrical resistance of the conductor.
Thus, V = RI this is Ohm’s law.
6. Time taken by the free electrons to cross the conductors, 1. Ohm’s law is not a universal law, the substances, which
t = l/vd obey ohm’s law are known as ohmic substance.
2. Graph between V and i for a metallic conductor is a straight
q A ne
Hence, current, dI line as shown. At different temperatures V-i curves are
t
different.
vd
or I A n e vd V V
T1
e E 1
7. Putting the value of vd , we have T2
m 2
Ane 2 E 1
2
I i i
m
(A) Slope of the line (B) Here tan1 > tan2
4. OHM’S LAW
V
= tan R So, R1 > R2 i.e., T1 > T2
Ohm’s law states that “the current (I) flowing through a i
conductor is directly proportional to the potential 3. The device or substances which don’t obey ohm’s law
difference (V) across the ends of the conductor”. e.g. gases, crystal rectifiers, thermoionic valve,
transistors etc. are known as non-ohmic or non-linear
I conductors. For these V-i curve is not linear.
A V 1
Static resistance R st
i tan
V 1
Dynamic resistance R dyn
O V I tan
i.e., I V or V I or V = RI i Crystal
rectifier
V
or R constant
I
4.1 Deduction of Ohm’s law V
eE
We know that vd 5. ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
m
eV “The electrical resistance of a conductor is the obstruction
But E = V/l vd
m posed by the conductor to the flow of electric current
Also, I = A n e vd through it”.
1. i.e., R = V/I
eV A n e
2
I =An e V volt
m m 2. The SI unit of electrical resistance is ohm or .
amp
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 129
3. Dimensions of electric resistance V m m
3. We have, R
Pot. diff. work done/charge I Ane2 ne2 A
current current
comparing the above relation with the relation, R .
A
ML2 T 2 / AT
M1L2 T 3 A 2 4. We have, the resistivity of the material of a conductor,
A
m
5.1 Electrical Resistivity or Specific Resistance
ne2
“The resistance of a conductor depends upon the 5.2 Conductivity
following factors :
Reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity ()
(i) Length (l) : The resistance (R) of a conductor is directly
1
proportional to its length (l), i.e., R l i.e. with unit mho/m and dimensions
(ii) Area of cross-section (A) : The resistance (R) of a conductor
is inversely proportional to the area of cross-section (A). of [M 1 L3 T 3 A 2 ] .
the conductor, i.e., R 1/A
5.3 Conductance
(iii) The resistance of conductor also depends upon the nature
Reciprocal of resistance is known as conductance.
of material and temperature of the conductor.
1 1
C It’s unit is or –1 or “Siemen”.
From above ; R or R .” R
A A
5.4 Stretching of Wire
1. Where is constant of proportionality and is known as
specific resistance or electrical resistivity of the material of If a conducting wire stretches, it’s length increases, area
the conductor of cross-section decreases so resistance increases but
2. Specific resistance (or electrical resistivity) of the material volume remain constant.
of a conductor is defined as the resistance of a unit length Suppose for a conducting wire before stretching it’s
with unit areas of cross section of the material of the length = l1, area of cross–section = A1, radius = r1, diameter
conductor.
l1
(i) It’s S.I. unit is ohm - m and dimension is [ML3T–3A–2] = d1, and resistance = R 1
A1
m
(ii) It is given by formula :
ne 2 Before stretching After stretching
l1 l2
(iii) Resistivity is the intrinsic property of the substance. It is
independent of shape and size of the body (i.e. l and A).
(iv) For different substances their resistivity is also different
e.g. silver = minimum = 1.6 10–8 -m and Volume remains constant i.e., A1l1 = A2l2
After stretching length = l2, area of cross-section = A2,
fused quartz = maximum 1016 -m
l2
ρinsulator >ρ alloy >ρsemi-conductor > ρ conductor radius = r2, diameter = d2 and resistance R 2
(Maximum for fused quartz) (Minimum for silver) A2
(v) Resistivity depends on the temperature. For metals Ratio of resistances before and after stretching
2 2 4 4
t 0 (1 t) i.e. resitivity increases with temperature. R1 l1 A 2 l1 A 2 r2 d 2
= × = = = =
(vi) Resistivity increases with impurity and mechanical stress. R 2 l2 A1 l2 A1 r1 d1
2
(vii) Magnetic field increases the resistivity of all metals except R1 l1
iron, cobalt and nickel. (1) If length is given then R l 2
R 2 l2
(viii) Resistivity of certain substances like selenium, cadmium, 4
sulphides is inversely proportional to intensity of light 1 R r
(2) If radius is given then R 4 1 2
falling upon them. r R 2 r1
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 130
6. CURRENT DENSITY, CONDUCTANCE AND 1. For metals like silver, copper, etc., the value of is
ELECTRIAL CONDUCTIVITY positive, therefore, resistance of a metal increases with
–1 –1
rise in temperature. The unit of is K or °C .
6.1 Relation between J, and E
2. For insulators and semiconductors is negative, therefore,
eE n Ae E
2
We know, I = n Aevd = nAe the resistance decreases with rise in temperature.
m m
6.2 Non-Ohmic Devices
I ne 2 E 1
or or J E
A m Those devices which do not obey Ohm’s law are called
non-ohmic devices. For example, vaccum tubes,
J E semiconductor diode, liquid electrolyte, transistor etc.
1. Insulators : These are those materials whose electrical For all non-ohmic devices (where there will be failure of
conducticity is either very very small or nil. Ohm’s law), V–I graph has one or more of the following
Insulators do not conduct charges. When a small potential characteristics :
difference is applied across the two ends of an insulator, the 1. The relation I and V non-linear, figure
current through the insulator is zero.
I
Examples of insulators are glass, rubber, wood etc.
2. Conductors : These are those materials whose electrical
conductivity is very high
Conductor conduct charges very easily. When a small
potential difference is applied across the two ends of
conductor, a strong current flows through the conductor. V
For super-conductor, the value of electrical conductivity is
2. The relation between V and I depends on the sign of V. It
infinite and electrical resistivity is zero.
means, if I is the current for a certain value of V, then reversing
Examples of conductors are all metals like copper, silver, the direction of V, keeping its magnitude fixed, does not
aluminium, tungsten etc. produce a current of same magnitude I, in the opposite
3. Semiconductors : These are those material whose electrical direction, figure.
conductivity lies in between that of insulators and I (mA)
conductors.
Semiconductors can conduct charges but not so easily as
is in case of conductors. When a small potential difference
is applied across the ends of a semiconductor, a weak current V V
flows through semiconductor due to motion of electrons
and holes.
Examples of semiconductors are germanium, silicon etc.
The value of elecrical resistance R increases with rise of 3. The relation between V and I is not unique, i.e., there is
temperature. more than one value of V for the same current I, figure.
Rt R0 increase in resistance
R0 t original resistance × rise of temp.
Thus, temperature coefficient of resistance is defined as the
increase in resistance per unit original resistance per degree
celsium or kelvin rise of temperature.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 131
7. COLOUR CODE FOR CARBON RESISTORS 8. COMBINATION OF RESISTORS
The colour code for carbon resistance is given in the 8.1 Resistances in Series
following table. Resistors are said to be connected in series, if the same
current is flowing through each resistor when some poential
Colour Letter as No. Mulitplier Colour Tolerance
difference is applied across the combination.
an Aid to
memory
0
Black B 0 10 Gold 5%
1
Brown B 1 10 Silver 10%
2
Red R 2 10 No colour 20%
3
Orange O 3 10
4 1. Let V be the potential difference applied across A and B
Yellow Y 4 10
using the battery . In series combination, the same current
5
Green G 5 10 (say I) will be passing through each resistance.
6
Blue B 6 10 2. Let V1, V2, V3 be the potential difference across R1, R2 and R3
Violet V 7 10
7 respectively. According to Ohm’s law
Grey G 8 10
8 V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2, V3 = IR3
9 3. Here, V = V1 + V2 + V3 = IR1 + IR2 + IR3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
White W 9 10
–1
Gold 10
–2
Silver 10
To remember the value of colour coding used for carbon
resistor, the following sentences are found to be of great
help (where bold letters stand for colours).
B B ROY Green, Britain Very Good Wife Gold Silver. 4. If R s is the equivalent resistance of the given series
Way of finding the resistance of carbon resistor from its combination of resistances, figure, then the potential
colour coding. difference across A and B is,
In the system of colour coding, Strips of different colours V = IRs.
are given on the body of the resistor, figure. The colours on We have
strips are noted from left to right.
IRs = I (R1 + R2 + R3) or R s R1 R 2 R 3
Memory note
In a series resistance circuit, it should be noted that :
(i) the current is same in every resistor.
A B C R
(ii) the current in the circuit is independent of the relative
(i) Colour of the first stip A from the end indicates the first
positions of the various resistors in the series.
significant figure of resistance in ohm.
(ii) Colour of the second strip B indicate the second significant (iii) the voltage across any resistor is directly proportional to
figure of resistance in ohm. the resistance of the resistor.
(iii) The colour of the third strip C indicates the multiplier, i.e., (iv) the total resistance of the circuit is equal to the sum of the
the number of zeros that will follow after the two significant individual resistances, plus the internal resistance of a cell
figure. if any.
(iv) The colour of fourth strip R indicates the tolerance limit of (v) The total resistance in the series circuit is obviously more
the resistance value of percentage accuracy of resistance. than the greatest resistance in the circuit.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 132
Memory note
8.2 Resistances in Parallel
In a parallel resistance circuit, it should be noted that :
Any number of resistors are said to be connected in parallel
if potential difference across each of them is the same and is (i) the potential difference across each resistor is the same
equal to the applied potential difference. and is equal to the applied potential difference.
(ii) the current through each resistor is inversely proportional
to the resistance of that resistor.
(iii) total current through the parallel combination is the sum of
the individual currents through the various resistors.
(iv) The reciprocal of the total resistance of the parallel
combination is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of the
individual resistances.
1. Let V be the potential difference applied across A and B (v) The total resistances are connected in series, the current
with the help of a battery . through each resistance is same. When the resistance are
2. Let I be the main current in the circuit from battery. I divides in parallel, the pot-diff. accross each resistance is the same
itself into three unequal parts because the resistances of and not the current.
these branches are different and I1, I2, I3 be the current
through the resistances R1, R2 and R3 respectively. Then, 9. CELL
I = I 1 + I2 + I3 The device which converts chemical energy into electrical
energy is known as electric cell.
3. Here, potential difference across each resistor is V, therefore
Cell is a source of constant emf but not constant current.
V = I1R1 = I2 R2 = I3R3
V V V
or I1 , I2 , I3
R1 R2 R3
Putting values, we get
V V V
I
R1 R 2 R 3
4. If Rp is the equivalent resistance of the given parallel
combination of resistance, figure, then 1. Emf of cell (E) : The potential difference across the
terminals of a cell when it is not supplying any current is
called it’s emf.
2 Potential difference (V) : The voltage across the terminals
of a cell when it is supplying current to external resistance
is called potential difference or terminal voltage. Potential
difference is equal to the product of current and resistance
of that given part i.e. V = iR.
V = IRp or I = V/Rp 3 Internal resistance (r) : In case of a cell the opposition of
we have electrolyte to the flow of current through it is called
1 1 1 1 internal resistance of the cell. The internal resistance of a
V V V V
or cell depends on the distance between electrodes (r d),
R p R1 R 2 R 3 R p R1 R 2 R 3
area of electrodes [r (1/A)] and nature, concentration
Thus, the reciprocal of equivalent resistance of a number of
(r C) and temperature of electrolyte [r (1/ temp.)].
resistor connected in parallel is equal to the sum of the
reciprocals of the individual resistances. A cell is said to be ideal, if it has zero internal resistance.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 133
9.1 Cell in Various Positions
(i) Current through the circuit i = 0
1. Closed circuit : Cell supplies a constant current in the (ii) Potential difference between A and B, VAB = E
circuit.
(iii) Potential difference between C and D, VCD = 0
R
3. Short circuit : If two terminals of cell are join together by
V= iR a thick conducting wire
i
E, r
R=0
E
(i) Current given by the cell i
Rr
(ii) Potential difference across the resistance V iR
(iii) Potential drop inside the cell = ir
(iv) Equation of cell E V ir (E > V)
E, r
E
(v) Internal resistance of the cell r 1 R
V (i) Maximum current (called short circuit current) flows
(vi) Power dissipated in external resistance (load) E
momentarily isc
V2
E
2
r
P Vi i 2 R .R
R Rr (ii) Potential difference V = 0
E2 Memory note
Power delivered will be maximum when R r so Pmax
.
4r (i) It is important to note that during charging of a cell, the
This statement is called “maximum power transfer positive electrode of the cell is connected to positive
theorem”. terminal of battery charger and negative electrodes of the
cell is connected to negative terminal of battery charger. In
this process, current flows from positive electrode to
2
Pmax = E /4r negative electrode through the cell. Refer figure
P
Charger
+ –
I I
R=r
R
V = + Ir
(vii) When the cell is being charged i.e. current is given to the Hence, the terminal potential difference becomes greater
cell then E = V – ir and E < V. than the emf of the cell.
2. Open circuit : When no current is taken from the cell it is (ii) The difference of emf and terminal voltage is called
said to be in open circuit. lost voltage as it is not indicated by a voltmeter. It is
equal to Ir.
R
C D A B
E, r
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 134
9.2 Distinction between E.M.F. and Potential Difference (iv) Potential difference across external resistance V iR
V
E.M.F. of a Cell Potential Difference (v) Potential difference across each cell V '
n
1 The emf of a cells is the 1. The potential difference 2
maximum potential between the two points is nE
(vi) Power dissipated in the external circuit .R
difference between the the difference of potential R nr
two electrodes of a cell between those two points
E2
when the cell is in the in a closed circuit. (vii) Condition for maximum power R nr and Pmax n
open circuit. 4r
2. It is independent of the 2. It depends upon the resis- (viii) This type of combination is used when nr << R.
resistance of the circuit tance between the two points 2. Parallel grouping : In parallel grouping all anodes are
and depends upon the of the circuit and current connected at one point and all cathode are connected together
nature of electrodes and flowing through the at other point. If n identical cells are connected in parallel
the nature of electrolyte circuit.
E, r
of the cell.
E, r
3. The term emf is used for 3. The potential difference is
the source of electric measured between any two E, r
current. points of the electric circuit. i
R
4. It is a cause. 4. It is an effect.
(i) Equivalent emf Eeq = E
9.3 Grouping of Cells
In series grouping of cell’s their emf’s are additive or (ii) Equivalent internal resistance R eq r / n
subtractive while their internal resistances are always
additive. If dissimilar plates of cells are connected together E
(iii) Main current i
their emf’s are added to each other while if their similar R r/n
plates are connected together their emf’s are subtractive. (iv) Potential difference across external resistance = p.d.
across each cell = V = iR
i
E1 E2 E1 E2 (v) Current from each cell i '
n
E eq = E 1 + E 2 Eeq = E1 – E2 (E1 > E2)
2
r eq = r 1 + r 2 req = r1 + r2 E
(vi) Power dissipated in the circuit P .R
R r/n
1. Series grouping : In series grouping anode of one cell is
connected to cathode of other cell and so on. If n identical E2
(vii) Condition for max. power is R r / n and Pmax n
cells are connected in series 4r
(viii) This type of combination is used when nr >> R
E, r E, r E, r E, r
Generalized Parallel Battery
i E1 r1
R
E2 r2
(i) Equivalent emf of the combination E eq nE E3 r3 Eeq req
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance req nr
nE
(iii) Main current = Current from each cell i
R nr
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 135
E1 E 2 E 10. KIRCHHOFF’S LAW
... n
r1 r2 rn 1 1 1 1
E eq and ... . 10.1 Kirchhoff’s first law or Kirchhoff’s junction law or
1 1 1 req r1 r2 rn
... Kirchhoff’s current law.
r1 r2 rn
1. the algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a junction in a
3. Mixed Grouping : If n identical cells are connected in a
closed electric circuit is zero, i.e., I 0
row and such m rows are connected in parallel as shown.
2. Consider a junction O in the electrical circuit at which the
E, r E, r E, r
five conductors are meeting. Let I 1, I2, I3, I4 and I5 be the
1
currents in these conductors in directions, shown in
1 2 n
figure,
2
i I3 I2
m
V
I1
R I4
I5
(i) Equivalent emf of the combination Eeq = nE
nr
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance of the combination req 3. Let us adopt the following sign convention : the current
m
flowing in a conductor towards the junction is taken as
(iii) Main current flowing through the load
positive and the current flowing away from the junction is
nE mnE
i taken as negative.
nr mR nr
R
m 4. According to Kirchhoff’s first law, at junction O
(iv) Potential difference across load V = iR (–I1) + (–I2) + I3 + (–I4) + I5 = 0
V or –I1 – I2 + I3 – I4 + I5 = 0
(v) Potential difference across each cell V '
n
or I 0
i
(vi) Current from each cell i '
n or I 3 + I 5 = I 1 + I 2 + I4
nr 5. i.e., total current flowing towards the junction is equal to
(vii) Condition for maximum power R and
m total current flowing out of the junction.
E2 6. Current cannot be stored at a junction. It means, no point/
Pmax (mn)
4r junction in a circuit can act as a source or sink of charge.
(viii) Total number of cell = mn
7. Kirchhoff’s first law supports law of conservation of
Memory note charge.
(i) If the wo cells connected in parallel are of the same emf 10.2 Kirchhoff’s Second law or Kirchhoff’s loop law or
and same internal resistance r, then
Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
r r r
eq , 1 1 1 2 or req 1. The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any closed
rr req r r r 2 path of electric circuit (or closed loop) involving resistors
(ii) If n identical cells are connected in parallel, then the and cells in the loop is zero, i.e., V 0.
equivalent emf of all the cells is equal to the emf of one cell.
2. In a closed loop, the algebraic sum of the emfs and algebraic
1 1 1 n sum of the products of current and resistance in the various
... n terms or req = r/n
req r r r arms of the loop is zero, i.e., IR 0.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 136
3. Kirchhoff’s second law supports the law of conservation of (i) It’s symbol : G ; where G is the total internal
energy, i.e., the net change in the energy of a charge, after
resistance of the galvanometer.
the charge completes a closed path must be zero.
(ii) Full scale deflection current : The current required for
4. Kirchhoff’s second law follows from the fact that the full scale deflection in a galvanometer is called full scale
electrostatic force is a conservative force and work done by deflection current and is represented by ig.
it in any closed path is zero.
(iii) Shunt : The small resistance connected in parallel to
5. Consider a closed electrical circuit as shown in figure. galvanometer coil, in order to control current flowing
containing two cells of emfs. 1 and 2 and three resistors of through the galvanometer is known as shunt.
resistances R1, R2 and R3.
Table : Merits and demerits of shunt
Merits of shunt Demerits of shunt
To protect the galvano- Shunt resistance decreases the
meter coil from burning . sensitivity of galvanometer.
It can be used to convert
any galvanometer into
ammeter of desired range.
11.2 Ammeter
It is a device used to measure current and is always
connected in series with the ‘element’ through which
We adopt the following sign convention : current is to be measured.
Traverse a closed path of a circuit once completely in R
clockwise or anticlockwise direction.
10.3 Difference between Kirchhoff’s I and II laws i A
First Law Second Law + –
V
1. This law supports the 1. This law supports the law 1. The reading of an ammeter is always lesser than actual
law of conservation of of conservation of energy. current in the circuit.
charge. 2. Smaller the resistance of an ammeter more accurate will
2. According to this law 2. According to this law be its reading. An ammeter is said to be ideal if its
I 0 IR resistance r is zero.
3. Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter : A
3. This law can be used in 3. This law can be used in galvanometer may be converted into an ammeter by
open and closed circuits. closed circuit only. connecting a low resistance (called shunt S) in parallel to
the galvanometer G as shown in figure.
11. EXPERIMENTS
11.1 Galvanometer S
It is an instrument used to detect small current passing through
i – ig
it by showing deflection. Galvanometers are of different types i
e.g. moving coil galvanometer, moving magnet galvanometer, hot G
ig
wire galvanometer. In dc circuit usually moving coil galvanometer
Ammeter
are used.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 137
GS (c) If nth part of applied voltage appeared across galvanometer
1. Equivalent resistance of the combination
G S V
(i.e. Vg
) then required series resistance R = (n – 1) G..
2. G and S are parallel to each other hence both will have n
equal potential difference i.e. i g G (i i g ) S ; which gives 11.4 Wheatstone Bridge Principle
Wheatstone Bridge Principle states that if four resistances
ig
Required shunt S = G P, Q, R and S are arranged to form a bridge as shown in
(i – ig ) figure, if galvanometer shows no deflection, the bridge is
balanced.
i
3. To pass nth part of main current (i.e. i g ) through the
n P R
In that case
G Q S
galvanometer, required shunt S = .
(n –1)
11.3 Voltmeter
It is a device used to measure potential difference and is
always put in parallel with the ‘circuit element’ across
which potential difference is to be measured.
Proof :
+ –
V
Let I be the total current given out by the cell. On reaching
(i) The reading of a voltmeter is always lesser than true value. the point A, it is divided into two parts :
(ii) Greater the resistance of voltmeter, more accurate will be I1 is flowing through P
its reading. A voltmeter is said to be ideal if its resistance
(I – I1) through R.
is infinite, i.e., it draws no current from the circuit element
for its operation. At B, the current I1 is divided into two parts, Ig through the
galvanometer G and (I1 – Ig) through Q.
(iii) Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter : A
galvanometer may be converted into a voltmeter by A current (I – I1 + Ig) through S.
connecting a large resistance R in series with the Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit
galvanometer as shown in the figure. ABDA, we get
R I1P + Ig G – (I – I1) R = 0 ...(1)
G
where G is the resistance of galvanometer.
Vg = igG (V – Vg)
ig Again applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit
BCDB, we get
V (I1 – Ig) Q – (I – I1 + Ig) S – IgG = 0 ...(2)
(a) Equivalent resistance of the combination = G + R The value of R is adjusted such that the galvanometer shows
(b) According to ohm’s law Maximum reading of V which no deflection, i.e., Ig = 0. Now, the bridge is balanced. Putting
can be taken V = ig (G + R); which gives Ig = 0 in (1) and (2) we have
I1P – (I – I1) R = 0 or I1P = (I – I1) R ...(3)
V V
Required series resistance R = – G = – 1 G and I1Q – (I – I1) S = 0 or I1Q = (I – I1) S ...(4)
ig
Vg
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 138
P R
Dividing (3) by (4), we get
Q S
Note that in Wheatstone bridge circuit, arms AB and BC
having resistances P and Q form ratio arm. The arm AD,
having a resistance R, is a known variable resistance arm
and arm DC, having a resistance S is unknown resistance
arm.
1. Balanced bridge : The bridge is said to be balanced when
deflection in galvanometer is zero i.e. no current flows Adjust the position of jockey on the wire (say at B) where
through the galvanometer or in other words VB = VD. In on pressing, galvanometer shows no deflection.
Note the length AB ( = l say) to the wire. Find the length BC
P R
the balanced condition = , on mutually changing ( = 100 – l) of the wire.
Q S
P R
the position of cell and galvanometer this condition will According to Wheatstone bridge principle
Q S
not change. If r is the resistance per cm length of wire, then
2. Unbalanced bridge : If the bridge is not balanced current P = resistance of the length l of the wire AB = lr
will flow from D to B if VD > VB i.e. (VA VD ) (VA VB ) Q = resistance of the length (100 – l) of the wire BC =
(100 – l) r.
which gives PS > RQ.
r R 100
3. Applications of wheatstone bridge : Meter bridge, post or S R
100 r S
office box and Carey Foster bridge are instruments based
on the principle of wheatstone bridge and are used to Knowing l and R, we can calculate S.
measure unknown resistance. 11.6 Potentiometer and its principle of working
11.5 Slide Wire Bridge or Meter Bridge 1. Potentiometer is an apparatus used for measuring the emf
of a cells or potential difference between two points in an
1. A slide wire bridge is a practical form of Wheatstone bridge. electrical circuit accurately.
2. It consists of a wire AC of constantan or manganin of 1 2. A potentiometer consists of a long uniform wire generally
made of manganin or constantan, stretched on a wooden
metre length and of uniform area of cross-section.
board.
3. A meter scale is also fitted on the wooden board parallel to 3. Its ends are connected to the binding screws A and B. A
the length of the wire. meter scale is fixed on the board parallel to the length of the
wire. The potentiometer is provided with a jockey J with the
4. Copper strip fitted on the wooden board in order to provide help of which, the contact can be made at any point on the
two gaps in strips. wire, figure. A battery (called driving cell), connected
across A and B sends the current through the wire which is
5. Across one gap, a resistance box R and in another gap the kept constant by using a rheostat Rh.
unknown resistance S are connected.
6. The positive pole of the battery E is connected to terminal
A and the negative pole of the battery to terminal C through
one way key K.
7. The circuit is now exactly the same as that of the
Wheatstone bridge figure.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 139
Principle : The working of a potentiometer is based on the 2. Close key K1. The current flows through R1. A potential
fact that the fall of potential across any portion of the wire is difference is developed across R1. Adjust the position of
directly proportional to the length of that portion provided jockey on potentiometer wire where if pressed, the
the wire is of uniform area of cross-section and a constant galvanometer shows no deflection. Let it be when jockey is
current is flowing through it. at J. Note the length AJ (= l) of potentiometer wire. This
Suppose A and are respectively the area of cross-section would happen when potential difference across R1 is equal
and specific resistance of the material of the wire. to the fall of potential across the potentiometer wire of length
Let V be the potential difference across the portion of the l. If K is the potential gradient of potentiometer wire, then
wire of length l whose resistance is R. potential difference across R1, i.e.,
If I is the current flowing through the wire, then from Ohm’s
V = Kl
law; V = IR; As, R = l/A
3. If r is the resistance of potentiometer wire of length L, then
I current through potentiometer wire is
V I K, where K
A A
or Vl (if I and A are constant) I
Rr
i.e., potential difference across any portion of potentiometer
wire is directly proportional to length of the wire of that protion.
Potential drop across potentiometer wire Ir r
Here, V/l = K = is called potential gradient, i.e., the fall of Rr
potential per unit length of wire.
Potential gradient of potentiometer wire, i.e., fall of potential
11.7 Determination of Potential Difference using Potentiometer per unit length is
A battery of emf is connected between the end terminals A
r r
and B of potentiometer wire with ammeter A1, resistance box K . V
R and key K in series. This circuit is called an auxillary circuit. RrL Rr L
The ends of resistance R1 are connected to terminals A and
Hence, V can be calculated.
Jockey J through galvanometer G. A cell 1 and key K1 are
connected across R1 as shown in figure.
11.8 Comparison of emfs of two cells using Potentiometer
A battery of emf is connected between the end terminals A
and B of potentiometer wire with rheostat Rh, ammeter A1
and key K in series.
The positive terminals of both the cells are connected to
point A of the potentiometer. Their negative terminals are
connected to two terminals 1 and 2 of two ways key, while
its common terminal 3 is connected to jockey J through a
galvanometer G.
Insert the plug in the gap between the terminals 1 and 3 of
two way key so that the cell of emf 1 is in the circuit.
Working and Theory : Close key K and take out suitable
Adjust the position of jockey on potentiometer wire, where
resistance R from resistance box so that the fall of potential
if pressed, the galvanometer shows no deflection. Let it be
across the potentiometer wire is greater than the potential when jockey be at J1. Note the length AJ1 (= l1 say) of the wire.
difference to be measured.
There is no current in arm A1J1. It means the potential of
1. It can be checked by pressing, firstly the jockey J on positive terminal of cell = potential of the point A, and the
potentiometer wire near end A and later on near end B, the potential of negative terminal of cell = potential of the point J1.
deflections in galvanometer are in opposite directions.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 140
11.10 Determination of Internal Resistance of a Cell by
Potentiometer
To find the internal resistance r of a cell of emf using
potentiometer, set up the circuit as shown in figure.
Therefore, the e.m.f. of the cell ( =1) is equal to potential
difference between the points A and J1 of the potentiometer
wire.
i.e., 1 = Kl1 ...(1)
where K is the potential gradient across the potentiometer
wire. Close key K and maintain suitable constant current in the
potentiometer wire with the help of rheostat Rh. Adjust the
Now remove the plug from the gap between 1 and 3 and
position of jockey on the potentiometer wire where if pressed,
insert in the gap between 2 and 3 of two way key so that
the galvanometer show no deflection. Let it be when jockey
cells of emf 2 comes into the circuit. Again find the position
of jockey on potentiometer wire, where galvanometer shows is as J1. Note the length AJ1 (= l1) of the potentiometer wire.
no deflection. Let it be at J2. Note the length of the wire AJ2 Now emf of the cell, = potential difference across the length
( = l2 say). Then l1 of the potentiometer wire.
2 = Kl2 ...(2) or = Kl1 ...(1)
where K is the potential gradient across the wire.
1 1
Dividing (1) by (2), we get Close key K1 and take out suitable resistance R from the
2 2 resistance box in the cell circuit. Again find the position of
the jockey on the potentiometer wire where galvanometer
11.9 Precautions of experiment shows no deflection. Let it be at J2. Note the length of the
1. The current in the potentiometer wire from driving cell must wire AJ2 ( = l2 say). As current is being drawn from the cell,
be kept constant during experiment. its terminal potential difference V is balanced and not emf .
2. While adjusting the position of jockey on potentiometer Therefore, potential difference between two poles of the
wire, the edge of jockey should not be rubbed on the wire, cell, V = potential difference across the length l2 of the
otherwise area of cross-section of wire will not be uniform potentiometer wire
and constant. i.e. V = Kl2 ...(2)
3. The current in the potentiometer wire from driving cell should Dividing (1) by (2), we have
not be passed for long time as this would cause heating
effect, resulting the change in resistance of wire. 1
...(3)
V 2
Memory note
1. A balance point is obtained on the potentiometer wire if We know that the internal resistance r of a cell of emf ,
the fall of potential along the potentiometer wire, due to when a resistance R is connected in its circuit is given by
driving cell is greater than the e.m.f. of the cells to be balanced.
V
r R 1 R ...(4)
V V
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 141
Putting the value (3) in (4), we get
i R
A B
r 1 1 R 1 2 R
2 2
This work appears as thermal energy in the resistor.
Thus, knowing the values of l1, l2 and R, the internal
Heat produced by the resistance R is
resistance r of the cell can be determined.
11.11 Sensitiveness of Potentiometer W Vit i 2 Rt V2 t
H Cal. This relation is called
J 4 2 4 2 4 2R
The sensitiveness of potentiometer means the smallest joules heating.
potential difference that can be measured with its help.
Some important relations for solving objective questions
The sensitiveness of a potentiometer can be increased by are as follow :
decreasing its potential gradient. The same can be achieved.
Condition Graph
1. By increasing the length of potentiometer wire.
2. If the potentiometer wire is of fixed length, the potential If R and t are constant H
gradient can be decreased by reducing the current in the
H i and H V
2 2
potentiometer wire circuit with the help of rheostat and using
a single cell. i (or V)
11.12 Difference between Potentiometer and Voltmeter If i and t are constant H
Potentiometer Voltmere (series grouping) H R
1. It measures the emf of 1. It measures the emf of a R
a cell very accurately. cell approximately. If V and t are constant
H
2. While measuring emf it 2. While measuring emf, it
1
does not draw any current drws some current from (Parallel grouping) H
from the source of the source of emf. R
R
known emf.
If V, i and R constant H t H
3. While measuring emf, 3. While measuring emf the
the resistance of poten- resistance of voltmeter is
tiometer becomes infinite. high but finite. t
4. Its sensitivity is high. 4. Its sensitivity is low.
12.1 Electric Power
5. It is based on null 5. It is based on deflection
deflection method. method. The rate at which electrical energy is dissipated into other
forms of energy is called electrical power i.e.
6. It can be used for 6. It can be used only to
various purposes. measure emf or potential W V2
P= = Vi = i 2 R =
difference. t R
1. Units : It’s S.I. unit is Joule/sec or Watt Bigger S.I. units
12. HEATING EFFECT OF CURRENT are KW, MW and HP, remember 1 HP = 746 Watt
2. Rated values : On electrical appliances (Bulbs, Heater … etc.)
When some potential difference V is applied across a
resistance R then the work done by the electric field on
charge q to flow through the circuit in time t will be 40 W
V2 t 220 V
W = qV = Vit = i2R Joule .
R
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 142
Wattage, voltage, ……. etc. are printed called rated values (5) Thickness of filament of bulb : We know that resistance
e.g. If suppose we have a bulb of 40 W, 220 V then rated VR2
of filament of bulb is given by R , also R l ,
power (PR) = 40 W while rated voltage (VR) = 220 V. It means PR A
that on operating the bulb at 220 volt, the power dissipated
1
will be 40 W or in other words 40 J of electrical energy will be hence we can say that A PR i.e. If rated
Thickness R
converted into heat and light per second.
power of a bulb is more, thickness of it’s filament is also
(3) Resistance of electrical appliance : If variation of more and it’s resistance will be less.
resistance with temperature is neglected then resistance 1
of any electrical appliance can be calculated by rated If applied voltage is constant then P(consumed)
R
VR2 VA2
power and rated voltage i.e. by using R = e.g. (By P ). Hence if different bulbs (electrical
PR R
appliance) operated at same voltage supply then
220 220
Resistance of 100W, 220 volt bulb is R 484 1
100 Pconsumed PR thickness
R
(4) Power consumed (illumination) : An electrical appliance
Note :
(Bulb, heater, …. etc.) consume rated power (PR) only if
applied voltage (VA) is equal to rated voltage (VR) i.e. If Different bulbs
25W 100W 1000W
V2 220V 220V 220V
VA = VR so P consumed = P R. If VA < VR then Pconsumed A
R
VR2
also we have R so
PR Resistance R25 > R100 > R1000
Thickness of filament t1000– > t100 > t40
V2
Pconsumed (Brightness) A2 .PR Brightness B1000 > B100 > B25
VR
(6) Long distance power transmission : When power is
Pconsumed (Brightness)
transmitted through a power line of resistance R, power-
e.g. If 100 W, 220 V bulb operates on 110 volt supply then
loss will be i 2 R
2
110 Now if the power P is transmitted at voltage V
Pconsumed 100 25 W
220
P2
P = Vi i.e. i = (P/V) So, Power loss R
Note: V2
If VA < VR then % drop in output power Now as for a given power and line, P and R are constant
so Power loss (1/V2)
(PR Pconsumed ) So if power is transmitted at high voltage, power loss
100
PR will be small and vice-versa. e.g., power loss at 22 kV is
For the series combination of bulbs, current through them 10–4 times than at 220 V. This is why long distance power
will be same so they will consume power in the ratio of transmission is carried out at high voltage.
resistance i.e., P R {By P = i2R) while if they are
(7) Time taken by heater to boil the water : We know that
connected in parallel i.e. V is constant so power consumed
heat required to raise the temperature of any
1
by them is in the reverse ratio of their resistance i.e. P . substance of mass m and specific heat S is H = m.S.
R
Here heat produced by the heater = Heat required to raise
the temp. of water.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 143
J(m.S.) 3. 1 KWH or 1 unit is the quantity of electrical energy which
i.e. p t = J m.S. t
p dissipates in one hour in an electrical circuit when the
{J = 4.18 or 4.2 J/cal) electrical power in the circuit is 1 KWH thus
4180 ( or 4200) m
for m kg water t 1 KWH = 1000 W 3600 sec = 3.6 106 J.
p
{S = 1000 cal/kgoC) 4. Important formulae to calculate the no. of consumed units
Note :
Total watt Total hours
is n
If quantity of water is given n litre then 1000
4180(4200) n 12.4 Combination of Bulbs (or Electrical Appliances)
t
p
Bulbs (Heater etc.) Bulbs (Heater etc.)
12.2 Electric Energy
are in series are in parallel
The total electric work done or energy supplied by the
source of emf in maintaining the current in an electric circuit (1) Total power consumed (1) Total power consumed
for a given time is called electric energy consumed in the
circuit. 1 1 1
.... Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 .... + Pn
Ptotal P1 P2
Electric energy, W = VIt = P.t
Electric energy = electric power × time
P1
SI unit of electric energy is joule, wherre P1 P2
1 joule = 1 volt × 1 ampere × 1 second = 1 watt × 1 second P2
Supply
The commercial unit of electric energy is called a kilowatt- Supply
hour (kWh) or Board to Trade Unit (BOT) or UNIT of
Electricity, in brief, where
(2) In ‘n’ bulbs are identical, (2) If ‘n’ identical bulbs are
1 kWh = 1 kilo watt × 1 hour = 1000 watt × 1 hour
Thus 1 kilo watt hour is the total electric energy consumed P
Ptotal in parallel. Ptotal = nP
when an electrical appliance of power 1 kilo-watt works for N
one hours.
6 Pconsumed Brightness Pconsumed Brightness
1 kWh = 1000 Wh = (1000 W) × (60 × 60 s) = 3.6 × 10 J.
Note that the number of units of electricity consumed = No. 1
V R 1
PR i
watt hour Prated R
of kWh =
1000
i.e. in series combination i.e. in parallel combination
Electric energy VI t I 2 Rt V 2 t / R bulb of lesser wattage will bulb of greater wattage will
12.3 Electricity Consumption give more bright light and give more bright light and
p.d. appeared across it will more current will pass
1. The price of electricity consumed is calculated on the
basis of electrical energy and not on the basis of electrical be more. through it.
power.
2. The unit Joule for energy is very small hence a big practical
unit is considered known as kilowatt hour (KWH) or board
of trade unit (B.T.U.) or simple unit.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 144
12. 5 Some Standard Cases for Series and Parallel Combination
A
P
1. If n identical bulbs first connected in series so PS and
n
V
PP
then connected in parallel. So PP = nP hence n2 B C
PS
2. An electric kettle has two coils when one coil is switched
on it takes time t1 to boil water and when the second coil Reason : Voltage on A decreases.
is switched on it takes time t2 to boil the same water. 5. If two identical bulb A and B are connected in parallel with
If they are connected If they are connected ammeter A and key K as shown in figure.
in series in parallel It should be remembered that on pressing key reading of
ammeter becomes twice.
1 1 1
PP = P 1 + P2
PS P1 P2 K
A
1 1 1 H P H1 H 2
V
HS / tS H1 / t1 H2 / t 2 tp t1 t2 A B
HS=H1= H2 H p = H1 = H2
1 1 1 Reason : Total resistance becomes half.
so ts = t1+ t2 so
t p t1 t 2
Concepts
i.e. time taken by i.e. time taken by parallel
When a heavy current appliance such us motor, heater
combinationto boil the combination to boil the or geyser is switched on, it will draw a heavy current
same quantity of water same quantity of water from the source so that terminal voltage of source
decreases. Hence power consumed by the bulb
t1 t 2
ts = t 1 + t 2 tp decreases, so the light of bulb becomes less.
t1 t 2
3. If three identical bulbs are connected in series as shown
Heater
r
in figure then on closing the switch S. Bulb C short
circuited and hence illumination of bulbs A and B K
increases
12.6 Some aspects of heating effects of current
A B C
1. The wire supplying current to an electric lamp are not
+ S practically heated while the filament of lamp becomes white hot.
V–
We know that in series connections the heat produced due
to a current in a conductor is proportional to its resistance
(i.e. H R). The filament of the lamp and the supply wires
Reason : Voltage on A and B increased. are in series. The resistance of the wire supplying the current
to the lamp is very small as compared to that of the filament
4. If three bulbs A, B and C are connected in mixed
of the lamp. Therefore, there is more heating effect in the
combination as shown, then illumination of bulb A filament of the lamp than that in the supply wires. Due to it,
decreases if either B or C gets fused the filament of the lamp becomes white hot whereas the
wires remain practically unheated.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 145
12.7 Applications of Heating Effect of Current 14. SUPER CONDUCTIVITY
1. Electric Iron
Prof. K. Onnes, in 1911, discovered that certain metals and
2. Electric Arc alloys at very low temperature lose their resistance
3. Incandescent electric lamp considerably. This phenomenon is known as super-
conductivity. As the temperature decreases, the resistance of
F the material also decreases, but when the temperature reaches
B
a certain critical value (called critical temperature or
transition temperature), the resistance of the material
completely disappears i.e., it becomes zero. Then the material
4. Fuse wire behaves as if it is a super-conductor and there will be flow of
electrons without any resistance whatsoever. The critical
13. ELECTRICAL CONDUCTING MATERIALS temperature is different for different materials. It has been
FOR SPECIFIC USE found that mercury at critical temperature 4.2 K, lead at 7.25 K
and niobium at critical temperature 9.2 K become super-
1. Filament of electric bulb : Is made up of tungsten which conductors.
has high resistivity, high melting point.
A team of scientists discovered that an alloy of plutonium,
2. Element of heating devices (such as heater, geyser or cobalt and gallium exhibits super conductivity at temperatures
press) : Is made up of nichrome which has high resistivity below 18.5 K. Since 1987, many superconductors have been
and high melting point. prepared with critical temperature upto 125 K, as listed below
3. Resistances of resistance boxes (standard resistances) : Bi2Ca2Sr2Cu3O10 at 105 K and Tl2Ca2Ba2Cu3O10 at 125 K.
Are made up of alloys (manganin, constantan or
The super-conductivity shown by materials can be verified
nichrome) these materials have moderate resistivity which
by simple experiment. If a current is once set up in a closed
is practically independent of temperature so that the
ring of super-conducting material, it continues flowing for
specified value of resistance does not alter with minor
several weeks after the source of e.m.f. has been withdrawn.
changes in temperature.
The cause of super-conductivity is that, the free electrons in
4. Fuse-wire : Is made up of tin-lead alloy (63% tin + 37%
super-conductor are no longer independent but become
lead). It should have low melting point and high
mutually dependent and coherent when the critical
resistivity. It is used in series as a safety device in an
temperature is reached. The ionic vibrations which could
electric circuit and is designed so as to melt and thereby
deflect free electrons in metals are unable to deflect this
open the circuit if the current exceeds a predetermined
coherent or co-operative cloud of electrons in super-
value due to some fault. The function of a fuse is
conductors. It means the coherent cloud of electrons makes
independent of its length. Safe current of fuse wire relates
no collisions with ions of the super-conductor and, as such,
with it’s radius as i r 3/2 . there is no resistance offered by the super-conductor to the
5. Thermistors : A thermistor is a heat sensitive resistor flow of electrons.
usually prepared from oxides of various metals such as Super-conductivity is a very interesting field of research all
nickel, copper, cobalt, iron etc. These compounds are also over the world these days. The scientists have been working
semi-conductor. For thermistors is very high which actively to prepare super-conductor at room temperature and
may be positive or negative. The resistance of thermistors they have met with some success only.
changes very rapidly with change of temperature.
Application of super conductors
i 1. Super conductors are used for making very strong
electromagnets.
2. Super conductivity is playing an important role in material
science research and high energy partical physics.
V
3. Super conductivity is used to produce very high speed
computers.
Thermistors are used to detect small temperature change 4. Super conductors are used for the transmission of electric
and to measure very low temperature.
power.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 146
TIPS AND TRICKS NA x d
8. Free electron density in a metal is given by n
1. Human body, though has a large resistance of the order of A
k (say 10 k), is very sensitive to minute currents even where N A = Avogadro number, x = number of free
as low as a few mA. Electrocution, excites and disorders electrons per atom, d = density of metal and A = Atomic
the nervous system of the body and hence one fails to weight of metal.
control the activity of the body. 9. In the absence of radiation loss, the time in which a fuse will
2. dc flows uniformly throughout the cross-section of melt does not depends on it’s length but varies with radius
conductor while ac mainly flows through the outer surface as t r 4 .
area of the conductor. This is known as skin effect. 10. If length (l) and mass (m) of a conducting wire is given
3. It is worth noting that electric field inside a charged
conductor is zero, but it is non zero inside a current 2
then R .
m
V
carrying conductor and is given by E where V
11. Macroscopic form of Ohm’s law is R , while it’ss
V = potential difference across the conductor and l = i
length of the conductor. Electric field out side the current microscopic form is J = E.
carrying conductor is zero. 12. After stretching if length increases by n times then
resistance will increase by n 2 times i.e. R 2 n 2 R1 .
Similarly if radius be reduced to 1/n times then area of
cross-section decreases 1/n2 times so the resistance
becomes n4 times i.e. R 2 n 4 R1 .
13. After stretching if length of a conductor increases by x%
then resistance will increases by 2x % (valid only if x < 10%)
1 14. Decoration of lightning in festivals is an example of series
4. For a given conductor JA = i = constant so that J
A grouping whereas all household appliances connected in
i.e., J1 A1 = J2 A2 ; this is called equation of continuity parallel grouping.
15. Using n conductors of equal resistance, the number of
possible combinations is 2n – 1.
16. If the resistance of n conductors are totally different, then
i the number of possible combinations will be 2n.
J1
J2 17. If n identical resistances are first connected in series and
i
then in parallel, the ratio of the equivalent resistance is
A1 A2
Rp n2
given by .
Rs 1
5. The drift velocity of electrons is small because of the 18. If a wire of resistance R, cut in n equal parts and then
frequent Collisions suffered by electrons. these parts are collected to form a bundle then equivalent
6. The small value of drift velocity produces a large
R
amount of electric current, due to the presence of resistance of combination will be .
extremely large number of free electrons in a conductor. n2
The propagation of current is almost at the speed of 19. If equivalent resistance of R1 and R2 in series and parallel
light and involves electromagnetic process. It is due be Rs and Rp respectively then
to this reason that the electric bulb glows immediately 1
when switch is on. R1 R s R s2 4R s R p and
2
7. In the absence of electric field, the paths of electrons
between successive collisions are straight line while 1
R2 R s R s2 4R s R p
in presence of electric field the paths are generally 2
curved.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 147
20. If a skeleton cube is made with 12 equal resistance each
having resistance R then the net resistance across R1 R2
H G
A B
R3
E
F
D C
R2 R1
A B
2R1R 2 R 3 (R1 R 2 )
5 R AB
21. The longest diagonal (EC or AG) R 2R 3 R1 R 2
6
3
22. The diagonal of face (e.g. AC, ED, ....) R R1 R1 R1 R1
4 A
7
23. A side (e.g. AB, BC.....) R R3 R3 R3 R3
12
24. Resistance of a conducting body is not unique but B
R2 R2 R2 R2
depends on it’s length and area of cross-section i.e.
how the potential difference is applied. See the following
figures 1 1 1/ 2
R AB (R1 R 2 ) (R 1 R 2 ) 2 4R 3 (R 1 R 2 )
2 2
R1 R1 R1 R1
A
b b
R2 R2 R2
a a
B
Length = a Length = b
Area of cross-section = b c Area of cross-section = a c 1 R
R AB R1 1 1 4 2
2 R1
Resistance R
b
Resistance R
a
c
b ac 26. It is a common misconception that “current in the circuit
will be maximum when power consumed by the load is
25. Some standard results for equivalent resistance
maximum.”
R1 R2 27. Actually current i = E/(R + r) is maximum (= E/r) when R
= min = 0 with PL = (E/r)2 × 0 = 0 min. while power consumed
A B by the load E2R/(R + r)2 is maximum (= E2/4r) when R = r
R5
and i (E / 2r) max ( E / r).
R3 R4 28. Emf is independent of the resistance of the circuit and
depends upon the nature of electrolyte of the cell while
R1R 2 (R 3 R 4 ) (R1 R 2 )R 3 R 4 R 5 (R 1 R 2 ) (R 3 R 4 ) potential difference depends upon the resistance between
R AB
R 5 (R1 R 2 R 3 R 4 ) (R1 R 3 )(R 2 R 4 ) the two points of the circuit and current flowing through
the circuit.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 148
29. Whenever a cell or battery is present in a branch there 34. When two cell’s of different emf and no internal resistance
must be some resistance (internal or external or both) are connected in parallel then equivalent emf is
present in that branch. In practical situation it always indeterminate, note that connecting a wire with a cell with
happen because we can never have an ideal cell or battery no resistance is equivalent to short circuiting. Therefore
with zero resistance. the total current that will be flowing will be infinity.
30. In series grouping of identical cells. If one cell is wrongly R
connected then it will cancel out the effect of two cells
e.g. If in the combination of n identical cells (each having E1
emf E and internal resistance r) if x cell are wrongly
E2
connected then equivalent emf Eeq (n 2 x ) E and
equivalent internal resistance req nr . 35. In the parallel combination of non-identical cell’s if they
are connected with reversed polarity as shown then
31. Graphical view of open circuit and closed circuit of a cell.
equivalent emf
V E1r2 E 2 r1
Vmax ; E; i = 0 E eq
r1 r2
i1 E 1, r 2
imax = E/r; V = 0 i
32. If n identical cells are connected in a loop in order, then
emf between any two points is zero. i i2 E2, r2
R
E, r
E, r E, r 36. Wheatstone bridge is most sensitive if all the arms of
Close bridge have equal resistances i.e. P = Q = R = S
loop
37. If the temperature of the conductor placed in the right
E, r
gap of metre bridge is increased, then the balancing length
E, r decreases and the jockey moves towards left.
n cell
38. In Wheatstone bridge to avoid inductive effects the
33. In parallel grouping of two identical cell having no internal battery key should be pressed first and the galvanometer
key afterwards.
resistance
39. The measurement of resistance by Wheatstone bridge is
R R not affected by the internal resistance of the cell.
40. In case of zero deflection in the galvanometer current
E E flows in the primary circuit of the potentiometer, not in
the galvanometer circuit.
E E
41. A potentiometer can act as an ideal voltmeter.
Eeq = E Eeq = 0
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 149
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 Example - 3
The charge flowing in a conductor varies with time as, A wire of resistance 5 is drawn out so that its length is
1 1
q at bt 2 ct 3
increased by twice its original length. Calculate its new
2 6
where a, b, c are positive constants.
resistance.
Then, f ind
Sol. Here, R1 = 5; l1 = l say ; A1 = A, say
(i) the initial current
(ii) the time after which the value of curent reaches a R2 = ? ; l2 = 2l + l = 3l; A2 = ?
maximum value
If V is the volumne of the wire of length l and area of cross-
(iii) the maximum or minimum value of current.
section A, then
Sol.
(i) Current, V = Al or A = V/l
dq d 1 1 1
i at bt 2 ct 3 a bt ct 2 ...(i) 2
dt dt 2 6 2 Now R R 2
A V/ V
When t = 0, i = a
di [ and V are constants]
(ii) b ct.
dt
or R 2 3 9
R 2 22 2
For i to be maximum or minimum, Hence,
R1 12 5 2
di b
0 b ct or t
dt c or R2 = 5 × 9 = 45 .
(iii) Putting this value of t in (i), we have
Example - 4
b 1 b2 b2 b2 b2
i = a – b × c a a .
c 2 c c 2c 2c A copper wire is stretched to make it 0.2% longer. What
As this value of i is less than that at t = 0, it must be minimum. is the percentage change in its resistance ?
b2 Sol. The mass m of the wire of length l, area of cross section A
So minimum value of current = a –
2c and density d is given by
Example - 2 m
m = Ald or A
d
The current in a wire varies with time according to the
relation : i = (4 + 2t2)A The resistance R of the wire of resistivity is given by
(a) How many coulombs pass a cross–section 2 d
of the wire in the time interval between t = 5 R k 2
A m
and t = 10 s ?
(b) What constant current could transport the where k = d/m is a constant of the wire.
same charge in same time interval ?
dR 2d
Sol. i (t) = 4 + 2 t2 ;
R
4 2t dt 603.33 C
10 10
(a) q i dt 2
5 5 dR 2 0.2
% increase in resistance 100 100
q 603.33 R 100
(b) i c 120.67 A.
t 10 5 = 0.4 %
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 150
Example - 5 Sol. We know that number for brown colour is 1, for violet colour
is 7 and that of yellow is 4. For gold, accuracy is 5%.
1 kg piece of copper is drawn into a wire 1 mm thick, and
another piece into a wire 2 mm thick. Compare the Resistance of resistor shown in figure.
resistance of these wires. 4
= 17 × 10 ± 5%
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
(c) 8 : 1 (d) 16 : 1 = 0.17 Megaohm ± 5%
Ans. (d) Example - 8
Sol. As volume will remains same in case of both plese.
The resistance of a tungsten filament at 150° C is 133.
A1 l1 A2 l2
What will be its resistance at 500°C ? The temperature
–1
l1 106 l2 4 106 coefficient of resistance of tungsten is 0.0045°C at 0°C.
–1
l1 4l2 Sol. Here; R150 = 133 , R500 = ?, = 0.0045°C
l We know, Rt = R0 (1 + t)
1
R1 A1 l A 4l 4 106 16
1 2 2 R150 = R0 (1 + × 150)
R2 l2 A1 l2 l2 10 6 1
A2
or 133 = R0 (1 + 0.0045 × 150) ...(i)
Example - 6
And R500 = R0 (1 + × 500)
A wire of resistance R is cut into n equal parts. These parts
or R500 = R0 (1 + 0.0045 × 500) ...(ii)
are then connected in parallel. The equivalent resistance
of the combination will be Dividing (ii) by (i) we get
(a) nR (b) R/n
2
(c) n/R (d) R/n . R 500 1 0.0045 500 3.25
Ans. (d)
133 1 0.0045 150 1.675
Sol. Resistance of wire=R
If the wire is cut into n equal parts, resistance of each wire is
3.25
R or R 500 133 258.1
and connected in parallel 1.675
n
R Example - 9
R eq
n2
A uniform wire or resistance R is shaped into a regular n
Example - 7 sided polygon where n is even. Find the equivalent
resistance between (i) opposite corners of polygon (ii)
The colour coded resistor is shown in figure. Compute adjacent corners of polygon.
the resistance in megaohm.
Sol. Let the polygon be as shown in figure. The resistance of
each side of polygon = R/n.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 151
(i) For resistance between opposite corners C and G, we have Example - 11
two resistance in parallel each of value R/2.
(a) Given n resistors each of resistance R. How will you
Therefore, the equivalent resistance between opposite
combine them to get the (i) maximum effective
corner is
resistance ? What is the ratio of the maximum to
R / 2 R / 2 R minimum resistance ?
.
R / 2 R / 2 4 (b) Given the resistances of 1, 2, 3, how will you
combine them to get an equivalent resistance of (i) (11/
(ii) For resistance between adjacent corner A and H, we have
3) (ii) (11/5) (iii) 6 (iv) (6/11) ?
two resistance of R/n and (n – 1) R/n in parallel. The
R / n n 1 R / n n 1 Sol.
equivalent resistance is R
R / n n 1 R / n n2 (a) For maximum effective resistance, the n resistors must be
connected in series.
Example - 10
Maximum effective resistance, in Rs = nR.
Six equal resistances each of 4 ohm are connected to form
a network as shown in figure. What is the resistance For minimum effective resistance, the n resistors must be
between A and B ? connectedd in parallel
minimum effective resistance, Rp = R/n
Rs nR
n2
Rp R / n
(b) It is to be noted that the effective resistance of parallel
combination of resistors is less than the individual resistance
and the effective resistance of series combination of
resistors is more than individual resistance.
Sol. The upper five resistances between A and B will form a Case (i) Parallel combination of 1 and 2 is connected in
balanced. Wheatstone bridge. Hence there will be no current series with 3.
in arm CO. The equivalent circuit will be as shown in figure.
Here, resistances of arm ACB, AOB and AB are all in parallel. Effective resistance of 1 and 2 in parallel will be given
The effective resistance R is given by by R p 1 2 2
1 2 3
2
Equivalent resistance of and 3 in series
3
2 11
3
3 3
Case (ii) : Parallel combination of 2 and 3 is connected
in series with 1 .
1 1 1 1
Equivalent resistance of 2 and 3 in parallel
R 4 4 4 4 4
23 6
11 2 4 1
or R = 2 23 5
8 8 2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 152
6 Let R be the equivalent resistance of the network between
Equivalent resistance of and 1 in series A and B. The circuit starts repeating again to the right of
5
first 3 resistances. Hence R is also the resistance to the
6 11 right of C and D.
1
5 5
Case (iii) : All the resistance are to be connected in series.
Now
Equivalent resistance = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6.
Case (iv): All the resistance are to be connected in parallel
3R
1 1 1 1 R AB 2
R 3
Equivalent resistance (R) is given by
R 1 2 3
3R
R 2
6 3 2 11 6 R 3
or R .
6 6 11 R2 – 2R – 6 = 0
Example - 12
R 1 7 .
Explain why resistance becomes more in series Example - 15
combination.
State the factors on which (i) internal resistance
Sol. In series combination of resistors, the effective length of
the conductor increases. As R l, therefore resistance (ii) emf of a cell depend.
increases.
Sol. Internal resistance of a cell depends upon; (i) distance
Example - 13 between the plates (ii) the nature of electrolyte (iii) the nature
of electrodes (iv) area of the plates, immersed in the
Explain why resistance becomes less in parallel electroyle. If area increases, internal resistance decreases.
combination.
E.M.F. of a cell depends upon; (i) nature of electrodes (ii)
Sol. In parallel combination of resistors, the effective area of nature and concentration of electrolyte used in the cell (iii)
cross-section of the conductor increases. As R 1/A, temperature of electrolyte.
therefore, resistance decreases.
Example - 16
Example - 14
In the circuit shown, the EMF of the cells are :
Find the resistance of the infinite network between A E1 = 10 V; E2 = 40 V; R = 15; internal resistances
and B in the figure. are r1 = 1 ; r2 = 2. Calculate the current through
R and the potential difference across the terminals
of each cell.
Sol.
Sol. The two cells are equivalent to a single cell of emf
E = E2 – E1 = 40 V – 10V = 30 V
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 153
Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit
ARBE1A,
(I1 + I2) × 12 + I1 × 0.5 – 6 = 0
or 12.5 I1 + 12 I2 = 6 ...(i)
Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit
ARBE2 A, we get
(I1 + I2) × 12 + I2 × 1 – 10 = 0
or 12 I1 + 13 I2 = 10 ...(ii)
Multiplying (i) by 13 and (ii) by 12, we get
162.5 I1 + 156 I2 = 78. ...(iii)
144 I1 + 156 I2 = 120 ...(iv)
Substracting (iv) from (iii), we get
As E2 > E1, the net emf follows the direction of E2 42
18.5 I1 = – 42 or I1 –2.27 A
Current through each resistance (all are in series) is 18.5
Negative sign shows that I1 actually flows in a direction
i = 30/18 = 5/3 A.
opposite to what is shown in figure. Substituting the value
p.d. across cells : of I1 in (ii), we get
p.d. across the terminals of cell E1 is 42 12 42 185 504
12 13 I 2 10 or 13I 2 10
18.5 18.5 18.5
= VA – VB = E1 + ir1 = 10 + 5/3 × 1 = 35/3 V.
or I 2 689
p.d. across the terminals of cell E2 is 2.86 A.
18.5 13
= VC – VD = E2 – ir2 = 40 – 5/3 × 2 = 110/3 V.
Example - 18
Example - 17 Four identical cells each of emf 2V, are joined in parallel
providing supply of current to external circuit consisting
A battery of 6 V and internal resistance 0.5 is joined in of two 15 resistors joined in parallel. The terminal voltage
parallel with another of 10 V and internal resistance 1. of the cells as read by an ideal voltmeter is 1.6 V. Calculate
The combination sends a current through an external the internal resistance of each cell.
resistance of 12. Find the current through each battery.
Sol. The four cells are connected in parallel to the parallel
Sol. The arrangement of the two batteries and the external
combination of two 15 resistors as shown in figure.
resitance is shown in figure. Let I1 and I2 be the circuit given
by the two batteries so that the current through the external
resistance is (I1 + I2) as shown in the figure.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 154
Let r be the internal resistance of each cell. As cells are in Example - 20
para-llel, the effective emf of all the cells, = emf of one
cell = 2V. A battery of 10 V and negligible internal resistance is
Terminal voltage, V = 1.6 V, connected across the diagonally opposite corners of a
Total internal resistance r’ of four cells in parallel is obtained cubical network consisting of 12 resistors each of
from resistance 1. Determine the equivalent resistance
of the network and the current along each edge of the
1 1 1 1 1 4 r
or r cube.
r r r r r r 4
Total external resistance, R 15 15 7.5
15 15
Internal resistance r’ of the parallel combination of cells is
give by
r r
2 I 7.5 ..... 1 & 2 16 I
4 4
I.r
0.4
4
1.6
I=
r
Putting I in ...(i), we get
1.6 r
2 7.5
r 4
r 7.5
or or r 7.5 Sol. The network is not reducible to a simple series and parallel
4 4
combinations of resistors. There is, however, a clear
Example - 19 symmetry in the problem which we can exploit to obtain the
equivalent resistance of the network.
A cell of emf and internal resistance r gives a current of
The paths AA’, AD and AB are obviously symmetrically
0.5 A with an external resistance of 12 and a current of
placed in the network. Thus, the current in each must be the
0.25 A with an external resistance of 25 . Calculate (a)
same, say, I. Further, at the corners A’, B and D, the incoming
internal resistance of the cell and (b) emf of the cell.
current I must split equally into the two outgoing branches.
Sol. Let R be external resistance in the series with the cell of emf In this manner, the current in all the 12 edges of the cube are
easily written down in terms of I, using Kirchhoff’s first rule
and internal resistance r. The current in circuit is I and the symmetry in the problem.
Rr
In first case , Next take a closed loop, say ABCC’ EA, and apply Kirchhoff’s
I = 0.5 A, R = 12 second rule :
–IR – (1/2) IR – IR + = 0
0.5 or = (12 + r) × 0.5 = 6.0 + 0.5 r ...(i)
12 r where R is the resistance of each edge and the emf of
In second case, battery. Thus,
I = 0.25 A, R = 25
5
IR
0.25 or = (25 + r) × 0.25 = 6.25 + 0.25 r ...(ii) 2
25 r
From (i) and (ii), 6.0 + 0.5 r = 6.25 + 0.25 r The equivalent resistance Req of the network is
or r = 1
5
From (i), = 6.0 + 0.5 × 1 = 6.5 V R eq R
3I 6
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 155
For R = 1, Req = (5/6) and for = 10 V, the total current Example - 22
(=3I) in the network is
Calculate the current through the 5 resistance. The
3I = 10 V /(5/6) = 12 A, i.e., I = 4A cell has negligible internal resistance.
The current flowing in each edge can now be read off from
the figure.
Example - 21
In the adjoining circuit, figure
Sol. Net resistance across the cell
20 5
10
20 5
R1 = 100 Ω , R2 = R3 = 50 Ω ,
R4 =75 Ω , ε = 4.75 V..
Work out the equivalent resistance of the circuit and the
current in each resistor.
Sol. Here R2, R3 and R4 are connected in parallel. Their effective
resistance Rp will be given by
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
emf
R p R 2 R 3 R 4 50 50 75 current through the cell will be = i =
net resistance
6 6 4 16 4
50 25
300 300 75 i= A.
20×5 7
10+
or Rp = 75/4 . 20+5
Total resistance of circuit = R1 + Rp = 100 + 75/4 = 475/4 25 100
Voltage across 5 = 50 – × 10 =
7 7
4.75
Current, i1 0.04 A; 100 20
475 / 4 I2 A
75 7
Pot drop across R1 = i1R1 = 0.04 × 100 = 4V
Example - 23
Pot. drop. across all other resistances = 4.75 – 4 V = 0.75 V
When is a Wheatstone bridge said to be balanced ?
Current through R2 or R3, i2 = i3 = 0.75/50 = 0.015 A;
Sol. Wheatsone bridge is said to be balanced, when no current
Current through R4, i4 = 0.75/75 = 0.01 A. flows through the galvanometer arm of Wheatstone bridge.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 156
Example - 24 Example - 27
Mark the correct option. A resistance of R draws current from a potentiometer.
the potentiometer has a total resistance R0 (figure). A
(a) an ammeter should have small resistance
voltage V is supplied to the potentiometer. Derive an
(b) an ammeter should have high resistance experssion for the voltage across R when the sliding
contact is in the middle of the potentiometer.
(c) a voltmeter has low resistance
(d) galvanometer has low resistance than a voltmeter
Ans. (a)
Sol. Ammeter is an instrument used to measure the current, so it
should has small resistance so that it couldn’t affect the
total resistance.
Example - 25
A voltmeter has a resistance of 20000. When connected Sol. While the slide is in the middle of the potetiometer only half
in series with a large resistance R across 110 V line, the of its resistance R0/2) will be between the points A and B.
meter reads 5 V. Find the resistance R. Hence, the total resistance between A and B, say, R1, will be
given by the following expression :
Sol. p.d. across voltmeter is 5 V.
1 1 1
R1 R R 0 / 2
R0R
R1
R 0 2R
The total resistance betwen A and C will be sum of resistance
between A and B and B and C, i.e., R1 + R0/2
The current flowing through the potentiometer will be
Rv 20000 V 2V
5 110 110 I
R Rv R 20000 R1 R 0 / 2 2R1 R 0
The voltage V1 taken from the potentiometer will be the
R = 420000 = 420 k
product of current I and resistance R1.
Example - 26
2V
V1 IR1 R1
Why do we prefer a potentiometer to measure emf of a cell 2R1 R 0
rather than a voltmeter ?
Substituting for R1, we have a
Sol. A potentiometer does not draw any current from the cell
2V R0 R
whose emf is to be determined, wheereas a voltmeter always V1
R R R 0 2R
draws some little current. Therefore, emf measured by voltmeter 2 0 R0
is slightly less then actual value of emf of the cell. R 0 2R
2VR
V1
2R R 0 2R
or V1 2VR
R 0 4R
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 157
Example - 28 Example - 29
When two known resistance R and S are connected in Name the physical quantity which has its unit joule
the left and right gaps of a metre bridge, the balance –1
coulomb . Is it a scalar or vector quantity ?
point is found at a distance l1 from the zero end of the –1
metre bridge wire. An unknown resistance X is now Sol. A physical quantity with unit, Jc = workdone/charge =
connected in parallel to the resistance S and the balance potential difference. It is a scalar quantity.
point is now found at a distance l2 from the zero end of the
metre bridge wire figure. Obtain a formula for X in terms Example - 30
of l1, l2 and S.
Two bulbs are marked 220 V – 100 watt and 220 V – 50
watt respectively. They are connected in series to 220 V
mains. Find the ratio of heats generated in them.
Sol. Here, P1 = 100 W, P2 = 50 W, V = 220 V
Let R1, R2 be the resistances of 100 watt bulb and 50 watt
2
bulb respectively. As R = v /P, therefore,
2 2
R1 = (200) /100 = 484 and R2 = (220) /50 = 968 .
Sol. When resistance R and S are connected to the left and right
gaps of metre bridge and bridge is balanced at length l1 from
When bulbs are connected in series to mains, there will be
zero end, then
same current I in each bulb. Then
R 1
...(i)
S 100 1 2 2 –1 2 2
H1 = I R1 = I × 484 Js and H2 = I R2 = I × 968 Js
–1
When unknown resistance X is connected in parallel to S,
H1 484 1
then effective resistance in right gap is S SX
S X H 2 968 2
Now, balance point is obtained at length l2,
Example - 31
R 2
S 100 2 In figure, the emf of the cell is 1.8 V and internal resistance
is 2/3 , calculate the current in the 3 resistance and
Putting the value of S’, we have
the power dissiplated in the whole circuit.
R S X 2
...(iii)
SX 100 2
Dividing (iii) by (i), we get
S X 2 100 1 or S 100 1
1 2
X 100 2 1 X 1 100 2
S 100 2 1 2 100 1 1 2 100 2 1
or
X 1 100 2 1 100 2
1 100 2
or X S
100 2 1
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 158
Sol. The equivalent circuit is shown in the figure 12
I 8
I
I 2 12 8 I
I 2 8 I 12 0
I 2A
Example - 34
A steady beam of –particles travelling with kinetic
energy E = 83.5 keV carries a current of I = 0.2 A. Mass
–27
Effective resistance Rp between A and B will be of –particle = 6.68 × 10 kg.
1 1 1 1 1 31 42 (i) If this beam strikes a plane surface at an angle
or R p = 60° with normal to the surface, how many –
R p 3 14 6 6 42 31
particles strike the surface in t = 4 second ?
E 1.8
Current from the cell, I 0.89 A (ii) How many –particles are there in length l = 20 cm of
R p r 42 2
the beam ?
31 3 –6
Potential diff. between A and B, VA – VB = I Rp Sol. Here, I = 0.2 A = 0.2 × 10 A,
3 3 –19
E = 83.5 keV = 83.5 × 10 eV = 83.5 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 J
42
0.89 1.21 V = 83.5 × 1.6 × 10 J
–16
31 –19
(i) Charge on –particle, q = 2e = 2 × 1.6 × 10 C
1.21
Current in 3 resistance 0.4 A No. of –particles crossing per second a cross-secton of
3
Power dissipated in the whole circuit (including the cell) is beam,
2
42 2 1 0.2 106
P = I (R + r) = (0.89) = 1.6 watt
2
n 6.25 1011 / s .
31 3 q 2 1.6 1019
Example - 32 No. of –particles striking a surface in time 4 second
11 12
To reduce the brightness of a light bulb, should an = nt = 6.25 × 10 × 4 = 2.5 × 10 .
auxiliary resistance be connected in series with it or in Note :
parallel ? There is no significance of angle (= 60°) for finding the
number of –particles striking the surface.
Sol. To reduce the brightness of a light bulb, we should decreases
the current flowing through the bulb, which is possible when (ii) If v is the velocity of –particle while travelling towards a
an auxiliary resistance is connected in series with the bulb. surface, then
1 2E 2 83.5 1.6 1016
Example - 33 E mv 2 or v
6
= 2 × 10 m/s
2 m 6.68 1027
Three resistances are connected in series across 12 volt 6
It means a beam of length v = 2 × 10 m crosses a section in
battery. The first resistor has value of 1 ohm second has one second. But number of –particle passing through a
voltage drop of 4 volt and third has power dissipation of 12 11
section in one second is, n = 6.25 × 10
watt. What is circuit current.
(a) 1A (b) 2A n
No. of –particles in until length of the beam
(c) 3A (d) 4A v
Ans. (b) No. of –particles in length l of the beam
Sol. V V1 V2 V3
n 6.25 1011
0.20 = 6.25 × 104
12 v 2 106
12 I 1 4 { Since, P=VI}
I
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 159
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
3
Definition of Current 7. The specific resistance of a wire is , its volume is 3 m and
its resistance is 3 ohm, then its length will be
1. A non-conducting wire of radius R has charge q distributed
unevenly over it. If it is rotated with an angular velocity of (a) 1/ (b) 3 /
, the equivalent current will be
(c) 3/ (d) / 3
(a) zero (b) q
q q Variation with Temperature
(c) (d) 8. The heating element of an electric heater should be made
2 2 R
with a material which should have
Variation with length and area (a) High specific resistance and high melting point
2. All the edges of a block with parallel faces are unequal. Its (b) High specific resistance and low melting point
longest edge is twice its shortest edge. The ratio of the (c) Low specific resistance and high melting point
maximum to minimum resistance between parallel faces is (d) Low specific resistance and low melting point
(a) 2 (b) 4 9. As the temperature of a conductor increases, its resistivity
(c) 8 (d) 16 and conductivity changes .The ratio of resistivity to
conductivity
3. Two plates of same material R and S are in the form of a
(a) Increases
square and have the same thickness. A side of S is twice the
side of R. Compare their resistances. The direction of current (b) decreases
is shown by an arrow head. (c) remains constant
(d) may increase or decrease depending on material
10. Thermistors are usually made of
(a) metals with low temperature coefficient of resistivity
(a) The resistance of R is twice that of S (b) metals with high temperature coefficient of resistivity
(b) Both have the same resistance (c) metal oxides with high temperature coefficient of
(c) The resistance of S is four times that of R resistivity
(d) The resistance of R is half to that of S. (d) semiconductors with low temperature coefficient of
resistivity
4. The resistance of a 10 m long wire is 10 . Its length is
11. A conductor behaves as a super conductor
increased by 25% by stretching the wire uniformly. The
resistance of wire will change to (approximately) (a) above critical temperature
(a) 12.5 (b) 14.5 (b) at critical temperature
(c) at 40 C°
(c) 15.6 (d) 16.6
(d) at boiling point of that metal
5. The length of conductor is doubled and its radius is halved, 2
its specific resistance is 12. A nichrome wire 1 m long and 1 mm in cross-section area
draws 4 ampere at 2 volt. The resistivity of nichrome is
(a) unchanged (b) halved –7 –7
(a) 1 × 10 –m (b) 2 × 10 –m
(c) doubled (d) quadrupled –7 –7
(c) 4 × 10 –m (d) 5 × 10 –m
6. A resistance of 2 is to be made from a copper wire (specific
–8 13. Which of the following material has negative temperature
resistance 1.7 × 10 m) using a wire of length 50 cm. The
coefficient of resistance.
radius of the wire is
(a) brass (b) copper
(a) 0.0116 mm (b) 0.0367 mm
(c) porcelain (d) carbon
(c) 0.116 mm (d) 0.367 mm
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 160
14. Which of the following material has nearly zero temperature 22. Total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is
coefficient of resistance.
(a) carbon (b) porcelain
(c) copper (d) manganin
15. A piece of copper and silicon are cooled from room
temperature to 100 K. The resistance of
(a) each of them increases
(b) each of them decreases
(c) copper increases and that of silicon decreases
(a) 4A (b) 6A
(d) copper decreases and that of silicon increases
16. A coil has resistance of 18 when its mean temperature (c) 2A (d) 1A
is 20oC and of 20 when its mean temperature is 50 oC. 23. The effective resistance between points A and B in the circuit
What will be mean temperature rise when its resistance is shown in figure is
21 and the surrounding temperature is 15oC.
(a) 40oC (b) 50oC
(c) 60oC (d) 70oC
17. On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its resistance
increases because
(a) relaxation time decreases
(a) R/3 (b) R/2
(b) mass of the electron increases
(c) 2 R/5 (d) 3 R/5
(c) electron density decreases
24. What is the equivalent resistance between A and B in the
(d) none of the above
circuit of figure, if R = 3 ,
18. The temperature coefficient of resistance for a wire is
–1
0.00125°C . At 300 K its resistance is 1 ohm. The temperature
at which the resistance becomes 1.5 ohm is
(a) 450 K (b) 727 K
(c) 454 K (d) 900 K
Series and Parallel of Resistors
19. A wire of resistance 6 is cut into three equal pieces, which
are joined to form a triangle. The equivalent resistance (a) 8 (b) 9
between any two corners of the triangle is
(c) 12 (d) 15
(a) 3/4 (b) 4/3
25. The effective resistance between A and B in figure is
(c) 2 (d) 4
20. Two resistances are joined in parallel whose resistance is
3/5 . One of the resistance wire is broken and the effective
resistance becomes 3 . The resistance in ohm of the wire
that got broken was
(a) 4/3 (b) 2
(c) 6/5 (d) 3/4
21. You are given three equal resistors. How many resistances
can be obtained by joining them in series and parallel
grouping ?
(a) 10 (b) 12
(a) 6 (b) 4
(c) 9.85 (d) 10.85
(c) 3 (d) 2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 161
26. What is the total resistance of the circuit ? 30. In the circuit diagram shown below each resistance is of
value 1 ohm, what is the equivalent resistance between the
points A and B.
(a) 6 (b) 7
(c) 8 (d) 9 (a) 4/7 (b) 8/7
27. What will be the resistance between P and Q in the following (c) 3/14 (d) 16/7
circuit ?
Series and Parallel of Cells
31. A d.c. main supply of e.m.f. 220 V is connected across a
storage battery of e.m.f 200 V through a resistance of 1.
The battery terminals are connected to an external resistance
‘R’. The minimum value of ‘R’, so that a current passes
through the battery to charge it is:
(a) 7 (b) 9
(c) 11 (d) Zero
(a) 1/3 (b) 2/3
(c) 2 (d) 5 32. For a cell terminal potential difference is 2.2 volt when circuit
is open and reduces to 1.8 volt when cell is connected to an
28. In the figure, find the resistance between points A and B. external resistance of 5 ohm.What is the internal resistance
Both the circle and the diameter are made of uniform wire of of the cell ?
–4
resistance 1 × 10 ohm per metre. The length AB is 2 meter.
10 10
(a) (b)
9 19
1 5
(c) (d)
9 9
–4
(a) 2/3 × 10 (b) 2 × 10
–4 33. An idealized voltmeter is connected across the terminals of
–4 –4 a 15 volt battery and a 7.5 ohm appliance is also connected
(c) 14.56 × 10 (d) 0.88 × 10 across its terminals .If the voltmeter reads 12.5 volt .What
29. A uniform wire of resistance 36 is bent in the form of a is the internal resistance of the battery.
circle. The effective resistance across the points A and B is
(a) 1.0 (b) 1.2
(c) 1.4 (d) 1.5
34. Five cells each of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r are
connected in series. If due to oversight one cell gets
connected wrongly ,then the equivalent e.m.f. and internal
resistance of this combination is
(a) 36 (b) 18 (a) 5E,5r (b) 4E,4r
(c) 9 (d) 2.75 (c) 3E,4r (d) 3E,5r
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 162
35. Two identical cells connected in series send 1.0 amp of 40. The figure shows a network of currents. The magnitude of
current through a 5 ohm resistance.When they are currents is shown here. The current I will be
connected in parallel, they send current of 0.8 amp through
the same resistor. What is the internal resistance of the cell ?
(a) 0.5 (b) 1
(c) 2.5 (d) 4
36. Two real batteries are connected in series. Consider the
following statements (i) The equivalent e.m.f. is larger than
either of two emf’s (ii) The equivalent internal resistance is
smaller than either of two internal resistances.
(a) – 3A (b) 3A
(a) Both statements are correct
(c) 13 A (d) 20 A
(b) Statement (i) is correct but statement (ii) is wrong 41. In the figure shown below, the electric current flowing
(c) Statement (ii) is correct but statement (i) is wrong through 2R resistor is
(d) Both are wrong statements B
A D
37. How will you connect 24 cells each of internal resistance of R 2R C R
1so as to get maximum power output across a load of
1.50
(a) 4 rows, 6 cells in a row
(b) 12 rows, two cells in a row (a) from left to right
(c) 2 rows, 12 cells in a row (b) from right to left
(c) no current flows
(d) 3 rows, 8 cells in a row
(d) double to that through any other resistors
Kirchhoff’s Laws
42. One end of copper wire of length 2L and cross sectional
38. The figure shows currents in a part of an electric circuit, area A is attached to one end of another copper wire of
then current I is length L and cross section area 2A. If the free end of the
longer wire is at electric potential of 8 volt and free end of
longer wire is at potential of 1 volt ,what is the potential of
2A junction of two wires.
1A
1.3A (a) 1.2 V (b) 2.1 V
2A (c) 2.4 V (d) 3.6 V
I 43. An infinite ladder network of resistances is constructed
with 1 and 2 resistances, as shown in figure.
(a) 1.7 A (b) 3.7 A The 6 V battery between A and B has negligible internal
(c) 1.3 A (d) 1 A resistance :
39. The Kirchhoff’s first law (i = 0) and second law
(iR = E) where the symbols have their usual meanings,
are respectively based on
(a) conservation of charge, conservation of momentum
(b) conservation of energy, conservation of charge What is the current that passes through the 2 resistance
nearest to the battery ?
(c) conservation of momentum, conservation of charge
(a) 1.5 A (b) 2.5 A
(d) conservation of charge, conservation of energy (C) 3.5 A (d) 4.5 A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 163
44. What is the value of R so that ammeter reads zero in the 47. In the circuit shown in figure potential difference between
circuit shown below. X and Y will be
(a) 600 (b) 300
(a) zero (b) 20 V
(c) 250 (d) 150
(c) 60 V (d) 120 V
45. A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2 and a 2 V battery
with internal resistance 1 are connected to a 10 resistor 48. Find out the value of current through 2 resistance for the
as shown in the figure. given circuit.
(a) zero (b) 2A
The current in the 10 resistor is
(c) 5A (d) 1 A
(a) 0.27 A, P2 to P1 (b) 0.03 A, P1 to P2
49. In a Wheatstone’s bridge, three resistances P, Q and R are
(c) 0.03 A, P2 to P1 (d) 0.27 A, P1 to P2
connected in the three arms and the fourth arm is formed by
46. What is the current I in the circuit as shown in figure two resistances S1 & S2 connected in parallel. The condition
for the bridge to be balanced will be
P 2R
(a)
Q S1 S2
P R S1 S2
(b)
Q S1S2
P R S1 S2
(c)
Q 2S1S2
(a) 2A (b) 1.2 A
P R
(c) 1 A (d) 0.5 A (d) Q S S
1 2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 164
50. The Wheatstone’s bridge shown in figure is balanced. If 53. Determine the value of resistance R if the current in branch
the position of the cell E and galvanometer G are now OA is zero.
interchanged, G will show zero deflection
(a) 6 (b) 8
(c) 10 (d) 12
Potentiometer and Post Office Box
(a) only if all resistor are equal
(b) only if R1 = R3 and R2 = R4 54. In a potentiometer experiment, there is no current at the
balance point in
(c) only if R1R4 = R2R3
(a) main battery circuit
(d) in all cases
(b) galvanometer circuit
51. Consider the following statements regarding the network
shown in the figure (c) potentiometer circuit
(d) both main and galvanometer circuit
55. The length of a potentiometer wire is 5 metres. An electron
–19
in this wire experiences a force of 4.8 × 10 newton, e.m.f.
of the main cell used in potentiometer is
(a) 3 volt (b) 15 volt
(c) 1.5 volt (d) 5 volt
56. In a potentiometer, experiment, the balancing length is at
240 cm with a cell. On shunting the cell with a resistance of
(i) The equivalent resistance of the network between A 2 the balancing length becomes 120 cm .What is the
and B is independent of the value of R’ internal resistance of the cell.
(ii) The equivalent resistance of the network between points (a) 0.5 (b) 1
A and B is 4 R/3
(c) 2 (d) 4
(iii) The current flowing through R’ is zero
57. In the following circuit figure, the resistance of wire AB is
Which of the above statement(s) is/are correct ? 10 and its length is 1m. Rest of the quantities are shown in
(a) (i) alone (b) (ii) alone the figure. The potential gradient on potentiometer wire will be
(c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (i), (ii) and (iii)
52. In the circuit shown, some potential difference is applied
between A & B. The equivalent resistance between A & B is
A B
(a) 14 (b) 12.5 (a) 0.8 V/m (b) 0.08 V/m
(c) 3.6 (d) 2.1 (c) 0.008 V/m (d) none of the above
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 165
58. In the above problem, the length of the wire AJ at which null (a) equal to 5 ohm
points is obtained, will be (b) greater than 5 ohm
(a) 3.75 cm (b) 37.5 cm (c) less than 5 ohm
(c) 75 cm (d) 27.5 cm
(d) may be greater or less than 5 ohm
59. The current in the primary circuit of a potentiometer wire is
–7
0.5 A, specific resistance of wire is 4 × 10 –m and area of Meter bridge
–6 2
cross-section of wire is 8 × 10 m . The potential gradient in 65. In meter bridge or wheatstone bridge for measurement of
the wire would be resistance, the known and the unknown resistances are
(a) 2.5 mV/metre (b) 25 mV/metre interchanged. The error so removed is
(c) 25 V/metre (d) 10 V/metre (a) end correction
60. The infinity resistance plug in a post office box (resistance (b) index error
box) has
(c) due to temperature effect
(a) an air gap only
(d) random error
(b) a resistance coil of infinite resistance
66. A resistance of 2 is connected across one gap of a meter
(c) largest resistance value in box bridge, the length of wire is 1 meter, and an unknown
(d) resistance of value –100 ohm resistance, greater than 2 is connected across the other
gap. When these resistances are interchanged, the balance
Galvanometer, Ammeter and Voltmeter
point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any correction, find the
61. A galvanometer of coil resistance 20 gives a full scale unknown resistance.
deflection with a current of 5 mA. What arrangement should
be made in order to measure current upto 1.0 A. (a) 3 (b) 4
(a) add a series resistance of 2 (c) 5 (d) 6
(b) add a parallel resistance of 2 67. A wire connected in the left gap of a meter bridge balance
(c) add a series resistance of 0 a 10 in the right gap at a point which divides the bridge
wire in the ratio of 3:2.What is the resistance of the wire
(d) add a parallel resistance of 0.1
(a) 10 (b) 1.2
62. The deflection of galvanometer decreases from 25 divisions
to 5 divisions when a resistor of 20 is connected in series (c) 15 (d) 1
.What is galvanometer resistance.
Power in a Resistor and Heating effect
(a) 4 (b) 5
68. A 100 watt,110 volt and a 50 watt,110 volt lamps are
(c) 6 (d) 7
connected in series across 220 volt d.c. source. If the
63. The net resistance of an ammeter should be small to ensure resistances of two lamps are assumed to remain constant,
(a) it does not get overheated the voltage across 100 watt lamps is
(b) it does not draw excessive current (a) 100 volt (b) 143.3 volt
(c) it does not appreciably change the current to measure (c) 73.3 volt (d) 200 volt
(d) it can measure large current 69. The supply voltage in a room is 120 V. The resistance of
64. A candidate connects a moving coil voltmeter V, a moving the lead wires is 6. A 60W bulb is already switched on.
coil ammeter A and a resistor R as shown in figure. If the What is the decrease of voltage across the bulb, when a
voltmeter reads 20 volt and the ammeter reads 4 A, the 240 W heater is switched on in parallel to the bulb ?
value of R is (a) zero (b) 2.9 V
(c) 13.3 V (d) 10.04 V
70. Two electric bulbs marked 25 W–220 V and 100 W-220 V are
connected in series to a 440 V supply. Which of the bulbs
will fuse ?
(a) Both (b) 100 W
(c) 25 W (d) Neither
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 166
71. A conductor lies along the z–axis at –1.5 < z < 1.5 m 76. 50 electric bulbs are connected in series across 200 volt
and carries a fixed current of 10.0 A in â z direction (see supply and illumination produced is I1. 5 bulbs get fused.
If the remaining bulbs are again connected across the
figure). For a field B 3.0 104 e0.2x â y T, find the source in series, the illumination produced is I2.Which of
power required to move the conductor at constant the following is true.
speed to x = 2.0 m, y = 0 m in 5 × 10–3 s. Assume parallel (a) I1= I2 (b) I1> I2
motion along the x–axis.
(c) I1< I2 (d) anything is possible
77. A battery is charged at a potential of 15 volt for 8 hours
when current flowing is 10 A.The battery on discharge
supplies a current of 5A for 15 hours .The mean terminal
voltage during discharge is 14 volt. What is watt hour
efficiency of the battery.
(a) 50% (b) 67.8%
(c) 89.6% (d) 87.5%
78. A coil takes 15 minutes to boil certain amount of water,
another coil takes 20 minutes for the same process .Time
taken to boil the same amount of water when both the coils
are connected in series across same source is
(a) 5 min (b) 8.6 min
(a) 2.97 W (b) 14.85 W (c) 35 min (d)12 min
(c) 29.7 W (d) 1.57 W
Numerical Answer Type Question
72. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5 bulbs of
100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1 kW. The voltage of 79. You need to produce a set of cylindrical copper wires 3.50
the electric mains is 220 V. The minimum capacity of the m long that will have a resistance of 0.125 each. What
main fuse of the building will be : will be the mass (in gram) of each of these wires? Given that
resistivity of copper is 1.72 108 m, density of copper
(a) 10 A (b) 12 A
(c) 14 A (d) 8 A 8.9 103 kg / m3 .
80. Find equivalent resistance (in ohm) across terminals A
73. If two bulbs of wattage 25 and 30 watt each rated at 220 volt
and B in the circuit shown in figure.
are connected in series with 440 volt supply. Which bulb
will fuse ?
(a) 25 watt bulb (b) 30 watt bulb
(c) neither of them (d) both of them
74. A 200 volt,1000 watt bulb is connected across 100 volt main
supply.What will be power consumed. 81. Calculate battery current (in amp) of the network shown in
(a) 200 watt (b) 250 watt figure.
(c) 500 watt (d) 750 watt
75. When three identical bulbs of 60 watt, 200 volt rating are
connected in series to a 200 volt supply, the power drawn
by them
(a) 60 watt (b)180 watt
(c) 10 watt (d) 20 watt
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 167
82. In a Wheatstone’s bridge a battery of 2V is used as shown 86. An electric circuit is shown in figure. Calculate the potential
in figure. Find the value of n if the current through the difference (in V) across the resistor of 400 , as will be
middle branch in the unbalanced condition of the bridge is measured by the voltmeter V of resistance 400 .
n
A, when P 1, Q 2, R 2 and S 3 and
308
resistance of middle branch BD is 4. .
87. A battery of EMF 5V and internal resistance 20 is
83. In figure, if the potential at point P is 100 V, what is the connected with a resistance R1 50 and a resistance
magnitude of potential(in V) at point Q?
R2 40. A voltmeter of resistance 1000 is used to
measure the potential difference across R1 . What percentage
error is made in the reading.
88. An ammeter and a voltmeter are connected in series to a
battery with an e.m.f. E 6.0 V . When a certain resistance
is connected in parallel with the voltmeter, the reading of
the latter decrease 2.0 times, whereas the readings of
the ammeter increase the same number of times. Find the
voltmeter readings (in V) after the connection of the
resistance.
84. Find the current (in amp) in 6 resistance in the circuit
shown in figure using Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law.
89. A galvanometer having a coil of resistance 100 gives a
full scale deflection when a current of one milli- ampere is
passed through it. What is the value of resistance (in ohm)
which can convert this galvanometer into ammeter giving a
85. What shunt resistance (in ohm) is required to make the full scale deflection for a current of 10A?
1.00 mA, 20 galvanometer into an ammeter with a range 90. In the meter bridge circuit shown in figure, find the length
of 0 to 50.0 mA ? (in cm) AC at null deflection in galvanometer.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 168
92. Figure shows a potentiometer with length of wire 1m
and resistance 10 . In this system find length (in
cm) PC when galvanometer shows null deflection.
91. Figure shows a 200 cm potentiometer wire AB with
resistance 15 , find the balancing length (in cm) for a 3V
cell.
93. A battery has an open circuit potential difference of 6
V between its terminals. When a load resistance of
60 is connected across the battery, the total power
dissipated by the battery is 0.4 W. What should be
the load resistance R(in ohm), so that maximum power
will be dissipated in R.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 169
EXERCISE -2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. When 5V potential difference is applied across a wire of 5. The temperature dependence of resistance of Cu and
length 0.1 m, the drift speed of electrons is 2.5 × 10–4 ms–1. undoped Si in the temperature range 300–400 K, is best
If the electron density in the wire is 8 × 1028 m–3, the described by : (2016)
resistivity of the material is close to : (2015) (a) Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si.
(a) 1.6 × 10–6 m (b) 1.6 × 10–5 m (b) Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si.
(c) 1.6 × 10 m
–8
(d) 1.6 × 10 m
–7
(c) Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si.
2. In the circuit shown, the current in the 1 resistor is : (d) Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si
6. In the circuit shown, the resistance r is a variable
resistance. If for r = f R, the heat generation in r is maximum
then the value of f is : (2016 Online Set-1)
(a) 0.13 A, from Q to P (2015)
(b) 0.13 A, from P to Q
(c) 1.3 A, from P to Q
(d) 0A
1 1
3. In the electric network shown, when no current flows (a) (b)
through the 4 resistor in the arm EB, the potential 4 2
difference between the points A and D will be :
3
(c) (d) 1
(2015 Online) 4
7. A 50 resistance is connected to a battery of 5 V. A
galvanometer of resistance 100 is to be used as an
ammeter to measure current through the resistance, for
this a resistance rs is connected to the galvanometer. Which
of the following connections should be employed if the
measured current is within 1% of the current without the
ammeter in the circuit? (2016 Online Set-1)
(a) rs = 0.5 in parallel with the galvanometer
(a) 6 V (b) 3 V (b) rs = 0.5 in series with the galvanometer
(c) 5 V (d) 4 V (c) rs = 1 in series with galvanometer
4. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100 gives a (d) rs = 1 in parallel with galvanometer
full scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is passed 8. To know the resistance G of a galvanometer by half
through it. The value of the resistance, which can convert deflection method, a battery of emf VE and resistance R is
this galvanometer into ammeter giving a full scale deflection used to deflect the galvanometer by angle θ. If a shunt of
for a current of 10 A, is : (2016) resistance S is needed to get half deflection then G, R and
(a) 2 (b) 0.1 S are related by the equation: (2016 Online Set-1)
(c) 3 (d) 0.01 (a) 2S (R + G) = RG (b) S (R + G) = RG
(c) 2S = G (d) 2G = S
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 170
9. The resistance of an electrical toaster has a temperature (a) 1A (b) 0.25A
dependence given by R(T) = R0 [1 + (T T0 ) ] in its range
(c) 0.5 A (d) 0A
of operation. At T0 300K, R 100 and at T = 500 K,
13. When a current of 5 mA is passed through a galvanometer
R = 120 . The toaster is connected to a voltage source at having a coil of resistance 15 , it shows full scale
200 V and its temperature is raised at a constant rate from deflection. The value of the resistance to be put in series
300 to 500 K in 30 s. The total work done in raising the with the galvanometer to convert it into a voltmeter of
temperature is : (2016 Online Set-2)
range 0-10 V is : (2017)
6 2
(a) 60000 ln J (b) 200 ln J
5
3 (a) 1.985 103 (b) 2.045 103
5
(c) 400 ln J (d) 300 J (c) 2.535 103 (d) 4.005 103
6 14. Which of the following statements is false? (2017)
10. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100 gives a
full scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed (a) Wheatstone bridge is the most sensitive when all the
through it. The value of the resistance which can convert four resistances are of the same order of magnitude
this galvanometer into ammeter giving full scale deflection
(b) In a balanced Wheatstone bridge if the cell and the
for a current of 10 A is: (2016 Online Set-2)
galvanometer are exchanged, the null point is disturbed
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.01
(c) 100 (d) 0.001 (c) A rheostat can be used as a potential divider
11. In a meter bridge experiment resistances are connected as (d) Kirchhoff’s second law represents energy conservation
shown in the figure. Initially resistance P = 4 and the
neutral point N is at 60 cm from A. Now an unknown 15. A 9 V battery with internal resistance of 0.5 is connected
resistance R is connected in series to P and the new across an infinite network as shown in the figure. All
position of the neutral point is at 80 cm from A. The value ammeters A1, A2, A3 and voltmeter V are ideal.
of unknown resistance R is : (2017)
(2017 Online Set-1)
33
(a) (b) 6
5 Choose correct statement.
20 (a) Reading of A1 is 2A (b) Reading of A2 is 18 A
(c) 7 (d)
3 (c) Reading of V is 9 V (d) Reading of V is 7V
12. In the below circuit, the current in each resistance is: 16. A potentiometer PQ is set up to compare two resistances
(2017) as shown in the figure. The ammeter A in the circuit reads
1.0 A when two way key K3 is open. The balance point is
at a length l1 cm from P when two way key K3 is plugged in
between 2 and 1, while the balance point is at a length l2
cm from P when key K3 is plugged in between 3 & 1. The
R1
ratio of two resistances , is found to be :
R2
(2017 Online Set-1)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 171
20. In a potentiometer experiment, it is found that no current
passes through the galvanometer when the terminals of
the cell are connected across 52cm of the potentiometer
wire. If the cell is shunted by resistance of 5, a balance is
found when the cell is connected across 40 cm of the wire.
Find the internal resistance of the cell. (2018)
(a) 2 (b) 2.5
(c) 1 (d) 1.5
21. On interchanging the resistances, the balance point of a
meter bridge shifts to the left by 10 cm. The resistance of
their series combination is 1K. How much was the
1 2 resistance on the left slot before interchanging the
(a) (b) resistances ? (2018)
1 2 2 1
(a) 500 (b) 910
1 1 (c) 990 (d) 505
(c) (d) 22. In the given circuit all resistances are of value R ohm
1 2 2 1
each. The equivalent resistance between A and B is :
17. A uniform wire of length l and radius r has resistance of (2018 Online Set-1)
r
100. It is recast into a wire of radius . The resistance of
2
new wire will be : (2017 Online set-2)
(a) 1600 (b) 400
(c) 200 (d) 100
18. The figure shows three circuits I, II and III which are
connected to a 3V battery. If the powers dissipated by the
configurations I, II and III and P1, P2 and P3 respectively, (a) 2R (b) 3R
then : (2017 Online Set-2) 5R 5R
(c) (d)
3 2
23. In a meter bridge, as shown in the figure, it is given that
resistance Y =12.5 and that the balance is obtained at a
distance 39.5 cm from end A (by Jockey J). After
interchanging the resistances X and Y, a new balance point
is found at a distance 2 from end A. What are the values
of X and 2 ? (2018 Online Set-1)
(a) P1 P2 P3 (b) P1 P3 P2
(c) P2 P1 P3 (d) P3 P2 P1
19. Two batteries with e.m.f 12V and 13V are connected in
parallel across a load resistor of 10. The internal
resistance of the two batteries are 1 and 2 respectively.
The voltage across the load lie between: (2018)
(a) 11.4 V and11.5 V
(b) 11.7 V and11.8 V
(c) 11.6 V and 11.7 V
(a) 8.16 and 60.5 cm (b) 19.15 and 39.5 cm
(d) 11.5 V and 11.6 V
(c) 8.16 and 39.5 cm \(d) 19.15 and 60.5 cm
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 172
24. A copper rod of cross-sectional area A carries a uniform 29. A resistance is shown in the figure. Its value and tolerance
current I through it. At temperature T, if the volume charge are given respectively by: (2019)
density of the rod is , how long will the charges take to
travel a distance d ? (2018 Online Set-2)
2 d A 2 d A
(1) (2) IT
I
d A d A
(3) (4) I T
I
25. A constant voltage is applied between two ends of a (a) 270 × 103 ±10% (b) 27 × 103 ± 10%
metallic wire. If the length is halved and the radius of the
wire is doubled, the rate of heat developed in the wire will (c) 27 × 104 ±20% (d) 270× 104 ± 5%
be : (2018 Online Set-2)
30. A potentiometer wire AB having length L and resistance
(a) Doubled (b) Halved 12 r is joined to a cell D of emf ε and internal resistance r.
(c) Unchanged (d) Increased 8 times A cell C having emf ε/2 and internal resistance 3r is
connected. The length AJ at which the galvanometer as
26. A heating element has a resistance of 100 at room shown in fig. shows no deflection is: (2019)
temperature. When it is connected to a supply of 220 V, a
steady current of 2 A passes in it and temperature is 5000C
more than room temperature. What is the temperature
coefficient of resistance of the heating element ?
(2018 Online Set-3)
(a) 0.5×10-4 0 C -1 (b) 5×10-4 0 C -1
(c) 1×10-4 0 C -1 (d) 2×10-4 0 C -1
27. A galvanometer with its coil resistance 25 requires a
current of 1 mA for its full deflection. In order to construct
an ammeter to read up to a current of 2 A, the approximate 11 11
(a) L (b) L
value of the shunt resistance should be : 12 24
(2018 Online Set-3)
13 5
(a) 2.5×10-3 (b) 1.25×10-2 (c) L (d) L
24 12
(c) 1.25×10-3 (d) 2.5×10-2 31. In the given circuit the cells have zero internal resistance.
28. In a circuit for finding the resistance of a galvanometer by The currents (in Amperes) passing through resistance R1
half deflection method, a 6V battery and a high resistance and R2 respectively, are: (2019)
of 11k are used. The figure of merit of the galvanometer
is 60 /division. In the absence of shunt resistance, the
galvanometer produces a deflection of = 9 divisions
when current flows in the circuit. The value of the shunt
resistance that can cause the deflection of , is closest
2
to : (2018 Online Set-3)
(a) 550 (b) 220 (a) 1, 2 (b) 2, 2
(c) 55 (d) 110 (c) 0.5, 0 (d) 0, 1
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 173
32. A uniform metallic wire has a resistance of 18 and 36. The resistance of the meter bridge AB in given figure is
is bent and ends joined into an equilateral triangle. 4. With a cell of emf ε = 0.5 V and rheostat resistance Rh
Then, the resistance between any two vertices of the = 2 the null point is obtained at some point J. When
triangle (in ) is: (2019) the cell is replaced by another one of emf ε = ε2 the same
null point J is found for Rh = 6. The emf ε2 is: (2019)
33. The actual value of resistance R, shown in the figure is
30 . This is measured in an experiment as shown using
V
the standard formula R , where V and I are the reading
I
of the voltmeter and ammeter, respectively. If the measured
value of R is 5% less, then the internal resistance of the
voltmeter is: (2019)
(a) 0.4 V (b) 0.3 V
(c) 0.6 V (d) 0.5 V
37. Two equal resistances when connected in series to a
battery, consume electric power of 60 W. If these
resistances are now connected in parallel combination
(a) 600 (b) 570 to the same battery, the electric power consumed will be:
(2019)
(c) 35 (d) 350
(a) 60 W (b) 240 W
34. A current of 2 mA was passed through an unknown (c) 120 W (d) 30 W
resistor which dissipated a power of 4.4 W. Dissipated 38. In a Wheatstone bridge (see fig.), Resistances P and Q are
power when an ideal power supply of 1 1 V is connected approximately equal. When R = 400 , the bridge is
across it is: (2019) balanced. On interchanging P and Q, the value of R, for
(a) 11105 W (b) 11103 W balance is 405 . The value of X is close to: (2019)
(c) 11104 W (d) 11105 W
35. The Wheatstone bridge shown in the figure. here, gets
balanced when the carbon resistor used as R1 has the
colour code (Orange, Red, Brown). The resistors R2 and
R4 are 80 Ω and 40 Ω, respectively. Assuming that the
colour code for the carbon resistors gives their accurate
values, the colour code for the carbon resistor, used as R3,
would be: (2019)
(a) 401.5 ohm (b) 404.5 ohm
(c) 403.5 ohm (d) 402.5 ohm
39. In the circuit shown, the potential difference between A
and B is: (2019)
(a) Brown, Blue, Brown (b) Brown, Blue, Black
(c) Red, Green, Brown (d) Grey, Black, Brown (a) 1 V (b) 2 V
(c) 3 V (d) 6 V
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 174
40. A galvanometer having a resistance of 20 and 30 division 43. In a metre bridge, the wire of length 1 m has a non-uniform
on both sides has a figure of merit 0.005 ampere division. dR
The resistance that should be connected in series such cross-section such that, the variation of its resistance
dl
that it can be used as a voltmeter upto 15 V, is:
(2019) dR 1
R with length l is . Two equal resistances are
dl l
(a) 100 (b) 120
connected as shown in the figure. The galvanometer has
(c) 80 (d) 125 zero deflection when the jockey is at point P. What is the
length AP? (2019)
41. In the experimental set up of metre bridge shown in the
figure, the null point is obtained at a distance of 40 cm
from A. If a 10 resistor is connected in series with R1,
the null point shifts by 10 cm. The resistance that should
be connected in parallel with (R1 + 10) such that the null
point shifts back to its initial position is (2019)
(a) 0.2 m (b) 0.3 m
(c) 0.25 m (d) 0.35 m
44. An ideal battery of 4 V and a resistance R are connected in
series in the primary circuit of a potentiometer of length
1 m and resistance 5Ω. The value of R, to give a potential
(a) (b) 40
difference of 5mV across 10 cm of potentiometer wire is
(c) 60 (d) 30 (2019)
(a) 490Ω (b) 480Ω
42. The galvanometer deflection, when key K1 is closed, but
K2 is open, equals (see figure). On closing K2 also and (c) 395Ω (d) 495Ω
adjusting R 2 to 5Ω, the deflection in galvanometer 45. Two electric bulbs, rated at (25 W, 220 V) and (100 W,
0 220 V), are connected in series across a 220V voltage
becomes . The resistance of the galvanometer is, then,
5 source. If the 25 W and 100 W bulbs draw powers P1 and
given by [Neglect the internal resistance of battery] P1
P2 respectively, then the value of will be: (2019)
(2019) P2
46. In the given circuit diagram, the currents, I1 = –0.3 A, I4 =
0.8A and I5 = 0.4A, are flowing as shown. The currents I2,
I3 and I6, respectively, are : (2019)
(a) 5Ω (b) 22Ω
(c) 25Ω (d) 12Ω
(a) l.1A, - 0.4A, 0.4A (b) 1.1 A, 0.4 A, 0.4A
(c) 0.4A, 1.1 A, 0.4A (d) -0.4A, 0.4A, 1.1 A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 175
47. A galvanometer, whose resistance is 50 ohm, has 25 51. In the figure shown, what is the current (in Ampere) drawn
divisions in it. When a current of 4 × 10-4 A passes through from the battery? You are given:
it, its needle (pointer) deflects by one division. To use Rl = 15 , R2 = 10 , R3 = 20 , R4 = 5 , R5 = 25 ,
this galvanometer as a voltmeter of range 2.5 V, it should R6 =30 , E = 15 V (2019)
be connected to a resistance of : (2019)
(a) 250 ohm (b) 200 ohm
(c) 6200 ohm (d) 6250 ohm
48. For the circuit shown, with R1 = 1.0 , R2 = 2.0 , E1 = 2V
and E2 = E3 = 4 V, the potential difference between the
points ‘a’ and ‘b’ is approximately (in V) : (2019)
(a) 13/24 (b) 7/18
(c) 9/32 (d) 20/3
52. A wire of resistance R is bent to form a square ABCD as
shown in the figure. The effective resistance between E
and C is: (E is mid-point of arm CD) (2019)
(a) 2.7 (b) 2.3
(c) 3.7 (d) 3.3
49. In the circuit shown, a four-wire potentiometer is
made of a 400 cm long wire, which extends between A
a nd B . T he re s i s t a nc e p e r uni t l e n gt h of t h e
potentiometer wire is r = 0.01 /cm. If an ideal voltmeter
is connected as shown with jockey J at 50 cm from end A,
the expected reading of the voltmeter will be : (2019)
7
(a) R (b) R
64
3 1
(c) R (d) R
4 16
53. A metal wire of resistance 3 is elongated to make a
uniform wire of double its previous length. This new wire
is now bent and the ends joined to make a circle. If two
points on the circle make an angle 60° at the centre, the
equivalent resistance between these two points will be:
(a) 0.50 V (b) 0.75 V
(2019)
(c) 0.25 V (d) 0.20 V
12 5
50. A cell of internal resistance r drives current through an (a) (b)
external resistance R. The power delivered by the cell to 5 2
the external resistance will be maximum when : (2019)
5 7
(a) R = 0.001 r (b) R = 1000 r (c) (d)
3 2
(c) R = 2r (d) R = r
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 176
54. The resistance of a galvanometer is 50 ohm and the 60. To verify Ohm’s law, a student connects the voltmeter
maximum current which can be passed through it is 0.002 across the battery as, shown in the figure. The measured
A. What resistance must be connected to it in order to voltage is plotted as a function of the current, and the
convert it into an ammeter of range 0 – 0.5 A? (2019) following graph is obtained :
(a) 0.5 ohm (b) 0.002 ohm
(c) 0.02 ohm (d) 0.2 ohm
55. In a conductor, if the number of conduction electrons
per unit volume is 8.5 10 28 m 3 and mean free time is
25 fs (femto second), its approximate resistivity is:
m e 9.1 10 31 kg (2019)
(a) 10–6 m (b) 10–7m
(c) 10–8 m (d) 10–5 m
56. Which of the reading is consistent? (2019)
(a) 3 (b) 2
(c) 4 (d) 1 If V0 is almost zero, identify the correct statement:(2019)
57. In the given circuit, an ideal voltmeter connected across (a) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and its internal
the 10&& resistance reads 2V. The internal resistance r resistance is 1.5 Ω
(in &&) , of each cell is: (2019) (b) The value of the resistance R is 1.5 Ω
(c) The potential difference across the battery is 1.5 V
when it sends a current of 1000 mA
(d) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and the value of R is
1.5 Ω
61. A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω has 50 divisions on
its scale and has sensitivity of 20 A /division. It is to
be converted to a voltmeter with three ranges, of 0 – 2V,
0 – 10V and 0 – 20 V. The appropriate circuit to do so is
(2019)
58. A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor (a)
(resistivity) = 1.7 × 10-8nm) of radius of cross-section 5
mm. Find the mobility of the charges (in m2/Vs) if their
drift velocity is 1.1 × 10–3 m/s. (Express as the closest
integer). (2019)
59. Space between two concentric conducting spheres of
radii a and b (b > a) is filled with a medium of resistivity
(b)
. The resistance between the two spheres will be:
(2019)
1 1 1 1
(a) (b)
4 a b 2 a b (c)
1 1 1 1
(c) (d)
2 a b 4 a b
(d)
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 177
62. The resistive network shown below is connected to a 66. The length of a potentiometer wire of length 1200 cm
D.C. source of 16 V. The power consumed by the network and it carries a current of 60 mA. For a cell of emf 5 V and
is 4 W. The value of R (in ) is (2019) internal resistance of 20Ω, the null point on it is found to
be at 1000 cm. The resistance of whole wire is (2020)
(a) 80Ω (b) 100Ω
(c) 120Ω (d) 60Ω
67. A galvanometer having a coil resistance 100 Ω gives a
full scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed
through it. What is the value of the resistance which can
63. A moving coil galvanometer, having a resistance G, convert this galvanometer into voltmeter giving full scale
produces full scale deflection when a current Ig flows deflection for a potential difference of 10 V? In full scale
through it. This galvanometer can be converted into (i) deflection, current in galvanometer of resistance is 1mA.
an ammeter of range 0 to I0 (I0 > Ig) by connecting a shunt Resistance required in series to convert it into voltmeter
resistance RA to it and (ii) into a voltmeter of range 0 to V of range 10V. (2020)
(V = GI0) by connecting a series resistance Rv to it.
Then, (2019) (a) 7.9 KΩ (b) 9.9 KΩ
(c) 8.9 KΩ (d) 10KΩ
2
I Ig R Ig
(a) R R G 2 0
A V
Ig and A 68. The series combination of two batteries both of the same
RV I 0 I g emf 10V , but different internal resistance of 20Ω and 5Ω,
is connected to the parallel combination of two resistors
2 30Ω and RΩ. The voltage difference across the battery
R Ig of internal resistance 20Ω is zero, the value of R(in Ω) is
(b) RA RV G and A
2
RV I 0 I g (2020)
2
69. In the given circuit diagram, a wire is joining point B & C.
Ig RA I 0 I g Find the current in this wire (2020)
(c) RA RV G 2 and
I I R I
0 g V g
RA Ig
(d) RA RV G 2 and
RV I 0 I g
64. The current i1 (in A) flowing through 1 resistorint
the following circuit is (2020)
(a) 0.40 A (b) 0.20 A (a) 0.4 A (b) 2 A
(c) zero (d) 4 A
(c) 0.25 A (d) 0.5 A
70. Consider four conducting materials copper, tungsten,
65. In a building, there are 15 bulbs of 45W, 15 bulbs of
mercury and aluminium with resistivity C , T , M and
100W, 15 small fans of 10 W and 2 heaters of 1kW. The
voltage of electric main is 220V. The minimum fuse capacity A respectively. Then : (2020)
(rated value) of the building will be approximately.(2020)
(a) C A T (b) A M C
(a) 10A (b) 20A
(c) A T C (d) M A C
(c) 25A (d) 15A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 178
71. A potentiometer wire PQ of 1 m length is connected to 73. Which of the following will NOT be observed when a
astandard cell E 1. Another cell E2 of emf 1.02 V is multimeter (operating in resistance measuring mode)
connected with a resistance ‘r’ and switch S (as shown probes connected across a component, are just
in figure). With switch S open, the null position is reversed? (2020)
obtained at a distance of 49 cm from Q. The potential
(a) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
gradient in the potentiometer wire is : (2020)
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is metal wire.
(b) Multimeter shows a deflection, accompanied by a
splash of light out of connected component in one
direction and NO deflection on reversing the probes if
the chosen component is LED.
(c) Multimeter shows an equal deflection in both cases
i.e. before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is resistor.
(d) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is capacitor.
(a) 0.03V/cm (b) 0.02 V/cm
74. Two resistors 400 and 800 are connected in
(c) 0.04 V/cm (d) 0.01 V/cm series across a 6 V battery. The potential difference
measured by a voltmeter of 10 k across 400
72. Model a torch battery of length to be made up of a
resistor is close to : (2020)
thin cylindrical bar of radius ‘a’ and a concentric thin
cylindrical shell of radius ‘b’ filled in between with an (a) 2.05 V (b) 2 V
electrolyte of resistivity (see figure). If the battery is (c) 1.95 V (d) 1.8 V
connected to a resistance of value R, the maximum joule 75. A battery of 3.0 V is connected to a resistor dissipating
heating in R will take place for : (2020) 0.5 W of power. If the terminal voltage of the battery is
2.5V, the power dissipated within the internal resistance
is: (2020)
(a) 0.072 w (b) 0.10 w
(c) 0.125 w (d) 0.50 w
76. The value of current i1 flowing from A to C in the circuit
diagram is: (2020)
b 2 b
(a) R (b) R ln
2l a l a
b b
(c) R ln (d) ln (a) 4A (b) 5A
l a 2l a
(c) 2A (d) 1A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 179
77. Four resistances 40 , 60 , 90 and 110 make the 81. A galvanometer is used in laboratory for detecting the
arms of a quadrilateral ABCD. Across AC is a battery of null point in electrical experiments. If, on passing a current
emf 40 V and internal resistance negligible.The potential of 6 mA it produces a deflection of 2º, its figure of merit is
differenceacross BD in V is _______. (2020) close to : (2020)
(a) 6 103 A / div. (b) 3 103 A / div.
(c) 666º A / div. (d) 333º A / div.
82. A circuit to verify Ohm’s law uses ammeter and voltmeter
in series or parallel connected correctly to the resistor. In
the circuit:
(a) Ammeter is always connected in series and voltmeter
in parallel
(b) Both, ammeter and voltmeter must be connected in
series
78. An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2 (c) Both ammeter and voltmeter must be connected in
delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the transmission parallel
line is approximately : (2020)
(d) ammeter is always used in parallel and voltmeter is
(a) 72% (b) 91% series (2020)
83. In the figure shown, the current in the 10V battery is
(c) 85% (d) 96% close to : (2020)
79. A galvanometer of resistance G is converted into a
voltmeter of range 0 – 1V by connecting a resistance R1
in series with it. The additional resistance that should be
connected in series with R1 to increase the range of the
voltmeter to 0 – 2V will be : (2020)
(a) G (b) R1
(c) R1 – G (d) R1 + G (a) 0.21 A from positive to negative terminal
80. In the circuit, given in the figure currents in different (b) 0.36 A from negative to positive terminal
branches and value of one resistor are shown. Then (c) 0.42 A from positive to negative terminal
potential at point B with respect to the point A is : (2020)
(d) 0.71 A from position to negative terminal
84. When the switch S, in the circuit shown, is closed then
the valued of current i (in A) will be: (2020)
(a) +2 V (b) –2 V
(c) +1 V (d) –1 V
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 180
85. A carbon resistance has following colour code. What is 87. In a meter bridge experiment, the circuit diagram and the
the value of the resistance? (2020) corresponding observation table are shown in figure.
(2020)
(a) 53× 104 ± 5% (b) 5.3 × 104 ± 5%
(c) 6.4 × 104 ± 5% (d) 64 × 104 ± 10%
86. In the given circuit the internal resistance of the 18 V cell
is negligible. If R1 = 400&!, R3 = 100&! and R4 = 500 &! and
the reading of an ideal voltmeter across R4 is 5 V, then the
value of R2 will be: (2020)
(a) 300 &! (b) 450 &!
(c) 550 &! (d) 230 &!
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 181
EXERCISE - 3 :ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Objective Question (One Answer Correct)
4. What is the equivalent resistance of the network across
1. A battery of internal resistance 4 is connected to the
points A and B shown in figure below.
network of resistances as shown. In order that the maximum
power can be delivered to the network, the value of R in
should be
(a) 4 ohm (b) 36/7 ohm
(c) 23/7 ohm (d) 12/7 ohm
5. Shown in the figure adjacent is a meter-bridge set up with
(a) 4/9 (b) 2 null deflection in the galvanometer. The value of the
(c) 8/3 (d) 18 unknown resistor R is
2. The current i in the circuit (see figure) is
1 1 (a) 13.75 (b) 220
(a) A (b) A (c) 110 (d) 55
45 15
1 1 6. Four bulls B1, B2, B3 and B4 of 100 W each are connected
(c) A (d) A
10 5 to 220 V main as shown in the figure. The reading in an
ideal ammeter will be :
3. The resistance of all the wires between any two adjacent
dots is R. The equivalent resistance between A and B as
shown is
(a) 0.90 A (b) 1.80 A
(a) 7R/13 (b) 7R/6 (c) 1.35 A (d) 0.45 A
(c) 14R/8 (d) 15R/7
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 182
7. The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is 10. In the circuit, the galvanometer G shows zero deflection. If
the batteries A and B have negligible internal resistance,
the value of the resistor R will be
(a) 200 (b) 100
(c) 500 (d) 1000
11. Two sources of equal emf are connected to an external
(a) 1 A (b) 2 A resistance R. The internal resistances of the two sources
(c) 4 A (d) 6 A are R1 and R2 (R2 > R1). If the potential difference across
the source having internal resistance R2, is zero, then
8. The electrical resistance between points A and B of the
R 2 R1 R 2
figure shown is (a) R
R 2 R1
(b) R = R2 – R1
R1R 2
(c) R
(a) (2/3) (b) 2 R1 R 2
(c) (3/2) (d) 6
9. In the given circuit RB = 6, RC = 3, RD = 1. The ratio of R1R 2
current through resistors C, B and D will be in the ratio (d) R
R 2 R1
12. When a cell is short circuited then
(a) current drawn from cell is maximum
(b) potential difference across cell terminals become
maximum
(c) potential difference across cell terminals become zero
(d) current drawn from cell is zero
13. The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased by 100%.
Due to the consequent decrease in diameter the change in
the resistance of the wire will be
(a) 2 : 1 : 6 (b) 3 : 2 : 1 (a) 200% (b) 100%
(c) 2 : 3 : 6 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 (c) 50% (d) 300%
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 183
14. This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. Of the 16. Statement–1 : At cryogenic temperatures, the electrical
four choices given after the statements, choose the one resistivity in metallic conductors diminishes.
that best describes the two Statements. Statement–2 : Thermal oscillations of atoms which hinder
Statement-I : Higher the range, greater is the resistance of motion of free electrons under the influence of an external
ammeter. field become insignificant.
Statement-II : To increase the range of ammeter, additional (a) A (b) B
shunt needs to be used across it. (c) C (d) D
(a) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II 17. Statement– 1 : In the circuit shown assume both cell are
is the correct explanation for Statement-I. ideal and of fixed e.m.f., the resistor R1 is fixed, the resistor
(b) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II R2 is non zero variable .Then the electric power delivered to
is not a correct explanation for Statement-I. the resistor R1 is independent of value of resistance R2
(c) If Statement-I is true; Statement-II is false.
(d) If Statement-I if false; Statement-Ii is true.
15. In the circuit shown below, the key K is closed at t = 0. The
current through the battery is
Statement–2 : If potential difference across a fixed
resistance is unchanged, the power delivered to the resistor
remains unchanged.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
VR1R 2 V 18. Statement–1 : A current flows in a conductor when there is
(a) at t = 0 and at t = electric field within the conductor.
R12 R 22 R2
Statement–2 : The drift velocity of electrons in presence of
electric field decreases.
V V R1 R 2
(b) R at t = 0 and at t = (a) A (b) B
2 R 1R 2
(c) C (d) D
V VR1R 2 19. Statement–1 : When the battery is short circuited the
(c) at t = 0 and at t =
R2 R R
2 2 terminal potential difference is zero.
1 2
Statement–2 : In the situation of short circuit, the current
V R1 R 2 V is zero.
(d) at t = 0 and at t =
R 1R 2 R2 (a) A (b) B
Assertion Reason Type Questions (c) C (d) D
(a) Statement–1 is True, Statement–2 is True; Statement–2 is 20. Statement–1 : Potentiometer is better for e.m.f. measurement
a correct explanation for Statement–1. of a cell than a voltmeter.
(b) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is True; Statement–2 is Statement–2 : A potentiometer draws no current while
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–1. measuring e.m.f. of a cell.
(c) Statement–1 is True; Statement–2 is False. (a) A (b) B
(d) Statement–1 is False, Statement–2 is True. (c) C (d) D
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 184
21. Statement–1 : Two unequal resistors are connected in 28. Statement–1 : The drift velocity of electrons in metallic wire
series across a cell. Then the potential drop across the will decrease if the temperature of the wire is increased.
larger resistor is more. Statement–2 : On increasing temperature, conductivity of
Statement–2 : Current will be same in both the resistors. metallic wire decreases.
(a) A (b) B (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (c) C (d) D
22. Statement–1 : If the current in the lamp decreases by 20%, 29. Statement–1 : Voltmeter always gives e.m.f. of a cell if it is
the percentage decrease in its illumination is 40%. connected across the terminals of a cell.
Statement–2 : Illumination is directly proportional to the Statement–2 : Terminal potential difference of a cell is
square of current flowing through lamp. given by V= E-Ir.
(a) A (b) B (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (c) C (d) D
23. Statement–1 : In a simple battery circuit the point of lowest 30. Statement–1 : Potential measured by voltmeter across a
potential is negative terminal of battery. wire is always less than the actual potential difference across
it.
Statement–2 : Current flows towards the point of higher
potential as it does in such a circuit from negative to positive Statement–2 : Finite resistance of voltmeter changes current
terminal. flowing through the resistance across which potential
difference is to be measured.
(a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
(c) C (d) D
24. Statement–1 : Fuse wire must have high resistance and low
melting point. 31. Statement–1 : When two conducting wires of different
resistivity have same cross sectional area are joined in series
Statement–2 : Fuse is used for small current flow only.
,the electric field in them would be equal when they carry
(a) A (b) B current.
(c) C (d) D Statement–2 : When wires are in series they carry equal
25. Statement–1 : A 200 watt bulb glows with more brightness current.
than 100 watt bulb. (a) A (b) B
Statement–2 : 100 watt bulb has more resistance than 200 (c) C (d) D
watt.
Comprehensive type questions
(a) A (b) B Passage - 1
(c) C (d) D Using the following passage, solve Q. 32 to 35
26. Statement–1 : It is advantageous to transmit electric power A potential difference is applied across a copper wire of
at high voltage. radius 0.5 mm. It results in a uniform electric field of 1.5 V/m
Statement–2 : High voltage implies high current. along the length of the wire. Consequently there is a current
(a) A (b) B in the wire. Temperature of the wire is 60oC.Assuming each
copper atom contributes one free electron .Given that
(c) C (d) D
density of copper is 8.9 gm/cm3 and resistivity of copper at
27 Statement–1 : Current density at any point in ohmic resistor 20oC is 1.7×10–8 ohm.m and its temperature coefficient of
is in the direction of electric field at that point. resistivity at 20oC is 3.9×10–3/OC . Atomic mass of copper is
Statement–2 : A point charge when released from rest in a 63.5. Answer the following questions.
region having only electrostatic field always move along 32. Resistivity of copper under experimental condition is
electric field lines.
(a) 4.5 × 106 m (b) 1.96 × 10–8 m
(a) A (b) B
(c) 3.2 × 10–8 m (d) 5.1 × 10–8 m
(c) C (d) D
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 185
33. Current density in the wire is Passage -3
(a) 11.24 × 106 A/m2 (b) 5.4 × 107 A/m2 Using the following passage, solve Q. 40 to 42
(c) 7.65 × 107 A/m2 (d) 52.5 × 106 A/m2 The potentiometer basically consists of a uniform wire of
resistance R through which a steady current flows when a
34. Drift speed of the electron is driver cell source is connected between the points A and B
(a) 2.3 × 10–2 m/s (b) 4.5 × 10–3 m/s (ends of potentiometer wire) and tapping is adjusted till no
current passes through galvanometer. Using this null
(c) 7.5 × 103 m/s (d) 5.7 × 103 m/s
deflection method, unknown e.m.f. of a cell is determined.
35. Potential difference that need to be applied between the Using this concept answer the following questions.
ends of a 4 m long wire to produce the
40. The current in potentiometer wire is adjusted to give a null
given field is
point at 56 cm with a standard cell of e.m.f. 1.02 volt. The
(a) 3 volt (b) 4.5 volt e.m.f. of another cell for which null point is obtained at 70
(c) 6 volt (d) 1.5 volt cm is
Passage - 2 (a) 0.78 volt (b) 1.275 volt
Using the following passage, solve Q. 36 to 39 (c) 1.35 volt (d) 1.54 volt
In the circuit shown the resistances are given in ohms and 41. The total length of the potentiometer wire is 10 m. The
the battery is assumed to be ideal with e.m.f. equal to 3.0 distance between the null points on potentiometer wire for
volt. two cells is 60 cm.If the difference between e.m.f.’s of the
cells be 0.4 volt, the potential gradient along the wire is
4
(a) volt/m (b) 1 volt/m
3
2 1
(c) volt/m (d) volt/m
3 2
42. How can sensitivity of this potentiometer be further
increased.
(a) increasing the e.m.f. of driver cell
(b) increasing the length of potentiometer wire
(c) decreasing the length of potentiometer wire
36. The resistor that dissipated maximum power will be
(d) increasing the cross sectional area of wire
(a) R1 (b) R2
Passage - 4
(c) R3 (d) R5
Using the following passage, solve Q. 43 to 47
37. The electric current passing through 3 volt battery is
A Galvanometer is an instrument that can be used to
(a) 30 mA (b) 40 mA construct an ammeter for measuring current .It can be used
to convert to a voltmeter. It can also be used as a multimeter.
(c) 50 mA (d) 60 mA
In all cases resistance must be connected to galvanometer
38. Electric potential drop across R4 is either in series or in parallel to effect the change .To turn
(a) 0.5 V (b) 1.0 V into an ammeter a low resistance in parallel of suitable value
and to convert to a voltmeter a resistance is connected in
(c) 1.5 V (d) 2.0 V series. You are given a galvanometer for which a current of
39. The potential difference across the resistor R5 is 10 mA is required for full deflection .The internal resistance
of the galvanometer is 100 ohm. Then answer the following
(a) 0.4 V (b) 0.5 V questions.
(c) 0.6 V (d) 1.0 V
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 186
43. Which of the following formula correctly applies to the Passage - 5
ammeter circuit. Using the following passage, solve Q. 48 to 51
Bohr and Biot purchased two electric kettles A and B of
the same size and thickness and same volume of 0.4 litre.
They studied the specification of kettles as under Kettle
A : specific heat capacity;1680 J/kg–k, mass = 200 gm cost
= Rs. 400 Kettle B : specific heat capacity = 2450 J/kg–K
mass = 400 gm cost = Rs 400. When kettle A is switched on
with constant potential source, the tea begins to boil in 6
minutes. When kettle B is switched on with same source
separately, tea begins to boil in 8 minutes. They made
discussion on specification and efficiency of kettles and
(a) VR>Vr (b) Vr>VR prepared a list of questions to draw a conclusion. Some of
these are as under (take specific heat of tea liquid = 4200
(c) VR=Vr (d) more information required
J/kg–k, and density = 1000 kg/m3)
44. What resistance must be connected in series to the 48. Efficiency of kettle A is
galvanometer in order to convert it to a 100 volt voltmeter?
(a) 93.34% (b) 83.34%
(a) 600 ohm (b)1000 ohm
(c) 73.34% (d) 100%
(c) 9900 ohm (d) 13,900 ohm 49. Efficiency of kettle B is
45. To double the full scale voltage reading of any galvanometer (a) 93.5% (b) 83.5%
turned into a voltmeter, you must
(c) 73.5% (d) 62.5%
50. If the resistances of coil of kettle A and B are RB and RB
respectively, then we can say
(a) RA > RB
(b) RA > RB
(a) doubles the resistance R extra connected (c) RA = RB
(b) half the resistance R (d) no relation can be predicted
(c) Increase the resistance to 4R 51. If both the kettles are joined with the same source in series
one after the other .The boiling starts in kettle A & B after
(d) more than 2R
(a) four times of their original time
46. In voltmeter circuit the current in resistor R must be
(b) two times of their original time
(a) negligible so that it only has small effect on voltage
reading (c) equal to their original time
(d) can not be ascertained from this data.
(b) substantial but does not have any effect on voltage
reading Objective Question (One or more correct answer)
(c) substantial, but does have some effect on voltage 52. A microammeter has a resistance of 100 and full scale
reading range of 50 A. It can be used as a voltmeter or as a higher
(d) none of these range ammeter provided a resistance is added to it. Pick the
correct range and resistance combination (s)
47. What resistance must be connected in parallel to the
(a) 50 V range with 10 k resistance in series
galvanometer to turn it into an ammeter capable of reading
electric current up to 10.01 A. (b) 10 V range with 200 k resistance in series
(a) 0.1 ohm (b) 1 ohm (c) 5 mA range with 1 resistance in parallel
(c) 1.01 ohm (d) 10.01 ohm (d) 10 mA range with 1 resistance in parallel
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 187
53. A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected 56. Figure below shows a bridge circuit of the five resistors.
across a resistance R. Resistance R can be adjusted to any What is potential difference Vba in volt in the circuit shown.
value greater than equal to zero. A graph is plotted between
the current passing through the resistance and potential
difference across it. Select the correct alternative.
57. The potential difference between the points A and B shown
in the circuit will be …..Volt.
(a) internal resistance of the battery is 5 ohm
(b) e.m.f. of the battery is 10 volt
(c) maximum current which can be taken from battery is 2
ampere
(d) V versus I graph can never be straight line as shown
here.
54. In the circuit shown in the figure
58. In the given circuit, what is the value of R in ohm for which
current flowing through 4 ohm resistor is zero.
(a) voltage V=10 volt
(b) resistance R1=10 ohm A B C
(c) resistance R2=20 ohm 2 R
(d) equivalent resistance of the circuit is 10 ohm 4
10V 4V
Numeric Type Questions
6V
55. In the circuit shown below , calculate the current flowing
through 3 ohm resistance.
D
59. Three 2 ohm resistors are connected as shown in figure
below. Each can withstand a maximum power of 32 watt
without becoming excessive hot .What maximum power in
watt that can be delivered to the combination of resistors.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 188
60. An ideal battery sends a current of 5 A in a resistor. When 66. Find the emf (V) and internal resistance (r) of a single
another resistor of value 10 ohm is connected in parallel battery which is equivalent to a parallel combination of
the current through battery increases to 6 ampere. Find two batteries of emfs V1 and V2 and internal resistance r1
the resistance of first resistor. and r2 respectively, with polarities as shown in figure
61. A galvanometer has full scale range of 50A with a
resistance of 100 When 1 In parallel, it can be used as
a higher range ammeter. What is its range in mA.
62. In the circuit shown in figure E1 = 3 V, E2 = 2 V, E3 = 1 V and
R = r1 = r2 = r3 = 1 .
67. Two resistors, 400 , and 800 are connected in series
with a 6 V battery. It is desired to measure the current in
the circuit. An ammeter of 10 resistance is used for this
purpose. What will be the reading in the ammeter ? Similarly,
(i) Find the potential difference between the points A if a voltmeter of 1000 resistance is used to measure the
and B and the currents through each branch. potential difference across the 400 resistor, what will be
the reading in the voltmeter ?
(ii) If r2 is short circuited and the point A is connected to
point B, find the currents through E1, E2, E3 and the 68. In the circuit shown in figure E, F, G, H are cells of emf 2, 1,
resistor R. 3 and 1 V respectively, and their internal resistances are 2,
1, 3 and 1 respectively. Calculate :
63 . The equivalent resistance between points A and B of the
circuit given below is ......... (i) the potential difference between B and D and
(ii) the potential difference across the terminals of each
cells G and H.
64. Calculate the steady state current in the 2 resistor shown
in the circuit (see figure). The internal resistance of the
battery is negligible and the capacitance of the condenser
C is 0.2 F.
Subjective Type Question
69. It is desired to make a 20.0 coil of wire whose temperature
coefficient of resistance is zero. To do this, carbon resistor
65. A leaky parallel plane capacitor is filled completely with a of resistance R1 is placed in series with an iron resistor of
material having dielectric constant k = 5 and electrical resistance R2. The proportion of iron and carbon are so
–12 –1 –1
conductivity = 7.4 × 10 m . If the charge on the chosen that R1 + R2 = 20 for all temperatures near 20°C.
plane at instant t = 0 is q = 8.85 mC, then calculate the Find the values of R1 and R2. Temperature coefficient of
–3
leakage current at the instant t = 12 s. resistance for carbon, C = – 0.5 × 10 /°C and that of iron
–3
is Fe = 5 × 10 /°C.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 189
70. (a) Estimate the average drift speed of conduction electrons 75. A heating coil of 2000 watt is immersed in an electric kettle.
–7 2
in a copper wire of cross-sectional area 1.0 × 10 m carrying
How much time will it take in raising the temperature of 1
a current to 1.5 A. Assume that each copper contributes
roughly one conduction electron. The density of copper is litre of water from 4°C to 100°C ? Only 80% part of the therml
3 3
9.0 × 10 kg/m , and its atomic mass is 63.5 u. energy produced is used in raising the temperature of water.
(b) Compare the drift speed obtained above with,
76. A house is fitted with 20 lamps of 60 watt each, 10 fans
(i) thermal speeds of copper atoms at ordinary temperatures, consuming 0.5 A each and and electric kettle of resistance
(ii) speed of propagation of electric field along the conductor 110 . If the energy is supplied at 220 V and costs 50 paise
which causes the drift motion. per k Wh, calculate bill for November while running these
71. A wire carries a current of 0.5 A, when a potential difference appliances for 6 hours a day.
of 1.5 V is applied across it. What is its conductance ? If the
2
wire is of length 3 m and area of cross-section 5.4 mm , 77. We have 30 watt, 6 volt bulb which we want to glow by a
calculate its conductivity. supply of 120 V. What will have to be done for it ?
72. Write the mathematical relation between mobility and drift
velocity of charge carriers in a conductor. Name the mobile 78. A heater is designed to operate with a power of 1000 W in a
charge carriers responsible for conduction of electric current 100 V line. It is connected to two resistance of 10 and R ,
in (a) an electrolyte (b) an ionised gas. Figure. If the heater is now operating with a power of 62.5
73. Find the current in each branch of the given circuit. What W, calculate the value R.
is the energy supplied by the battery to the circuit in one
minute ?
79. Five equal resistance each of R are connected in a network
as shown in figure. Calculate the equivalent resistance
between the points A and B.
74. The resistance of the galvanometer G in the circuit is 25.
The meter deflects full scale for a current of 10 mA. The
meter behaves as an ammeter of three different ranges.
The range is 0–10 A, if the terminals O and P are taken;
range is 0 – 1 A between O and Q; range is 0 – 0.1 A
between O and R. Calculate the resistance R1, R2 and R3.
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 190
80. The given network is part of another larger circuit. 83. Referring to a circuit shown below, match the column I
Calculate the potential of point D. with Column II
Match the Column Type Question Column-I Column-II
(a) Equivalent resistance (p) The circuit is a
81. For an electric conductor, Match column I with Column II
between A and C balanced wheatstone
Column-I Column-II
bridge plus a
(a) Electric conductivity of a (p) Electric field
resistance parallel to
conductor depends on strength
bridge
(b) Conductance of a (q) Temperature
(b) Equivalent resistance (q) R/2
conductor depends on
between B and D
(c) For a given conductor (r) Nature of the
(c) Equivalent resistance (r) On removing the
at a given temperature conductor
A and B resistance between
current density depends on
B and D equivalent
(d) For a given potential (s) Dimensions of
resistance becomes
difference applied across a conductor (area/
R/2
conductor, current in it will length)
(d) Equivalent resistance (s) On removing
depends on
between C and D resistance between
82. In an electric circuit with two batteries in series with
B and D equivalent
opposite polarities are shown in the figure, match the
resistance becomes
following quantities in column I with column-II.
5R/8
84. Consider two identical cells each of e.m.f. E and internal
resistance of r connected to a load resistance R. Match
column-1 with column-2.
Column-1 Column-2
E2
(a) For parallel combination (P)
4r
of cells
r
(b) For series combination (Q) Eeq = E, req
2
Column-I Column-II of cells
(a) Potential difference across (p) B1 (c) For maximum power (R) Eeq = 2E, req = 2q
B1 battery transfer to load when
(b) Potential difference across (q) 9 volt cells in series
B2 battery E2
(c) power is supplied by battery (r) B2 (d) For maximum power (S)
2r
(d) Powerr is consumed by (s) 14 volt
transfer when cells
battery (t) none
are in parallel
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 191
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
1. In the given circuit, it is observed that the current I is 4. A 100 W bulb B1, and two 60 W bulbs B2 and B3, are
independent of the value of the resistance R6. Then, the connected to a 250 V source, as shown in the figure. Now
resistance values must satisfy (JEE 2001) W1, W2 and W3 are the output powers of the bulbs B1, B2
and B3 respectively. Then (JEE 2002)
(a) R1R2R5 = R3R4R6
1 1 1 1
(b) R R R R R R
5 6 1 2 3 4 (a) W1 > W2 = W3 (b) W1 > W2 > W3
(c) R1R4 = R2R3 (c) W1 < W2 = W3 (d) W1 < W2 < W3
(d) R1R3 = R2R4
5. A thin uniform wire AB of length 1 m, an unknown
2. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal resistance X and a resistance of 12 are connected by
resistances are connected in series. Due to the current, thick conducting strips, as shown in the figure. A battery
the temperature of the wire is raised by T in a time t. A and galvanometer (with a sliding jockey connected to it
number N of similar cells is now connected in series with a are also available). Connections are to be made to
wire of the same material and cross-section but of length measure the unknown resistance X using the principle
2L. The temperature of the wire is raised by the same amount of Wheatstone bridge. Answer the following questions.
T in the same time. The value of N is (JEE 2001)
(JEE 2002)
(a) 4 (b) 6
(c) 8 (d) 9
3. The effective resistance between points P and Q of the
electrical circuit shown in the figure is (JEE 2002)
(a) Are there positive and negative terminals on the
galvanometer ?
(b) Copy the figure in your answer book and show the
battery and the galvanometer (with jockey) connected
at appropriate points.
(c) After appropriate connections are made, it is found
2 Rr 8 R R r
(a) (b) that no deflection takes place in the galvanometer when
Rr 3R r the sliding jockey touches the wire at a distance of 60
5R cm from A. Obtain the value of the resistance X.
(c) 2r + 4R (d) 2r
2
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 192
6. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter 8. Statement-I : In a meter bridge experiment, null point for
bridge if AC corresponding to null deflection of an unknown resistance is measured. Now, the the unknown
galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of resistance is put inside an enclosure maintained at a higher
the wire AB is doubled ? (JEE 2003) temperature. The null point can be obtained at the same
point as before by decreasing the value of the standard
resistance.
Statement-II : Resistance of a metal increases with increase
in temperature.
(2003)
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
9. Six equal resistances are connected between points P, Q
and R as shown in the figure. Then, the net resistance will
be maximum between (JEE 2004)
(a) x (b) x/4
(c) 4x (d) 2x
7. Three resistances of equal value are arranged in the
different combinations shown below. Arrange them in
increasing order of power dissipation. (JEE 2003)
(a) P and Q (b) Q and R
(c) P and R (d) any two points
10. A moving coil galvanometer of resistance 100 is used as
an ammeter using a resistance 0.1 . The maximum deflection
current in the galvanometer is 100 A. Find the minimum
current in the circuit, so that the ammeter shown maximum
deflection. (JEE 2005)
(a) 100.1 mA (b) 1000.1 mA
(c) 10.01 mA (d) 1.01 mA
11. A rigid container with thermally insulated walls contains a
coil of resistance 100 , carrying current 1A. Change in
internal energy after 5 min will be (JEE 2005)
(a) zero (b) 10 kJ
(a) III < II < IV < I (b) II < III < IV < I (c) 20 kJ (d) 30 kJ
(c) I < IV < III < II (d) I < III < II < IV 12. Find out the value of current through 2 resistance for
the given circuit. (JEE 2005)
Assertion and Reason
(a) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
the correct explanation for Statement-I.
(b) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
(c) If Statement-I is true; Statement-II is false. (a) 5 A (b) 2 A
(d) If Statement-I if false; Statement-Ii is true. (c) zero (d) 4 A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 193
13. Two bars of radius r and 2r are kept in contact as shown. 16. For the circuit shown in the figure (2009)
An electric current I is passed through the bars. Which
one of following is correct ? (JEE 2006)
(a) Heat produced in bar BC is 4 times the heat produced
in bar AB (a) the current I through the battery is 7.5 mA
(b) the potential difference across RL is 18 V
(b) Electric field in both halves is equal
(c) ratio of powers dissipated in R1 and R2 is 3
(c) Current density across AB is double that of across BC (d) if R1 and R2 are interchanged, magnitude of the power
(d) Potential difference across AB is 4 times that of across BC dissipated in RL will decrease by a factor of 9
17. Consider a thin square sheet of side L and thickness t,
14. A resistance of 2 is connected across one gap of a made of a material of resistivity . The resistance between
metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an two opposite faces, shown by the shaded areas in the
unknown resistance, greater than 2 , is connected across figure is (2010)
the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged,
the balance point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any
corrections, the unknown resistance is (JEE 2007)
(a) 3 (b) 4
(c) 5 (d) 6
15. Figure shows three resistor configurations R1, R2 and R3
connected to 3 V battery. If the power dissipated by the
configuration R1, R2 and R3 is P1, P2 and P3, respectively,
then (2008) (a) directly proportional to L
(b) directly propotional to t
(c) independent of L
(d) independent of t
18. Incandescent bulbs are designed by keeping in mind that
the resistance of their filament increases with the increase
in temperature. If at room temperature, 100W, 60W and 40W
bulbs have filament resistance R100, R60 and R40, respectively,
the relation between these resistances is (2010)
1 1 1
(a) R R R (b) R100 = R40 + R60
(a) P1 > P2 > P3 (b) P1 > P3 > P2 100 40 60
(c) P2 > P1 > P3 (d) P3 > P2 > P1 1 1 1
(c) R100 > R60 > R40 (d) R R R
100 40 60
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 194
19. To verify Ohm’s law, a student is provided with a test 21. Two batteries of different emfs and different internal
resistor RT, a high resistance R1, a small resistance R2, resistances are connected as shown. The voltage across
two identical galvanometers G1 and G2, and a variable
AB in volt is. (2011)
voltage source V. The correct circuit to carry out the
experiment is (2010)
(a)
22. A meter bridge is set-up as shown in figure, to determine
an unknown resistance X using a standard 10 resistor.
The galvanometer shows null point when tapping-key is
at 52 cm mark. The end-corrections are 1 cm and 2 cm
respectively for the ends A and B. The determined value
of X is (2011)
(b)
(a) 10.2 (b) 10.6
(c) 10.8 (d) 11.1
(c)
23. For the resistance network shown in the figure, choose the
correct option(s). (2012)
(d)
20. When two identical batteries of internal resistance 1
each are connected in series across a resistor R, the rate of (a) The current through PQ is zero
heat produced in R is J1. When the same batteries are (b) I1 = 3A
connected in parallel across R, the rate is J2. If J1 = 2.25 J2
then the value of R in is (2010) (c) The potential at S is less than that at Q
(d) I2 = 2A
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 195
24. During an experiment with a metre bridge, the galvanometer 27. In the following circuit, the current through the resistor R
shows a null point when the jockey is pressed at 40.0 cm (=2) is I amperes. The value of I is (2015)
using a standard resistance of 90, as shown in the figure.
The least count of the scale used in the metre bridge is 1
mm. The unknown resistance is (2014)
28. In an aluminium (Al) bar of square cross section, a
square hole is drilled and is filled with iron (Fe) as
(a) 60 0.15 (b) 135 0.56 shown in the figure. The electrical resistivities of Al and
Fe are 2.7 × 10 m and 1.0 × 10 m, respectively. The
(c) 60 0.25 (d) 135 0.23 electrical resistance between the two faces P and Q of the
25. Two ideal batteries of emf V1 and V2 and three resistances composite bar is (2015)
R1, R2 and R3 are connected as shown in the figure. The
current in resistance R2 would be zero if (2014)
2475 1875
(a) (b)
64 64
1875 2475
(a) V1 = V2 and R1 = R2 = R3 (c) (d)
49 132
(b) V1 = V2 and R1 = 2R2 = R3
29. Consider two identical galvanometers and two identical
(c) V1 = 2V2 and 2R1 = 2R2 = R3 resistors with resistance R. If the internal resistance of
(d) 2V1 = V2 and 2R1 = R2 = R3 the galvanometers RC < R/2, which of the following
statement(s) about any one of the galvanometers is(are)
26. A galvanometer gives full scale deflection with 0.006 A true? (2016)
current. By connecting it to a 4990 resistance, it can be (a) The maximum voltage range is obtained when all the
converted into a voltmeter of range 0-30 V. If connected to components are connected in series
2n (b) The maximum voltage range is obtained when the
a resistance, it becomes an ammeter of range 0-1.5
249 two resistors and one galvanometer are connected in
A. The value of n is (2014) series, and the second galvanometer is connected in
parallel to the first galvanometer
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 196
(c) The maximum current range is obtained when all the
components are connected in parallel
(d) The maximum current range is obtained when the two
galvanometers are connected in series and the combination
is connected in parallel with both the resistors
30. A moving coil galvanometer has 50 turns and each turn
has an area 2×10–4 m2. The magnetic field produced by the
magnet inside the galvanometer is 0.02T. The torsional
constant of the suspension wire is 10–4 N m rad–1. When a
current flows through the galvanometer, a full scale
deflection occurs if the coil rotates by 0.2 rad. The resistance
of the coil of the galvanometer is 50. This galvanomter is
V0 t R 2
to be converted into an ammeter capable of measuring (a) I ln
current in the range 0–1.0 A. For this purpose, a shunt R1
resistance is to be added in parallel to the galvanometer.
The value of this shunt resistance, in ohms, is.................. (b) the outer surface is at a higher voltage than the inner
(2018) surface
31. Two identical moving coil galvanometers have 10 (c) the outer surface is at a lower voltage than the inner
resistance and full scale deflection at 2A current. One surface
of them is converted into a voltmeter of 100 mV full
scale reading and the other into an Ammeter of 1mA (d) V I 2
full scale current using appropriate resistors. These
are then used to measure the voltage and current in 33. In the balanced condition, the values of the resistances of
the four arms of a Wheatstone bridge are shown in the
the Ohm’s law experiment with R = 1000 resistor by
us i ng a n i d e a l c e l l . W hi c h o f t he fo l l o wi ng figure below. The resistance R3 has temperature
statement(s) is/are correct? (2019)
coefficient 0.0004 º C-1 . If the temperature of R 3 is
(a) The resistance of the Voltmeter will be 100k increased by 100 ºC, the voltage developed between S
(b) The resistance of the Ammeter will be 0.02 (round off and T will be__________ volt. (2020)
to 2nd decimal place)
(c) If the ideal cell is replaced by a cell having internal
resistance of 5 then the measured value of R will be
more than 1000
(d) The measured value of R will be 978 < R < 982
32. Shown in the figure is a semicircular metallic strip that has
thickness t and resistivity . Its inner radius is R1 and
outer radius is R2. If a voltage V0 is applied between its two
ends, a current I flows in it. In addition, it is observed that
a transverse voltage V develops between its inner and
outer surfaces due to purely kinetic effects of moving
electrons (ignore any role of the magnetic field due to the
current). Then (figure is schematic and not drawn to scale)
– (2020)
Note:
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
ANSWER KEY 198
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 ELECTROSTATICS, GAUSS’S LAW & CAPACITORS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE - Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (a)
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (d)
9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (a)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (a)
13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (d) 13. (d) 14.(b) 15. (d) 16.(c)
17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (c) 17. (c) 18.(d) 19. (c) 20.(2)
21. (b) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (c) 21. (d) 22.(a) 23.(a) 24.(a)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a)
25. (b) 26.(c) 27.(c) 28.(b)
29. (d) 30.(b) 31. (c) 32. (b)
33. (c) 34.(c) 35.(a) 36. (c) 29. (b) 30.(a) 31. (a) 32.(c)
37. (a) 38.(c) 39.(a) 40. (b) 33. (d) 34.(d) 35.(d) 36.(b)
41. (b) 42.(d) 43.(d) 44. (b) 37. (b) 38.(b) 39.(+18.00) 40.(b)
45. (b) 46.(d) 47.(c) 48. (c) 41. (b) 42.(b) 43.(4) 44.(b)
49. (d) 50.(b) 51. (d) 52. (c)
45. (a) 46.(d) 47.(d) 48.(b)
53. (a) 54.(a) 55.(a) 56. (d)
57. (d) 58.(b) 59.(b) 60. (c) 49. (1.00) 50.(b) 51.(b) 52.(b)
61. (a) 62. (d) 63.(b) 64. (c) 53. (c) 54.(d) 55.(b) 56. (200.00)
65. (a) 66.(c) 67. (b) 68. (d) 57. (d) 58. (d) 59. (c) 60. (a)
69. (a) 70. (a) 71. (c) 72. (a)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (b)
73. (d) 74.(b) 75. (c) 76. (b)
77. (d) 78. (d) 79. (d) 80. (c) 65. (c) 66. (a) 67. (d) 68. (a)
81. (a) 82. (a) 83.(b) 84. (c) 69. (b) 70. (c) 71. (a) 72. (c)
85. (a) 86.(c) 87. (c) 88. (c) 73. (b) 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (c)
89. (d) 90.(b) 91. (a) 92. (c) 77. (c) 78. (48.00) 79. (b) 80. (004.00)
93. (c) 94.(c) 95.(b) 96. (c)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (008.00)
97. (b) 98.(b) 99.(c) 100. (b)
85. (a) 86. (c) 87. (c) 88. (a)
101. (d) 102.(c) 103.(b) 104. (b)
89. (b) 90. (c) 91. (d) 92. (d)
105.(d) 106.(d) 107.(6.25) 108. (3) 93. (a) 94. (a) 95. (d) 96. (d)
109.(4.50) 110.(576) 111. (7) 112. (3) 97. (d) 98. (b) 99. (c)
113.(3) 114.(1) 115.(2.70) 116. (4)
117.(90) 118.(40) 119.(2.40) 120. (80)
121. (13)
ANSWER KEY 199
q
EXERCISE - 3 : 76.
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION 2 0 m
QR r
77.
4 0 R 2 r 2
1 Qq
78. (a) 4a, (5a, 0); (b) KQ
1 2
; (c)
3a x 3a x 40 2ma
79. (a) 2q and 8q at ends, q at 3 cm from 2q (b) zero
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 5
81.
3
80. V
6 K2
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b)
5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (c) CK1K 2 K A
n 2 where C 0
82. CR
K 2 K1 K1 d
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (d)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (a) 83. (1.50) 84. (3/5)
17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a) –9 –5
85. (i) CA = 2 × 10 F, UA = 1.21 × 10 J ;
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (d) –5 –5
(ii) W = 4.84 × 10 J ; (iii) U = 1.1 × 10 J
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b)
2
29. (b) 30. (b) 31. (a) 32. (b) Q2 R R
n
Q2 R
87. (a) U n 1 (b) U
33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (b) 36. (a) 8 0 r 2 R r 8 0 r 2
37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (d)
88. (b, c) 89. (b, d) 90. (a,b,c) 91. (b, c)
41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (d)
45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c) 92. (c, d) 93. (b, d) 94. (a,b,c,d) 95. (a, b)
49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (a) 52. (b) 96. (a, c) 97. (a,b,c,d) 98. (c, d) 99. (a, d)
53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (b) 100. (a,b,c) 101. (c,d) 102. (a,c) 103. (a,c,d)
57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (c) 60. (d) 104. (a,b) 105 (a,d) 106. (b,d) 107. (a,c,d)
61. (b) 62. (True) 63. (False) 64. (0002) 108. (c,d)
65. (0009) 66. (0000) 67. (0005) 68. (0005)
109. (A–S; B–Q; C–Q; D–P)
69. (0002) 70. (3.16 × 10–9 C) 71. (8.48 m)
72. (0.628 sec.) 110. (A–S; B–S,R; C–P,Q; D–R,P)
4 a 111. (A–R, P; B–Q; C–P; D–P,S)
73. (a) H a (b) H 3
3
112. (–q Ea)
a2 a 2 b2
74. (i) VA a b c , VB b c , VC c c c , 113. ( 8iˆ )
0 0 b 0
(iii) a + b = c
0 AV 2AV q2
3 Q2 3 GM 2 114. , 115. 9 10
9
75. (a) U , (b) U E 1.5 1032 J , d d L2
20 0 R 5 R
(c) U Q2 1 Q2
80 R 116. (c) 117. 180º , , 2
40 4L
ANSWER KEY 200
EXERCISE - 4 :
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (3 m/s) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (a)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (5.86 m/s) 8. (b)
1 q2 4
9. (c) 10.
40 a
.
6
3 3 3 6 2
qp pq ˆ
11. (c) 12. (a) KE , (b) F i
40 d 2
20 d3
13.
1 2 qa 14. (c) 15. (c)
2 0
1/ 3
a
16. V ' V 17. (b) 18. (a,b,cd)
3t
19. (c) 20. (a) 21. (d) 22. (b)
23. (c) 24. (b) 25. (a) 26. (b)
27. (c) 28. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a)
31. (a) 32. (a,d) 33. (d) 34. (a)
35. (a,b,cd) 36. (c,d) 37. (d) 38. (d)
39. (a,c,d) 40. (d) 41. (c) 42. (0006)
43. (b,d) 44. (c,d) 45. (c) 46. (b,d)
47. (a,d) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a)
51. (c) 52. (0006) 53. (d) 54. (d)
55. (c) 56. (c) 57. (d) 58. (b,d)
59. (b,c,d) 60. (b) 61. (a) 62. (a,b)
63. (P–5; Q–3; R–1, 4; S–2) 64. (a) 65. (b,c)
66. (b,c,d) 67. (1.00) 68. (c,d) 69. (b,c)
70. (006.40) 71. (006.00)
72. (002.00) 73. (a,c)
74. (001.30)
ANSWER KEY 201
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 CURRENT ELECTRICITY
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (d)
5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
9. (a) 10. (c) 11. (b) 12. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (d)
13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (d)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (c) 24. (a) 21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (d) 28. (d) 25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (b) 28. (d)
29. (d) 30. (b) 31. (c) 32. (a) 29. (b) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (4.00)
33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (b) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (d) 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (b) 41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (c)
45. (a) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (a) 45. (4.00) 46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (d)
49. (b) 50. (d) 51. (d) 52. (c) 49. (c) 50. (d) 51. (c) 52. (b)
53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (c) 53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (c) 56. (c)
57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (a) 57. (0.50) 58. (1.00) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (b) 61. (c) 62. (8.00) 63. (b) 64. (b)
65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (c) 65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (30)
69. (d) 70. (c) 71. (a) 72. (b) 69. (b) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (d)
73. (a) 74. (b) 75. (d) 76. (c) 73. (d) 74. (c) 75. (b) 76. (4)
77. (d) 78. (c) 79. (15) 80. (3) 77. (002.00) 78. (4) 79. (d) 80. (c)
81. (15) 82. (7) 83. (10) 84. (0.50) 81. (b) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (5.00)
85. (0.41) 86. (6.67) 87. (2.6) 88. (2) 85. (a) 86. (a)
89. (0.01) 90. (53.57) 91. (40) 92. (37.5)
93. (30)
ANSWER KEY 202
EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (d)
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b)
5. (a) No ; (c) 8 (bridge balanced)
5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a)
6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (a)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (c)
10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (a)
13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a)
14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (a, d) 17. (c)
17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (c) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (0004) 21. (0005)
25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a, b, c, d) 24. (c) 25. (a, b,d)
29. (d) 30. (a) 31. (d) 32. (b)
26. (0005) 27. (1A) 28. (b) 29. (b, c)
33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (c) 36. (a)
30. (5.55) 31. (b, d) 32. (a, c ,d)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (c) 33. (00.26 to 000.27)
45. (d) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (b)
49. (d) 50. (c) 51. (a) 52. (b, c)
53. (a, b, c) 54. (b, c,d) 55. (0004) 56. (0001)
57. (0006) 58. (0001) 59. (0048) 60. (0002)
61. (0005)
62. (i) 2 V, 1 A, 0, – 1A ; (ii) 1 A, 2 A, – 1A, 2 A
63. (R/2) 64. (0.9A) 65. (0.198 A)
V1r2 V2 r1 rr
66. ( V , r 12 )
r1 r2 r1 r2
67. (4.96 mA, 1.58 V)
2 21 19
68. ( (i) V ; (ii) V, V)
13 13 13
81. (a–q, r; b–q, r, s; c – p; d – q, r, s)
82. (a–s; b – t; c – p; d – r)
83. (a – p, q, r; b – p, q; c – s; d – s)
84. (a–q; b–r; c–s; d–s)
2
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.
Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
4
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.
Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.
Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?
We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
Your success is our dream-come-true
I wish you all the best.
Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
5
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.
Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain
Physics Team
Teachers SME DTP
Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Tamanna Arora
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan Kanchan Kumari
Pritesh Ranjan Pushp Raj Singh
Ravneet Wadhwa
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.
Suraj Bhan Singh
Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran
Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.
The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MAGNETISM
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 37
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 48
Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 55
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 61
Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 76
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 159
EMI & AC
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 84
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 114
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 126
Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 134
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 141
Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 153
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 163
7
Teacher’s Note:
Back in the 6th century BC, the Greek philosopher Thales of Miletus had already noticed
the special effects of the magnetic stones and later on magnetic needles were being used
for navigation for voyages by various explorers ! Even Albert Einstein wasn't spared, a
gift of a compass from his father when he was five years old led to a lifetime fascination
with magnetic fields. The future of transportation i.e the motors in electric vehicles is
based on fundamentals of magnetism ! Lets see the origins and applications of the
magnetism and its beautiful relationship with electric currents .
"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,
Mazaa ayega to smajh ayega".
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
MAGNETISM
Chapter 01 9
MAGNETISM
1. MAGNETIC FIELD AND FORCE If v and B are in the plane of paper, then according to
Right-Hand Rule, the direction of F on positively charged
In order to define the magnetic field B , we deduce an expression particle will be perpendicular to the plane of paper upwards
for the force on a moving charge in a magnetic field. as shown in figure (a), and on negatively charged particle will
Consider a positive charge q moving in a uniform magnetic field be perpendicular to the plane of paper downwards, figure (b).
B , with a velocity V . Let the angle between V and B be .
(i) The magnitude of force F experienced by the moving charge
is directly proportional to the magnitude of the charge i.e.
F q Definition of B
If v = 1, q = 1 and sin = 1 or = 90°, the nfrom (1),
(ii) The magnitude of force F is directly proportional to the
component of velocity acting perpendicular to the direction F = 1 × 1 × B × 1 = B.
of magnetic field, i.e. Thus the magnetic field induction at a point in the magnetic
F v sin field is equal to the force experienced by a unit charge moving
with a unit velocity perpendicular to the direction of magnetic
(iii) The magnitude of force F is directly proportional to the field at that point.
magnitude of the magnetic field applied i.e.,
Special Cases
FB Case (i) If = 0° or 180°, then sin = 0.
Combining the above factors, we get
From (1),
F qvsin B or F = kqv B sin F = qv B (0) = 0.
where k is a constant of proportionality. Its value is found It means, a charged particle moving along or opposite to the
to be one i.e. k = 1. direction of magnetic field, does not experience any force.
F = qv B sin ...(1) Case (ii) If v = 0, then F = qv B sin = 0.
F q vB ...(2) It means, if a charged particle is at rest in a magnetic field, it
experiences no force.
The direction of F is the direction of cross-product of Case (iii) If = 90°, then sin = 1
velocity v and magnetic field B , which is perpendicular to F = qv B (1) = qv B (Maximum).
the plane containing v and B . It is directed as given by the Unit of B . SI unit of B is tesla (T) or weber/(metre)2 i.e. (Wb/m2)
Right- Handed-Screw Rule or Right-Hand Rule. or Ns C–1 m–1
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
10
Thus, the magnetic field induction at a point is said to be speed, velocity, momentum and kinetic energy of charged
one Tesla if a charge of one coulomb while moving at right particle will change.
angle to a magnetic field, with a velocity of 1 ms–1 experiences
a force of 1 newton, at that point. Case II. When v, E and B are mutually perpendicular to
each other. In this situation if E and B are such that
MLT 2
Dimensions of B MA 1T 2
AT LT 1
F Fe Fm 0 , then acceleration in the particle,
F
a 0 . It means the particle will pass through the fields
2. LORENTZ FORCE m
without any change in its velocity. Here, Fe = Fm so qE = q
The force experienced by a charged particle moving in space v B or v = E/B.
where both electric and magnetic fields exist is called Lorentz This concept has been used in velocity-selector to get a
force. charged beam having a definite velocity.
Force due to electric field: When a charged particle carrying
3. MOTION OF A CHARGED PARTICLE IN A
charge +q is subjected to an electric field of strength E , it
UNIFORM MAGNETIC FIELD
experiences a force given by
Suppose a particle of mass m and charge q, entering a
Fe qE ...(3)
uniform magnetic field induction B at O, with velocity v ,
whose direction is the same as that of E . making an angle with the direction of magnetic field acting
Force due to magnetic field: If the charged particle is moving in the plane of paper as shown in figure
in a magnetic field B , with a velocity v it experiences a
force given by
Fm q v B
The direction of this force is in the direction of
v B i.e.
perpendicular to the plane contaning v and B and is
directed as given by Right hand screw rule.
Due to both the electric and magnetic fields, the total force
experienced by the charged particle will be given by
F Fe Fm qE q v B q E v B Resolving v into two rectangular components, we have :
v cos (= v1) acts in the direction of the magnetic field and
v sin (= v2) acts perpendicular to the direction of magnetic
F q E vB ...(4) field.
This is called Lorentz force. For velocity component v2 , the force acting on the charged
Special cases
particle due to magnetic field is F q v 2 B
Case I. When v, E and B , all the three are collinear.. In
or F q v 2 B qv 2 Bsin 90 q vsin B ...(1)
this situation, the charged particle is moving parallel or
antiparallel to the fields, the magnetic force on the charged The direction of this force F is perpendicular to the plane
particle is zero. The electric force on the charged particle
containing B and v2 and is directed as given by Right
qE hand rule. As this force is to remain always perpendicular to
will produce acceleration a ,
m v2 it does not perform any work and hence cannot change
along the direction of electric field. As a result of this, there
the magnitude of velocity v2 . It changes only the direction
will be change in the speed of charged particle along the
of motion of the particle. Due to it, the charged particle is
direction of the field. In this situation there will be no change
made to move on a circular path in the magnetic field, as
in the direction of motion of the charged particle but, the
shown in figure
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
11
Therefore, under the combined effect of the two
component velocities, the charged particle in magnetic field
will cover linear path as well as circular path i.e. the path of
the charged particle will be helical, whose axis is parallel
to the direction of magnetic field, figure
Here, magnetic field is shown perpendicular to the plane of
paper directed inwards and particle is moving in the plane
of paper. When the particle is at points A, C and D the
direction of magnetic force on the particle will be along AO,
CO and DO respectively, i.e., directed towards the centre O
of the circular path.
The force F on the charged particle due to magnetic field
2
provides the required centripetal force = mv 2 / r necessary
for motion along a circular path of radius r.
Bq v 2 mv22 / r or v2 Bq r / m
or v sin = B q r/m ...(2)
The angular velocity of rotation of the particle in magnetic
vsin Bqr Bq The linear distance covered by the charged particle in the
field will be
r mr m magnetic field in time equal to one revolution of its circular
The frequency of rotation of the particle in magnetic field path (known as pitch of helix) will be
will be 2m
d v1T v cos
Bq Bq
v ...(3)
2 2m Important points
The time period of revolution of the particle in the magnetic 1. If a charged particle having charge q is at rest in a magnetic
field will be
field B , it experiences no force; as v = 0 and F = q v B sin = 0.
1 2m
T ...(4) 2. If charged particle is moving parallel to the direction of B , it
v Bq
also does not experience any force because angle between
From (3) and (4), we note that v and T do not depend upon
velocity v of the particle. It means, all the charged particles v and B is 0° or 180° and sin 0° = sin 180° = 0. Therefore,
having the same specific charge (charge/mass) but moving the charged particle in this situation will continue moving
with different velocities at a point, will complete their circular along the same path with the same velocity.
paths due to component velocities perpendicular to the 3. If charged particle is moving perpendicular to the direction
magnetic fields in the same time.
of B , it experiences a maximum force which acts
For component velocity v1 vcos , there will be no force
perpendicular to the direction B as well as v . Hence this
on the charged particle in the magnetic field, because the force will provide the required centripetal force and the
angle between v1 and B is zero. Thus the charged particle charged particle will describe a circular path in the magnetic
covers the linear distance in direction of the magnetic field
mv 2
with a constant speed v cos . field of radius r, given by Bqv .
r
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
12
4. MOTION IN COMBINED ELECTRON AND
MAGNETIC FIELDS
4.1 Velocity Filter
Velocity filter is an arrangement of cross electric and
magnetic fields in a region which helps us to select from a
beam, charged particles of the given velocity irrespective of
their charge and mass.
A velocity selector consists of two slits S1 and S2 held parallel
to each other, with common axis, some distance apart. In the
region between the slits, uniform electric and magnetic fields
are applied, perpendicular to each other as well as to the
axis of slits, as shown in figure. When a beam of charged
particles of different charges and masses after passing
through slit S1 enters the region of crossed electric field E
and magnetic field B , each particle experiences a force due
to these fields. Those particles which are moving with the
velocity v, irrespective of their mass and charge, the force Construction. It consists of two D-shaped hollow
on each such particle due to electric field (qE) is equal and evacuated metal chambers D1 and D2 called the dees.
opposite to the force due to magnetic field (q v B), then q E These dees are placed horizontally with their diametric
= q v B or v = E/B edges parallel and slightly separated from each other.
The dees are connected to high frequency oscillator
which can produce a potential difference of the order of
10 4 volts at frequency 10 7 Hz. The two dees are
enclosed in an evacuated steel box and are well insulated
from it. The box is placed in a strong magnetic field
produced by two pole pieces of strong electromagnets
N, S. The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of
the dees. P is a place of ionic source or positively charged
particle figure.
Working and theory. The positive ion to be accelerated
is produced at P. Suppose, at that instant, D1 is at negative
Such particles will go undeviated and filtered out of the
potential and D2 is at positive potential. Therefore, the
region through the slit S2. Therefore, the particles emerging
from slit S2 will have the same velocity even though their ion will be accelerated towards D1. On reaching inside
charge and mass may be different. D1, the ion will be in a field free space. Hence it moves
with a constant speed in D1 say v. But due to perpendicular
The velocity filter is used in mass spectrograph which helps
magnetic field of strength B, the ion will describe a circular
to find the mass and specific charge (charge/mass) of the
charged particle. mv 2
path of radius r (say) in D1, given by Bqv where
4.2 Cyclotron r
m and q are the mass and charge of the ion.
A cyclotron is a device developed by Lawrence and
Livingstone by which the positively charged particles like
mv
proton, deutron, alpha particle etc. can be accelerated. r
Bq
Principle. The working of the cyclotron is based on the fact
that a positively charged particle can be accelerated to a Time taken by ion to describe a semicircular path is given
sufficiently high energy with the help of smaller values of
oscillating electric field by making it to cross the same electric r m
by, t = a constant.
field time and again with the use of strong magnetic field. v Bq B q / m
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
13
This time is independent of both the speed of the ion and
radius of the circular path. In case the time during which
the positive ion describes a semicircular path is equal to the
time during which half cycle of electric oscillator is completed,
then as the ion arrives in the gap between the two dees, the
polarity of the two dees is reversed i.e. D1 becomes positive
and D2 negative. Then, the positive ion is accelerated
towards D2 and it enters D2 with greater speed which remains Let, vd drift velocity of electron
constant in D2. The ion will describe a semicircular path of – e = charge on each electron.
greater radius due to perpendicular magnetic field and again
Then magnetic Lorentz force on an electron is given by
will arrive in a gap between the two dees exactly at the
instant, the polarity of the two dees is reversed. Thus, the
positive ion will go on accelerating every time it comes into
f e vd B
the gap between the dees and will go on describing circular If n is the number density of free electrons i.e. number of
path of greater and greater radius with greater and greater free electrons per unit volume of the conductor, then total
speed and finally acquires a sufficiently high energy. The number of free electrons in the conductor will be given by
accelerated ion can be removed out of the dees from window N = n (A) = nA
W, by applying the electric field across the deflecting plates
Total force on the conductor is equal to the force acting on
E and F.
all the free electrons inside the conductor while moving in
Maximum Energy of positive ion the magnetic field and is given by
Let v0, r0 = maximum velocity and maximum radius of the
circular path followed by the positive ion in cyclotron.
F Nf nA e v d B nAe vd B ...(1)
mv02 Bqr0 We know that current through a conductor is related with
Then, Bqv0 or v0 drift velocity by the relation
r0 m
I = n A e vd
2
1 1 Bqr0 B2q 2 r02 I nAevd .
Max. K.E. mv02 m
2 2 m 2m
We represent I as current element vector. It acts in the
Cyclotron Frequency
If T is the time period of oscillating electric field then T = 2t direction of flow of current i.e. along OX. Since I and vd
= 2 m/Bq have opposite directions, hence we can write
1 Bq I nAevd ...(2)
The cyclotron frequency is given by
T 2m From (7) and (8), we have
It is also known as magnetic resonance frequency. F I B ...(3)
The cyclotron angular frequency is given by
F I B
c 2 Bq / m
F IBsin ...(4)
5. FORCE ON A CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTOR
were is the smaller angle between I and B .
PLACED IN A MAGNETIC FIELD Special cases
Expression for the force acting on the conductor carrying Case I: If = 0° or 180°, sin = 0,
current placed in a magnetic field From (4), F = IB (0) = 0 (Minimum)
Consider a straight cylindrical conductor PQ of length , It means a linear conductor carrying a current if placed parallel
area of cross-section A, carrying current I placed in a uniform to the direction of magnetic field, it experiences no force.
Case II: If = 90°, sin = q ;
magnetic field of induction, B . Let the conductor be placed
along X-axis and magnetic field be acting in XY plane making From (4), F = IB × 1 = IB (Maximum)
an angle with X-axis. Suppose the current I flows through It means a linear conductor carrying current if placed
the conductor from the end P to Q, figure. Since the current perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field, it experiences
in a conductor is due to motion of electrons, therefore, maximum force. The direction of which can be given by
electrons are moving from the end Q to P (along X’ axis). Right handed screw rule.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
14
6. TORQUE ON A CURRENT CARRYING COIL IN
Since the forces F2 and F4 are equal in magnitude and acting
A MAGNETIC FIELD in opposite directions along the same straight line, they cancel
out each other i.e. their resultant effect on the coil is zero.
Consider a rectangular coil PQRS suspended in a uniform
magnetic field of induction B . Let PQ = RS = and QR = SP = b. Now, the force on the arm PQ is given by
Let I be the current flowing through the coil in the direction
PQRS and be the angle which plane of the coil makes with
F1 I PQ B or F1 = I (PQ) B sin 90° = IB PQ B
the direction of magnetic field figure. The forces will be
acting on the four arms of the coil. Direction of this force is perpendicular to the plane of the
coil directed outwards (i.e. perpendicular to the plane of
paper directed towards the reader).
And, force on the arm RS is given by
F3 I RS B or F3 = I (PQ) B sin 90° = IB RS B
The direction of this force, is perpendicular to the plane of paper
directed away from the reader i.e. into the plane of the coil.
The forces acting on the arms PQ and RS are equal, parallel
and acting in opposite directions having different lines of
action, form a couple, the effect of which is to rotate the coil
in the anticlockwise direction about the dotted line as axis.
The torque on the coil (equal to moment of couple) is given by
= either force × arm of the couple
The forces F1 and F3 acting on the arms PQ and RS will be as
shown in figure when seen from the top.
Arm of couple = ST = PS cos = b cos .
IB b cos IBA cos ( × b = A = area of coil
PQRS)
If the rectangular coil has n turns, then
nIBA cos
Note that if the normal drawn on the plane of the coil makes
an angle with the direction of magnetic field, then + = 90°
Let F1, F2 , F3 and F4 be the forces acting on the four current or = 90° – ; And cos = cos (90° – ) = sin
carrying arms PQ, QR, RS and SP of the coil. Then torque becomes,
The force on arm SP is given by,
nIBA sin MBsin M B nIA B
F4 I SP B or F4 = I (SP) B sin (180° – ) = Ib B sin
where, nIA = M = magnitude of the magnetic dipole moment
The direction of this force is in the direction of SP B i.e. of the rectangular current loop
in the plane of coil directed upwards.
M B nI A B
The force on the arm QR is given by F2 I QR B or
This torque tends to rotate the coil about its own axis. Its
F2 = I (QR) B sin = I b B sin value changes with angle between plane of coil and direction
The direction of this force is in the plane of the coil directed of magnetic field.
downwards.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
15
Special cases The lower end of the coil is connected to one end of a hair
spring S’ of quartz or phosphor bronze. The other end of
Case: 1 If the coil is set with its plane parallel to the direction of this highly elastic spring S’ is connected to a terminal T2. L
magnetic field B, then is soft iron core which may be spherical if the coil is circular
0 and cos 1 and cylindrical, if the coil is rectangular. It is so held within
the coil, that the coil can rotate freely without touching the
Torque, = nIBA (1) = nIBA (Maximum) iron core and pole pieces. This makes the magnetic field
This is the case with a radial field. linked with coil to be radial field i.e. the plane of the coil in
Case: 2 If the coil is set with its plane perpendicular to the all positions remains parallel to the direction of magnetic
direction of magentic field B, then = 90° and cos = 0 field. M is concave mirror attached to the phosphor bronze
strip. This helps us to note the deflection of the coil using
Torque, = nIBA (0) = 0 (Minimum)
lamp and scale arrangement. The whole arrangement is
enclosed in a non-metallic case to avoid disturbance due to
7. MOVING COIL GALVANOMETER air etc. The case is provided with levelling screws at the
base.
Moving coil galvanometer is an instrument used for detection
and measurement of small electric currents. The spring S’ does three jobs for us : (i) It provides passage
of current for the coil PQRS1 (ii) It keeps the coil in position
Principle. Its working is based on the fact that when a current
and (iii) generates the restoring torque on the twisted coil.
carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field, it experiences a torque.
The torsion head is connected to terminal T 1. The
Construction. It consists of a coil PQRS1 having large
galvanometer can be connected to the circuit through
number of turns of insulated copper wire, figure. The coil is terminals T1 and T2.
wound over a non-magnetic metallic frame (usually brass)
which may be rectangular or circular in shape. The coil is Theory. Suppose the coil PQRS1 is suspended freely in the
suspended from a movable torsion head H by means of magnetic field.
phosphor bronze strip in a uniform magnetic field produced Let, = length PQ or RS1 of the coil,
by two strong cylindrical magnetic pole pieces N and S. b = breadth QR or S1P of the coil,
n = number of turns in the coil.
Area of each turn of the coil, A = × b.
Let, B = strength of the magnetic field in which coil is
suspended.
I = current passing through the coil in the direction PQRS1
as shown in figure.
Let at any instant, be the angle which the normal drawn on
the plane of the coil makes with the direction of magnetic field.
As already discussed, the rectangular coil carrying current
when placed in the magnetic field experiences a torque whose
magnitude is given by = nIBA sin .
If the magnetic field is radial i.e. the plane of the coil is
parallel to the direction of the magnetic field then = 90°
and sin = 1.
= nIBA
Due to this torque, the coil rotates. The phosphor bronze
strip gets twisted. As a result of it, a restoring torque comes
into play in the phosphor bronze strip, which would try to
restore the coil back to its original position.
Let be the twist produced in the phosphor bronze strip
due to rotation of the coil and k be the restoring torque per
unit twist of the phosphor bronze strip, then total restoring
torque produced = k .
In equilibrium position of the coil, deflecting torque
= restoring torque
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
16
nIBA = k (a) The value of n can not be increased beyond a certain limit
because it results in an increase of the resistance of the
k galvanometer and also makes the galvanometer bulky. This
or I or I G
nBA tends to decrease the sensitivity. Hence n can not be
increased beyond a limit.
k (b) The value of B can be increased by using a strong horse
where G a constant for a galvanometer. It is
nBA shoe magnet.
known as galvanometer constant. (c) The value of A can not be increased beyond a limit because
in that case the coil will not be in a uniform magnetic field.
Hence, I Moreover, it will make the galvanometer bulky and
unmanageable.
It means, the deflection produced is proportional to the
(d) The value of k can be decreased. The value of k depends
current flowing through the galvanometer. Such a upon the nature of the material used as suspension strip.
galvanometer has a linear scale. The value of k is very small for quartz or phosphor bronze.
Current sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the That is why, in sensitive galvanometer, quartz or phosphor
deflection produced in the galvanometer when a unit current bronze strip is used as a suspension strip.
flows through it.
8. BIOT-SAVART’S LAW
If is the deflection in the galvanometer when current I is
passed through it, then According to Biot-Savart’s law, the magnitude of the
magnetic field induction dB (also called magnetic flux
Current sensitivity, density) at a point P due to current element depends upon
the factors at stated below :
nBA k (i) dB I (ii) dB d
Is I
I k nBA
1
(iii) dB sin (iv) dB
The unit of current sensitivity is rad. A–1 or div. A–1. r2
Combining these factors, we get
Voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the
deflection produced in the galvanometer when a unit voltage Id sin
dB
is applied across the two terminals of the galvanometer. r2
Let, V = voltage applied across the two terminals of the Id sin
or dB K
galvanometer, r2
= deflection produced in the galvanometer.
Then, voltage sensitivity, VS = /V
If R = resistance of the galvanometer, I = current through it.
Then V = IR
Voltage sensitivity,
nBA IS
VS
IR kR R
where K is a constant of proportionality. Its value depends
the unit of VS is rad V or div. V .
–1 –1 on the system of units chosen for the measurement of the
various quantities and also on the medium between point P
Conditions for a sensitive galvanometer and the current element. When there is free space between
A galvanometer is said to be very sensitive if it shows large current element and point, then
deflection even when a small current is passed through it.
0
In SI units, K and In cgs system K = 1
nBA 4
From the theory of galvanometer, I
k where 0 is absolute magnetic permeability of free space
For a given value of I, will be large if nBA/k is large. It is so and 0 4 107 Wb A 1m1 4107 TA 1m
if (a) n is large (b) B is large (c) A is large and (d) k is small.
( 1 T = 1 Wb m–2)
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
17
Similarities and Dis-similarities between the Biot-Savart’s law
0 Id sin
In SI units, dB ...(1) for the magnetic field and coulomb’s law for electrostatic field
4 r2
Similarities
Id sin (i) Both the laws for fields are long range, since in both the
In cgs system, dB laws, the field at a point varies inversely as the square of the
r2
distance from the source to point of observation.
In vector form, we may write
(ii) Both the fields obey superposition principle.
0 I d r
dB
0 I d r
or dB
...(2)
(iii) The magnetic field is linear in the source Id , just as the
4 r 3 4 r3 electric field is linear in its source, the electric charge q.
9. MAGNETIC FIELD DUE TO A STRAIGHT
Direction of dB . From (2), the direction of dB would CONDUCTOR CARRYING CURRENT
obviously be the direction of the cross product vector,
Consider a straight wire conductor XY lying in the plane of
d r . It is represented by the Right handed screw rule or paper carrying current I in the direction X to Y, figure. Let P
be a point at a perpendicular distance a from the straight
Right Hand Rule. Here dB is perpendicular to the plane wire conductor. Clearly, PC = a. Let the conductor be made
containing d and r and is directed inwards. If the point P
of small current elements. Consider a small current element
Id of the straight wire conductor at O. Let r be the
is to the left of the current element, dB will be perpendicular position vector of P w.r.t. current element and be the angle
to the plane containing d and r , directed outwards. between Id and r. Let CO = .
Some important features of Biot Savart’s law
1. Biot Savart’s law is valid for a symmetrical current distribution.
2. Biot Savart’s law is applicable only to very small length
conductor carrying current.
3. This law can not be easily verified experimentally as the
current carrying conductor of very small length can not be
obtained practically.
4. This law is analogous to Coulomb’s law in electrostatics.
5. The direction of dB is perpendicular to both Id and r .
6. If = 0° i.e. the point P lies on the axis of the linear conductor
carrying current (or on the wire carrying current) then
0 Id sin 0
dB 0
4 r2
It means there is no magnetic field induction at any point on According to Biot-Savart’s law, the magnetic field dB (i.e.
the thin linear current carrying conductor. magnetic flux density or magnetic induction) at point P due
7. If = 90° i.e. the point P lies at a perpendicular position w.r.t. to current element Id is given by
current element, then
0 Id r
dB . 3
0 Id 4 r
dB , which is maximum.
4 r 2
0 Id sin
or dB ...(5)
8. If = 0° or 180°, then dB = 0 i.e. minimum. 4 r2
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
18
In rt. angled POC, + = 90° or = 90° –
0 I 2I 2I L
sin = sin (90° – ) = cos ...(6) Then, B sin sin 0 sin 40 a
4a 4 a 4a L2
2
a a
Also, cos or r ...(7) (iv) When point P lies on the wire conductor, then d and r for
r cos
each element of the straight wire conductor are parallel.
or a tan Therefore, d r 0 . So the magnetic field induction at P = 0.
And, tan
a
Direction of magnetic field
Differentiating it, we get The magnetic field lines due to straight conductor carrying
d a sec d
2
...(8) current are in the form of concentric circles with the
conductor as centre, lying in a plane perpendicular to the
Putting the values in (5) from (6), (7) and (8), we get straight conductor. The direction of magnetic field lines is
anticlockwise, if the current flows from A to B in the straight
dB
2
0 I a sec d cos 0 I
cos d ...(9)
conductor figure (a) and is clockwise if the current flows
4 a2 4 a from B to A in the straight conductor, figure (b). The direction
2 of magnetic field lines is given by Right Hand Thumb Rule
cos or Maxwell’s cork screw rule.
The direction of dB , according to right hand thumb rule,
will be perpendicular to the plane of paper and directed
inwards. As all the current elements of the conductor will
also produce magnetic field in the same direction, therefore,
the total magnetic field at point P due to current through the
whole straight conductor XY can be obtained by integrating
Eq. (9) within the limits – 1 and + 2. Thus
2 2
0 I I
cos d 40 a sin 21
B dB
4 a
1 1
0 I I
sin 2 sin 1 0 sin 1 sin 2 ...(10)
4 a 4 a Right hand thumb rule. According to this rule, if we imagine
the linear wire conductor to be held in the grip of the right
Special cases. (i) When the conductor XY is of infinite length
hand so that the thumb points in the direction of current,
and the point P lies near the centre of the conductor then
then the curvature of the fingers around the conductor
1 2 90 will represent the direction of magnetic field lines, figure
(a) and (b).
0 I 2I
So, B sin 90 sin 90 0 ...(11)
4 a 4 a
(ii) When the conductor XY is of infinite length but the point P
lies near the end Y (or X) then 1 = 90° and 2 = 0°.
0 I I
So, B sin 90 sin 0 0 ...(11 a)
4 a 4 a
Thus we note that the magnetic field due to an infinite long
linear conductor carrying current near its centre is twice
than that near one of its ends.
(iii) If length of conductor is finite, say L and point P lies on
right bisector of conductor, then
L/2 L
1 2 and sin
a L / 2
2
2 4a L2
2
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
19
10. MAGNETIC FIELD AT THE CENTRE OF THE 0 I 2I
B .2r 0
CIRCULAR COIL CARRYING CURRENT 4 r 2
4 r
If the circular coil consists of n turns, then
Consider a circular coil of radius r with centre O, lying with 0 2nI 0 I
its plane in the plane of paper. Let I be the current flowing in B 2n ...(13)
4 r 4 r
the circular coil in the direction shown, figure (a). Suppose
the circular coil is made of a large number of current elements 0 I
i.e. B × angle subtended by coil at the centre.
each of length d. 4 r
Direction of B
The direction of magnetic field at the centre of circular current
loop is given by Right hand rule.
Right Hand rule. According to this rule, if we hold the thumb
of right hand mutually perpendicular to the grip of the fingers
such that the curvature of the fingers represent the direction
of current in the wire loop, then the thumb of the right hand
will point in the direction of magnetic field near the centre of
the current loop.
According to Biot-Savart’s law, the magnetic field at the
centre of the circular coil due to the current element Id is
given by
0 d r
dB I
4 r 3
0 Idr sin 0 Id sin
or dB
4 r3 4 r 2
where r is the position vector of point O from the
11. AMPERE’S CIRCUITAL LAW
current element. Since the angle between d and r is Consider an open surface with a boundary C, and the current
90° (i.e., = 90°), therefore, I is passing through the surface. Let the boundary C be
made of large number of small line elements, each of length
0 Id sin 90 Id
dB or dB 0 2 d. The direction of d of small line element under study is
...(12)
4 r2 4 r acting tangentially to its length d. Let Bt be the tangential
component of the magnetic field induction at this element
In this case, the direction of dB is perpendicular to the
plane of the current loop and is directed inwards. Since the then Bt and d are acting in the same direction, angle
current through all the elements of the circular coil will between them is zero. We take the product of Bt and d for
contribute to the magnetic feild in the same direction,
that element. Then Bt d B.d
therefore, the total magnetic field at point O due to current
in the whole circular coil can be obtained by integrating eq.
(12). Thus
Id 0 I
B dB 40
r 2 4 r 2
d
But d = total length of the circular coil = circumference of
the current loop = 2r
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
20
If length d is very small and products for all elements of 12. MAGNETIC FIELD DUE TO INFINITE LONG
closed boundary are added together, then sum tends to be STRAIGHT WIRE CARRYING CURRENT
an integral around the closed path or loop (i.e., ) . Consider an infinite long straight wire lying in the plane of
paper. Let I be the current flowing through it from X to Y. A
Therefore, of B.d over all elements on a closed path
magnetic field is produced which has the same magnitude
B.d = Line integral of B around the closed path or at all points that are at the same distance from the wire, i.e.
the magnetic field has cylindrical symmetry around the wire.
loop whose boundary coincides with the closed path.
According to Ampere’s circuital law,
B.d 0 I ...(14)
where I is the total current threading the closed path or loop
and 0 is the absolute permeability of the space. Thus,
Ampere’s circuital law states that the line integral of magnetic
field induction B around a closed path in vacuum is equal to
0 times the total current I threading the closed path.
Let P be a point at a perpendicular distance r from the straight
The relation (14) involves a sign convention, for the sense
of closed path to be traversed while taking the line integral wire and B be the magnetic field at P. It will be acting
of magnetic field (i.e., direction of integration) and current tangentially to the magnetic field line passing through P.
threading it, which is given by Right Hand Rule. According Consider an amperian loop as a circle of radius r, perpendicular
to it, if curvature of the fingers is perpendicular to the thumb to the plane of paper with centre on wire such that point P
of right hand such that the curvature of the fingers represents lies on the loop, figure. The magnitude of magnetic field is
the sense, the boundary is traversed in the closed path or same at all points on this loop. The magnetic field B at P
will be tangential to the circumference of the circular loop.
loop for B.d , then the direction of thumb gives the sense
We shall integrate the amperian path anticlockwise. Then
in which the current I is regarded as positive.
B and d are acting in the same direction. The line integral
According to sign convention, for the closed path as shown
of B around the closed loop is
in figure, I1 is positive and I2 is negative. Then, according to
Ampere’s circuital law
B.d Bd cos 0 B d B2r
B.d 0 I1 I2 0Ie As per sign convention, here I is positive,
Using Ampere’s circuital law
where Ie is the total current enclosed by the loop or closed path.
B.d 0I or B2r 0 I
0 I 0 2I
or B ...(15)
2r 4 r
13. MAGNETIC FIELD DUE TO CURRENT THROUGH
A VERY LONG CIRCULAR CYLINDER
Consider an infinite long cylinder of radius R with axis XY.
Let I be the current passing through the cylinder. A magnetic
field is set up due to current through the cylinder in the form
of circular magnetic lines of force, with their centres lying
on the axis of cylinder. These lines of force are perpendicular
The relation (19) is independent of the size and shape of the to the length of cylinder.
closed path or loop enclosing the current.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
21
If we plot a graph between magnetic field induction B and
distance from the axis of cylinder for a current flowing through
a solid cylinder, we get a curve of the type as shown figure
Case I. Point P is lying outside the cylinder. Let r be the Here we note that the magnetic field induction is maximum
perpendicular distance of point P from the axis of cylinder, for a point on the surface of solid cylinder carrying current
where r > R. Let B be the magnetic field induction at P. It is and is zero for a point on the axis of cylinder.
acting tangential to the magnetic line of force at P directed
14. FORCE BETWEEN TWO PARALLEL CONDUCTORS
into the paper. Here B and d are acting in the same direction.
CARRYING CURRENT
Applying Ampere circuital law we have
Consider C 1D 1 and C 2D 2, two infinite long straight
B.d 0 I or
Bd cos 0 0 I
conductors carrying currents I 1 and I 2 in the same
direction. They are held parallel to each other at a
or Bd 0I or B2r 0 I distance r apart, in the plane of paper. The magnetic
field is produced due to current through each conductor
0 I shown separately in figure. Since each conductor is in
or B , i.e., B 1/ r the magnetic field produced by the other, therefore, each
2r
conductor experiences a force.
Case II. Point P is lying inside cylinder. Here r < R. we may
have two possibilities.
D1 r D2
(i) If the current is only along the surface of cylinder which is
so if the conductor is a cylindrical sheet of metal, then current B1 90° I2
through the closed path L is zero. Using Ampere circutal
law, we have B = 0. F1 B F2
(ii) If the current is uniformly distributed throughout the cross- × ×
section of the conductor, then the current through closed B
path L is given by
90°
2
I Ir I1 B2
I' 2
r 2 2
R R
C1 C2
Applying Ampere’s circuital law, we have
Magnetic field induction at a point P on conductor C2D2
B.d 0 r I ' due to current I1 passing through C1D1 is given by
0 2I1
Ir 2 B1 ...(16)
or 2rB 0 r I ' 0 r2 4 r
R
According to right hand rule, the direction of magnetic field
0 r Ir
or B i.e., B r B1 is perpendicular to the plane of paper, directed inwards.
2 R 2
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
22
As the current carrying conductor C2D2 lies in the magnetic
Q R S P
field B1 (produced by the current through C1D1), therefore,
B.d B.d B.d B.d B.d
PQRS P Q R S
the unit length of C2D2 will experience a force given by
F2 = B1I2 × 1 = B1I2
Q
Q
Putting the value of B1, we have
Here, B.d Bd cos 0 BL
P P
2I I
F2 0 . 1 2 ...(17)
4 r R
R P
It means the two linear parallel conductors carrying and
B.d Bd cos90 0 B.d
currents in the same direction attract each other. Q Q S
Thus one ampere is that much current which when flowing
through each of the two parallel uniform long linear S
conductors placed in free space at a distance of one metre
Also, B.d 0 ( outside the solenoid, B = 0)
from each other will attract or repel each other with a force R
of 2 × 10–7 N per metre of their length.
15. THE SOLENOID B.d BL 0 0 0 BL
...(18)
PQRS
A solenoid consists of an insulating long wire closely wound From Ampere’s circuital law
in the form of a helix. Its length is very large as compared to
its diameter.
Magnetic field due to a solenoid
B.d 0 × total current through the rectangle PQRS
PQRS
Consider a long straight solenoid of circular cross-section.
Each two turns of the solenoid are insulated from each other. = 0 × no. of turns in rectangle × current
When current is passed through the solenoid, then each = 0 n LI ...(19)
turn of the solenoid can be regarded as a circular loop
carrying current and thus will be producing a magnetic field. From (18) and (19), we have
At a point outside the solenoid, the magnetic fields due to BL = 0 n LI or B = 0 n I
neighbouring loops oppose each other and at a point inside
the solenoid, the magnetic fields are in the same direction. This relation gives the magnetic field induction at a point
As a result of it, the effective magnetic field outside the well inside the solenoid. At a point near the end of a solenoid,
solenoid becomes weak, whereas the magnetic field in the the magnetic field induction is found to be 0 n I/2.
interior of solenoid becomes strong and uniform, acting
along the axis of the solenoid. 16. TOROID
Let us now apply Ampere’s circuital law.
Let n be the number of turns per unit length of solenoid and The toroid is a hollow circular ring on which a large number of
I be the current flowing through the solenoid and the turns insulated turns of a metallic wire are closely wound. In fact, a
of the solenoid be closely packed. toroid is an endless solenoid in the form of a ring, figure.
Consider a rectangular amperian loop PQRS near the middle
of solenoid as shown in figure
S R
P Q
L
B
×××××××××××××××××
The line integral of magnetic field induction B over the
closed path PQRS is
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
23
Magnetic field due to current in ideal toroid
17. MAGNETISM & MATTER
Let n be the number of turns per unit length of toroid and I
be the current flowing through it. In case of ideal toroid, the 17.1 The Bar Magnet
coil turns are circular and closely wound. A magnetic field It is the most commonly used form of an artificial magnet.
of constant magnitude is set up inside the turns of toroid in When we hold a sheet of glass over a short bar magnet and
the form of concentric circular magnetic field lines. The sprinkle some iron filings on the sheet, the iron filings rearrange
direction of the magnetic field at a point is given by the themselves as shown in figure. The pattern suggests that attraction
tangent to the magnetic field line at that point. We draw is maximum at the two ends of the bar magnet. These ends are
three circular amperian loops, 1, 2 and 3 of radii r1, r2 and r3 to called poles of the magnet.
be traversed in clockwise direction as shown by dashed
circles in figure, so that the points P, S and Q may lie on
them. The circular area bounded by loops 2 and 3, both cut
the toroid. Each turn of current carrying wire is cut once by
the loop 2 and twice by the loop 3. Let B1 be the magnitude
of magnetic field along loop 1. Line integral of magnetic
field B1 along the loop 1 is
B1 .d B1d cos 0 B1 2r1
loop 1 loop1
Loop 1 encloses no current.
According to Ampere’s circuital law
B1 .d 0 current enclosed by loop 1 = 0 × 0 = 0
loop 1
or B12 r1 = 0 or B1 = 0
Let B3 be the magnitude of magnetic field along the loop 3.
The line integral of magnetic field B3 along the loop 3 is
B3 .d B3d cos 0 B3 2r3
loop 3 loop 3
From the sectional cut as shown in figure, we note that the
current coming out of the plane of paper is cancelled exactly
by the current going into it. Therefore, the total current
enclosed by loop 3 is zero.
According to Ampere’s circuital law
B3 .d 0 × total current through loop 3
loop 3
or B3 2r3 0 0 0 or B3 0 1. The earth behaves as a magnet.
Let B the magnitude of magnetic field along the loop 2. Line 2. Every magnet attracts small pieces of magnetic substances
integral of magnetic field along the loop 2 is like iron, cobalt, nickel and steel towards it.
3. When a magnet is suspended freely with the help of an
B.d B2r2
unspun thread, it comes to rest along the north south
loop 2
direction.
Current enclosed by the loop 2 = number of turns × current 4. Like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each
in each turn = 2 r2 n × I other.
According to Ampere’s circuital law
5. The force of attraction or repulsion F between two magnetic
poles of strengths m1 and m2 separated by a distance r is
B.d 0 total current
directly proportional to the product of pole strengths and
loop 2
inversely proportional to the square of the distance between
or B2 r2 0 2r2 nI or B 0 nI their centres, i.e.,
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
24
m1m 2 mm The path along which the compass needles are aligned is
F 2
or F K 1 2 2 , where K is magnetic force known as magnetic field line.
r r
constant.
0
In SI units, K 107 Wb A 1m 1
4
where 0 is absolute magnetic permeability of free space
(air/vacuum).
0 m1m 2
F
4 r 2
This is called Coulomb’s law of magnetic force. However, in
cgs system, the value of K = 1.
Note:-
This corresponds to Coulomb’s law in electrostatics.
SI Unit of magnetic pole strength
Suppose m1 = m2 = m (say),
r = 1 m and F = 10–7 N
From equation (1),
107 107
m m 2
or m 1 or m = +1 ampere-metre
12
(Am). Therefore, strength of a magnetic pole is said to be
one ampere-metre, if it repels an equal and similar pole, when
placed in vacuum (or air) at a distance of one metre from it,
with a force of 10–7 N.
6. The magnetic poles always exist in pairs. The poles of a
magnet can never be separated i.e. magnetic monopoles do
not exist.
18. MAGNETIC FIELD LINES
Magnetic field line is an imaginary curve, the tangent to
which at any point gives us the direction of magnetic field
B at that point.
If we imagine a number of small compass needless around a
magnet, each compass needle experiences a torque due to
the field of the magnet. The torque acting on a compass
needle aligns it in the direction of the magnetic field.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
25
Properteis of magnetic field lines We shall show that the SI unit of M is joule/tesla or ampere
1. The magnetic field lines of a magnet (or of a solenoid metre2.
carrying current) form closed continuous loops.
SI unit of pole strength is Am.
2. Outside the body of the magnet, the direction of magnetic
field lines is from north pole to south pole. Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid
3. At any given point, tangent to the magnetic field line We know that a current loop acts as a magnetic dipole.
represents the direction of net magnetic field ( B ) at that According to Ampere’s hypothesis, all magnetic phenomena
point. can be explained in terms of circulating currents.
4. The magnitude of magnetic field at any point is represented In figure magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a current
by the number of magnetic field lines passing normally carrying solenoid resemble very closely. Therefore, a bar
through unit area around that point. Therefore, crowded
magnet can be thought of as a large number of circulating
lines represent a strong magnetic field and lines which are
not so crowded represent a weak magnetic field. currents in analogy with a solenoid. Cutting a bar magnet is
5. No two magnetic field lines can intersect each other. like cutting a solenoid. We get two smaller solenoids with
weaker magnetic properties. The magnetic field lines remain
continuous, emerging from one face of one solenoid and
entering into other face of other solenoid. If we were to
move a small compass needle in the neighbourhood of a bar
magnet and a current carrying solenoid, we would find that
the deflections of the needle are similar in both cases.
19. MAGNETIC DIPOLE To demonstrate the similarity of a current carrying solenoid
to a bar magnet, let us calculate axial field of a finite solenoid
A magnetic dipole consists of two unlike poles of equal carrying current.
strength and separated by a small distance.
For example, a bar magnet, a compass needle etc. are
magnetic dipoles. We shall show that a current loop behaves
as a magnetic dipole. An atom of a magnetic material behaves
as a dipole due to electrons revolving around the nucleus.
The two poles of a magnetic dipole (or a magnet), called
north pole and south pole are always of equal strength, and
of opposite nature. Further such two magnetic poles exist
always in pairs and cannot be separated from each other.
The distance between the two poles of a bar magnet is called
the magnetic length of the magnet. It is a vector directed from In figure, suppose
S-pole of magnet to its N-pole, and is represented by 2 . a = radius of solenoid,
Magnetic dipole moment is the product of strength of either 2 = length of solenoid with centre O
pole (m) and the magnetic length ( 2 ) of the magnet. It is n = number of turns per unit length of solenoid,
i = strength of current passed through the solenoid
represented by M .
Magnetic dipole moment = strength of either pole × magnetic We have to calculate magnetic field at any point P on the
length axis of solenoid, where OP = r. Consider a small element of
thickness dx of the solenoid, at a distance x from O.
M m 2
Number of turns in the element = n dx.
Magnetic dipole moment is a vector quantity directed from Using equation, magnitude of magnetic field at P due to this
South to North pole of the magnet, as shown in figure current element is
0ia 2 n dx
dB 3/ 2
2 r x a 2
2 ...(1)
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
26
If P lies at a very large distance from O, i.e., r >> a and r >> x,
then [(r – x)2 + a2]3/2 r3 U W MB cos 2 cos 1 ...(6)
0ia 2 ndx When 1 = 90°, and 2 = , then
dB ...(2)
2r 3 U = W = – MB (cos – cos 90°)
As range of variation of x is from x = – to x = +, therefore W = – MB cos ...(7)
the magnitude of total magnetic field at P due to current
carrying solenoid In vector notation, we may rewrie (7) as
x
nia 2 nia 2 x U M.B ...(8)
B 0 3 dx 0 3 x x
2r x
2r
Particular Cases
2n 2 ia 1. When = 90°
2
0 ni a 2
3
B 2 0 ...(3)
2 r 4 r3 U = – MB cos = – MB cos 90° = 0
If M is magnetic moment of the solenoid, then i.e., when the dipole is perpendicular to magnetic field its potential
M = total no. of turns × current × area of cross section energy is zero.
M = n (2) × i × (a2) Hence to calculate potential energy of diole at any position
making angle with B, we use
0 2M
B ...(4) U = – MB (cos 2 – cos 1) and take 1 = 90° and 2 = .
4 r 3
Therefore,
This is the expression for magnetic field on the axial line of
U = – MB (cos – cos 90°) = – MB cos
a short bar magnet.
Thus, the axial field of a finite solenoid carrying current is 2. When = 0°
same as that of a bar magnet. Hence, for all practical purposes, U = – MB cos 0° = – MB
a finite solenoid carrying current is equivalent to a bar magnet.
which is minimum. This is the position of stable equilibrium,
Potential energy of a magnetic dipole in a magnetic field
i.e., when the magnetic dipole is aligned along the magnetic
Potential energy of a magnetic dipole in a magnetic field is field, it is in stable equilibrium having minimum P.E.
the energy possessed by the dipole due to its particular
position in the field. 3. When = 180°
U = – MB cos 180° = MB, which is maximum. This is the
When a magnetic dipole of moment M is held at an angle
position of unstable equilibrium.
with the direction of a uniform magnetic field B , the
magnitude of the torque acting on the dipole is
MBsin ...(5)
This torque tends to align the dipole in the direction of the
field. Work has to be done in rotating the dipole against the
action of the torque. This work done is stored in the
magnetic dipole as potential energy of the dipole.
Now, small amount of work done in rotating the dipole
through a small angle d against the restoring torque is
dW = d= MB sin d
Total work done in rotating the dipole from = 1 to = 2 is
2
20. MAGNETISM AND GAUSS’S LAW
MBsin d MB cos 12 MB cos 2 cos 1
W
1
According to Gauss’s law for magnetism, the net magnetic
Potential energy of the dipole is flux (B) through any closed surface is always zero.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
27
Vertical component along AD is
21. EARTH’S MAGNETISM
AM = V = R sin ...(2)
Magnetic elements of earth at a place are the quantities Square (23) and (24), and add
which describe completely in magnitude as well as direction, H2 + V2 = R2 (cos2 + sin2 ) = R2
the magnetic field of earth at that place.
21.1 Magnetic declination R H2 V2 ...(3)
Magnetic declination at a place is the angle between Dividing (24) by (23), we get
magnetic meridian and geographic meridian at that place.
R sin V V
or tan ...(4)
R cos H H
The value of horizontal component H = R cos is different
at different places. At the magnetic poles, = 90°
H = R cos 90° = zero
At the magnetic equator, = 0°
H = R cos 0° = R
Horizontal component (H) can be measured using both, a
vibration magnetometer and a deflection magnetometer.
The value of H at a place on the surface of earth is of the
order of 3.2 × 10–5 tesla.
Memory note
Retain in Memory
Note that the direction of horizontal component H of earth’s
1. The earth’s magnetic poles are not at directly opposite positions
magnetic field is from geographic south to geographic north
on globe. Current magnetic south is farther from geographic
above the surface of earth. (if we ignore declination).
south than magnetic north is from geographic north.
2. Infact, the magnetic field of earth varies with position and 22. MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATTER
also with time. For example, in a span of 240 years from 1580
to 1820 A.D., the magnetic declination at London has been To describe the magnetic properties of materials, we define
found to change by 3.5° – suggesting that magnetic poles the following few terms, which should be clearly understood
of earth change their position with time. 22.1 Magnetic Permeability
3. The magnetic declination in India is rather small. At Delhi,
declination is only 0° 41’ East and at Mumbai, the declination It is the ability of a material to permit the passage of magnetic
is 0° 58’ West. Thus at both these places, the direction of lines of force through it i.e. the degree or extent to which magnetic
field can penetrate or permeate a material is called magnetic
geographic north is given quite accurately by the compass
permeability of the material. It is represented by r.
needle (within 1° of the actual direction).
Relative magnetic permeability of a mterial is defined as the
21.2 Magnetic Dip or Magnetic Inclination ratio of the number of magnetic field lines per unit area (i.e.
Magnetic dip or magnetic inclination at a place is defined as flux density B) in that material to the number of magnetic
the angle which the direction of total strength of earth’s field lines per unit area that would be present, if the medium
were replaced by vacuum. (i.e. flux density B0).
magnetic field makes with a horizontal line in magnetic meridian.
B
21.3 Horizontal Component i.e., r
B0
It is the component of total intensity of earth’s magnetic
field in the horizontal direction in magnetic meridian. It is Relative magnetic permeability of a material may also be
represented by H. defined as the ratio of magnetic permeability of the material
In figure, AK represents the total intensity of earth’s magnetic () and magnetic permeability of free space (0)
field, BAK = . The resultant intensity R along AK is
resolved into two rectangular components : r or r 0
0
Horizontal component along AB is
We know that 0 = 4 × 10–7 weber/amp-metre (Wb A–1 m–1)
AL = H = R cos ...(1) or henry/metre (Hm–1)
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
28
SI units of permeability () are But B = H
Hm–1 = Wb A–1 m–1 = (T m2) A–1 m–1 = T m A–1
H 0 H 1 m or 1 m
0
22.2 Magnetic Intensity ( H )
or r 1 m
The degree to which a magnetic field can magnetise a material
This is the relation between relative magnetic permeability
is represented in terms of magnetising force or magnetise
and magnetic susceptibility of the material.
intensity ( H ).
23. CLASSIFICATION OF MAGNETIC MATERIALS
22.3 Magnetisation or Intensity of Magnetisation ‘I’
There is a large variety of elements and compounds on earth.
It represents the extent to which a specimen is magnetised, Some new elements, alloys and compounds have been
when placed in a magnetising field. Quantitatively, synthesized in the laboratory. Faraday classified these
The magnetisation of a magnetic material is defined as the substances on the basis of their magnetic properties, into
magnetic moment per unit volume of the material. the following three categories :
(i) Diamagnetic substances,
Magnetic moment m
M (ii) Paramagnetic substances, and
volume V
(iii) Ferromagnetic substances
There are SI unit of I, which are the same as SI units of H.
Their main characteristics are discussed below :
Magnetic susceptibility ( m ) of a magnetic material is
23.1 Diamagnetic Substances
defined as the ratio of the intensity of magnetisation (I)
The diamagnetic substances are those in which the
induced in the material to the magnetising force (H) applied
individual atoms/molecules/ions do not possess any net
on it. Magnetic susceptibility is represented by m . magnetic moment on their own. When such substances are
placed in an external magnetising field, they get feebly
I magnetised in a direction opposite to the magnetising field.
Thus m when placed in a non-uniform magnetic field, these
H
substances have a tendency to move from stronger parts of
Relation between magnetic permeability and magnetic the field to the weaker parts.
susceptibility When a specimen of a diamagnetic material is placed in a
magnetising field, the magnetic field lines prefer not to pass
When a magnetic material is placed in a magnetising field of
through the specimen.
magnetising intensity H, the material gets magnetised. The
Relative magnetic permeability of diamagnetic substances
total magnetic induction B in the material is the sum of the
is always less than unity.
magnetic induction B0 in vacuum produced by the magnetic
intensity and magnetic induction Bm, due to magnetisation From the relation r 1 m , as r 1, m is negative.
of the material. Therefore, Hence susceptibility of diamagnetic substances has a small
B = B0 + Bm negative value.
A superconductor repels a magnet and in turn, is repelled
But B0 = 0 H and Bm = m0 I, where I is the intensity of by the magnet.
magnetisation induced in the magnetic material. Therefore, The phenomenon of perfect diamagnetism in
from above superconductors is called Meissner effect. Superconducting
magnets have been used for running magnetically leviated
B 0 H 0 I 0 H I , superfast trains.
i.e., B 0 H I 23.2 Paramagnetic substances
Paramagnetic substacnes are those in which each individual
I atom/molecule/ion has a net non zero magnetic moment of
Now as m I mH
H its own. When such substances are placed in an external
magnetic field, they get feebly magnetised in the direction
From above, B 0 H m H 0 H 1 m of the magnetising field.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
29
When placed in a non-uniform magnetic field, they tend to 1
move from weaker parts of the field to the stronger parts. i.e., I B, and I
T
When a specimen of a paramagnetic substance is placed in
a magnetising field, the magnetic field lines prefer to pass B
through the specimen rather than through air. Combining these factors, we get I
T
From the SI relation, r 1 m , as r 1 , therefore, m As B H , magnetising intensity
must be positive. Hence, susceptibility of paramagnetic
substances is positive, though small. H I 1
I or
T H T
Susceptibility of paramagnetic substances varies inversely
1 I
as the temperature of the substance i.e. m i.e. they But m
T H
lose their magnetic character with rise in temperature.
1 C
m or m
23.3 Ferromagnetic substances T T
Ferromagnetic substances are those in which each individual where C is a constant of proportionality and is called Curie
atom/molecule/ion has a non zero magnetic moment, as in a constant.
paramagnetic substance.
24. HYSTERISIS CURVE
When such substances are placed in an external magnetising
field, they get strongly magnetised in the direction of the field. The hysterisis curve represents the relation between
The ferromagnetic materials show all the properties of
magnetic induction B (or intensity of magnetization I ) of
paramagnetic substances, but to a much greater degree. For
a ferromagnetic material with magnetiziing force or magnetic
example,
intensity H . The shape of the hysterisis curve is shown in
(i) They are strongly magnetised in the direction of external
field in which they are placed. figure. It represents the behaviour of the material as it is
taken through a cycle of magnetization.
(ii) Relative magnetic permeability of ferromagnetic materials is
very large ( 103 to 105)
Suppose the material is unmagnetised initially i.e., B 0
(iii) The susceptibility of ferromagnetic materials is also very
and H 0 . This state is represented by the origin O. Wee
large. m r 1 place the material in a solenoid and increase the current
That is why they can be magnetised easily and strongly. through the solenoid gradually. The magnetising force H
(iv) With rise in temperature, susceptibility of ferromagnetics
increases. The magnetic induction B in the material
decreases. At a certain temperature, ferromagnetics change
increases and saturates as depicted in the curve oa. This
over to paramagnetics. This transition temperature is called
behaviour represents alignment and merger of the domains
curie temperature. For example, curie temperature of iron is
about 1000 K. of ferromagnetic material until no further enhancement in B
is possible. Therefore, there is no use of inreasing solenoid
current and hence magnetic intensity beyond this.
23.4 Curie Law in Magnetism
According to Curie law,
Intensity of magnetisation (I) of a magnetic material is (i)
directly proportional to magnetic induction (B), and (ii)
inversely proportional to the temperature (T) of the material.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
30
This phenomenon of lagging of I or B behind H when a
specimen of a magnetic material is subjected to a cycle of
magnetisation is called hysteresis.
For example, hysteresis loop for soft iron is narrow and
large, whereas the hysteresis loop for steel is wide and short,
figure
Next, we decrease the solenoid current and hence magnetic
intensity H till it reduces to zero. The curve follows the The hysterisis loops of soft iron and steel reveal that
(i) The retentivity of soft iron is greater than the retentivity of
path ab showing that when H 0 , B 0 . Thus, some
steel,
magnetism is left in the specimen.
(ii) Soft iron is more strongly magnetised than steel,
The value of magnetic induction B left in the specimen (iii) Coercivity of soft iron is less than coercivity of steel. It
when the magnetising force is reduced to zero is called means soft iron loses its magnetism more rapidly than steel
Retentivity or Remanence or Residual magnetism of the does.
material. (iv) As area of I-H loop for soft iron is smaller than the area of
I-H loop for steel, therefore, hysterisis loss in case of soft
It shows that the domains are not completely randomised
iron is smaller than the hysterisis loss in case of steel.
even when the magnetising force is removed. Next, the
current in the solenoid is reversed and increased slowly. (a) Permanent Magnets
Certain domains are flipped until the net magnetic induction Permanent magnets are the materials which retain at room
temperature, their ferromagnetic properties for a long time.
B inside is reduced to zero. This is represented by the
The material chosen should have
curve bc. It means to reduce the residual magnetism or
retentivity to zero, we have to apply a magnetising force = (i) high retentivity so that the magnet is strong,
OC in opposite direction. This value of magnetising force is (ii) high coercivity so that the magnetisation is not erased by
called coercivity of the material. stray magnetic fields, temperature changes or mechanical
damage due to rough handling etc.
As the reverse current in solenoid is increased in magnitude,
we once again obtain saturation in the reverse direction at (iii) high permeability so that it can be magnetised easily.
d. The variation is represented by the curve cd. Next, the Steel is preferred for making permanent magnets.
solenoid current is reduced (curve de), reversed and (b) Electromagnets
increased (curve ea). The cycle repeats itself. From figure,
The core of electromagnets are made of ferromagnetic
we find that saturated magnetic induction BS is of the order
materials, which have high permeability and low retentivity.
of 1.5 T and coercivity is of the order of –90 Am–1. Soft iron is a suitable material for this purpose. When a soft
From the above discussion, it is clear that when a specimen iron rod is placed in a solenoid and current is passed through
of a magnetic material is taken through a cycle of the solenoid, magnetism of the solenoid is increased by a
magnetisation, the intensity of magnetisation (I) and thousand fold. When the solenoid current is switched off,
magnetic induction (B) lag behind the magnetising force the magnetism is removed instantly as retentivity of soft
(H). Thus, even if the magnetising force H is made zero, the iron is very low. Electromagnets are used in electric bells,
values of I and B do not reduce to zero i.e., the specimen loudspeakers and telephone diaphragms. Giant
electromagnets are used in cranes to lift machinery etc.
tends to retain the magnetic properties.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
31
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
32
Specific example
25. HALL EFFECT
In the above circular loop tension in part A and B.
The Phenomenon of producing a transverse emf in a current
In balanced condition of small part AB of the loop is shown below
carrying conductor on applying a magnetic field perpendicular
to the direction of the current is called Hall effect.
Hall effect helps us to know the nature and number of charge
carriers in a conductor.
Consider a conductor having electrons as current carriers.
The electrons move with drift velocity v opposite to the
direction of flow of current
d d
2T sin dF Bid 2T sin BiRd
2 2
d d d
If d is small so, sin 2T. BiRd
2 2 2
Force acting on electron Fm e v B . This force acts
along x-axis and hence electrons will move towards face (2) BiL
T BiR, if 2R L so T
and it becomes negatively charged. 2
Note:-
26. STANDARD CASES FOR FORCE ON
CURRENT CARRYING CONDUCTORS If no magnetic field is present, the loop will still open into
a circle as in it’s adjacent parts current will be in opposite
Case 1 : When an arbitrary current carrying loop placed in direction and opposite currents repel each other.
a magnetic field ( to the plane of loop), each element of
loop experiences a magnetic force due to which loop
stretches and open into circular loop and tension developed
in it’s each part.
Case 2 : Equilibrium of a current carrying conductor :
When a finite length current carrying wire is kept parallel to
another infinite length current carrying wire, it can suspend
freely in air as shown below
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
33
Case 4 : Current carrying spring : If current is passed
through a spring, then it will contract because current will
flow through all the turns in the same direction.
In both the situations for equilibrium of XY it’s downward
0 2i1i 2
weight = upward magnetic force i.e. mg . .
4 h
Note: -
* In the first case if wire XY is slightly displaced from its
equilibrium position, it executes SHM and it’s time period If current makes to flow through spring, then spring will
contract and weight lift up.
h
is given by T 2 .
g
* If direction of current in movable wire is reversed then
it’s instantaneous acceleration produced is 2g.
Case 3 : Current carrying wire and circular loop : If a
current carrying straight wire is placed in the magnetic field
of current carrying circular loop.
If switch is closed then current start flowing, spring will
execute oscillation in vertical plane.
Case 5 : Tension less strings : In the following figure the
value and direction of current through the conductor XY so
that strings becomes tensionless ?
Strings becomes tensionless if weight of conductor XY
balanced by magnetic force (Fm).
Wire is placed in the perpendicular magnetic field due to
coil at it’s centre, so it will experience a maximum force
0i1
F Bi i2
2r
Wire is placed along the axis of coil so magnetic field
produced by the coil is parallel to the wire. Hence it will not
experience any force.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
34
Hence direction of current is from X Y and in balanced TIPS & TRICKS
mg 1. The device whose working principle based on Halmholtz
condition Fm = mg Bi = mg i =
B coils and in which uniform magnetic field is used called as
Case 6 : A current carrying conductor floating in air such “Halmholtz galvanometer”.
that it is making an angle with the direction of magnetic 2. The value of magnetic field induction at a point, on the
field, while magnetic field and conductor both lies in a centre of separation of two linear parallel conductors
horizontal plane. carrying equal currents in the same direction is zero.
3. If a current carrying circular loop (n = 1) is turned into a
coil having n identical turns then magnetic field at the
centre of the coil becomes n2 times the previous field i.e.
B(n turn) = n2 B(single turn).
4. When a current carrying coil is suspended freely in earth’s
magnetic field, it’s plane stays in East-West direction.
In equilibrium mg = Bi sin i
mg 5.
Magnetic field B produced by a moving charge q is given
B sin
0 q v r 0 q v rˆ
Case 7 : Sliding of conducting rod on inclined rails : When by
B ; where v = velocity of
a conducting rod slides on conducting rails. 4 r 3 4 r 2
charge and v < < c (speed of light).
6. If an electron is revolving in a circular path of radius r with
speed v then magnetic field produced at the centre of circular
0 ev v
path B . r .
4 r 2 B
7.
The line integral of magnetising field H for any closed
path called magnetomotive force (MMF). It’s S.I. unit is amp.
8. Ratio of dimension of e.m.f. to MMF is equal to the dimension
In the following situation conducting rod (X, Y) slides at of resistance.
constant velocity if 9. The positive ions are produced in the gap between the two
dees by the ionisation of the gas. To produce proton,
mg
Fcos mgsin Bi cos mgsin B tan hydrogen gas is used; while for producing alpha-particles,
i helium gas is used.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
35
10. Cyclotron frequency is also known as magnetic resonance
frequency.
11. Cyclotron can not accelerate electrons because they have
very small mass.
12. The energy of a charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic
field does not change because it experiences a force in a
direction, perpendicular to it’s direction of motion. Due to
which the speed of charged particle remains unchanged and 17. If no magnetic field is present, the loop will still open into a
hence it’s K.E. remains same. circle as in it’s adjacent parts current will be in opposite
direction and opposite currents repel each other.
13. Magnetic force does no work when the charged particle is
displaced while electric force does work in displacing the
charged particle.
14. Magnetic force is velocity dependent, while electric force
is independent of the state of rest or motion of the charged
particle.
15. If a particle enters a magnetic field normally to the
magnetic field, then it starts moving in a circular orbit.
18. In the following case if wire XY is slightly displaced from its
The point at which it enters the magnetic field lies on the
equilibrium position, it executes SHM and it’s time period is
circumference. (Most of us confuse it with the centre of the
h
orbit) given by T 2 .
g
16. Deviation of charged particle in magnetic field : If a
charged particle (q, m) enters a uniform magnetic field B
(extends upto a length x) at right angles with speed v as
shown in figure. The speed of the particle in magnetic
field does not change. But it gets deviated in the magnetic
field.
Bq 19. In the previous case if direction of currnet in movable wire
Deviation in terms of time t ; t t
m is reversed then it’s instantaneous acceleration produced is
Deviation in terms of length of the magnetic field ; 2g.
20. Electric force is an absolute concept while magnetic force is
x
sin 1 . This relation can be used only when x r . a relative concept for an observer.
r
21. The nature of force between two parallel charge beams
For x > r, the deviation will be 180° as shown in the following figure decided by electric force, as it is dominator. The nature of
force between two parallel current carrying wires decided
by magnetic force.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
36
22. If a straight current carrying wire is placed along the axis of 24. If a current carrying conductor AB is placed transverse
a current carrying coil then it will not experience magnetic to a long current carrying conductor as shown then
force because magnetic field produced by the coil is parallel
force. Experienced by wire AB F
0i1i 2 x
to the wire. log e
2 x
23. The force acting on a curved wire joining points a and b as
shown in the figure is the same as that on a straight wire
joining these points. It is given by the expression F iL B
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
37
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1 Magnetic field induction at O due to current loop 2 is
Name the physical quantity whose unit is tesla. Hence 0 I R 2
B2 acting vertically upwards.
3/ 2
define a tesla. 2 x2 R2
Sol. Tesla is the SI unit of magnetic field induction or magnetic Resultant magnetic field induction at O will be
flux density at a point in the magnetic field. The magnetic
B B12 B22 2 B1 B1 B2
field induction at a point in a magnetic field is said to be 1
tesla if one coulomb charge while moving with a velocity of 0I R 2 0 I R 2
1 m/s, perpendicular to the magnetic field experiences a force 2
3/ 2 3/ 2
of 1 N at that point. 2 x2 R 2 2 x2 R2
Example - 2 Example - 4
What is meant by a magnetic field ? How is it produced ? The ratio of the magnetic field at the centre of a current
carrying circular wire and the magnetic field at the centre
Sol. A magnetic field is the space around a magnet or the space of a square coil made from the same length of wire will be
around a wire carrying current, in which its magnetic effect
2 2
can be felt. (a) (b)
4 2 8 2
A magnetic field may be produced in many ways. For
example, (i) by a magnet (ii) by a current carrying conductor
(c) (d)
(iii) by a moving charge (iv) by a varying electric field. 2 2 4 2
(displacement current)
Sol. (b)
Example - 3 Circular coil
i
Two small circular loops, marked (1) and (2), carrying
equal currents are placed with the geometrical axes
perpendicular to each other as shown in figure. Find the r
magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field produced
at the point O.
i
Length L = 2 r
Magnetic field B
0i
4
Square coil
i
i
45°
O
45°
i
Sol. Magnetic field induction at O due to current loop 1 is
a/2
2
0 I R
B1 , acting towards left. 0 I sin 1 sin 2
2 x R2
2 3/ 2 Since, B
4a
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
38
Sol. Here, total number of turns = 3000
0 2 2 i
Length L = 4a B .
4 a 11 12
Average radius, r 11.5 cm
0 8 2 i 0 8 2i 2
Bnet 4 B .
4 a 2 r = 11.5 × 10–2 m ; i = 0.7 amp. and B = 2.5 T
No. of turns/length,
0i
Bcircular 2 3000 3000 3 105
Hence 2r n
2r 2 11.5 102 23
Bsquare 0 . 8 2i 8 2
2 r As B=ni
B = 0 r n i
Example
Example -- 55
B 2.5 23
r 684.5
Two parallel coaxial circular coils of equal radius R and 0 ni 4107 3 105 0.7
equal number of turns N carry equal currents I in the
same direction and are separated by a distance 2 R. Find
Example - 8
the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic field
produced at the mid-point of the line joining their centres. The average radius of a toroid made on a ring of non-
magnetic material is 0.1 m and it has 500 turns. If it
Sol. Magnetic field induction at the mid-point due to current
carries 0.5 ampere current, then the magnetic field
loop 1 is
produced along its circular axis inside the toroid will be
0 2I R 2 0 I R 2 (a) 25 × 10–2 Tesla (b) 5 × 10–2 Tesla
B1 , acting towards right.
4 R 2 R 2 3/ 2 2 2R 2 3/ 2
(c) 25 × 10–4 Tesla (d) 5 × 10–4 Tesla
Magnetic field induction at the mid point due to current
loop 2 is Sol. (d)
0 I R 2 0 I R 2 N
B2 , acting towards right. B = 0ni; where n
2R
2 R2 R
2 3/ 2
2 2R
2 3/ 2
500
Total magnetic field induction is B 4 10 7 0.5 5 10 4 T.
2 0 .1
0 I R 2 0 I R 2 0 I R 2 0 I
B B1 B2
2 2R
2 3/ 2
2 2R
2 3/ 2 2 2 R3 2 2R Example - 9
For the solenoid shown in figure. The magnetic field at
Example
Example-- 6 point P is
Magnetic field lines can be entirely confined within the n turn
core of a toroid, but not within a straight solenoid. Why ?
30° 60°
Sol. It is so because the magnetic field induction outside the P
toroid is zero.
Example - 7 (a)
0 ni
4
3 1 (b)
3 0 ni
4
The core of a toroid having 3000 turns has inner and
outer radii 11 cm and 12 cm respectively. Calculate relative
permeability of its core, given that a current of 0.7 amp.
(c)
0 ni
2
3 1 (d)
0 ni
4
3 1
produces a magnetic field of intensity 2.5 T in the core.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
39
Sol. (a) (iii) For positively charged particle, the direction of force,
0 according to Fleming’s left hand rule will be towards left. So
B . 2 ni sin sin . both tracks A and B correspond to positively charged
4
particles (i.e. protons and -particles).
From figure = (90o – 30o) = 60o and = (90o – 60o) = 30o
When a moving charged particle is subjected to a
ni ni
B 0 sin 60 sin 30 0
2 4
3 1. perpendicular magnetic field, it describes a circular path of
radius r given by
mv m
Example - 10 r or r
Bq q
Distinguish between Biot Savart’s law and Ampere’s rp mp q m 2e 1
circuital law.
r m q p 4m e 2
Sol.
or r 2rp i.e. r rp .
Biot-Savart’s Law Ampere’s Circuital Law
1. This law is based on the This law is based on the i.e. track B corresponds to -particle and track A corresponds
principle of magnetism. principle of electromagnetism. to proton.
2. This law is valid for This law is valid for
Example - 12
asymmetrical current symmetrical current
distribution. distributions. An electron and proton enter perpendicularly in a uniform
3. This law is the differential This law is the integral form magnetic field with the same speed. How many times larger
will be the radius of proton’s path than the electron’s ?
form of magnetic field of B or H . Proton is 1840 times heavier than electron.
induction B or
Sol. The charged particle while moving perpendicular to magnetic
magnetising force H . field experiences a force which provides the centripetal force
for its circular motion. The radius r of the circular path traced
Example - 11 by the particle in magnetic field B, is given by Bqv = mv2/r or
A neutron, a proton an electron and an -particle enter a r = mv/Bq or r m if v, B and q are constant.
region of constant magnetic field with equal velocities. Since the value of charge on electron and proton is the
The magnetic field is along the inward normal to the plane same but mass of proton is 1840 times mass of electron,
of paper. The tracks of the particles are shown in figure. rp m p 1840m e
Relate the tracks to the particles. hence 1840 or r = 1840 r .
re me me p e
Example - 13
An electron of energy 2000 eV describes a circular path
in magnetic field of flux density 0.2 T. What is the radius
of the path ? Take e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, m = 9 × 10–31 kg.
Sol. Here, energy of electron, E’ = 2000 eV
= 2000 × 1.6 × 10–19 J = 3.2 × 10–16 J.
B = 0.2 T ; r = ?
Sol. We know that force on a charged particle in the magnetic
1 2E '
field is F q v B or F qvBsin , so As, E ' mv 2 v
2 m
(i) For neutral particle i.e. neutron, q = 0, hence F = 0. It means
neutron will go undeflected i.e. track C corresponds to mv 2 mv m 2E ' 2E 'm
Also, Bev or r
neutron. r Be Be m Be
(ii) For negatively charged particle i.e. electron, the direction of
2 3.2 1016 9 1031
force, according to Fleming’s Left hand rule will be towards 7.5 104 m
right. So track D corresponds to electron. 0.2 1.6 1019
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
40
Example - 14
A proton of mass m and charge +e is moving in a circular
orbit of a magnetic field with energy 1MeV. What should
be the energy of -particle (mass = 4 m and charge =
+2e), so that it can revolve in the path of same radius
(a) 1 MeV (b) 4 MeV
(c) 2 MeV (d) 0.5 MeV
2 mK
Sol. (a) By using r ; r same, B same
qB
q2
K
m Sol. Here, I = 4A ; v = 4 × 106 ms–1 ; a = 0.2 m.
2 2 Magnetic field induction at P is
K q m p 2q p m
Hence p 1= 1
K p q p m q p
4m p
0 2I 107 2 4
B 4 106 T
K = Kp = 1meV. 4 r 0.2
The direction of B , according to Right Hand Thumb rule is
Example - 15
perpendicular to the plane of paper directed inwards.
An electron is passing through a field but no force is
Since proton is moving in opposite direction to the current
acting on it. Under what conditions is it possible, if the
carrying straight wire, hence the proton is moving
motion of the electron be in the (i) electric field (ii)
perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field due to current
magnetic field ?
through straight wire. The force on moving proton of charge
Sol. (i) In electric field, there is always a force on the moving
q due to magnetic field is
electron opposite to the direction of field. Thus the force
will be zero only if electric field is zero. F = qvB sin 90º = (1.6 × 10–19) × (4 × 106) × (4 × 10–6)
(ii) In magnetic field, the force acting on a moving electron is = 2.56 × 10–18 N
F = qv B sin , it is zero if = 0º or 180º. The direction of force on proton, according to Fleming’s
i.e. the electron is moving parallel or antiparallel to the direction Left Hand Rule acts in the plane of paper towards right.
of magnetic field.
Example - 18
Example - 16
Figure shows a rectangular current-carrying loop placed
A charge 3 coulomb is moving with velocity v 4iˆ 3jˆ ms
1
2 cm away from a long, straight, current carrying
in a magnetic field B 4iˆ 3jˆ Wbm . Find the force
2 conductor. What is the direction and magnitude of the net
force acting on the loop ?
acting on the charge.
Sol. F q v B 3 4iˆ 3jˆ 4iˆ 3jˆ = 3 [0] = 0
Cross product of two equal vector is zero.
Example - 17
A long straight wire AB carries a current of 4 A. A proton
P travels at 4 × 106 ms–1 parallel to the wire, 0.2 m from it
and in a direction opposite to the current as shown in
figure. Calculate the force which the magnetic field of
current exerts on the proton. Also specify the direction of
the force.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
41
Sol. Here, I1 = 15 A ; I2 = 25 A ; Example - 20
r1 = 2 × 10 m ; r2 = (2 + 10) × 10 m
–2 –2
What is the net force on the coil
0 2I1I 2 10 cm
Force on BC, F1 length BC
4 r1 2A
1A
2 15 25
10 7
25 102 15 cm
2 102 2 cm
= 9.375 × 10 N (repulsive, away from XY)
–4
(a) 25 × 10–7 N moving towards wire
2I I (b) 25 × 10–7 N moving away from wire
Force on DA, F2 0 1 2 length DA
4 r2 (c) 35 × 10–7 N moving towards wire
(d) 35 × 10–7 N moving away from wire
2 15 25
107 25 102 Sol. (a) Force on sides BC and AD cancel each other.
2 10 10 2
Force on side AB
= 1.5625 × 10–4 N (attractive towards XY) 2 2 1
FAB 10 7 15 10 2 3 10 6 N
Net force on the loop F = F1 – F2 = (9.375 – 1.5625) × 10–4 2 10 2
= 7.8175 × 10–4 N (respulsive, away from XY) Force on side CD
2 2 1
FAB 10 7 2
15 10 2 0.5 10 6 N
Example - 19 12 10
A long straight conductor PQ, carrying a current of 60 A, B 10 cm C
is fixed horizontally. Another long conductor XY is 2A 1A 15 cm
kept parallel to PQ at a distance of 4 mm, in air.
Conductor XY is free to move and carries a current I. FAB FCD
Calculate the magnitude and direction of current I 2 cm
for which the magnetic repulsion just balances the A D
weight of conductor XY. (Mass per unit lengths for Hence net force on loop = FAB – FCD = 25 10–7 N (towards
conductor XY is 10 –2 kg/m). the wire).
Example - 21
A conductor PQRSTU, each side of length L, bent as shown
in the figure, carries a current i and is placed in a uniform
magnetic induction B directed parallel to the positive Y-
axis. The force experience by the wire and its direction are
Sol. Here, I1 = 60 A ; I2 = I A, r = 4 mm = 4 × 10–3 m ; R
Z B
Mass per unit length of conductor XY, m = 10–2 kg/m. i
As magnetic repulsion is balancing the weight of conductor S Q P
XY Y
7 T
0 2I1I2 10 2 60 I U
so, mg or 3
102 9.8 X
4 r 4 10
(a) 2iBL directed along the negative Z-axis
4 105 9.8 (b) 5iBL directed along the positive Z-axis
or I 32.67 A
2 107 60
(c) iBL direction along the positive Z-axis
The current in XY must flow opposite to that in PQ, because
(d) 2iBL directed along the positive Z-axis
only then the force will be repulsive.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
42
Sol : (c) Sol. Here, B = 4 × 10–3 weber/m2 ; E = 2 × 104 V/m.
As PQ and UT are parallel to Q, therefore FPQ = FUT = 0 As the path of moving electron is undeviated, so force on
The current in TS and RQ are in mutually opposite direction. moving electron due to electric field is equal and opposite
Hence, FTS – FRQ = 0 to the force on moving electron due to magnetic field i.e.
Therefore the force will act only on the segment SR whose E 2 104
value is iBL and it’s direction is +z. eE evB or v 5 106 m / s
B 4 103
Example - 22 When electron moves perpendicular to magnetic field, the
radius r of circular path traced by electron is
An electron moves straight inside a charged parallel plate
capacitor at uniform charge density . The space between
the plates is filled with constant magnetic field of r
mv
9.1 1031 5 106
7.11 103 m 7.11 mm
induction B . Time of straight line motion of the electron
eB
1.6 10 19
4 10 3
in the capacitor is Example - 24
× × × × × × × An electron beam moving with uniform velocity is
× – × × × × × × gradually diverging. When it is accelerated to a very high
e
× × × × × × × velocity, it again starts converging. Why ?
× × × × × × ×
Sol. Moving electrons, apart from electrical repulsion experience
magnetic attraction also. If the electron beam is moving
e 0 B under normal conditions, the electrical repulsive force is
(a) B (b) much stronger than the magnetic attraction and hence the
0
beam diverges. When the electron beam is moving at very
e 0B high velocity, the magnetic force of attraction becomes more
(c) B (d) e effective than electrical repulsion and the beam starts
0
converging.
Sol. (b) Example - 25
The net force acting on the electron is zero because it moves
A cyclotron oscillator frequency is 10 M Hz. What should
with constant velocity, due to it’s motion on straight line.
be the operating magnetic field for accelerating -particle
? If the radius of the dees is 50 cm, what is the kinetic
Fnet Fe Fm 0 | Fe | | Fm |
energy in MeV of the -particle beam produced by the
eE = evB accelerator? (e = 1.6 × 10–19 C ; m = 4.0028 a.m.u. ; 1 a.m.u.
= 1.66 × 10–27 kg)
E
v Since, E
B 0B 0 Sol. Here, v = 10 MHz = 107 Hz ; r0 = 50 cm = 0.50 m ; B = ?
m = 4.0028 × 1.66 × 10–27 kg = 6.645 × 10–27 kg,
0 B q = 2 e = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 = 3.2 × 10–19 C.
The time of motion inside the capacitor . t .
v
Example - 23 Bq
As, v
2m
An electron beam passes through a magnetic field of 4 × 10–
3
weber/m2 and an electric field of 2 × 104 Vm–1, both acting 2m v
simultaneously. The path of electron remaining or B
q
undeviated, calculate the speed of the electrons. If the
electric field is removed, what will be the radius of the 22 6.645 10 27 107
electron path ? 2 1.305 T
7 3.2 1019
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
43
Maximum kinetic energy is
This is possible if B is parallel to A i.e. B is perpendicular
to the plane of the loop. In this orientation, the magnetic
2
B2 q 2 r 2 1.305 3.2 10 0.50
2 19 2
field produced by the loop is in the same direction as that of
E max J
2m
2 6.645 1027 external field, both normal to the plane of loop. It is due to
this fact, the magnetic flux due to total field is maximum.
1.3052 3.2 2 1038 0.25 Example - 29
MeV 20.5 MeV
2 6.645 1027 1.6 1013 Three wires each of length 2.0 m are bent into different
rectangular loops and then suspended in a magnetic field,
Example - 26 figure. If the current in each of them be the same, which
What is meant by cyclotron frequency ? loop shall be acted upon by largest torque ? If any of the
wires be bent into circular loop, then ?
Sol. It is the frequency of oscillation of a heavy charged particle
in between two dees of cyclotron, which is equal to the
frequency of high frequency oscillator, creating electric field
between two dees of cyclotron. Cyclotron frequency,
v = Bq/2 m, which is independent of the radius of the
circular path and velocity of the charged particle in the two
dees of cyclotron.
Example - 27
What is the basic principle of working of cyclotron ?
Write two uses of this machine.
Sol. The working of the cyclotron is based on the fact that a Sol. Torque () on a current loop suspended in a uniform magnetic
heavy positively charged particle can be accelerated to a field is given by = I AB sin i.e. A. Since the area of
sufficiently high energy with the help of smaller values of loop (c) = 0.5 m × 0.5 m is maximum; hence the largest torque
oscillation and electric field, by making it to cross the same will be acting on it. When any wire is bent into a circular
electric field time and again with the use of strong magnetic loop, the torque will be even more because for a given
field. perimeter the area of the circle is maximum.
A cyclotron is used (i) to bombard nuclei with high energy
Example - 30
particles and to study the resulting nuclear reaction (ii) to
produce radioactive substances which may be used in A circular coil of 100 turns, radius 10 cm carries a
hospitals for diagnosing the diseases in the body. current of 5 A. It is suspended vertically in a uniform
horizontal magnetic field of 0.5 T, the field lines making
Example - 28 an angle of 60º with the plane of coil. Calculate the
magnitude of the torque that must be applied on it to
A current carrying circular loop is located in a uniform prevent it from turning.
external magnetic field. If the loop is free to turn, what is
its orientation of stable equilibrium? Show that in this Sol. Here, n = 100 ; I = 5 A ; B = 0.5 T ; = 90º – 60º = 30º ; r = 10
orientation, the flux of the total field (external field + field cm = 0.10 m ;
produced by the loop) is maximum.
22
0.10 m 2
2
Sol. The current carrying circular loop behaves as a magnetic A r 2
7
dipole of magnetic moment M acting perpendicular to its
plane. The torque on the current loop of magnetic dipole Torque, = nIBA sin
moment M in the magnetic field B is 22
= MB sin = IA × B sin , ( M = AI) = 100 × 5 × 0.5 × × (0.10)2 × sin 30º
7
where is the angle between M and B . The system will be = 3.925 N.m
in stable equilibrium if torque is zero, which is so if = 0º.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
44
Example - 31 1/ 2 1/ 2
2MB 2 20
or 20 rad / s.
What is a radial magnetic field ? How has it been achieved I 0.1
in moving coil galvanometer ? Second Method for (iv)
Sol. Radial magnetic field is that field, in which the plane of the Change in KE of rotation = work done in rotation
coil always lies in the direction of the magnetic field. A radial
1 2
magnetic field has been achieved by (i) properly cutting the I MB cos 1 cos 2 where
2
magnetic pole pieces in the shape of concave faces. (ii)
using a soft iron core within the coil.
1 0º ; 2 90º , I 0.1 kg m 2 ; MB 20 Nm
Example - 32 1/ 2
2MB cos 1 cos 2
A 100 turn closely wound circular coil of radius 10 cm I
carries a current of 3.2 A. (i) What is the field at the centre
1/ 2
of the coil ? (ii) What is the magnetic moment of this 2 20 cos 0º cos90º
arrangement ? The coil is placed in a vertical plane and is 20 rad / s
0.1
free to rotate about a horizontal axis which coincides with
its diameter. A uniform magnetic field of 2 T in the
Example - 33
horizontal direction exists such that initially the axis of
the coil is in the direction of the field. The coil rotates Compare the current sensitivity and voltage sensitivity of
through an angle of 90º under the influence of the the following moving coil galvanometers :
magnetic field. (iii) What are the magnitudes of the torques Meter A : n = 30, A = 1.5 × 10–3 m2, B = 0.25 T, R = 20
on the coil in the initial and final position ? (iv) What is
Meter B : n = 35, A = 2.0 × 10–3 m2, B = 0.25 T, R = 30
the angular speed acquired by the coil when it has rotated
by 90º ? The moment of inertia of the coil is 0.1 kg m2. You are given that the springs in the two metres have the
same torsional constants.
Sol. (i) Here, n = 100, r = 0.10 m, i = 3.2 A, B = 2 T, I = 0.1 kg m2
Sol. For metre A, n1 = 30, A1 = 1.5 × 10–3 m2, B1 = 0.25 T, R1 = 20 .
0 2ni 22 100 3.2
B 107 2 2 10 3 T For metre B, n2 = 35, A2 = 2.0 × 10–3 m2, B2 = 0.25 T, R2 = 30 .
4 r 7 0.10
nBA
Current sensitivity of a meter
22 k
M = niA = nir2 = 100 3.2 0.10 10 Am 2
2
(ii)
7 Current sensitivity of meter A
Current sensitivity of meter B
(iii) M B MBsin where is the angle between M
n1B1A1 k2 nBA
and B or between A and B . 1 1 1 k k
k1 n 2 B 2 A 2 n 2 B2 A 2 1 2
Initially, = 0º, = MB sin 0º = 0.
Finally, = 90º, = MB sin 90º = MB = 10 × 2 = 20 Nm. 30 0.25 1.5 103 45 9
35 0.25 2.0 103 70 14
d d d d
(iv) I I I I MBsin nBA
dt d dt d Now, voltage sensitivity of a meter
kR
Id MBsin d .
Voltage sensitivity of A
Integrating it within the given conditions, Voltage sensitivity of B
/2
9 R 2 9 30
I d MBsin d
14 R1 14 20
0 0
2 / 2 27
I MB cos 0 MB cos cos 0º MB
2 2 28
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
45
Example - 34 Example - 36
The current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer State properties of the material of the wire used for
increases by 20% when its resistance is increased by a suspension of the coil in a moving coil galvanometer.
factor 2. Calculate by what factor the voltage sensitivity Sol. The properties of the material of the wire used for suspension
changes. of the coil in a moving coil galvanometer are as follows :
1. It should have low torsional constant i.e. restoring torque
' 20 120 per unit twist should be small.
Sol. Given, Is Is Is Is ; R ' 2R
100 100 2. It should have high tensile strength.
Is 3. It should be a non-magnetic substance.
Then, initial voltage sensitivity, Vs 4. It should have a low temperature coefficient of resistance.
R
5. It should be a good conductor of electricity.
New voltage sensitivity,
Example - 37
I' 120 1 3
Vs' s Is Vs Define the term : magnetic dipole moment of a current
R ' 100 2R 5
loop. Write the expression for the magnetic moment when
an electron revolves at a speed v around an orbit of radius
Vs Vs'
% decrease in voltage sensitivity 100 r in hydrogen atom.
Vs
3 Sol. A current carrying loop behaves as a system of two equal
Vs Vs
5 100 40% and opposite magnetic poles separated by a distance. Hence
Vs it behaves as a magnetic dipole. Magnetic dipole moment of
current loop is the product of current I and area A enclosed
Example - 35 by the loop of current, i.e. M = IA.
A galvanometer having 30 divisions has a current In a hydrogen atom, when an electron revolves at a speed v
sensitivity of 20 A/division. It has a resistance of 25 . around an orbit of radius r, the magnetic moment is given by
How will you convert it into an ammeter upto 1 ampere ? e 2r
M . r 2 , T
How will you convert this ammeter into a voltmeter up to 1 T V
volt ? e.v eVr
M= .πr 2 =
2πr 2
Sol. Current sensitivity = 20 A/div. = 20 × 10–6 A/div. where e is charge on electron, m is mass of electron ;
Current for full scale deflection, ig = 20 × 10–6 × 30 = 6 × 10–4 A n denotes the number of orbit and h is Plack’s constant.
For converting galvanometer into ammeter the shunt required Example - 38
Ig 6 104 25 A magnetised steel wire 31.4 cm long has a pole strength
S .G 0.015
I Ig 1 6 10 4 of 0.2 Am. It is then bent in the form of a semicircle.
Calculate magnetic moment of the needle.
Resistance of ammeter formed,
GS 0.015 25 Sol. Here, L = 31.4 cm. m = 0.2 Am, M = ?
G' 0.015
G S 25 0.015 When the wire is bent in the form of a semicircle of radius r,
then L = r = 3.14 r
Conversion of ammeter into voltmeter
L 31.4
Here, Ig = 1 ampere, V = 1 volt, G’ = 0.015 r 10 cm
3.14 3.14
Resistance to be used in series, Distance between the two ends of wire,
V 1 2 = 2r = 20 cm = 0.2 m
R G ' 0.015 0.985
Ig 1 M = m × 2 = 0.2 × 0.2 = 0.04 Am2
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
46
Example - 39 C m T '
Sol. As m T ' T
A magnetised needle of magnetic moment 4.8 × 10 J T –2 –1
m
is placed at 30º with the direction of uniform magnetic
field of magnitude 3 × 10–2 T. What is the torque acting on m 1.2 105
or T' T 300 249.99 K
the needle ? 'm 1.44 105
Sol. Here, M = 4.8 × 10–2 J T–1 ; = 30º ; B = 3 × 10–2 T Example - 44
torque, = ? A solenoid has a core of a material with relative
As = MB sin permeability 400. The windings of the solenoid are
= 4.8 × 10–2 × 3 × 10–2 sin 30º insulated from the core and carry a current of 2 A. If the
number of turns is 1000 per metre, calculate (i) H (ii) B
= 7.2 × 10–4 N-m
(iii) Intensity of magnetisation I, and the magnetising
Example - 40 current.
Why do magnetic lines of force prefer to pass through Sol. Here, r = 400, I’ = 2A, n = 1000 per metre
iron than air ? (i) H = nI’ = 1000 × 2 = 2 × 103 Am–1
Sol. This is because permeability of soft iron is much greater (ii) B = H = 0 r H = 4× 10–7 × 400 (2 × 103) = 1.0 T
than that of air.
(iii) From B = 0 (H + I), where I is intensity of magnetisation,
Example - 41
B 1.0
I H 7
2 103
State two methods to destroy the magnetism of a magnet. 0 4 10
Sol. (i) By heating the magnet. = 7.95 × 105 – 0.02 × 105
(ii) By applying magnetic field in the reverse direction. = 7.93 × 105 Am–1.
Example - 42 (iv) The magnetising current Im is the additional current that
needs to be passed through the windings of the solenoid in
A magnetic needle has magnetic moment of 6.7 × 10–2 Am2 the absence of the core, which would produce a B value as
and moment of inertia of 7.5 × 10–6 kg m2. It performs 10
in the presence of the core. Thus,
complete oscillations in 6.70 s. What is the magnitude of
the magnetic field ? B = 0 n (I’ + Im)
Sol. Here, M = 6.7 × 10–2 Am2, I = 7.5 × 10–6 kg m2 1.0 = 4 × 10–7 × 1000 (2 + Im)
6.70 1.0
Time for one oscillation, T 0.67 s ; B ? Im 2 796 2 794 A
10 4 10 4
I 4 2 I Example - 45
From T* 2 ;B
MB MT 2
A magnetic needle free to rotate in a vertical plane, orients
4 22 / 7 7.5 10 6
2
0.01 T itself with its axis vertical at a certain place on the earth.
6.7 102 0.67
2
What are the values of
(a) Horizontal component of earth’s field ?
Example - 41
(b) angle of dip at this place.
The susceptibility of magnesium at 300 K is 1.2 × 10–5.
At what temperature will the susceptibility be equal to Sol. H = 0 and = 90º.
1.44 × 10–5 ? The place will be magnetic pole of earth.
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM
47
Example - 46 Example - 47
In the magnetic meridian of a certain place, the horizontal A ship is to reach a place 10º south of west. In what
component of the earth’s magnetic field is 0.26 G and dip direction should it be steered if declination at the place
angle is 60º. What is the magnetic field of earth at this is 17º west ?
location ?
Sol. Here, H = 0.26 G, = 60º, B = ? Sol. As the ship is to reach a place 10º south of west i.e. along
OA, in the figure, therefore, it should be steered west of
As H = B cos
(magnetic) north at an angle of (90 – 17 + 10) = 83º.
H 0.26 0.26
B 0.52 G
cos cos 60º 1/ 2
SCAN CODE
Magnetism
MAGNETISM 48
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Biot Savart's Law 7. A current I flowing through the sides of an equilateral triangle
of side a. The magnitude of the magnetic field at the centroid
1. An element d dxiˆ (where dx = 1 cm) is placed at the of the triangle is
origin and carries a large current I = 10A. What is the
magnetic field on the y-axis at a distance of 0.5 m ? 2 0 I 3 3 0 I
(a) (b)
ˆ
(a) 2 108 kT ˆ
(b) 4 108 kT a 2a
ˆ
(c) 2 108 kT ˆ
(d) 4 108 kT 90 I 2 2 0 I
(c) (d)
2. A current carrying power line carries current from west to 2a 2a
east. The direction of magnetic field 1m above the power 8. A long, straight, solid metal wire of radius 2 mm carries a
line will be current uniformly distributed over its circular cross-section.
(a) east to west (b) west to east The magnetic field induction at a distance 2 mm from its axis
(c) south to north (d) north to south is B. Then the magnetic field induction at distance 1 mm from
axis will be
Magnetic Induction Due to Different Current
Carrying Conductors Configurations (a) B (b) B/2
3. A current of i ampere flows along an infinitely long straight (c) 2B (d) 4B
thin walled tube, then the magnetic induction at any point 9. The magnetic flux density B at a distance r from a long straight
inside the tube is rod carrying a steady current varies with r as shown in figure
(a) infinite (b) zero
B B
0 2i 0i0
(c) tesla (d) tesla
4r 2r
4. A circular coil A of radius r carries current I. Another circular
coil B of radius 2r carries current of I. The magnetic fields (a) (b)
at the centres of the circular coils are in the ratio of
O r O
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 r
(c) 1 : 1 (d) 2 : 1 B B
5. A circular conducting ring of radius R is connected to two
exterior straight wires ending at two ends of a diameter.
The current I split into unequal portions while passing
through the ring as shown. What is magnetic field (c) (d)
induction at the centre of the ring?
O r O r
I/4
O 10. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They
I R I carry steady equal current flowing out of the plane of the
paper as shown. The variation of the magnetic field along
the line XX’ is given by
3I/4
I I
(a) 0 (b) 0
4R 8R
0 I (a)
(c) (d) zero
3R
6. The magneitc field due to a current carrying circular loop
of radius 3 cm at a point on the axis at a distance of 4 cm
from the centre is 54 T. What will be its value at the
centre of the loop ?
(a) 250 T (b) 150 T (b)
(c) 125 T (d) 75 T
MAGNETISM 49
Magnetic Induction Due to Extended Current Configurations
13. A toroidal solenoid has 3000 turns and a mean radius of 10
cm. It has soft iron core of relative permeability 2000. What
is the magnitude of magnetic field in the core when a current
(c) of 1 A is passed through the solenoid.
(a) 1.2 T (b) 12 T
(c) 5.6 T (d) 4.5 T
14. A long solenoid is formed by winding 20 turns/cm. The
current necessary to produce a magnetic field of 20 milli
tesla inside the solenoid will be aproximately
(d)
(a) 1.0 A (b) 2.0 A
(c) 4.0 A (d) 8.0 A
11. The magnitude of the magnetic field (B) due to loop ABCD 15. A long solenoid has 800 turns per metre length of solenoid.
at the origin (O) is : A current of 1.6 A flows through it. The magnetic induction
at the end of the solenoid on its axis is
(a) 16 × 10–4 tesla (b) 8 × 10–4 tesla
(c) 32 × 10–4 tesla (d) 4 × 10–4 tesla
16. If a current is passed in a spring, it
(a) gets compressed
(b) gets expanded
(c) oscillates
(a) zero
(d) remains unchanged
0 b a 17. A thin circular disk of radius R is uniformly charged with
(b) density > 0 per unit area. The disk rotates about its axis
24 ab
with a uniform angular speed . The magnetic moment of
the disck is :
0 I b a 4 4
(a) 2R (b) R
4 ab
(c)
R 4 R 4
0I (c) (d)
(d) 2 b a a b 2 4
4 3
Ampere's Law
12. Consider two thin identical conducting wires covered with 18. A horizontal overhead powerline is at a height of 4m from
very thin insulating material. One of the wires is bent into the ground and carries a current of 100 A from east to
a loop and produces magnetic field B1, at its centre when west. The magnetic field directly below it on the ground is
a current I passes through it. The second wire is bent into –7 –1
(0 = 4 × 10 TmA )
a coil with three identical loops adjacent to each other and
–7
produces magnetic field B2 at the centre of the loops when (a) 2.5 × 10 T, southward
current 1/3 passes through it. The ratio B1 : B2 is: –6
(b) 5 × 10 T, northward
(a) 1 : 3 (b) 9 : 1 –6
(c) 5 × 10 T, southward
(c) 1 : 9 (d) 1 : 1
–7
(d) 2.5 × 10 T, northward
MAGNETISM 50
19. A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long, 25. Proton, deuteron and alpha particles of same kinetic energy
straight, thin walled pipe. Then are moving in circular trajectories in a constant magnetic
(a) the magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe field. The radii of proton, deuteron and alpha particle are
respectively rp, rd and ra. Which one of the following relation
(b) the magnetic field is different at different points inside
is correct ?
the pipe
(c) the magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero (a) r = rp = rd (b) r = rp < rd
(d) the magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the (c) r > rd > rp (d) r = rd > rp
same, but not zero 26. An electron has a circular path of radius 0.01 m in a
perpendicular magnetic induction 10–3 T. The speed of the
Electromagnetic Interactions electron is nearly
20. If a charged particle is describing a circle of radius r in a (a) 1.76 × 104 m/s (b) 1.76 × 106 m/s
magnetic field with a time period T, then (c) 3.52 × 106 m/s (d) 7.04 × 106 m/s
(a) T 2 r 3 (b) T 2 r 27. The current in wire is directed towards east and the wire is
placed in magnetic field directed towards north. The force
(c) T r 2 (d) T r 0 on the wire is
(a) vertically upwards (b) vertically downwards
21. A deutron of kinetic energy 50 keV is describing a circular
orbit of radius 0.5 metre in a plane perpendicular to magnetic (c) due south (d) due east
field B . The kinetic energy of the proton that describes a 28. A charged particle enters a uniform magnetic field with
circular orbit of radius 0.5 metre in the same plane with the velocity vector at an angle of 45º with the magnetic field. The
pitch of the helical path is p. The radius of the helix will be
same B is
p p
(a) 200 keV (b) 100 keV (a) (b)
2
(c) 50 keV (d) 25 keV p
22. A bar magnet of length 3 cm has a point A and B along axis (c) 2p (d)
2
at a distance of 24 cm and 48 cm on the opposite ends. Ratio
of magnetic fields at these points will be Magnetic Force on Current Carrying Conductors
29. A metal wire of mass m slides without friction on two rails
placed at a distance l apart. The track lies in a uniform vertical
magnetic field B. A constant current I flows along the rails
across the wire and back down the other rail. The acceleration
(a) 8 (b) 3
of the wire is
(c) 4 (d) 1/ 2 2 BmI
(a) (b) mBIl
23. The time period of a charged particle undergoing a circular
motion in a uniform magnetic field is independent of its BI mI
(c) (d)
(a) speed (b) mass m B
30. A straight horizontal wire of mass 10 mg and length 1 m
(c) charge (d) magnetic induction carries a current of 2 ampere .What minimum magnetic field
B should be applied in the region so that the magnetic
24. A charged particle of mass m and charge q travels on a force on the wire may balance its weight.
circular path of radius r that is perpendicular to a magnetic (a) 2.45 × 10-4 T (b) 4.9 × 10-4 T
field B. The time taken by the particle to complete one (c) 4.9 × 10-5 T (d) 9.8 × 10-4 T
revolution is
31. The forces existing between two parallel current carrying
conductors is F. If the current in each conductor is doubled,
2mq 2q B2
then the value of force will be
(a) (b)
B m
(a) 2F (b) 4F
2qB 2m (c) 5F (d) F/2
(c) (d)
m qB
MAGNETISM 51
32. Two parallel wires carry currents of 20 A and 40 A in 36. A current I1 carrying wire AB is placed near an another long
opposite directions. Another wire carrying current of 20 A wire CD carrying current I2. Figure. If free to move, wire AB
and anti-parallel to 20A is placed midway between the two will have
wires .The magnetic force on this wire will be
(a) towards 20 A
(b) towards 40 A
(c) perpendicular to plane of wires
(d) zero
33. Through two parallel wires A and B, 10A and 2A of currents
are passed respectively in opposite directions. If the wire
A is infinitely long and the length of the wire B is 2m, then (a) rotational motion only
force on the conductor B, which is situated at 10 cm
distance from A, will be (b) translational motion only
(c) rotational as well as translational motion
(a) 8 × 10–7 N (b) 8 × 10–5 N
(d) neither rotational nor translational motion
(c) 4 × 10–7 N (d) 4 × 10–5 N 37. A charged particle moves through a magnetic field
perpendicular to its direction. Then
34. Two thin, long, parallel wires, separated by a distance d
(a) the momentum changes but the kinetic energy is constant
carry a current of I ampere in the same direction. They will
(b) both momentum and kinetic energy of the particle are not
0 I2 constant
(a) attract each other with a force of 2d
(c) both momentum and kinetic energy of the particle are
0 I2 constant
(b) repel each other with a force of 2d
(d) kinetic energy changes but the momentum is constant
0I2 38. Wires 1 and 2 carrying currents I1 and I2 respectively are
(c) attract each other with a force of 2d 2
inclined at an angle to each other. What is the force on a
small element dl of wire 2 at a distance r from wire 1 (as
0I2 shown in figure) due to the magnetic field of wire 1 ?
(d) repel each other with a force of 2d 2
1 2
35. Three straight parallel current carrying conductors are
shown in the figure. The force experienced by the middle i1
conductor of length 25 cm is: i2
r
dl
0
(a) I I dl tan
2r 1 2
0
(b) I I dl sin
2r 1 2
0
(a) Zero (b) 6 × 10–4 N toward left (c) I I dl cos
2r 1 2
(c) 9 × 10–4 N toward left (d) 3 × 10–4 N toward right
(d) None of these
MAGNETISM 52
Motion of a Charged Particle in Electromagnetic Field A Closed Current Carrying Coil Placed in Magnetic Field
39. An electron is moving along positive x axis. A uniform 44. Due to the presence of the current I1 at the origin
electric field exists towards negative y axis. What should
(a) The forces on AB and DC are zero
be the directions of the magnetic field of suitable magnitude
so that net force on the electron is zero? (b) The forces on AD and BC are zero
(c) The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by
(a) positive y axis (b) positive z axis
0 II1
(c) negative z axis (d) negative y axis.
2 b a a b
4 3
40. A uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field are
pointed in the same direction. If an electron is projected in (d) The magnitude of the net force on the loop is given by
the same direction, the electron
0 II1
(a) velocity will increase in magnitude (b – a)
24ab
(b) velocity will decrease in magnitude
Magnetic Moment
(c) will turn to its left
45. A wire of length L metre carrying a current I ampere is bent
(d) will turn to its right in the form of a circle. Its magnitude of magnetic moment
will be
41. In a region, steady and uniform electric and magnetic fields
(a) IL/4p (b) I2L2/4p
are present. These two fields are parallel to each other. A
charged particle is released from rest in this region. The (c) I2L/8p (d) IL2/4p
path of the particle will be a 46. A current of 2 ampere is passed in a coil of radius 0.5 m and
number of turns 20. The magnetic moment of the coil is
(a) helix (b) straight line
(a) 0.314 Am2 (b) 3.14 A–m2
(c) ellipse (d) circle
(c) 314 A–m2 (d) 31.4 A–m2
42. A charged particle with charge q enters a region of constant,
47. A steel wire of length l has a magnetic moment M. It is bent
uniform and mutually orthogonal fields E and B with a into L shape from the middle. The new magnetic moment is
velocity v perpendicular to both E and B , and comes out (a) M (b) M / 2
without any change in magnitude or direction of v . Then
(c) M/2 (d) 2M
Classical Magnetism
B E 48. If an electron and a proton having same momenta enter
(a) v E 2 (b) v B 2
B B perpendicularly to a magnetic field, then
(a) curved path of electron and proton will be same (ignoring
B E the sense of revolution)
(c) v E (d) v B 2
E2 E (b) they will move undeflected
–18
43. A particle of charge – 16 × 10 C moving with velocity (c) curved path of electron is more curved than that of proton
–1
10 ms along the x-axis enters a region where a magnetic (d) path of proton is more curved
field of induction B is along the y-axis and an electric field of 49. A thin rectangular bar magnet suspended freely has period
4 –1
magnitude 10 Vm is along the negative z-axis. If the of oscillation of 4 seconds. What will be period of oscillation
charged particle continues moving along the x-axis, the if the magnet is broken into two halves; each having length
magnitude of B is half of original; and one piece is made to oscillate in the
3 2 5 2 same field.
(a) 10 Wb/m (b) 10 Wb/m
16 2 –3 2 (a) 2 s (b) 3 s
(c) 10 Wb/m (d) 10 Wb/m
(c) 1 s (d) 4 s
MAGNETISM 53
50. Of the following figure, the lines of magnetic induction due 55. An iron rod of length 20 cm and diameter 1 cm is placed
to a magnet SN, are given by inside a solenoid on which the number of turns is 600. The
relative permeability of the rod is 1000. If a current of 0.5 A is
placed in the solenoid, then the magnetisation of the rod
will be
(a) 2.997 × 102 A/m (b) 2.997 × 103 A/m
(1) (2) (c) 2.997 × 104 A/m (d) 2.997 × 105 A/m
56. The magnetization in the absence of the core will be
(a) 2400 A/m (b) 2.3 × 104 A/m
(c) 7.94 × 10 A/m
5
(d) zero
57. There are 1000 turns /m in a Rowland’s ring and a current of
2A is flowing in the windings .The value of magnetic
induction produced is found to be 1.0T.When no core is
present then magnetizing field produced in the ring will be
(a) 1000 A/m (b) 1400 A/m
(3) (4)
(c) 2000 A/m (d) 2400A/m
58. A solenoid has core of a material with relative permeability
400.The winding of the solenoid are insulated from the core
and carry a current of 2 ampere. If the number of turns is
1000 per meter, what is magnetic flux density inside the
(a) 1 (b) 2
core?
(c) 3 (d) 4 (a) 0.4T (b) 0.5 T
51. The magnetic induction along the axis of an air cored (c) 0.7 T (d) 1.0T
solenoid is 0.03 T. On placing an iron core inside the 59. The mass of iron rod is 80 gm and its magnetic moment is
solenoid the magnetic induction becomes 1.5T .The relative 10A.m2.If the density of iron is 8 gm/cc, then the value of
permeability of iron core will be intensity of magnetization will be
(a) 12 (b) 40 (a) 106A/m (b) 3000 A/m
(c) 50 (d) 300 (c) 10 A/m
5
(d) 1A/m
52. A sensitive magnetic instrument can be shielded very 60. The magnetic susceptibility of a material of a rod is 499.
effectively from outside magnetic field by placing it Permeability of vacuum is 4p × 10 –7 H/m. Absolute
inside a box of permeability of the material of the rod in henry/meter is
(a) Teak wood (a) p × 10–4 (b) 4p × 10–4
(c) 3p × 10–4 (d) 2p × 10–4
(b) plastic material
61. The coercivity of a bar magnet is 4000A/m .In order to
(c) A metal of low magnetic permeability demagnetize it is placed inside a solenoid of length 12 cm
(d) A metal of high magnetic permeability and having 60 turns. What current should be passed
53. The relative permeability of the material will be through the solenoid?
(a) 2A (b) 4A
(a) 397.7 (b) 448.5
(c) 8A (d) 16A
(c) 533 (d) 657
62. Magnetic susceptibility is negative for
54. A magnetising field of 2 × 103 amp/m produces a magnetic (a) Paramagnetic material only
flux density of 8p tesla in an iron rod. The relative permeability
(b) Diamagnetic material only
of the rod will be
(c) Ferromagnetic material only
(a) 102 (b) 100
(d) Paramagnetic and Ferromagnetic materials
(c) 103 (d) 104
MAGNETISM 54
63. The intensity of magnetization in the presence of core will
(c) 2B0 (d) B02
be
(a) 1000 A/m (b) 2.3 × 104 A/m 70. Agonic line is that curve at which
(c) 7.94 × 10 A/m
5
(d) 4.3 × 10-5 A/m (a) total intensity of earth ‘s magnetic field is same
64. A uniform magnetic field parallel to the plane of paper,
(b) the angle of dip is same
existed in space initially directed from left to right. When
a bar of soft iron is placed in the field parallel to it, the (c) angle of declination is same
lines of force passing through it will be represented by (d) magnetic declination is zero
figure
71. The magnetic lines of force due to horizontal component
of earth’s magnetic field will be
(a) elliptical
(A) (B) (b) circular
(c) horizontal and parallel
(d) curved
Numerical Type Questions
72. A charge 4 C enters in a region of uniform magnetic field
(C) (D) with a velocity (4iˆ 7 ˆj )m / s experiences a force
ˆˆ)N. Find the value of C.
(5iˆ Cj
(a) A (b) B 73. An electron beam passes through a magnetic field of
(c) C (d) D
magnetic induction 2 10 3 T and an electric field of
Terrestrial Magnetism
65. The total intensity of the Earth’s magnetic field at equator strength 3.4 104 V / m both acting simultaneously in
is 5 units. What is its value at the poles ? mutually perpendicular directions. If the path of electrons
(a) 5 (b) 4 remains undeviated, calculate the speed of the electrons. If
the electric field is removed, what will be the radius of
(c) 3 (d) 2
curvature of the trajectory of the electron path after 2 s?
66. At a certain place, horizontal component of Earth’s field is 74. A circular coil of wire 8 cm in diameter has 12 turns and
3 times the vertical component. The angle of dip at this carries a current of 5A. The coil is placed in a field where
place is magnetic induction is 0.6T. What is the maximum torque on
(a) 0 (b) p/3 the coil?
75. A solid sphere of radius R, uniformly charged with a charge
(c) p/6 (d) none of the above
Q is rotating about its central axis at angular speed Find
67. In a magnetic meridian of a certain place, horizontal com- the magnetic moment of this rotating sphere.
ponent of earth’s field is 0.25G and the angle of dip is 76. A current i = 1 A circulates in a round thin wire loop of
60o.What is the magnetic field of the earth at this location. radius r = 100 mm. Find the magnetic induction. At the
(a) 0.5G (b) 0.25 G centre of the loop
(c) 0. 25 3 G (d) none of these
68. The angles of dip at the poles and the equator respectively
are
(a) 30°, 60° (b) 90°, 0°
(c) 30°, 90° (d) 0°, 0°
69. At a certain place, the horizontal component of the earth’s
magnetic field is B0 and the angle of dip is 45°. The total
intensity of the field at that place will be
(a) B0 (b) 2 B0
MAGNETISM 55
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. Two long current carrying thin wires, both with current I, If there is a uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T in the positive
are held by insulating threads of length L and are in z direction, in which orientations the loop would be in (i)
equilibrium as shown in the figure, with threads making stable equilibrium and (ii) unstable equilibrium ? (2015)
an angle ‘’ with the vertical. If wires have mass per unit (a) (B) and (D), respectively
length then the value of I is : (b) (B) and (C), respectively
(g = gravitational acceleration) (2015) (c) (A) and (B), respectively
(d) (A) and (C), respectively
3. Two coaxial solenoids of different radii carry current I in
the same direction. Let F1 be the magnetic force on the
inner solenoid due to the outer one and F2 be the
magnetic force on the outer solenoid due to the inner one.
Then :
(a) F1 is radially inwards and F2 = 0 (2015)
(b) F1 = F2 = 0
gL gL
(a) 2 tan (b) tan (c) F1 is radially outwards and F2 = 0
0 0
(d) F1 is radially inwards and F2 is radially outwards
gL gL
(c) sin cos (d) 2 sin cos 4. Two long straight parallel wires, carrying (adjustable)
0 0 current I1 and I2, are kept at a distance d apart. If the force
‘F’ between the two wires is taken as ‘positive’ when the
2. A rectangular loop of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carrying a
wires repel each other and ‘negative’ when the wires attract
current I of 12 A is placed in different orientations as shown
each other, the graph showing the dependence of ‘F’, on
in the figures below :
the product I1I2, would be : (2015 Online)
(A)
(a) (b)
(B) (c) (d)
5. A short bar magnet is placed in the magnetic meridian of
the earth with north pole pointing north. Neutral points
are found at a distance of 30 cm from the magnet on the
(C) EastWest line, drawn through the middle point of the
magnet. The magnetic moment of the magnet is Am2 is
close to : (2015 Online)
(Given = 10 in SI units and B H = Horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field = 3.6 × 10 Tesla)
(D) (a) 14.6 (b) 19.4
(c) 9.7 (d) 4.9
MAGNETISM 56
6. Two identical wires A and B, each of length ‘l’, carry the
same current I. Wire A is bent into a circle of radius R and
wire B is bent to form a square of side ‘a’. If BA and BB are
the values of magnetic field at the centres of the circle and
BA
square respectively, then the ratio B is : (2016)
B
2 2
(a) (b)
16 2 16
2 2
(c) (d)
8 2 8
(a) 1 0 vB, 2 0 vB
7. Hysteresis loops for two magnetic materials A and B are
given below :
0 v B vB
(b) 1 , 2 0
2 2
(c) 1 2 0 vB
0 vB vB
(d) 1 , 2 0
2 2
10. A fighter plane of length 20 m, wing span (distance from
tip of one wing to the tip of the other wing) of 15 m and
These materials are used to make magnets for electric height 5m is flying towards east over Delhi. Its speed is
generators, transformer core and electromagnet core. Then 240 ms–1. The earth’s magnetic field over Delhi is 5 × 10–5 T
it is proper to use : (2016) with the declination angle ~ 0º and dip of such that sin
(a) A for electromagnets and B for electric generators. 2
. If the voltage developed is V between the lower
(b) A for transformers and B for electric generators. 3 B
and upper side of the plane and VW between the tips of the
(c) B for electromagnets and transformers.
wings then VB and VW are close to :(2016 Online Set-2)
(d) A for electric generators and transformers. (a) VB = 45 mV; VW = 120 mV with right side of pilot at
higher voltage.
8. A magnetic dipole is acted upon by two magnetic fields
which are inclined to each other at an angle of 75°. One of (b) VB = 45 mV; VW = 120 mV with left side of pilot at higher
the fields has a magnitude of 15 mT. The dipole attains voltage
stable equilibrium at an angle of 30° with this field. The (c) VB = 40 mV; VW = 135 mV with right side of pilot at high
magnitude of the other field (in mT ) is close to voltage
(2016 Online Set-1) (d) VB = 40 mV; VW = 135 mV with left side of pilot at higher
voltage
(a) 11 (b) 36 11. Apparent angles of dip of a magnetic needle due to earth’s
(c) 1 (d) 1060 magnetic field at a particular location on earth are θ and Õ
in two vertical planes which are perpendicular to each
9. Consider a thin metallic sheet perpendicular to the plane other, then true angle of dip (δ) at that location is:
of the paper moving with speed ‘v’ in a uniform magnetic
(2016 Online Set-2)
field B going into the plane of the paper (See figure). If
charge densities 1 and 2 are induced on the left and (a) cot 2 cot 2 cot 2 (b) tan 2 tan 2 tan 2
right surfaces, respectively, of the sheet then (ignore fringe
effects) : (2016 Online Set-2) (c) (d) cos 2 cos 2 cos 2
MAGNETISM 57
12. A magnetic needle of magnetic moment 6.7 102 Am 2 17. An electron, a proton and an alpha particle having the
same kinetic energy are moving in circular orbits of radii
and moment of inertia 7.5 106 kg m2 is performing
re, rp, r respectively in uniform magnetic field B. The
simple harmonic oscillations in a magnetic field of 0.01 T.
Time taken for 10 complete oscillations is: (2017) relation between re, rp, r is : (2018)
(a) 6.65 s (b) 8.89 s (a) re rp r (b) re r rp
(c) 6.98 s (d) 8.76 s
13. A magnetic dipole in a constant magnetic field has : (2017) (c) re rp = r (d) re rp =r
(a) maximum potential energy when the torque is maximum. 18. The dipole moment of a circular loop carrying a current I,
is m and the magnetic field at the centre of the loop is B.
(b) zero potential energy when the torque is minimum.
When the dipole moment is double by keeping the current
(c) zero potential energy when the torque is maximum. constant, the magnetic field at the centre of loop is B2.
(d) minimum potential energy when the torque is maximum.
B1
14. In a certain region static electric and magnetic fields exist. The ratio is. (2018)
B2
The magnetic field is given by B B0 ˆi 2ˆj 4 kˆ . If a 1
(a) 2 (b)
2
test charge moving with a velocity v v 0 3iˆ ˆj 2 kˆ (c) 2 (d) 3
experiences no force in that region, then the electric field 19. A Helmholtz coil has a pair of loops, each with N turns and
in the region, in SI units, is : (2017 Online Set-1) radius R. They are placed coaxially at distance R and the
same current I flows through the loops in the same
(a) E v0 B0 (3iˆ 2ˆj 4k)
ˆ (b) E v B ( ˆi ˆj 7k)
0 0
ˆ
direction. The magnitude of magnetic field at P, midway
between the centres A and C, is given by [Refer to figure
(c) E v0 B0 (14jˆ 7k)
ˆ (d) E v0 B0 (14ˆj 7k)
ˆ
given below] : (2018 Online Set-1)
15. A negative test charge is moving near a long straight wire
carrying a current. The force acting on the test charge is
parallel to the direction of the current. The motion of the
charge is: (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) away from the wire
(b) towards the wire
N 0 I N 0 I
(c) parallel to the wire along the current 1
(a) (b) 3
(d) parallel to the wire opposite to the current 52 R 52 R
16. A uniform magnetic field B of 0.3 T is along the positive Z-
direction. A rectangular loop (abcd) of sides 10 cm × 5 cm 4N 0 I 4N 0 I
carries a current 1 to 12 A. Out of the following different (c) 1 (d) 3
orientations which one corresponds to stable equilibrium ? 52 R 52 R
(2017 Online Set-2) 20. The B-H curve for a ferromagnet is shown in the figure.
The ferromagnet is placed inside a long solenoid with
1000 turns/cm. The current that should be passed in the
solenoid to demagnetise the ferromagnet completely is :
(2018 Online Set-1)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(a) 1 mA (b) 2 mA
(c) 20A (d) 40A
MAGNETISM 58
21. A current of 1A is flowing on the sides of an equilateral 26. Two wires A & B are carrying currents I1 and I2as shown
in the figure. The separation between them is d. A third
triangle of side 4.5×10-2 m. The magnetic field at the
wire C carrying a current I is to be kept parallel to them at
centre of the triangle will be : (2018 Online Set-2) a distance x from A such that the net force acting on it is
zero. The possible values of x are : (2019)
(a) 2×10-5 Wb / m 2 (b) Zero
(c) 8×10-5 Wb / m 2 (d) 4×10-5 Wb / m2
22. A charge q is spread uniformly over an insulated loop of
radius r. If it is rotated with an angular velocity with
respect to normal axis then the magnetic moment of the
loop is : (2018 Online Set-3)
4
(a) xqr 2 (b) qr 2
3
3 2 1
(c) qr (d) q r 2
2 2
23. A circular coil having N turns and radius r carries a current
I I2
(a) x 1 d and x d
I. It is held in the XZ plane in a magnetic field Biˆ. The I1 I 2 I1 I 2
torque on the coil due to the magnetic field is: (2019)
I2 I2
(b) x d and x d
Br 2 I I1 I 2 I 1 I 2
(a) (b) B r 2 IN
N
I I
(c) x d and x
1 2
d
B r 2 I 1 2
I I 1 I2
I
(c) (d) Zero
N I1d
x
24. A rectangular coil (Dimension 5cm 2.5cm ) with 100
(d)
I1 I 2
turns, carrying a current of 3 A in the clockwise direction, 27. The magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of an
is kept centered at the origin and in the X – Z plane. A equilateral triangular loop of side 1 m which is carrying a
magnetic field of 1 T is applied along X-axis. If the coil is
current of 10 A is: [ Take 0 4 10 7 NA2 ](2019)
tilted through 45° about Z-axis, then the torque on the
coil is:
(2019) (a) 18 T (b) 9 T
(a) 0.38 Nm (b) 0.55 Nm (c) 3 T (d) 1 T
(c) 0.42 Nm (d) 0.27 Nm
28. A square loop is carrying a steady current I and the
25. A moving coil galvanometer has a coil with 175 turns and magnitude of its magnetic dipole moment is m. If this
area 1cm2. It uses a torsion band of torsion constant square loop is changed to a circular loop and it carries the
same current, the magnitude of the magnetic dipole moment
10 6 N-m/rad. The coil is placed in a magnetic field B of circular loop will be: (2019)
parallel to its plane. The coil deflects by 1° for a current of
1 mA. The value of B (in Tesla) is approximately: (2019) m 3m
(a) (b)
(a) 104 (b) 102
2m 4m
(c) 101 (d) 103 (c) (d)
MAGNETISM 59
29. A thin ring of 10 cm radius carries a uniformly distribution 33. An infinitely long current carrying wire and a small current
charge. The ring rotates at a constant angular speed of 40 carrying loop are in the plane of the paper as shown. The
rad s-1 about its axis, perpendicular to its plane. If the radius of the loop is a and distanceof its centre from the
magnetic field at its centre is 3.8 × 10–9 T, then the charge wire is d (d >>a). If the loop applies a force F on the wire
carried by the ring is close to ( 0 4 10 7 N/A 2 ) then: (2019)
(2019)
(a) 2 × 10–6 C (b) 3 × 10–5 C
(c) 4 × 10–5 C (d) 7 × 10–6 C
30. A magnetic compass needle oscillates 30 times per minute
at a place where the dip is 45°, and 40 times per minute
where the dip is 30°. If B1 and B2 are respectively the
magnetic field due to the earth and the two places, then
n
ratio B1/B2 is , where n is: (2019)
8 6 a
31. Find the magnetic field at point P due to a straight line (a) F = 0 (b) F
segment AB of length 6 cm carrying a current of 5A. (see d
figure) 0 4 107 N A2 (2019)
(c) F
a2
3
a
(d) F
2
d d
34. A bar magnet is demagnetized by inserting it inside a
solenoid of length 0.2 m, 100 turns, and carrying a current
of 5.2 A. The coercivity of the bar magnet is 100 n A/m,
where n is: (2019)
35. A particle having the same charge as of electron moves in
a circular path of radius 0.5 cm under the influence of a
magnetic field of 0.5T. If an electric field of l00V/m makes
it to move in a straight path, then the mass of the particle
is (Given charge of electron = 1.6 × 10-19C) (2019)
(a) 9.1 × 10–31 kg (b) 1.6 × 10–27 kg
(c) 1.6 × 10–17 kg (d) 2.0 × 10–24 kg
(a) 2.0 10 T 5 5
(b) 1.5 10 T
36. At some location on earth, the horizontal component of
(c) 3.0 10 5 T (d) 2.5 10 5 T earth’s magnetic field is 18 × 10"6 T. At this location,
magnetic needle of length 0.12 m and pole strength 1.8
32. A current loop, having two circular arcs joined by two Am is suspended from its mid-point using a thread, it
radial lines is as shown in the figure. It carries a current of makes 45° angle with horizontal in equilibrium. To keep
10 A. The magnetic field at point O will be close to: this needle horizontal, the vertical force that should be
(2019) applied at one of its ends is: (2019)
(a) 3.6 105 N (b) 1.8 105 N
(c) 1.3 10 5 N (d) 6.5 105 N
37. A hoop and a solid cylinder of same mass and radius are
made of a permanent magnetic material with their magnetic
moment parallel to their respective axes. But the magnetic
moment of hoop is twice of solid cylinder. They are placed
in a uniform magnetic field in such a manner that their
magnetic moments make a small angle with the field. If the
oscillation periods of hoop and cylinder are Th and Tc.
respectively, then: (2019)
(a) Th = Tc (b) Th = 2 Tc
(a) 1.0 × 10–7 T (b) 1.5 × 10–7 T
(c) 1.5 × 10-5 T (d) 1.0 × 10-5 T (c) Th = 1.5 Tc (d) Th = 0.5 Tc
MAGNETISM 60
38. A paramagnetic substance in the form of a cube with edge 41. A proton and an α-particle (with their masses in the ratio
1 cm has a magnetic dipole moment of 20 × 10–6 J/T when of 1: 4 and charges in the ratio 1:2) are accelerated from
a magnetic intensity of 60 × 103 A/m is applied. Its magnetic rest through a potential difference V. If a uniform magnetic
susceptibility is: (2019) field (B) is set up perpendicular to their velocities, the
(a) 3.3 × 10–2 (b) 4.3 × 10–2
ratio of the radii rp : r of the circular paths described by
(c) 2.3 × 10–2 (d) 3.3 × 10–4
39. The region between y = 0 and y = d contains a magnetic them will be (2019)
field B Bzˆ. A particle of mass m and charge q enters (a) 1: 2 (b) 1 : 2
mv
the region with a velocity v viˆ. If d = , the (c) 1 : 3 (d) c
2qB
acceleration of the charged particle at the point of its
42. A paramagnetic material has 1028 atoms/m3. Its magnetic
emergence at the other side is:
susceptibility at temperature 350 K is 2.8 × 10–4. Its
(2019)
susceptibility at 300 K is: (2019)
qvB 1 ˆ 3 ˆ (a) 3.267 × 10-4 (b) 3.672 × 10-4
i j
2
(a)
m 2 (c) 3.726 × 10-4 (d) 2.672 × 10-4
43. Magnetic materials used for making permanent magnets
qvB 3 ˆ 1 ˆ (P) and magnets in a transformer (T) have different
(b) – i j
m 2 2 properties of the following, which property best matches
for the type of magnet required ? (2020)
qvB ˆj iˆ (a) P : small retentivity, large coercivity
(c)
m 2 (b) P : Large retentivity, large coercivity
(c) T : Large retentivity, large coercivity
qvB iˆ ˆj
(d) (d) T : Large retentivity, small coercivity
m 2
40. A particle of mass m and charge q is in an electric and 44. A circular coil of radius 10 cm is placed in uniform magnetic
field of 3.0 × 10–5 T with its plane perpendicular to the field
magnetic field given by E 2iˆ 3 ˆj ; B 4 ˆj 6kˆ . initially. It is rotated at constant angular speed about an axis
The charged particle is shifted from the origin to the along the diameter of coil and perpendicular to magnetic field
point P (x = 1; y = 1) along a straight path. The magnitude so that it under-goes half of rotation in 0.2s. The maximum
of the total work done is (2019) value of EMF induced (in V) in thecoil will be close to
(a) 0.35 q (b) 5q the integer ……… (2020)
(c) 2.5 q (d) 0.15 q
MAGNETISM 61
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Objective Question (One Answer Correct)
0 i 0i
1. A wire is formed into a shape of two half circles connected (a) 4a 1 (b) 4a 1
by equal length sections as shown in figure. A current
flows in circuit clockwise as shown .What is the
magnitude of the magnetic field induction at the centre. 0i2 0i2
I R1
(c) 4a 2 1
(d) 4a 2 1
C
4. The unit vectors ˆi, ˆj and k̂ are as shown below. What
R2 will be the magnetic field at O in the following figure
I
0 R1.R 2 I 0 R1 R 2 I
(a) (b)
R 2 R1 4R 2 R 1
0 R1 R 2 I 0 R1 R 2 I
(c) (d)
4R 2 R1 2R1R 2
2. Consider a current carrying loop shown in figure formed
by radial lines and segments of circle whose centers are 0 i ˆ 0 i ˆ
at point P.What is the magnitude of magnetic field (a) 2 j (b) 2 j
4 a 2 4 a 2
induction at point P.
0 i ˆ 0 i ˆ
(c) 2 i (d) 2 k
4 a 2 4 a 2
i a 5. In figure, the conductors carry equal currents I. All straight
segments are very long and two circular loops have equal
60° radii. However current around loops have opposite
P senses. What is the ratio of magnetic fields at a and b at
b the centre of the loops.
0 I 1 1 0 I 1 1
(a) (b)
3 a b 6 a b
a
0 I 1 1 0 I 1 1 I I
(c) (d)
12 a b 4 a b
3. A current i flows through an infinitely long wire having
infinite bends as shown. The radius of first curved section b
is a and the radii of successive curved portions each I I
increases by a factor . The magnetic field at the point O is
Ba 1 Ba 2
(a) B 1 (b) B 2
b b
Ba 2 1 Ba 2 1
(c) B 2 1 (d) B 2
b b
MAGNETISM 62
6. The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil of radius 9. A non-conducting ring with radius of 10 cm is uniformly
r is times that due to a long straight wire at a distance r charged with total positive charge of 10 C. The ring
from it, for equal currents. Figure here shows three cases : rotates at constant angular speed of 20 rad/s about an
in all cases the circular part has radius r and straight ones axis passing through its centre perpendicular to plane of
are infinitely long. For same current the B field at the centre the ring. What is magnitude of the magnetic field on the
P in cases 1, 2, 3 have the ratio axis of the ring at 5 cm from the centre?
(a) 143 pT (b) 12 pT
P
(c) 9 pT (d) 2 pT
P
10. The ratio of the magnetic field at the centre of a current
(1)
(2) carrying circular wire and the magnetic field at the centre
of a square coil made from the same length of wire will be
P
2 2
(3)
(a) (b)
4 2 8 2
1
3 1 (c) (d)
(a) : : 2 2 4 2
2 2 4 2
11. What is the value of the magnetic field induction at the
3 1 point P mentioned in the figure?
(b) 1 : 1 :
2 2 4 2 d
I
(c) : :3
2 2 4
I d
1 3 1
(d) 1 : : r
2 2 4 4 2
P
7. A circular current carrying coil has a radius R. The distance I
from the centre of the coil on the axis where the magnetic
induction will be 1/8th to its value at the centre of the coil, is 0 I 3 2 0 I 3 3
(a) 4 2R d (b) 2 2R d
(a) R / 3 (b) R 3
(c) 2 3 R (d) 2R / 3 0 I 3 3 0 I 3 2
(c) 4 4R d (d) 3 4R d
8. Two circular coils X and Y have equal number of turns and
carry equal currents in the same sense and subtend same 12. The magnetic field due to a straight conductor of uniform
angle at point O. If the smaller coil X is midway between O cross section of radius a and carrying a steady current is
and Y, and we represent the magnetic field due to coil Y at represented by
O as By and that due to smaller coil X at O as Bx, then
B B
(a) (b)
r r
O a O a
B
B
By By
(a) 1 (b) 2
Bx Bx
(c) (d)
By1 By1
(c) (d) O r
Bx 2 Bx 4 a O a r
MAGNETISM 63
13. What is the magnetic field at O due to current carrying long 16. A current i is flowing in a straight conductor of length L.
wire, forming a loop as shown in figure? The magnetic induction at a point distant L/4 from its centre
will be
I 40i 0i
(a) (b)
5 L 2L
I 2I
a
0i
(c) (d) Zero
O 2L
I 3I
a a
17. A wire is bent into shape as shown in figure and magnetic
I 3 0 I
(a) 0 downwards (b) outwards field is measured at P1 when current in wire is I, the same
2a 2a
wire is then formed into shape shown in figure .Magnetic
0 I 3 0 I field is measured at P2 when current is again I . If total
(c) outwards (d) downwards
2a 2a length of the wire is same in each case .What is ratio of B1
14. Two thick wires and two thin wires, all of the same materials to B2.
and same length form a square in the three different ways 2l
P, Q and R as shown in figure with current connection
shown, the magnetic field at the centre of the square is l
I I I
zero in cases
P1
I I
P2
1 3 3
(a) (b)
2 2
8 2 16 2
(a) In P only (b) In P and Q only (c) (d)
2 5
(c) In Q and R only (d) P and R only 18. Figure shows the cross-sectional view of the hollow
15. Two long parallel wires carry currents I1=3.0 A and I2=3.0 cylindrical conductor with inner radius ‘R’ and outer radius
A, both directed into the plane of paper .What is the ‘2R’, cylinder carrying uniformly distributed current along
magnitude of magnetic field induction at the point P. it’s axis. The magnetic induction at point ‘P’ at a distance
3R/2 from the axis of the cylinder will be
I1
5 cm
P
13 cm
2R 3R/2
12 cm
I2
50i
(a) Zero (b)
72R
(a) 7.5 T (b) 4 T
7 0i 50i
(c) 3 T (d) 13 T (c) (d)
18R 36R
MAGNETISM 64
19. The correct curve between the magnetic induction (B) 23. An electron and a proton enter region of uniform magnetic
along the axis of a long solenoid due to current flow i in it field in a direction at right angles to the field with the
and distance x from one end is same kinetic energy. They describe circular paths of radius
re and rp respectively. Then
(a) re = rp
(b) re < rp
(a) (b) (c) re > rp
O O
(d) re may be less than or greater than rp depending on
the direction of the magnetic field
24. A particle of charge q and mass m moving with a velocity
v along the x-axis enters the region x > 0 with uniform
magnetic field B along the k̂ direction. The particle will
(c) (d)
penetrate in this region in the x-direction upto a distance
O O d equal to
mv
20. A 100 turn closely wound circular coil of radius 10 cm (a) Zero (b)
qB
carries a current of 3.2 ampere .The moment of inertia of
the coil is 0.1 kgm2.The coil is placed in a vertical plane 2mv
and is free to rotate about horizontal axis which coincides (c) (d) Infinity
qB
with its diameter. A uniform magnetic field of 2.0 T in
25. Two ions having masses in the ratio 1 : 1 and charges
horizontal direction exists such that plane of the coil is
1 : 2 are projected into uniform magnetic field
parallel to field .The coil rotates through an angle of 90o
perpendicular to the field with speeds in the ratio 2 : 3.
due to torque. What is the angular speed acquired by the
The ratio of the radii of circular paths along which the
coil when it has rotated by 90o. two particles move is
(a) 12 rad/s (b) 15 rad/s (a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
(c) 20 rad/s (d) 25 rad/s (c) 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
26. There is magnetic field acting perpendicular to plane
21. A proton (mass m and charge +e) and an particle
(mass 4m and charge +2e) are projected with the same of paper inwards. Particles in vacuum move in the
kinetic energy at right angles to the uniform magnetic plane of paper from left to right as shown. The paths
field. Which one of the following statements will be true are numbered as 1 to 3.Which statement is wrong.
(a) The –particle will bent in a circular path with a small
radius than that for the proton
1
× ××
(b) The radius of the path of the –particle will be greater ×
2 × × ×
×
than that of the proton
× × ××
(c) The –particle and the proton will be bent in a circular 3 × ×
path with the same radius
(a) 1 could be an –particle’s path
(d) The –particle and the proton will go through the
field in a straight line (b) 2 is for a neutron
(c) 3 is for an electron
22. If a proton, deutron and particle on being accelerated
by the same potential difference, enter perpendicular to (d) 3 is for a proton
the magnetic field, then the ratio of their kinetic energies is 27. An electron (q = 1.6 10–19 C) is moving at right angle to
the uniform magnetic field 3.534 10–5 T. The time taken by
(a) 1 : 2 : 2 (b) 2 : 2 : 1 the electron to complete a circular orbit is
(c) 1 : 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1 : 2 (a) 2 s (b) 4 s
(c) 3 s (d) 1 s
MAGNETISM 65
28. A particle of charge per unit mass is released from origin
× × ×
with a velocity of v v0 i in uniform magnetic field 5cm
B B0 k . If the particle passes through a point P (0, y, 0)
× × ×
and then y is equal to
× × ×
2v0 v0
cm
(a) B (b) B
15
0 0 × × ×
2v0 v0
(c) B (d) 2B × × ×
0 0
29.
6
When a proton has velocity v 2i 3j 10 m / s it (a) 14 (b) 15
(c) 16 (d) 18
experiences a force of F 1.28 1013 kN .When its
32. A proton accelerated by a potential difference 500 KV
velocity is along +z axis, it experiences a force along +x
moves though a transverse magnetic field of 0.51 T as
axis. What is magnetic field?
shown in figure. The angle through which the proton
(a) 0.4jT
(b) 0.4jT deviates from the initial direction of its motion is
(c) 0.4i T (d) 0.4k T
30. A particle with charge q, moving with a momentum p, enters
a uniform magnetic field normally. The magnetic field has
magnitude B and is confined to a region of width d, where
p
d , The particle is deflected by an angle in crossing
Bq
the field
× × × ×
× × × ×
B (a) 15° (b) 30°
p × × × ×
q (c) 45° (d) 60°
× × × ×
d 33. An electron is moving along the positive X-axis. You want to
× × × ×
apply a magnetic field for a short time so that the electron may
reverse its direction and move parallel to the negative X-axis.
Bqd p This can be done by applying the magnetic field along
(a) sin (b) sin
p Bqd (a) Y-axis (b) X-axis
(c) Y-axis only (d) none of these
Bp pd
(c) sin (d) sin
qd Bq 34. If a charge particle goes with uniform velocity in a region
containing electric and magnetic fields
31. A beam of singly ionized atoms of carbon each charge +e
all have the same speed and enter a mass spectrometer, (a) E must be perpendicular to B
as shown in figure .The ions strike the photographic plate
(b) v must not be perpendicular to E
12
in two different locations 5 cm apart .The C isotope 6
(c) v must be perpendicular to B
traces a path of smaller radius,15 cm. What is atomic mass
number of other isotope? (d) E must be equal to v B.
MAGNETISM 66
35. A charge particle is projected in the magnetic field of 39. A uniform magnetic field B and a uniform electric field E
act in a common region. An electron is entering this region
6i 5j 10 T . The acceleration of the particle is found
3
of space. The correct arrangement for it to escape
undeviated is
to be i 6j 10 ms . The value of is
6 2
E
E
(a) 5 (b) 6 B
B
(c) 10 (d) 12
v v
36. A charged particle q enters a region of uniform magnetic (a) (b)
field B (directed out of page as shown) and is deflected d
after travelling a horizontal distance a. The magnitude of B
E
the momentum of the particle is
v
(c) (d) v
B
E
40. A current of 5 ampere is flowing in a wire of length 1.5
metres. A force of 7.5 N acts on it when it is placed in a
uniform magnetic field of 2 Tesla. The angle between the
qB a 2 qBd magnetic field and the direction of the current is
(a) 2 d d (b)
2 (a) 30° (b) 45°
qBa (c) 60° (d) 90°
(c) (d) zero 41. A wire of length 1 m placed in x-z plane carries a current of
2
37. An electron enters a region where electrostatic field is 1 ampere .The coefficient of friction between the wire and
20N/C and magnetic field is 5T. If electron passes the surface is 0.2 and mass of the wire is 1 kg .The magnetic
undeflected through the region, then velocity of electron field of strength 2 T exists along positive y - axis . Then
will be choose the correct option.
(a) 0.25ms–1 (b) 2ms–1 (a) acceleration of wire is 0.5 m/s2
(c) 4ms–1 (d) 8ms–1 (b) wire will not move at all
38. A particle of charge q and mass m is moving along the x-axis (c) acceleration of wire is 1 m/s2
with a velocity v and enters a region of electric field E and (d) acceleration of wire is 2 m/s2
magnetic field B as shown in figure below for which figure 42. An elastic circular wire of length l carries a current I. It is
the net force on the charge may be zero
placed in a uniform magnetic field B (Out of paper) such
Y Y
that its plane is perpendicular to the direction of B . The
B E
wire will experience
v X v X
q q
(a) O (b) O
E B
Z Z
Y Y
E B E
v X v X
q q
(c) O (d) O B
(a) No force (b) A stretching force
B
(c) A compressive force (d) A torque
Z Z
MAGNETISM 67
43. Same current i = 2A is flowing in a wire frame as shown in 47. A current carrying rectangular coil is placed in a uniform
figure. The frame is a combination of two equilateral triangles magnetic field. In which orientation, the coil will not tend to
rotate
ACD and CDE of side 1m. It is placed in uniform magnetic
(a) The magnetic field is parallel to the plane of the coil
field B = 4T acting perpendicular to the plane of frame. The
magnitude of magnetic force acting on the frame is (b) The magnetic field is perpendicular to the plane of the coil
(c) The magnetic field is at 45o with the plane of the coil
A (d) Always in any orientation
× × × × × × × × 48. A wire of length L metre carrying a current of I ampere is
bent in the form of a circle. Its magnitude of magnetic moment
× × × × × × × ×
C D will be
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × × IL IL2
(a) (b)
× × × × × × × × 4 4
E
I 2 L2 I2 L
(c) (d)
(a) 24 N (b) Zero 4 4
(c) 16 N (d) 8 N 49. A thin circular wire carrying a current I has a magnetic moment
M. The shape of the wire is changed to a square and it carries
44. A uniform conducting wire ABC has a mass of 10g. A current of the same current. It will have a magnetic moment
2A flows through it. The wire is kept in a uniform magnetic field
B = 2T. The acceleration of the wire will be 4
(a) M (b) M
2
B 4
(c) M (d) M
4
50. An infinitely long, straight conductor AB is fixed and a current
is passed through it. Another movable straight wire CD of
finite length and carrying current is held perpendicular to it
and released. Neglect weight of the wire
(a) Zero
(b) 12ms–2 along y–axis
A
(c) 1.2 × 10–3ms–2 along y–axis i1
(d) 0.6 × 10 ms along y–axis
–3 –2
45. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic field.
The torque acting on it does not depend upon C D i2
(a) Shape of the loop (b) Area of the loop a
(c) Value of the current (d) Magnetic field
B
46. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is placed in a uniform
magnetic field B. The area enclosed by the loop is A. If there
are n turns in the loop, the torque acting on the loop is (a) The rod CD will move upward parallel to itself
given by (b) The rod CD will move downward parallel to itself
(a) niA B (b) niA B (c) The rod CD will move upward and turn clockwise at the
same time
1 1
(c)
n
iA B (d)
n
iA B (d) The rod CD will move upward and turn anti-clockwise at
the same time
MAGNETISM 68
51. Velocity and acceleration vector of a charged particle 55. A battery is connected between two pints A and B on the
circumference of a uniform conducting ring of radius r and
moving in a magnetic field at some instant are v 3iˆ 3jˆ resistance R. One of the arcs AB of the ring subtends an
angle at the centre. The value of the magnetic induction at
and acceleration a 2iˆ xjˆ then select the correct option. the centre due to the current in the ring is
(a) x = – 1.5 (a) proportional to (180° – )
(b) x = 2 (b) inversely proportional to r
(c) magnetic field is along Z axis (c) zero, only if (= 180°)
(d) zero for all values of
(d) speed of the particle is constant
56. A charged particle is released from rest in a region of steady and
52. A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long,
uniform electric and magnetic fields which are parallel to each
straight, thin-walled pipe. Then
other. The particle will move in a
(a) the magnetic field at all points inside the pipe is the (a) straight line (b) circle
same, but not zero
(c) helix (d) cycloid
(b) the magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero
57. A rectangular loop carrying a current i is situated near a
(c) the magnetic field is zero only on the axis of the pipe long straight wire such that the wire is parallel to one of the
(d) the magnetic field is different at different points inside sides of the loop and is in the plane of the loop. If steady
the pipe current I is established in the wire as shown in the figure,
the loop will
53. Two very long straight parallel wires carry steady currents I
and –I respectively. The distance between the wires is d. At
a certain instant of time, a point charge q is at a point
equidistant from the two wires in the plane of the wires. Its
instantaneous velocity v is perpendicular to this plane.
The magnitude of the force due to the magnetic field acting
on the charge at this instant is
0 Iqv 0 Iqv
(a) (b)
2d d
20 Iqv (a) rotate about an axis parallel to the wire
(c) (d) zero (b) move away from the wire
d
(c) move towards the wire
54. Figure shows a square loop ABCD with edge length a. The (d) remain stationary
resistance of the wire ABC is r and that of ADC is 2r. The 58. Two particles, each of mass m and charge q, are attached to
value of magnetic field at the centre of the loop assuming the two ends of a light rigid rod of length 2R. The rod is
uniform wire is rotated at constant angular speed about a perpendicular
B
axis passing through its centre. The ratio of the magnitudes
of the magnetic moment of the system and its angular
momentum about the centre of the rod is
A C (a) q/2m (b) q/m
O
i (c) 2q/m (d) q/m
Assertion Reason Type Questions
D
(a) Statement–1 is True, Statement–2 is True; Statement–2 is
2 0i 2 0i a correct explanation for Statement–1.
(a) (b)
3 a 3 a (b) Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is True; Statement–2 is
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–1.
2 0i 2 0i (c) Statement–1 is True; Statement–2 is False.
(c) (d)
a a (d) Statement–1 is False, Statement–2 is True.
MAGNETISM 69
59. Statement-1 : The poles of a magnet cannot be separated 65. Statement-1 : A charged particle is projected into a region
by breaking into two pieces. of magnetic field with certain speed. The kinetic energy
Statement-2 : When magnet is broken into two equal parts, of the charge particle will remain constant.
magnetic moment will be reduced to half. Statement-2 : Work done by the magnetic field on the
(a) A (b) B charged particle will be zero.
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B
60. Statement-1: Two long parallel conductors carrying (c) C (d) D
currents in the same direction experience a force of 66. Statement-1 : A linear solenoid carrying current is
attraction. equivalent to a bar magnet.
Statement-2 : The magnetic fields produced in the space Statement-2 : The magnetic lines of both are identical.
between them are in the opposite direction. (a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D
(c) C (d) D 67. Statement-1 : A proton moving vertically upwards enters
61. Statement-1 : A charged particle is moving in a circular a magnetic field directed towards South. It will be deflected
path with constant speed in uniform magnetic field .If we
towards east.
increase the speed of the particle three times its
acceleration will become nine times. Statement-2 : Direction of force can be determined by
Statement-2 : In a circular path with constant speed, Fleming’s left hand rule.
v2 (a) A (b) B
acceleration is given by .
R (c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B 68. Statement-1 : The magnetic field at the ends of a very
(c) C (d) D long solenoid carrying current is half of that at the centre
62. Statement-1 : Cyclotron is a device which is used to deep inside the solenoid.
accelerate the positive ions.
Statement-2 : If the solenoid is sufficient long the field
Statement-2 : Cyclotron frequency does not depend on
the velocity of the charged particle. within it is uniform.
(a) A (b) B (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (c) C (d) D
63. Statement-1 : When a charged particle is fired in a 69. Statement-1 : A magnetic field interacts with a moving
magnetic field the radius of the circular path is directly charge and not with stationary charge.
proportional to kinetic energy of the particle.
Statement-2 : A moving charge produces a magnetic field
Statement-2 : The centripetal force on a charge q provided around it.
by field will be qBv, where v is speed and B is the magnetic
field. (a) A (b) B
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D
(c) C (d) D Comprehension
64. Statement-1 : Magnetic field at a point on the surface of Passage : 1
long cylindrical wire is maximum.
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 70 to 72
Statement-2 : For any other point closed loop
A particle having a charge q and mass m is projected from
perpendicular to the wire and of radius equal to distance
between axis of the wire and given point will enclose less origin with velocity v v0iˆ in a uniform magnetic
current.
B0 ˆ 3B0 ˆ
(a) A (b) B field B i j.
2 2
(c) C (d) D
MAGNETISM 70
70. Pitch of the helical path described by the particle is 74. In figure the loop is released from rest. The initial motion of
the loop is described by
2 mv0 mv0
(a) qB (b) (a) point a moves out of the plane, point c moves into the
qB0
plane
5 mv0 6mv0 (b) points a, b, c and d move counterclockwise
(c) (d)
qB qB
(c) point a, b, c and d move clockwise
3v0 (d) point c moves out of the plane, point a moves into the
71. z-component of velocity is after time t =
2 plane
__________
75. In figure, an external torque changes the orientation of loop
2 m m from one of lowest potential energy to one of highest potential
(a) (b) energy. The work done by the external torque is closest to
B 0q B0 q
(a) 0.5 J (b) 0.2 J
m 2m
(c) (d) 4B q (c) 0.3 J (d) 0.4 J
2 B0 q 0
72. Maximum z–coordinate of the particle is Passage - 3
Using the following Passage,
3mv0 2 3mv0
(a) (b) Any object of finite size contains a large number of atoms.
B0 q B0 q
The magnetic moments of these atoms are randomly
oriented and there is no net magnetic moment in any volume
2mv0 mv0
(c) (d) B q of the material that contains more than several thousand
B0 q 0
atoms (figure a). However, when the material is kept in an
Passage - 2 external magnetic field, torques act on the atomic dipoles
and these torques try to align them parallel to the field
Using the following Passage, solve Q. 73 to 75
(figure b). The alignment is only partial, because, the
A rigid circular loop has a radius of 0.20 m and is in the x-y thermal motion of the atoms frequently changes the
plane. A clockwise current I is carried by the loop, as shown. orientation of the atoms and hence tries to randomize the
The magnitude of the magnetic moment of the loop is 0.75 magnetic moments. The degree of alignment increases if
2
A-m . A uniform external magnetic field, B = 0.20 T in the the strength of the applied field is increased and also if the
positive x-direction, is present temperature is decreased. With sufficiently strong fields,
the alignment is near perfect.
73. In figure, the magnitude of the magnetic torque exerted on When the atomic dipoles are aligned, partially or fully, thre
the loop is closest to is a net magnetic moment in the direction of the field in any
small volume of the material. We define the magnetization
(a) 0.55 N-m (b) 0.15 N-m
(c) 0.45 N-m (d) 0.35 N-m vector I as the magnetic moment per unit volume. It is also
called the intensity of magnetization. With this information,
answer the questions on magnetic materials.
MAGNETISM 71
76. If the rod is placed in a magnetic field of 1000 gauss 83. A compass needle which is allowed to move in a horizontal
perpendicular to its axis, then torque acting on it will be plane is taken to an earth magnetic pole. Which of the
followings are wrong?
(a) 1.35 N.m (b) 2.31 N.m
(a) needle will stay in north south direction only
(c) 1.26 N.m (d) 8.7 N.m
(b) needle will stay in east west direction only
Objective Questions (c) needle will stay in any position
(one or more correct answer)
(d) needle will become rigid showing no movement
77. The cyclotron frequency is independent of
84. Which of the following magnetic materials are affected
(a) mass of the particle
by the change in their temperature ?
(b) speed of the particle
(c) radius of circular path of particle (a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
(d) charge of the particle (c)Ferromagnetic (d) All of these
78. Two ions have equal masses but one is singly ionized 85. Which of the following statements are correct ?
and the other is doubly ionized .They are projected from
(a) Diamagnetism occur in all material
the same place in a uniform magnetic field with the same
velocity perpendicular to the field (b) Diamagnetism is produced due to partial alignment of
(a) Both ions will go along circles of equal radii permanent magnetic dipoles
(b) Two circles touch each other (c) Magnetic field of induced magnetism is opposite to
(c) The circle described by singly ionized charge will be applied field
double radius to that of other circle (d) Ferromagnetism is produced due to domain formation
(d) The two circles do not touch each other. and their alignment in external magnetic field
79. If a charged particle kept at rest experience an 86. Two identical charged particles enter into a uniform
electromagnetic force then magnetic field with same speed but at angle 30° and 60°
(a) The electric field must not be zero with field. Let a, b and c be the ratio of their time periods,
(b) Magnetic field must not be zero radii and pitches of helical path respectively then
(c) Electric field may or may not be zero
(a) abc = 1 (b) abc > 1
(d) The magnetic field may or may not be zero
80. An electron is moving along positive x-axis. You want to (c) abc < 1 (d) a = bc
apply a magnetic field for a short time so that electron 87. From a cylinder of radius R, a cylinder of radius R/2 is
may reverse its direction and move parallel to negative x- removed, as shown. Current flowing in the remaining
axis. This can be done by applying the magnetic field cylinder is I. Magnetic field strength is
along
(a) y-axis (b) z-axis
(c) y-axis only (d) z-axis only
81. A charged particle moves in uniform magnetic field. The
velocity of the particle at some instant makes an acute
angle with magnetic field. The path of the particle will be
(a) A helix of uniform pitch
(b) A spiral of increasing radius
(c) A helix of uniform radius
(d) Helix with increasing pitch
82. A hollow tube is carrying an electric current along its
length distributed uniformly over its surface. The magnetic
field
(a) increases linearly from axis to surface
(a) zero at point A (b) zero at point B
(b) is constant inside the tube
(c) is zero at the axis I I
(c) 30R at point A (d) 30R at point B
(d) is non zero outside the tube
MAGNETISM 72
88. A long conductor of radius R carries a current uniformly 91. A thin wire of length is carrying a constant current. The
distributed over its cross-section wire is bent to form a circular coil. If radius of the coil,
thus formed, is equal to R and number of turns in it is
(a) The magnetic field strength is maximum on the surface equal to n, then which of the following graphs
(b) The magnetic field strength is zero on the surface represent(s) variation of magnetic field induction (B) at
centre of the coil
(c) The strength of the magnetic field inside the cylinder
will vary as directly proportional to r, where r is the distance
from the axis.
(d) The energy density of the magnetic field outside the
conductor varies as inversely proportional to 1/r2, where r
is the distance from the axis.
+ + 2+ (a) (b)
89. H , He and O all having the same kinetic energy pass
through a region in which there is a uniform magnetic field
+ +
perpendicular to their velocity. The masses of H , He and
2+
O are 1 amu, 4 amu and 16 amu respectively. Then
+
(a) H will be deflected most
2+
(b) O will be deflected most
+ 2+
(c) He and O will be deflected equally
(d) all will be deflected equally
90. A particle of charge +q and mass m moving under the (c) (d)
influence of a uniform electric field E ˆi and uniform
magnetic field Bkˆ follows a trajectory from P to Q as
shown in figure. The velocities at P and Q are v ˆi and 92. A steady current I flows along an infinitely long hollow
cylindrical conductor of radius R. This cylinder is placed
2v ˆj . Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct ?
coaxially inside an infinite solenoid of radius 2R. The
solenoid has n turns per unit length and carries a steady
y current I. Consider a point P at a distance r from the common
P v E axis. The correct statement(s) is (are)
B (a) In the region 0 < r < R, the magnetic field is non-zero
a (b) In the region R < r < 2R, the magnetic field is along the
common axis
Q
x (c) In the region R < r < 2R, the magnetic field is tangential
2a 2v
to the circle of radius r, centered on the axis.
(d) In the region r > 2R, the magnetic field is non-zero.
3 mv 2
(a) E
4 93. A proton moving with a constant velocity passes through
qa
a region of space without any change in its velocity. If E
3 mv3 and B represent the electric and magnetic fields
(b) Rate of work done by the electric field at P is 4 a
respectively, this region of space may have
(c) Rate of work done by the electric field at P is zero
(a) E = 0, B = 0 (b) E = 0, B 0
(d) Rate of work done by both the fields at Q is zero
(c) E 0, B = 0 (d) E 0, B 0
MAGNETISM 73
–26 –19
94. A neutron, a proton and an electron and alpha particle 98. A particle of mass 1 × 10 kg and charge +1.6 × 10
enter a region of constant magnetic field with equal 6
C travelling with a velocity 1.28 × 10 m/s in the +X
velocities. The magnetic field is along the inward normal direction enters a region in which a uniform electric field
to the plane of the paper. The tracks of the particles are E and a uniform magnetic field of induction B are
labelled in figure. The electron follows track......... and the present such that Ex = E y = 0, Ez = – 102.4 kV/m and Bx
alpha particle follows track........... –2 2
= Bz = 0,By = 8 × 10 weber/m . The particle enters this
region at the origin at time t = 0. Determine the location
× × × × × × × –6
(x, y and z coordinates) of the particle at t = 5 × 10 s. If
C
×B × × × × × × the electric field is switched off at this instant (with the
× A× × × × × × magnetic field still present), what will be the position of
–6
× × × × × × × the particle at t = 7.45 × 10 s ?
–27
× × × × × × × 99. A particle of mass m = 1.6 × 10
–19
kg and charge
D q = 1.6 × 10 C enters a region of uniform magnetic field
× × × × × × × of strength 1T along the direction shown in figure. The
7
speed of the particle is 10 m/s.
Numeric Type Questions
× × × × ×
95. Protons having a kinetic energy of 5 MeV are moving in × × × × ×
the positive x-direction and enter a magnetic field × × × × ×
× × × × ×
B = 0.0500 kˆ T directed out of plane of paper and F ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
extending from x = 0 to x = 1 m as shown. Calculate the E × × × × ×
y-component of the proton’s momentum as they leave the × × × × ×
45º
× × × × ×
magnetic field. [in 10–21] × × × × ×
× × × × ×
(a) The magnetic field is directed along the inward normal to
the plane of the paper. The particle leaves the region of the
field at the point F. Find the distance EF and the angle .
(b) If the direction of the field is along the outward normal
to the plane of the paper, find the time spent by the particle
in the region of the magnetic field after entering it at E.
100. The region between x = 0 and x = L is filled with uniform
96. A long horizontal wire AB which is free to move in a vertical
plane and carries a current of 20A is in equilibrium at a steady magnetic field B0 kˆ . A particle of mass m, positive
height of 1m over another parallel wire CD which is fixed in
charge q and velocity v0ˆi travels along x-axis and enters
a horizontal plane and carries a steady current of 40 A.
When wire AB is slightly depressed, it executes SHM. the region of the magnetic field. (Neglect the gravity
What is period of oscillation. (g = 9.84 ms–2) throughout the question)
97. A long horizontal wire AB, which is free to move in a vertical (a) Find the value of L if the particle emerges from the
plane and carries a steady current of 20 A, is in equilibrium region of magnetic field with its final velocity at an angle
at a height of 0.01 m over another parallel long wire CD 30° to its initial velocity.
which is fixed in a horizontal plane and carries a steady (b) Find the final velocity of the particle and the time spent
current of 30 A, as shown in figure. Show that when AB is by it in the magnetic field, if the magnetic field now expands
slightly depressed, it executes simple harmonic motion. Find upto 2.1 L.
the period of oscillations. 101. In a hydrogen atom, the electron moves in an orbit of
16
radius 0.5 Å making 10 revolutions per second. The
A B
magnetic moment associated with the orbital motion of
C D
the electron is .........
MAGNETISM 74
102. A charged particle enters a region of uniform magnetic 105. A straight segment OC (of length L) of a circuit carrying
field at an angle of 85° to the magnetic line of force. The a current I is placed along the x-axis. Two infinitely long
path of the particle is a circle. straight wires A and B, each extending from z = – to
103. Two long straight parallel wires are 2 m apart, perpendicular + , are fixed at y = – a and y = + a respectively, as shown
to the plane of the paper. in the figure. If the wires A and B each carry a current I
The wire A carries a current of 9.6 A, directed into the plane of into the plane of the paper, obtain the expression for
the paper. The wire B carries a current such that the magnetic the force acting on the segment OC. What will be the
10 force on OC if the current in the wire B is reversed ?
field of induction at the point P, at a distance of m from the
11 y
wire B, is zero. B ×
O I C x
A×
z
5
106. A beam of protons with a velocity 4 × 10 m/s enters a
uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T at an angle of 60° to the
magnetic field. Find the radius of the helical path taken by
the proton beam. Also find the pitch of the helix (which is
the distance travelled by a proton in the beam parallel to
the magnetic field during one period of rotation).
107. A particle of mass m and charge q is moving in a region
where uniform, constant
electric
and magnetic fields E
and B are present. E and B are parallel to each other. At
Find :
time t = 0, the velocity v 0 of the particle is perpendicular
(a) The magnitude and direction of the current in B.
to E (Assume that its speed is always << c, the speed of
(b) The magnitude of the magnetic field of induction at the light in vacuum). Find the velocity v of the particle at time
point S.
t. You must express your answer in terms of t, q, m, the
(c) The force per unit length on the wire B.
vector v0 , E and B and their magnitudes v0, E and B.
104. A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent wires are placed in
the xy plane as shown in figure. The wires carry currents of Subjective Type Question
i = 10 A each as shown. The segments L and M are along the 108. A potential difference of 600 V is applied across the plates
x-axis. The segments P and Q are parallel to the y-axis such that of a parallel plate condenser. The separation between the
OS = OR = 0.02 m. Find the magnitude and direction of the plates is 3 mm. An electron projected vertically, parallel to
magnetic induction at the origin O. 6
the plates, with a velocity of 2 × 10 m/s moves undeflected
y between the plates. Find the magnitude and direction of
the magnetic field in the region between the condenser
plates. (Neglect the edge effects). (Charge of the electron
i –19
= 1.6 × 10 C)
Q
L R M 600 V
x
i P O S i +
+
–
–
+ –
i +
+
–
–
+ –
+ –
0.1 T( perpendicular to paper inwards)
MAGNETISM 75
109. There is no change in the energy of a charged particle 112.A square current carrying loop is placed in x-y plane, a
moving in magnetic field although a magnetic force is acting
uniform magnetic field B B0 k is present in the
on it.
region.Match the column 1 with column II
110. Why is phosphor bronze alloy preferred for the suspension
wire of a moving coil galvanometer ? Column–I Column–II
Match The Column Type Questions (a) Magnetic moment of the loop (P) Zero
111. A negative charged particle of mass ‘m’ having charge q (b) Torque on the loop (Q) Minimum
enters in magnetic field B B0 kˆ at point P (3m, 0, 0) with (c) Potential energy of the loop (R) Stable
velocity v0 3jˆ 4k,
ˆ at t = 0 as shown in the figure [Given (d) Equilibrium of the loop (S) Along z- axis
m 113. Column II gives force expression for current carrying wire
shown in Column I. Match them correctly.
B0q = 1] [No other field is present]
Column–I Column–II
(A) (P) 2BiR
(B) (Q) zero
Now match the following :
Column–I Column–II
(A) Pitch of the motion (P) 3sin t ˆi 3cos t ˆj unit
of particle
(C) (R) BiR
24
(B)
25
× Radius of
(Q) 3cos t ˆi 3sin t ˆj unit
curvature of particle during
motion at time t = t sec.
(C) Velocity component (R) 8 unit (D) (S) 2BiR
of particle in xy-plane
(D) Acceleration of particle (S) Constant
MAGNETISM 76
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
IIT-JEE Questions
1. An infinitely long conductor PQR is bent to form a right
angle as shown in figure. A current I flows through PQR. (a)
The magnetic field due to this current at the point M is H1.
Now, another infinitely long straight conductor QS is
connected at Q, so that current is I/2 in QR as well as in QS,
the current in PQ remaining unchanged. The magnetic field
at M is now H2. The ratio H1/H2 is given by (JEE 2000)
(b) x x'
M
d d
90º
– (c) x x'
P I Q S
90º
d d
R
d d
(d) x x'
–
(a) 1/2 (b) 1
(c) 2/3 (d) 2
5. A circular loop of radius R is bent along a diameter and
2. An ionized gas contains both positive and negative ions.
given a shape as shown in figure. One of the semicircles
If it is subjected simultaneously to an electric field along
(KNM) lies in the x-z plane and the other one (KLM) in
the +x-direction and a magnetic field along the
the y-z plane with their centres at origin. Current I is
+z-direction, then (JEE 2000)
flowing through each of the semicircles as shown in
(a) positive ions deflect towards +y-direction and negative figure. (JEE 2000)
ions towards –y-direction
(b) all ions deflect towards +y-direction
(c) all ions deflect towards –y-direction L y
M
(d) positive ions deflect towards –y-direction and
I x
negative ions towards –y-direction
N
3. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a circular orbit I z
of radius r with angular speed . The ratio of the magnitude K
of its magnetic moment to that of its angular momentum
depends on (JEE 2000) (a) A particle of charge q is released at the origin with a
(a) and q (b) , q and m velocity v v0ˆi . Find the instantaneous force F
(c) q and m (d) and m on the particle. Assume that space is gravity free.
4. Two long parallel wires are at a distance 2d apart. They (b) If an external uniform magnetic field B0ˆj is applied
carry steady equal currents flowing out of the plane of the
determine the force F1 and F2 on the semicircles
paper as shown. The variation of the magnetic field B
KLM and KNM due to the field and the net force F
along the line XX is given by (JEE 2000)
on the loop.
MAGNETISM 77
6. A current of 10 A flow around a closed path in a circuit 8. A coil having N turns is wound tightly in the form of a
which is in the horizontal plane as shown in the figure. spiral with inner and outer radii a and b respectively. When
The circuit consists of eight alternating arcs of radii a current I passes through the coil, the magnetic field at
the centre is (JEE 2001)
r1 = 0.08 m and r2 = 0.12 m. Each subtends the same angle
at the centre. (JEE 2001) 0 NI 2 0 NI
(a) (b)
b a
0 NI b 0 IN b
D (c) 2 b a ln a (d) b a ln a
r2
C
9. Two particles A and B of masses mA and mB respectively
A and having the same charge are moving in a plane. A
r1
uniform magnetic field exists perpendicular to this plane.
i The speeds of the particles are vA and vB respectively and
the trajectories are as shown in the figure. Then
(JEE 2001)
(a) Find the magnetic field produced by this circuit at the
A
centre.
B
(b) An infinitely long straight wire carrying a current of 10
A is passing through the centre of the above circuit
vertically with the direction of the current being into
the plane of the circuit. What is the force acting on the
(a) mAvA < mBvB
wire at the centre due to the current in the circuit ?
(b) mAvA > mBvB
What is the force acting on the arc AC and the straight
segment CD due to the current at the centre ? (c) mA < mB and vA < vB
7. A non-planar loop of conducting wire carrying a current I (d) mA = mB and vA = vB
is placed as shown in the figure. Each of the straight 10. A long straight wire along the z-axis carries a current i in the
sections of the loop is of length 2a. The magnetic field due
negative z-direction. The magnetic vector field B at a point
to this loop at the point P (a, 0, a) points in the direction having coordinate (x, y) on the z = 0 plane is (JEE 2002)
(JEE 2001)
(a)
0 I y ˆi x ˆj
(b)
0 I x ˆi y ˆj
z 2 x 2
y
2
2 x 2
y
2
y
0 I x ˆj y ˆi
0 I x ˆi y ˆj
(c) (d)
2 x 2
y
2
2 x 2
y
2
x 11. A particle of mass m and charge q moves with a constant
velocity v along the positive x-direction. It enter a region
containing a uniform magnetic field B directed along the
negative z-direction, extending from x = a to x = b. The
minimum value of v required so that the particle can just
(a)
1
2
ˆj kˆ (b)
1
3
ˆj kˆ ˆi enter the region x > b is (JEE 2002)
qbB q b a B
(a) (b)
m m
(c)
3
1 ˆ ˆ ˆ
i j k (d)
1 ˆ ˆ
2
ik qaB q b a B
(c) (d)
m 2m
MAGNETISM 78
12. A rectangular loop PQRS made from a uniform wire has 15. A conducting loop carrying a current I is placed in a uniform
length a, width b and mass m. It is free to rotate about the magnetic field pointing into the plane of the paper as
arm PQ, which remains hinged along a horizontal line taken shown. The loop will have a tendency to (JEE 2003)
as the y-axis (see figure). Take the vertically upward
Y
direction as the z-axis. A uniform magnetic field B
×
B 3iˆ 4 kˆ B0 exists in the region. The loop is held in
the x-y plane and a current I is passed through it. The loop X
is now released and is found to stay in the horizontal
position in equilibrium. (JEE 2002) I
z
(a) contract
(b) expand
(c) move towards +ve x-axis
P Q (d) move towards –ve x-axis
y
16. A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform magnetic
field in four different orientations, I, II, III and IV, arrange
a
them in the decreasing order of potential energy
x S R (JEE 2003)
b
(a) What is the direction of the current I in PQ ?
(b) Find the magnetic force on the arm RS. n^ B B
(c) Find the expression for I in terms of B 0, a, b and m.
n^
13. A ring of radius R having uniformly distributed charge (I) (II)
Q is mounted on a rod suspended by two identical
n^
strings. The tension in strings in equilibrium is T0. Now
a vertical magnetic field is switched on and ring is rotated B B
at constant angular velocity . Find the maximum with ^
n
which the ring can be rotated if the strings can (III) (IV)
3T0
withstand a maximum tension of . (JEE 2003) (a) I > III > II > IV (b) I > II > III > IV
2
(c) I > IV > II > III (d) III > IV > I > II
14. For a positively charged particle moving in a x-y plane
17. An electron moving with a speed u along the positive
initially along the x-axis, there is a sudden change in its
x-axis at y = 0 enters a region of uniform magnetic field
path due to the presence of electric and/or magnetic
fields beyond P. The curved path is shown in the x-y B B0 kˆ which exists to the right of y-axis. The electron
plane and is found to be non-circular. (JEE 2003) exists from the region after sometime with the speed v at
co-ordinate y, then (JEE 2004)
y
y
× × × ×
P × × × ×
O
x e– u × × × ×
× × × × x
× × × ×
Which one of the following combinations is possible ? × × × ×
× × × ×
(a) E 0; B b ˆj c kˆ (b) E a ˆi ; B c kˆ a ˆi
(a) v > u, y < 0 (b) v = u, y > 0
(c) E 0; B c ˆj b kˆ (d) E a ˆi ; B c kˆ b ˆj (c) v > u, y > 0 (d) v = u, y < 0
MAGNETISM 79
18. A proton and an alpha particle, after being accelerated (B) Point P is situated at the (Q) The magnetic fields (B)
through same potential difference, enter uniform magnetic mid-point of the line joining at P due to the currents
the centres of the circular in the the wires are in
field, the direction of which is perpendicular to their
wires, which have same radii. opposite direction.
velocities. Find the ratio of radii of the circular paths of
the two particles. (2004)
19. A moving coil galvanometer experiences torque = ki where P
i is current. If N coils of area A each and moment of inertia
I is kept in magnetic field B. (2005)
(a) Find k in terms of given parameters. (C) Point P is situated at the (R) There is no magnetic
field mid-point of the line at P.
(b) If for current i deflection is , find out torsional joining the centres of the
2
circular wires, which have
constant of spring.
same radii.
(c) If a charge Q is passed suddenly through the
galvanometer, find out maximum angle of deflection. P
20. Some laws/processes are given in Column-I. Match these
with the physical phenomena given in Column-II.(2006) (D) Point P is situated at the (S) The wires repel each
common centre of the wires. other.
Column – I Column – II
(A) Dielectric ring uniformly (p) Time independent
P
charged electrostatic field out of
system
22. A magnetic field B = B0ˆj exists in the region a < x < 2a and
(B) Dielectric ring uniformly (q) Magnetic field B = B0 ˆj , in the region 2a < x < 3a, where B0 is a positive
charged rotating with constant. A positive point charge moving with a velocity
angular velocity v v0ˆi , where v0 is a positive constant, enters the
magnetic field at x = a. The trajectory of the charge in this
(C) Constant current in ring io (r) Induced electric field region can be like (JEE 2007)
(D) i = io cos t (s) Magnetic moment B0
21. Two wires each carrying a steady current I are shown in four
configuration in Column – I. Some of the resulting effects 0 x
a 2a 3a
are described in Column – II. Match the statements in
Column – I with the statements in Column – II. constant
– B0
electric field that difference develops has a direction along
the between the ends of the length of the wire. (JEE 2007) z z
Column – I Column – II a 2a 3a
x x
(A) Point P is situated midway (P) The magnetic fields (B) (a) a 2a 3a (b)
between the wires. at P due to the currents
in the wires are in the
same direction. z z
a 2a 3a
x x
(c) a 2a 3a (d)
P
MAGNETISM 80
23. A particle of mass m and charge q, moving with velocity v 26. An electron and a proton are moving on straight parallel
enters Region II normal to the boundary as shown in the paths with same velocity. They enter a semi-infinite region
figure. Region II has a uniform magnetic field B perpendicular of uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the velocity.
to the plane of the paper. The length of the Region II is l. Which or the following statement(s) is/are true ? (2011)
Choose the correct choice(s). (2008) (a) They will never come out of the magnetic field region
(b) They will come out travelling along parallel paths
(c) They will come out at the same time
(d) They will come out at different times.
PASSAGE
The figure shows a circular loop of radius a with two long
parallel wires (numbered 1 and 2) all in the plane of the
paper. The distance of each wire from the centre of the loop
is d. The loop and the wires are carrying the same current I.
The current in the loop is in the counterclockwise direction
if seen from above.
q B
(a) The particle enters Region III only if its velocity v
m
qB
(b) The particle enters Region III only if its velocity v
m
(c) Path length of the particle in Region II is maximum when
q B
velocity v
m
(d) Time spent in Region II is same for any velocity v as 27. When d a but wires are not touching the loop. It is found
long as the particle returns to Region I that the net magnetic field on the axis of the loop is zero at a
24. A steady current I goes through a wire loop PQR having height h above the loop. In that case (2014)
(a) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ and RS,
shape of a right angle triangle with PQ = 3x, PR = 4x and QR
respectively and h a
= 5x, If the magnitude of the magneitc field at P due to this
(b) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ and SR,
0 I respectively and h a
loop is k , find the value of k. (2009)
48x (c) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ and SR,
respectively and h 1.2a
25. Which of the field patterns given in the figure is valid for
(d) current in wire 1 and wire 2 is the direction PQ and RS,
electric field as well as for magnetic field ? (2011)
respectively and h 1.2a
28. Consider d >> a, and the loop is rotated about its diameter
parallel to the wires by 30o from the position shown in the
(a) (b) figure. If the currents in the wires are in the opposite
directions, the torque on the loop at its new position will be
(assume that the net field due to the wires is constant over
the loop) (2014)
0 I2 a 2 0 I2 a 2
(a) (b)
(c) (d) d 2d
0 I2 a 2 0 I2 a 2
(c) (d)
d 2d
MAGNETISM 81
PASSAGE 31. Consider two different metallic strips (1 and 2) of same
In a thin rectangular metallic strip a constant current I flows dimensions (length l, width w and thickness d) with carrier
along the positive x-direction, as shown in the figure. densities n1 and n2, respectively. Strip 1 is placed in magnetic
The length, width and thickness of the strip are l, w and field B1 and strip 2 is placed in magnetic field B2, both along
d respectively. positive y-directions. Then V1 and V2 are the potential
difference developed between K and M in strips 1 and 2,
A uniform magnetic field B is applied on the strip along respectively. Assuming that the current I is the same for
the positively y-direction. Due to this, the charge carriers both the strips, the correct option(s) is(are). (2015)
experience a net deflection along the z-direction. This (a) If B1 = B2 and n1 = 2n2, then V2 = 2 V1
result in accumulation of charge carriers on the surface
PQRS and appearance of equal and opposite charges on (b) If B1 = B2 and n1 = 2n2, then V2 = V1
the face opposite to PQRS. A potential difference along (c) If B1 = 2B2 and n1 = n2, then V2 = 0.5 V1
the z-direction is thus developed. Charge accumulation
continues until the magnetic force is balance by the (d) If B1 = 2B2 and n1 = n2, then V2 = V1
electric force. The current is assumed to be uniformly 32. In which case will the particle move in a straight line with
distribution on the cross-section of the strip and carried constant velocity? (2017)
by electrons.
(a) (IV) (i) (S)
(b) (III) (ii) (R)
(c) (III) (iii) (P)
(d) (II) (iii) (S)
33. Two infinitely long straight wires lie in the xy-plane along
the lines x = R. The wire located at x = +R carries a constant
current I1 and the wire located at x = –R carries a constant
29. Consider two different metallic strips (1 and 2) of the current I2. A circular loop of radius R is suspended with its
same material. Their lengths are the same, widths are w1
centre at (0, 0,3R ) and in a plane parallel to the xy-plane.
and w2 and thicknesses are d1 and d 2 respectively. Two
This loop carries a constant current I in the clockwise
points K and M are symmetrically located on the
direction as seen from above the loop. The current in the
opposite faces parallel to the x-y plane (see figure). V1
and V2 are the potential difference between K and M in wire is taken to be positive if it is in the j direction. Which
strips 1 and 2, respectively. Then, for a given current I
flowing through them in a given magnetic field strength of the following statements regarding the magnetic field B
B, the correct statement(s) is(are). (2015) is (are) true ? (2018)
(a) If w1 = w2 and d 1 = 2d2, then V2 = 2 V1 (a) If I1 = I2, then B cannot be equal to zero at the origin (0,
(b) If w1 = w2 and d 1 = 2d2, then V2 = V1 0, 0)
(c) If w1 = 2w2 and d 1 = d2, then V2 = 2 V1
(b) If I1 > 0 and I2 < 0, then B can be equal to zero at the
(d) If w1 = 2w2 and d 1 = d2, then V2 = V1 origin (0, 0, 0)
30. In terms of potential difference V, electric current I,
(c) If I1 < 0 and I2 > 0, then B can be equal to zero at the
permittivity , permeability and speed of light c, the
origin (0, 0, 0)
dimensionally correct equation(s) is (are) (2015)
(d) If I1 = I2, then the z-component of the magnetic field at
(a) I = V (b) I = V
(c) I = cV (d) cI = V 0 I
the centre of the loop is
2R
MAGNETISM 82
34. In the xy-plane, the region y > 0 has a uniform magnetic 35. A circular coil of radius R and N turns has negligible
resistance. As shown in the schematic figure, its two ends
field B1 k and the region y < 0 hasanother uniform magnetic
are connected to two wires and it is hanging by those wires
field B2 k . A positively charged particle is projected from
with its plane being vertical. The wires are connected to a
capacitor with charge Q through a switch. The coil is in a
the origina long the positive y-axis with speed horizontal uniform magnetic field B0 parallel to the plane of
v0 ms 1 at t = 0, as shown in the figure. Neglect gravity the coil. When the switch is closed, the capacitor gets
discharged through the coil in a very short time. By the
in this problem. Let t = T be the time when the particle time the capacitor is discharged fully, magnitude of the
crosses the x-axis from below for the first time. If B2 = 4B1, angular momentum gained by the coil will be (assume that
the average speed of the particle, in ms–1, along the x-axis in the discharge time is so short that the coil has hardly
the time interval T is _________. (2018) rotated during this time) – (2020)
(a) NQB0 R 2 (b) NQB0 R 2
2
(c) 2NQB0 R 2 (d) 4NQB0R 2
MAGNETISM
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
83
Teacher’s Note:
Back in the 6th century BC, the Greek philosopher Thales of Miletus had already noticed
the special effects of the magnetic stones and later on magnetic needles were being used
for navigation for voyages by various explorers ! Even Albert Einstein wasn't spared, a
gift of a compass from his father when he was five years old led to a lifetime fascination
with magnetic fields. The future of transportation i.e the motors in electric vehicles is
based on fundamentals of magnetism ! Lets see the origins and applications of the
magnetism and its beautiful relationship with electric currents .
"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,
Mazaa ayega to smajh ayega".
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1,6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
EMI & AC
Chapter 02 85
EMI & AC
1. MAGNETIC FLUX
Various Methods of Producing induced E.M.F.
(1) The total number of magnetic lines of force passing
normally through an area placed in a magnetic field is equal We have learnt that e.m.f. is induced in a circuit, whenever
to the magnetic flux linked with that area. the amount of magnetic flux linked with the circuit is
changed. As = BA cos , the magnetic flux can be
changed by changing B, A or . Hence there are three
methods of producing induced e.m.f.
1. By changing the magnitude of magnetic field B,
2. By changing the area A, i.e., by shrinking or stretching or
changing the shape of the coil.
3. By changing angle between the direction of B and normal
(2) Net flux through the surface = B. d A = BA cos to the surface area A, i.e., changing the relative orientation
of the surface area and the magnetic field.
( is the angle between area vector and magnetic field
vector) If = 0o then = BA, If = 90o then = 0
3. LENZ’S LAW
(3) Unit and Dimension : Magnetic flux is a scalar quantity. It’s This law gives the direction of induced emf/induced current.
S.I. unit is weber (wb), CGS unit is Maxwell or Gauss × cm2; According to this law, the direction of induced emf or current in a
(1wb = 108 Maxwell). circuit is such as to oppose the cause that produces it. This law is
based upon law of conservation of energy.
N m Joule Volt Coulomb
(4) Other units : Tesla × m2
(1) When N-pole of a bar magnet moves towards the coil, the
Amp Amp Amp
= Volt × sec = Ohm × Coulomb = Henry × Amp. It’s flux associated with loop increases and an emf is induced
dimensional formula [] = [ML2T–2A–1] in it. Since the circuit of loop is closed, induced current
also flows in it.
2. FARADAY’S LAWS OF EMI (2) Cause of this induced current, is approach of north pole
and therefore to oppose the cause, i.e., to repel the
(1) First law : Whenever the number of magnetic lines of
approaching north pole, the induced current in loop is in
force (magnetic flux) passing through a circuit changes an
such a direction so that the front face of loop behaves as
emf is produced in the circuit called induced emf. The
north pole. Therefore induced current as seen by observer
induced emf persists only as long as there is change or
O is in anticlockwise direction. (figure)
cutting of flux.
(2) Second law : The induced emf is given by rate of change
d
of magnetic flux linked with the circuit i.e. e . . For
dt
Nd
N turns e ; Negative sign indicates that induced
dt
emf (e) opposes the change of flux. (3) If the loop is free to move the cause of induced emf in the
Induced current (i) Induced charge (q) Induced power (P) coil can also be termed as relative motion. Therefore to
oppose the cause, the relative motion between the
2
e N d N e 2 N 2 d approaching magnet and the loop should be opposed.
i . dq idt .d P
R R dt R R R dt For this, the loop will itself start moving in the direction of
motion of the magnet.
Induced charge It depends on
is time indepen- time and resistance (4) It is important to remember that whenever cause of induced
emf is relative motion, the new motion is always in the
dent.
direction of motion of the cause.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
86
Table : The various positions of relative motion between the magnet and the coil
Position of magnet
Direction of Anticlockwise direction Clockwise direction Clockwise direction Anticlockwise direction
induced current
Behaviour of face As a north pole As a south pole As a south pole As a north pole
of the coil
Type of magnetic Repulsive force Attractive force Repulsive force Attractive force
force opposed
Magnetic field linked Cross (×), Increases Cross (×), Decreases Dots () Increases Dots () Decreases
with the coil and it’s
progress as viewed
from left
4. EDDY CURRENT
(i) Dead-beat galvanometer : A dead beat galvanometer
When a changing magnetic flux is applied to a bulk piece of means one whose pointer comes to rest in the final
conducting material then circulating currents called eddy currents equilibrium position immediately without any oscillation
are induced in the material. Because the resistance of the bulk about the equilibrium position when a current is passed
conductor is usually low, eddy currents often have large in its coil.
magnitudes and heat up the conductor. This is achieved by winding the coil on a metallic
(1) These are circulating currents like eddies in water. frame the large eddy currents induced in the frame provide
electromagnetic damping.
(2) Experimental concept given by Focault hence also named
as “Focault current”. (ii) Electric-brakes : When the train is running its wheel is
moving in air and when the train is to be stopped by
(3) The production of eddy currents in a metallic block leads
electric breaks the wheel is made to move in a field created
to the loss of electric energy in the form of heat.
by electromagnet. Eddy currents induced in the wheels
(4) By Lamination, slotting processes the resistance path for due to the changing flux oppose the cause and stop
circulation of eddy current increases, resulting in to the train.
weakening them and also reducing losses causes by them
(iii) Induction furnace : Joule’s heat causes the melting of a
metal piece placed in a rapidly changing magnetic field.
(iv) Speedometer : In the speedometer of an automobile, a
magnet is geared to the main shaft of the vehicle and it
rotates according to the speed of the vehicle. The magnet
is mounted in an aluminium cylinder with the help of
hair springs. When the magnet rotates, it produces eddy
currents in the drum and drags it through an angle, which
indicates the speed of the vehicle on a calibrated scale.
(v) Energy meter : In energy meters, the armature coil carries
a metallic aluminium disc which rotates between the poles
of a pair of permanent horse shoe magnets. As the
armature rotates, the current induced in the disc tends
to oppose the motion of the armature coil. Due to this
(5) Application of eddy currents : Though most of the times braking effect, deflection is proportional to the energy
eddy currents are undesirable but they find some useful consumed.
applications as enumerated below
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
87
5. INDUCED CHARGE FLOW E
When a current is induced in the circuit due to the flux change,
charge flows through the circuit and the net amount of charge
which flows along the circuit is given as : a r
r dB
1 d 1 when r < a; E = ; En r
q i dt R dt
dt
R
d 2 dt
7. DYNAMIC (MOTIONAL) EMI DUE TO
TRANSLATORY MOTION
q and q N for N turns.
R R
(1) Consider a conducting rod of length l moving with a
6. INDUCED ELECTRIC FIELD
uniform velocity v perpendicular to a uniform magnetic
It is non-conservative and non-electrostatic in nature. Its
field lines are concentric circular closed curves. field B , directed into the plane of the paper. Let the rod be
moving to the right as shown in figure. The conducting
dB electrons also move to the right as they are trapped within
A time varying magnetic field always produced
dt the rod.
induced electric field in all space surrounding it.
Induced electric field (E in) is directly proportional to
induced emf so e = E in .d ..…(i)
d
From Faraday’s second laws e ..…(ii)
dt
d Conducting electrons experiences a magnetic force
From (i) and (ii) e E in .d
dt
This is known as Fm = evB. So they move from P to Q within the rod. The
integral form of Faraday’s laws of EMI. end P of the rod becomes positively charged while end Q
becomes negatively charged, hence an electric field is set
up within the rod which opposes the further downward
dB/dt in cylindrical space × × movement of electrons i.e. an equilibrium is reached and
× B (t)× in equilibrium Fe = Fm i.e. eE = evB or E = vB
×
× ×× × × × × ×
× ××× × × × × ×
× ×× × ×
× × × × × × V
Concentric circular field
× × a × Induced emf e = El = Bvl E
lines of induced electric × ×
field existing everywhere
inside and outside of
(A) cylindrical space
(B) (2) If rod is moving by making an angle with the direction of
magnetic field or length. Induced emf e = Bvl sin
A uniform but time varying magnetic field B(t) exists in a
circular region of radius ‘a’ and is directed into the plane
of the paper as shown, the magnitude of the induced
electric field (Ein) at point P lies at a distance r from the
centre of the circular region is calculated as follows.
d dB dB
So E in .d e
dt
A
dt
i.e. E 2 r a 2
dt
a 2 dB 1
where r a or E ; E in
2r dt r
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
88
(3) Motion of conducting rod on an inclined plane : When (1) Induced current :
conductor start sliding from the top of an inclined plane
as shown, it moves perpendicular to it’s length but at an e Bv
i
R R
angle (90 ) with the direction of magnetic field.
(2) Magnetic force : Conductor PQ experiences a magnetic
force in opposite direction of it’s motion and
Bv B 2 v 2
Fm Bi B
R R
(3) Power dissipated in moving the conductor : For uniform
Hence induced emf across the ends of conductor motion of rod PQ, the rate of doing mechanical work by
e = Bv sin(90 – )l = Bvl cos external agent or mech. Power delivered by external source
is given as
Bv cos
So induced current i (Directed from Q to P).
R dW B 2 v 2 B2 v 2 2
Pmech Pext Fext .v v
The forces acting on the bar are shown in following figure. dt R R
The rod will move down with constant velocity only if
(4) Electrical power : Also electrical power dissipated in
Fm cos = mg cos (90 – ) = mg sin resistance or rate of heat dissipation across resistance is
given as
Bil cos = mg sin
2
Bv cos mgR sin H 2 Bv B2 v 2 2
B T cos mg sin vT Pthermal i R .R ; Pthermal
R B 2 2 cos 2 t R R
(It is clear that Pmech. = Pthermal which is consistent with the
8. MOTIONAL EMI IN LOOP BY GENERATED AREA principle of conservation of energy.)
If conducting rod moves on two parallel conducting rails (5) Motion of conductor rod in a vertical plane : If conducting
as shown in following figure then phenomenon of rod released from rest (at t = 0) as shown in figure then
induced emf can also be understand by the concept of with rise in it’s speed (v), induces emf (e), induced current
generated area (The area swept of conductor in magnetic (i), magnetic force (Fm) increases but it’s weight remains
field, during it’s motion) constant.
Rod will achieve a constant maximum (terminal) velocity
vT if Fm = mg
B 2 v T2 2 mgR
So mg vT
R B2 2
× × × × ×
R
× × × × × × ×
l
As shown in figure in time t distance travelled by conductor = vt t=0
× × × × ×
Area generated A = lvt. Flux linked with this area = BA = × × ×
F
×m mg
× ×
d mg
Blvt. Hence induced emf e Bv
dt
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
89
SPECIAL CASES (3) Faraday copper disc generator : A metal disc can be
assumed to made of uncountable radial conductors when
Motion of train and aeroplane in earth’s magnetic field
metal disc rotates in transverse magnetic field these
radial conductors cuts away magnetic field lines and
because of this flux cutting all becomes identical cells each
1
of emf ‘e’ where e Br 2
2
(A) (B)
Induced emf across the axle of the wheels of the train and it
is across the tips of the wing of the aeroplane is given by e
= Bvlv where l = length of the axle or distance between
the tips of the wings of plane, Bv = vertical component of
earth’s magnetic field and v = speed of train or plane.
9. MOTIONAL EMI DUE TO ROTATIONAL MOTION
(1) Conducting rod : A conducting rod of length l whose one (4) Semicircular conducting loop : If a semi-circular
end is fixed, is rotated about the axis passing through it’s conducting loop (ACD) of radius ‘r’ with centre at O, the
fixed end and perpendicular to it’s length with constant plane of loop being in the plane of paper. The loop is now
angular velocity . Magnetic field (B) is perpendicular to made to rotate with a constant angular velocity , about
the plane of the paper. an axis passing through O and perpendicular to the plane
emf induces across the ends of the rod of paper. The effective resistance of the loop is R.
where = frequency (revolution per sec) and T = Time period.
× ×
C S A
× × × × B × r × ×
r B
× × × × × × × ×
Q P O
× × × l × × × × ×
× × × × × B
In time t the area swept by the loop in the field i.e. region
(2) Cycle wheel : A conducting wheel each spoke of length l
1 1 dA r 2
is rotating with angular velocity in a given magnetic II A r r r 2 t ;
2 2 dt 2
field as shown below in fig. Flux link with the rotating loop at time t = BA. Hence
Due to flux cutting each metal spoke becomes identical induced emf in the loop in magnitude
cell of emf e (say), all such identical cells connected in d dA Br 2
parallel fashion enet = e (emf of single cell). Let N be the e B and induced current
dt dt 2
1
number of spokes hence e net B ; 2v
2
e Br 2
2 i
R 2R
× × × × × ×
B 10. PERIODIC EMI
× × × × × ×
O
l
× × ×l
× O × × × Suppose a rectangular coil having N turns placed initially
× × × × × × in a magnetic field such that magnetic field is perpendicular
× × × × × × to it’s plane as shown.
–Angular speed
0
Here e net N i.e. total emf does not depends on number v–Frequency of rotation of coil
of spokes ‘N’. R–Resistance of coil
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
90
Induced current Induced current
B
n^
Rheostat Key Rheostat Key
(A) Main current increasing (B) Main current decreasing
R
(1) Coefficient of self-induction : Number of flux linkages with
For uniform rotational motion with , the flux linked with the coil is proportional to the current i. i.e. N i or
coil at any time t N Li (N is the number of turns in coil and N – total
= NBA cos = NBA cos t N
flux linkage). Hence L = coefficient of self-induction.
= 0 cost where 0 = NBA = maximum flux i
(1) Induced emf in coil : Induced emf also changes in periodic (2) If i = 1amp, N = 1 then, L = i.e. the coefficient of self
manner that’s why this phenomenon called periodic EMI induction of a coil is equal to the flux linked with the coil
when the current in it is 1 amp.
d
e = NBA sint e = e0 sint where e0 = emf d
dt (3) By Faraday’s second law induced emf e N . Which
amplitude or max. emf = NBA = 0 dt
di di
e e0 gives e L ; If = amp/sec then | e |= L.
(2) Induced current : At any time t, i sint = i0 dt dt
R R
sint where i0 = current amplitude or max. current Hence coefficient of self induction is equal to the emf
induced in the coil when the rate of change of current in
e0 NBA 0
i0 the coil is unity.
R R R
(4) Units and dimensional formula of ‘L’ : It’s S.I. unit
11. INDUCTANCE
weber Tesla m 2 N m Joule Coulomb volt
(1) Inductance is that property of electrical circuits which Amp Amp Amp 2 Amp 2 Amp 2
opposes any change in the current in the circuit.
(2) Inductance is inherent property of electrical circuits. It will volt sec
ohm sec . But practical unit is henry (H).
always be found in an electrical circuit whether we want it amp
It’s dimensional formula [L] = [ML2T–2A–2]
or not.
(3) A straight wire carrying current with no iron part in the (5) Dependence of self inductance (L) : ‘L’ does not depend
circuit will have lesser value of inductance. upon current flowing or change in current flowing but it
depends upon number of turns (N), Area of cross section
(4) Inductance is analogous to inertia in mechanics, because
(A) and permeability of medium ().
inductance of an electrical circuit opposes any change of
current in the circuit. ‘L’ does not play any role till there is a constant current
flowing in the circuit. ‘L’ comes in to the picture only when
11.1 Self Induction there is a change in current.
Whenever the electric current passing through a coil or (6) Magnetic potential energy of inductor : In building a
steady current in the circuit, the source emf has to do
circuit changes, the magnetic flux linked with it will also
work against of self inductance of coil and whatever
change. As a result of this, in accordance with Faraday’s energy consumed for this work stored in magnetic field
laws of electromagnetic induction, an emf is induced in of coil this energy called as magnetic potential energy (U)
the coil or the circuit which opposes the change that of coil
causes it. This phenomenon is called ‘self induction’ and i 1 2 1 Ni
the emf induced is called back emf, current so produced in U 0
Lidi
2
Li ; Also U Li i
2 2
the coil is called induced current.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
91
(7) The various formulae for L
11.2 Mutual Induction
Condition Figure
Whenever the current passing through a coil or circuit
changes, the magnetic flux linked with a neighbouring coil
or circuit will also change. Hence an emf will be induced in
Circular coil the neighbouring coil or circuit. This phenomenon is called
‘mutual induction’.
0 N 2 r
L
2
Solenoid
l
N 2r
L 0 0 n 2 A
i
(1) Coefficient of mutual induction : Total flux linked with the
secondary due to current in the primary is N22 and N22
2
Toroid L 0N r i1 N22= Mi1 where N1 - Number of turns in primary;
2
N2 - Number of turns in secondary; 2 - Flux linked with
each turn of secondary; i1 - Current flowing through primary;
M-Coefficient of mutual induction or mutual inductance.
(2) According to Faraday’s second law emf induces in
Square coil d 2 di
secondary e 2 N 2 ; e 2 M 1
dt dt
2 2 0 N 2 a
L di1 1Amp
(3) If then |e2| = M. Hence coefficient of mutual
dt sec
induction is equal to the emf induced in the secondary
Triangular coil
coil when rate of change of current in primary coil is unity.
0 18 Ni (4) Units and dimensional formula of M : Similar to self-
B .
4 inductance (L)
l l
(5) Dependence of mutual inductance
O
18Ni 3 2 (i) Number of turns (N1, N2) of both coils
N 0 .
4 4
l (ii) Coefficient of self inductances (L1, L2) of both the
L coils
i
(iii) Area of cross-section of coils
(iv) Magnetic permeability of medium between the coils
9 3 0 N 2
L L N2 (r) or nature of material on which two coils are
8
wound
r (v) Distance between two coils (As d increases so M
Coaxial cylinders decreases)
r
L 0 log e 2 l (vi) Orientation between primary and secondary coil (for
2r r1 r2
90o orientation no flux relation M = 0)
2.303 r (vii) Coupli ng fact or ‘K’ b etween pri ma ry and
0 log10 2
2r r1 secondary coil
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
92
(6) Relation between M, L1 and L2 : For two magnetically (7) The various formulae for M :
coupled coils M K L1L 2 ; where k – coefficient of Condition Figure
coupling or coupling factor which is defined as
Two concentric coplaner
Magnetic flux linked in sec ondary circular coils
K ;
Magnetic flux linked in primary 0 N1 N 2 r 2
M
0 K 1 2R
l
Two Solenoids
0 N1 N 2 A
M i1 Secondary
(N2 turns)
Primary
(N 1 turns)
Two concentric
coplaner square coils
0 2 2 N1 N 2 2
M
L
12. COMBINATION OF INDUCTANCE
(1) Series : If two coils of self-inductances L1 and L2 having mutual inductance are in series and are far from each other, so that the
mutual induction between them is negligible, then net self inductance LS = L1 + L2
When they are situated close to each other, then net inductance LS = L1 + L2 ± 2M
Mutual induction is absent (k = 0) Mutual induction is present and Mutual induction is present and
favours self inductance of coils opposes self inductance of coils
L1 L2
(CW) M (CW)
i
Leq = L1 + L2
Current in same direction Current in opposite direction
Winding nature same Opposite winding nature
Their flux assist each other Their flux opposes each other
Leq = L1 + L2 + 2M Leq = L1 + L2 – 2M
L1L 2
(2) Parallel : If two coils of self-inductances L1 and L2 having LP
mutual inductance are connected in parallel and are far L1 L 2
1 1 1 When they are situated close to each other, then
from each other, then net inductance L is
L P L1 L 2 L1L 2 M 2
LP
L1 L 2 2M
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
93
Mutual induction is absent (k = 0) Mutual induction is present and Mutual induction is present and
favours self inductance of coils opposes self inductance of coil
L1 L 2 L1L 2 M 2 L1L 2 M 2
L eq L eq L eq
L1 L 2 L1 L 2 2M L1 L 2 2M
13. GROWTH AND DECAY OF CURRENT IN LR- CIRCUIT i i
i0
If a circuit containing a pure inductor L and a resistor R in series i0
i = 0.63i0
with a battery and a key then on closing the circuit current
through the circuit rises exponentially and reaches up to a certain i = 0.37i0
t t
maximum value (steady state). If circuit is opened from it’s steady t= t=
state condition then current through the circuit decreases (A) (B)
exponentially.
L L
(4) Behaviour of inductor : The current in the circuit grows
exponentially with time from 0 to the maximum value
Induced Induced
E
Main Main i . Just after closing the switch as i = 0, inductor act
+ +
R
B K B K
(A) Growth of current (B) Decay of current as open circuit i.e. broken wires and long after the switch
has been closed as i = i0, the inductor act as a short circuit
(1) The value of current at any instant of time t after closing
i.e. a simple connecting wire.
the circuit (i.e. during the rising of current) is given by
t
R
E R L R
i i 0 1 e L ; where i 0 i max = steady state current.
R
i=0 i=0
(2) The value of current at any instant of time t after opening
from the steady state condition (i.e. during the decaying
E Initially E S i
R
t
Just after closing S
of current) is given by i i 0 e L R
L
(3) Time constant () : It is given as ; It’s unit is second. i = E/R
R
In other words the time interval, during which the current
in an inductive circuit rises to 63% of its maximum value at E S i
Long after closing S
make, is defined as time constant or it is the time interval,
during which the current after opening an inductive circuit
falls to 37% of its maximum value.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
94
14. LC- OSCILLATION 1
or v Hz
2 LC
When a charged capacitor C having an initial charge q0 is
discharged through an inductance L, the charge and current in the L
circuit start oscillating simple harmonically. If the resistance of
the circuit is zero, no energy is dissipated as heat. We also assume
an idealized situation in which energy is not radiated away from qo
+ –
the circuit. The total energy associated with the circuit is constant.
C
1 rad The oscillation of the LC circuit are an electromagnetic analog to
Frequency of oscillation is given by
LC sec the mechanical oscillation of a block-spring system.
i=0
C +q0 v=0
++ + +
E At t = 0, capacitor is ready At t = 0, block is
t=0 L to discharge k
–q0 ready to move
– – –– m
A
S x=0
i = imax
C vmax
T T
At t = — At t = —
4 , block comes in it's
T q=0 4 , capacitor is fully k
t=— L
4
discharged i.e. charge q = 0 and m mean position i.e. x = 0 and
current through the circuit is velocity of block becomes
B
maximum A maximum
S x=0
v=0
T
At t = — ,block reaches it's
k 2
m extreme position other side and
v=0
A
x=0
i = imax
C vmax
3T 3T
At t = — , capacitor again At t = —
3T
t=—
q=0 4
k 4 , block again reaches
4 L
discharges completely i = imax m it's mean position and it's velocity
B becomes maximum
A
S x=0
i = imax
C v=0
3T , capacitor again
At t = — 3T
3T q=0 4 At t = —4 , block again reaches
t=— L k
4
discharges completely i = imax m it's mean position and it's velocity
B becomes maximum
A
S x=0
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
95
15. DC MOTOR (5) Current in the motor : i E e E k ; When motor
R R
It is an electrical machine which converts electrical energy E
is just switched on i.e. = 0 so e = 0 hence i =
into mechanical energy. R
maximum and at full speed, is maximum so back emf e is
(1) Principle : It is based on the fact that a current carrying
maximum and i is minimum. Thus, maximum current is drawn
coil placed in the magnetic field experiences a torque. This
when the motor is just switched on which decreases when
torque rotates the coil.
motor attains the speed.
(6) Motor starter : At the time of start a large current flows
through the motor which may burn out it. Hence a starter
is used for starting a dc motor safely. Its function is to
introduce a suitable resistance in the circuit at the time of
starting of the motor. This resistance decreases gradually
(2) Construction : It consists of the following components and reduces to zero when the motor runs at full speed.
figure.
R R R R R
C 2 3 4 5 6
1
H
Spring E
M
dc mains
The value of starting resistance is maximum at time t = 0
and its value is controlled by spring and electromagnetic
ABCD = Armature coil, S1, S2 = split ring comutators system and is made to zero when the motor attains its safe
B1, B2 = Carbon brushes, N, S = Strong magnetic poles speed.
(7) Mechanical power and Efficiency of dc motor :
(3) Working : Force on any arm of the coil is given by
F i B in fig., force on AB will be perpendicular to Efficiency
Pmechanical Pout
Psup plied
Pin
e
Back e.m.f .
E Supply voltage
plane of the paper and pointing inwards. Force on CD will
(8) Uses of dc motors : They are used in electric locomotives,
be equal and opposite. So coil rotates in clockwise sense
electric ears, rolling mills, electric cranes, electric lifts, dc
when viewed from top in fig. The current in AB reverses drills, fans and blowers, centrifugal pumps and air
due to commutation keeping the force on AB and CD in compressors, etc.
such a direction that the coil continues to rotate in the
same direction. 16. DC GENERATOR
(4) Back emf in motor : Due to the rotation of armature coil in If the current produced by the generator is direct current,
magnetic field a back emf is induced in the circuit. Which then the generator is called dc generator.
is given by e = E – iR. DC generator consists of
(i) Armature (coil) (ii) Magnet
Back emf directly depends upon the angular velocity of (iii) Commutator (iv) Brushes
armature and magnetic field B. But for constant magnetic In dc generator commutator is used in place of slip rings.
field B, value of back emf e is given by e or e = k The commutator rotates along with the coil so that in every
cycle when direction of ‘e’ reverses, the commutator also
(e = NBA sint)
reverses or makes contact with the other brush so that in
the external load the current remains in the some direction
giving dc
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
96
7. If an aeroplane is landing down or taking off and its wings
Armature (Coil)
are in the east-west direction, then the potential difference
or emf will be induced across the wings. If an aeroplane is
landing down or taking off and its wings are in the north-
south direction, then no potential difference or emf will be
S N induced.
Commutator
Brushes 8. When a conducting rod moving horizontally on equator
+ – of earth no emf induces because there is no vertical
component of earth’s magnetic field. But at poles BV is
maximum so maximum flux cutting hence emf induces.
Load
9. When a conducting rod falling freely in earth’s magnetic
TIPS AND TRICKS field such that it’s length lies along East - West direction
then induced emf continuously increases w.r.t. time and
1. If a bar magnet moves towards a fixed conducting coil, induced current flows from West - East.
then due to the flux changes an emf, current and charge
induces in the coil. If speed of magnet increases then 10. 1 henry = 109 emu of inductance or 109 ab-henry.
induced emf and induced current increases but induced 11. Inductance at the ends of a solenoid is half of it’s the
charge remains same
1
inductance at the centre. L end L centre .
2
12. A thin long wire made up of material of high resistivity
behaves predominantly as a resistance. But it has some
amount of inductance as well as capacitance in it. It is
thus difficult to obtain pure resistor. Similarly it is difficult
to obtain pure capacitor as well as pure inductor.
Induced parameter : e1, i1, q1 - e2 ( > e1), i2( > i1), q2 (= q1)
13. Due to inherent presence of self inductance in all
2. Can ever electric lines of force be closed curve ? Yes,
electrical circuits, a resistive circuit with no capacitive
when produced by a changing magnetic field.
or inductive element in it, also has some inductance
3. No flux cutting No EMI associated with it.
4. Vector form of motional emf : e v B The effect of self-inductance can be eliminated as in the
coils of a resistance box by doubling back the coil on itself.
5. In motional emf B, v and are three vectors. If any two
vector are parallel – No flux cutting.
14. It is not possible to have mutual inductance without self
inductance but it may or may not be possible self
inductance without mutual inductance.
di
6. A piece of metal and a piece of non-metal are dropped from 15. If main current through a coil increases (i) so will be
the same height near the surface of the earth. The non- dt
metallic piece will reach the ground first because there will positive (+ve), hence induced emf e will be negative (i.e.
be no induced current in it. opposite emf) Enet = E – e
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
97
ALTERNATING CURRENT
1. THE ALTERNATING CURRENT
The magnitude of alternating current changes
16. Sometimes at sudden opening of key, because of high continuously with time and its direction is reversed
periodically. It is represented by
inductance of circuit a high momentarily induced emf
produced and a sparking occurs at key position. To I I 0 sin t or I I 0 cos t
avoid sparking a capacitor is connected across the key.
17. Sometimes at sudden opening of key, because of high 2
inductance of circuit a high momentarily induced emf 2v
T
produced and a sparking occurs at key position. To
avoid sparking a capacitor is connected across the key.
2. AVERAGE VALUE OF ALTERNATING CURRENT
18. One can have resistance with or without inductance but
one can’t have inductance without having resistance. The mean or average value of alternating current over any
19. The circuit behaviour of an inductor is quite different from half cycle is defined as that value of steady current which
that of a resistor. while a resistor opposes the current i, an would send the same amount of charge through a circuit in
di the time of half cycle (i.e. T/2) as is sent by the alternating
inductor opposes the change in the circuit. current through the same circuit, in the same time.
dt
To calculate the mean or average value, let an alternating
i i current be represented by
a b a b
R L I = I0 sin t ...(1)
Vab = iR di
Vab = L — If the strength of current is assumed to remain constant
dt for a small time, dt, then small amount of charge sent in a
small time dt is
20. In RL-circuit with dc source the time taken by the current
dq = I dt ...(2)
to reach half of the maximum value is called half life time
Let q be the total charge sent by alternating current in the
L first half cycle (i.e. 0 T/2).
and it is given by T = 0.693 .
R T/2
21. dc motor is a highly versatile energy conversion device. It q I dt
0
can meet the demand of loads requiring high starting T/2
cos t
T/2
torque, high accelerating and decelerating torque. Using (1), we get, q 0
I0 sin t.dt I 0
0
22. When a source of emf is connected across the two ends of
the primary winding alone or across the two ends of I0 T
cos cos 0
secondary winding alone, ohm’s law can be applied. But 2
in the transformer as a whole, ohm’s law should not be
10
applied because primary winding and secondary winding cos cos 0 T 2
are not connected electrically.
I0 2I
23. Even when secondary circuit of the transformer is open it q 1 1 0 ...(3)
also draws some current called no load primary current for
If Im represents the mean or average value of alternating
supplying no load Cu and iron loses.
current over the 1st half cycle, then
24. Transformer has highest possible efficiency out of all the T
electrical machines. q Im ...(4)
2
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
98
T I 2 I .T 3.1 Phasor Diagram
From (3) and (4), we get I m 2 0 0 ...(5)
2 2
In the a.c. circuit containing R only, current and voltage
2
or Im I0 0.637 I0 are in the same phase. Therefore, in figure, both phasors
Hence, mean or average value of alternating current over I0 and E 0 are in the same direction making an angle (t)
positive half cycle is 0.637 times the peak value of with OX. This is so for all times. It means that the phase
alternating current, i.e., 63.7% of the peak value. angle between alternating voltage and alternating current
through R is zero.
3. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTAINING RESISTANCE ONLY
I = I0 sin t and E = E0 sin t.
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to a pure
resistance R, Figure. Suppose the alternating e.m.f. 4. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTAINING INDUCTANCE ONLY
supplied is represented by
E = E0 sin t ...(1) In an a.c. circuit containing L only alternating current I
lags behind alternating voltage E by a phase angle of 90°,
Let I be the current in the circuit at any instant t. The
i.e., by one fourth of a period. Conversely, voltage across
potential difference developed across R will be IR. This
L leads the current by a phase angle of 90°. This is shown
must be equal to e.m.f. applied at that instant, i.e.,
in figure.
IR = E = E0 sin t
L
R
(a)
(a)
E0
E0 I
E
I0 I
I = I 0 sin O 90° O
O O E
I0
(b) (c)
(b) (c)
Figure (b) represents the vector diagram or the phasor
diagram of a.c. circuit containing L only. The vector
E0
or I sin t I 0 sin t ...(2) representing E 0 makes an angle (t) with OX. As current
R
lags behing the e.m.f. by 90°, therefore, phasor representing
where I0 = E0/R, maximum value of current.
I0 is turned clockwise through 90° from the direction of
This is the form of alternating current developed.
v
Comparing I0 = E0/R with Ohm’s law equation, viz. current E 0 . I I0 sin t , I0 0 , XL = L
2 xL
= voltage/resistance, we find that resistance to a.c. is
represented by R–which is the value of resistance to d.c. A pure inductance offer zero resistance to dc. It means a
pure inductor cannot reduce dc. The units of inductive
Hence behaviour of R in d.c. and a.c. circuit is the same, R reactance
can reduce a.c. as well as d.c. equally effectively.
1 1 1
XL = L (henry) = ohm
Comparing (2) and (1), we find that E and I are in phase. sec sec amp / sec
Therefore, in an a.c. circuit containing R only, the voltage The dimensions of inductive reactance are the same as
and current are in the same phase, as shown in figure. those of resistance.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
99
5. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTAINING CAPACITANCE ONLY
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to a
E0
capacitor only of capacitance C, figure. Suppose the
E
alternating e.m.f. supplied is I0 90°
E = E0 sin t ...(1) O
I = I 0 sin I
The current flowing in the circuit transfers charge to the
plates of the capacitor. This produces a potential difference
between the plates. The capacitor is alternately charged (b) (c)
and discharged as the current reverses each half cycle. At
any instant t, suppose q is the charge on the capacitor.
Comparing (3) with Ohm’s law equation, viz current = voltage/
Therefore, potential difference across the plates of
capacitor V = q/C. resistance, we find that (1/ C) represents effective resistance
At every instant, the potential difference V must be equal offered by the capacitor. This is called capacitative reactance
to the e.m.f. applied i.e. and is denoted by XC.
q 1 1
V E E 0 sin t Thus X C
C C 2vC
or q = C0 sin t The capacitative reactance limits the amplitude of current in a
If I is instantaneous value of current in the circuit at instant purely capacitative circuit in the same way as the resistance
t, then limits the current in a purely resistive circuit. Clearly, capacitative
reactance varies inversely as the frequency of a.c. and also
dq d
I (C0 sin t) inversely as the capacitance of the condenser.
dt dt
In a d.c. circuit, v = 0, XC =
I = CE0 (cos t)
E0 1 1 sec volt sec .
I sin t / 2 Xc sec ohm
...(2) C farad coulomb / volt amp. sec
1 / C
The current will be maximum i.e.
I = I0, when sin (t + /2) = maximum = 1
6. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTAINING RESISTANCE,
INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE AND SERIES
E0
From (2), I 0 1 ...(3)
1 / C
6.1 Phasor Treatment
Put in (2), I = I0 sin (t + /2) ...(4)
This is the form of alternating current developed. Let a pure resistance R, a pure inductance L and an ideal
Comparing (4) with (1), we find that in an a.c. circuit capacitor of capacitance C be connected in series to a
containing C only, alternating current I leads the alternating source of alternating e.m.f., figure. As R, L, C are in series,
e.m.f. by a phase angle of 90°. This is shown in figure (b) therefore, current at any instant through the three elements
and (c). has the same amplitude and phase. Let it be represented
The phasor diagram or vector diagram of a.c. circuit containing by I = I0 sin t
C only in shown in figure (b). The phasor I0 is turned
anticlockwise through 90° from the direction of phasor E 0 .
Their projections on YOY’ give the instantaneous values
E and I as shown in figure (b). When E0 and I0 rotate with
frequency , curves in figure (c). are generated.
C
However, voltage across each element bears a different
(a) phase relationship with the current. Now,
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
100
(i) The maximum voltage across R is VR I0 R dI q
L RI = E = E sin t ...(2)
dt C 0
In figure, current phasor I0 is represented along OX.
dq dI d 2 q
As I , therefore,
dt dt dt 2
The voltage equation becomes
d 2q dq q
L R E 0 sin t ...(3)
dt 2 dt C
This is like the equation of a forced, damped oscillator. Let
the solution of equation (3) be
q = q0 sin (t + )
dq
q 0 cos t
dt
As VR is in phase with current, it is represented by the d 2q
q 0 2 sin t
vector OA , along OX. dt 2
Substituting these values in equation (3), we get
(ii) The maximum voltage across L is VL I0 X L 2
L [–q0 sin (t + )] + R q0 cos (t + )
As voltage across the inductor leads the current by 90°, it
is represented by OB along OY, 90° ahead of I0 . q0
sin (t ) E 0 sin t
C
(iii) The maximum voltage across C is VC I0 X C
As voltage across the capacitor lags behind the alternating q 0 [R cos t L sin t
current by 90°, it is represented by OC rotated clockwise 1
sin t ] E 0 sin t
C
through 90° from the direction of I0 . OC is along OY’.
1
6.2 Analytical Treatment of RLC series circuit As L = XL and XC , therefore
C
Let a pure resistance R, a pure inductance L and an ideal q0 [R cos (t + ) + (XC – XL) sin (t + )] = E0 sin t
condenser of capacity C be connected in series to a source
Multiplying and dividing by
of alternating e.m.f. Suppose the alterning e.m.f. supplied is
E = E0 sin t ...(1)
Z R 2 X C X L , we get
2
At any instant of time t, suppose
q = charge on capacitor
R X XL
I = current in the circuit q 0 Z cos t C sin t = E sin t
Z Z 0
dI
= rate of change of current in the circuit
dt ...(4)
potential difference across the condenser q R X XL
cos and C sin
C Let ...(5)
Z Z
dI
potential difference across inductor L XC XL
dt so that tan ...(6)
R
potential difference across resistance = RI
q0 Z[cos (t + ) cos + sin (t + ) sin ] = E0 sin t
The voltage equation of the circuit is
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
101
or q0 Z cos (t + – ) = E0 sin t = E0 cos (t – /2) ...(7)
Z R 2 X 2L
Comparing the two sides of this equation, we find that
We find that in RL circuit, voltage leads the current by a
E0 = q0 Z = I0 Z, where I0 q0 ...(8)
phase angle , where
and t + = t – /2
AK OL VL I 0 X L
tan
OA OA VR I0R
2
XL
or ...(9) tan
2 R
Current in the circuit is
8. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTAINING RESISTANCE
dq d AND CAPACITANCE
I q 0 sin t = q cos (t + )
dt dt 0
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to an ohmic
I = I0 cos (t + ) {using (8)} resistance R and a condenser of capacity C, in series as
shown in figure.
Using (9), we get, I = I0 cos (t + – /2)
I = I0 sin (t + ) ...(10) Z R 2 X C2
From (6), tan 1
X C X L ...(11)
R
2 2
As cos + sin = 1
2 2
R XC XL 2 2
1 or R2 + (XC – XL) = Z
Z Z
or Z R 2 (X C X L ) 2 ...(12)
7. A.C. CIRCUIT CONTING RESISTANCE & INDUCTANCE
Let a source of alternating e.m.f. be connected to an ohmic
resistance R and a coil of inductance L, in series as shown
in figure.
Figure represents phasor diagram of RC circuit. We find
that in RC circuit, voltage lags behind the current by a
phase angle , where
AK OC VC I 0 X C X
tan tan C
OA OA VR I0 R R
9. ENERGY STORED IN AN INDUCTOR
When a.c. is applied to an inductor of inductance L, the
current in it grows from zero to maximum steady value I0. If
I is the current at any instant t, then the magnitude of
induced e.m.f. developed in the inductor at that instant is
dI
EL ...(1)
dt
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
102
The self induced e.m.f. is also called the back e.m.f., as it 1 1
i.e., r L or r
opposes any change in the current in the circuit. r C LC
Physically, the self inductance plays the role of inertia. It 1
2 v r 1
is the electromagnetic analogue of mass in mechanics. or v r
LC 2 LC
Therefore, work needs to be done against the back e.m.f. E
in establishing the current. This work done is stored in the At this particular frequency vr, as XL = XC, therefore,
inductor as magnetic potential energy. from (1)
For the current I at an instant t, the rate of doing work is Z R 2 0 = R = minimum
dW i.e. impedance of RLC circuit is minimum and hence the
EI
dt E0 E0
current I 0 becomes maximum. This frequency
If we ignore the resistive losses, and consider only Z R
inductive effect, then is called series resonance frequency.
dW dI
Using (1), EI L I or dW = LI dI
dt dt
Total amount of work done in establishing the current I is
I
1 2
W dW LI dI
0
2
LI
Thus energy required to build up current in an inductor =
energy stored in inductor
1 2
UB W LI
2
The Q factor of series resonant circuit is defined as the
10. ELECTRIC RESONANCE
ratio of the voltage developed across the inductance or
capacitance at resonance to the impressed voltage,
10.1 Series Resonance Circuit
which is the voltage applied across R.
A circuit in which inductance L, capacitance C and resistance
voltage across L or C
R are connected in series, and the circuit admits maximum i.e. Q
applied voltage ( voltage across R )
current corresponding to a given frequency of a.c., is called
series resonance circuit.
Q
r L I r L
The impedance (Z) of an RLC circuit is given by RI R
Q
1 / r C I I
or
1
2
RI RC r
Z R 2 L ...(1)
C 1
Using r , we get
LC
At very low frequencies, inductive reactance XL = L is
negligible, but capacitative reactance (XC = 1/C) is very L 1 1 L
Q
high. R LC R C
As frequency of alternating e.m.f. applied to the circuit is 1 LC 1 L
increased, XL goes on increasing and XC goes on decreasing. or Q
RC R C
For a particular value of ( = r, say)
1 L
XL = XC Thus Q ...(1)
R C
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
103
W E 0 I 0 cos T E 0 I 0
The quantity r is regarded as a measure of P . cos
2 T T 2 2 2
sharpness of resonance, i.e., Q factor of resonance circuit P = Ev Iv cos ...(3)
is the ratio of resonance angular frequency to band width Hence average power over a complete cycle in an inductive
of the circuit (which is difference in angular frequencies at circuit is the product of virtual e.m.f., virtual current and
which power is half the maximum power or current is cosine of the phase angle between the voltage and current.
I0 / 2 . Note: -
The relation (3) is applicable to all a.c. circuits. cos and
10.2 Average Power in RLC circuit or Inductive Circuit
Z will have appropriate values for difference circuits.
Let the alternating e.m.f. applied to an RLC circuit be For example :
E = E0 sin t ...(1)
R
(i) In RL circuit, Z R 2 X 2L and cos
If alternating current developed lags behind the applied Z
e.m.f. by a phase angle , then
I = I0 sin (t – ) ...(2) R
(ii) In RC circuit, Z R 2 X C2 and cos
Z
dW
Power at instant t, EI (iii) In LC circuit, Z = XL – XC and = 90°
dt
R
dW (iv) In RLC circuit, Z R 2 X L X C 2 and cos
E 0 sin t I 0 sin t Z
dt
= E0 I0 sin t (sin t cos – cos t sin ) Ev
In all a.c. circuits, I v
2 Z
= E0I0 sin t cos – E0I0 sin t cos t sin
2 E 0I0 10.3 Power Factor of an A.C. Circuit
= E0I0 sin t cos sin 2 t sin
2 We have proved that average power/cycle in an inductive
If this instantaneous power is assumed to remain constant circuit is
for a small time dt, then small amount of work done in this P = EvIv cos ...(1)
time is
Here, P is called true power, (EvIv) is called apparent power
E I or virtual power and cos is called power factor of the
dW E 0 I 0 sin 2 t cos 0 0 sin 2 t sin dt circuit.
2
Total work done over a complete cycle is true power (P)
Thus, Power factor = cos ...(2)
T T
apparent power E v I v
E0I0
W E 0 I 0 sin 2 t cos dt 2
sin 2t sin dt
R
[from impedance triangle]
R X L X C
0 0 2
2
T T
E0I0
W E 0 I 0 cos sin 2 t dt
2
sin sin 2 t dt
Power factor = cos =
Resistance
0 0 Impedance
T T
T
As
0
sin 2 t dt
2
and sin t dt 0
0
In a non-inductance circuit, XL = XC
R R
T Power factor = cos = 1, 0 ...(4)
W E 0 I 0 cos R 2 R
2
Average power in the inductive circuit over a complete This is the maximum value of power factor. In a pure
cycle inductor or an ideal capacitor, = 90°
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
104
Power factor = cos = cos 90° = 0 Theory and Working : As the armature coil is rotated in the
Average power consumed in a pure inductor or ideal a magnetic field, angle between the field and normal to the
capacitor, P = Ev Iv cos 90° = Zero. Therefore, coil changes continuously. Therefore, magnetic flux linked
with the coil changes. An e.m.f. is induced in the coil.
current through pure L or pure C, which consumes no
power for its maintenance in the circuit is called Idle current To start with, suppose the plane of the coil is perpendicular
or Wattless current. to the plane of the paper in which magnetic field is applied,
In actual practice, we do not have ideal inductor or ideal with AB at front and CD at the back, figure (a). The amount
capacitor. Therefore, there does occur some dissipation of magnetic flux linked with the coil in this position is
of energy. However, inductance and capacitance continue maximum. As the coil is rotated anticlockwise (or
to be most suitable for controlling current in a.c. circuits clockwise), AB moves inwards and CD moves outwards.
with minimum loss of power. The amount of magnetic flux linked with the coil changes.
According to Fleming’s right hand rule, current induced
11. A.C. GENERATOR OR A.C. DYNAMO in AB is from A to B and in CD, it is from C to D. In the
external circuit, current flows from B2 to B1, figure (a)
An a.c. generator/dynamo is a machine which produces
alternating current energy from mechanical energy. It is
one of the most important applications of the phenomenon C
of electromagnetic induction. The generator was designed B
originally by a Yugoslav scientist, Nikola Tesla. The word
generator is a misnomer, because nothing is generated by
the machine. Infact, it is an alternator converting one form S N
of energy into another. I D
11.1 Principle
A
An a.c. generator/dynamo is based on the phenomenon
B1
of electromagnetic induction, i.e., whenever amount R1
of magnetic flux linked with a coil changes, an e.m.f. is
B2
induced in the coil. It lasts so long as the change in R2
magnetic flux through the coil continues. The direction of
current induced is given by Fleming’s right hand rule.
11.2 Construction R
(a)
The essential parts of an a.c. dynamo are shown in figure.
1. Armature : ABCD is a rectangular armatrue coil. It consists B
of a large number of turns of insulated copper wire wound
C
over a laminated soft iron core, I. The coil can be rotated
about the central axis.
2. Field Magnets : N and S are the pole pieces of a strong S N
electromagnet in which the armature coil is rotated. Axis I A
of rotation is perpendicular to the magnetic field lines.
The magnetic field is of the order of 1 to 2 tesla. D
3. Slip Rings : R1 and R2 are two hollow metallic rings, to
B1
which two ends of armature coil are connected. These R1
rings rotate with the rotation of the coil.
B2
4. Brushes : B1 and B2 are two flexible metal plates or carbon R2
rods. They are fixed and are kept in light contact with R1
and R2 respectively. The purpose of brushes is to pass
on current from the armature coil to the external load R
resistance R. (b)
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
105
After half the rotation of the coil, AB is at the back and The current supplied by the a.c. generator is also
CD is at the front, figure. Therefore, on rotating further, sinusoidal. It is given by
AB moves outwards and CD moves outwards and CD
moves inwards. The current induced in AB is from B to e e0
i sin t i 0 win t
A and in CD, it is from D to C. Through external circuit, R R
current flows from B1 to B2; figure (b). This is repeated. e0
Induced current in the external circuit changes direction where i 0 maximum value of current.
R
after every half rotation of the coil. Hence the current
induced is alternating in nature. Note: -
Suppose to start with, the plane of the coil is not
To calculate the magnitude of e.m.f. induced, suppose
perpendicular to the magnetic field. Therefore, at t = 0,
N = number of turns in the coil,
0. Let , the phase angle. This is the angle which
A = area enclosed by each turn of the coil
normal to the coil makes with the direction of B. The
B = strength of magnetic field equation (4) of e.m.f. induced in that case can be rewritten
as e = e0 sin (t + ).
= angle which normal to the coil makes with B at any
instant t, figure.
12. TRANSFORMER
Normal
Coil
A transformer which increases the a.c. voltage is called a
S N step up transformer, A transformer which decreases the
a.c. voltages is called a step down transformer.
Magnetic flux linked with the coil in this position 12.1 Principle
A transformer is based on the principle of mutual
N B . A NBA cos NBA cos t ...(1) induction, i.e., whenever the amount of magnetic flux
where is angular velocity of the coil. linked with a coil changes, an e.m.f. is induced in the
neighbouring coil.
As the coil is rotated, changes; therefore, magnetic flux
linked with the coil changes and hence an e.m.f. is 12.2 Construction
induced in the coil. A transformer consists of a rectangular soft iron core made
At the instant t, if e is the e.m.f. induced in the coil, then of laminated sheets, well insulated from one another, figure.
Two coils P1P2 (the primary coil) and S1S2 (the secondary
d d
e NAB cos t coil) are wound on the same core, but are well insulated
dt dt from each other. Note that both the coils are also insulated
d from the core. The source of alternating e.m.f. (to be
NAB cos t NAB sin t transformed) is connected to the primary coil P1P2 and a
dt
E = NAB sin t ...(2) load resistance R is connected to the secondary coil S1S2
through an open switch S. Thus, there can be no current
The induced e.m.f. will be maximum, when through the secondary coil so long as the switch is open.
sin t = maximum = 1
emax = e0 = NAB × 1 ...(3) S1
P1
Put in (2), e = e0 sin t ...(4)
Input
The variation of induced e.m.f. with time (i.e. with position A.C.
R Output
of the coil) is shown in figure.
P2 S2
Laminated Core
For an ideal transformer, we assume that the resistances
of the primary and secondary windings are negligible.
Further, the energy losses due to magnetic hysterisis in
the iron core is also negligible. Well designed high capacity
transformers may have energy losses as low as 1%.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
106
12.3 Theory and working Ep np
From (2),
Let the alternating e.m.f. supplied by the a.c. source Es ns
connected to primary be np Ip
Is Ip . ...(3)
Ep = E0 sin t ...(1) ns K
As we have assumed the primary to be a pure inductance For a step up transformer, Es > Ep ; K > 1 Is < Ip
with zero resistance, the sinusoidal primary current Ip lags
i.e. secondary current is weaker when secondary voltage
the primary voltage Ep by 90°. The primary’s power factor,
is higher, i.e., whatever we gain in voltage, we lose in
cos = 90° = 0. Therefore, no power is dissipated in primary.
current in the same ratio.
The alternating primary current induces an alternating
The reverse is true for a step down transformer.
magnetic flux B in the iron core. Because the core extends
through the secondary winding, the induced flux also n Es n s
From eqn. (3) I p I s s
extends through the turns of secondary. np R np
According to Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction,
the induced e.m.f. per turn (Eturn) is same for both, the 1 n ns
Using equation (2), we get I p .Ep s
primary and secondary. Also, the voltage Ep across the R np np
primary is equal to the e.m.f. induced in the primary, and 2
the voltage Es across the secondary is equal to the e.m.f. 1 n
Ip s Ep ...(4)
induced in the secondary. Thus, R n p
d B E p E s Ep
E turn This equation, has the form I p , where the
dt np ns R eq
2
Here, np ; ns represent total number of turns in primary and np
equivalent resistance Req is R eq R ...(5)
secondary coils respectively. ns
Thus Req is the value of load resistance as seen by the
ns
Es Ep ...(2) source/generator, i.e., the source/generator produces
np current Ip and voltage Ep as if it were connected to a
resistance Req.
If ns > np ; Es > Ep, the transformer is a step up transformer.
Similarly, when ns < np ; Es < Ep. The device is called a step Efficiency of a transformer is defined as the ratio of output
to the input power.
ns
down transformer. = K represents transformation ratio.
np Output power E s I s
i.e.,
Input power E p Ip
Note that this relation (2) is based on three assumptions
(i) the primary resistance and current are small, In an ideal transformer, where there is no power loss, = 1
(i.e. 100%). However, practically there are many energy
(ii) there is no leakage of magnetic flux. The same magnetic losses. Hence efficiency of a transformer in practice is
flux links both, the primary and secondary coil,
less than one (i.e. less than 100%).
(iii) the secondary current is small.
12.4 Energy Losses in a Transformer
Now, the rate at which the generator/source transfer energy
to the primary = IpEp. The rate at which the primary then Following are the major sources of energy loss in a
transfers energy to the secondary (via the alternating transformer :
magnetic field linking the two coils) is IsEs. 1. Copper loss is the energy loss in the form of heat in the
As we assume that no energy is lost along the way, copper coils of a transformer. This is due to Joule heating
conservation of energy requires that of conducting wires. These are minimised using thick wires.
2. Iron loss is the energy loss in the form of heat in the iron
Ep
IpEp = IsEs Is Ip core of the transformer. This is due to formation of eddy
Es currents in iron core. It is minimised by taking laminated
cores.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
107
3. Leakage of magnetic flux occurs inspite of best insulations.
Therefore, rate of change of magnetic flux linked with each
turn of S1S2 is less than the rate of change of magnetic flux
linked with each turn of P1P2. It can be reduced by winding
the primary and secondary coils one over the other.
4. Hysteresis loss. This is the loss of energy due to repeated
magnetisation and demagnetisation of the iron core when
a.c. is fed to it. The loss is kept to a minimum by using a
magnetic material which has a low hysteresis loss.
5. Magnetostriction, i.e., humming noise of a transformer.
Therefore, output power in the best transformer may be Now, we consider a different surface, i.e., a tiffin box shaped
surface without lid with its circular rim, which has the same
roughly 90% of the input power.
boundary as that of loop C1. The box does not touch to
13. DISPLACEMENT CURRENT the connecting wire and plate P of capacitor. The flat
circular bottom S of the tiffin box lies in between the
According to Ampere circuital law : capacitor plates. Figure (b). No conduction current is
passing through the tiffin box surface S, therefore I = 0.
the line integral of magentic field B around any closed
On applying Ampere’s circuital law to loop C1 of this tiffin
path is equal to 0 times the total current threading the box surface, we have
closed path, i.e.,
Q
C
B. d 0 I
...(1) R
+
+
–
–
I r + – I
Consider a parallel plate capacitor having plates P and Q + –
+ –
connected to a battery B, through a tapping key K. When + –
C1 + –
key K is pressed, the conduction current flows through S
the connecting wires. The capacitor starts storing charge.
As the charge on the capacitor grows, the conduction B K
current in the wires decreases. When the capacitor is (b)
fully charged, the conduction current stops flowing in
the wires. During charging of capacitor, there is no
conduction current between the plates of capacitor.
C
B . d = B 2r = 0 × 0 = 0 or B = 0 ...(3)
During charging, let at an instant, I be the conduction From (2) and (3), we note that there is a magnetic field at R
current in the wires. This current will produce magnetic calculated through one way and no magnetic field at R,
field around the wires which can be detected by using a calculated through another way. Since this contradition
compass needle. arises from the use of Ampere’s circuital law, hence
Let us find the magnetic field at point R which is at a Ampere’s circuital law is logically inconsisten.
perpendicular distance r from connecting wire in a region If at the given instant of time, q is the charge on the plate
outside the parallel plate capacitor. For this we consider a of capacitor and A is the plate area of capacitor, the
plane circular loop C1, of radius r, whose centre lies on magnitude of the electric field between the plates of
wire and its plane is perpendicular to the direction of current q
capacitor is E
carrying wire (figure a). The magnitude of the magnetic 0 A
field is same at all points on the loop and is acting This field is perpendicular to surface S. It has the same
tangentially along the circumference of the loop. If B is magnitude over the area A of the capacitor plates and
the magnitude of magnetic field at R, then using Ampere’s becomes zero outside the capacitor. The electric flux
circuital law, for loop C1, we have through surface S is,
1 q q
0I
C1
B.d
C1
B d cos 0 = B 2 r = 0 I or B
2 r
...(2) E E . A EA cos 0
0 A
A
0 ...(4)
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
108
dq
If is the rate of change of charge with time on the plate
dt
of the capacitor, then
d E d q 1 dq
dt
dt dt 0 0
dq d E
or 0
dt dt
Due to battery B, let the conduction current I be flowing
dq through the lead wires at any instant, but there is no
Here, = current through surface S corresponding to conduction current across the capacitor gap, as no charge
dt
changing electric field = ID, called Maxwell’s displacement is transported across this gap.
current. Thus, For loop C1, there is no electric flux, i.e., E = 0 and
displacement current is that current which comes into play d E
0
in the region in which the electric field and the electric flux dt
is changing with time.
d E
d E I I D I 0 I 0 0 I ...(7)
I D 0 ...(5) dt
dt
For loop C2, there is no conduction current, i.e., I = 0
Maxwell modified Ampere’s circuital law in order to make
the same logically consistent. He stated Ampere’s circuital d E
I + ID = 0 + ID = ID = 0 ...(8)
law to the form, dt
At the given instant if q is the magnitude of charge on the
B.d 0 I I D 0 I 0 d E ...(6)
plates of the capacitor of area A, then electric field E in the
dt gap between the two plates of this capacitor is given by
This is called Ampere Maxwell’s Law. q q
E E
0 A
0 0 A
14. CONTINUITY OF CURRENT
q q
Maxwell’s modification of Ampere’s circuital law gives that Electric flux, E EA A
0 A 0
B . d 0 I I D d
C Thus from (8), we have I + ID = 0 q / 0 dq I ...(9)
dt dt
d E From (7) and (9), we conclude that the sum (I + ID) has the
where I D 0 , called displacement current, I is the
dt same value on the left and right side of plate P of the
conduction current and E is the electric flux across the parallel plate capacitor. Hence (I + ID) has the property of
loop C. continuity although individually they may not be
The sum of the conduction current and displacement continuous.
current (i.e., I + I D) has the important property of
continuity along any closed path although individually 15. CONSEQUENCES OF DISPLACEMENT CURRENT
they may not be continuous. The discovery of displacement current is of great
To prove it, consider a parallel plate capacitor having importance as it has established a symmetry between the
plates P and Q, being charged with battery B. During the laws of electricity and magnetism. Faraday’s law of
time, charging is taking place, let at an instant, I be the electromagnetic induction states that the magnitude of
conduction current flowing through the wires. Let C1 the emf induced in a coil is equal to the rate of change of
and C2 be the two loops, which have exactly the same magnetic flux linked with it. Since, the emf between two
boundary as that of the plates of capacitor. C1 is little points A and B is the measure of maximum workdone in
towards left and C2 is a little towards right of the plate P taking a unit charge from point A to B, therefore, the
of parallel plate capacitor, figure. existence of an emf shows the existence of an electric field.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
109
It is due to this fact, Faraday concluded that a changing
magnetic field with time gives rise to an electric field.
The Maxwell’s concept that a changing electric field with
time gives rise to displacement current which also
produces a magnetic field similar to that of conduction
current. It is infact, a symmetrical counterpart of the
Faraday’s concept, which led Maxwell to conclude that
the displacement current is also a source of magnetic
field. It means the time varying electric and magnetic
fields give rise to each other. From these concepts,
Maxwell concluded the existence of electromagnetic
wave in a region where electric and magnetic fields were where 0 and 0 are permeability and permittivity of the
changing with time. free space respectively.
–7 –1 –1
We know, 0 = 4× 10 Wb A m ;
16. MAXWELL’S EQUATIONS AND LORENTZ FORCE
–2 2 –1 –2
0 = 8.85 × 10 C N m
In the absence of any dielectric or magnetic material, the 8 –1
four Maxwell’s equations are given below ? Putting these values in (10), we have c = 3.00 × 10 ms
where are the absolute permeability and absolute
(i)
S
E . d s q / 0 . This equation is Gauss’s Law in permittivity of the medium. We also know that = 0r and
0 r where 0 , r are the relative permeability and
electrostatics.
relative permittivity of the medium.
The electric lines of force do not form continuous closed
path.
1 c 1
Therefore, v c
0 r 0 r r r 0 0
(ii)
B . ds 0 .
S
This equation is Gauss’s Law in
Maxwell also concluded that electromagnetic wave is
magnetostatics.
transverse in nature and light is electromagnetic wave.
The magnetic lines of force always form closed paths.
17. VELOCITY OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
d
(iii) E .d
dt sB . d s . This equation is Faraday’s law of
Consider a plane electromagnetic wave propagating along
positive direction of X–axis in space with speed c. Since
electromagnetic induction.
in electromagnetic wave, the electric and magnetic fields
The line integral of electric field around any closed path are transverse to the direction of wave propagation,
(i.e., the emf) is equal to the time rate of change of magnetic therefore, the electric and magnetic fields are in Y–Z plane.
flux through the surface bounded by the closed path.
Let the electric field E be acting along Y–axis and
d
(iv) B . d 0 I 0 0dt s
E . d s . This equation is magnetic field B along Z–axis.
generalised form of Ampere’s law as Modified by
At any instant, the electric and magnetic fields varying
Maxwell and is also known as Ampere-Maxwell law.
sinusoidally with x and t can be represented by the
The electromagnetic waves are those wave in which equations.
there are sinusoidal variation of electric and magnetic
field vectors at right angles to each other as well as at E = Ey = E0 sin (t – x/c) ...(1)
right angles to the direction of wave propagation. B = Bz = B0 sin (t – x/c) ...(2)
1 Here E0 and B0 are the amplitudes of electric and magnetic
c ...(10)
0 0 fields along Y–axis and Z–axis respectively. Consider a
rectangular path PQRS in X–Y plane as shown in figure.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
110
Consider a rectangular path PUTQ in the X–Z plane as
The line integral of E over the closed path PQRS will be
shown in figure. The line integral of B over the closed
path PUTQ, we have
Q R S P
PQRS
P
Q
E .d E , d E , d E , d E , d
R
S U T Q P
B.d B.d B.d B.d B.d
0 E x 2 0 E x1
PUTQ P U T Q
B x 1 0 B x 2 0
x x
E 0 sin t 2 sin t 1 ...(3)
c c x x
B0 sin t 1 sin t 2 ...(6)
c c
Magnetic flux linked with surface surrounded by
rectangular path PQRS will be The electric flux linked with the surface surrounded by
rectangular path PUTQ is
x2 x2
x
B Bx dx B sin t c dx
0 x2 x2 x2
x
x1 x1 E E . ds E x dx E 0 sin t dx
x1 x1 x1
c
B0 c x2 x
cos t cos t 1
c c
c x x
E 0 cos t 2 cos t 1
d B B 0 c x2 x c c
sin t sin t 1
dt c c
d E x x
or cE 0 sin t 2 sin t 1
x x dt c c
B 0 c sin t 2 sin t 1 ...(4)
c c
x x
Using Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction, we have c E 0 sin t 1 sin t 2 ...(7)
c c
d B In space, there is no conduction current. According to
E .d dt Ampere Maxwell law in space
Putting the values from (3) and (4), we get d E
E0 = cB0 ...(5)
B.d
PUTQ
0 0
dt
Since E and B are in phase, we can write. Putting values from (6) and (7), we get
E = c B at any point in space.
B 0 0 0 cE 0 0 0 c cB 0
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
111
1 1 B 02
or 1 0 0 c 2 or c ...(8) In terms of maximum magnetic field, u av ,
0 0 2 0
Which is the speed of electromagnetic waves in vacuum. 1 B 20 1 2
so I c B rms c
–7 –1 2 0 0
For vacuum, 0 = 4 × 10 T mA
19. ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM
1
and 9 10 9 Nm 2 C 2
4 0 After the experimental discovery of electromagnetic waves
by Hertz, many other electromagntic waves were
1
or 0 N 1m 2 C 2 discovered by different ways of excitation.
4 9 10 9
The orderly distribution of electromagnetic radiations
Putting the value in (8), we get according to their wavelength or frequency is called the
1 electromagnetic spectrum.
c 3 10 8 m / s
7
4 10 1 / 4 9 10 9
The electromagnetic spectrum has much wider range with
–14 2
wavelength variation ~ 10 m to 6 × 10 m. The whole
which is exactly the speed of light in vacuum. electromagnetic spectrum has been classified into different
This shows that light is an electromagnetic wave. parts and subparts in order of increasing wavelength,
according to their type of excitation. There is overlapping
18. INTENSITY OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE in certain parts of the spectrum, showing that the
corresponding radiations can be produced by two
Intensity of electromagnetic wave at a point is defined as
methods. It may be noted that the physical properties of
the energy crossing per second per unit area normally
electromagnetic waves are decided by their wavelengths
around that point during the propagation of electromagnetic
and not by the method of their excitation.
wave.
Consider the propagation of electromagnetic wave with A table given below shows the various parts of the
speed c along the X–axis. Take an imaginary cylinder of electromagnetic spectrum with approximate wavelength
area of cross-section A and length c t, so that the wave range, frequency range, their sources of production and
crosses the area A normally. Figure. Let uav be the average detections.
energy density of electromagnetic wave.
20. MAIN PARTS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM
The electromagnetic spectrum has been broadly classified
into following main parts; mentioned below in the order of
increasing frequency.
20.1 Radiowaves
Theses are the electromagnetic wave of frequency range
5 9
from 5 × 10 Hz to 10 Hz. These waves are produced by
The energy of electromagnetic wave (U) crossing the area oscillating electric circuits having an inductor and
of cross-section at P normally in time t is the energy of capacitor.
wave contained in a cylinder of length c t and area of Uses : The various frequency ranges are used for different
cross-section A. It is given by U = uav (c t) A types of wireless communication systems as mentioned below
The intensity of electromagnetic wave at P is, (i) The electromagnetic waves of frequency range from 530
kHz to 1710 kHz form amplitude modulated (AM) band. It is
U u ct A used in ground wave propagation.
I av u av c
A t A t (ii) The electromagnetic waves of frequency range 1710 kHz
1 to 54 Mhz are used for short wave bands. It is used in sky
In terms of maximum electric field, u av 0 E 20 ,
2 wave propagation.
1 (iii) The electromagnetic waves of frequency range 54 Mhz to
so, I 0 E 02 c 0 E 2rms c
2 890 MHz are used in television waves.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
112
(iv) The electromagnetic waves of frequency range 88 MHz to 20.5 Ultraviolet rays
108 MHzfromfrequency modulated (FM) radio band. It is
The ultraviolet rays were discovered by Ritter in 1801. The
used for commercial FM radio. 14 16
frequency range of ultraviolet rays is 8 × 10 Hz to 5 × 10
(v) The electromagnetic waves of frequency range 300 MHz
to 3000 MHz form ultra high frequency (UHF) band. It is Hz. The ultraviolet rays are produced by sun, special lamps
used in cellular phones communication. and very hot bodies. Most of the ultraviolet rays coming
from sun are absorbed by the ozone layer in the earth’s
20.2 Microwaves atmosphere. The ultraviolet rays in large quantity produce
Microwaves are the electromagnetic waves of frequency harmful effect on human eyes.
range 1 GHz to 300 GHz. They are produced by special Uses : Ultraviolet rays are used :
vacuum tubes. namely ; klystrons, magnetrons and Gunn (i) for checking the mineral samples through the property of
diodes etc. ultraviolet rays causing flourescence.
Uses :
(i) Microwaves are used in Radar systems for air craft (ii) in the study of molecular structure and arrangement of
navigation. electrons in the external shell through ultraviolet
(ii) A radar using microwave can help in detecting the speed absorption spectra.
of tennis ball, cricket ball, automobile while in motion. (iii) to destroy the bacteria and for sterilizing the surgical
(iii) Microwave ovens are used for cooking purposes. instruments.
(iv) Microwaves are used for observing the movement of trains (iv) in burglar alarm.
on rails while sitting in microwave operated control rooms.
(v) in the detection of forged documents, finger prints in
20.3 Infrared waves forensic laboratory.
Infrared waves were discovered by Herschell. These are (vi) to preserve the food stuff.
11
the electromagnetic waves of frequency range 3 × 10 Hz
14
to 4 × 10 Hz. Infrared waves sometimes are called as 20. 6 X–rays
heat waves. Infrared waves are produced by hot bodies The X–rays were discovered by German Physicst W.
and molecules. These wave are not detected by human 16 21
Roentgen. Their frequency range is 10 Hz to 3 × 10 Hz.
eye but snake can detect them. These are produced when high energy electrons are
Uses : stopped suddenly on a metal of high atomic number.
Infrared waves are used : X–rays have high penetrating power.
(i) in physical therapy, i.e., to treat muscular strain.
Uses : X–rays are used :
(ii) to provide electrical energy to satellite by using solar cells
(iii) for producing dehydrated fruits (i) In surgery for the detection of fractures, foreign bodies
(iv) for taking photographs during the condition of fog, smoke like bullets, diseased organs and stones in the human body.
etc. (ii) In Engineering (i) for detecting faults, cracks, flaws and
(v) in green houses to keep the plants warm holes in final metal products (ii) for the testing of weldings,
(vi) in revealing the secret writings on the ancient walls casting and moulds.
(vii) in solar water heaters and cookers (iii) In Radio therapy, to cure untracable skin diseases and
(viii) in weather forecasting through infra red photography malignant growth.
(ix) in checking the purity of chemcials and in the study of
(iv) In detective departments (i) for detection of explosives,
molecular structure by taking infrared absorption spectrum.
opium, gold and silver in the body of smugglers.
20.4 Visible light (v) In Industry (i) for the detection of pearls in oysters and
It is the narrow region of electromagnetic spectrum, which defects in rubber tyres, gold and tennis balls etc. (ii) for
is detected by the human eye. Its frequency is ranging testing the uniformity of insulating material.
14 14
from 4×10 Hz to 8×10 Hz. It is produced due to atomic (vi) In Scientific Research (i) for the investigation of structure
excitation. of crystal, arrangement of atoms and molecules in the
The visible light emitted or reflected from objects around complex substances.
us provides the information about the world surrounding us.
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
113
(i) in the treatment of cancer and tumours.
20.7 -rays
(ii) to preserve the food stuffs for a long time as the soft –
–rays are the electromagnetic waves of frequency range rays can kill microorganisms easily.
18 22
3 × 10 Hz to 5 × 10 Hz. –rays have nuclear origin.
(iii) to produce nuclear reactions.
These rays are highly energetic and are produced by the
nucleus of the radioactive substances. (iv) to provide valuable information about the structure of
atomic nucleus.
Uses : –rays are used :
SCAN CODE
EMI & AC
EMI & AC
114
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Explain why resistance coils are usually double
wound.
Sol. The resistance coils are double wound to avoid induction
effects. Magnetic field due to current in one half of the
coil is cancelled by magnetic field due to current in the
other half of the coil (which is in opposite direction).
Example - 2
A bar magnet falls through a metal ring. Will its
acceleration be equal to ‘g’ ?
Sol. No, acceleration of the magnet will not be equal to g. It will
be less than ‘g’. This is because as the magnet falls, amount
of magnetic flux linked with the ring changes. An induced
current is developed in the ring which opposes the
downward motion of the magnet. After the magnet has
crossed the metal ring, amount of magnetic flux linked
with the ring goes on decreasing. An induced current
developes in the ring and opposes the fall of the magnet.
Therefore, downward acceleration of the magnet continues
to be less than ‘g’.
Sol. As coils B and C are fixed, there is no induced current in
Example - 3
B due to C. However, when A is moved towards B, an
e.m.f. is induced in B, which would oppose relative motion
In the above problem, if the ring is cut somewhere, what
of A towards B. As current in A is clockwise, induced
would be the answer ?
current in B must be anticlockwise.
Sol. If the metal ring is cut somewhere, e.m.f. will be induced, Example - 5
but no induced current can flow. Therefore, there will be
When current in a coil changes with time, how is the
no opposing force on the falling magnet. Hence
back e.m.f. induced in the coil related to it ?
acceleration of falling magnet will remain equal to ‘g’
throughout.
dI
Example - 4 Sol. Back e.m.f. induced in the coil, e L
dt
Three identical coils A, B and C are placed with their where L is coefficient of self-inductance of the coil and dI/
planes parallel to one another, figure. Coils A and C carry dt is the rate of change of current through the coil. The
current as shown. Coils B and C are fixed. The coil A is variation of –e with t is shown in figure.
moved towards B with uniform speed. Is there any induced
current in B.
EMI & AC
115
Example - 8
t
O X A plot of magnetic flux () versus current (I) is shown in
figure, for two inductors A and B. Which of the two has
larger value of self induction ?
–e
B
X'
Example - 6
I
The magnetic flux through a coil perpendicular to
its plane and directed into paper is varying according Sol. As L = /I, therefore L for A > L for B.
2
to the relation = (5t + 10t + 5) milliweber. Calculate
the e.m.f. induced in the loop at t = 5 s. Example - 9
2
Sol. Here, = (5 t + 10 t + 5) milli weber A solenoid of length 50 cm with 20 turns per cm and
2
2
= (5 t + 10 t + 5) × 10 Wb
–3 area of cross section 40 cm completely surrounds
another co–axial solenoid of the same length, area of
2
d cross section 25 cm with 25 turns per cm. Calculate
As e (in magnitude) the mutual inductance of the system.
dt
1
Sol. Here, l = 50 cm m
d 2
e 2 –3 –3
(5t + 10 t + 5) × 10 Wb/sec = (10t + 10) × 10 volt
dt
Total no. of turns in outer solenoid
At t = 5 sec, N1 = 20 × 50 = 1000
–3
e = (10 × 5 + 10) × 10 volt = 0.06 volt. Area of cross section of outer solenoid,
2 –4 2
Example - 7 A1 = 40 cm = 40 × 10 m
Total no. of turns in inner solenoid,
Find the change in current in an inductor of 10 H
–2 N2 = 25 × 50 = 1250
in which the e.m.f. induced 300 V in 10 sec. Also,
find the change in magnetic flux. Area of cross section of inner solenoid,
2 –4 2
A2 = 25 cm = 25 × 10 m
–2
Sol. Here, dI = ? L = 10 H, e = 300 V, dt = 10 sec., d = ?
0 N1 N 2
M A2
LdI
As e
dt
4 107 1000 1250 25 10 4
–3
= 7.85 × 10 henry..
dI 1/ 2
300 10
10 2
Example - 10
300 10 2
A long solenoid of length 1 m, cross sectional area 10
dI 0.3A
10 cm2, having 1000 turns has wound about its centre a small
coil of 20 turns. Compute the mutual inductance of the
d
Also, e two circuits. What is the emf in the coil when the current
dt in the solenoid changes at the rate of 10 Amp/s ?
–2
d = e dt = 300 × 10 = 3 Wb
Sol. Let N1 = number of turns in solenoid ;
EMI & AC
116
N2 = number of turns in coil dI 0 N1 N 2 A dI
As e M
A1 and A2 be their respective areas of cross section. dt dt
(A1 = A2 is this problem) 300
–7 –4
Flux 2 through coil created by current i1 in solenoid is e = 4 × 10 × 1200 × 0.3 × 12 × 10 × 40
2 = N2 (B1 A2) = 0.023 volt
i N 1200
2
12 104
2 N 2 0 1 1 A 2 –7 –3
L = 4 × 10 ×
0.3
= 2.304 × 10 henry
Example - 44
N N A
2 0 1 2 2 i1 dI 2 0
(b) Here N2 = 300, 40 amp / sec.
dt 0.05
Comparing with 2 = M i1, we get : e=?
0 N1 N 2 A 2 dI 0 N1 N 2 A dI
Mutual inductance M As e M
dt dt
300
410 7 1000 20 10 10 4
–7 –4
e = 4 × 10 × 1200 × 0.3 × 12 × 10 × 40 = 0.023 volt
M = 2.51 × 10–5 H
1
Example - 12
di1
Magnitude of induced emf = E2 = M
dt A coil of 100 turns and 1 cm radius is kept coaxially
within a long solenoid of 8 turns per cm and 5 cm radius.
E2 = 2.51 × 10–5 × 10 = 2.51 × 10–4 V. Find the mutual inductance.
Example - 11 Sol. The magnetic field B in the primary of solenoid given by
(a) A toroidal solenoid with an air core has an average B = 0 Np i
2
radius of 15 cm, area of cross-section 12 cm and 1200 The magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil is given by
turns. Obtain the self inductance of the toroid. Ignore
field variations across the cross-section of the toroid. Ns = Ns B As = Ns (0 Np i) As
(b) A second coil of 300 turns is wound closely on the where As is the cross sectional area of secondary of
toroid above. If the current in the primary coil is increased solenoid.
from zero to 2.0 A in 0.05 s, obtain the induced e.m.f. in
The mutual inductance is therefore,
the second coil.
N s
Sol. (a) Here, a = 15 cm = 0.15 m M 0 N p Ns As
i
2 –4 2
A = 12 cm = 12 × 10 m Substituting the given values, we get :
Total of toroidal solenoid, l = 2a = 2 × 0.15 m = 0.3 m M = (4 × 10–7 weber/amp–m) (800/m) × 100 × × 25 × 10–4
2
N
As L 0 A = 7.89 × 10–4 H.
1200 Example - 13
2
–7
12 104 –3
L = 4 × 10 ×
0.3
= 2.304 × 10 henry
A long solenoid of length 1 metre, cross–section 10
cm2, having 1000 turns has would about its centre a
dI 2 0 small coil of 20 turns. Compute the mutual inductance
(b) Here N2 = 300, 40 amp / sec.
dt 0.05 of the two circuits. What is the induced e.m.f. in the
coil when the current in the solenoid changes at the
e=?
rate of 10 amp/sec. ?
EMI & AC
117
Sol. The mutual inductance between solenoid and coil is given L 80 8 E 200
s, I0 4A
R 50 5 R 50
by M = 0 Np Ns A
From I = I0 1 e
t /
where Np = number of turns per metre of the solenoid
primary and Ns = Total number of turns in the coil 50 8
I 0 I 0 1 e t / ; t log e 2 0.693 1.109s
M = (4 × 10 ) (1000) × (20) (10 × 10 )
–7 –4 100 5
1 2 1
Maximum energy stored LI0 80 4 640 J
2
= 25.1 × 10–6 henry
2 2
or M = 25.1 micro henry
Induced e.m.f., Example - 16
di A conducting rod AB makes contact with the metal rails
emf = M = 25.1 × 10
dt AD and BC which are 0.5 m apart. If uniform magnetic
field of induction 0.5 Wb/m2 acts perpendicular to the
= 251 micro–volt.
plane of the figure.
Example - 14
(a) Calculate the mutual inductance between two coils
when a current of 4 amp. changes to 12 amp. in 0.5
sec. and induces an e.m.f. of 50 milli–volts in the
secondary.
(b) Also calculate the induced e.m.f. in the secondary if
current in the primary changes from 3 amp. to 9 (a) Calculate the magnitude and direction of the induced
amp. in 0.02 secs. emf when the rod is moving to the right with speed 4 m/s.
(b) If the resistance of the circuit ABCD is 0.2 ohm,
di 4 12 calculate the force required to maintain the motion
Sol. (a) 16 amp / sec
dt 0 .5 assuming smooth contacts.
(c) Compare the rate at which mechanical work is done by
di the force with the rate of heat developed in the circuit.
Induced emf = – M
dt
Sol. (a) Let AB = l and AD = BC = x at some instant.
M
50 10 3.125 10
3
3
Henry. =B lx
16
d dx
di 3 9 induced emf B Bv
(b) 300 amp / sec dt dt
dt 0.02
induced emf = 0.5 × 0.5 × 4 = 1 volt.
Now emf = – (3.125 × 10 ) (–300) = 0.9375 volt
–3
(b) induced current = i
= induced emf/R = 1/0.2 = 5 A
Example - 15
magnetic force acting on AB = B i l
A solenoid of resistance 50 and inductance 80 H is = 0.5 × 5 × 0.5 = 1.25 N towards left.
connected to a 200 V battery. How long will it take for The applied force to maintain constant velocity must
the current to reach 50% of its final equilibrium value be of same magnitude but opposite direction i.e.,
? Calculate the maximum energy stored ? towards right.
(c) Rate of work done = Fv = 1.25 × 4 = 5 Watts.
Sol. Here, R = 50 , L = 80 H, E = 200 V, t = ? Rate of heat dissipation in resistance i2 R
= 52 × 0.2 = 5 Watts.
I0
I Hence the work done by force applied to the rod is
2
completely converted to heat in the resistance.
EMI & AC
118
Example - 17 Example - 20
A small resistor R (say, a lamp) is usually put in parallel A wheel with 10 metalllic spokes each 0.5 m long is
rotated with a speed of 120 rpm, in a plane normal to
to the current carrying coil of an electromagnet,
(figure). What purpose does it serve ? earth’s magnetic field at the place. If the magnitude of
the field is 0.40 gauss, what is the induced e.m.f. between
the axle and rim of the wheel.
Sol. Here, no. of spokes, N = 10
length of the spoke, l = radius, r = 0.5 m.
Frequency, n = 120 rpm = 2 rps. = 2 Hz
–4
B = 0.4 gauss = 0.4 × 10 tesla, e = ?
As the wheel rotates, linear velocity of spoke end at the
rim = r and linear velocity of spoke end at the axle = 0
0r 1
Average linear velocity, v r
2 2
As e.m.f. induced across the ends of each spoke
1
e= Bl 2
2
Sol. When current in the coil of a large electromagnet is
switched off, magnetic flux changes at a very high rate. 22
–4 –5
Therefore, induced e.m.f. is very high and may cause e = 0.4 × 10 × 0.5 × × 2 × 0.5 = 6.28 × 10 volt
7
sparking which would damage the insulation. The small
resistor R placed in parallel provided a conducting path of As all spokes are connected in parallel between the axle
and the rim, therefore net e.m.f. induced is the same as that
the e.m.f induced. In this way, risks of high voltages and
induced across the ends of each spoke.
sparking etc. are reduced.
Example - 21
Example - 18
A parallel plate capacitor made of circular plates each
A bulb connected in series with a solenoid is lit by a.c.
of radius 10.0 cm has a capacitance 200 pE. The
source. If a soft iron core is introduced in the solenoid,
capacitor is connected to a 200 V a.c. supply with an
will the bulb glow brighter ? –1
angular frequency of 200 rad s .
Sol. No, the bulb will glow dimmer. This is because on (a) What is the r.m.s. value of the conduction current ?
introducing soft iron core in the solenoid, its inductance L
(b) Is the conduction current equal to displacement current ?
increases, the inductive reactance XL = L increases and
hence the current through the bulb decreases. (c) Peak value of displacement current.
(d) Determine the amplitude of magnetic field at a point
Example - 19
2.0 cm from the axis between the plates.
19.An ideal inductor when connected in a.c. circuit does
not produce heating effect though it reduces the current Sol. Here, R = 10 cm = 0.1 m;
–12 –10
in the circuit. Explain why ? C = 200 pF = 200 × 10 F = 2 × 10 F;
–1 –2
Sol. An ideal inductor is a coil having some inductance (L) but Erms = 200 V; = 200 rad s ; r = 2.0 × 10 m.
no ohmic resistance R. Amount of heat produced in time
2 E rms
t = I Rt. As R = 0, therefore, heat produced = 0. However, (a) I rms C E rms
1/ C
the inductor offers inductive reactance XL = L = 2 v L
–10
to the a.c. Therefore, the current is reduced. = 200 × (2 × 10 ) × 200
–6
= 8 × 10 A = 8 A
EMI & AC
119
(b) Yes, because ID = I (ii) In circuit (b), current will decrease as inductive reactance
XL = L = 2 v L will increases with increasing frequency.
(c) I 0 2 I rms 2 8 10 6
(iii) In circuit (c), current will increase as capacitative reactance
–6
= 11.312 × 10 A 1 1
XC will decrease on increasing the
(d) Consider a loop of radius r between two circular plates of C 2vC
parallel plate capacitor placed coaxially with them. The frequency.
2
area of this loop A’ = r . By symmetry, the magnetic field
Example - 23
B is equal in magnitude and is tangentially to the circle
at every point. In this case, only a part of displacement Determine the virtual value of alternating current shown
current ID will cross the loop of area A’. Therefore, the in figure.
current passing through the area
I
ID I
A' r 2 D2 r 2 2A
R2 R
Using Ampere’s Maxwell law we have,
O t
1 2 3
B.dt 0 × (total current through the area A’)
2A
I
or 2rB 0 02 r 2
R
0 I0 r 4 107 11.312 106 2 102
22 2 2 2
2
or B
2R 2 2 0.1 As is clear from the figure, I v 2A
2
Sol.
3
–12
= 4.525 × 10 T Example - 24
Example - 22 A 100 ohm iron is connected to 220 volt, 50 cycle wall
plug. What is (i) Peak potential difference, (ii) average
Figure (a), (b), (c) show three alternating circuits with
potential difference, (iii) r.m.s. current ?
equal currents. If frequency of alt. emf be increased,
what will be the effect on currents in the three cases ? Sol. Here, resistance of iron, R = 100 ohm
Explain. r.m.s. voltage, Ev = 220 volt
frequency of A.C. supply, v = 50 c/s.
R L (i) Let E0 be the peak potential difference,
0
As Ev . Ev 2 220
2
= 1.414 × 220 = 311.08 volt
~ ~ (ii) Let Em be the mean or average potential difference
(a) E (b) E
2 E0
C As E m
2 311.08 14 311.08
Em = ± 198.14 volt.
22 / 7 22
~ (iii) Let Iv be the virtual or r.m.s. current
(c) E
Ev 220
Sol. (i) in circuit (a), there will be no effect on the current flowing. As I v Iv = 2.2 ampere.
R 100
This is because, R is not affected by frequency.
EMI & AC
120
Example - 25
Example - 28
Can a capacitor of suitable capacitance be used to control
Three series capacitors of capacitances 2.0, 3.0 and
a.c. in place of the choke coil ?
6.0 F are charged by a 60 V battery. Find the total
Sol. Yes, this is because average power consumed/cycle in an energy stored.
ideal capacitor is also zero. Therefore, like a choke coil, a
condenser can reduce a.c. without power dissipation. Sol. Here, C1 = 2.0 F, C2 = 3.0 F, C3 = 6.0 F
V = 60 V,
Example - 26
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
An electric lamp which runs at 80 volt d.c. and consumes As C C C C 2 3 6 1
10 ampere is connected to 100 volt, 50 Hz a.c. mains. S 1 2 3
Calculate the inductance of the choke required.
CS 1F 106 F
Sol. Here, V = 80 V, I = 10 A
1 1
CS V 2 106 60 1.8 103 J.
2
V 80 U
R 8 2 2
I 10
Example - 29
Ev = 100 V, v = 50 Hz, Iv = I = 10 A, L = ?
If Z is impedance of lamp and choke coil, Find the maximum value of current when inductance of
two henry is connected to 150 volt, 50 cycle supply.
E v 100
then Z 10
Iv 10 Sol. Here, inductance, L = 2 henry
r.m.s. voltage, Ev = 150 volt
As R 2 X 2L Z 2
frequency of A.C. supply, v = 50 c/s.
X Z R 10 8 36
2
L
2 2 2 2
Inductive reactance,
X L 6 22 4400
XL = L = 2 v L = 2 × 50 2 ohm
Now X L L 2vL 7 7
If E0 is the peak value of the alternating voltage, then
X 67
L L –2
= 1.9 × 10 H. maximum value of current (I0) is given by
2v 2 22 50
E0 2 Ev
Example - 27 I0
XL 2 v L
A 15.0 F capacitor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz source.
Find the peak current.
2 Ev 1414 150
I0 03A
Sol. Here, C = 15.0 F = 15.0 × 10 F,
–6 2 v L 2 3.14 50 0.9
Ev = 220 V; v = 50 Hz, XC = ?, I0 = ? Example - 30
1 1 1 A 200 km long telegraph wire has capacity of 0.014 F/km.
XC = 212.1 If it carries an alternating current of 50 kc/s, what
C 2vC 22
2 50 15.0 10 6 should be the value of an inductance required to be
7
connected in series so that impedance is minimum.
Ev 220 Sol. Here, Capacity of telegraph wire,
Iv 1.037 A
X C 212.1 C = 0.014 × 200 F = 2.8 × 10 F
–6
3
v = 50 k c/s = 50 × 10 c/s, L = ?
I0 2 I v 1.414 1.037 A = 1.47 A
Impedance is minimum at resonance where
1 1
v or L 4 2 v 2 C
2 LC
EMI & AC
121
1 Sol. Here, Ev = 200 V, v = 50 hz, R = 100
L
22 22
4 50 103 2.8 106
2
VR = 65 V, VC = 415 V, VL = 204 V
7 7
–6
L = 0.36 × 10 H (i) If Iv is current in the circuit, then
VR = Iv × R
Example - 31 65 = Iv × 100, Iv = 0.65 A.
A series circuit contains a resistor of 20 ohm, a capacitor (ii) VL = Iv XL
and an ammeter of negligible resistance. It is connected
to a source of 220 V–50 hz. If the reading of the ammeter VL 204
XL 313.85
is 2.5 A, Calculate reactance of the capacitor. I v 0.65
Sol. Here, R = 20 ohm, Ev = 220 v, v = 50 hz, Iv = 2.5 A XL = L = 2 v L = 313.85
E v 220 313.85 313.85
Z 88ohm L 1.0 H
Iv 2.5 2v 2 3.14 50
As R 2 X C2 Z 2 VC 415
(iii) VC I v X C , X C 638.5
I v 0.65
X C Z2 R 2 882 202 85.7
1 1 1
Example - 32 XC ;C
C 2vC 2 v X C
A resistor of 12 , a capacitor of reactance 14 ohm and
a pure inductor of inducatance 0.1 H are joined in series 1
C 4.99 106 F
and placed across 200 V, 50 Hz a.c. supply. Calculate 2 3.14 50 638.5
(i) current in the circuit (ii) phase angle between current
(iv) Let C’ be the capacitance that would produce resonance
and voltage. Take = 3.
with L = 1.0 H, then
Sol. Here, R = 12 , XC = 14 ohm, L = 0.1 H 1
v
Ev = 200 V, v = 50 hz, Iv = ?, = ? 2 LC '
XL = L = 2 v L = 2 × 3 × 50 × 0.1 = 30 ohm. 1
C'
4 2 v 2 L
Z R 2 X L X C 12 2 30 14 = 20 ohm
2 2
1
C' –6
4 3.14 50 1 = 10.1 × 10 F = 10.1 F
2 2
E v 200
Iv = 10 A
Z 20 Example - 34
A series circuit having a self–induction 3 H, a pure resistor
X X C 30 14 10 ohm and a source of constant voltage 3 V is closed at
tan L 1.33
R 12 time t = 0. Find :
–1
= tan (1.33) = 53.06°. (a) time constant of the circuit. At the end of 1 time–
constant, find :
Example - 33
(b) the current in the circuit,
A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c. source of (c) the rate at which the current in the circuit is
220 V–50 hz. If the readings of voltmeters across increasing,
resistor, capacitor and inductor are 65 V, 415 V and
(d) the rate at which joule’s heating is produced,
204 volt; and R = 100 , calculate (i) current in the circuit
(ii) vlaue of L (iii) value of C and (iv) capacitance required (e) the rate at which energy is stored in the magnetic field,
to produce resonance with the given inductor L. (f) the rate at which energy is delivered by the source.
Is the total energy conserved ?
EMI & AC
122
Sol. i = 3/10 (1 – e–10 t /3) Sol. Here, np = 2000; ns = 50;
(a) = L/R = 0.3 sec Ep = 120 V; Rs = 0.6
(b) i (0.3) = 0.3 (1 – 1/e) = 0.19A
Es = ?, Is = ?, Ip = ?, Pp = ?, Ps = ?
(c) di/dt = e–10t/3 = 1/e = 0.37 A/s
(d) P = i2R = (0.19)2 10 = 0.361 Watts Es ns
(i) As
Ep np
dU d 1 2 di
(e) Li Li 3 0.19 0.37 0.21 W
dt dt 2 dt ns 50
Es Ep . 120 3V
np 2000
(f) Rate at which cell delivers energy = Ei = 3 (0.19)
= 0.57 Watts.
Es 3
di (ii) As Is Is 5A
It is early seen that E i = i R + Li
2 R 0.6
dt
Ip Es E 3
(iii) As I p s Is 5 0.125 A
Is Ep E p
120
(iv) Power in primary, Pp = Ep × Ip = 120 × 0.125 = 15 W
Power in secondary, Ps = Es × Is = 3 × 5 = 15 W
Example - 37
Yes total energy is conserved
When a current flows in the coil of a transformer, then
Example - 35
why does its core become hot ?
How much current is drawn by the primary coil of a
Sol. When alternating current flows through the coil of a
transformer which steps down 220 V to 22 V to operate
transformer, its core gets magnetised and demagnetised
device with an impedance of 220 ohm.
repeatedly. The energy spent in magnetising the core is
Sol. Here, Ip = ?, Ep = 220 V, Es = 22 V not returned fully in demagnetisation. This energy left in
the core appears in the form of heat.
Es 22
Rs = 220 ohm; Is 0.1 A Example - 38
R s 220
Why is the core of a transformer made of a magnetic
E Ip material of high permeability ?
In an ideal transformer, s
Is E p
Sol. When permeability of magnetic material of transfomer core
is high, almost whole of magnetic flux will be linked with
Es 22 0.1
Ip Is 102 A the core. Therefore, magnetic flux linked with the
Ep 220
secondary coil will almost be equal to the amount of
magnetic flux linked with the primary coil. Therefore,
Example - 36
energy loss due to leakage of magnetic flux will be reduced
The number of turns in the primary and secondary coils considerably.
of an ideal transformer are 2000 and 50 respectively.
Example - 39
The primary coil is connected to a main supply of 120 V
and secondary to a night bulb of 0.6 . Calculate What is intensity of electromagnetic wave ? Give its
(i) Voltage across the secondary, relation in terms of electric field E and magnetic field B.
(ii) Current in the bulb, Sol. Intensity of electromagnetic wave is defined as the energy
crossing per second per unit area perpendicular to the
(iii) Current in primary coil,
direction of propagation of electromagnetic waves. The
(iv) Power in primary and secondary coils. intensity of electromagnetic wave at a point is
EMI & AC
123
1 1 B02 Example - 45
i = uav c where uav 0 E 02 and c is the velocity
2 2 0
If you find closed loops of B in a region in space, does it
of electromagnetic wave. necessarily means that actual charges are flowing
across the area bounded by the loops ?
1 1 B02
I 0 E 02 c c
2 2 0 Sol. Not necessarily. A displacement current (such as that
between the plates of a charging capacitor) can also
Here E0 and B0 are maximum values of electric field and
magnetic field respectively. produce loops of B .
Example - 40 Example - 46
State two applications of Infrared radiations. Give difference between displacement current and
conduction current.
Sol. Infrared radiations are used (i) to treat muscular strain (ii)
for taking photographs during the conditionss of fog, Sol. Conduction current is due to flow of electrons in the circuit.
smoke etc. It exists even if the flow of electrons is at uniform rate.
Example - 41 Displacement current is due to time varying electric field.
It does not exist under steady condition.
State two applications of Ultraviolet radiations.
Example - 47
Sol. Ultraviolet radiations are used (i) to preserve the food
stuff (ii) for sterilizing the surgical instruments. Figure shows a capacitor made of two circular plates
each of radius 12 cm and separated by 5.0 mm. The
Example - 42
capacitor is being charged by an external source (not
State two applications of X–rays. shown in the figure). The charging current is constant
and equal to 0.15 A. Use Ampere’s law (modified to
Sol. X–rays are used (i) for the detection of fractures in the
include displacement current as given in the text) and
bones of human body (ii) for the detection of explosives,
the symmetry in the problem to calculate magnetic field
opium and gold in the body of the smugglers.
between the plates at a point (i) on the axis (ii) 6.5 cm
Example - 43 from the axis (iii) 15 cm from the axis.
Which part of electromagnetic spectrum has largest
penetrating power.
22 18
Sol. Gamma rays (frequency range 5 × 10 Hz to 3 × 10 Hz)
has largest penetrating power.
Example - 44
Induced electric field due to changing magnetic flux are
(B) At what distance from the axis is the magnetic field
more readily observed than induced magnetic field due to
due to displacement current greatest ? Obtain the
changing electric field. Why ?
maximum value of the field.
Sol. The changing electric field produces displacement
current, which is very small and hence the magnetic field Sol. Here, R = 0.12 m, I = 0.15 A
set up by it is also small, the same cannot be observed 2 2 2
Area of the plate, A = R = × (0.12) m .
easily. In an a.c. circuit displacement current can be increased
by increasing the angular frequency of current. This would (a) Consider a loop of radius r between the two circular plates,
increase the induced electric field. On the other hand, the placed, coaxially with them.
induced electric field due to changing magnetic flux can be
Then area of the loop, A ' r 2
increased by taking more number of turns of the coil. The
induced e.m.f. in different turns of the same coil are added
By symmetry magnetic field induction B is equal in
up, resulting in induced electric field which is easily
magnitude and is tangentially to the circle at every point.
observed.
EMI & AC
124
In this case, only displacement current ID will cross the 2x
loop. Therefore, using Ampere’s Maxwell law, we have 2vt
2 x
B.d I 0 D we have,
0.314 103 x
2 r B = 0 × (current passing through the area A’ ) 2
or 0.02 m
0.314 103
r 2
= 0 ID R 2 for r < R 3.14 1011
and 2 v = 3.14 × 10 or v
11 10
= 5 × 10 Hz
2
0 I D for r > R (b)
8 –7
E0 = cB0 = (3 × 10 ) × (3 × 10 ) = 90 Vm
–1
Since the electric field variation in electromagnetic wave
0 I D r 2 0 I D r
Thus, B ...(i) (If r < R) is perpendicular to the direction of propagation of
R 2 2r 2R 2
electromagnetic wave and direction of magnetic field,
0 ID therefore, the electric field variation in electromagnetic
and B ...(ii) (If r > R) wave is along z–axis. It is given by
2 r
2 2x
(i) On the axis, r = 0. E z E 0 sin x vt E 0 sin
2 vt
Using (i), we get, B = 0
3 11
(ii) For a point 6.5 cm from the axis, r = 6.5 cm = 6.5 × 10 m.
–2
or Ez = 90 sin (0.314 × 10 x + 3.14 × 10 t) V/m
Example - 49
4 10 7 0.15 6.5 10 2
Using (i), we have, B
2 12 102
2
A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25 MHz
travels in free space along the x–direction. At a
–7
= 1.35 × 10 T. particular point in space and time the electric vector is
(iii) For a point 15 cm from the axis, r = 15 cm = 0.15 m.
ˆ Calculate B
E 6.3V / mj. at this point.
4 107 0.15
Using (ii), we have, B
–7
= 2 × 10 T E 6.3 V / m
2 0.15 Sol. B –8
= 2.1 × 10 T = 2.1 × 10 T
–8
C 3 108 m / s
(b) From equations (i) and (ii) we note that B is maximum if r =
As E is along y–direction and wave is travelling along x–
R = 12 cm = 0.12 m
direction, therefore, B is along z–direction, i.e.,
0 ID 4 10 7 0.15
Bmax
–7
= 2.5 × 10 T.. –8
2R 2 0.12 B = 2.1 × 10 k̂ tesla.
Example - 48 Example - 50
A magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given Suppose that the electric field part of an electromagnetic
–7 3 11
by By = 3 × 10 sin (0.314 × 10 x + 3.14 × 10 t) tesla. wave in vacuum is
(a) What is the wavelength and frequency of the wave ? E = 3.1 N/C cos [(1.8 rad/m)y + (5.4 × 10 rad/s) t] î
8
(b) Write down an expression for the electric field. (a) What is the direction of motion ?
(x is in metre and t in second).
(b) What is the wavelength ?
–7 3 11
Sol. Given, By = 3 × 10 sin (0.314 × 10 x + 3.14 × 10 t) (c) What is the frequency v ?
(a) Comparing it with a standard equation for a progressive (d) What is the amplitude of the magnetic field part of
wave travelling along the negative direction of x-axis is the wave ?
(e) Write an expression for the magnetic field part of
2 2x 2vt
y r sin x vt r sin = r sin the wave.
EMI & AC
125
Sol. (a) From the given equation, it is clear that the direction of
5.4 108
motion of e.m. wave is along negative y direction i.e. along (c) v 85.9 106 86 MHz.
2 2 22 / 7
ĵ .
(b) Comparing the given equation with the equation E = E0 E0 3.1
(d) B0 1.03 108 T 10.3nT.
cos (ky + t), we have c 3 108
8
k = 1.8 rad/m; = 5.4 × 10 rad/s; E0 = 3.1 N/C (e) B = B0 cos (ky + t) k̂ = (10.3 nT) cos
2 2 22 / 7 8
[(1.8 rad/m) y + (5.4 × 10 rad/s) t] k̂
3.492m 3.5 m.
k 1.8
EMI & AC 126
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 7. The flux linked with a coil at any instant t is given by
= 10 t2 – 50t + 250
Lenz Law
The induced emf at t = 3 s is
1. A metal ring is held horizontally and a bar magnet is dropped
(a) –190 V (b) -10 V
through the ring with its length along the axis of the ring.
The acceleration of the falling manget is (c) 10 V (d) 190 V
(a) equal to g Motional EM0F
(b) less than g 8. A straight conductor of length 0.4 m is moved with a speed
–1
(c) more than g of 7 ms perpendicular to a magnetic field of induction 0.9
2
Wb/m and the length of the conductor. The induced e.m.f.
(d) depends on the diameter of ring and length of magnet across the conductor is
Induced emf, current, charge flow (a) 25.2 V (b) 5.04 V
2 2
2. A coil of cross-sectional area 10 cm is is placed in the (c) 2.52 V (d) 1.26 V
–2 2
magnetic field, which changes by 4 × 10 Wb/cm within 5 9. In a uniform magnetic field of induction B, a wire in the form
sec. What will be the current across 5 resistance ? of semicircle of radius r rotates about the diameter of the
(a) 0.016 A (b) 0.16 A circle with angular frequency . If the total resistance of the
circuit is R, the mean power generated per period of rotation is
(c) 1.6 A (d) 16.0 A
3. A coil having 500 square loops of side 10 cm is placed normal
to magnetic field which increases at a rate of 1 T/sec. (a)
Br 2
(b)
Br
2 2
The induced e.m.f. is 2R 8R
(a) 0.1 V (b) 0.5 V
(c)
Br2
(d)
Br 2 2
(c) 1 V (d) 5 V 8R 8R
4. The instantaneous magnetic flux in in a circuit is 10. A conducting ring of radius r is rolling without slipping with
2
= 4t – 4t + 1. The total resistance of circuit is 10 . At a constant angular velocity in figure. If the magnetic field
strength is B and is directed into the page then the e.m.f.
1
t s, the induced current in circuit is induced across PQ is
2
(a) 0 (b) 0.6
(c) 0.2 (d) 0.4
2
5. A loop of area 0.1 m rotates with a speed of 60 rps
perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.4 T. If there are 100
turns in the loop, maximum voltage induced in the loop is
(a) 15.07 V (b) 1507 V
(c) 250 V (d) 150.7 V
6. A coil having n turns and resistance R is connected with 2 B r 2
a galvanometer of resistance 4R . This combination is (a) Br (b)
2
moved in time t seconds from a magnetic flnx W1 weber to
W2 weber. The induced current in the circuit is 2 2 r 2 B
(c) 4Br (d)
8
W2 W1 n W2 W1 11. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R moves
(a) (b)
5 Rnt 5 Rt in its plane with a uniform velocity v perpendicular to one of
its sides. A magnetic induction B, constant in time and space,
W2 W1 n W2 W1 pointing perpendicular to and into the plane of the loop
(c) (d)
Rnt Rt exists everywhere.
EMI & AC 127
B
×A × × × × B×
× × × ×
v v × ×
×
× × ×v ×
× D× × × × C×
The current induced in the loop is :
(a) Blv (b) –Blv
(a) BLv/R clockwise
(c) zero (d) 2 Blv
(b) BLv/R anticlockwise
15. A square frame of side 10 cm and a long straight wire carrying
(c) 2BLv/R anticlockwise current 1 A are in the plane of the paper. Starting from close
(d) zero to the wire, the frame moves towards the right with a
12. A thin semi-circular conducting ring of radius R is falling constant speed of 10 ms–1 (see figure). The e.m.f induced at
the time the left arm of the frame is at x = 10 cm from the wire
with its plane vertical in a horizontal magnetic induction B . is :
At the position MNQ the speed of the ring is v and the
potential difference developed across the ring is :
× × × ×
B
× × × ×
× × N × ×
(a) 0.5 V (b) 1 V
× × v × × (c) 0.75 V (d) 2 V
M Q
Inductance
16. Two solenoids of same cross-sectional area have their
(a) zero lengths and number of turns in ratio of 1 : 2. The ratio of self-
(b) BvR2/2 and M is at higher potential inductance of two solenoids is
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) BRv and Q is at higher potential
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
(d) 2RBv and Q is at higher potential
17. When the current changes from + 2 A to –2 A in 0.05 s, an
13. A metal rod moves at a constant velocity in a direction emf of 8 V is induced in a coil. The coefficient of self-
perpendicular to its length. A constant uniform magnetic induction of the coil is
field exists in space in a direction perpendicular to the rod
(a) 0.2 H (b) 0.4 H
as well as its velocity. Select the correct statement (s) from
the following : (c) 0.8 H (d) 0.1 H
18. The current passing through a choke coil of 5H is decreasing
(a) The entire rod is at the same electric potential –1
at the rate of 2 As . The e.m.f. developed across the coil is
(b) There is an electric field in the rod (a) – 10V (b) + 10V
(c) The electric potential is highest at the centre of the rod (c) 2.5 V (d) –2.5 V
and decrease towards its ends
19. What is the self inductance of an air core solenoid 1 m long,
2
(d) The electric potential is lowest at the centre of the rod diameter 0.5 m, if it has 500 turns ? Take = 10.
and increases towards its ends. –4
(a) 3.15 × 10 H
–4
(b) 4.8 × 10 H
14. One conducting U-tube can slide inside another as shown –4
(c) 5 × 10 H
–4
(d) 625 × 10 H
in figure, maintaining electrical contacts between the tubes. 20. For a coil having L = 2 mH, current flows at the rate of 10
3
The magnetic field B is perpendicular to the plane of the ampere/sec. The emf induced is
figure. If each tube moves towards the other at a constant
(a) 2V (b) 1 V
speed v, then the emf induced in the circuit in terms of B, l
and v, where l is the width of each tube, will be (c) 4 V (d) 3 V
EMI & AC 128
Mutual Inductance 28. An ideal coil of 10 H is connected in series with a resistance
of 5 and a battery of 5 V. 2 s after the connection is made,
21. If number of turns in primary and secondary coils in the current flowing (in ampere) in the circuit is
increased to two times each, the mutual inductance
(a) (1 – e) (b) e
(a) becomes 4 time
(c) e –1
(d) (1 – e–1)
(b) becomes 2 time
29. An inductor (L = 100 mH) a resistor (R = 100) and a
(c) becomes 1/4 time battery (E = 100 V) are initially connected in series as
(d) remains unchanged shown in the figure. After a long time the battery is
22. Two coaxial solenoids are made by winding thin insulated disconnected after short circuiting the points A and B.
wire over a pipe of cross-sectional area A = 10 cm2 and length The current in the circuit 1 ms after the short circuit is
= 20 cm. If one of the solenoids has 300 turns and the
other 400 turns, their mutual inductance is (0 = 4 × 10–7
TmA–1) L
(a) 2.4 × 10 H –5
(b) 4.8 × 10 H
–4
R
(c) 4.8 × 10 H –5
(d) 2.4 × 10–4 H
A B
L–R Circuit with DC Battery
E
23. An e.m.f. of 15V is applied in a circuit containing 5H
inductance and 10 resistance. The ratio of the currents at (a) 1/e A (b) eA
time t = and t = 1 s is
(c) 0.1 A (d) 1 A
1/ 2 2
e e 30. In the circuit shown here, the point ‘C’ is kept connected to
(a) (b) point ‘A’ till the current flowing through the circuit becomes
e1/ 2 1 e2 1
–1 –1 constant. Afterward, suddenly, point ‘C’ is disconnected
(c) 1 – e (d) e from point ‘A’ and connected to point ‘B’ at time t = 0. Ratio
24. A coil of inductance 8.4 mH and resistance 6 is connected of the voltage across resistance and the inductor at t = L/R
to a 12V battery. The current in the coil is 1A at approximately will be equal to :
the time :
(a) 500 s (b) 20 s
(c) 35 ms (d) 1ms
25. The potential difference Vcd across the inductor L is
(a) 60 V (b) 100 V
(c) 120 V (d) 90 V
26. In steady state if U3 is the energy stored in 3H and U6 is the
energy stared in 6 H inductor then
(a) 9U3 = U6 (b) U3 = 2U6 (a) 1 (b) –1
(c) U6 = 2U3 (d) U3 = 9U6
1 e e
27. The inductance between A and D is (c) (d)
e 1 e
ALTERNATING CURRENT
Peak and rms value
2
A D 31. If i = t for 0 < t < T, then r.m.s. value of current is :
3H 3H 3H
T2 T2
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 3.66 H (b) 9H T2
(c) (d) none of these
(c) 0.66 H (d) 1 H 5
EMI & AC 129
32. The output current versus time curve of a rectifier is shown
in figure.
(c) (d)
39. For high frequency, capacitor offers
The average value of the output current in this case is (a) more resistance (b) less resistance
(c) zero resistance (d) none of these
(a) I0/ (b) I0 2
AC Circuits
(c) 2I0/ (d) I0/2
33. A generator produces a voltage that is given by V = 240 sin 40. The alternating current I in an inductance coil varies with
120 t volt, where t is in second. The frequency and r.m.s. time according to graph given in figure
voltage are :
(a) 60 Hz. and 240 volt (b) 19 Hz and 120 volt
(c) 19 Hz and 170 volt (d) 754 Hz and 170 volt
34. In general, in an alternating current circuit
(a) the average value of current is zero
(b) the average value of square of current is zero
(c) average power dissipation is zero
(d) the phase difference between voltage and curent is zero.
Which one of the following graphs, gives the variation of
Reactance, Impedance voltage with time ?
35. A 60 volt–10 watt bulb is operated at 100 volt–60 Hz a.c. The
inductance required is
(a) 2.56 H (b) 0.32 H (a) (b)
(c) 0.64 H (d) 1.28 H
36. The inductive reactance of a coil of 0.2 H inductance at a
frequency of 60 Hz is
(a) 7.54 (b) 0.754
–3
(c) 75.4 (d) 7.54 × 10
37. The angular frequency of a.c. at which a coil of inductance
1mH has a reactance of 1 is (c) (d)
3
(a) 10 (b) 10
–3
(c) 10 (d) 1
41. How much current will flow in a circuit having resistance of
38. Which of the following curves, figure correctly represent 109 and an inductance of 0.5 H connected to an A.C.
the variation of capacitative reactance (XC) with frequency supply of 100 V and 50 Hz in series ?
(f) ?
(a) 0.25 A (b) 0.52 A
(c) 0.75 A (d) 0.85 A
42. A coil of resistance 200 ohm and self inductance 1.0 henry
has been connected to an a.c. source of frequency 200/ Hz.
The phase difference between voltage and current is
(a) (b)
(a) 30° (b) 63°
(c) 45° (d) 75°
EMI & AC 130
43. In the circuit shown in figure, what will be the reading of the (a) 2 V (b) 3 V
voltmeter ? (c) 4 V (d) 0 V
48. An alternating voltage E = 200 sin (100 t) volt is connected
to a 1 F capacitor through an A.C. ammeter. The reading of
ammeter is
(a) 10 mA (b) 20 mA
(c) 40 mA (d) none of these
49. For the LR circuit shown in figure, the phase angle if
(a) 300 V (b) 900 V frequency is 100/ is
(c) 200 V (d) 400 V
44. In the circuit shown in figure, if value of R = 60 , then the
current flowing through the condenser will be
(a) 30° (b) 60°
(a) 0.5 A (b) 0.25 A (c) 45° (d) 90°
(c) 0.75 A (d) 1.0 A 50. The phase angle between the current and the source voltage
45. In the series LCR circuit, the voltmeter and ammeter readings is
are :
1 7 1 7
(a) tan (b) cos
4 4
1 4 1 4
(c) tan (d) cos
7 7
Insutantaneous and Average Power
(a) V = 100 V, I = 2 A (b) V = 100 V, I = 5 A 51. The power factor of an a.c. circuit having resistance r and
inductance L connected in series to an a.c. source of angular
(c) V = 1000 V, I = 2 A (d) V = 300 V, I = 1 A
frequency is
46. In L-C-R series A.C. circuit, the phase angle between current
and voltage is (a) R/L (b) L/R
(a) Any angle between 0 and /2 (c) R / R 2 2 L2 (d) zero
(b) /2
52. In an AC circuit, V and I are given by V = 100 sin (100t) V, i =
(c)
(d) any angle between 0 and /2
100 sin 100t mA. The power dissipated in circuit is :
47. In the circuit shown in figure the r.m.s. value of e is 5 V and 3
r.m.s. value of voltage drop across L is 3 V. 4
(a) 10 W (b) 10 W
(c) 2.5 W (d) 5 W
53. A (100 W, 200 V) bulb is connected to a 160 V supply. The
power consumption would be
(a) 64 W (b) 80 W
(c) 100 W (d) 125 W
The r.m.s. value of voltage across R will be
EMI & AC 131
54. In an A.C. circuit, voltage applied is V = 220 sin 100 t. If the ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
impedance is 110 and phase difference between current
and voltage is 60°, the power consumption is equal to Characteristics of E-M Waves
(a) 55 W (b) 110 W 61. The electromagnetic waves
(c) 220 W (d) 330 W (a) travel with the speed of sound
55. The average power dissipation in a pure capacitor in AC
(b) travel with the same speed in all media
circuit is
(c) travel in free space with the speed of light
1
(a) CV 2 (b) CV
2
(d) do not travel through a medium
2
(c) 2 CV
2
(d) zero 62. The oscillating electric and magnetic field vectors of
56. In an a.c. circuit, V and I are given by electromagnetic wave are oriented along
V = 100 sin (100 t) volt (a) the same direction and in phase
I = 100 sin (100 t + /3) mA. (b) the same direction but have a phase difference of 90°
The power dissipated in the circuit is
4 (c) mutually perpendicular direction and are in phase
(a) 10 watt (b) 10 watt
(c) 2.5 watt (d) 5 watt (d) mutually perpendicular directions but has a phase
57. In an ac circuit, with voltage V and current I the power difference of 90°
dissipated is
Electromagnetic Spectrum
(a) VI
1 63. Which of the following is of shortest wavelength ?
(b) VI
2 (a) X–rays (b) –rays
1 (c) microwaves (d) radiovaves
(c) VI
2 64. The correct sequence of the increasing wavelength of the
(d) depends on the phase angle between V and I. given radiation sources is
58. In series LR circuit, XL = 3 R. Now a capacitor with XC = R is (a) radioactive sources, X-rays tube, crystal oscillator, sodium
added in series. The ratio of new to old power factor is vapour lamp
(a) 2 (b) 1/ 2 (b) radioactive source, X-rays tube sodium vapour lamp,
(c) 2 (d) 1 crystal oscillator
Resonance (c) X-ray tube, radioactive source, crystal oscillator, sodium
vapour lamp
59. At resonance, in a series LCR circuit, which relation does
not hold ? (d) X-rays tube, crystal oscillator, radioactive source, sodium
vapour lamp.
1 1
(a) (b)
LC LC Equation of Wave
–
1 1 65. A radiowave has a maximum magnetic field induction of 10
(c) L (d) C 4
C L T on arrival at a receiving antenna. The maximum electric
60. A series LCR circuit is tuned to resonance. The impedance field intensity of such a wave is
of the circuit now is (a) zero
4
(b) 3 × 10 V/m
1/ 2 1/ 2 –9 –13
2 1
2
2 1
2 (c) 5.8 × 10 V/m (d) 3.3 × 10 V/m
(b) R L
2
(a) R L
C C 66. Which of the following relation is correct
1/ 2 (a) 0 E 0 0 B0 (b) 0 0 E 0 B0
2 1
2
(c) R L (d) R
C (c) E 0 0 0 B0 (d) 0 E 0 0 B0
EMI & AC 132
67. If o amd 0 represent the permittivity and permeability of Numerical Answer Type Questions
vacuum and and represent the permittivity and Electromagnetic Induction
permeability of medium, then refractive index of the medium
72. A body enters in an MRI machine in 10 s. If the magnetic
is given by
field is 1.5 T and circumference of the MRI machine is 0.9 m,
0 0 then find out the magnitude of emf induced (in millivolt) in
(a) (b) 0 0 the body.
73. A long solenoid of radius 2 cm has 100 turns/cm and carries
0 0 a current of 5 A. A coil of radius 1 cm having 100 turns and
(c) 0 0 (d) a total resistance of 20 is placed inside the solenoid co-
axially. The coil is connected to a galvanometer and the
68. The magnetic field in a travelling electromagnetic wave
current in the solei10id is reversed in direction. If the charge
has a peak value of 20 nT. The peak value of electric field
stength is flown through the galvanometer is k 104 C , then find k.
(a) 3V/m (b) 6V/m
Take 2
10
(c) 9V/m (d) 12V/m
69. An EM wave from air enters a medium. The electric fields 74. In an R-L circuit, R 4, L 0.5H and emf of cell=6 V..
The work done (in mJ) in changing the current from 0.80 A to
z
are E1 = E 01 x cos 2 v t in air and 0.81 A through the circuit is
c
75. A long solenoid of diameter 0.1 m has 2 104 turns per
E 2 = E 02 x cos k 2z ct in medium, where the wave metre. At the centre of the solenoid, a coil of 100 turns and
number k and frequency refer to their values in air. The radius 0.01 m is placed with its axis coinciding with the
solenoid axis. The current in the solenoid reduces at a
medium is non-magnetic. If r and r refer to relative
1 2 constant rate to 0 A from 4 A in 0.05s. If the resistance of the
permittivities of air and medium respectively, which of the
coil is 10 2 , the total charge in C flowing through
following options is correct ?
the coil during this time is
r1
1 r1
1
(a) = 4 (b) = 2 76. A small piece of metal r 20 of volume 10 cm 3 has a
r2 r2
uniform magnetic field 4 T inside it. The magnetic energy
r1 r1
(c) = 4 (d) = 2
stored in the metal is J , then find .
r2 r2
Maxwell Equations 77. A solenoid having 500 turns and length 2 m, has radius of 2
cm. Then self-inductance (in millihenry) of solenoid is
70. According to Maxwell’s hypothesis, a changing electric field
gives rise to 78. A simple electric motor has an armature resistance of 1
(a) an e.m.f. (b) electric current and runs from a dc source of 12 V. When unloaded, it draws
(c) magnetic field (d) pressure radiant a current of 2 A. When a certain load is connected,
71. Maxwell’s modified form of Ampere’s circuital law is its speed becomes one-half of its unloaded value. Then the
current (in ampere) it draws is
(a)
B.ds 0
S
79. In an ac dynamo, the peak value of emf is 60 V. The induced
emf (in V) in the position when the armature makes an angle
(b)
B.d 0 I of 30 with the magnetic field perrendicular to the coil, will
be
1 dq
(c) B.d I
0
0 dt
80. An electric motor operating on a 60 V dc supply draws a
current of 10 A. If the efficiency of the motor is 50%, the
d E
(d) B.d I
0 0 0
dt
resistance (in ohm) of its winding is
EMI & AC 133
Alternating Current 86. The voltage time (V-t) graph for triangular wave having
peak value V0 is as shown in the figure. The rms value of
81. If the rms value of current i 3 4sin t / 3 is x
V0
ampere, then find x 2 . V in time interval from t=0 to T/4 is . Find n.
n
82. If the current in an AC circuit is given by
i 2 2 sin(t / 4) then the average value of current
m
during time t =0 tot= 1 s is ampere. Find m.
83. In the given figure, if i1 3sin t and i 2 4 cos t ,
then i3 is 5sin t , Find .
87. One cycle of an alternating current is shown in the graph.
2
The rms value of the current from t = 0 to t = T is i0 .
x
Find x.
Electromagnetic Waves
88. The wavelength (in SI units) for an electromagnetic wave is
given as (x, t) 10 sin 3 10 x 9 10 t The speed
3 6 14
84. A periodic voltage V varies with time t as shown in the
figure . T is the time period. The rms value of the voltage is of the wave is y 107 m / s . Find y..
V0 89. The electric field part of an electromagnetic wave in a medium
. Find k. is represented by: E x 0
k
N rad 2 rad
E y 2.5 cos 2 106 t 10 x
C s m
Ez 0
If the wave is moving along x-direction with frequency x
x
hertz and its wavelength is y metres, then find y .
90. The electric field associated with an EM wave in vacuum is
85. The effective value of current
given by E 40 cos kz 6 108 t i respectively. The value
i 2sin100t 2sin(100t 30) is x y z . Find
of wave vector k in m is
1
(x y z) .
91. A laser beam of diameter 2 mm is of 9 m W. What is the
amplitude of magnetic field (in T) associated with it?
(Answer should be in positive integer form)
EMI & AC 134
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. For plane electromagnetic waves propagating in the not drawn to scale) (2015)
positive z direction, which one of the following
combination gives the correct possible direction for
E and B field respectively ? (2015 Online)
(a) (b)
(a) 2iˆ 3jˆ and ˆi 2ˆj
(b) 2iˆ 3jˆ and 3iˆ 2ˆj
(c) 3iˆ 4ˆj and 4iˆ 3jˆ
(d) ˆi 2ˆj and 2iˆ ˆj
2. An inductor having reactance XL = 5 is connected across
battery voltage V = 20 sin t. Power delivered by battery (c) (d)
at instant t is: (2015 Online)
4 5. Microwave oven acts on the principle of :
(a) zero (b) 80 W (2016 Online Set-1)
(c) 40 W (d) –40 W (a) transferring electrons from lower to higher energy levels
3. An inductor (L = 0.03H) and a resistor (R = 0.15 k) are in water molecule
connected in series to a battery of 15V EMF in a circuit (b) giving rotational energy to water molecules
shown below. The key K1 has been kept closed for a long (c) giving vibrational energy to water molecules
time. Then at t = 0, K1 is opened and key K2 is closed (d) giving translational energy to water molecules
simultaneously. At t = 1 ms, the current in the circuit will
6. Consider an electromagnetic wave propagating, in
be : (e5 150) (2015) vacuum. Choose the correct statement : (2016 Set-2)
(a) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +x
1
direction the electric field is E E yz (x, t) (yˆ z)
ˆ
2
1
and the magnetic field is B B yz (x, t) (yˆ z)
ˆ
2
(b) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +x
direction the electric field is
1
E E yz (y, z, t) (yˆ z)
ˆ and the magnetic field is
2
(a) 6.7 mA (b) 0.67 mA
1
(c) 100 mA (d) 67 mA B Byz (y, z, t) (yˆ z)
ˆ
4. An LCR circuit is equivalent to a damped pendulum. In an 2
LCR circuit the capacitor is charged to Q0 and then (c) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +y
connected to the L and R as shown below :
1
direction the electric field E = E yz (x, t) yˆ and the
2
1
magnetic field is B B yz (x, t) zˆ
2
(d) For an electromagnetic wave propagating in +y
If a student plots graphs of the square of maximum charge 1
direction the electri field is E E yz (x, t) zˆ and
(Q2Max ) on the capacitor with time (t) for two different 2
1
values L1 and L2 (L1 > L2) of L then which of the following the magnetic field is B BZ (x, t) yˆ
represents this graph correctly ? (plots are schematic and 2
EMI & AC 135
7. An arc lamp requires a direct current of 10 A at 80 V to 12. In a coil of resistance 100 , a current is induced by
function. If it is connected to a 220 V (rms), 50 Hz AC changing the magnetic flux through it as shown in the
supply, the series inductor needed for it to work is close figure. The magnitude of change in flux through the coil
to : (2016) is: (2017)
(a) 0.08 H (b) 0.044 H
(c) 0.065 H (d) 80 H
8. The electric field component of a monochromatic radiation
is given by. E 2 E 0 ˆi cos kz cos t Its magnetic field B
is then given by :
(2017 Online Set-2)
2 E0 2 E0
(a) ĵ sin kz cos t (b) ĵ sin kz sin t
c c (a) 200 Wb (b) 225 Wb
(c) 250 Wb (d) 275 Wb
2 E0 2 E0
(c) ĵ sin kz sin t (d) ĵ cos kz cos t 13. An ideal capacitor of capacitance 0.2F is charged to a
c c
potential difference of 10 V. The charging battery is then
9. Magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given disconnected. The capacitor is then connected to an ideal
by B B0 sin (k x t) ˆjT Expression for corresponding inductor of self inductance 0.5 mH. The current at a time
when the potential difference across the capacitor is 5 V,
electric field will be :
is : (2018 Online Set-1)
Where c is speed of light (2017 Online Set-1)
(a) 0.34 A (b) 0.25 A
(a) E B0 csin (k x t) kˆ V / m (c) 0.17 A (d) 0.15 A
14. At the centre of a fixed large circular coil of radius R, a
B
(b) E 0 sin (k x t) kˆ V / m much smaller circular coil of radius r is placed. The two
c coils are concentric and are in the same plane. The large r
coil carries a current I. The smaller coil is set to rotate with
(c) E B0 c sin (k x t) kˆ V / m
a constant angular velocity about an axis along their
common diameter. Calculate the emf induced in the smaller
(d) E B0 c sin (k x t) kˆ V / m
coil after a time t of its start of rotation.
10. A small circular loop of wire of radius ‘a’ is located at the (2018 Online Set-2)
centre of a much larger circular wire loop of radius b. The
two loops are in the same plane. The outer loop of radius 0 I 0 I
(a) r 2 sin t (b) r 2 sin t
b carries an alternating current I = I0 cos (t). The emf 2R 4R
induced in the smaller inner loop is nearly : (2017 Set-1)
0 I 2 0 I 2
(c) r sin t (d) r sin t
0 I0 a 2 0 I0 a 2 4R 2R
(a) . sin (t) (b) . cos (t)
2 b 2 b 15. A coil of cross-sectional area A having n turns is placed in
a uniform magnetic field B. When it is rotated with an
a2 0 I0 b2 angular velocity , the maximum e.m.f. induced in the coil
(c) 0 I0 sin (t) (d) cos (t)
b a will be : (2018 Online Set-3)
11. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 283 V and angular 3
frequency 320/s is applied to a series LCR circuit. Given (a) 3nBA (b) nBA
2
that R = 5 , L = 25 mH and C = 1000 F. The total impedance,
and phase difference between the voltage across the 1
source and the current will respectively be :(2017 Set-2) (c) nBA (d) nBA
2
(a) 10 and tan 1
5 16. A plane electromagnetic wave of wavelength has an
(b) 7 and 45º
3 intensity I. It is propagating along the positive Y-direction.
The allowed expressions for the electric and magnetic
8 5 fields are given by : (2018 Online Set-3)
(c) 10 and tan 1 (d) 7 and tan 1
3 3
EMI & AC 136
21. The total number of turns and cross-sectional area in a
2I 2 ˆ 1
(a) E = cos y - ct k; B = + E ˆi solenoid is fixed. However, its length L is varied by
0 c c adjusting the separation between windings. The
inductance of solenoid will be proportional to: (2019)
2I 2 ˆ 1 ˆ
(b) E = cos y + ct k; B= E i (a) L (b) L2
0 c c
1 1
1 2 ˆ 1 ˆ (c) (d)
cos y - ct k;
2
(c) E = B= E i L L
0 c c 22. A very long solenoid of radius R is carrying current
(d) E =
1 2 1
cos y - ct ˆi; B = E kˆ
I t kte t k 0 , as a function of time t 0 .
0 c c Counter clockwise current is taken to be positive. A circular
17. In an a.c circuit, the instantaneous e.m.f and current are conducting coil of radius 2R is placed in the equatorial
plane of the solenoid and concentric with the solenoid.
The current induced in the outer coil is correctly depicted,
given by e = 100 sin 30 t i =20sin 30t . In one cycle
4 as a function of time, by: (2019)
of a.c the average power consumed by the circuit and the (a)
wattless current are, respectively : (2018)
50
(a) ,0 (b) 50, 0
2
1000
(c) 50, 10 (d) ,10
2
18. For an RLC circuit driven with voltage of amplitude m (b)
1
and frequency 0 the current exhibits resonance.
LC
The quality factor, Q is given by : (2018)
R CR
(a) ( C) (b)
0 0 (c)
0 L 0 R
(c) (d)
R L
19. An alternating voltage V(t) = 220 sin 100 pt is applied to a
purely resistive load of 50 W. The time taken for the current
to rise from half of the peak value to the peak value is :
(d)
(2019)
(a) 5 ms (b) 2.2 ms
(c) 7.2 ms (d) 3.3 ms
20. A circuit connected to an ac source of
emf e e0 sin 100t with t in seconds, gives a phase
23. Two coils ‘P’ and ‘Q’ are separated by some distance,
When a current of 3A flows through coil ‘P’, a magnetic
difference of between the emf e and current i. Which flux of 103 Wb passes through ‘Q’. No current is passed
4
of the following circuits will exhibit this? (2019) through ‘Q’. When no current passes through ‘P’ and a
(a) RL circuit with R = 1 kW and L = 10 mH current of 2A passes through ‘Q’, the flux through ‘P’ is:
(2019)
(b) RL circuit with R = 1 kW and L = 1 mH
(c) RC circuit with R = 1 kW and C = 1 ìF (a) 6.67 104 Wb (b) 3.67 103 Wb
(d) RC circuit with R = 1 kW and C = 10 ìF. (c) 6.67 103 Wb (d) 3.67 104 Wb
EMI & AC 137
24. A transformer consisting of 300 turns in the primary and 28. A series AC circuit containing an inductor (20 mH), a
150 turns in the secondary gives output power of 2.2 kW capacitor (120 ìF) and a resistor (60 &!) is driven by an AC
If the current in the secondary coil is 10 A, then the input source of 24 V /50 Hz. The energy dissipated in the circuit
voltage (in V) is : (2019) in 60s is: (2019)
(a) 5.65 × 10 J
2
(b) 2.26 × 10 J
3
25. A coil of self inductance 10 mH and resistance 0.1 is
connected through a switch to a battery of internal (c) 5.17 × 102 J (d) 3.39 × 103 J
resistance 0.9. After the switch is closed, the time taken 29. A power transmission line feeds input power at 2300 V to
for the current to attain 80% of the saturation value is a step down transformer with its primary windings having
[take ln 5 = 1.6] (2019) 4000 turns. The output power is delivered at 230 V by the
(a) 0.324 s (b) 0.103 s transformer. If the current in the primary of the transformer
is 5A and its efficiency is 90%, the output current would
(c) 0.002 s (d) 0.016 s be: (2019)
26. The figure shows a square loop L of side 5 cm which is (a) 50A (b) 45A
connected to a network of resistances. The whole setup (c) 35A (d) 25A
is moving towards right with a constant speed of 1 cm s-1.
30. A solid metal cube of edge length 2 cm is moving in a
At some instant, a part of L is in a uniform magnetic field
positive y-direction at a constant speed of 6 m/s. There is
of 1 T, perpendicular to the plane of the loop. If the
a uniform magnetic field of 0.1 T in the positive z-direction.
resistance of L is 1.7 Ù, the current in the loop at that
The potential difference between the two faces of the cube
instant will be close to : (2019)
perpendicular to the x-axis, is: (2019)
(a) 12 mV (b) 6 mV
(c) 1 mV (d) 2 mV
31. The self-induced emf of a coil is 25 V. When the current in
it is changed at uniform rate from 10 A to 25 A in 1s, the
change in the energy of the inductor is: (2019)
(a) 740 J (b) 437.5 J
(c) 540 J (d) 637.5 J
32. In the circuit shown, figure the switch S1 is closed at time
t = 0 and the switch S2 is kept open. At some later time (t0),
(a) 60 A (b) 170 A the switch S1 is opened and S2 is closed. the behaviour of
(c) 150 A (d) 115 A the current I as a function of time ‘t’ is given by: (2019)
27. Consider the LR circuit shown in the figure. If the switch
S is closed at t = 0 then the amount of charge that passes
L
through the battery between t = 0 and t is (2019)
R
(a) (b)
2.7EL EL (c) (d)
(a) (b)
R2 2.7 R 2
7.3EL EL
(c) (d)
R2 7.3R 2
EMI & AC 138
33. A copper wire is wound on a wooden frame, whose shape 38. An elliptical loop having resistance R, of semi major axis
is that of an equilateral triangle. If the linear dimension of a, and semi minor axis b is placed in magnetic field as
each side of the frame is increased by a factor of 3, keeping shown in the figure. If the loop is rotated about the x-axis
the number of turns of the coil per unit length of the with angular frequency , the average power loss in the
frame the same, then the self inductance of the coil: loop due to Joule heating is (2020)
(2019)
(a) Decreases by a factor of 9
(b) increases by a factor of 27
(c) increases by a factor of 3
(d) Decreases by a factor of 9 3
3
34. In the above circuit figure C F , R2 50,
2
3 abB 2 a 2 b2 B2 2
L H , and R1 10 . Current in L-R1 path is I1 and in
10 (a) (b)
R R
C-R2 path it is I2. The voltage of A. C source is given by,
V 200 2 sin 100t volts. The phase difference between 2 a 2 b2 B2 2
(c) (d) Zero
2R
I1 and I2 is (2019)
39. A 750 Hz, 20 V (rms) source is connected to a resistance of
100 , and inductance of 0.1803 H and a capacitance
of 10 F all in series. The time in which the resistance
(heat capacity 2 J/ºC) will get heated by 10ºC. (assume no
loss of heat to the surroundings) isclose to : (2020)
(a) 245 s (b) 365 s
(c) 418 s (d) 348 s
40. A uniform magnetic field B exists in a direction
(a) 60° (b) 150°
perpendicular to the plane of a square loop made of a
(c) 90° (d) either (b) or (c) metal wire. The wire has a diameter of 4 mm and a total
35. A 10 m long horizontal wire extends from North East to length of 30 cm. The magnetic field changes with time at
South West. It is falling with a speed of 5.0 ms- 1, at right a steady rate dB/dt = 0.032 Ts–1. The induced current in
angles to the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic the loop is close to (Resistivity of the metal wire is 1.23 ×
field, of 0.3 × 10-4 Wb/m2. The value of the induced emf 10–8m) (2020)
in wire is : (2019) (a) 0.53 A (b) 0.61 A
(a) 1 .5 × 10 V–3
(b) 1.1 × 10 V
–3
(c) 0.34 A (d) 0.43 A
(c) 2.5 × 10–3V (d) 0.3 × 10–3V
41. A small bar magnet is moved through a coil at constant
36. A circular coil of radius 10 cm is placed in uniform magnetic
speed from one end to the other. Which of the following
field of 3.0 × 10–5 T with its plane perpendicular to the field
series of observations will be seen on the galvanometer
initially. It is rotated at constant angular speed about
G attached across the coil? (2020)
an axis along the diameter of coil and perpendicular to
magnetic field so that it under-goes half of rotation in 0.2s.
The maximum value of EMF induced (in V) in the coil
will be close to the integer …… . (2020)
37. An inductance coil has a reactance of 100 . When an
AC signal of frequency 1000 Hz is applied to the coil, the
applied voltage leads the current by 45º. The self-
inductance of the coil is : (2020)
(a) 6.7 107 H (b) 5.5 105 H Three positions shown describe : (a) the magnet’s entry
(b) magnet is completely inside and (c) magnet’s exit.
(c) 1.1 101 H (d) 1.1 102 H
(2020)
EMI & AC 139
0 Ivl 0 Ivl
(a) (b)
2 Rr Rr
20 Ivl 0 Ivl
(c) (d)
Rr 4 Rr
45. An AC circuit has
R 100, C 2 F and L 80 mH connected in series.
The quality factor of the circuit is: (2020)
(a) 20 (b) 2
(c) 0.5 (d) 400
46. A part of a complete circuit is shown in the figure. At some
instant, the value of current I is1A and it is decreasing at
42. A series L-R circuit is connected to a battery of emf V. If a rate of 102A s-1. The value of the potential difference VP
the circuit is switched on at t = 0, then the time at which - VQ, (in volts) at that instant, is _______. (2020)
1
the energy stored in the inductor reaches times of
n
its maximum value, is: (2020)
47. In a series LR circuit, power of 400 W is dissipated from a
L n L n source of 250 V, 50 Hz. The power factor of the circuit is
(a) R n (b) R n 0.8. In order to bring the power factor to unity, a capacitor
n 1 n 1
of value C is added in series to the L and R. Taking the
L n 1 L n 1 n
(c) R n (d) R n value of C as F , then value of n is _____.
n 1 n 3
43. Two concentric circular coils, C1 and C2, are placed in the (2020)
XY plane. C1 has 500 turns, and a radius of 1 cm. C2 has 48. A long solenoid of radius R carries a time (t) dependent
200 turns and radius of 20 cm. C2 carries a time dependent
current I t I 0 t 1 t . A ring of radius 2R is placed
current I (t) = (5t2 – 2t + 3) A where t is in s. The emf
coaxially near its middle. During the time instant 0 t 1 ,
4
induced in C1 (in mV), at the instant t = 1s is . The the induced current I R and the induced EMF VR in
x
value of x is …………. . (2020) the ring changes as: (2020)
44. An infinitely long straight wire carrying current I, one (a) Direction of I R remains unchanged and VR is
side opened rectangular loop and conductor C with a
maximum at t = 0.5
sliding connector are located in the same plane, as shown
in the figure. The connector has length l and resistance R. (b) Direction of I R remains unchanged and VR is zero at
It slides to the right with a velocity v. The resistance of t = 0.25
the conductor and the self inductance of the loop are
negligible. The induced current in the loop, (c) At t = 0.5 direction of I R reverses and VR is zero
as a function of separation r, between the connector and
the straight wire is : (2020) (d) At t = 0.25 direction of I R reverses and VR is maximum
EMI & AC 140
49. Consider a circular coil of wire carrying current I, forming 54. At time t = 0 magnetic field of 1000 Gauss is passing
a magnetic dipole. The magnetic flux through an infinite perpendicularly through the area defined by the closed
plane that contains the circular coil and excluding the loop shown in the figure. If the magnetic field reduces
linearly to 500 Gauss, in the next 5 s, then induced EMF in
circular coil area is given by i . The magnetic flux through
the loop is: (2020)
the area of the circular coil area is given by 0 . (a) 56 V (b) 28V
Which of the following option is correct? (2020)
(c) 30 V (d) 48V
(a) i 0 (b) i 0
55. As shown in figure, a battery of emf is connected to an
(c) i 0 (d) i 0
inductor and resistance in series. The switch is closed at
50. A LCR circuit behaves like a damped harmonic oscillator. = 0. The total charge that flows from the battery, between
Comparing it with a physical spring-mass damped t = 0 andt =tc(tc is the time constant of the circuit) is
oscillator having damping constant ‘b’, the correct (2020)
equivalence will be (2020)
1 1 1
(a) L ,C , R
b m k
(b) L k , C b, R m
(c) L m, C k , R b
1
(d) L m, C ,R b
k
L R
51. A loop ABCDEFA of straight edges has six corner points (a) 2 (b)
eR eL2
A(0,0,0), B(5,0,0), C(5,5,0), D(0,5,0), E(0,5,5), F(0,0,5). The
magnetic field in this region is B 3i 4k T . The (c)
L
2
1
1
R e
(d)
L
R2
quantity of flux through the loop ABCDEFA (in Wb) is
(2020) 56. In a fluorescent lamp choke (a small transformer) 100 V of
52. A planar loop of wire rotates in a uniform magnetic field. reversible voltage is producedwhen choke changes current
Initially at t = 0 , the plane of the loop is perpendicular to in from 0.25 A to 0 A in 0.025 ms. The self- i n d u c t a n c e
the magnetic field. If it rotates with a period of 10s about ofchoke (in mH) is estimated to be (2020)
an axis in its plane, then the magnitude of induced emf will 57. In LC circuit the inductance L = 40mH and C = 100 F. If
be maximum and minimum, respectively at (2020)
(a) 2.5 sec and 5 sec (b) 5 sec and 7.5 sec a voltage V t 10sin 314t is applied to the circuit,
(c) 2.5 sec and 7.5 sec (d) 5 sec and 10 sec the current in the circuit is given as (2020)
53. An emf of 20V is applied at time t = 0 to a circuit containing
in series 10mH inductor and 5Ù resistor. The ratio of the (a) 10cos 314t (b) 0.52 cos 314t
currents at time t = ¥ and t = 40s is close to(take e2 = 7.389)
(2020) (c) 0.52sin 314t (d) 5.2 cos 314t
(a) 1.06 (b) 1.46
(c) 1.15 (d) 0.84
EMI & AC 141
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Single Answer Type Questions
1. A physicist works in a laboratory where the magnetic
field is 2 T. She wears a necklace enclosing area 0.01 m2 in
such a way that the plane of the necklace is normal to the
field and is having a resistance R = 0.01 . Because of
power failure, the field decays to 1 T in time 10–3 seconds.
Then what is the total heat produced in her necklace ? (T
= Tesla)
(a) 10 J (b) 20 J
(c) 30 J (d) 40 J
2. Some magnetic flux is changed from a coil of Y Y
resistance 10 ohm. As a result an induced current is
developed in it, which varies with time as shown in e e
figure. The magnitude of change in flux through the
(a) (b)
coil in webers is
O X O X
1 2t 1 2t
i(amp)
4 Y Y
e e
(c) (d)
t(sec)
0.1 O X O X
1 2t 1 2t
(a) 2 (b) 4 5. A rectangular loop with a sliding conductor of lenght l is
(c) 6 (d) None of these located in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the
plane of the loop. The magnetic induction is B. The
3. Figure (i) shows a conducting loop being pulled out conductor has a resistance R. The sides AB and CD have
of a magnetic field with a speed v. Which of the four resistances R1 and R2, respectively. Find the current through
plots shown in figure (ii) may represent the power the conductor during its motion to the right a constant
delivered by the pulling agent as a function of the velocity v.
speed v
×× × × P d a
c
×× ×
×× × v
×× × b
×× × × v
(i) (ii)
(a) a (b) b
(c) c (d) d
Bv R1 R 2 B 2 v
4. A flexible wire bent in the form of a circle is placed in a (a) R R R (b)
uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of 1 1 2 R 1 R 1R 2
the coil. The radius of the coil changes as shown in
figure. The graph of induced emf in the coil is represented Bv R1 R 2 B2 v
(c) R R R R R (d) R R R R R
by 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
EMI & AC 142
6. A conductor of length l and mass m can slide without 9. In the circuit shown in figure, X is joined to Y for a long
any friction along the two vertical conductors time and then X is joined to Z. The total heat produced
connected at the top through a capacitor. A uniform in R2 is
magnetic field B is set up to the plane of paper. The
voltage across the capacitor in terms of distance x
through which it falls is
LE 2 LE 2
(a) (b)
2R12 2R 22
LE 2 LE 2 R 2
(c) (d)
(a) Bl2gx (b) B gx 2R1R 2 2R13
10. In the circuit shown in figure, X is the joined to Y for a
(c) B 2gx (d) Bx 2g long time and then X is joined to Z. The total heat produced
7. The length of a wire required to manufacture a solenoid in R2 is
of length l and self induction L is (cross-sectional area
is negligibile)
2L 0 L
(a) 0 (b)
4
4L 0 L
(c) 0 (d) LE 2 LE 2
2
(a) (b)
2R12 2R 22
8. An inductor of inductance L = 400 mH and resistors of
resistances R1 = 4 and R2 = 2 are connected to battery
LE 2 LE 2 R 2
of emf 12 V as shown in the figure. The internal (c) (d)
resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S is 2R1R 2 2R13
closed at t = 0. The potential drop across L as a function 11. Figure shows a rectangular coil near a long wire. Calculate
ot time is the mutual inductance of the combination is
0 a b 0 a b
(a) n 1 (b) n 1
2 c 2 c
12 3t
–5t
(a) 6e V (b) e V
t 0 a b 0 a b
(c) n 1 (d) n 1
(c) 6 (1 – e
–t/0.2
)
–5t
(d) 12 e V c 2 c
EMI & AC 143
12. A small square loop of wire of side l is placed inside a large 16. Plane figures made of thin wires of resistance R = 50 milli
square loop of wire of side L(L>>l). The loops are ohm/metre are located in a uniform magnetic field
coplanar and their centres coincide. The mutual perpendicular into the plane of the figures and which
inductance of the system is proportional to : decrease at the rate dB/dt = 0.1 m T/s. Then currents
(a) l/L (b) l2/L in the inner and outer boundary are. (The inner
radius a = 10 cm and outer radius b = 20 cm)
(c) L/l (d) L2/l
13. Two concentric and coplanar coils have radii a and b
(>>a) as shown in figure. Resistance of the inner coil is × × × × × × ×
R. Current in the outer coil is increased from 0 to i, then
the total charge circulating the inner coil is × × × b× × × ×
× × × ×a × × ×
× × × × × × ×
× ×D × × ×C × ×
(a) 10 – 4 A (Clockwise), 2 10 – 4 A (Clockwise)
0 ia 2
0 iab (b) 10 – 4 A (Anticlockwise), 2 10 – 4 A (Clockwise)
(a) (b)
2Rb 2R
(c) 4 10 – 4 A (clockwise), 10 – 4 A (Clockwise)
0 iab b 2 0 ib (d) 2 10 – 4 A (Anticlockwise), 10 – 4 A (Anticlockwise)
(b) (d)
2a R 2 R
17. A conducting ring of radius 1 meter is placed in an
14. A highly conducting ring of radius R is perpendicular to uniform magnetic field B of 0.01Telsa oscillating with
and concentric with the axis of a long solenoid as shown frequency 100Hz with its plane at right angles to B.
in fig. The ring has a narrow gap of width d in its What will be the maximum induced electric field
circumference. The solenoid has cross sectional area A
and a uniform internal field of magnitude B 0. Now (a) volt/m (b) 2volt/m
beginning at t = 0, the solenoid current is steadily
(c) 10volt/m (d) 62volt/m
increased to so that the field magnitude at any time t is
given by B(t) = B0 + t where > 0. Assuming that no 18. Shown in the figure is a circular loop of radius r
charge can flow across the gap, the end of ring which and resistance R. A variable magnetic field of
has excess of positive charge and the magnitude of induction B = B 0e–t is established inside the coil. If the
induced e.m.f. in the ring are respectively key (K) is closed at t = 0 the electrical power developed
right after closing the switch is equal to
Area B
A
B R
X Y
d
K
(a) X, A (b) X R2
(c) Y, A2 (d) Y, R2
15. Two identical circular loop of metal wire are lying on a
table without touching each other. Loop A carries a B02 r 2 B 0 10r 3
current which increases with time. In response, the loop (a) (b)
R R
B:
(a) remains stationary B02 2 r 4 R B02 2 r 4
(c) (d)
(b) is attracted by the loop A 5 R
(c) is repelled by the loop A
(d) rotates about its CM, with CM fixed
EMI & AC 144
19. A conductor ABOCD moves along its bisector with a 22. A rectangular loop with a sliding connector of length
velocity of 1 m/s through a perpendicular magnetic field of l = 1.0 m is situated in a uniform magnetic field B = 2T
1 wb/m2, as shown in fig. If all the four sides are of 1m perpendicular to the plane of loop. Resistance of connector
length each, then the induced emf between points A & D is is r = 2. Two resistance of 6 and 3 are connected as
shown in figure. The external force required to keep the
connector moving with a constant velocity v = 2m/s is
× × B× × × A× ×
× × × × × × ×
O 90° v
× × × × × × × v
× × C × ×D× ×
(a) 0 (b) 1.41 volt
(a) 6 N (b) 4 N
(c) 0.71 volt (d) None of the above (c) 2 N (d) 1 N
20. A conducting rod of length 2l is rotating with constant 23. A wire cd of length l and mass m is sliding without friction
angular speed about its perpendicular bisector. A uniform on conducting rails ax and by as shown. The vertical rails
magnetic field B exists parallel to the axis of rotation. The are connected to each other with a resistance R between a
e.m.f. induced between two ends of the rod is and b. A uniform magnetic field B is applied perpendicular
to the plane abcd such that cd moves with a constant
velocity of
R
a b
c l d
x y
mgR mgR
1 (a) (b)
(a) B 2 (b) B 2 B B2 2
2
mgR mgR
1 (c) (d)
(c) B 2 (d) Zero B3 3 B2
8
24. A wire of length 1 m is moving at a speed of 2ms–1
21. A conducting rod PQ of length L = 1.0 m is moving with a perpendicular to its length and a homogeneous magnetic
uniform speed v = 2 m/s in a uniform magnetic field B = 4.0 T field of 0.5 T. The ends of the wire are joined to a circuit of
directed into the paper. A capacitor of capacity C = 10 F resistance 6 . The rate at which work is being done to
is connected as shown in figure. Then keep the wire moving at constant speed is
1 1
× × × P × (a) W (b) W
12 6
× × × × ×
A 1
v W
B× × × × × (c) (d) 1W
3
× × × × ×
Q 25. How much length of a very thin wire is required to obtain
a solenoid of length l0 and inductance L
(a) qA = + 80 C and qB = – 80 C
2L 0 4L 0
(b) qA = – 80 C and qB = + 80 C (a) (b)
0 02
(c) qA = 0 = qB
(d) Charge stored in the capacitor increases exponentially 4L 0 8L 0
with time (c) (d)
0 0
EMI & AC 145
26. An inductor of 2 henry and a resistance of 10 ohms are
connected in series with a battery of 5 volts. The initial 0 a 4 0 a 4
(a) (b)
rate of change of current is 8 3 4 3
(a) 0.5 amp/sec (b) 2.0 amp/sec
0 a 4 0 a 4
(c) 2.5 amp/sec (d) 0.25 amp/sec (c) (d)
6 3 2 3
27. An e.m.f. of 15 volt is applied in a circuit containing 5
henry inductance and 10 ohm resistance. The ratio of the 32. Two conducting circular loops of radii R1 and R2 are
currents at time t = and at t = 1 second is placed in the same plane with their centres coinciding.
If R1 >> R2, the mutual inductance M between them will
e 1/ 2 e2 be directly proportional to
(a) (b)
e1/ 2 1 e2 1
(a) R1/R2 (b) R2/R1
(c) 1 – e–1 (d) e–1
28. The resistance in the following circuit is increased at a (c) R 12 / R 2 (d) R 22 / R 1
particular instant. At this instant the value of resistance is
10. The current in the circuit at this instant will be now 33. Two coils have a mutual inductance 0.005 H. The cur-
rent changes in the first coil according to equation I =
I0 sin t, where I0 = 10A and radian/sec. The
maximum value of e.m.f. in the second coil is
(a) 2 (b) 5
(c) (d) 4
34. An inductor of inductance 2.0 mH is connected across
a charged capacitor of capacitance 5.0 µF and the
(a) i = 0.5 A (b) i > 0.5 A resulting L-C circuit is set oscillating at its natural
frequency. Let Q denote the instantaneous charge on
(c) i < 0.5 A (d) i = 0
the capacitor and I the current in the circuit. It is found
29. A 50 volt potential difference is suddenly applied to a coil that the maximum value of Q is 200 µC.
with L = 5 × 10–3 h bmenry and R = 180 ohm. The rate of
increase of current after 0.001 second is (a) When Q = 100 µC, what is the value of |dI / dt| ?
(a) 27.3 amp/sec (b) 27.8 amp/sec (b) When Q = 200 µC, what is the value of I ?
(c) 2.73 amp/sec (d) None of the above
(c) Find the maximum value of I.
3
30. The current in a LR circuit builds up to th of its steady (d) When I is equal to one-half its maximum value, what
4 is the value of |Q| ?
state value in 4s. The time constant of this circuit is
35. A resistance of 20 is connected to a source of an
1 2 alternating potential V = 220 sin (100 t). The time taken
(a) s (b) s
n 2 n 2 by the current to change from the peak value to rms
3 4 value, is
(c) s (d) s
n 2 n 2 (a) 0.2 s (b) 0.25 s
31. What is the mutual inductance of a two-loop system as (c) 2.5 × 10 s
–3
(d) 2.5 × 10 s
–3
shown with centre separation l
36. A direct current of 5 A a superimposed on an
alternating current I = 10 sin t flowing through a wire.
1 2 The effective value of the resulting current will be
a a
(a) (15/2) A (b) 5 3 A
l >>a
(c) 5 5 A (d) 15 A
EMI & AC 146
37. Determine the rms value of a semi-circular current wave
which has a maximum value of a. × × ×
M
× × ×
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
R × × × F× × d ×
B
× × × × × ×
× × × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
N
(a) 1/ 2 a (b) 3 / 2 a (i) Find the velocity of the rod and the applied force F as
functions of the distance x of the rod from R.
(c) 2 / 3 a
(d) 1/ 3 a (ii) What fraction of the work done per second by F is
converted into heat?
38. The voltage time (V–t) graph for triangular wave having 42. A circuit containing a two position switch S is shown in
peak value. V0 is as shown in figure figure.
R3 C
R5
R1 E1
12V
1 A E2 R2 B
The rms value of V in time interval from t = 0 to T/4 is 2 S 3V R4
L
V0 V0
(a) (b) 10 mH
3 2
V0 (a) The switch S is in position 1. Find the potential difference
(c) (d) None of these VA–VB and the rate of production of joule heat in R1.
2
(b) If now the switch S is put in position 2 at t = 0. Find;
39. In a series LCR circuit the voltage across the resistance,
(i) steady current in R4 and
capacitance and inductance is 10 V each. If the capacitance
is short circuited, the voltage across the inductance will (ii) the time when current in R4 is half the steady value.Also
be calculate the energy stored in the inductor L at that time.
(a) 10 2 V (b) 10 V 43. A magnetic field B B 0 y / a k̂ is acting into the paper in
(c) (10/3) V (d) 20 V the +z direction. B0 and a are positive constants. A square
loop EFGH of side a, mass m and resistance R in x-y plane
Subjective Questions starts falling under the influence of gravity. Note the
directions of x and y in the figure. Find :
40. A coil has an inductance of 0.7 H and is joined in series
with a resistance of 220 . When an alternating emf of 220
V at 50 cps is applied to it, then the wattless component of O x
the current in the circuit is g
E F
(a) 5A (b) 0.5 A
(c) 0.7 A (d) 7 A
H G
41. Two long parallel horizontal rails, a distance d apart and
each having a resistance per unit length, are joined at y
one end by a resistance R. A perfectly conducting rod
MN of mass m is free to slide along the rails without
friction (see figure). There is a uniform magnetic field of (a) the induced current in the loop and indicate its direction.
induction B normal to the plane of the paper and directed (b) the total Lorentz force acting on the loop and indicate
into the paper. A variable force F is applied to the rod MN its direction.
such that, as the rod moves, a constant current i flows (c) an expression for the speed of the loop v (t) and its
through R. terminal velocity.
EMI & AC 147
44. A rectangular frame ABCD, made of a uniform metal wire, 47. A pair of parallel horizontal conducting rails of negligible
has a straight connection between E and F made of the resistance shorted at one end is fixed on a table. The
same wire, as shown in figure AEFD is a square of side distance between the rails is L. A conducting massless rod
1 m and EB = FC = 0.5 m. The entire circuit is placed in a of resistance R can slide on the rails frictionlessly. The rod
steadily increasing, uniform magnetic field directed into is tied to a massless string which passes over a pulley
the plane of the paper and normal to it. The rate of change fixed to the edge of the table. A mass m tied to the other
of the magnetic field is 1 T/s. The resistance per unit length end of the string hangs vertically. A constant magnetic
of the wire is 1/m. Find the magnitudes and directions of field B exists perpendicular to the table. If the system is
the currents in the segments AE. BE and EF. released from rest. Calculate :
A E B
× × × × × ×
B
× × × × × × L R
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
× × × × × ×
D F C
45. A square metal wire loop of side 10 cm and resistance 1 is
moved with a constant velocity v 0 in a uniform magnetic
field of induction B = 2 weber/m2 as shown in the figure. (a) the terminal velocity achieved by the rod, and
The magnetic field lines are perpendicular to the plane of (b) the acceleration of the mass at the instant when the
the loop (directed into the paper). The loop is connected velocity of the rod is half the terminal velocity.
to a network of resistors each of value 3
48. Two parallel vertical metallic rails AB and CD are separated
The resistances of the lead wires OS and PQ are negligible. by 1 m. They are connected at two ends by resistances R1
What should be the speed of the loop so as to have a and R2 as shown in figure. A horizontal metallic bar of
steady current of 1 mA in the loop? Give the direction of mass 0.2 kg slides without friction vertically down the rails
current in the loop. under the action of gravity. There is a uniform horizontal
46. Space is divided by the line AD into two regions. Region I magnetic field of 0.6 T perpendicular to the plane of the
is field free and the region II has a uniform magnetic field B rails. It is observed that when the terminal velocity is
directed into the plane of the paper. ACD is a semicircular attained, the powers dissipated in R1 and R2 are 0.76 W and
conducting loop of radius r with centre at O, the plane of the 1.2 W respectively. Find the terminal velocity of the bar L
loop being in the plane of the paper. The loop is now made to and the values of R1 and R2.
rotate with a constant angular velocity about an axis passing R1
through O and perpendicular to the plane of the paper. The A C
effective resistance of the loop is R.
L
Region I Region II
× × × × ×
A × × × × ×
× × × × × R2
r × × × × × B D
O × × × B× ×
× × × × × 49. A metal rod OA and mass m and length r kept rotating with
C × × × × × a constant angular speed in a vertical plane about 1
D × × × × × horizontal axis at the end O. The free end A is arranged to
× × × × × slide without friction along a fixed conducting circular ring
in the same plane as that of rotation. A uniform and constant
(a) Obtain an expression for the magnitude of the induced magnetic induction B is applied perpendicular and into
current in the loop. the plane of rotation as shown in figure. An inductor L and
(b) Show the direction of the current when the loop is an external resistance R are connected through a switch S
entering into the region II. between the point O and a point C on the ring to form an
(c) Plot a graph between the induced emf and the time of electrical circuit. Neglect the resistance of the ring and the
rotation for two periods of rotation. rod. Initially, the switch is open.
EMI & AC 148
Y
× × × × × ×
A
S × × × × × B
X
(a) (b)
× × ×O × × ×
R × × × × × ×
C
L
50. An ac is given by equation I = I1 cos t + I2 sin t. The rms
value of current is given by :
(c) (d)
I1 I2 I1 I 2 2
(a) (b)
2 2
1 54. A conducting rod of length l is hinged at point O. It is free
I12 I22 I12 I 22
(c) (d) to rotate in a vertical plane. There exists a uniform magnetic
2 2
field B in horizontal direction. The rod is released from
Multiple Answer Questions (more than one correct) the position shown in the figure. The potential difference
between the two ends of the rod is proportional to:
51. The uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of a
conducting ring of radius a changes at the rate of , then O l
(a) all the points on the ring are at the same potential
2
(b) the e.m.f. induced in the ring is a
(c) electric field intensity E at any point on the ring is zero B
a
(d) E
2
(a) l 3/2 (b) l 2
52. The conductor AD moves to the right in a uniform
magnetic field directed into the plane of the paper. (c) sin (d) (sin )1/2
55. A circular conducting loop of radius r0 and having
resistance per unit length as shown in the figure is placed
in a magnetic field B which is constant in space and time.
The ends of the loop are crossed and pulled in opposite
directions with a velocity V such that the loop always
remains circular and the radius of the loop goes on
decreasing, then -
(a) The free electron in AD will move towards A × × × × × × ×
(b) D will acquire a positive potential with respect to A × × × × × × ×
B
(c) A current will flow from A to D in AD in close loop × × × × × × ×
(d) The current in AD flows from lower to higher potential × × × × × × ×
V ×
× × × × × ×
53. Switch S of the circuit shown in figure is closed at t = 0. If
e denotes the induced e.m.f. in L and I is the current flowing
through the circuit at time t, which of the following graphs (a) radius of the loop changes with r = r0 – vt/
is/are correct ? (b) EMF induced in the loop as a function of time is
|e| = 2Bv(r 0 – vt/)
Bv
(c) Current induced in the loop is I =
2
Bv
(d) Current induced in the loop is I =
EMI & AC 149
56. Two different coils have self inductance L1 = 8 mH, L2 = 2 (a) The maximum current in circuit during the motion of
mH. The current in one coil is increased at a constant rate.
The current in the second coil is also increased at the M
rod is v 0
same rate. At a certain instant of time, the power given L
to the two coils is the same. At that time the current the (b) The rod moves for some distance and comes to
induced voltage and the energy stored in the first coil permanently rest
are i1, V1 and W1 respectively. Corresponding values for
(c) The velocity of rod when current in the circuit is half
the second coil at the same instant are i2, V2 and W2
respectively. Then - 3
of maximum is v0
(a) i1/i2 = 1/4 (b) i1/i2 = 4 2
(d) The rod oscillates in SHM
(c) W2/W1 = 4 (d) V2/V1 = 1/4
60. In the figure shown R is a fixed conducting ring of negligible
57. The magnetic flux (f) linked with a coil depends on time t resistance and radius 'a'. PQ is a uniform rod of resistance
as = atn, where a is a constant. The induced e.m.f. in the r. It is hinged at the centre of the ring and rotated about
coil is e: this point in clockwise direction with a uniform angular
velocity . There is a uniform magnetic field of strength B
(a) lf 0 < n < 1, e = 0
pointing inwards, 'r' is a stationary resistance.
(b) If 0 < n < 1, e 0 and |e| decreases with time
(c) If n = 1, e is constant
(d) If n > 1, |e| increases with time. B
58. If B and E denote induction of magnetic field and energy P Q
density at the midpoint of a long solenoid carrying a current r
I, then which of the following graphs is/are correct? R
B B
(a) current through r is zero
(a) (b) 2
(b) current through r is 2Ba /5r
I I
(c) Direction of current in external r is from centre to
circumference
E E
(d) Direction of current in external r is from circumference
to centre.
(c) (d)
61. Two straight conducting rails form a right angle where
B B
their ends are joined. A conducting bar in contact with the
59. A loop is formed by two parallel conductors connected by rails start at the vertex at t = 0 and moves with a constant
a solenoid with inductance L and a conducting rod of velocity v along them as shown. A magnetic field B is
mass M which can freely slide over the conductors. The directed into the page. The induced emf in the circuit at
conductors are located in a uniform magnetic field with any time t is proportional to :
induction B perpendicular to the plane of loop. The
distance between conductors is l. At t = 0, the rod is given × × × × × × × ×
a velocity v 0 directed towards right and the current through × × × × × × × ×
the inductor is initially zero.
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × v×
× × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ×
B × × × × × × × ×
V0 × × × × × × × ×
(a) t0 (b) t
(c) v (d) v2
EMI & AC 150
62. A coil of inductance 1H and resistance 10is connected 65. In steady state, the current flowing through 3 H inductor is:
to a battery of emf 50 V (negligible internal resistance) at (a) 3 A (b) 6 A
t = 0. The ratio of the rate at which magnetic energy is
stared in the coil to the rate at which energy is supplied by (c) 9 A (d) none of these
the battery : 66. In steady state the current flowing through 6 H inductor is:
(a) At t = 0.1 sec is 0.74 (b) At t = 0.1 sec is 0.37 (a) 3 A (b) 6 A
(c) Increases with time. (d) Decreases with time.
(c) 9 A (d) none of these
63. In an ac circuit shown below in figure, the supply voltage
has a constant rms value V but variable frequency f. At Passage : 2
resonance, the circuit Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 105 & 106
A wire loop enclosing a semicircle of radius R is located
on the boundary of a uniform magnetic field B. At the
moment t = 0, the loop is set into rotation with constant
angular acceleration about an axis O conducting with
the line of vector on the boundary. The clockwise e.m.f.
direction is taken to be positive.
V
(a) has a current I given by : I
R
(b) has a resonance frequency 500 Hz
(c) has a voltage across the capacitor which is 180° out of
phase with that across the inductor
V
(d) has a current given by I
2
1 1
R2
Comprehension type Questions
67. The variation of e.m.f. as a function of time is
Passage : 1
1 3
Using the following comprehension, solve Q. 64 to Q. 66 (a) BR 2 t (b) BR 2 tA
2 2
Figure shows a circuit in which two inductors of 3 H and 6
H are connected in parallel. These are connected to a 18
BR 2 t
volt battery with a 2 resistance. (c) 3 BR t
2
(d)
2
Switch S is closed at t = 0. Neglect mutual inductance
between the two inductors. 68. The variation of e.m.f. as a function of time is
6H
3H (a) (b)
18V S
64. Current as a function of time in the battery is :
(a) 9 (1 – e–t/3) A (b) 9 (1 – e–t/6) A (c) (d)
(c) 9 (1 – e–2t/3) A (d) none of these
EMI & AC 151
Passage : 3 Match The Column Type Questions
Using the following comprehension, 72. Time varying magnetic field is present in a circular region
of radius R. Then
The magnetic field within a long, straight solenoid with a
circular cross section and radius R is increasing at a Column–I Column–II
rate of dB/dt. (A) If a rod is placed (P) Electric field is perpendicular
69. What is the rate of change of flux through a circle with along the diameter of to the length of the rod.
radius r 1 inside the solenoid, normal to the axis of the the magnetic field.
solenoid, and with centre on the solenoid axis is (B) Induced electric (Q) Constant along the length
field at a point within of conductor.
dB 1 2 dB
(a) 2 r1
2
(b) r1 magnetic field (r < R)
dt 2 dt
r dB
(C) Induced electric (R)
dB 3 2 dB 2 dt
(c) r1 r1
2
(d) field at a point out side
dt 2 dt
the magnetic field (r > R)
70. The magnitude of the induced electric field inside the
R 2 dB
solenoid at a distance r 1 from its axis is (D) Induced electric field (S)
2r dt
r1 dB dB in a conductor has a
(a) (b) r1
2 dt dt component parallel to
length of conductor
3r1 dB r1 dB 73. Figure shows a circuit with two identical resistors and an
(c) (d)
2 dt 2 dt ideal inductor. Comment on the current through the central
resistor wrt other resistor for situation in column I
Passage : 4
Using the following comprehension,
In the circuit shown E = 120 V, R1 = 30.0 , R2 = 50.0 +
and L = 0.200 H. Switch S is closed at t = 0. Just after the
switch is closed.
S
Column–I Column–II
(A) just after the closing at switch S (P) More
(B) along time after the closing of S (Q) less
(C) just after S is reopened, a long (R) same
time later
(D) a long time after the reopening (S) zero of S
100
74. In series R-L-C circuit, R = 100 , C F, and
71. Now the switch s is opened, just after opening the S, 100
L mH, is connected to an ac source as shown in figure.
what is the potential difference Vab across the resistance 4
R1 ?
(a) 72 V (b) 36 V
(c) 56 V (d) 90 V
EMI & AC 152
The rms value of ac voltage is 220 V and its frequency is 78. Fig. shows a uniform magnetic field of induction B
50 Hz. In column I some physical quantities are mentioned confined to a cylindrical volume of radius R. B is
while in column II information about quantities are increasing at a constant rate of 0.01 T/s. What is the
provided. Match the entries of column I with the entries of instantaneous acceleration experienced by an electron
column II. placed at C distant r from centre. Assume r = 5 cm. [in 107]
Column I Column II
(a) average power dissipated in (p) zero × ×
× × C
the resistor is × × R
× × × ×
(b) average power dissipated in (q) non-zero × × × ×
the inductor is × ×
(c) average power dissipated in (r) 160
79. A copper rod of length 0.19 m is moving with uniform
the capacitor is velocity of 10m/s parallel to a long wire carrying a current
(d) RMS voltage across the (s) 185.6 of 5 A. The rod itself is perpendicular to the wire with its
capacitor is ends at distance of 0.01 m and 0.20 m from it. Calculate
the emf induced in the rod. [in v]
Integer Type Questions 80. A coil has an inductance of 10 H and a resistance of 2 .
75. The potential difference across a 4 H inductor varies with It is connected to a 10 V battery. How long will it take for
time as shown. The current is zero at time t = 0. Find the the magnetic energy to reach 1/4 of its maximum value ?[in sec]
current (in A) at t = 2 sec. 81. An LCR series with 100 resistance is connected to an
A.C. source of 220 V and angular frequency 300 rad/
sec. When only the capacitance is removed, the current
leads, the voltage by 60°. When only the inductance is
removed, the current leads the voltage by 60°. Calculate
the current (in A) in the LCR circuit.
82. The electric current in a circuit is given by i = i0 (t/) for
some time. The rms current for the period t = 0 t = is
i0
76. A square loop of side (L/2) enters in a uniform magnetic . What is the value of x ?
field B = 4 T which acts in a region of length L = 2 m. The x
2
loop moves with constant acceleration of 1 m/sec . The 83. Find the time required for a 50 Hz alternating current
resistance per unit length of the square frame is 1/m . to change its value from zero to the rms value
Find the magnetic force (in N) on the frame at time t = 1 sec.
1
in ms .
2
84. A solenoid has an inductance of 10 H and a resistance of
2. It is connected to a 10 V battery. How long will it take
for the magnetic energy to reach 1/4 of its maximum value?
85. A coil has a resistance of 10 an and inductance of 0.4
30
Henry. It is connected to an Ac source of 6.5 V, Hz.
x
77. A rectangular loop has a sliding connector of length 1.0 The average power consumed in the circuit is w. Find
8
m. The loop is situated in a uniform magnetic field B = 4 the value of x.
T perpendicular and into the plane of the loop. The
resistance of the connector is 2. Find the external force FILL IN THE BLANKS
required to keep the connector moving with a constant 86. A uniformly wound solenoidal coil of self-inductance 1.8
velocity of v = 2 m/sec (in N). × 10–4 H and resistance 6 is broken up into two identical
coils. These identical coils are then connected in parallel
across a 15 V battery of negligible resistance. The time
constant for the current in the circuit is .......... s and the
steady state current through the battery is .......... A.
EMI & AC 153
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
1. A uniform but time- varying magnetic field B (t) exists in a 4. A metallic square loop ABCD is moving in its own plane
circular region of radius a and is directed into the plane of with velocity v in a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to
the paper as shown. The magnitude of the induced electric its plane as shown in the figure. Electric field is induced:
field at point P at a distance r from the centre of the circular (2001, 2M)
region : (2000, 2M)
B(t) A B
× × r P
× × v
× × × × ×
× × × × D C
× ×× ×× ×
× ×a× ×
×× ××
(a) in AD, but not in BC
(a) is zero (b) decreases as 1/r (b) in BC, but not in AD
(c) increases as r (d) decreases as 1/r2 (c) neither in AD nor in BC
2. A coil of wire having finite inductance and resistance (d) in both AD and BC
has a conducting ring placed co-axially within it. The 5. Two circular coils can be arranged in any of the three
coil is connected to a battery at time t=0, so that a time situations shown in the figure. Their mutual inductance
dependent current I1 (t) starts flowing through the coil. If will be : (2001, S)
I2 (t) is the current induced in the ring and B (t) is the
magnetic field at the axis of the coil due to I1 (t) then as a
function of time (t > 0), the product I2(t) B(t): (2000, 2M)
(a) increases with time
(b) decreases with time (a) (b) (c)
(c) does not vary with time
(a) maximum in situation (a)
(d) passes through a maximum
(b) maximum in situation (b)
3. A thermocole vessel contains 0.5 kg of distilled water at
30°C. A metal coil of area 5 × 10 –3 m2, number of turns (c) maximum in situation (c)
100, mass 0.06 kg and resistance 1.6 is lying (d) the same in all situations
horizontally at the bottom of the vessel. A uniform time
varying magnetic field is set-up to pass vertically 6. An inductor of inductance L = 400 mH and resistors of
through the coil at time t = 0. The field is first increased resistances R1 = 2 and R2= 2 are connected to a battery
from 0 to 0.8 T at a constant rate between 0 and 0.2 s and of emf E = 12 V as shown in the figure. The internal
then decreased to zero from zero at the same rate between resistance of the battery is negligible. The switch S is closed
0.2 and 0.4 s. The cycle is repeated 12000 times. Make at time t =0. (2001, 5M)
sketches of the current through the coil and the power
dissipated in the coil as a function of time for the first
two cycles. Clearly indicate the magnitudes of the
quantities on the axes. Assume that no heat is lost to
the vessel or the surroundings. Determine the final
temperature of the water under thermal equilibrium.
Specific heat of metal = 500 J/kg-K and the specific heat What is the potential drop across L as a function of time?
of water = 4200 J/kg-K. Neglect the inductance of coil. After the steady state is reached, the switch is opened.
(2000, 10M) What is the direction and the magnitude of current through
R1 as a function of time?
EMI & AC 154
7. As shown in the figure, P and Q are two coaxial conducting
di d
loops separated by some distance. When the switch S is (a) Find a relation among i, and where i is the
dt dt
closed, a clockwise current Ip flows in P (as seen by E) and
current in the circuit and is the flux of the magnetic
an induced current IQ flows in Q. The switch remains closed
1
field due to the long wire through the circuit.
for a longtime. When S is opened, a current IQ flows in Q.
2
(b) It is observed that at time t = T, the metal bar AB is at a
Then the direction IQ and IQ (as seen by E) are:
1 2 distance of 2 x0 from the long wire and the resistance R
(2002, 2M)
carries a current i1. Obtain an expression for the net
P charge that has flown through resistance R from
Q
E t = 0 to t = T.
(c) The bar is suddenly stopped at time T. The current
S
through resistance R is found to be i1/4 at time 2T.
Find the value of L/R in terms of the other given
Battery
quantities.
10. When an AC source of emf e=E0 sin (100t) is connected
(a) respectively clockwise and anticlockwise
across a circuit, the phase difference between the emf e
(b) both clockwise and the current i in the circuit is observed to be /4, as
(c) both anticlockwise shown in the diagram. If the circuit consists possibly only
of R–C or R-L or L-C in series, find the relationship
(d) respectively anticlockwise and clockwise
between the two elements : (2003, 2M)
8. A short-circuited coil is placed in a time varying magnetic
field. Electrical power is dissipated due to the current i
induced in the coil. If the number of turns were to be
t
quadrupled and the wire radius halved, the electrical power
dissipated would be : (2002, 2M)
(a) halved (b) the same
(a) R = 1k , C = 10 F (b) R = 1k , C = 1 F
(c) doubled (d) quadrupled
(c) R = 1k , L = 10 H (d) R = 1k , L = 1 H
9. A metal bar AB can slide on two parallel thick metallic rail
11. The variation of induced emf (e) with time (t) in a coil if a
separated by a distance l. A resistance R and an inductance
short bar magnet is moved along its axis with a constant
L are connected to the rails as shown in the figure. A long
velocity is best represented as : (2004, 2M)
straight wire, carrying a constant current I0 is placed in the
plane of the rails and perpendicular to them as shown. The
bar AB is held at rest at a distance x0 from the long wire. At
t = 0, it made to slide on the rails away from the wire. Answer
the following questions. (2002, 5M) e e
t
(a) (b)
t
e e
(c) (d)
t t
EMI & AC 155
12. In the circuit shown A and B are two cells of same emf E but PASSAGE–I
different internal resistances r1 and r2 (r1 > r2) respectively. The capacitor of capacitance C can be charged (with the
Find the value of R such that the potential difference across help of a resistance R ) by a voltage source V , by closing
the terminals of cell A is zero a long time after the key K is
switch S1 , while keeping switch S2 open. The capacitor
closed. (2004, 4M)
can be connected in series with an inductor L by closing
switch S2 and opening S1 .
15. Initially, the capacitor was uncharged. Now, switch Sl is
closed and S2 is kept open. If time constant of this circuit is
, then : (2006, 6M)
R C S1
S2
13. A long solenoid of radius a and number of turns per unit
L
length n is enclosed by cylindrical shell of radius R
thickness d (d < < R) and length L. A variable current i = i0 (a) after time interval , charge on the capacitor is CV/2
sin t flows through the coil. If the resistivity of the material (b) after time interval 2, charge on the capacitor is
of cylindrical shell is , find the induced current in the CV/[(1 – e–2)]
shell. (2005, 4M) (c) the work done by the voltage source will be half on
the heat dissipated when the capacitor is fully charged
(d) after time interval 2, charge on the capacitor is CV/
[(1 – e–1)]
16. After the capacitor gets fully charged, S1 is opened and S2
is closed so that the inductor is connected in series with
the capacitor. Then, (2006, 6M)
(a) at t = 0, energy stored in the circuit is purely in the form
of magnetic energy
(b) at any time t > 0, current in the circuit is in the same direction
(c) at t > 0, there is no exchange of energy between the
inductor and capacitor
(d) at any time t > 0, maximum instantaneous current in the
C
circuit may V
L
17. A field line is shown in the figure. This field cannot
14. An infinitely long cylinder is kept parallel to an uniform represent. (2006, 5M)
magnetic field B directed along positive z-axis. The direction
of induced current as seen from the z-axis will be:
(2005, 2M)
(a) clockwise of the +ve z-axis
(b) anticlockwise of the +ve z-axis
(c) zero
(a) Magnetic field (b) Electrostatic field
(d) along the magnetic field
(c) Induced electric field (d) Gravitational field
EMI & AC 156
PASSAGE–2 22. The figure shows certain wire segments joined together to
Modern trains are based on Maglev technology in which form a coplanar loop. The loop is placed in a perpendicular
magnetic field in the direction going into the plane of the
trains are magnetically leviated, which runs its EDS Maglev
figure. The magnitude of the field increases with time. I1
system.
and I2 are the currents in the segments ab and cd. Then,
There are coils on both sides of wheels. Due to motion of (2009)
train, current induces in the coil of track which levitate it.
This is in accordance with Lenz’s law. If trains lower down
then due to Lenz’s law a repulsive force increases due to
which train gets uplifted and if it goes much high then
there is a net downward force due to gravity. The advantage
of Maglev train is that there is no friction between the train
and the track, thereby reducing power consumption and
enabling the train to attain very high speeds.
Disadvantage of Maglev train is that as it slows down the
electromagnetic forces decreases and it becomes difficult
to keep it levitated and as it moves forward according to (a) I1 > I2
Lenz law there is an electromagnetic drag force. (b) I1 < I2
18. What is the advantage of this system? (2006, 6M) (c) I1 is in the direction ba and I2 is in the direction cd
(a) No friction hence no power consumption (d) I1 is in the direction ab and I2 is in the direction dc
(b) No electric power is used 23. Two metallic rings A and B, identical in shape and size but
having different resistivities A and B, are kept on top of
(c) Gravitation force is zero
two identical solenoids as shown in the figure. When
(d) Electrostatic force draws the train
current I is switched on in both the solenoids in identical
19. What is the disadvantage of this system ? (2006, 6M) manner, the rings A and B jump to heights hA and hB,
(a) Train experiences upward force according to Lenz’s law respectively, with hA > hB. The possible relation(s) between
(b) Friction force create a drag on the train their resistivities and their masses mA and mB is (are) (2009)
(c) Retardation
(d) By Lenz’s law train experience a drag
20. Which force causes the train to elevate up ? (2006, 6M)
(a) Electrostatic force (b) Time varying electric field
(c) Magnetic force (d) Induced electric field
21. If the total charge stored in the LC circuit is Q0, then for
t0 (2006, 6M)
t
(a) the charge on the capacitor is Q Q 0 cos
2 LC
(a) A > B and mA = mB (b) A < B and mA = mB
(b) the charge on the capacitor is Q Q 0 cos t
2 (c) A > B and mA > mB (d) A < B and mA < mB
LC
24. A series R–C combination is connected to an AC voltage
d 2Q
(c) the charge on the capacitor is Q LC of angular frequency = 500 rad/s. If the impedance of the
dt 2
R–C circuit is R 1.25 , the time constant (in millisecond)
(d) the charge on the capacitor is Q
1 d 2Q
of the circuit is (2011)
LC dt 2
EMI & AC 157
25. A long circular tube of length 10 m and radius 0.3 m carries 28. In the method using the transformers, assume that the
a current I along its curved surface as shown. A wire loop ratio of the number of turns in the primary to that in the
of resistance 0.005 and of radius 0.1 m is placed inside secondary in the step-up transformer is 1 : 10. If the power
the tube with its axis coinciding with the axis of the tube. to the consumers has to be supplied at 200 V, the ratio of
The current varies as I = I0 cos 300 t where I0 is constant. If the number of turns in the primary to that in the secondary
the magnetic moment of the loop is N 0I0 sin (300 t), then in the step-down transformer is (2013)
N is. (2011) (a) 200 : 1 (b) 150 : 1
(c) 100 :1 (d) 50 :1
PASSAGE - 4
A point charge Q is moving in a circular orbit of radius R in
the x–y plane with an angular velocity . This can be
considered as equivalent to a loop carrying a steady
Q
current . A uniform magnetic field along the positive
2
z–axis is now switched on, which increases at a constant
26. A pulse of light of duration 100 ns is absorbed completely rate from 0 to B in one second. Assume that the radius of
by a small object initially at rest. Power of the pulse is 30 the orbit remains constant. The applications of the
8 –1
mV and the speed of light is 3 × 10 ms . The final magnetic field induces an emf in the orbit. The induced
momentum of the object is : (2013) emf is defined as the work done by an induced electric
–17 –1 –17 –1
(a) 0.3 × 10 kg–ms (b) 1.0 × 10 kg–ms field in moving a unit positive charge around a closed
(c) 3.0 × 10
–17 –1
kg–ms (d) 9.0 × 10
–17 –1
kg–ms loop. It is known that, for an orbiting charge, the magnetic
dipole moment is propotional to the angular momentum
PASSAGE - 3 with a proportionality constant .
29. The magnitude of the induced electric field in the orbit at
A thermal power plant produces electric power of 600 kW
any instant of time during the time interval of the magnetic
at 4000 V, which is to be transported to a place 20 km away
field change is (2013)
from the power plant for consumer’s usage. It can be
BR BR
transported either directly with a cable of large current (a) (b)
4 2
carrying capacity or by using a combination of step-up (c) BR (d) 2 BR
and step-down transformers at the two ends. The 30. The change in the magnetic dipole moment associated
drawback of the direct transmission is the large energy with the orbit, at the end of the time interval of the magnetic
dissipation. In the method using transformers, the field change, is : (2013)
dissipation is much smaller. In this method, a step-up
2 BQR 2
transformer is used at the plant side so that the current is (a) BQR (b)
2
reduced to a smaller value. At the consumers’ end a step-
BQR 2 2
down transformer is used to supply power to the (c) (d) BQR
2
consumers at the specified lower voltage. It is reasonable
31. At time t = 0, terminal A in the circuit shown in the figure is
to assume that the power cable is purely resistive and the
connected to B by a key and an alternating current I (t) =
transformers are ideal with a power factor unity. All the
I0cos ( t), with I0 = 1 A and = 500 rad s–1 starts flowing
current and voltage mentioned are rms values.
in it with the initial direction shown in the figure. At
27. If the direct transmission method with a cable of resistance
–1 7
0.4 km is used, the power dissipation (in %) during t , the key is switched from B to D. Now onwards
6
transmission is (2013)
only A and D are connected. A total charge Q flows from
(a) 20 (b) 30
the battery to change the capacitor fully. If C = 20 F, R =
(c) 40 (d) 50
10 and battery is ideal with emf of 50 V, identify the
correct statement(s). (2014)
EMI & AC 158
34. A circular insulated copper wire loop is twisted to form
two loops of area A and 2A as shown in the figure. At the
point of crossing the wires remain electrically insulated
from each other. The entire loop lies in the plane (of the
paper). A uniform magnetic field B points into the plane
of the paper. At t = 0, the loop starts rotating about the
common diameter as axis with a constant angular velocity
in the magnetic field. Which of the following options
(a) Magnitude of the maximum charge on the capacitor is/are correct? (2017)
7
before t is 1×10–-3C
6
(b) The current in the left part of the circuit just before
7
t is clockwise.
6
(c) Immediately after A is connected to D, the currrent in R
is 10A.
(d) Q = 2×10–3C.
32. Two inductors L1 (inductance 1 mH, internal resistance
3) and L2 (inductance 2 mH, internal resistance 4),
and a resistor R (resistance 12) are all connected in (a) The amplitude of the maximum net emf induced due to
parallel across a 5 V battery. The circuit is switched on both loops is equal to the amplitude of maximum emf
at time t = 0, The ratio of the maximum to minimum current induced in the smaller loop alone.
(Imax/Imin) drawn from the battery is (2016) (b) The rate of change of the flux is maximum when the
plane of the loops is perpendicular to plane of the paper
33. In the circuit shown, L = 1H, C = 1F and R = 1k. They
are connected in series with an a.c. source V = V0 sin t as (c) The net emf induced due to both the loops is
shown. Which of the following options is/are correct? proportional to has to be completed.
(2017) (d) The emf induced in the loop is proportional to the sum
of the areas of the two loops
35. In the figure below, the switches S1 and S2 are closed
simultaneously at t = 0 and a current starts to flow in the
circuit. Both the batteries have the same magnitude of the
electromotive force (emf) and have polarities are as
indicated in the figure. Ignore mutual inductance between
the inductors. The current I in the middle wire reaches its
maximum magnitude Imax at time t = . Which of the following
statements is(are) true ? (2018)
(a) At ~ 0 the current flowing through the circuit
becomes nearly zero
(b) At 106 rad.s 1 , the circuit behaves like a
capacitor
(c) The frequency at which the current will be in phase
with the voltage is independent of R V V
(a) I max (b) I max
2R 4R
(d) The current will be in phase with the voltage if
L 2L
10 4 rad . s 1 (c) n 2 (d) n 2
R R
EMI & AC 159
36. Two identical moving coil galvanometers have 10
resistance and full scale deflection at 2A current. One
of them is converted into a voltmeter of 100 mV full scale
reading and the other into an Ammeter of 1mA full scale
current using appropriate resistors. These are then used
to measure the voltage and current in the Ohm’s law
experiment with R = 1000 resistor by using an ideal cell.
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct ? (2019)
(a) The resistance of the Voltmeter will be 100 k
(b) The resistance of the Ammeter will be 0.02 (round
off to 2nd decimal place) 38. The inductors of two LR circuits are placed next to each
(c) If the ideal cell is replaced by a cell having internal other, as shown in the figure. The values of the self-
inductance of the inductors, resistances, mutual-
resistance of 5 then the measured value of R will be
inductance and applied voltages are specified in the
more than 1000 given circuit. After both the switches are closed
(d) The measured value of R will be 978 R 982 simultaneously, the total work done by the batteries
against the induced EMF in the inductors by the time the
37. A 10 cm long perfectly conducting wire PQ is moving currents reach their steady state values is__mJ. (2020)
with a velocity 1 cm/s on a pair of horizontal rails of zero
resistance. One side of the rails is connected to an
inductor L = 1 mH and a resistance R = 1W as shown in
figure. The horizontal rails, L and R lie in the same plane
with a uniform magnetic field B = 1T perpendicular to the
plane. If the key S is closed at certain instant, the current
in the circuit after 1 millisecond is x × 10–3A, where the
value of x is __. [Assume the velocity of wire PQ remains
constant (1 cm/s) after key S is closed. Given : e–1 = 0.37,
where e is base of the natural logarithm] (2019)
EMI & AC
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
160
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 MAGNETISM
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (d) 1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a)
5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (b) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (a)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
13. (b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (a)
13. (c) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (c) 20. (d) 21. (b)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (b) 20. (a)
22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (d) 25. (b)
26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (c) 21. (d) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (d)
30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (b) 25. (d) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (d)
34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (c) 37. (a) 29. (b) 30. (9.00) 31. (b) 32. (d)
38. (d) 39. (c) 40. (b) 41. (b)
33. (d) 34. (26.00) 35. (d) 36. (d)
42. (a) 43. (a) 44. (b) 45. (d)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (b) 40. (b)
46. (d) 47. (b) 48. (a) 49. (a)
50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (d) 53. (a) 41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (b)
54. (d) 55. (d) 56. (d) 57. (c) 44. (015.00)
58. (d) 59. (a) 60. (d) 61. (d)
62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (b) 65. (a)
66. (c) 67. (c) 68. (b) 69. (b)
20
70. (0) 71. (c) 72.
7
2
73. 4.78 10 2 m 74. 0.302Am
1
75. QR 76. 6.3 T
2
5
ANSWER KEY 161
EXERCISE - 3 : 101. 1.26 1023 Am 2
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
102. (F)
103. a) 3A , perpendicular to paper outwards;
b)13 10 7 T; c) 2.88 106 N / m
4
104. 10 T , perpendicular to paper outwords
0 l 2 L2 a 2
DIRECTION TO USE - 105 2 ln a 2 k̂ ,zero
F
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (d) 2 2
106. 1.2 10 m, 4.37 10 m
5. (a) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (c)
qB q qB v 0 ×B
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a) 107. v cos m (v 0 ) m t (E) sin m t B
13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (d) 16. (a)
111. A-R, B-S, C-P, D-Q
17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (a) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (b) 112. A-S, B-P, C-Q, D-R
25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (a) 113. A-Q, B-P, C-Q, D-P
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (b)
33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (a)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (a)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (a) 44. (b)
45. (a) 46. (a) 47. (b) 48. (b)
49. (d) 50. (c) 51. (d) 52. (b)
53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (a)
57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (d) 64. (c)
65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (a) 68. (b)
69. (b) 70. (b) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (b) 74. (a) 75. (c) 76. (a)
77. (b, c) 78. (b, c) 79. (a, d) 80. (a, b)
81. (a, c) 82. (b, c, d) 83. (a, b) 84. (b, c)
85. (a, d) 86. (a, d) 87. (c, d) 88. (a, c, d)
89. (a, c) 90. (a, b, d) 91. (b, c) 91. (0)
92. (a, d) 93. (a, b, d) 94. (d, b) 95. (0008)
96. (0002) 97. (0.2sec)
98. (6.4m, 0, 0), (6.4m, 0, 2m)
99. a ) 0.14m, 450 ; (b) 4.712 10 8 s
mv 0 ˆ πm
100. (a) L= 2B q ; (b)vf =-v 0 i, t AB = B q
0 0
ANSWER KEY 162
EXERCISE - 4 :
PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (c) 4. (b)
0 qV0 I ˆ
5. (a ) F ˆ F 4BIRiˆ
k; (b)F1 F2 2BIRi,
4R
6. a ) 6.54 10 5 T (vertically upword or outward normal to the
paper); b) Zero 8.1106 N (inward)
7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (b) 10. (a)
ˆ ˆ mg
11. (b) 12. (a ) P to Q;(b)lbB0 (3k 4i);(c) 6bB
0
dT0
13. ωmax 14. (b) 15. (b)
BQR 2
1
16. (c) 17. (d) 18.
2
2BiNA BNAπ
19. (a) k=BNA, (b)K ; (c) Q
π 21i
20. (A) P;(B) P,Q,S;(C) Q,S,R;(D) Q,R
21. (A) Q, R; (B) P; (C) Q 4 R; (D) Q,S
22. (a) 23. (acd) 24. (0007)
25. (c) 26. (bd) 27. (c) 28. (b)
29. (ad) 30. (ac) 31. (ac) 32. (d)
33. (0) 34. (2m/s) 35. (b)
163
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 EMI & AC
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (a) 1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c)
5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (c) 5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c)
9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (c)
13.(b) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (b) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (b)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (a) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (b) 24. (d) 21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (440)
25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (d) 25. (d) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (c)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (c) 29. (b) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (b)
33. (c) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (c) 33. (c) 34. (d) 35. (a) 36. (015.00)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (c) 37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (b) 41. (a) 42. (b) 43. (005.00) 44. (a)
45. (a) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (b) 45. (b) 46. (33) 47. (400) 48. (c)
49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (b) 49. (a) 50. (d) 51. (175.00) 52. (a)
53. (a) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (c) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (10.00)
57. (d) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (d) 57. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (b) 64. (b)
65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (b)
69. (a) 70. (c) 71. (d) 72. (9.60)
73. (2) 74. (4.02) 75. (32) 76. (10)
77. (0.20) 78. (7) 79. (30) 80. (3)
81. (17) 82. (4) 83. (53) 84. (2)
85.(7) 86. (3) 87. (3) 88. (30)
89. (5000) 90. (2) 91. (5)
ANSWER KEY 164
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS mgR g
47. (a) v 2 2 , (b) a
B L 2
48. v 1 m / s, R1 0.47, R 2 0.3
Br 2 t
R
Br 2 1 e L ,
49. ((a) e , (b) (i) i
2 2R
B2r 4 mgr
(ii) net cos t )
4R 2
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 50. (c) 51. (b, d) 52. (a, b, c, d) 53. (c, d)
54. (a, d) 55. (a, b, d) 56. (a, c, d) 57. (b c, d)
58. (a, d) 59. (a, c, d) 60. (b, d) 61. (b, d)
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (b) 62. (b, d) 63. (a, b, c) 64. (d) 65. (b)
5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (d) 66. (a) 67. (a) 68. (a) 69. (b)
70. (a) 71. (a)
9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (b)
72. (a–p; b–r; c–s; d–q)
13. (a) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (a) 73. (a–p; b–r; c–r; d–r,s)
17. (b) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (d) 74. (a – q, s; b – p; c – p; d – q, r)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23. (b) 24. (b) 75. (0002) 76. (0004) 77. (0008) 78. (0004)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (c) 79. (0030) 80. (0003) 81. (0002) 82. (0003)
83. (0005) 84. (3.465s) 85. (0005)
29. (d) 30. (b) 31. (d) 32. (d)
86. (3 × 10–5, 10)
33. (b)
34. (a) 104A/s, (b) Zero (c) 2.0A, (d) 1.732 × 10–4
35. (d) 36. (b) 37. (b) 38. (a)
39. (b) 40. (d) 41. (a)
42. (a) 3V, 40.5W, (b)
(i) 0.6A,
(ii) 1.386 × 10–3s, 4.5 × 10–4J
B 0 av B2a 2 v
43. (a) i anticlockwise (b) F 0 ĵ
R R
(c) v
g
K
B2a 2 g gmR
1 e kT Where K 0 , v1 2 2
mR K B0 a
7 6 1
44. A E to A , B to E , A F to E
22 22 22
45. ( 0.02 m / s , direction of induced current is clockwise)
1 Br 2
46. (a) , (b) anticlockwise
2 R
ANSWER KEY 165
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (35.6°C) 4. (d)
5. (a) 6. (12e 5t V, 6e 10t A (clockwise))
7. (d) 8. (b0)
d di 1 0I 0
9. (a) iR L , n 2 Li1 ,
R 2
(b)
dt dt
T
(c) )
n 4
4
10. (a) 11. (b) 12. . ( R r1 r2
3
0 Ldna 2 I 0 cos t
13. i 2 R
14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (d) 17. (b, d)
18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (c) 21. (c)
22. (d) 23. (b, d) 24. (0004) 25. (0006)
26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (a) 29. (b)
30. (b) 31. (c, d) 32. (0008) 33. (a, c)
34. (a, b) 35. (b, d) 36. (b, d)
37. (0.63) 38. (055.00)
Note
2
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.
Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
4
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.
Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.
Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?
We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
Your success is our dream-come-true
I wish you all the best.
Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
5
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.
Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain
Physics Team
Teachers SME DTP
Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.
Suraj Bhan Singh
Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran
Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.
The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RAY OPTICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 29
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 44
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 52
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 61
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 71
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 129
WAVE OPTICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 83
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 94
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 103
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 110
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 115
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 124
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 131
Teacher’s Note:
This is one of the most practical chapter which you can
actually feel.Reflection, refraction are the phenomenon which
we encounter in our day to day life. Physics, little bit
mathematics, good obervation skills and this chapter is a
delight to solve.Questions from this topic are definitely asked
and are simple helpful in easy scoring.
"Samajh ayega to mazaa ayega,
Mazaa ayega to samajh ayega".
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
01
RAY OPTICS
Chapter 01 9
RAY OPTICS THEORY
1. RECTILINEAR PROPAGATION OF LIGHT As shown in the figure, the angle between reflected ray and
incident ray is180 – 2i where i is the angle of incidence. Maximum
It is a well established fact that light is a wave. Although, a light deviation is 180°, when angle of incident i is zero.
wave spreads as it moves away from its source, we can approximate
its path as a straight line. Under this approximation, we show light 2.3 Law of Reflection in Vector Form
as a ray and the study of light as a ray is called ray optics or
geometrical optics. Say unit vector along incident ray = i .
1.1 Ray Unit vector along normal = n̂
The straight line path along which light travels in a homogeneous Unit vector along surface = t
medium is called a ray.
Unit vector along reflected ray = r̂
Ray i sin t cos n
2. REFLECTION OF LIGHT r sin t cos n
The phenomenon in which a light ray is sent back into the same
Hence r i 2 cos n
medium from which it is coming, on interaction with a boundary,
is called reflection. The boundary can be a rigid surface or just an
interface between two media. r i 2 cos n
2.1 Law of Reflection Since
We have few angles to define before considering law of reflection i.n 11 cos(180 )
(i) Angle of incidence : The angle which the incident ray
cos
makes with normal at the point of incidence.
(ii) Angle of reflection : The angle which the reflected ray Then rˆ i 2 i.nˆ nˆ
makes with normal at the point of incidence.
A reflected ray lies in the plane of incidence and has an angle of
reflection equal to the angle of incidence. i = r.
2.2 Deviation
When a ray of light suffers reflection, its path is changed. The
angle between its direction after reflection and the direction before
reflection is called the deviation.
Laws of reflection remain the same whether the reflected surface is
plane or curved.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 10
2.4 Reflection by a plane surface When an object is placed in front of a plane mirror, its image can
be seen behind the mirror. The distance of the object from the
Suppose a reflecting surface is rotated by an angle (say mirror is equal to the distance of the image from the mirror.
anticlockwise), keeping the incident ray fixed then the reflect ray
rotates by 2 along the same sense, i.e., anticlockwise.
(AB is common and all angle are equal OA = IA)
Magnification of a plane mirror is unity.
The image is formed behind the mirror. It is erect. Virtual and
laterally inverted.
Image formation by two inclined mirrors, inclined at angle
= [0, 180°]
The object and all its images will always lie on a circle, having
2.5 Reflection from plane mirror center at the point of intersection of the two inclined mirrors, in a
two dimensional view.
3. OTHER IMPORTANT INFORMATIONS
(i) When the object moves with speed u towards (or away) from
the plane mirror then image also moves toward (or away) with
speed u. But relative speed of image w.r.t. object is 2u.
(ii) When mirror moves towards the stationary object with speed
u, the image will move with speed 2u.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 11
4. SPHERICAL MIRRORS Paraxial rays : Rays which are close to principal axis and make
small angles with it, i.e., they are nearly parallel to the axis, are
A spherical mirror is a part of sphere. If one of the surfaces is
called paraxial rays. Our treatment of spherical mirrors will be
silvered, the other surface acts as the reflecting surface. When
restricted to such rays which means we shall consider only mirrors
convex face is silvered, and the reflecting surface is concave, the
of small aperture. In diagrams, however, they will be made larger
mirror is called a concave mirror. When its concave face is silvered
for clarity.
and convex face is the reflecting face, the mirror is called a convex
mirror. Images formed by spherical mirrors
Let us consider various cases depending on the nature of the
object and the image
(i) Real object and real image
(a)
Before the discussion of reflection by curved mirrors, you shall
carefully comprehend the meaning of following terms
(i) Centre of curvature : Centre of curvature is the centre of
sphere of which, the mirror is a part.
(ii) Radius of curvature : Radius of curvature is the radius of
sphere of which, the mirror is a part.
(b)
(iii) Pole of mirror : Pole is the geometric centre of the mirror.
(iv) Principal axis : Principal axis is the line passing through the
pole and centre of curvature.
(v) Normal : Any line joining the mirror to its centre of curvature
is a normal. (ii) Real object and virtual image
(a)
(b)
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 12
object two of the following four rays are drawn passing through
the object. To construct the image of an extended object the image
of two end points is only drawn. The image of a point object lying
on principles axis is formed on the principal axis itself. The four
(c) rays are as under :
O
I
(d)
P F C
1
3
(iii) Virtual object and real image 4
P F C
Ray 1 : A ray through the centre of curvature which strikes the
(a)
C F I P O mirror normally and is reflected back along the same path.
Ray 2 : A ray parallel to principal axis after reflection either actually
passes through the principal focus F or appears to diverge from it.
Ray 3 : A ray passing through the principal focus F or a ray which
appears to converge at F is reflected parallel to the principal axis.
Ray 4 : A ray striking at pole P is reflected symmetrically back in
the opposite side.
4.1 Sign conventions
(b)
I P O F C
(i) All distances are measured from the pole.
(ii) Distances measured in the direction of incident rays are
taken as positive while in the direction opposite of incident
rays are taken negative.
(iv) Virtual object and virtual image (iii) Distances above the principle axis are taken positive and
below the principle axis are taken negative.
P F O C I
Ray diagrams
Note:
We shall consider the small objects and mirrors of small aperture
Same sign convention are also valid for lenses.
so that all rays are paraxial. To construct the image of a point
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 13
Position, size and nature of image formed by the spherical mirror
Mirror Location of Location of Magnification, Nature
the object the image Size of the
image Real Erect
virtual inverted
(a) Concave At focus m << 1, Real inverted
i.e. v = f diminished
Away from centre Between f and m < 1, Real inverted
of curvature 2f i.e. diminished
(u > 2f) f < v < 2f
C F P At centre of At centre of m = 1, same size Real inverted
curvature u = 2f curvature i.e. as that of the
v = 2f object
Between centre of Away from the m > 1, magnified Real inverted
curvature and centre of
focus : curvature
F < u < 2f v > 2f
At focus i.e. u = f Real
Between pole and v>u m > 1 magnified Virtual erect
focus u < f
(b) Convex At focus i.e., m < 1, diminished Virtual erect
v=f
P F C Anywhere between Between pole m < 1, diminished Virtual erect
infinity and pole and focus
Use following sign while solving the problem
Concave mirror
Convex mirror
Real image (u > f) Virtual image (u < f)
Distance of object
Distance of image
Focal length
Height of object
Height of image
Radius of curvature
Magnification
4.2 Relation between f and R
In figure, P is pole, C is centre of curvature and F is principal focus of a concave mirror of small aperture. Let a ray of light AB be
incident on the mirror in a direction parallel to the principal axis of the mirror. It gets reflected along. BF. Join CB. It is normal to
the mirror at B.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 14
i.e., F is the centre of PC
1
PF = PC, Using sign conventions,
2
PF = – f and PC = –R.
Therefore, –f = –R/2 or f = R/2
i.e., focal length of a concave mirror is equal to half the
ABC = i, angle of incidence
radius of curvature of the mirror.
CBF = r, angle of reflection
4.3 Deriving the Mirror Formula
Now BCF = ABC = i (alternate angles)
In CBF, as i = r (law of reflection) Mirror formula can be derived for any of the cases of image
formation shown before. When we derive a formula, we keep in
CF = FB
mind the sign conventions and substitute each value with sign.
But FB = FP ( aperture is small) This makes a formula suitable to be applied in any case. Here, we
CF = FP shall derive the formula for two cases.
Real object and real image Real object and virtual image
(concave mirror) (convex mirror)
PO = – u (distance of object) PO = – u (distance of object)
PC = – R (radius of curvature) PI = + v (distance of image)
PI = – v (distance of image) PC = + R (radius of curvature)
In OAC, = + ...(i) In OAC, = + ...(i)
In OAI, = + 2 ...(ii) In OAI, 2 = + ...(ii)
From (i) and (ii) From (i) and (ii)
2 ( – ) = – 2 ( + ) = +
+ = 2 – = 2
AP AP AP AP AP AP
, , , ,
PI PO PC PI PO PC
AP AP 2AP AP AP 2AP
PI PO PC PI PO PC
1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
v u R v u f v u R v u f
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 15
While deriving the above result, if we do not use sign convention, 1 1 1
results obtained will be different for different cases. From , we have –v–2dv –u–2du = 0
v u f
4.4 Magnification 2
dv v
or
The linear magnification produced by a mirror is defined as du u
height of image 2
m = height of object dv v
or mL m2
du u
I BB If we differentiate the mirror formula
m
O AA 1 1 1
v u f
with respect to time, we get
dv du (as f = constant)
v 2 . u 2 0
dt dt
dv v2 du
or 2
dt ...(iii)
dt u
As every part of mirror forms a complete image, if a part of the
mirror is obstructed, full image will be formed but intensity will be
PB = – v (distance of image) reduced.
PA = – u (distance of object) 5. REFRACTION OF LIGHT
BB BP
Now, A’AP ~ B’BP
AA AP
PB v v
m
PA u u
Note:-
By mirror formula, 1 1 1
v u f
v v v f v
1 m 1 When a ray of light is incident on the boundary between two
u f f f transparent media, a part of it passes into the second medium
1 1 1 u u f with a change in direction.
Also, 11 m
v u f v f f u This phenomenon is called refraction.
v f v f 5.1 Refractive Index
m
u f f u
Absolute refractive index of a medium is defined by the ratio of
The magnification is negative when image is inverted and positive
c
when image is erect. speed of light in vacuum to speed of light in the medium ,
v
If an object is placed with its length along the principal axis, then
where c is speed of light in vacuum and v is the speed of light in
so called longitudinal magnification becomes,
the medium.
I v v1 dv 5.2 Law of Refraction (Snell’s Law)
mL 2 (for small objects)
O u
2 u 1 du
A refracted ray lies in the plane of incidence and has an angle of
refraction related to angle of incidence by 1sin i = 2 sin r. Where,
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 16
(i) i = angle of incidence in medium 1 5.3 Single Refraction from a Plane Surface
(ii) 1 = refractive index of medium 1 (it is a dimensionless constant) Real and Apparent Depth
(iii) r = angle of refraction in medium 2 When an object placed in a medium is seen from another medium,
(iv) 2 = refractive index of medium 2 its apparent position is different from the actual position. Consider
the following figure.
(v) If 1 = 2, then r = i. The light beam does not bend
(vi) If 1 > 2, then r > i. Refraction bends the light away from normal
(vii) If 1 < 2, then r < i. Refraction bends the light towards the normal
r
A medium having greater refractive index is called denser medium A B
while the other medium is called rarer medium.
i r Apparent depth A
Rarer medium I Real depth R
i
i O
We shall derive the expression for small angles (or you can say
Denser medium that the object is being seen from top). By Snell’s law,
r
Incident ray
2 × sin i = 1 × sin r or, 2 × i = 1 × r
Bent
Normal AB AB AB AB 2 1
i ,r 2 1
R A R A R A
The following possibilities may arise.
Rarer medium Incident ray
(i) When observer is in air and the object is in a medium of
Bent refractive index ,
r
1 R
You have, A
R A
Denser medium i
The three conditions required to find the unit vector along the
refracted ray = r (provided we are given the unit vector along the
incident ray = i , and the normal unit vector n shown in the
figure, from medium–1 towards medium–2) are
(ii) When observer is in a medium of refractive index and
1. r 1 the object is in air, you have
2. Snell’s law : i n 1 r n
1
A R
2 R A
3. iˆ , n̂ and r̂ are coplanar STP = 0
I
iˆ nˆ rˆ nˆ rˆ iˆ rˆ nˆ iˆ 0
A O
R
Note:- Air
cos i = i.n ; cos r = r.n
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 17
5.4 Shift due to a Glass Slab (Double Refraction AC t
from Plane Surfaces) Proof : AB
cos r cos r
(i) Normal Shift : Here, again two cases are possible. (as AC = t)
C E t
Now, d = AB sin (i – r) = cos r [sin i cos r – cos i sin r]
M N
or d = t [sin i – cos i tan r] ...(i)
I1 O I A B sin i sin i
Further or sin r
sin r
D F
sin i
tan r
sin 2 i
2
An object is placed at O. Plane surface CD forms its image (virtual)
Substituting in eq. (i), we get,
at I1. This image acts as object for EF which finally forms the
image (virtual) at I. Distance OI is called the normal shift and its
cos i
value is, d 1 t sin i
2
sin 2
i
1
OI 1 t
Hence Proved.
This can be proved as under : Exercise : Show that for small angles of incidence,
Let OA = x then AI1 = x (Refraction from CD)
1
BI1 = x + t d = ti .
BI1 t
BI x (Refraction from EF) Apparent distance from observer
t h1 h 2 hn
OI = (AB + OA) – BI t x x = obser ......
1 2 n
1 5.5 Total Internal Reflection
1 t Hence Proved.
Consider an object placed in a denser medium 2 (having refractive
(ii) Lateral Shift : We have already discussed that ray MA is
index 2) being seen from a rarer medium 1 (having refractive
parallel to ray BN. But the emergent ray is displaced
index 1)
laterally by a distance d, which depends on , t and i and
its value is given by the relation,
cos i
d t 1 sin i
2 2
sin i
Different rays from the object are shown. As we move from A
towards C, angle of incidence goes on increasing. Therefore, the
angle of refraction goes on increasing. At B, angle of refraction
approaches 90°. This is called critical condition. After B, angle of
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 18
incidence increases, but angle of refraction cannot be greater
r , in fig. I
than 90°. Therefore after point B, refraction of light does not take i ,
place, only reflection of light takes place. This is called total internal r , in fig. II
reflection.
1 2 in fig. I and fig. II
5.6 Refraction through Curved Surfaces
1 2 2 1 ,
Spherical Refracting Surfaces
A spherical refracting surface is a part of a sphere. For example,
the plane face of cylindrical glass rod is curved to form a spherical B r
i
shape (as shown in the figure).
O I P'
As aperture is small tan , tan , tan
1 tan 2 tan 2 1 tan
1 2 2 1
...(i)
PO P I P C
Applying sign convention i.e., u = – P’O
v = P’I and – P’I, in fig. I and fig. II respectively R = P’C
Substituting the above values in equation (i), we get
P Pole of refracting surface 2 1 2 1
(For both fig. I and fig. II)
C Centre of curvature v u R
PC Radius of curvature 5.8 Linear Magnification for Spherical Refracting Surface
Principal axis : The line joining pole and centre of curvature.
m
A B
5.7 Relation between Object Distance and Image AB
Distance Refraction at Spherical Surfaces sin i 2
Now,
sin r 1
Consider the point object O placed in the medium with refractive
index equal to 1. As 1sin i = 2sin r and for small aperture i, r 0
B
B
i A'
i r
A P
r
B'
O P P' C I
As i, r 0, i sin i tan i, r sin r tan r
tan i 2 AB / PA
i.e. paraxial rays 1 i = 2 r or 2
tan r 1 A B / PA 1
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 19
towards the point, after refraction becomes parallel to
A B PA / 2
principal axis.
AB PA / 1
v / 2
Hence, m
u / 1
6. THIN LENS
A thin lens is defined as a portion of transparent refracting medium
bounded by two surfaces. One of the two surfaces must be curved.
Following figures show a number of lenses formed by different
refracting surfaces.
A lens is one of the most familiar optical devices for a human
being. A lens is an optical system with two refracting surfaces.
The simplest lens has two spherical surfaces close enough together (b) Second principal focus F2 : It is a point on principal axis,
that we can neglect the distance between them (the thickness of such that a ray moving parallel to principal axis, after
the lens). We call this a thin lens. refraction converges or diverges towards the point.
Biconvex Plano-convex Convex meniscus
(vi) Focal Length : The distance between optical centre and
second principal focus is focal length. Assumptions and
sign conventions are same as these of mirrors with optical
centre C in place of pole P of the mirror.
Biconcave Plano-concave Concave meniscus
6.2 Ray diagram
6.1 Terms Related with Lenses To construct the image of a small object perpendicular to the axis
of a lens, two of the following three rays are drawn from the top of
(i) Centre of curvature (C1 and C2) : The two bounding surfaces the object.
of a lens are each part of a complete sphere. The centre of the 1. A ray parallel to the principal axis after refraction passes
sphere is the centre of curvature. through the principal focus or appears to diverge from it.
(ii) Radius of curvature (R1 and R2) : The radii of the curved
surfaces forming the lens are called radii of curvature.
(iii) Principal axis : The line joining the two centres of
curvature is called principal axis.
(iv) Optical centre : A point on the principal axis of the lens
from which a ray of light passes undeviated.
(v) Principal foci : There are two principal foci of a lens.
(a) First principal focus F1 : It is a point on the principal axis,
such that a ray, diverging from the point or converging
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 20
2. A ray through the optical centre P passes undeviated 3. A ray passing through the first focus F1 become parallel
because the middle of the lens acts like a thin parallel- to the principal axis after refraction.
sided slab.
6.3 Image formation by Lens
Lens Location of Location of Nature of image
the object the image
Magnification Real Erect
virtual inverted
Convex At focus m<1 Real Inverted
i.e. v = f diminished
Away from 2f Between f and 2f m<1 Real Inverted
i.e. (u > 2f) i.e. f < v < 2f diminished
At 2f or (u = 2f) At 2f i.e. (v = 2f) m=1 Real Inverted
same size
Between f and 2f Away from 2f m>1 Real Inverted
2f f f 2f i.e. f < u < 2f i.e. (v > 2f) magnified
At focus i.e. u = f Real Inverted
Between optical At a distance m>1 Virtual Erect
centre and focus, greater than that magnified
u<f of object v > u
Concave At focus m<1 Virtual Erect
i.e. v = f diminished
Anywhere between Between optical Virtual Erect
infinity and centre and focus
optical centre
Note:-
Minimum distance between an object and it’s real image formed by a convex lens is 4f.
Maximum image distance for concave lens is it’s focal length.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 21
6.4 Lens maker’s formula and lens formula determine the values of R1 and R2 that are needed for a given
refractive index and a desired focal length f.
Consider an object O placed at a distance u from a convex lens as
Combining eqs. (iii) and (v), we get
shown in figure. Let its image I after two refractions from spherical
surfaces of radii R1 (positive) and R2 (negative) be formed at a 1 1 1
...(vi)
distance v from the lens. Let v1 be the distance of image formed v u f
by refraction from the refracting surface of radius R1. This image Which is known as the lens formula. Following conclusions can
acts as an object for the second surface. Using, be drawn from eqs. (iv), (v) and (vi).
1. For a converging lens, R1 is positive and R2 is negative.
Incident light
1 1
Therefore, in eq. (v) comes out a positive
R2 R1 R1 R 2
O C2 C1 I quantity and if the lens is placed in air, ( – 1) is also a
positive quantity. Hence, the focal length f of a converging
+ve lens comes out to be positive. For a diverging lens however,
u v
R1 is negative and R2 is positive and the focal length f
becomes negative.
2 1 2 1
twice, we have
v u R
2 1 2 1
or ...(i)
v1 u R1
1 2 1 2
and ...(ii)
v v1 R2
Adding eqs. (i) and (ii) and then simplifying, we get
1 1 2 1 1
1 ...(iii)
v u 1 R1 R 2
This expression relates the image distance v of the image formed
by a thin lens to the object distance u and to the thin lens properties
(index of refraction and radii of curvature). It is valid only for
paraxial rays and only when the lens thickness is much less then
R1 and R2. The focal length f of a thin lens is the image distance
2. Focal length of a mirror (fM = R/2) depends only upon the
that corresponds to an object at infinity. So, putting u = and
radius of curvature R while that of a lens [eq. (iv)] depends
v = f in the above equation, we have
on 1, 2, R1 and R2. Thus, if a lens and a mirror are immersed
in some liquid, the focal length of lens would change while
1 2 1 1
1 ...(iv) that of the mirror will remain unchanged.
f 1 R1 R 2 3. Suppose 2 < 1 in eq. (iv), i.e., refractive index of the
If the refractive index of the material of the lens is and it is placed medium (in which lens is placed) is more than the refractive
in air, 2 = and 1 = 1 so that eq. (iv) becomes
index of the material of the lens, then 2 1 becomes a
1 1 1
1 ...(v)
f negative quantity, i.e., the lens changes its behaviour. A
R1 R 2
converging lens behaves as a diverging lens and vice-
This is called the lens maker’s formula because it can be used to versa. An air bubble in water seems as a convex lens but
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 22
behaves as a concave (diverging) lens. The shorter the focal length of a lens (or a mirror) the more it
converges or diverges light. As shown in the figure,
f1 < f2
and hence the power P1 > P2, as bending of light in case 1 is more
than that of case 2. For a lens,
1
P (in dioptre) = and for a mirror,,
f metre
6.5 Magnification
The lateral, transverse of linear magnification m produced by a lens 1
is defined by, P (in dioptre) =
f metre
height of image I
m Following table gives the sign of P and f for different type of lens
height of object O
and mirror.
A real image II’ of an object OO’ formed by a convex lens is shown
in figure. 8. COMBINATION OF LENS
height of image II v (i) For a system of lenses, the net power, net focal length and
height of object OO u magnification given as follows :
P = P1 + P2 + P3 ............,
1 1 1 1
...........,
F f1 f 2 f 3
m = m1 × m2 × m3 × ............
(ii) When two lenses are placed co-axially at a distance d from
each other then equivalent focal length (F).
Substituting v and u with proper sign,
II I v I v
or m
OO O u O u
v
Thus, m
u
7. POWER OF AN OPTICAL INSTRUMENT
1 1 1 d
By optical power of an instrument (whether it is a lens, mirror or a
refractive surface) we mean the ability of the instrument to deviate F f1 f 2 f1f 2 and P = P1 + P2 – dP1P2
the path of rays passing through it. If the instrument converges
the rays parallel to the principal axis its power is said positive and 9. CUTTING OF LENS
if it diverges the rays it is said a negative power.
(i) A symmetric lens is cut along optical axis in two equal
parts. Intensity of image formed by each part will be same
as that of complete lens.
(ii) A symmetric lens is cut along principle axis in two equal
parts. Intensity of image formed by each part will be less
compared as that of complete lens. (aperture of each part
is 1 / 2 times that of complete lens)
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 23
A + MPN = 180° ...(i)
In triangle MNP, r1 + r2 + MPN = 180° ...(ii)
From eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
r1 + r2 = A ...(iii)
11.1 Deviation
Deviation means angle between incident ray and emergent ray.
In reflection, = 180 – 2i = 180 – 2r
in refraction, = |i – r|
10. SILVERING OF LENS
On silvering the surface of the lens it behaves as a mirror. The
1 2 1
focal length of the silvered lens is where
F f1 f m In prism a ray of light gets refracted twice one at M and
f1 = focal length of lens from which refraction takes place (twice) other at N. At M its deviation is i1 – r1 and at N it is i2 – r2.
These two deviations are added. So the net deviation is,
fm = focal length of mirror from which reflection takes place.
= (i1 – r1) + (i2 – r2) = (i1 + i2) – (r1 + r2) = (i1 + i2) – A
11. PRISM
Thus, = (i1 + i2) – A ...(iv)
A prism has two plane surfaces AB and AC inclined to each other
sin i1
as shown in figure. A is called the angle of prism or refracting (i) If A and i1 are small : , therefore, r1 will also be
angle. sin r1
small. Hence, since sine of a small angle is nearly equal to
the angle is radians, we have, i1 = r1
Also, A = r1 + r2 and so if A and r1 are small r2 and i2 will
sin i 2
also be small. From , we can say, i2 = r2
sin r2
Substituting these values in eq. (iv), we have
= (r1 + r2) – A = (r1 + r2) – A = A – A
or = ( – 1) A ...(v)
(ii) Minimum deviation : It is found that the angle of deviation
The importance of the prism really depends on the fact that the varies with the angle of incidence i1 of the ray incident
angle of deviation suffered by light at the first refracting surface, on the first refracting face of the prism. The variation is
say AB (in 2-dimensional figure) is not cancelled out by the shown in figure and for one angle of incidence it has a
deviation at the second surface AC (as it is in a parallel glass minimum value min. At this value the ray passes
slab), but is added to it. This is why it can be used in a spectrometer, symmetrically through the prism (a fact that can be proved
an instrument for analysing light into its component colours.
theoretically as well as be shown experimentally), i.e., the
General Formulae angle of emergence of the ray from the second face equals
In quadrilateral AMPN, AMP + ANP = 180° the angle of incidence of the ray on the first face.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 24
Now, if minimum value of r2 is greater than c then obviously all
values of r2 will be greater than c and TIR will take place under all
conditions. Thus, the condition of no emergence is, (r2)min > c or
A – c > c
c
or A ...(xii)
2
11.3 Dispersion and deviation of light by a prism
White light is a superposition of waves with wavelengths
extending throughout the visible spectrum. The speed of light in
vacuum is the same for all wavelengths, but the speed in a material
i2 = i1 = i ...(vi) substance is different for different wavelengths. Therefore, the
It therefore, follows that index of refraction of a material depends on wavelength. In most
r1 = r2 = r ...(vii) materials the value of refractive index decreases with increasing
From eqs. (iii) and (vii) wavelength.
A
r
2
Further at, = m = (i + i) – A
A m
or i ...(viii)
2
sin i
If a beam of white light, which contains all colours, is sent through
sin r
the prism, it is separated into a spectrum of colours. The spreading
of light into its colour components is called dispersion.
A m
sin
2 11.4 Dispersive Power
or ...(ix)
A
sin
2 When a beam of white light is passed through a prism of
transparent material light of different wavelengths are deviated
11.2 Condition of no emergence by different amounts. If r, y and v are the deviations for red,
In this section we want to find the condition such that a ray of yellow and violet components then average deviation is measured
light entering the face AB does not come out of the face AC for by y as yellow light falls in between red and violet. v – r is
any value of angle i1, i.e., TIR takes place on AC called angular dispersion. The dispersive power of a material is
defined as the ratio of angular dispersion to the average deviation
r1 + r2 = A r2 = A – r1
when a white beam of light is passed through it. It is denoted by
or (r2)min = A – (r1)max ...(x) . As we know
Now, r1 will be maximum when i1 is maximum and maximum = ( – 1) A
value of i1 can be 90°.
sin i1 max sin 90
Hence,
sin r1 max sin r1 max
1
sin r1 max sin c (r1)max = c
From eq. (x), (r2)min = A – c ...(xi)
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 25
This equation is valid when A and i are small. Suppose, a beam of
white light is passed through such a prism, the deviation of red,
yellow and violet light are
r = (r – 1) A, y = (y – 1) A and v = (v – 1) A
The angular dispersion is v – r = (v – r) A and the average deviation is
y = (y – 1) A. Thus, the dispersive power of the medium is,
v r Coma can be reduced by carefully working out the curvature
...(i)
y 1 function, or by blocking off the rays that create the ‘tail’ of the
comet shaped image.
12. MONOCHROMATIC ABERRATIONS Astigmatism : The shape of the image is different at different
IN MIRRORS AND LENSES distances. Suppose a point object is placed off the optical
axis of a converging lens. Then, as a lateral screen is moved
(INDEPENDENT OFWAVELENGTH) along the axis, at one point, the image is almost a line. At
other positions of the screen, the image changes into an
Spherical aberration : Because of the fact that all rays are not
different shapes at different locations of the screen.
paraxial. The image of a point object formed by a spherical mirror
is a surface, whose 2-D view is called a ‘caustic curve’. When a Astigmatism can be reduced by using non-spherical
surfaces of revolution-such corrected lenses are called
real image is seen on a screen and the screen is moved forward/
‘anastigmatic’.
backward slightly, a disc image is formed which becomes smallest
at one position. The periphery of this smallest disc is called ‘the Curvature : Consider a point object placed off the optical
circle of least confusion’. Lenses too exhibit spherical aberration. axis of a lens. We have seen that image is spread out laterally
as well as longitudionally, with individual defects in each
We can reduce it by blocking non-paraxial rays but this reduces
direction. However, the best image is obtained on a curved
the brightness of the image. A ring shaped black paper is affixed
surface and not on a plane screen. This phenomenon is
on the lens so that only those rays pass through the ‘hole’ in the called ‘curvature’.
ring, which are paraxial. Parabolic mirrors do not exhibit any
Distortion : A square lateral object has images, which are
spherical aberration, hence all expensive reflecting telescopes use
either ‘barrel shaped’ or ‘curving in’ as shown. This is
parabolic mirrors.
because the lateral magnification itself depends on the actual
In lenses, spherical aberration can be reduced by using a distance of a portion of the object from the optical axis.
combination of convex and concave lenses, which cancel out These different magnifications of different portions produce
each other’s aberrations. this effect.
13. CHROMATIC ABERRATIONS IN LENSES
(DEPENDENT ON WAVELENGTH)
Coma : Consider a point object placed ‘off’ the optical axis. Most
These aberrations are absent in mirrors. In lenses, the focal length
of the rays focus at a single point, but others form images at
depends on the refractive index, which is different for different
different points so that the overall image is like that of a ‘comet’
colors. Hence, colored images are formed at different points if
( ) having a sharp ‘point’ image followed by a trail like that of a white light is emitted by the object. A proper combination of convex
comet. and concave lenses exactly cancel out each others chromatic
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 26
aberration (for light having two wavelengths only) so that the Magnifying power of a simple microscope is defined as the
final image is not split into colored images. Such a combination is ratio of the angles subtended by the image and the object
called an ‘achromatic doublet’. The distance along the optical on the eye, when both are at the least distance of distinct
axis between images of violet and red is called ‘axial or longitudional vision from the eye.
chromatic aberration’ = LCA (say):
For an incident parallel beam of white light, image distance = focal By definition, Magnifying power m ...(1)
length. From lens-makers formulae:
-df/f = dn/(n - 1) = = dispersive power of lens (nV – nR)/(n – 1) For small angles expessed in radians, tan
LCA = f f. For two thin lenses in contact, (1/F) = (1/f1) + tan and tan
(1/f2). Therefore, dF = 0 1/f1 = –2/f2 achromatic lens. An
achromatic ‘doublet’ or lens combination can be made by placing tan
two thin lenses in contact, with one converging and the other m ...(2)
tan
diverging, made of different materials.
For lateral objects, images of different colors have different sizes AB
as magnification itself depends on the focal length, which is In ABC, tan
CB
different for different colors. The difference in the size of lateral
images of violet and red colors is called ‘lateral chromatic A1B' AB
aberration’. In A1B’C, tan
CB' CB'
Putting in (2), we get
AB CB' CB' v v
m ...(3)
CB AB CB u u
where, CB’ = – v, distance of image from the lens, CB = –u,
distance of object from the lens
1 1 1
From lens formula,
v u f
Multiply both sides by v
v v
1
u f
14. OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
v
14.1 Simple Microscope or Magnifying Glass using (3), 1 m
f
A simple microscope is used for observing magnified images
of tiny objects. It consists of a converging lens of small v
or m 1
focal length. A virtual, erect and magnified image of the f
object is formed at the least distance of distinct vision from
the eye held close to the lens. That is why the simple d
But v = – d, m 1
microscope is also called a magnifying glass. f
14.2 Compound Microscope
A compound microscope is an optical instrument used for
observing highly magnified images of tiny objects.
Construction : A compound microscope consists of two
converging lenses (or lens system); an objective lens O of
very small focal length and short aperture and an eye piece
E of moderate focal length and large aperture.
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 27
where d is C2B’’ = least distance of distinct vision, fe is focal
length of eye lens. And
A ' B' distance of image A' B' from C1
m0
AB distance of object AB from C1
C1B' v
0
C1B u 0
Putting these values in (3), we get
v0 d v d
m 1 0 1 ...(4)
u0 f |u
| fe
e 0
Magnifying power of a compound microscope is defined as As the object AB lies very close to F0, the focus of objective
the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the final lens, therefore,
image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object, when u0 = C1B C1F0 = f0 = focal length of objective lens.
both the final image and the object are situated at the least
As A’B’ is formed very close to eye lens whose focal length
distance of distinct vision from the eye.
is also short, therefore,
In figure, C2B’’ = d. Imagine the object AB to be shifted to
v0 = C1B’ C1C2 = L = length of microscope tube.
A1B’’ so that it is at a distance d from the eye. If A’’ C2 B’’
= and A1C2B’’ = , then by definition, Putting in (4), we get
L d L d
m 1
Magnifying power, m
...(1)
f0 f | f | 1 f ...(5)
e 0 e
For small angles expressed in radians, tan 14.3 Astronomical Telescope
tan and tan An astronomical telescope is an optical instrument which is
used for observing distinct image of heavenly bodies like
tan
From (1), m ...(2) stars, planets etc.
tan
It consists of two lenses (or lens systems), the objective
A ' ' B' ' lens, which is of large focal length and large aperture and
In A’’B’’C2, tan
C 2 B' ' the eye lens, which has a small focal length and small
aperture. The two lenses are mounted co-axially at the free
A1B AB ends of the two tubes.
In A1B’’C2, tan
C 2 B C 2 B
Putting in (2), we get
A B C 2 B AB A B A' B'
m
C 2 B AB AB A ' B' AB
m = me × m0
A B
where m e , magnification produced by eye lens,
A ' B'
A ' B' However, in astronomical telescope, final image being
and m 0 , magnification produced by objective lens. inverted with respect to the object does not matter, as the
AB
astronomical objects are usually spherical.
d Magnifying Power of an astronomical telescope in normal
Now, m e 1 f
adjustment is defined as the ratio of the angle subtended at
e
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 28
the eye by the final image to the angle subtended at the eye, A’C1B’ =
by the object directly, when the final image and the object Further, let A’’C2B’’ = , where C2B’’ = d
both lie at infinite distance from the eye.
By definition, Magnifying power, m ...(4)
Magnifying power, m ...(1)
As angles and are small, therefore, tan and tan
As angles and are small, therefore, tan and tan
tan . From (4), m ...(5)
tan
tan A ' B'
From (1), m ...(2) In A’B’C2, tan
tan C 2 B'
A ' B'
In A’B’C2, tan A ' B'
C 2 B' In A’B’C1, tan
C1B'
A 'B '
In A’B’C1, tan A' B' C1B'
C1B ' Putting in (5), we get m
C 2 B' A ' B'
A ' B' C1B' C1B'
Put in (2), m C1B' f
C 2 B' A' B' C 2 B' m 0 ...(6)
C 2 B' u e
f0 where C1B’ = f0 = focal length of objective lens
or m ...(3)
fe C2B’ = – ue, distance of A’B’, acting as the object for
eye lens.
where C1B’ = f0 = focal length of objective lens.
C2B’ = –fe = focal length of eye lens. 1 1 1
Now, for eye lens,
v u f
Negative sign of m indicates that final image is inverted.
Taking ve = –d, u = –ue and f = + fe, we get
Memory Note
(i) In normal adjustment of telescope, distance between the 1 1 1
objective lens and eye lens = (f0 + fe). d ue fe
(ii) Angular magnification produced by the telescope = .
1 1 1 1 f
Clearly, visual angle is much larger as compared to . 1 e
u e fe d fe d
Figure shows the course of rays in an astronomical
telescope, when the final image is formed at the least distance f0 fe
of distinct vision (d) from the eye Putting in (6), we get m 1
fe d
Discussion :
(i) As magnifying power is negative, the final image in an
astronomial telescope is inverted i.e. upside down and left
turned right.
(ii) As intermediate image is between the two lenses, cross wire
(or measuring device) can be used.
(iii) In normal setting of telescope, final image is at inifiny.
magnifying power is minimum.
Magnifying power of an astronomical telescope is defined When final image is at least distance of distinct vision,
as the ratio of the angle subtended at the eye by the final magnifying power is maximum. Thus
image at the least distance of distinct vision to the angle
subtended at the eye by the object at infinity, when seen f0 f f
directly. (M.P.)min. = – ; (M.P.)max. = – 0 1 e
f
e fe d
SCAN CODE
RAY OPTICS
RAY OPTICS 29
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Calculate the distance of an object of height ‘h’ from a
concave mirror or focal length 10 cm, so as to obtain a real
image of magnification 2.
Sol. Given focal length f = – 10 cm, u = ?
v
magnification m 2 v = 2 u
u 1 1 1
(for a lens)
f v u
1 1 1
From mirror formula , we have
f v u 1 1 40 15
15 40 40 15
1 2 1 3 1
10 2u u 2u 10 40 15 120
f 11 cm
55 11
10 3
u 15 cm Example - 3
2
The radii of curvature of the faces of a double convex lens
This is, distance of the object from the mirror is 15 cm in
are 10 cm and 15 cm. If the focal length of the lens is 12 cm,
front of mirror.
find the refractive index of the material of the lens.
Example - 2
A lens forms a real image of an object. The distance from Sol. Given R1 = 10 cm, R2 = – 15 cm, f = 12 cm
the object to the lens is u cm and the distance of the image Lens Maker’s formula is
from the lens is v cm. The given graphs shows variation of
v with u. 1 1 1
n 1
(i) What is the nature of the lens ? f R1 R 2
(ii) Using the graph, find the focal length of this lens.
1 1 1 1 5
n 1 n 1
12 10 15 12 30
30 1
n 1 0 .5
5 12
Refractive index, n = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5
Example - 4
A double convex lens of glass of refractive index 1.6 has its
both surfaces of equal radii of curvature of 30 cm each. An
object of height 5 cm is placed at a distance of 12.5 cm from
the lens. Calculate the size of the image formed.
Sol. Given n = 1.6, R1 = + 30 cm, R2 = – 30 cm, O = 5 cm,
Sol. (i) The lens is convex because image formed by the lens is
u = –12.5 cm
real.
(ii) Focal length : From graph when u = – 40 cm, v = 15 cm. 1 1 1
Focal length (f) of lens : n 1
f R1 R 2
RAY OPTICS 30
Sol. The formation of image is shown in figure.
1 1 2
1.6 1 0.6
30 30 30
30
f = 25 cm
0.6 2
1 1 1
From this lens formula
f v u
1 1 1 1 1 1 2
v f u 25 12.5 25
Object O is at the right, so we are using the first focus of
v = – 25 cm convex lens, therefore, for the lens f = – 10 cm,
I v v = – 15 cm.
Magnification m
O u From lens formula,
Size of image, I
v
O
25 5 = 10 cm 1 1 1
u 12.5 f v u
Example - 5
1 1 1 1 1 2 3
A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 and of focal length
u v f 15 10 30
15 cm in air, has the same radii of curvature for both sides.
If it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.7, find the u = 30 cm
focal length of the lens in the liquid. The image of O at O’ by the mirror and lens is formed only if
O is at the centre of curvature of lens i.e., OC = R (radius of
Sol. Given fa = 15 cm ng = 1.5, nl = 1.7 curvature).
Focal length of lens in liquid, From Fig. | u | + | R | = 50 cm
ng 1 1.5 1 | R | = 50 – | u | = 50 – 30 = 20 cm
f fa 15 cm
ng 1.5
1 1 Example - 7
n 1.7
A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index 1.5 is
0.5 1.7 dipped, in turn, in :
× 15 cm = – 63.75 cm
1.5 1.7 (i) medium A of refractive index 1.65
(ii) medium B of refractive index 1.33
Example - 6
Explain, giving reasons, whether it will behave as a
In the accompanying diagram, the direct image is formed
converging lens or a diverging lens in each of these two
by the lens (f = 10 cm) of an object placed at O and that
media.
formed after reflection from the spherical mirror are formed
at the same point O’. What is the radius of curvature of the Sol. If fa is focal length of lens (refractive index ng) in air, then its
mirror ? focal length (fe) in a liquid of refractive index (nl) is given by
n g 1
f fa (Given ng = 1.5)
ng
1
n
(i) For medium A, nl = 1.65
1.5 1 0.5 1.65
fe fa f 5.5 f a
1.5
1 1.5 1.65 a
1.65
RAY OPTICS 31
Negative sign shows that the action of converging lens in 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
air is diverging when immersed in medium A. gives
f v u v f u 20 12
(ii) For medium B, nl = 1.33
35
1 .5 1 0.5 1.33
f fa fa 60
1 .5 1.5 1.33
1
1.33 60
v 7.5 cm
8
0.5 1.33
f a 3.91 f a This implies that image is formed to the right of the lens and
0.17
is real.
Positive sign shows that lens remains converging.
(b) In this case u = + 12 cm, f = – 16 cm,
Example - 8
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A converging lens has a focal length of 20 cm in air. It is give
made of material of refractive index 1.5. If it is immersed in f v u v f u 16 12
water of refractive index 4/3, what will be the new focal
3 4
length ?
48
4 v = 48 cm
Sol. Given fa = 20 cm, ng = 1.5, nl =
3 Example - 10
An illuminated object and a screen are placed 90 cm apart.
f
n g 1
fa
1.5 1 20 cm 0.5 4 Determine the focal length and nature of the lens required
× 20 cm
ng 1.5 0.5 to produce a clear image on the screen, twice the size of
1 1
n 4/3 the object.
= 80 cm Sol. Given u + v = 90 cm ...(1)
Example - 9
A beam of light converges to a point P. A lens is placed in
the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from P. At what point
does the beam converge if the lens is (a) convex lens of focal
length 20 cm, (b) a concave lens of focal length 16 cm.
I v
gives
O u
|v|
2
|u|
or | v | = 2 | u | (numerically) ...(2)
Sol. (a) Point P acts as a virtual object for convex lens.
From (1) and (2)
Given u = + 12 cm, f = + 20 cm
| u | = 30 cm, | v | = 60 cm
By sign convention u = – 30 cm, v = 60 cm
1 1 1
gives
f v u
1 1 1 2
60 30 60
f = 20 cm (convex lens)
RAY OPTICS 32
Example - 11 1 1 1 1 1 1
Two lenses of power 10 D and –5 D are placed in contact. v u f 9 10 90
(i) Calculate the power of lens combination. v = – 90 cm
(ii) Where should an object be held from the lens, so as to
v 90 cm
obtain a virtual image of magnification 2 ? Linear magnification M = 10
u 9 cm
Sol. (i) Given P1 = 10 D, P2 = – 5 D
2
Power of Combination, P = P1 + P2 = 10 D – 5 D = 5 D A image v
Areal magnification M A 100
A object u
1 1
(ii) Focal length F m = 0.20 m = 20 cm (Convergent lens) 2 2
P 5 Area of image, Aimage = 100 × Aobject = 100 × 1 mm = 100 mm
(c) Angular magnification of convex lens is
Magnification m u 2 v = 2u
v
From lens formula (u is negative) D 25 cm
M 2.8
u 9 cm
1 1 1
F v u where u is numerical value of object distance and D =
minimum distance of distinct vision = 25 cm.
1 1 1 1 1
– u = – 10 cm Example - 13
20 2u u 2u 20
(a) An equiconvex lens with radii of curvature of magnitude r
Example - 12
each, is put over a liquid layer poured on top of a plane
2
A figuredivided into squares, each of side 1 mm , is being mirror. A small needle, with its tip on the principal axis of
viewed at a distance of 9 cm through a magnifying lens of the lens, is moved along the axis until its inverted real
focal length 10 cm, held close to the eye. image coincides with the needle itself. The distance of the
(a) Draw a ray diagram showing the formation of the image. needle from the lens is measured to be ‘a’. On removing
the liquid layer and repeating the experiment the distance
(b) What is the magnification produced by the lens ? How
much is the area of each square in the virtual image ? is found to be ‘b’.
(c) What is the angular magnification of the lens ?
Sol. (a) The ray diagram showing the formation of image by
magnifying lens is shown in figure.
Given that two value of distance measured represent the
focal length values in the two cases, obtain a formula for
the refractive index of the liquid.
(b) If r = 10 cm, a = 15 cm, b = 10 cm, find the refractive index of
the liquid.
Sol. The focal length (f1) of lens is given by
1 1 1 2n 1
n 1
f1 r r r
(b) Given f = + 10 cm, u = – 9 cm
Given f1 = b
1 1 1 1 2 n 1 r
From lens formula , we have
f v u b
b r 2 n 1
RAY OPTICS 33
The focal length of liquid lens (plano concave lens) is Example - 15
A compound microscope with an objective of 1.0 cm focal
n 1 n 1 f 2
1 1 1 r
f2 n 1 length and an eye-piece of 2.0 cm focal length has a tube
r r
length of 20 cm. Calculate the magnifying power of the
As glass lens and liquid lens are in contact microscope, if the final image is formed at the near point of
the eye.
1 1 1 1 n 1
f f1 f 2 b r Sol. Magnifying power of compound microscope for final image
at near point of eye.
Given f = a
L D
1 1 n 1 M 1
f0 fe
a b r
20 25
n 1 1 1
1 20 1 12.5
1.0 2.0
r b a
= – 20 × 13.5 = – 270
1 1 Negative sign shows that the final image is inverted.
n 1 r
b a Example - 16
Refractive index of liquid, A ray of light passing through an equilateral triangular
prism from air undergoes minimum deviation when angle
r r
n 1 3
b a of incidence is th of the angle of prism. Calculate the
4
10 10 2 4 speed of light in the prism.
(b) n 1 1 1 = 1.33
10 15 3 3
3 3
Example - 14 Sol. Given A = 60°, i A 60 45
4 4
A converging lens of focal length 6.25 cm is used as a
magnifying glass. If the near point of the observer is 25 cm A
For minimum deviation i1 = i2 = i and r1 = r2 = 30
from the eye and lens is held close to eye, calculate (i) the 2
distance of the object from the lens (ii) angular sin i
magnification (iii) angular magnification when final image Refractive index of prism, n
sin r
is formed at infinity.
sin 45 1 / 2
Sol. Given f = 6.25 cm, v = – 25 cm, u = ? 2 = 1.41
sin 30 1/ 2
1 1 1 1 1 1
(i) c 3 108 8 –1
f v u u v f Speed of light in prism, v = 2.13 × 10 ms
n 1.41
fv 6.25 25 6.25 25 Example - 17
u = –5 cm
f v 6.25 25 31.25 In a compound microscope, an object is placed at a distance
(ii) Angular magnification when final image is at the distance of of 1.5 cm from the objective of focal length 1.25 cm. If the
distinct vision eye piece has a focal length of 5 cm and the final image is
formed at the near point, estimate the magnifying power of
D 25 the microscope.
M 1 1 5
f 6.25
Sol. Magnifying power of microscope,
(iii) Angular magnification when final image is formed at infinity
v0 D
D 25 M 1
M 4 u 0 fe
f 6.25
RAY OPTICS 34
Given u0 = – 1.5 cm, f0 = 1.25 cm, fe = 5 cm, D = 25 cm i2 = 90°
1 1 1
Formula gives
f 0 v0 u 0
1 1 1 1 1 1
1.25 v 0 2.5 v 0 1.25 1.5
v0 = 7.5 cm
7.5 25
M 1 = – 5 × 6 = – 30
1.5 5
For snell’s law
Example - 18
An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of power 10 D sin i 2 sin 90 1
and 1 D. What is its magnifying power in normal adjustment? sin r2 sin sin
Sol. Magnifying power of astronomical telescope in normal 1
adjustment 1.6
0.625
f0 P
M e [with f0 > fe or P0 < Pe] b
fe P0 Given 1.2
2
Given P0 = 1 D, Pe = 10 D Putting = 1.6 and = 400 nm = 4 × 10 m
–7
10 b
M 10 1.6 1.2
1 (4 10 7 ) 2
Example - 19 –7 2 2 –14 2
b = (4 × 10 ) × 0.4 m = 6.4 × 10 m
A beam of light of wavelength 400 nm is incident normally –7
on a right angled prism as shown. It is observed that the Now putting = 5000 Å = 5 × 10 m, we get
light just grazes along the surface AC after falling on it.
Given that the refractive index of the material of the prism 6.4 10 14
' 1.2 = 1.2 + 0.256 = 1.456
varies with the wavelength as per the relation 5 10 7 2
2
A, = 1.2 + b/ Example - 20
An object is placed in front of a right angled prism ABC in
two positions (a) and (b) as shown. The prism is made of
crown glass with critical angle 41°. Trace the path of two
rays P and Q (i) in (a) normal to the hypotenuse and (ii) in
(b) parallel to the hypotenuse.
Calculate the value of b and the refractive index of the prism
material for a wavelength = 5000 Å
–1
[(Given q = sin (0.625)]
–9
Sol. Given = 400 nm = 400 × 10 m
i1 = 0, r1 = 0
r1 + r2 = r2 = – r1 =
RAY OPTICS 35
Sol.
f a n g 1 1.5 1
i.e. f 15
f g n g 1 1.5
1
1.7
0 .5
i.e. f 15 1.7 = – 15 × 4.25 = – 63.75 cm
0 . 2
Example - 23
An object is placed at a distance of 40 cm from a concave
Example - 21 mirror of focal length 15 cm. If the object is displaced
Calculate the distance of an object of height h from a through a distance of 20 cm toward the mirror, by how
concave mirror of focal length 10 cm, so as to obtain a real much distance is the image displaced ?
image of magnification.
1 1 1
v v Sol. Using,
Sol. For real image, m i.e. 2 i.e. 2u + v f u v
u u
uf
1 1 1 u
using we get uf
v u f
For a concave mirror,
1 1 1 2 1 1 f = – 15 cm and u = – 40 cm
i.e.
2u u 10 2u 10
v
40 15 40 15
3 1
40 15 25 = – 24 cm
i.e. i.e. u = – 15 cm
2u 10 On displacement of object towards the mirror,
Example - 22 u’ = – (40 – 20) = – 20 cm
Draw a plot showing the variation of power of a lens, with
the wavelength of the incident light. A converging lens of v'
20 15 20 15
= – 60 cm
refractive index 1.5 and of focal length 15 cm in air, has the
20 15 5
same radii of curvature for both sides. If it is immersed in a movement of image
liquid of refractive index 1.7, find the focal length of the
lens in the liquid. = (–60) – (–24) = 36 cm.
Example - 24
Sol. a n g 1.5
A glass slab is immersed in water. Find the critical angle at
a a
a ng 1 .5 glass water interfaces, given g = 1.5 and w = 1.33.
Lng
a nL 1.7
w 1.5
g 1.13
Sol. 1.33
P
1
Using, sin C
0 1
sin C or C = 62°
1.13
1
Using (n – 1) we get
f
RAY OPTICS 36
Example - 25 1 1 1
An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of radius f u v
of curvature 40 cm at a distance of 10 cm. Find the position,
nature and magnification of the image. 1 1 1 1 1 3 2
v f u 18 27 54
Sol. Using, 1 1 1 and f R v = – 54 cm.
v f u 2
That is, image is formed in front at mirror at a distance 54 cm
from the mirror. Therefore the screen must be placed at a
we get
1 2 1 1 1 1
distance 54 cm from the mirror. Size of the image
v R u 40 10 20 10
I
v
O
54
1 10 20 10 1 × 2.5 cm. = – 5 cm.
u 27
or or v = 20 cm.
v 200 200 20
The image is real, inverted and 5 cm. long. If the candle is
Image is formed behind the mirror Magnification, moved closer, the screen should have to be moved farther
and farther. If the candle is brought less than 18 cm, the
v 20 image will be virtual and cannot be collected on the
m 2
u 10 screen.
Image is virtual , erect and enlarged.
Example - 28
Example - 26
A beaker is filled with water to a height of 12.5 m. The
A reflecting type telescope has a concave reflector of radius apparent depth of the needle lying at the bottom of the
of curvature 120 cm. Calculate the focal length of eye piece tank as measured by a microscope is 9.4 cm. What is the
to secure a magnification of 20. refractive index of water ? If water is replaced by a liquid
of refractive index 1.63 upto the same height, by what
f0 R
Sol. Using, M f and f 0 2 distance would the microscope be moved to focus on the
e
needle again ?
R 120 60 Re al depth (H )
i.e. M
2 fe 2 fe fe Sol. Refractive index, n =
Apparent depth h
60 Given H = 12.5 cm, h = 9.4 cm
or fe
M
12.5
Refractive index of water, n w 1.33
60 9 .4
Here M = – 20 f e 3 cm.
20 Refractive index of liquid, nl = 1.63
Example - 27
H 12.5
A small candle 2.5 cm in size is placed 27 cm in front of a Apparent height with liquid in tank, h
n 1.63
concave mirror of radius of curvature 36 cm. At what
distance from the mirror should a screen be placed in order = 7.7 cm
to receive a sharp image ? Describe the nature and size of Displacement of microscope, x = 9.4 – 7.7 = 1.7 cm
the image. If the candle is moved closer to the mirror, how
should the screen be moved ? Example - 29
Figure (a) and (b) show refraction of an incident ray in air
Sol. Given u = – 27 cm, O = 2.5 cm. at 60° with the normal to a glass-air and water-air interface,
respectively, Predict the angle (r) of refraction of an incident
36
| r | = | 2f | = 36 cm. f 18 cm. ray in water at 45° with the normal to a water-glass interface
2 [figure (c)]
(with sign convention)
RAY OPTICS 37
Sol. The light rays starting from bulb can pass through the
surface if angle of incidence at surface is less than or equal
to critical angle (C) for water-air interface. If h is depth of
bulb from the surface, the light will emerge only through a
circle of radius r given by
r = h tan C
where h = 80 cm = 0.80 m
1 3
But sin C
n
a w 4
Sol. Snell’s law of refraction is sin i n 2 1n 2 3
sin r n 1 tan C
7
sin 60 n g 3
Figure (a) = n
sin 35 n a a g r = 0.80 ×
7
Refraction index of glass with respect to air, Area of circular surface of water,
sin 60 0.8660
2
ng 1.51 2 3
a
sin 35 0.5736 A = r = 3.14 × 0.8
7
sin 60 n w
Figure (b) sin 41 n a n w 9 2
a
= 3.14 × 0.64× = 2.6 m
7
Refractive index of water with respect to air, Example - 31
sin 60 0.8660 Double convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass
1.32 of refractive index 1.55, with both faces of the same radius
sin 41 0.6561
of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if
the focal length is to be 20 cm ?
sin 45 a n g
Figure (c)
sin r a nw Sol. Lens maker’s formula is
nw 1.32 1 1 1
sin r a
sin 45 × 0.7071 = 0.6181 n 1
n
a g 1.51 f R
1 R 2
–1
r = sin (0.6181) = 38° If R is radius of curvature of double convex lens, then
Example - 30 R1 = + R, R2 = – R
A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing
1 1 1 1 2 n 1
water to a depth of 80 cm. What is the area of the surface of n 1 or
water through which light from the bulb can emerge out ? f R R f R
Refractive index of water is 4/3. R = 2 (n – 1) f
RAY OPTICS 38
Here n = 1.55, f = + 20 cm.
A m
R = 2 (1. 55 – 1) × 20 = 22 cm sin
n 2
Example - 32 A
sin
What is the focal length of a combination of a convex lens 2
of focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of focal length
Given angle of prism A = 60°.
20 cm in contact ? Is the system a converging or a diverging
lens ? Ignore thickness of lenses. Minimum angle of deviation m = 40°
Sol. Given f1 = + 30 cm, f2 = – 20 cm A m
sin
The focal length (F) of combination of given by 2
Refractive index n =
A
sin
F f1f 2 30 20 60 cm
1 1 1 2
F f1 f 2 f1 f 2 30 20
That is, the focal length of combination is 60 cm and it acts 60 40
sin
like a diverging lens.
2 sin 50 0.7660
= 1.532
Example - 33 60 sin 30 0.5
sin
The image of a small electric bulb fixed on the wall of a 2
room is to be obtained on the opposite wall 3 m away by
When prism is placed in water, its refractive index becomes
means by a large convex lens. What is the maximum
possible focal length of the lens required for the purpose ? ng 1.532
w ng 1.152
Sol. For a fixed distance D between object and image for its real nw 1.33
image If m’ is the new angle of deviation, then
D2 x 2
f A m ' 60 m '
4D sin sin
2 2
w ng
where x is the separation between two position of lens. sin A / 2 sin 30
For maximum f, x = 0
60 m '
D sin
f max 2
4 1.152
0 .5
Given D = 3 m
60 m '
3 sin = 1.152 × 0.5 = 0.576
f m 0.75 m 2
4
Example - 34 60 m '
= 35° or 1m = 10°
A prism is made of glass of unknown refractive index. A 2
parallel beam of light is incident on a face of the prism. By Example - 35
rotating the prism, the minimum angle of deviation is At what angle should a ray of light be incident on the face
measured to be 40°. What is the refractive index of the of a prism of refracting angle 60° so that it just suffers
prism ? If the prism is placed in water (refractive index total internal reflection at the other face ? The refractive
1.33), predict the new minimum angle of deviation of a index of prism is 1.524.
parallel beam of light. The refracting angle of prism is 60°
(use. sin 50° = 0.7660 and sin 35° = 0.576) Sol. For just total internal reflection from prism, the ray must be
incident at critical angle on the second face.
ng
Given angle of prism, A = 60°, n = 1.524
Sol. Refractive index of prism material and w n g
nw
RAY OPTICS 39
For farthest distance v = ;
1 1 1 1 1
u max v f 5
umax = –5 cm
Thus the nearest distance is 4.2 cm and the farthest distance
is 5 cm (focal length of lens) for reading a book.
D
(b) Angular magnification M , D = – 25 cm
u
If C is the critical angle for total internal reflection, then
Maximum angular magnification,
1 1
sin C 0.6561 25 25 6
n 1.524 M max
–1
u max 25 / 6
C = sin (0.6561) = 41°
Let i be the angle of incident at first face of prism AB. The Minimum angular magnification,
ray follows the path PQRS
M min
25 25
5
For just total internal reflection at the other face AC u max 5
r2 + C = 41°
Example - 37
As r1 + r2 = A
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of
r1 + A – r2 = 60° – 41° = 19°
focal length 2.0 cm and an eyepiece of focal length 6.25 cm
separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from the objective
sin i
From Snell’s law n should an object be placed in order to obtain the final
sin r
image at (i) the least distance of distinct vision (D = 25 cm)
sin i = n sin r = 1.524 sin 19° = 1.524 × 0.3256 = 0.4962 and (ii) infinity.
–1
Angle of incidence i = sin (0.4962) = 29° 45’. What is the magnifying power of the microscope in each
case ?
Example - 36
A man with normal near point (25 cm) reads a book with Sol. Given f0 = 2.0 cm, fe = 6.25 cm, L = 15 cm, u0 = ?
small print using a magnifying glass : a thin convex lens of (i) When final image is formed at least distance of distinct vision
focal length 5 cm. (D = 25 cm) :
(a) What is the closest and the farthest distance at which he For eye lens : Here ve = – 25 cm
should keep the lens from the page, so that he can read the
book when viewing through the magnifying glass ? 1 1 1
(b) What is the maximum and the minimum angular fe ve u e
magnification (magnifying power) possible using the above
simple microscope ? 1 1 1 1 1 1 4
u e ve fe 25 6.25 25
Sol. (a) Given f = + 5 cm.
or ue = – 5 cm
For closest distance v = – 25 cm (normal near point)
As L = | v0 | + | ue | | v0 | = L – | ue | = 15 – 5 = 10 cm
1 1 1
From lens formula For objective lens :
f v u
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 5
f 0 v0 u 0
u min v f 25 5 25
1 1 1 1 1 2
25
u min 4.2 cm u 0 v 0 f 0 10 2 5
6
RAY OPTICS 40
5 1 1 1 1 1 1
u0 2.5 cm v0 = 72 mm
2 v0 f0 u 0 8 9 72
That is distance of object from objective is 2.5 cm. For eye-lens if final image is formed at least distance of
distinct vision, then
v0 D
Magnification, M 1 ve = – D = – 25 cm = – 250 mm
u0 f
e
1 1 1
10 25 fe ve u e
1 4 5 20
2.5 6.25
1 1 1 1 1 11
(ii) When final image is formed at infinity :
u e ve fe 250 25 250
In this case L = v0 + fe
v0 = L – fe = 15 – 6.25 = 8.75 cm 250
ue mm 22.7 mm
For objective lens : 11
Separation between lenses, L = | v0 | + | ue | = 72 mm + 22.7mm
1 1 1
= 94.7 mm = 9.47 cm
f 0 v0 u 0
v0 D
1 1 1 1 1 2 8.75 Magnifying power, M 1
u0 f
u 0 v 0 f 0 8.75 2 2 8.75 e
2 8.75 72 25 cm
1
u0
6.75 9 2.5 cm = – 8 (1 + 10) = – 88
u0 = – 2.59 cm, | u0 | = 2.59 cm Example - 39
An angular magnification of 30 X is desired using an
v0 D
Magnification, M . objective of focal length 1.25 cm and an eye-piece of focal
u 0 fe
length 5 cm. How would you set up the compound
microscope ?
8.75 25
. 13.5
2.59 6.25 Sol. In normal adjustment of microscope, the image is formed at
the least distance of distinct vision D = 25 cm.
Example - 38
A person with a normal near point (25 cm) using a compound D 25
Angular magnification of eye piece me = 1 + 1 6
microscope with an objective of focal length 8.0 mm and f 6
an eye-piece of focal length 2.5 cm can bring an object
Given total angular magnification M (= m0 × me) = 30
placed 9.0 mm from the objective in sharp focus. What is
the separation between the two lenses ? What is the M 30
magnifying power of the microscope ? Magnification of objective, m 0 5
me 6
Sol. Given focal length of objective, f0 = 8 mm = 0.8 cm The objective lens of microscope forms real image, so its
Focal length of eye-piece, fe = 2.5 cm = 25 mm magnification is negative.
For objective lens : v0
5 v0 = – 5u0
Distance of object from objective, u0 = – 9 mm u0
1 1 1 As u0 is negative and v0 is positive.
From lens formula , we get
f 0 v0 u 0 u0 = – | u0 |, v0 = + 5 | u0 |
RAY OPTICS 41
Focal length of objective lens, f0 = 1.25 cm B
Sol. Refractive index n = A + , where is the wavelength
1 1 1 2
From lens formula
f 0 v0 u 0
Power of a lens P
1
f
n g 1 R1
1
R2
1 1 1 6 1
1.25 5 | u 0 | | u 0 | 5| u 0 | Clearly, power of a lens (ng – 1). This implies that the
power of a lens decreases with increase of wavelength
6
| u 0 | 1.25 cm 1.5 cm 1
5 P 2 nearly . The plot is shown in figure.
Also | v0 | = 5 | u0 | = 5 × 1.5 = 7.5 cm
Focal length of eye lens, fe = 5 cm
1 1 1
Again from lens formula P
fe ve u e
1 1 1 1 1 6
u e ve fe 25 5 25
Example - 42
25 A concave mirror and a convex lens are held in water. What
ue cm = – 4.17 cm changes, if any, do you expect in their respective focal
6
lengths as compared to their values in air.
| ue | = 4.17 cm
Separation between the lenses d = | v0 | + | ue | Sol. A concave mirror forms the image involving reflection. Its
focal length depends only on radius of curvature, and hence
= 7.5 + 4.17 = 11.67 cm
remains the same even when it is held in water.
Thus to obtain, the desired magnification the separation
A convex lens forms the image involving refraction. Its focal
between the lenses must be 11.67 cm and the objective must
length depends on radii of curvature and refractive index of
be placed at a distance 1.5 cm in front of the objective lens.
lens material with respect to surrounding material. Hence
Example - 40 the focal length in water would become larger than that in
(a) The refractive index of glass is 1.5. What is the speed of air.
8 –1
light in glass ? (Speed of light in vacuum is 3.0 ×10 ms ).
(b) Is the speed of light in glass independent of the colour
of light ? If not, which of the two colours, red and violet,
travels slower in the glass prism ?
c 3 108
Sol. (a) Speed of light in glass, v 2 108 m / s
ng 1.5
(b) No, the speed of light in glass depends on the colour of
light.
1
v As nV > nR vV < vR
n
That is, violet colour travels slower in glass prism.
Example - 41
Draw a plot showing the variation of power of a lens with
the wavelength of the incident light.
RAY OPTICS 42
Example - 43 (i) When wavelength of illuninating radiations decreases, the
resolving limit decreases, so resolving power increases.
A double convex lens, made from a material of refractive
index 1, is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 2 where (ii) When diameter of objective lens decreases, and hence sin
2 > 1. What change, if any, would occur in the nature of decreases; so resolving limit increases and hence resolving
the lens ? power decreases.
Example - 46
Sol. Focal of lens (refractive index 1) in a liquid of refractive
Define the term ‘resolving power’ of an astronomical
index 2 is
telescope. How does it get affected on
1 1 (i) increasing the aperture of the objective lens ?
f fa
1 (ii) increasing the wavelength of light used ?
1
2
(iii) increasing the focal length of the objective lens ?
1 Justify your answer in each case.
Given 2 > 1, i.e., 1
2
Sol. Resolving Power of an Astronomical Telescope
1 1 The resolving power of an astronomical telescope is its
so f f
a ability to form separate images of two neighbouring
1 1
2 astronomical objects (e.g. stars).
The least distance between two neighbouring objects for
So the focal length of lens in liquid will be of opposite sign
which astronomical telescope can form separate images is
of the focal length of lens in air, i.e., nature of lens will change.
called the resolving limit. The angular limit of resolution is
Hence, lens would now behave like a diverging (concave)
given by
lens.
Example - 44 1.22
min
Give reasons for the following : d
The value of the Brewster angle for a transparent medium where is wavelength and d is diameter of aperture objective
is different for light of different colours. lens. Smaller the resolving limit, greater is the resolving
–1
power.
Sol. Breswter’s angle, ip = tan (n)
d
1 Resolving power
As refractive index n 2 ; is different for lights of 1.22
(i) RP d, so by increasing aperture of objective lens, the
different wavelengths (colours), therefore, Brewster’s angle
resolving power of telescope increases.
is different for lights of different colours.
Example - 45 1
(ii) RP , so by increasing the wavelength of light, the
How is the resolving power of a microscope affected when,
(i) the wavelength of illuminating radiations is decreased ? resolving power of telescope decreases.
(ii) the diameter of the objective lens is decreased ? (iii) Resolving power of telescope is independent of its focal
length, so there is no effect on resolving power of focal
Justify your answer.
length of objective lens is increased.
Example - 47
Sol. Resolving limit of microscope
2n sin Is dispersion possible in a hollow prism ? Also give reason.
where is the wavelength, n is the refractive index and is Sol. No, because both the faces AB and AC of prism behave like
the semiangle of cone of rays entering the microscope, glass plates. Any ray of white light (say PQ), after refraction
through the faces AB and AC emerges along RS parallel to
1
Resolving power the incident ray.
Re solving limit
RAY OPTICS 43
A
Example - 50
S
Q A crack in a window pane appears silvery, why ?
R
P Sol. When there is a crack in a window pane, then there is air in
B C space of crack. When light enters the cracked window pane,
it goes from glass to air at an angle greater than the critical
Example - 48
angle, so light suffers total internal reflection; thus the crack
To increase the magnifying power of a telescope, the acts as a silver surface; that is why the crack in window
objective and eyepiece of higher power can be taken. But pane appears silvery.
in practice the magnifying power cannot be increased
beyond a certian limit. Explain. Example - 51
The bubbles of air rising up in a water tank appear silvery
Sol. It is useful to increase the magnifying power to a very large
when viewed from top, why ?
value only if the resolving power also increases. The
wavelength range of visible light is 4000 Å – 7800 Å i.e. Sol. When light falls on air-bubbles in water, the light travels
minimum wavelength is 4000 Å, hence resolution is not from water to air at an angle greater than critical angle, so
possible in objects smaller than a certain size, whatever be light suffers total internal reflection from the surface of
the magnifying power. bubbles, hence bubbles of air appear silvery.
Example - 49 Example - 52
The objective of telescope A has diameter 3 times that of a If the wavelength of visible light were 1 mm, then could we
the objective of telescope B. How much light is gathered make the thread to pass easily through the hole of a
by A compared to B ? stitching needle ? Explain.
Sol. The intensity of light transmitted through a lens inversely –7
Sol. No, the resolving limit of eye for wavelength = 5 × 10 m
proportional to square of aperture.
0
2
1
IA dA is . For wavelength = 1 mm, it will be 33°.
32 9 60
I B d B
That is the intensity of light gathered by A is 9–times as
compared to B.
RAY OPTICS 44
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Plane Mirror
(a) x1x2 (b) x1x 2
1. A point source of light B is placed at a distance L in front
of the centre of a mirror of width d hung vertically on a (c) (x1 + x2)/2 (d) x1 / x 2
wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel
to the mirror at a distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest 5. A convex mirror has a focal length f. A real object is placed at
distance over which he can see the image of the light source a distance f in front of it from the pole, produces an image at
in the mirror is (a) infinity (b) f
(c) f/2 (d) 2 f
6. A concave mirror of focal length f produces an image n times
the size of the object. If the image is real then the distance of
the object from the mirror, is
(a) (n – 1) f (b) {(n – 1)/n} f
(c) {(n + 1)/n} f (d) (n + 1) f
7. What is the magnification when the object is placed at a
distance of 2f from the pole of a convex mirror?
(a) d/2 (b) d
1 2 3
(c) 2d (d) 3d (a) (b) (c) 1 (d)
3 3 2
8. The image formed by a convex mirror of focal length 30 cm is
2. Two plane mirrors. A and B are aligned parallel to each one quarter of the size of object. The distance of object form
other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an the mirror is
angle of 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane (a) 30 cm (b) 120 cm
of incidence coincides with the plane of the figure. The
(c) 90 cm (d) 60 cm
maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections
(including the first one) before it emerges out is 9. A convex mirror of focal length f produces an image
th
1
of the size of the object. The distance of the object
n
from the mirror is
(a) nf (b) f/n
(c) (n + 1)/f (d) (n – 1) f
10. An object is placed at 10 cm from a lens and real image is
formed with magnification of 0.5. Then the lens is :
(a) 28 (b) 30 (A) concave with focal length of 10/3 cm
(c) 32 (d) 34 (B) convex with focal length of 10/3 cm
(C) concave with focal length of 10 cm
Spherical Mirror (D) convex with focal length of 10 cm
3. A square of side 3cm is placed at a distance of 25cm from 11. The distance of an object from the focus of a convex mirror
a concave mirror of focal length 10cm. The centre of the of radius of curvature ‘a’ is ‘b’. Then the
square is at the axis of the mirror and the plane is normal to
the axis. The area enclosed by the image of the square is distance of the image from the focus is :
(a) 4cm 2 (b) 6cm 2 b2 a
(A) (B)
(c) 16cm 2 (d) 36cm 2 4a b2
4. In a concave mirror an object is placed at a distance x1 from a2
the focus and the image is formed at a distance x2 from the (C) (D) none
focus. Then the focal length of the mirror is 4b
RAY OPTICS 45
12. Which of the following is not true about the image formed 20. A fish rising vertically with speed 3 m/s to the surface of
by covex mirror? water sees a bird diving vertically towards it with speed 9 m/
(a) It is erect (b) It is virtual s. Given aw = (4/3). The actual velocity of dive of bird is
(c) It is diminished (d) It lies beyond focus (a) 6 m/s (b) 4 m/s
13. For a real object, a convex mirror always forms an image (c) 8.4 m/s (d) 4.5 m/s
which is 21. An air bubble in glass slab ( = 1.5) appears to be at 6 cm
(a) real and inverted (b) virtual and inverted from one side and 4 cm from other side. The thickness of
glass slab is
(c) virtual and erect (d) real and magnified
(a) 10 cm (b) 6.67 cm
14. The image of a bright object is brought on the screen with a
concave mirror. If upper half of mirror is covered, what is the (c) 15 cm (d) none of these
effect on the image? 22. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of
(a) its size is halved (b) brightness is reduced diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute when
(c) image changes position (d) image disappears water is being drained out at a constant rate. The amount of
15. A convex mirror is used to form an image of a real object. water drained in c.c. per minute is ( n1 = refractive index of
Then tick the wrong statement air, n 2 = refractive index of water)
(a) the image lies between the pole and focus
(b) the image is diminished in size (a) x p R 2 n1 / n 2
(c) the image is erect (b) x p R 2 n 2 / n1
(d) the image is real
16. A concave mirror is used to form an image of the sun on a (c) 2 p R n1 / n 2
white screen. If the lower half on the mirror were covered (d) p R 2 x
with an opaque card, the effect on the image on the screen
would be 23. The refractive index of water with respect to air is 4/3 and the
refractive index of glass with respect to air is 3/2. The refractive
(a) to make the image less bright than before index of water with respect to glass is
(b) to make the lower half of the image disappear (a) 9/8 (b) 8/9
(c) to prevent image from being focussed (c) 1/2 (d) 2
(d) none of these Optical Path
Motion of object, mirror and image 24. Air has refractive index 1.0003. The thickness of air
17. A small plane mirror is placed at the centre of a spherical column, which will have one more wavelength of yellow
screen of radius R. A beam of light is falling on the mirror. If light (6000 Å) than in same thickness of vacuum, is
the mirror makes n revolutions per second, the speed of light (a) 2 mm (b) 2 cm
on the screen after reflection from the mirror will be
(c) 2 m (d) 2 km
(a) 4 nR (b) 2 nR
25. A glass slab of thickness 8 cm contain, the same number of
(c) nR/ (d) nR/4 wavelengths as 10 cm of water when both are traversed by
Apparent depth of image the same monochromatic light. If the refractive index of water
is 4/3, the refractive index of glass is
18. A vessel is half filled with a liquid of refractive index . The
other half of the vessel is filled with an immiscibel liquid of (a) 5/3 (b) 5/4
refractive index 1.5 . The apparant depth of the vessel is (c) 16/15 (d) 3/2
50% of the actual depth. Then is
Speed of light in different media
(a) 1.4 (b) 1.5
26. A beam of monochromatic blue light of wavelength 420 nm
(c) 1.6 (d) 1.67 in air travels in water ( = 4/3). Its wavelength in water will be
Lens maker formula (a) 280 nm (b) 560 nm
19. If in a plano-convex lens, radius of curvature of convex (c) 315 nm (d) 400 nm
surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is 30 cm, the Ans:(c)
refractive index of the material of the lens will be
27. If velocity of light in a certain medium is 1.5 × 108 m/s, for
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66 the medium would be
(c) 1.33 (d) 3 (a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 2.5 (d) 3
RAY OPTICS 46
28. The wavelength of sodium light is 589 nm in air. What will be
the wavelength of sodium light if it travels in glass of
refractive index 1.5 ?
(a) 589 nm (b) 589 × 1.5 nm
(c) (589/1.5) nm (d) none of these
Critical Angle
29. If the refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass slab is
5/3, then the critical angle of incidence for which a light
tending to go from glass to water is
(a) sin 1 (3 / 4) (b) sin 1 (3 / 5)
(c) sin 1 (2 / 3) (d) sin 1 (4 / 5)
(a) = 49° (b) = 90°
30. If the critical angle for total internal reflection from a medium
to vacuum is 30°, then the velocity of light in the medium is 1
(c) = 98° (d) = 24
(a) 3 × 108 m/sec (b) 1.5 × 108 m/sec 2
36. A ray of light is incident at the glass–water interface at an
(c) 6 × 108 m/sec (d) 3 10 8 m / sec angle i, it emerges finally parallel to the surface of water,
31. The critical angle for a medium is 60°. Then refractive index then the value of g would be
of the medium will be
(a) 3/2 (b) 2 / 3
(c) 2 /3 (d) 3
32. The refractive index of water is 4/3 and that of glass is 5/3.
What will be the critical angle for the ray of light entering
water from the glass
(a) sin–1 (4/5)
(b) sin–1 (5/4)
(a) (4/3) sin i (b) 1/sin i
(c) sin–1 (1/2)
(d) sin–1 (2/1) (c) 4/3 (d) 1
33. Light travels with a speed of 2 × 108 m/s in crown glass of 37. Two transparent media A and B are separated by a plane
refractive index 1.5. What is the speed of light in dense glass boundary. The speed of light in medium A is 2.0 108 m s 1
of refractive index 1.8 ?
and in medium B is 2.5 108 ms 1 . The critical angle for
(a) 1.33 × 108 m/s
which a ray of light going from A to B is totally internally
(b) 1.67 × 108 m/s reflected is
(c) 2.0 × 108 m/s
(d) 3.0 × 108 m/s 1 1 1 2
(A) sin (B) sin
34. A ray of light enters from a denser medium into rarer medium. 2 5
The speed of light in the rarer medium is twice that in denser
medium. what is the critical angle for total internal reflection 1 4 1 1
to take palce (C) sin (D) sin
5 3
(a) 60°
38. A small source of light is 4m below the surface of a liquid
(b) 45°
of refractive index 5 / 3 . In order to cut off all the light coming
(c) 30°
out of liquid surface, minimum diameter of the disc placed
(d) none of above on the surface of liquid is
35. A fish is a little away below the surface of a lake. If the critical
angle is 49°, then the fish could see things above the water (A) 3m (B) 4m
surface within an angular ring of ° where (C) 6m (D)
RAY OPTICS 47
39. A fish looking up through the water sees the outside world 43. A prism having an apex angle of 4 and refractive index of
contained in a circular horizon. If the refractive index of 1.50 is located in front of a vetical plane
water is 4 / 3 and fish is 12 cm below the surface, the mirror as shown. A horizontal ray of light is incident on the
radius of the circle in cm is prism. The total angle through which the ray is
deviated is
(A) 12 3 5 (B) 4 5
(C) 12 3 7 (D) 12 3 / 7
Prism
40. A graph is plotted between angle of deviation () and angle
of incidence (i) for a prism. The nearly correct graph is
(a) (b) (A) 4 clockwise (B) 178 clockwise
(C) 2 clockwise (D) 8 clockwise
44. A thin prism of angle 5 is placed at a distance of 10 cm
from object. What is the distance of the image from object?
(Given of prism 1.5
(A) / 8 cm (B) / 12 cm
(c) (d)
(C) 5 / 36 cm (D) / 7 cm
45. An achromatic prism is made by crown glass prism
41. The refracting angle of prism is A and refractive index of
Ac 19 and fl i n t glass prism A F 6 . If
C
A v 1.5 and F v 1.66 , then resultant deviation for red
material of prism is cot . The angle of minimum deviation
2 coloured ray will be
is (a) 1.04° (b) 5°
(a) 180°– 3A (b) 180° + 2A (c) 0.96° (d) 13.5°
(c) 90° –A (d) 180° – 2A Refraction on curved surface
42. For a small angled prism, angle of prism A, the angle of 46. A concave spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm
minimum deviation (d) varies with the refractive index of
separates two medium x & y of refractive index 4 / 3 & 3 / 2
the prism as shown in the graph
respectively. If the object is placed along principal axis in
medium X then
(a) Point P corresponds to m = 1 (A) image is always real
(b) Slope of the line PQ = A/2 (B) image is real if the object distance is greater than 90 cm
(c) Slope = A (C) image is always virtual
(d) None of the above statements is true (D) image is virtual if the object distance is less than 90 cm
RAY OPTICS 48
47. A spherical surface of radius of curvature 10 cm separates Combination of Thin Lens
two media X and Y of refractive indices 3 / 2 and 4 / 3 53. A convex lens of focal length f is put in contact with a
respectively. Centre of the spherical surface lies in denser concave lens of same focal length. The focal length of
medium. An object is placed in medium combination is
X . For image to be real, the object distance must be (a) zero (b) 2f
(c) f (d) infinity
(A) greater than 90 cm (B) less than 90 cm
54. A concave and convex lens have same focal length of 20 cm
(C) greater than 80 cm (D) less than 80 cm and are put in contact. The combination is used to view an
object of 5 cm length kept at 20 cm from the lens combination.
Lenses As compared to object, the image will be
48. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as (a) magnified and inverted (b) diminished and erect
formed by a convex lens of focal length 30cm is 2 cm. If a (c) of same size and erect (d) of same size and inverted
concave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed between the
55. Two thin lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are placed in contact.
convex lens and the image at a distance of 26 cm from the
The focal length of the complete lens is
convex lens, calculate the new size of the image
(a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm f1 f 2 f1 f 2
(a) (b) f f
2 1 2
(c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm
49. Two similar plano-convex lenses are combined together in f1f 2
three different ways as shown in the adjoining figure. The (c) f1f 2 (d) f f
1 2
ratio of the focal lengths in three cases will be
56. Parallel rays of light are focussed by a thin convex lens. A
thin concave lens of same focal length is then joined to the
convex lens and the result is that
(a) the focal point shifts away from the lens by a small
distance
(b) the focal point shifts towards the lens by a small distance
(c) the focal point does not shift at all
(d) the focal point shifts to infinity
(a) 2 : 2 : 1 (b 1 : 1 : 1
57. Two thin lenses of focal lengths 20 cm and 25 cm are placed
(c) 1 : 2 : 2 (d) 2 : 1 : 1 in contact. The power of the combination is
50. Two symmetric double convex lenses A and B have same (a) 0.5 D (b) 9 D
focal length, but the radii of curvature differ so that (c) 5 D (d) 4.5 D
R A 0.9 R B . If n A 1.63, find n B . 58. The lenses of power +12 and –2 diopters are placed in contact.
What will be the focal length of the combination
(A)1.7 (B) 1.6
(C) 1.5 (D) 4/3 (a) 10 cm (b) 12.5 cm
(c) 16.6 cm (d) 8.33 cm
51. A virtual image three times the size of the object is obtained
with a concave mirror of radius of curvature 36cm. The 59. If an object is placed at A(OA > f); Where f is the focal
distance of the object from the mirror is length of the lens the image is found to be formed at B. A
perpendicular is erected at O and C is chosen on it such that
(a) 5cm (b) 12cm
the angle BCA is a right angle. Then the value of f will be
(c) 10cm (d) 20cm
52. A lens forms a sharp image on a screen. On inserting a parallel
sided glass slab between the lens and the screen, it is found
necessary to move the screen a distance d away from the
lens in order for the image to be sharp again. If the refractive
index of the glass relative to air is , then the thickness of the
slab is
(a) d (b) d/
(c) ( – 1) d/ (d) d/( – 1) (A) AB / OC2 (B) OC AB / AC BC
(C) AC BC / OC (D) OC 2 / AB
RAY OPTICS 49
Lens maker formula 65. A thin symmetrical double convex lens of power P is cut
into three part, as shown in the figure. Power of A is :
60. The radius of curvature for a convex lens is 40 cm, for
each surface. Its refractive index is 1.5. The focal length
will be
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm
(c) 80 cm (d) 30 cm
61. If in a plano-convex lens, the radius of curvature of the
convex surface is 10 cm and the focal length of the lens is
30 cm, then the refractive index of the material of lens will P
(A) 2 P (B)
be 2
(a) 1.5 (b) 1.66 P
(C) (D) P
(c) 1.33 (d) 3 3
62. The curvature radii of a concavo-convex glass lens are 66. A double convex lens made of material of refractive index 1.5
20 cm and 60 cm . The convex surface of thelens is silvered. and having a focal length of 10 cm is immersed in a liquid of
With the lens horizontal, the concave surface is filled refractive index 3.0. The lens will behave as
with water. The focal length of the effective mirror (a) converging lens of focal length 10 cm
is of glass 1.5, of water 4 / 3 (b) diverging lens of focal length 10 cm
(c) convering lens of focal length 10/3 cm
(A) 90 / 13 cm (B) 80 / 13 cm
(d) converging lens of focal length 30 cm
(C) 20 / 3 cm (D) 45 / 8 cm 67. A double convex air bubble in water will behave as
Power and maagnification (a) convergent lens (b) divergent lens
63. The radius of curvature of the curved face of a thin (c) plane glass slab (d) concave mirror
planoconvex lens is 10 cm and it is made of glass of 68. A glass concave lens is placed in a liquid in which it behave
refractive index 1.5. A small object is approaching the lens like a convergent lens. If the refractive indices of glass and
with a speed of 1 cms-1 moving along the principal axis liquid with respect to air are ag and al respectively, then
(a) ag = 5 al (b) ag > al
Lens (c) ag < al (d) ag = 2 al
A B F C D Image Location, Magnification, Power
Object 69. A lens with power + P is immersed in water. Its power
2 3
(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) remains unchanged
When the object is at a distance of 30 cm from the lens, the (d) increases for red colour, decreases for blue
magnitude of the rate of change of the lateral magnification
70. Magnification produced by a concave lens can be
is
(a) more than one (b) equal to one
(A) 0.1 per second (B) 0.2 per second
(c) less than one (d) equal to or less than one
(C) 0.3 per second (D) 0.4 per second
71. A double convex lens of focal length 6 cm is made of glass
64. If two lenses of +5 diopters are mounted at some distance of refractive index 1.5. The radius of curvature of one surface
apart, the equivalent power will always be negative if the is double that of other surface. The value of larger radius of
distance is curvature is
(a) Greater than 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm (a) 6 cm (b) 4.5 cm
(c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less than 10 cm (c) 9 cm (d) 4 cm
RAY OPTICS 50
72. A convergent lens of focal length 20 cm and made of a material 79. A compound microscope is used to enlarge an object kept
with refractive index 1.1 is immersed in water of refractive at a distance 0.03m from it’s objective which consists of
4 several convex lenses in contact and has focal length 0.02m.
index . The lens will behave as a If a lens of focal length 0.1m is removed from the objective,
3
then by what distance the eye-piece of the microscope must
(a) converging lens of focal length 20 cm be moved to refocus the image
(b) converging lens of focal length less than 20 cm
(a) 2.5 cm (b) 6 cm
(c) converging lens of focal length more than 20 cm
(c) 15 cm (d) 9 cm
(d) divergent lens.
80. If the focal length of the objective lens and the eye lens are
73. A thin convergent glass lens (g = 1.5) has a power of + 5.0 4 mm and 25 mm respectively in a compound microscope.
D. When this lens is immersed in a liquid of refractive index
The length of the tube is 16 cm. Find its magnifying power
l it acts as a divergent lens of focal length 100 cm. The value
of l must be for relaxed eye position
(a) 4/3 (b) 5/3 (a) 32.75 (b) 327.5
(c) 5/4 (d) 6/5 (c) 0.3275 (d) None of the above
74. A lens of power + 2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens 81. The magnifying power of a compound microscope in terms
of power – 1 diopoter. The combination will behave like of the magnifying power of objective Mo and that of the
eyepiece Me is
(a) A divergent lens of focal length 50 cm
(b) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm Mo
(a) M (b) M o M e
e
(c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(d) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm (c) Mo + Me (d) Mo – Me
75. A lens of power + 2.0 D is placed in contact with another lens 82. Final image produced by the simple microscope is
of power – 1.0 D. The combination will behave like (a) real and erect (b) virtual and erect
(A) a converging lens of focal length 100 cm (c) real inverted (d) virtual and inverted
(B) a diverging lens of focal length 100 cm 83. The magnifying power of simple microscope can be increased
if we use an eyepiece of
(C) a converging lens of focal length 50 cm
(a) large focal length (b) smaller focal length
(D) a diverging lens of focal length 50 cm. (c) large diameter (d) smaller diameter
76. An object is placed at a distance of 10 cm from a co-axial 84. A convex lens of focal length 3 cm is used as a simple
combination of two lenses A and B in contact. The microscope by a person having distance of least distinct
combination forms a real image three times the size of the vision as 30 cm. What is the maximum value of magnifying
object. If lens B is concave with a focal length of 30 cm, power?
what is the nature and focal length of lens A ? (a) + 10 (b) + 11
(A) Convex, 12 cm (B) Concave, 12 cm
11
(C) Convex, 6 cm (D) Convex, 18 cm (c) + 9 (d)
10
Microscope 85. The final image produced in the compound microscope is
77. In a simple microscope, the distance of object from the lens (a) virtual and erect (b) real and erect
should be
(c) virtual and inverted (d) real and inverted
(a) more than the focal length of lens
Telescope
(b) less than the focal length of lens
(c) more than twice the focal length 86. The powers of the lenses of a telescope are 0.5 and 20
dioptres. Its magnifying power is
(d) more than focal length but less than twice the focal length
(a) 50 (b) 10
78. The magnifying power of simple microscope is
(c) 100 (d) 40
f D 87. The final image formed by an astronomical telescope is
(a) 1 (b) 1
D f (a) virtual and upright
f 1 D 1 (b) virtual and inverted
(c) (d) (c) real and upright
D f
(d) real and inverted
RAY OPTICS 51
Astronomical Telescope
92. The objective of a telescope has focal length 120 cm and
88. An astronomical telescope essentially consists of diameter 5 cm. The focal length of eyepiece is 2 cm. The
(a) two concave lenses magnifying power for an object at infinity is
(b) two convex lenses (a) 24 (b) 60
(c) one concave and one convex lens (c) 12 (d) 300
(d) two plano-concave lenses 93. The distance of the moon from earth is 3.8 105 km The
89. The resolving power of a telescope can be increased by eye is most sensitive to light of wavelength 5500 Å. The
(a) increasing the focal length of objective separation of two points on the moon that can be resolved
(b) increasing the aperture and diameter of objective by a 500 cm telescope will be
(c) decreasing the focal length of objective (a) 51 m (b) 60 m
(d) decreasing the aperture diameter of objective (c) 70 m (d) All the above
90. For the normal setting of a telescope 94. In a reflecting telescope, the focal length of the eyepiece is
5 cm. What should be the radius of curvature of the objective
(a) only the object is at infinity.
mirror to have magnifying power of 40 ?
(b) only the final image is at infinity.
(a) 1m (b) 2m
(c) both the object and the final image are at infinity.
(c) 4m (d) 8 m
(d) neither the object nor the final image has to be at infinity
91. The focal length of objective of an astronomical telescope is
1 m. If the magnifying power of telescope is 20, then what is
length of telescope for relaxed eye?
(a) 85 cm (b) 95 cm
(c) 105 cm (d) 115 cm
RAY OPTICS 52
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. A thin convex lens of focal length ‘f ’ is put on a plane 4. An observer looks at a distant tree of height 10 m with a
mirror as shown in the figure. When an object is kept at a telescope of magnifying power of 20. To the observer the
distance ‘a’ from the lens– mirror combination, its image is tree appears : (AIEEE 2016)
a
formed at a distance in front of the combination. The (a) 10 times nearer (b) 20 times taller
3
value of ‘a’ is : (2015 Online) (c) 20 times nearer (d) 10 times taller
5. Two stars are 10 light years away from the earth. They are
seen through a telescope of objective diameter 30 cm. The
wavelength of light is 600 nm. To see the stars just resolved
by the telescope, the minimum distance between them
should be (1 light year = 9.46 × 1015m) of the order of :
(2016 Online Set-2)
3 6
(a) 10 km 8
(b) 10 km
(a) 3f (b) f
2 (c) 1011 km (d) 1010 km
(c) f (d) 2 f 6. In an experiment for determination of refractive index of
2. On a hot summer night, the refractive index of air is smallest glass of a prism by i – , plot, it was found that a ray
near the ground and increase with height from the ground. incident at angle 35°, suffers a deviation of 40° and that it
When a light beam is directed horizontally, the Huygens’ emerges at angle 79°. In that case which of the following
principle leads us to conclude that as its travels, the light is closest to the maximum possible value of the refractive
beam : (AIEEE 2015) index? (AIEEE 2016)
(a) bends downwards
(a) 1.6 (b) 1.7
(b) bends upwards
(c) 1.8 (d) 1.5
(c) becomes narrower
7. A convex lens, of focal length 30 cm, a concave lens of
(d) goes horizontally without any deflection focal length 120 cm, and a plane mirror are arranged as
3. Monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism of angle shown. For an object kept at a distance of 60 cm from the
A. If the refractive index of the material of the prism is , a convex lens, the final image, formed by the combination,
ray, incident at an angle , on the face AB would get is a real image, at a distance of : (2016 Online Set-1)
transmitted through the face AC of the prism provided :
(AIEEE 2015)
1
1 1
(a) 60 cm from the convex lens
(a) cos sin A sin
(b) 60 cm from the concave lens
(c) 75 cm from the convex lens
1 1
1 (d) 70 cm from the concave lens
(b) cos sin A sin
8. To find the focal length of a convex mirror, a student records
the following data:
1
1 1
Object pin Convex Lens Convex Mirror Image Pin
(c) sin sin A sin
22.2 cm 32.2 cm 45.8 cm 71.2 cm
The focal length of the convex lens is f1 and that of mirror
1
1 1
is f2. Then taking index correction to be negligibly small, f1
(d) sin sin A sin and f2 are close to : (2016 Online Set-1)
RAY OPTICS 53
(a) f1 = 12.7 cm f2 = 7.8 cm 13. A particle is oscillating on the X-axis with an amplitude 2
(b) f1 = 7.8 cm f2 = 12.7 cm cm about the point x0 =10 cm, with a frequency . A
concave mirror of focal length 5 cm is placed at the origin
(c) f1 = 7.8 cm f2 = 25.4 cm
(see figure).
(d) f1 = 15.6 cm f2 = 25.4 cm
9. A hemispherical glass body of radius 10 cm and refractive
index 1.5 is silvered on its curved surface. A small air bubble
is 6 cm below the flat surface inside it along the axis. The
position of the image of the air bubble made by the mirror
is seen : (2016 Online Set-2)
Identify the correct statements. (2018 Online Set-1)
(A) The image executes periodic motion.
(B) The image executes non-periodic motion.
(C) The turning points of the image are asymmetric w.r.t.
the image of the point at x =10 cm.
(D) The distance between the turning points of the
(a) 14 cm below flat surface
100
(b) 30 cm below flat surface oscillation of the image is cm.
21
(c) 20 cm below flat surface
(a) (A), (D) (b) (A), (C), (D)
(d) 16 cm below flat surface
(c) (B), (D) (d) (B), (C)
10. In an experiment a convex lens of focal length 15 cm is
14. A ray of light is incident at an angle of 600 on one face of
placed coaxially on an optical bench in front of a convex
a prism of angle 300. The emergent ray of light makes an
mirror at a distance of 5 cm from it. It is found that an
angle of 300 with incident ray. The angle made by the
object and its image coincide, if the object is placed at a
emergent ray with second face of prism will be :
distance of 20 cm from the lens. The focal length of the
convex mirror is : (2017 Online Set-2) (2018 Online Set-3)
(a) 27.5 cm (b) 20.0 cm (a) 00 (b) 900
(c) 450 (d) 300
(c) 25.0 cm (d) 30.5 cm
15. A convergent doublet of separated lenses, corrected for
11. A diverging lens with magnitude of focal length 25 cm is
spherical aberration, has resultant focal length of 10 cm.
placed at a distance of 15 cm from a converging lens of
The separation between the two lenses is 2cm. The focal
magnitude of focal length 20 cm. A beam of parallel light
lengths of the component lenses are :
falls on the diverging lens. The final image formed is :
(2018 Online Set-2)
(2017)
(a) 10 cm, 12 cm (b) 12 cm, 14 cm
(a) real and at a distance of 6 cm from the convergent lens. (c) 16 cm, 18 cm (d) 18 cm, 20 cm
(b) real and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens. 16. A planoconvex lens becomes an optical system of 28 cm
(c) virtual and at a distance of 40 cm from convergent lens focal length when its plane surface is silvered and
(d) real and at a distance of 40 cm from the divergent lens. illuminated from left to right as shown in Fig-A. If the
same lens is instead silvered on the curved surface and
12. Let the refractive index of a denser medium with respect to
illuminated from other side as in Fig.B, it acts like an optical
a rarer medium be n12 and its critical angle be c . At an system of focal length 10 cm. The refractive index of the
angle of incidence A when light is travelling from denser material of lens is : (2018 Online Set-1)
medium to rarer medium, a part of the light is reflected and
the rest is refracted and the angle between reflected and
refracted rays is 90°. Angle A is given by :
(2017 Online Set-1)
1 1
(a) 1 (b) 1
cos (sin C ) tan (sin C )
(c) cos 1 (sin C ) (d) tan 1 (sin C ) (a) 1.50 (b) 1.55
(c) 1.75 (d) 1.51
RAY OPTICS 54
17. In figure, the optical fibre is l = 2 m long and has a diameter 21. A concave mirror for face viewing has focal length of 0.4
of d = 20 μm. If a ray of light is incident on one end of the m. The distance (in m) at which you hold the mirror from
fibre at angle 1 = 40°, the number of reflections it makes your face in order to see your image upright with a
magnification of 5 is:
before emerging from the other end is close to:(refractive (2019-04-09/Shift -1)
index of fibre is 1.31 and sin 40° = 0.64) 22. A convex lens of focal length 20 cm produces images of
the same magnification 2 when an object is kept at two
(2019-04-08/Shift -1)
distance x1 and x2 x1 x2 from the lens. The ratio of x1
and x2 is :
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(a) 2: 1 (b) 3: 1
(c) 5: 3 (d) 4: 3
23. A thin convex lens L (refractive index = 1.5) is placed on a
plane mirror M. When a pin is placed at A, such that OA =
18 cm, its real inverted image is formed at A itself, as shown
in figure. When a liquid of refractive index i , is put between
(a) 55000 (b) 66000
the lens and the mirror, the pin has to be moved to A’,
(c) 45000 (d) 57000 such that OA = 27 cm, to get its inverted real image at A’
18. The electric field in a region is given itself. The value of 1 , will be:
by E Ax B iˆ, where E is in NC–1 and x is in metres.
The values ofconstants are A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI
unit. If thepotential atx = 1 is V1 and that at x = –5 is V2,
then V1- V2
(2019-04-08/Shift -2)
(a) 320 V (b) –48 V (2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(c) 180 V (d) –520 V
4 3
19. A convex lens ( of focal length 20 cm) and a concavemirror, (a) (b)
3 2
having their principal axes along the same lines,are kept (c) 3 (d) 2
80 cm apart from each other. The concave mirroris to the 24. In moles of an ideal gas with constant volume heat
right of the convex lens. When an object is keptat a capacityCV undergo an isobaric expansion by certain
volume. Theratio of the work done in the process, to the
distance of 30 cm to the left of the convex lens, itsimage heat suppliedis:
remains at the same position even if the concavemirror is (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
removed. The maximum distance of the objectfor which nR
(a)
this concave mirror, by itself would produce avirtual image CV nR
would be : nR
(b)
(2019-04-08/Shift -2) CV nR
(a) 30 cm (b) 25 cm 4nR
(c)
(c) 10 cm (d) 20 cm CV nR
20. Calculate the limit of resolution of a telescope 4nR
(d)
objectivehaving a diameter of 200 cm, if it has to detect CV nR
light ofwavelength 500 nm coming from a star. 25. The graph shows how the magnification m produced by a
(2019-04-08/Shift -2) thin lens varies with image distance v. What is the focal
(a) 305 × 10-–9 radian (b) 610 × 10–9 radian length of the lens used?
(c) 152.5 × 10–9 radian (d) 457.5 × 10–9 radian
RAY OPTICS 55
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
Then must satisfy:
(2019-04-10/Shift -2)
1 1 1 22
b2 b2 c (a) sin (b) sin 1
(a) (b) 2 12
ac a
a b 1 22 1 1
(c) (d) (c) sin 1 (d) sin
c c 12 2
26. The value of numerical aperature of the objective lens of a 29. Consider a tank made of glass (refractive index 1.5) with a
O thick bottom. It is filled with a liquid of refractive index μ.
microscope is 1.25 . If light of wavelength 5000 A is used,
A student finds that, irrespective of what the incident
the minimum separation between two points, to be seen angle i (see figure) is for a beam of light entering the liquid,
as distinct, will be : the light reflected from the liquid glass interface is never
completely polarized. For this to happen, the minimum value
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) of μ is:
(a) 0.24 m (b) 0.38 m
(c) 0.12 m (d) 0.48 m
27. A concave mirror has radius of curvature of 40 cm.at the
bottom of a glass that has water filled up to 5 cm (see
figure). If a small particle is floating on the surface water,
its image as seen, from directly above the glass, is at a
distance d from the surface of water. The value of d is
close to : (Refractive index of water = 1.33) (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
5 3
(a) (b)
3 5
5 4
(c) (d)
3 3
30. A convex lens is put 10 cm from a light source and it
makes a sharp image on a screen, kept 10 cm from the lens.
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) Now a glass block (refractive index 1.5) of 1.5 cm thickness
is placed in contact with the light source. To get the sharp
(a) 6.7 cm (b) 13.4 cm image again, the screen is shifted by a distance d. Then d
(c) 8.8 cm (d) 11.7 cm is: (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
28. A transparent cube of side d, made of a material of (a) 1.1 cm away from the lens
refractive index 2 is immersed in a liquid of refractive (b) 0
index 1 1 2 . A ray is incident on the face AB at an (c) 0.55 cm towards the lens
angle (shown in the figure.). Total internal reflection (d) 0.55 cm away from the lens
takes place at point E on the face BC.
RAY OPTICS 56
31. Two plane mirrors are inclined to each other such that a (a)
ray of light incident on the first mirror (M1) and parallel to
the second mirror (M2) is finally reflected from the second
mirror (M1) parallel to the first mirror (M1). The angle
between the two mirrors will be:
(2019-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 45° (b) 60°
(c) 75° (d) 90°
(b)
32. A plano-convex lens of refractive index 1 and focal length
f1 is kept in contact with another plano-concave lens of
refractive index 2 and focal length f 2 . If the radius of
curvature of their spherical faces is R each and f1 2 f 2 ,
then 1 and 2 are related as:
(2019-01-10/Shift -1)
(a) 1 2 3 (b) 2 1 2 1 (c)
(c) 3 2 21 1 (d) 2 2 1 1
33. The eye can be regarded as a single refracting surface.
The radius of curvature of this surface is equal to that of
cornea (7.8 mm). This surface separates two media of
refractive indices 1 and 1.34. Calculate the distance from
(d)
the refracting surface at which a parallel beam of light will
come to focus.
(2019-01-10/Shift -2)
(a) 1 cm (b) 2 cm
(c) 4.0 cm (d) 3.1 cm
34. The variation of refractive index of a crown glass thin
prism with wavelength of the incident light is shown. 35. An object is at a distance of 20 m from a convex lens of
focal length 0.3 m. The lens forms an image of the object.
Which of the following graphs is the correct one, if Dm is If the object moves away from the lens at a speed of 5 m/
the angle of minimum deviation? s, the speed and direction of the image will be :
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
(a) 2.26 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(b) 0.92 × 10–3 m/s away from the lens
(c) 3.22 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens
(d) 1.16 × 10–3 m/s towards the lens
36. A monochromatic light is incident at a certain angle on
anequilateral triangular prism and suffers minimum
deviation.If the refractive index of the material of the prism
is 3 , then the angle of incidence is:
(2019-01-11/Shift -2)
(a) 90° (b) 30°
(c) 60° (d) 45°
RAY OPTICS 57
37. A point source of light, S is placed at a distance L in front (a) Image disappears (b) Magnified image
of the centre of plane mirror of width d which is hanging (c) Erect real image (d) No change
vertically on a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror 40. A plano-convex lens (focal length f2, refractive index 2 ,
along a line parallel to the mirror, at a distance 2L as shown radius of curvature R) fits exactly into a plano-concave
below. The distance over which the man can see the image lens (focal length f1, refractive index 1 , radius of curvature
of the light source in the mirror is: R) Their plane surfaces are parallel to each other. Then,
the focal length of the combination will be :
(2019-01-12/Shift -2)
R
(a) f1 f 2 (b)
2 1
2 f1 f 2
(c) f f (d) f1 f 2
1 2
(2019-01-12/Shift -1) 41. A spherical mirror is obtained as shown in the figure from
(a) d (b) 2d a hollow glass sphere. If an object is positioned in front of
the mirror, what will be the nature and magnification of the
d
(c) 3d (d) image of the object ? (Figure drawn as schematic and not
2
38. What is the position and nature of image formed by the to scale)
lens combination shown in figure? (f1, f2 are focal lengths) (2020-09-02/Shift -1)
(2019-01-12/Shift -1)
(a) 70 cm from point B at left; virtual
(a) Erect, virtual and unmagnified
(b) 40 cm from point B at Right; real
(b) Inverted, real and magnified
20
(c) cm from point B at Right; real (c) Erect, virtual and magnified
3
(d) Inverted, real and unmagnified
(d) 70 cm from point B at Right; real
42. A light ray enters a solid glass sphere of refractive index
39. Formation of real image using a biconvex lens is shown
3 at an angle of incidence 60º. The ray is both
below:
reflected and refracted at the farther surface of the sphere.
The angle (in degrees) between the reflected and refracted
rays at this surface is ………. .
(2020-09-02/Shift -2)
43. An observer can see through a small hole on the side of a
jar (radius 15 cm) at a point at height of 15 cm from the
bottom (see figure). The hole is at a height of 45 cm. When
If the whole set up is immersed in water without disturbing the jar is filled with a liquid up to a height of 30 cm the
same observer can see the edge at the bottom of the jar. If
the object and the screen positions, what will one observe
the refractive index of the liquid is N/100, where N is an
on the screen? integer, the value of N is ……….. .
(2019-01-12/Shift -2) (2020-09-03/Shift -1)
RAY OPTICS 58
(a)
(b)
44. Two light waves having the same wavelength in
vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first wave travels a
path L1 through a medium of refractive index n1 while the
second wave travels a path of length L2 through a medium
of refractive index n2. After this the phase difference
between the two waves is : (c)
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)
2 2 L1 L 2
(a) (n1L1 n 2 L 2 ) (b) n n
1 2
2 L 2 L1 2 (d)
(c) n n (d) (n 2 L1 n1L 2 )
1 2
45. When an object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from a
concave mirror, the image is formed at a distance of 10 cm
from the mirror. If the object is moved with a speed of 9
cms–1, the speed (in cms–1) with which image moves at that
instant is ………. .
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)
49. A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of
46. In a compound microscope, the magnified virtual image is
formed at a distance of 25 cm from the eye-piece. The focal length 1 cm and an eye piece of focal length 5 cm
focal length of its objective lens is 1 cm. If the magnification with a separation of 10 cm. The distance between an object
is 100 and the tube length of the microscope is 20 cm, then and the objection lens, at which the strain on the eye is
the focal length of the eye-piece lens (in cm) is_________. n
(2020-09-04/Shift -1) minimum is cm. The value of n is ………….. .
40
47. The distance between an object and a screen is 100 cm. A
(2020-09-05/Shift -1)
lens can produce real imageof the object on the screen for
50. A prism of angle A = 1º has a refractive index 1.5. A
two different positions between the screen and the
good estimate for the minimum angle of deviation (in
object.The distance between these two positions is 40
degrees) is close to N/10. Value of N is.
N (2020-09-05/Shift -2)
cm. If the power of the lens is close to D where N is 51. A point like object is placed at a distance of 1 m in front of
100
a convex lens of focal length 0.5 m. A plane mirror is placed
an integer, the value of N is _________. at a distance of 2 m behind the lens. The position and
(2020-09-04/Shift -2) nature of the final image formed by the system is:
48. For a concave lens of focal length f, the relation between (2020-09-06/Shift -1)
object and image distances u and v, respectively, from its (a) 1 m from the mirror, virtual
(b) 2.6 m from the mirror, virtual
pole can best be represented by (u = v is the reference line) :
(c) 1 m from the mirror, real
(2020-09-05/Shift -1)
(d) 2.6 m from the mirror, real
RAY OPTICS 59
52. A double convex lens has power P and same radii of 57. An object is gradually moving away from the focal point
curvature R of both the surfaces. The radius of curvature of a concave mirror along the axis of the mirror. The
graphical representation of the magnitude of linear
of a surface of a plano-convex lens made of the same
magnification (m) versus distance of the object from the
material with power 1.5 P is : mirror (x) is correctly given by(Graphs are drawn
(2020-09-06/Shift -2) schematically and are not to scale)
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
R 3R (a)
(a) (b)
3 2
R
(c) (d) 2R
2
53. If we need a magnification of 375 from a compound
microscope of tube length 150 mm and an objective of
focal length 5 mm, the focal length of the eye-piece should
be close to: (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(b)
(a) 22mm (b) 2mm
(c) 12mm (d) 33mm
54. dentify the correct labels of A, B and C in the following
graph from the options given below:
(c)
Root mean square speed (Vrms); most probable speed
(d)
(Vmp); average speed (Vav)
(2020-01-07/Shift -2)
(a) A = Vmp, B = Vav, C = Vrms
(b) A = Vmp, B = Vrms, C = Vav
(c) A = Vav, B = Vrms, C = Vmp
(d) A = Vrms, B = Vmp, C = Vav
55. The magnifying power of a telescope with tube length 60 58. A telescope of aperture diameter 5 m is used to observe
cm is 5. What is the focal length of its eyepiece? the moon from the earth.Distance between the moon and
(2020-01-08/Shift -1) earth is 4 × 105 km. The minimum distance betweentwo
points on the moon’s surface which can be resolved using
(a) 10 cm (b) 20 cm
this telescope is close to (Wavelength of light is 5500 Å)
(c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm (2020-01-09/Shift -1)
56. A point object in air is in front of the curved surface of a (a) 60 m
plano-convex lens. The radius of curvature of the curved (b) 20 m
(c) 600 m
surface is 30 cm and the refractive index of lens material is
(d) 200 m
1.5, then the focal length of the lens (in cm) is
(2020-01-08/Shift -1)
RAY OPTICS 60
59. A vessel of depth 2! is half filled with a liquid of refractive 60. There is a small source of light at some depth below the
index 2 in upper half andwith a liquid of refractive 4
surface of water (refractive index ) in a tank of large
index 2 2 in lower half. The liquids are immiscible. 3
Theapparent depth of inner surface of the bottom of the cross sectional surface area. Neglecting any reflection from
vessel will be the bottom and absorption by water, percentage of light
(2020-01-09/Shift -1) that emerges out of surface is (nearly):
[Use the fact that surface area of a spherical cap of heighth
3h 2 h
(a) (b) and radius of curvature ris 2 rh ]
4 2
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
h h (a) 17% (b) 34%
(c)
3 2
(d) 2
2 1 (c) 50% (d) 21%
RAY OPTICS 61
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. A point object is moving on the principal axis of a concave
mirror of focal length 24 cm towards the mirror. When it is (a) Smaller than f
at a distance of 60 cm from the mirror, its velocity is
9 cm/sec. What is the velocity of the image at that instant (b) Smaller than 2f
(a) 5 cm/sec towards the mirror (c) Larger than 2f
(b) 4 cm/sec towards the mirror (d) Larger than f
(c) 4 cm/sec away from the mirror 5. A cube of side 2 m is placed in front of a concave mirror of
focal length 1m with its face P at a distance of 3 m and
(d) 9 cm/sec away from the mirror face Q at a distance of 5 m from the mirror. The distance
2. As the position of an object (u) reflected from a concave between the images of face P and Q and height of images
mirror is varied, the position of the image (v) also varies. of P and Q are
By letting the u changes from 0 to + the graph between
v versus u will be
2m
v v P
2m
u u
(a) (b) Q 3m
v v
(a) 1 m, 0.5 m, 0.25 m (b) 0.5 m, 1 m, 0.25 m
u u (c) 0.5 m, 0.25 m, 1m (d) 0.25 m, 1m, 0.5 m
(c) (d) 6. A small piece of wire bent into an L shape with upright and
horizontal portions of equal lengths, is placed with the
horizontal portion along the axis of the concave mirror
3. If an object moves towards a plane mirror with a speed V whose radius of curvature is 10 cm. If the bend is 20 cm
at an angle to the perpendicular to the plane of the mirror, from the pole of the mirror, then the ratio of the lengths of
find the relative velocity between the object and the image the images of the upright and horizontal portions of the
wire is
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 3 : 1
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 2 : 1
7. A thin rod of length f/3 lies along the axis of a concave
mirror of focal length f. One end of its magnified image
touches an end of the rod. The length of the image is
1
(a) f (b) f
2
(a) V (b) 2V
1
(c) 2V cos (d) 2V sin (c) 2 f (d) f
4
4. The graph shows variation of v with change in u for a
mirror. Points plotted above the point P on the curve are 8. A short linear object of length lies along the axis of a
for values of v concave mirror of focal length f at a distance u from the
pole of the mirror. The size of the image is approximately
equal to
v
1/ 2 2
u f u f
(a) (b)
P f f
1/ 2 2
f f
45° u (c) (d)
u f u f
RAY OPTICS 62
9. The minimum distance between the object and its real 15. A fish rising vertically up towards the surface of water
image for concave mirror is with speed 3 ms–1 observes a bird diving vertically down
towards it with speed 9 ms–1. The actual velocity of bird is
(a) f (b) 2f
(c) 4f (d) Zero
10. A ray of light falls on the surface of a spherical glass paper y
weight making an angle with the normal and is refracted
in the medium at an angle . The angle of deviation of the
emergent ray from the direction of the incident ray
(a) ( – ) (b) 2 ( – ) (a) 4.5 ms–1 (b) 5. ms–1
(c) 3.0 ms–1 (d) 3.4 ms–1
(c) ( – )/2 (d) ( – )
16. The apparent depth of water in cylindrical water tank of
11. A rectangular block of glass is placed on a printed page diameter 2R cm is reducing at the rate of x cm/minute when
lying on a horizontal surface. Then the minimum value of water is being drained out at a constant rate. The amount
refractive index of glass for which the letters on the page of water drained in c.c. per minute is (n1 = refractive index
are not visible from any of the vertical faces of the block is of air, n2 = refractive index of water)
2 2
(a) x R n1/n2 (b) x R n2/n1
(a) Equal to 2 (b) More than 2 2
(c) 2 R n1/n2 (d) R x
(c) Less than 2 (d) > = < 2 17. The image of point P when viewed from top of the slabs will be
12. One face of a rectangular glass plate 6 cm thick is silvered.
An object held 8 cm in front of the first face, forms an 1.5 cm
image 12 cm behind the silvered face. The refractive index
of the glass is
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.8 1.5 cm 1.5 cm
(c) 1.2 (d) 1.6
13. When a light wave goes from air into water, the quantity 2 cm
that remains unchanged is its P
(a) 2.0 cm above P (b) 1.5 cm above P
(a) Speed (b) Amplitude
(c) 2.0 cm below P (d) 1 cm above P
(c) Frequency (d) Wavelength 18. An observer can see through a pin-hole the top end of a
thin rod of height h, placed as shown in the figure. The
14. Two transparent slabs have the same thickness as shown. beaker height is 3h and its radius h. When the beaker is
One is made of material A of refractive index 1.5. The other filled with a liquid up to a height 2h, he can see the lower
is made of two materials B and C with thickness in the end of the rod. Then the refractive index of the liquid is
ratio 1 : 2. The refractive index of C is 1.6. If a
monochromatic parallel beam passing through the slabs
has the same number of waves inside both, the refractive
index of B is
3h
t t/3 2t/3
h
2h
A B C
5 5
(a) (b)
2 2
(a) 1.1 (b) 1.2
(c) 1.3 (d) 1.4 3 3
(c) (d)
2 2
RAY OPTICS 63
19. An under water swimmer is at a depth of 12 m below the 25. A large glass slab ( = 5/3) of thickness 8 cm is placed over
surface of water. A bird is at a height of 18 m from the a point source of light on a plane surface. It is seen that
surface of water, directly above his eyes. For the swimmer light emerges out of the top surface of the slab from a
the bird appears to be at a distance from the surface of circular area of radius R cm. What is the value of R ?
water equal to (Refractive Index of water is 4/3)
26. What will be the location of the image ?
(a) 24 m (b) 12 m
(a) 30 cm, right of lens (b) 60 cm, right of lens
(c) 18 m (d) 9 m
(c) 70 cm, left of lens (d) 40 cm, left of lens
20. A concave mirror is placed at the bottom of an empty
27. Angle of glass prism is 60° and refractive index of the material
tank with face upwards and axis vertical. When sunlight
of the prism is 1.414, then what will be the angle of incidence,
falls normally on the mirror, it is focussed at distance of
so that ray should pass symmetrically through prism
4 (a) 38° 61’ (b) 35° 35’
32 cm from the mirror. If the tank filled with water
3 (c) 45° (d) 53° 8’
upto a height of 20 cm, then the sunlight will now get 28. Angle of a prism is 30° and its refractive index is 2 and
focussed at
one of the surface is silvered. At what angle of incidence,
(a) 16 cm above water level (b) 9 cm above water level a ray should be incident on one surface so that after
(c) 24 cm below water level (d) 9 cm below water level reflection from the silvered surface, it retraces its path
21. With respect to air critical angle in a medium for light of (a) 30° (b) 60°
red colour [1] is . Other facts remaining same, critical 1
angle for light of yellow colour [2] will be (c) 45° (d) sin 1.5
(a) (b) More than 29. A prism having an apex angle 4o and refraction index 1.5 is
located in front of a vertical plane mirror as shown in
1
(c) Less than (d) figure. Through what total angle is the ray deviated after
2 reflection from the mirror
22. If critical angle for a material to air is 30°, the refractive
index of the material will be 90° 4°
(a) 1.0 (b) 1.5
(c) 2.0 (d) 2.5
23. A ray of light travels from an optically denser to rarer (a) 176o (b) 4o
medium. The critical angle for the two media is C. The (c) 178o (d) 2o
maximum possible deviation of the ray will be
30. The refracting angle of prism is A and refractive index of
material of prism is cot A/2. The angle of minimum deviation is
(a) C (b) 2C
2 (a) 180° – 3A (b) 180° + 2A
(c) – 2C (d) – C (c) 90° – A (d) 180° – 2A
24. An optical fibre consists of core of 1 surrounded by a 31. A rod of glass ( = 1.5) and of square cross section is bent
cladding of 2 < 1. A beam of light enters from air at an into the shape shown in the figure. A parallel beam of light
angle with axis of fibre. The highest for which ray can falls on the plane flat surface A as shown in the figure. If d
be travelled through fibre is is the width of a side and R is the radius of circular arc then
for what maximum value of d/R light entering the glass slab
through surface A emerges from the glass through B
(a) cos 1 22 12 (b) sin 1 12 22
1
(a) 1.5 (b) 0.5
(c) tan 1 12 22 (d) sec 12 22
(c) 1.3 (d) none of these
RAY OPTICS 64
32. Shown in the figure here is a convergent lens placed inside 36. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
a cell filled with a liquid. The lens has focal length +20 cm transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of
when in air and its material has refractive index 1.50. If the two liquids L1 and L2 having refractive indices n1 and n2
liquid has refractive index 1.60, the focal length of the system is respectively (n2 > n1 > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel
beam of light if it is filled with
(a) Air and placed in air (b) Air and immersed in L1
(c) L1 and immersed in L2 (d) L2 and immersed in L1
37. A concave lens of glass, refractive index 1.5, has both
surfaces of same radius of curvature R. On immersion in a
medium of refractive index 1.75 it will behave as a
(a) Convergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(b) Convergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
(a) + 80 cm (b) – 80 cm (c) Divergent lens of focal length 3.5 R
(c) – 24 cm (d) – 100 cm (d) Divergent lens of focal length 3.0 R
33. If the central portion of a convex lens is wrapped in black 38. In initial setup before the activities which of the following
paper as shown in the figure statement is correct.
(a) Observer O1 will see a real image at 60 cm from the lens
but observer O2 will not be able to see it.
(b) Observer O2 will see a real image at 60 cm from the lens
but observer O1 will not be able to see it.
(c) Both the observers will see a real image at 60 cm from
lens irrespective the positions of O1 and O2.
(d) Both the observers may or may not be able to see the
(a) No image will be formed by the remaining portion of image at 60 cm from lens depending on the positions of O1
the lens
and O2.
(b) The full image will be formed but it will be less bright
39. After activity – I, for which observer the intensity of image
(c) The central portion of the image will be missing will be reduced to half.
(d) There will be two images each produced by one of the
(a) for O1 (b) for O2
exposed portions of the lens
(c) both for O1 & O2 (d) neither for O1 nor for O2
34. The focal length of a converging lens is measured for
violet, green and red colours. It is respectively fv, fg, fr. We 40. Consider the lens involved to be plano-convex lens
will find (instead of equiconvex lens) of refractive index n and radius
(a) fv = fr (b) fv > fr R in the given arrangement and then find its focal length.
(c) fv < fr (d) fg > fr R 2R
35. The relation between n1 and n2, if behaviour of light rays (a) 2n 1 (b) 2n 1
is as shown in figure is
R 2R
(c) n 1 (d) 2 2n 1
n1 n2 41. There is an equiconvex glass lens with radius of each
face as R and ag = 3/2 and aw = 4/3. If there is water in
object space and air in image space, then the focal length
is
Lens
(a) 2R (b) R
(a) n1 >> n2 (b) n2 > n1
(c) 3 R/2 (d) R2
(c) n1 > n2 (d) n1 = n2
RAY OPTICS 65
42. A convex lens is used to produce a real image of the object (a) A single convergent beam
shown in the following figure
(b) Two different convergent beams
(c) Two different divergent beams
1 2 (d) A convergent and a divergent beam
47. A convex lens of focal length 30 cm and a concave lens of
4 3
10 cm focal length are placed so as to have the same axis.
If a parallel beam of light falling on convex lens leaves
concave lens as a parallel beam, then the distance between
Then the real inverted image is
two lenses will be
(a) 40 cm (b) 30 cm
1 2 2 1
(c) 20 cm (d) 10 cm
(a) 4 3 (b) 3 4
48. A lens of power +2 diopters is placed in contact with a
lens of power –1 diopter. The combination will behave like
(a) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm
4 3 3 4
(b) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(c) 1 2 (d) 2 1 (c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(d) A convergent lens of focal length 200 cm
43. Two point light sources are 24 cm apart. Where should a
convex lens of focal length 9 cm be put in between them 49. If two +5 diopter lenses are mounted at some distance
from one source so that the images of both the sources apart, the equivalent power will always be negative if the
are formed at the same place distance is
(a) 6 cm (b) 9 cm (a) Greater then 40 cm (b) Equal to 40 cm
(c) 12 cm (d) 15 cm (c) Equal to 10 cm (d) Less then 10 cm
44. In case of reflection by a plane-mirror, which of the
50. A glass hemisphere of radius 0.04 m and R.I. of the material
following statements are not correct
1.6 is placed centrally over a cross mark on a paper (i) with
(a) It can never give real image
the flat face ; (ii) with the curved face in contact with the
(b) It can never give inverted image
paper. In each case the cross mark is viewed directly from
(c) It changes left into right
above. The position of the images will be
(d) It changes front into back
(a) (i) 0.04 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.025 m from the flat face
45. What will be the focal length if its curved surface is
mirrored? (b) (i) At the same position of the cross mark ; (ii) 0.025 m
below the flat face
R 2R
(a) (b) (c) (i) 0.025 m from the flat face; (ii) 0.04 m from the flat face
(d) For both (i) and (ii) 0.025 m from the highest point of
R
(c) 2R (d) the hemisphere
2
46. A double convex lens, made of a material of refractive 51. An air bubble in sphere having 4 cm diameter appears 1 cm
index 1, is placed inside two liquids or refractive indices from surface nearest to eye when looked along diameter. If
2 and 3, as shown. 2 > 1 > 3. A wide, parallel beam of ag = 1.5, the distance of bubble from refracting surface is
light is incident on the lens from the left. The lens will give
(a) 1.2 cm (b) 3.2 cm
rise to
(c) 2.8 cm (d) 1.6 cm
52. The lens system of the myopic eye is best described as
(a) producing too much convergence
(b) producing too little convergence
(c) producing too much divergence
(d) producing too little divergence
RAY OPTICS 66
53. After activity – I, which of the following observer will not 56. An image of a bright square is obtained on a screen with
be able to see the image of object, if before this activity the aid of a convergent lens. The distance between the
both were seeing the image. square and the lens is 40 cm. The area of the image is nine
(a) O1 (b) O2 times larger than that of the square. Select the correct
(c) both O1 & O2 (d) neither O1 nor O2 statement(s):
(a) Image is formed at a distance of 120 cm from the lens
Multiple Correct Option
(b) Image is formed at a distance of 360 cm from the lens
54. A glass prism is immersed in a hypothetical liquid. The
curves show in the refractive index n as a function of (c) Focal length of the lens is 30 cm
wavelength for glass and liquid are as shown in the (d) Focal length of the lens is 36 cm.
following figures. When a ray of white light is incident on
the prism parallel to the base 57. Mark the correct statement(s) out of the following :
(a) A plane mirror can from a real image
(b) Plane mirror can form an inverted image
(c) A plane mirror may reverse left and right
(d) A plane mirror may reverse up and down
58. Which of the following statements are correct ?
(a) A ray of light is incident on a plane mirror and gets
reflected. If the mirror is rotated through an angle , then
the reflected ray gets deviated through angle 2
(b) A ray of light gets reflected successively from two
(a) yellow ray travels without deviation mirrors which are mutually inclined. Angular deviation
(b) blue ray is deviated towards the vertex suffered by the ray does not depend upon angle of
(c) red ray is deviated towards the base incidence on first mirror
(d) there is no dispersion (c) A plane mirror cannot form real image of a real object
55. An object is placed in front of a converging lens at a (d) If an object approaches towards a plane mirror with
distance equal to twice the focal length f1 of the lens. On velcocity v, then the image approaches the object with
the other side of the lens is a concave mirror of focal length
velocity 2v
f2 separated from the lens by a distance 2 (f1 + f2). Light
from the object passes rightward through the lens, reflects 59. A light ray is going from one medium to another. Then,
from the mirror, passes leftwards through the lens, and (a) its wavelength may increase or decrease
forms a final image of the object
(b) its wavelength will decrease
(c) frequency and velocity both may change
(d) frequency remains the same
60. A man of height 170 cm wants to see his complete image in
a plane mirror (while standing). His eyes are at a height of
O 160 cm from the ground.
f2 (a) Minimum length of the mirror = 80 cm
f1
(b) Minimum length of the mirror = 85 cm
(c) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height 80 cm
(a) The distance between the lens and the final image is (d) Bottom of the mirror should be at a height 85 cm
equal to 2f1. 61. A real object is moving toward a fixed spherical mirror. The
(b) The distance between the lens and the final image is image
equal to 2 (f1 + f2).
(a) must move away from the mirror
(c) The final image is real, inverted and of same size as that
of the object. (b) may move away from the mirror
(d) The final image is real, erect and of same size as that of (c) may move toward the mirror if the mirror is concave
the object. (c) must move toward the mirror if the mirror is convex
RAY OPTICS 67
62. The object distance u, the image distance v and the 66. If two mirrors are inclined to each other at 90°, the image
magnification m in a lens follow certain linear relations. seen may be
These are
(a) One (b) Two
1 1 (c) Three (d) Four
(a) versus (b) m versus u
u v
67. A parallel beam of light is incident normally on the flat
(c) u versus v (d) m versus v
surface of a hemisphere of radius 6 cm and refractive index
63. The radius of curvature of the left and right surface of the 1.5, placed in air as shown in figure (i). Assume paraxial
concave lens are 10 cm and 15 cm respectively. ray approximation.
air
Glass
P P
6 cm
The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15 cm.
(a) equivalent focal length of the combination is –18 cm Figure (i) Figure (ii)
(b) equivalent focal length of the combination is +36 cm
(c) the system behaves like a concave mirror
(a) The rays are focussed at 12 cm from the point P to the
(d) the system behaves like a convex mirror
right, in the situation as shown in figure (i).
64. The distance between an electric lamp and a screen is d =
1 m. A convergent lens of focal length f = 21 cm is placed (b) The rays are focussed at 16 cm from the point P to the
between the lamp and the lens such that a sharp image of right, in the situation as shown in figure (i).
the lamp filament is formed on the screen. (c) If the rays are incident at the curved surface (figure (ii))
(a) The positions of the lens from the lamp for which sharp then these are focussed at distance 18 cm from point P to
images are formed on the screen are 35 cm and 65 cm the right.
(b) The positions of the lens from the lamp for which sharp (d) If the rays are incident at the curved surface (figure (ii))
images are formed on the screen are 30 cm and 70 cm then these are focussed at distance 14 cm from point P to
(c) Magnitude of the difference in magnification is 40/21 the right.
(d) The size of the lamp filament for which there are two 68. A biconvex thin lens of refractive index 2 = 1.4 has a radii
sharp images of 4.5 cm and 2 cm, is 3 cm. of curvature R1 = 20 cm and R2 = 60 cm, 1 = 1.5 and 3 =
65. Figure shows variation of magnification m (produced by a 1.2. Focal length are f1 and f2 in both the media
thin convex lens) and distance v of image from pole of the
lens. Which of the following statements are correct ?
R1 R2
(a) Focal length of the lens is equal to intercept on v–axis
(b) Focal length of the lens is equal to inverse of slope of (a) the lens behaves as a concave lens
the line
(b) f1 = f2
(c) Magnitude of intercept on m–axis is equal to unity
(c) f1 f2
(d) None of above.
(d) the lens behaves as a convex lens
RAY OPTICS 68
69. A ray of light is incident normally on one face of 30°– (a) A is P (b) A is 2P
60°– 90° prism of refractive index 5/3 immersed in water (c) B is P/2 (d) B is P/4
of refractive index 4/3 as shown in figure
Integer Type
73. A converging beam of light forms a sharp image on a
P screen. A lens is placed 10 cm from the screen in the path
of the beam. It was found that the screen has to be moved
8 cm further away to obtain the sharp image. Find the focal
30° length of the lens in mm.
74. A concave mirror gives a real image magnified 4 times.
When the object is moved 3 cm the magnification of the
–1
(a)\ The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin (5/8) real image is 3 times. Find the focal length of mirror.
5 75. The magnification of an object placed in front of a convex
(b) The exit angle 2 of the ray is sin
–1
4 3 lens is +2. The focal length of the lens is 2.0 m. Find the
(c) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive distance by which the object has to be moved to obtain a
5 magnification of –2 (in metres).
index of water is increased to by dissolving some 76. Refraction takes palce at a concave spherical boundary
2 3
substance separating glass and air medium. The refractive index of
the glass is 3/2. The radius of curvature of the refracting
(d) Total internal reflection at point P ceases if the refractive surface is R. For the image to be real the object distance
index of water is increased to 5/6 by dissolving some should be greater than IR, wher I is an integer. Find the
substance minimum value of I.
70. Which of the following can form diminished, virtual and 77. In a lake 2m deep, a measuring post of height 3m is fixed
erect image of your face ? vertically. For an angle of incidence of 45° of Sun’s
(a) Converging mirror (b) Diverging mirror radiations, find the length of the shadow of the post at the
bottom surface ? [w = 4/3] [in metre)
(c) Converging lens (d) Diverging lens
78. As isotropic glass slab of refractive index 1.5 is 30 cm
71. A fish, F in the pond is at a depth of 0.8 m from the water thick. The rear surface of the slab is polished. A point
surface and is moving vertically upwards with velocity source. S is placed at a distance of 20 cm from the front
2 m/s. At the same instant a bird B is at a height of 6 m from surface. Calculate the distance between the source and
the water surface and is moving downwards with velocity the image formed by reflection and refractions.
3 m/s. At this instant both are on the same vertical line as
shown in the figure. Which of the following statements Assertion Reason
are correct ? (A) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–II is
a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(B) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is True; Statement–2 is
NOT a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(C) Statement–I is True, Statement–II is False.
(D) Statement–I is False, Statement–II is True.
79. Statement–1 : Maximum possible angle of refraction in a
medium is critical angle.
(a) Height of B, observed by F (from itself) is equal to 5.30 m Statement–2 : The critical angle c (or ) depends upon
(b) Depth of F, observed by B (from itself) is equal to 6.60 m pair of medium, colour of light (or ) and temperature.
(c) Height of B, observed by F (from itself) is equal to 8.80 m (a) A (b) B
(d) None of these (c) C (d) D
80. Statement–1 : If both plane mirror and object are moved
72. A thin, symmetric double-convex lens of power P is cut
through a distance x, then the image moves through a
into three parts A, B and C as shown. The power of
distance 3x.
A
Statement–2 : When the object is fixed and plane mirror
will moved through a distance x. Then the image is also
move through the distance x.
B C (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
RAY OPTICS 69
81. Statement–1 : A virtual image can be photographed. 90. Statement-1 : The images formed by total internal
Statement–2 : Only real objects are photographed. reflections are much brighter than those formed by mirrors
(a) A (b) B of lenses.
(c) C (d) D Statement-2 : There is no loss of intensity in total internal
82. Statement–1 : All large telescopes use parabolic mirrors reflection.
rather than spherical mirrors. (a) A (b) B
Statement–2 : A parabolic mirror brings parallel rays (rays (c) C (d) D
parallel to its axis) to an exact focus at an point. 91. Statement-1 : There exist two angles of incidence for the
(a) A (b) B same magnitude of deviation (except minimum deviation)
(c) C (d) D by a prism kept in air.
83. Statement-1 : A fish inside a pond will see a person Statement-2 : In a prism kept in air, a ray is incident on the
standing outside taller than he actually is. first surface and emerges out of second surface. Now, if
Statement-2 : Light bends away from the normal as it enters another ray is incident on the second surface (of prism)
water from air. along the previous emergent ray it emergs along the
(a) A (b) B previous incident ray. This principle is called principle of
(c) C (d) D reversibility of light.
84. Statement-1 : Keeping a point object fixed, if a plane mirror (a) A (b) B
is moved, the image will also move. (c) C (d) D
Statement-2 : In case of a plane mirror, distance of object Match the Column
and its image is equal from any point on the mirror. 92. An extended object is moving in front of concave mirror
(a) A (b) B as shown in figure. On L.H.S. various velocity of object
(c) C (d) D and position is given. On R.H.S. some properties of image
85. Statement-1 : A convex lens of focal length f ( = 1.5) and its velocity is given.
behaves as a diverging lens when immersed in carbon di-
sulphied of higher refractive index ( = 1.65).
Statement-2 : The focal length of a lens does not depend
on the color of light used. +ve
(a) A (b) B x
(c) C (d) D
86. Statement–1 : When a concave mirror is held under water,
its focal length will increase. Column – I (Object) Column – II (Image)
Statement–2 : The focal length of a concave mirror is (A) +ve velocity and object is (P) +ve velocity
independent of the medium in which it is placed. between focus and
(a) A (b) B centre of curvature.
(c) C (d) D (B) –ve velocity and object is (Q) –ve velocity
87. Statement-1 : The critical angle in case of total internal between focus and pole
reflection depends on the pair of medium chosen. (C) –ve velocity and object is (R) size of image is
Statement-2 : The critical angle in case of total internal beyond centre of curvature increasing
reflection is independent of pair of medium chosen.
(a) A (b) B (D) –ve velocity and object is (S) size of image is
(c) C (d) D virtual decreasing
88. Statement-1 : For observing traffic at over back, we prefer 93. Four particles are moving with different velocities in front
to use a convex mirror. of stationary plane mirror (lying in y-z plane). At t = 0,
Statement-2 : A convex mirror has a large field of view
velocity of A is v A î , velocity of B is v B î 3 ĵ ,
than a plane mirror or concave mirror.
(a) A (b) B velocity of C is v C 5 î 6 ĵ , velocity of D is v D 3 î ĵ .
(c) C (d) D
89. Statement-1 : Although the surface of goggle lenses are Acceleration of particle A is a A 2 î ĵ and acceleration
curved, it does not have any power.
of particle C is a C 2 t ĵ . The particle B and D move with
Statement-2 : In case of goggle, both the curved surface
have equal radii of curvature and have centre of curvature uniform velocity (Assume no collision to take place till
on the same side. t = 2 seconds). All quantities are in S.I. units. Relative
(a) A (b) B velocity of image of object A with respect to object A is
(c) C (d) D
denoted by VA, A . Velocity of images relative to
RAY OPTICS 70
corresponding objects are given to Column – I and their 96. An object O (real) is placed at focus of an equi-biconvex
values are given in Column – II at t = 2 second. Match lens as shown. The refractive index of the lens is = 1.5
Column – I with corresponding values in Column – II. and the radius of curvature of either surface of lens is R.
A The lens is surrounded by air. In each statement of column
D
y B I, some changes are made to situation given above and
C information regarding final image formed as a result is given
in Column II. The distance between lens and object is
unchanged in statements of column I. Match the
Statements in column I with resulting image in column II.
x
Column – I Column – II
(A) VA, A (P) 2 î
(B) VB, B (Q) 6 î
(C) VC, C (R) 12 î 4 ĵ
(D) VD, D (S) 10 î Column I Column II
94. An object O is kept perpendicular to the principal axis of a (a) If the refractive index of (p) Final image is real
spherical mirror. Each situation (a, b, c and d) gives object
the lens is doubled (that
coordinate u in centimeter with sign, the type of mirror,
and then the distance (centimeters with sign) between the is made 2), then
focal point and the pole of the mirror. On the right side (b) If the radius of curvature (q) Final image is virtual
information, regarding the image is given. is doubled (that is, made
Correctly, match the situation on the left side with the
images described on the right side. 2R),
Situation u (c) If a glass slab of refractive (r) Final image becomes
Mirror Images index = 1.5 is introduced smaller in size in compari-
(a) –18 Concave, 12 (p) Real, erect, enlarged between the object and sion to size of image before
(b) –12 Concave, 18 (q) Virtual, erect, diminished
lens as shown, then the change was made
(c) –8 Convex, 10 (r) Real, inverted, enlarged
(d) –10 Convex, 8 (s) Virtual, erect, enlarged R R
95. A white light ray is incident on a glass prism, and it create
four refracted rays, A, B, C and D. Match the refracted O
rays with the colors given (1 and D are rays due to total
internal reflection) :
Slab
(d) If the left side of lens is (s) Final image is of same size
filled with a medium of as the object
refractive index = 1.5
as shown, then
Column-I (Ray) Columm-II (Colour) R R
(a) A (p) red Air
(b) B (q) green O
(c) C (r) yellow
(d) D (s) blue
RAY OPTICS 71
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
1. In a compound microscope, the intermediate image is 5. A rectangular glass slab ABCD of refractive index n1 is
(a) virtual, erect and magnified (IITJEE 2000) immersed in water of refractive index n2 (n1 > n2). A ray of
(b) real, erect and magnified light is incident at the surface AB of the slab as shown.
The maximum value of the angle of incidence max, such
(c) real, inverted and magnified that the ray comes out only from the other surface CD, is
(d) virtual, erect and reduced given by (IITJEE 2000)
2. A hollow double concave lens is made of very thin
transparent material. It can be filled with air or either of A D
two liquids L1 or L2 having refracting indices n1 and n2
respectively (n2 > n1 > 1). The lens will diverge a parallel n1 n2
beam of light if it is filled with (IITJEE 2000)
(a) air and placed in air (b) air and immersed in L1 B C
(c) L1 and immersed in L2 (d) L2 and immersed in L1
1 n 1 1 n 2
3. A diverging beam of light from a point source S having
(a) sin n cos sin n
divergence angle falls symmetrically on a glass slab as 2 1
shown. The angles of incidence of the two extreme rays
are equal. If the thickness of the glass slab is t and its 1 n 2
1
refractive index is n, then the divergence angle of the (b) sin n 1 cos sin
emergent beam is (IITJEE 2000) n 1
S 1 n
(c) sin 1
n2
i i 1 n
(d) sin 2
n1
n
6. A given ray of light suffers minimum deviation in an
t
equilateral prism P. Additional prisms Q and R of identical
shape and of the same material as P are now added as
shown in the figure. The ray will suffer (IITJEE 2001)
(a) zero (b)
–1 –1
(c) sin (1/n) (d) 2 sin (1/n) Q
4. A point source of light S, placed at a distance L in front of P R
the centre of a plane mirror of width d, hangs vertically on
a wall. A man walks in front of the mirror along a line parallel
to the mirror at a distance 2L from it as shown. The greatest (a) greater deviation (b) no deviation
distance over which he can see the image of the light
source in the mirror is (IITJEE 2000) (c) same deviation as before (d) total internal reflection
7. A ray of light passes through four transparent media with
refractive indices 1, 2, 3 and 4 as shown in the figure.
The surfaces of all media are parallel. If the emergent ray
CD is parallel to the incident ray AB, we must have
d S
(IITJEE 2001)
L
2L D
C
B
A
(a) d/2 (b) d
(c) 2d (d) 3d
RAY OPTICS 72
(a) 1 = 2 (b) 2 = 3 (a) 28 (b) 30 (IITJEE 2002)
(c) 3 = 4 (d) 4 = 1 (c) 32 (d) 34
8. An observer can see through a pin-hole the top end of a 11. The size of the image of an object, which is at infinity, as
thin rod of height h, placed as shown in the figure. The formed by a convex lens of focal length 30 cm is 2 cm. If a
beaker height is 3h and its radius h. When the beaker is concave lens of focal length 20 cm is placed between the
filled with a liquid up to a height 2h, he can see the lower convex lens and the image at a distance of 26 cm from the
end of the rod. Then the refractive index of the liquid is convex lens, calculate the new size of the image.
(IITJEE 2002) (IITJEE 2003)
(a) 1.25 cm (b) 2.5 cm
(c) 1.05 cm (d) 2 cm
12. A ray of light is incident at the glass-water interface at an
angle i, it emerges finally parallel to the surface of water,
then the value of g would be (IITJEE 2003)
3h
Air
h
r
2h
r
Water
5 5 Glass
(a) (b) i
2 2
3 3
(c) (d) (a) (4/3) sin i (b) 1/sin i
2 2
(c) 4/3 (d) 1
9. Which one of the following spherical lenses does not
exhibit dispersion ? The radii of curvature of the surfaces 13. White light is incident on the interface of glass and air as
of the lenses are as given in the diagrams (IITJEE 2002) shown in the figure. If green light is just totally internally
reflected then the emerging ray in air contains. (2004)
(a) R1 R2 (b) R
Air Green
Glass
White
(c) R R (d) R
(a) yellow, orange, red (b) violet, indigo, blue
10. Two plane mirrors A and B are aligned parallel to each (c) all colours (d) all colours except green
other, as shown in the figure. A light ray is incident at an 14. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism
angle 30° at a point just inside one end of A. The plane of placed on a horizontal table. For minimum deviation which
incidence coincides with the plane of the figure. The of the following is true ? (IITJEE 2004)
maximum number of times the ray undergoes reflections
(including the first one) before it emerges out is
2 3m Q R
B
S
P
0.2 m 30°
A
(a) PQ is horizontal (b) QR is horizontal
(c) RS is horizontal (d) Either PQ or RS is horizontal
RAY OPTICS 73
15. A point object is placed at the centre of a glass sphere of 20. A point object is placed at a distance of 20 cm from a thin
radius 6 cm and refractive index 1.5. The distance of the planoconvex lens of focal length 15 cm. The plane surface
virtual image from the surface of the sphere is of the lens is now silvered. The image created by the
(IITJEE 2004) system is at (IITJEE 2006)
(a) 2 cm (b) 4 cm
(c) 6 cm (d) 12 cm
16. A container is filled with water ( = 1.33) upto a height of
33.25 cm. A concave mirror is placed 15 cm above the water
level and the image of an object placed at the bottom is
formed 25 cm below the water level. The focal length of
the mirror is (IITJEE 2005) 20 cm
(a) 60 cm to the left of the system
(b) 60 cm to the right of the system
15cm
(c) 12 cm to the left of the system
(d) 12 cm to the right of the system
25 cm
21. A ray of light travelling in water is incident on its surface
33.25cm
open to air. The angle of incidence is , which is less than
I the critical angle. Then there will be (IITJEE 2007)
O (a) only a reflected ray and no refracted ray
(b) only a refracted ray and no reflected ray
(a) 10 cm (b) 15 cm (c) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle between
(c) 20 cm (d) 25 cm them would be less than 180° – 2
17. A convex lens is in contact with concave lens. The (d) a reflected ray and a refracted ray and the angle
magnitude of the ratio of their focal length is 3/2. Their between them would be greater than 180° – 2
equivalent focal length is 30 cm. What are their individual
focal lengths ? (IITJEE 2005) 22. In an experiment to determine the focal length (f) of a
concave mirror by the u-v method, a student places the
(a) –75, 50 (b) –10, 15
object pin A on the principal axis at a distance x from the
(c) 75, 50 (d) –15, 10 pole P. The student looks at the pin and its inverted image
18. The graph between object distance u and image distance from a distance keeping his/her eye in line with PA. When
v for a lens is given below. The focal length of the lens is the student shifts his/her eye towards left, the image appears
(IITJEE 2006) to the right of the object pin. Then (IITJEE 2007)
v (a) x < f (b) f < x < 2f
(c) x = 2f (d) x > 2f
23. Two beams of red and violet colours are made to pass
+11 separately through a prism (angle of the prism is 60°). In
the position of minimum deviation, the angle of refraction
+10
will be (IITJEE 2008)
45°
+9 u (a) 30° for both the colours
–9 –10 –11
(b) greater for the violet colour
(a) 5 0.1 (b) 5 0.05
(c) greater for the red colour
(c) 0.5 0.1 (d) 0.5 0.05
(d) equal but not 30° for both the colours
19. A biconvex lens of focal length f forms a circular image
of radius r of sun in focal plane. Then which option is 24. A light beam is travelling from Region I to Region IV (Refer
correct ? (IITJEE 2006) figure). The refractive index in Regions I, II, III and IV are
2
(a) r f n0 n0 n
2
(b) r f
2 n0, , and 0 , respectively. The angle of incidence
2 6 8
(c) If lower half part is convered by black sheet, then area of for which the beam just misses entering Region IV is
2
the image is equal to r /2 (IITJEE 2008)
(d) If f is doubled, intensity will increase
RAY OPTICS 74
1 ˆ
Region I Region II Region III Region IV 29. A ray of light travelling in the direction
2
i 3 ˆj is
incident on a plane mirror. After reflection, it travels along
n0 n0 n0
2 6 8 1 ˆ
n0 the direction
2
i 3 ˆj . The angle of incidence is : (2013)
(a) 30° (b) 45°
0 0.2 m 0.6 m
(c) 60° (d) 75°
1 3 1 1
30. A point source S is placed at the bottom of a transparent
(a) sin (b) sin block of height 10 mm and refractive index 2.72. It is
4 8 immersed in a lower refractive index liquid as shown in the
figure. It is found that the light emerging from the block to
1 1 1 1 the liquid forms a circular bright spot of diameter 11.54 mm
(c) sin (d) sin
4 3 on the top of the block. The refractive index of the liquid is
(IITJEE 2014)
25. A ball is dropped from a height of 20 m above the surface
of water in a lake. The refractive index of water is 4/3. A
fish inside the lake, in the line of fall of the ball, is looking
at the balls. At an instant, when the ball is 12.8 m above the
water surface, the fish sees the speed of ball as (2009)
–1 –1
(a) 9 ms (b) 12 ms
–1 –1
(c) 16 ms (d) 21.33 ms
(a) 1.21 (b) 1.30
26. A biconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is in front of a plane
mirror. The distance between the lens and the mirror is 10 (c) 1.36 (d) 1.42
cm. A small object is kept at a distance of 30 cm from the 31. Two identical glass rods S1 and S2 (refractive index = 1.5)
lens. The final image is (IITJEE 2010) have one convex end of radius of curvature 10 cm. They
(a) virtual and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror are placed with the curved surface at a distance d as shown
in the figure, with their axes (shown by the dashed line)
(b) real and at a distance of 16 cm from the mirror aligned. When a point source of light P is placed inside
(c) virtual and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror rod S1 on its axis at a distance of 50 cm from the curved
(d) real and at a distance of 20 cm from the mirror face, the light rays emanating from it are found to be
parallel to the axis inside S2. The distance d is (2015)
27. A light travelling in glass medium is incident on glass-air
interface at an angle of incidence . The reflected (R) and
transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of , are
plotted. The correct sketch is (IIT JEE 2011)
(a) 60 cm (b) 70 cm
(c) 80 cm (d) 90 cm
(a) (b) 32. A parallel beam of light is incident from air at an angle
on the side PQ of a right angled triangular prism of
refractive index n = 2 . Light undergoes total internal
reflection in the prism at the face PR when has a minimum
value of 45°. The angle of the prism is (IITJEE2016)
(c) (d)
28. The image of an object, formed by a plano-convex lens at a
distance of 8 m behind the lens, is real and is one-third the
size of the object. The wavelength of light inside the lens is
2/3 times the wavelength in free space. The radius of the
curved surface of the lens is : (IIT JEE 2013)
(a) 15° (b) 22.5°
(a) 1 m (b) 2 m
(c) 30° (d) 45°
(c) 3 m (d) 6 m
RAY OPTICS 75
33. A small object is placed 50 cm to the left of a thin convex Multiple Correct Option
lens of focal length 30 cm. A convex spherical mirror of
radius of curvature 100 cm is placed to the right of the 35. A student performed the experiment of determination of
lens at a distance of 50 cm. The mirror is tilted such that focal lenght of a concave mirror by u–v method using an
the axis of the mirror is at an angle = 30° to the axis of optical bench of length 1.5 m. The focal length of the mirror
the lens, as shown in the figure. used is 24 cm. The maximum error in the location of the
image can be 0.2 cm. The 5 sets of (u, v) values recorded
by the student (in cm) are (42, 56), (48, 48), (60, 40), (66, 33),
(78, 39). The data set(s) that cannot come from experiment
and is (are) incorrectly recorded, is (are) (IITJEE 2009)
(a) (42, 56) (b) (48, 48)
(c) (66, 33) (d) (78, 39)
36. A ray OP of monochromatic light is incident on the face
AB of prism ABCD near vertex B at an incident angle of
60° (see figure). If the refractive index of the material of the
prism is 3 , which of the following is(are) correct ?
(IIT 2010)
If the origin of the coordinate system is taken to be at the
centre of the lens, the coordinates (in cm) of the point (x, B
O
y) at which the images is formed are (IITJEE 2016) 60° C
(a) (125/3, 25/ 3 ) (b) (25, 25) P 135°
(c) (50 – 25, 25) (d) (25, 25 3 )
34. A wire is bent in the shape of a right angled triangle and 90° 75°
is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length f, as A D
shown in the figure. Which of the figures shown in the
four options qualitatively represent(s) the shape of the (a) The ray gets totally internally reflected at face CD
image of the bent wire ? (These figures are not to scale.) (b) The ray comes out through face AD
(c) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent
ray is 90°
(IIT JEE 2018) (d) The angle between the incident ray and the emergent
ray is 120°.
37. A transparent thin film of uniform thickness and refractive
index n1 = 1.4 is coated on the convex spherical surface of
radius R at one end of a long solid glass cylinder of
refractive index n2 = 1.5, as shown in the figure. Rays of
light parallel to the axis of the cylinder traversing through
the film from air to galss get focused at distance f1 from the
film, while rays of light traversing from glass to air get
focused at distance f2 from the film. Then (2014)
(a) | f1 | = 3 R (b) | f1 | = 2.8 R
(c) | f2 | = 2R (d) | f2 | = 1.4R
RAY OPTICS 76
41. For an isosceles prism of angles A and refractive index ,
38. For two structure namely S1 with n1 45 / 4 and n2 = 3/
it is found that the angle of minimum deviation m A.
2 and S2 with n1 = 8/5 and n2 = 7/5 and taking the refractive
index of water to be 4/3 and that of air to be 1, the correct Which of the following options is/are correct? (2017)
option(s) is (are). (IITJEE 2015) (a) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside the
(a) NA of S1 immersed in water is the same as that of S2 prism is parallel to the base of the prism.
16 (b) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and the
immersed in liquid of refractive index . refracting angle r1 at the first refracting surface are related
3 15
ii
6 by r1
(b) NA of S1 immersed in liquid of refractive index is 2
15
the same as that of S2 immersed in water. (c) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second surface
(c) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2 immersed will be tangential to the surface when the angle of
incidence at the first surface is
4
in liquid of refractive index .
15 A
i1 sin 1 sin A 4 cos 2 1 cos A
(d) NA of S1 placed in air is the same as that of S2 placed 2
in water.
(d) For this prism, the refractive index and the angle
39. A plano-convex lens is made of a material of refractive
index n. When a small object is placed 30 cm away in front 1
prism A are related as A cos1
of the curved surface of the lens, an image of double the 2 2
size of the object is produced. Due to reflection from the
convex surface of the lens, another faint image is observed 42. A thin convex lens is made of two materials with refractive
at a distance of 10 cm away from the lens. Which of the indices n1 and n2, as shown in figure. The radius of
following statement(s) is(are) true? (2016) curvature of the left and right spherical surfaces are equal.
(a) The refractive index of the lens is 2.5 f is the focal length of the lens when n1 = n2 = n. The focal
(b) The radius of curvature of the convex surface is 45 cm
length is f + f when n1 = n and n2 = n + n. Assuming n
(c) The faint image is erect and real
(n – 1) and (1 < n < 2), the correct statement(s) is/are
(d) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm
(2019/Shift -1)
40. A transparent slab of thickness d has a refractive index
n(z) that increases with z. Here z is the vertical distance
inside the slab, measured from the top. The slab is placed
between two media with uniform refractive indices n1 and
n2 (>n1), as shown in the figure. A ray of light is incident
with angle i from medium 1 and emerges in medium 2
with refraction angle f with a lateral displacement l.
n f
(a) If 0 then 0
n f
(b) For n = 1.5, n = 10–3 and f = 20cm, the value of | f |
will be 0.02 cm (round off to 2nd decimal place).
f n
(c)
f n
Which of the following statement(s) is (are) true?(2016)
f n
(a) l is dependent on n(z) (d) The relation between and remains unchanged
f n
(b) l is independent of n2
if both the convex surfaces are replaced by concave
(c) n1 sin i = (n2 – n1) sin f
surfaces of the same radius of curvature.
(d) n1 sin i = n2 sin f
RAY OPTICS 77
43. Three glass cylinders of equal height H=30 cm and same (a) Determine the angle of the flint glass prism.
refractive index n=1.5 are placed on a horizontal surface (b) Calculate the net dispersion of the combined system.
as shown in figure. CylinderI has a flat top, cylinder II has 46. A thin biconvex lens of refractive index 3/2 is placed on a
horizontal plane mirror as shown in the figure. The space
a convex top and cylinder III has a concave top. The radii
between the lens and the mirror is then filled with water of
of curvature of the two curved tops are same (R=3m). If refractive index 4/3. It is found that when a point object is
H1, H2 and H3 are the apparent depths of a point X on the placed 15 cm above the lens on its principal axis, the object
coincides with its own image. On repeating with another
bottom of the three cylinders, respectively, the correct
liquid, the object and the image again coincide at a distance
statement(s) is/are: 25 cm from the lens. Calculate the refractive index of the
(2019/Shift -2) liquid. (IITJEE 2001)
47. A prism of refracting angle 30° is coated with a thin film of
(1) H2> H1 transparent material of refractive index 2.2 on face AC of
(2) H3>H1 the prism. A light of wavelength 6600Å is incident on face
AB such that angle of incidence is 60°. Find
(3) 0.8 cm < (H2 - H1) < 0.9 cm
(IITJEE 2003)
(4) H2> H3
Integer Type A
44. A convex lens of focal length 15 cm and a concave mirror
of focal length 30 cm are kept with their optic axis PQ and 30°
60°
RS parallel but separated in vertical direction by 0.6 cm as
shown. The distance between the lens and mirror is 30 cm. 3
An upright object AB of height 1.2 cm is placed on the B
optic axis PQ of the lens at a distance of 20 cm from the C
lens. If A’ B’ is the image after refraction from the lens and
the reflection from the mirror, find the distance of A’ B’ (a) the angle of emergence and
from the pole of the mirror and obtain its magnification.
Also locate positions of A’ and B’ with respect to the optic (b) the minimum value of thickness of the coated film on
axis RS. (IITJEE 2000) the face AC for which the light emerging from the face has
maximum intensity. [Given refractive index of the material
of the prism is 3]
A
48. In the figure, light is incident on a thin lens as shown. The
P radius of curvature for both the surfaces is R. Determine
Q
0.6 cm B
S the focal length of this system. (IITJEE 2003)
R
30 cm 20 cm
45. The refractive indices of the crown glass for blue and red
light are 1.51 and 1.49 respectively and those of the flint
glass are 1.77 and 1.73 respectively. An isosceles prism of
angle 6° is made of crown glass. A beam of white light is
incident at a small angle on this prism. The other flint
glass isosceles prism is combined with the crown glass
prism such that there is no deviation of the incident light.
(IITJEE 2001)
RAY OPTICS 78
49. Figure shows an irregular block of material of refractive 53. Consider a concave mirror and a convex lens (refractive
index 2 . A ray of light strikes the face AB as shown in index = 1.5) of focal length 10 cm each, separated by a
distance of 50 cm in air (refractive index = 1) as shown in
the figure. After refraction it is incident on a spherical
the figure. An object is placed at a distance of 15 cm from
surface CD of radius of curvature 0.4 m and enters a medium
the mirror. Its erect image formed by this combination has
of refractive index 1.514 to meet PQ at E. Find the distance
magnification M1. When the set up is kept in a medium of
OE upto two places of decimal. (IITJEE 2004)
7
refractive index the magnification becomes M2. The
6
B C
M2
45° magnitude M is (IITJEE 2015)
O E 1
P Q
60°
A D
50. An object is approaching a thin convex lens of focal length
0.3 m with a speed of 0.01 m/s. Find the magnitudes of the
rates of change of position and lateral magnification of
image when the object is at a distance of 0.4 m from the
lens. (IITJEE 2004)
51. AB and CD are two slabs. The medium between the slabs
has refractive index 2. Find the minimum angle of incidence 54. The monochromatic beam of light is incident at 60° on
of Q, so that the ray is totally reflected by both the slabs. one face of an equilateral prims of refractive index n and
(IITJEE 2005) emerges from the opposite face making an angle (n) with
the normal (see the figure). For n = 3 the value of is
A Q B d
60° and m. The value of m is (IITJEE 2015)
dn
P
C D
52. A ray of light is incident on a prism ABC of refractive index
3 as shown in figure. (IITJEE 2005)
B D
55. A monochromatic light is travelling in a medium of
60° 60° refractive index n = 1.6. It enters a stack of glass layers
from the bottom side at an angle 30 . The interfaces
60°
of the glass layers are parallel to each other. The refractive
A C E indices of different glass layers are monotonically
decreasing as nm = n – mn, where nm is the refractive
(a) Find the angle of incidence for which the deviation of index of the mth slab and n 0.1 (see the figure). The
light ray by the prism ABC is minimum. ray is refracted out parallel to the interface between the
(b) By what angle the second identical prism must be (m – 1) the mth slabs from the right side of the stack. What
rotated, so that the final ray suffers net minimum is the value of m? (IITJEE 2017)
deviation.
RAY OPTICS 79
56. A planar structure of length L and width W is made of two
different optical media of refractive indices n1 = 1.5 and n2 =
1.44 as shown in figure. If L >> W, a ray entering from end
AB will emerge from end CD only if the total internal
reflection condition is met inside the structure. For L = 9.6
m, if the incident angle is varied, the maximum time taken 59. A large square container with thin transparent vertical walls
–9
by a ray to exit the plane CD is t × 10 s, where t is _____ . 4
8 and filled with water (refractive index ) is kept on a
[Speed of light c = 3 × 10 m/s] 3
(2019/Shift -1) horizontal table. A student holds a thin straight wire vertically
inside the water 12 cm from one of its corners, as shown
schematically in the figure. Looking at the wire from this
corner, another student sees two images of the wire, located
symmetrically on each side of the line of sight as shown.
The separation (in cm) between these images is … .
(2020/Shift -2)
57. An optical bench has 1.5 m long scale having four equal
divisions in each cm. While measuring the focal length of a
convex lens, the lens is kept at 75 cm mark of the scale and
the object pin is kept at 45 cm mark. The image of the object
pin on the other side of the lens overlaps with image pin
that is kept at 135 cm mark. In this experiment, the percentage
error in the measurement of the focal length of the lens is Assertion/Reason
____. 60. Statement–1 : The formula connecting u, v and f for a
spherical mirror is valid only for mirrors whose sizes are
(2019/Shift -2)
very small compared to their radii of curvature.
58. A perfectly reflecting mirror of mass M mounted on a spring
Statement–2: Laws of reflection are strictly valid for plane
constitutes a spring–mass system of angular frequency surfaces, but not for large spherical surfaces.
4M (IITJEE 2007)
such that = 1024 m-2 with h as Planck’s constant. N
h (a) If Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true ; Statement–2
–6
photons of wavelength = 8 × 10 mstrike the mirror is the correct explanation for Statement–1.
simultaneously at normal incidence such that the mirror gets (b) If Statement–1 is true, Statement–2 is true ; Statement–2
is not a correct explanation for Statement–1.
displaced by 1m. If the value of N is x × 1012, then the value
(c) If Statement–1 is true ; Statement–2 is false.
of x is _____. [Consider the spring as massless]
(d) If Statement–1 is false ; Statement–2 is true.
(2019/Shift -2)
RAY OPTICS 80
Match the Column
61. An optical component and an object S placed along its
optic axis are given in Column–I. The distance between the
object and the component can be varied. The properties (C) 2 = 3 (r)
of images are given in Column–II. Match all the properties
of images from Column–II with the appropriate
components given in Column–I. (IITJEE 2008)
Column – I Column – II
(D) 2 > 3 (s)
ll l l
l l l l l ll l l l l l l l l l
S
(A) (P) Real image
(t)
S
(B) (Q) Virtual image
63. A right angled prism of refractive index 1 is placed in a
rectangular block of refractive index 2, which is surrounded
by a medium of refractive index 3, as shown in the figure, A
ray of light ‘e’ enters the rectangular block at normal
S incidence. Depending upon the relationships between 1,
(C) (R) Magnified image 2 and 3, it takes one of the four possible paths ‘ef’, ‘eg’,
‘eh’, or ‘ei’.
S
(D) (S) Image at infinity
62. Two transparent media of refractive indices m1 and m3 have
a solid lens shaped transparent material of refractive index
m2 between them as shown in figures in Column-II. A ray
traversing these media is also shown in the figures. In
Column-I different relationships between m1, m2 and m3 Match the paths in List I with conditions of refractive indices
are given. Match them to the ray diagram shown in in List II and select the correct answer using the codes
Column-II. (2010) given below the lists. (IITJEE 2013)
Column-I Column-II List I List II
(P) e f 1. 1 2 2
(Q) e g 2. 2 > 1 and 2 > 3
(A) 1 < 2 (p) (R) e h 3. 1 = 2
(S) e i 4. 2 < 1 < 2 2 and 2 > 3
Codes
P Q R S
(a) 2 3 1 4
(B) 1 > 2 (q) (b) 1 2 4 3
(c) 4 1 2 3
(d) 2 3 4 1
RAY OPTICS 81
64. Four combinations of two thin lenses are given in List I. Fill In the blanks
The radius of curvature of all curved surfaces is r and the 65. Sunlight of intensity 1.3 kW m–2 is incident normally on a
refractive index of all the lenses is 1.5. Match lens thin convex lens of focal length 20 cm. Ignore the energy
combinations in List I with their focal length in List II and loss of light due to the lens and assume that the lens
select the correct answer using the code given below the aperture size is much smaller than its focal length. The
lists. (2014) average intensity of light, kW m–2, at a distance 22 cm
List I List II from the lens on the other side is _________.
(IIT JEE 2018)
P. 1. 2r
Q. 2. r/2
R. 3. –r
S. 4. r
(a) P -1, Q-2, R-3, S-4 (b) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1
(c) P-4, Q-1, R-2, S-3 (d) P-2, Q-1, R-3, S-4
RAY OPTICS 82
RAY OPTICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
02
WAVE OPTICS
Chapter 02
84
WAVE OPTICS
1. WAVEFRONT 1.4 Ray of light
A source of light sends out disturbance in all directions. An arrow drawn normal to the wavefront and pointing
in the direction of propagation of disturbance represents a
In a homogeneous medium, the disturbance reaches all those
ray of light. A ray of light is the path along which light travels.
particles of the medium in phase, which are located at the In figures (a,b,c) as shown above, thick arrows represent the
same distance from the source of light and hence at any instant, rays of light.
all such particles must be vibrating in phase with each other. Since the ray of light is normal to the wavefront, it is sometimes called
The locus of all the particles of medium, which at any instant as the wave normal.
are vibrating in the same phase, is called the wavefront.
Key points
Depending upon the shape of the source of light, wavefront The phase difference between any two points on a
can be of the following types : wavefront is zero.
Characterists of wavefront :
2. HUYGENS’S PRINCIPLE
1. Phase difference between particles on wavefront are
zero. Huygen’s principle is a geometrical construction, which is used
to determine the new position of a wavefront at a later time from
2. Normal to wavefront represent ray of light. its given position at any instant. In order words, the principle
3. In isotropic medium, a point source gives rise to spherical gives a method to know as to how light spreads out in the medium.
wavefront. Huygen’s principle is based on the following assumptions :
4. It always travels in forward direction 1. Each point on the given or primary wavefront acts as a source
of secondary wavelets, sending out disturbance in all directions
1.1 Spherical wavefront in a similar manner as the original source of light does.
A spherical wavefront is produced by a point source of light. It is 2. The new position of the wavefront at any instant (called
secondary wavefront) is the envelope of the secondary
because, the locus of all such points, which are equidistant from
wavelets at that instant.
the point source, is a sphere as shown in figure (a).
The above two assumptions are known as Huygen’s
principle or Huygens’construction.
A' A'' A A'
A
S
A'' a
S a
b b
(a) (b) (c) c c
d d
1.2 Cylindrical wavefront
When the source of light is linear in shape (such as a e
e
slit), a cylindrical wavefront is produced. It is because, all the B''
points, which are equidistant from the linear source, lie on the B
B' B'' B B'
surface of a cylinder as shown in figure (b).
Note :
1.3 Plane wavefront Phenomenon explained by these theory are :
A small part of a spherical or a cylindrical wavefront (1) Reflection
originating from a distant source will appear plane and hence (2) Refraction
it is called a plane wavefront as shown in figure (c). (3) Interference
(4) Polarisation
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 85
Key points 3.3 Resultant amplitude and intensity
Huygen’s principle is simply a geometrical construction
If suppose we have two waves y1 = a1 sin t & y2 = a2 sin
to find the position of wavefront at a later time.
(t + ); where a1, a2 = Individual amplitudes, = Phase
3. PRINCIPLE OF SUPER POSITION difference between the waves at an instant when they
are meeting at point. I1, I2 = Intensities of individual
When two or more than two waves superimpose over waves
each other at a common particle of the medium then the resultant Resultant amplitude : After superimposition of the
displacement (y) of the particle is equal to the vector sum of given waves resultant amplitude (or the amplitude of
the displacements (y1 and y2) produced by individual waves.
resultant wave) is given by A a 12 a 22 2a 1a 2 cos
i.e. y y1 y 2
3.1 Graphical view For the interfering waves y1 = a1 sin t and y2 = a2 cos
t, if phase difference between them is 90o. So resultant
Resultant amplitude A a 12 a 22
1
2
Resultant intensity : As we know intensity
y1 + y2 = y = y1+y2
(Amplitude)2 I1 ka 12 , I 2 ka 22 and I = kA2 (k is a
Waves are meeting at a point
in same phase proportionality constant). Hence from the formula of
resultant amplitude, we get the following formula of
resultant intensity I I1 I2 2 I1 I2 cos
Note :
2
(ii) (1) I max I1 I 2 , when 0
2
(2) I min I1 I 2 , when rad
3.2 Phase/Phase difference/Path difference/Time difference
(i) Phase : The argument of sine or cosine in the expression The term 2 I1 I 2 cos is called interference term. For
for displacement of a wave is defined as the phase. For incoherent interference this term is zero so resultant
displacement y = a sin t ; term t = phase or intensity I = I1 + I2.
instantaneous phase
3.4 Coherent sources
(ii) Phase difference () : The difference between the phases
of two waves at a point is called phase difference i.e. if The sources of light which emits continuous light waves
y1 = a1 sin t and y2 = a2 sin (t + ) so phase difference = of the same wavelength, same frequency and in same phase
(iii) Path difference (x) : The difference in path length’s of or having a constant phase difference are called coherent
two waves meeting at a point is called path difference sources. e.g : A laser light has high degree of cohernce.
4. INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT
between the waves at that point. Also x
2 When two waves of exactly same frequency (coming from
(iv) Time difference (T.D.) : Difference in time between the two coherent sources) travels in a medium, in the same
T direction simultaneously then due to their superposition,
waves meeting at a point is T.D. at some points intensity of light is maximum while at some
2
other points intensity is minimum. This phenomenon is
Important : called Interference of light. In general, iterference is the
effect after super position of coherent waves.
Phase differe path difference Time difference
2 T
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 86
4.1 Types of Interference
Constructive interference Destructive interference
(i) When the waves meet at point with same phase, (i) When the waves meet at point with opposite phase,
constructive interference is obtained at that point destructive interference is obtained at that point (i.e.
(i.e. maximum light) minimum light)
(ii) Phase difference between the waves at the point of (ii) = 180° or (2n – 1) ; n = 1,2, ....
observation 0 or 2n, n 0,1, 2,..... or (2n + 1) ; n = 0, 1,2, .....
(iii) Path difference between the waves at the point of
observation = n (i.e. integral multiple of ) (iii) 2n 1 (i.e. odd multiple of /2)
2
(iv) Resultant amplitude at the point of observation iv) Resultant amplitude at the point of observation will be
will be maximum minimum
A max a1 a 2 Amin = a1 – a2
If a1 = a 2 = a 0 Amax = 2a0 If a1 = a2 Amin = 0
(v) Resultant intensity at the point of observation (v) Resultant intensity at the point of observation will be
will be maximum minimum
I max I1 I 2 2 I1 I 2 I max I1 I 2
2
Imax I1 I2 2 I1 I 2 I max I1 I 2
2
If I1 I2 I0 Imax 4I0 If I1 = I2 = I0 Imin = 0
4.2 Resultant intensity due to two identical waves If two waves having equal intensity (I1 = I2 = I0) meets
For two coherent sources the resultant intensity is at two locations P and Q with path difference 1 and 2
respectively then the ratio of resultant intensity at point
given by I I1 I 2 2 I1I 2 cos
1
For identical source I1 = I2 = I0 cos 2 cos 2 1
I 2
2 P and Q will be P
IQ
I I0 I0 2 I0 I0 cos 4 I0 cos
2 cos 2 2 cos 2 2
2
2
[1 + cos 2 cos ]
2
5. YOUNG’S DOUBLE SLIT EXPERIMENT (YDSE)
Note:-
Monochromatic light (single wavelength) falls on two
In interference, redistribution of energy takes place in
narrow slits S1 and S2 which are very close together
the form of maxima and minima.
acts as two coherent sources, when waves coming from
I max I min two coherent sources (S1, S2) superimposes on each
Average intensity : I av I1 I 2 a 12 a 22
2 other, an interference pattern is obtained on the screen.
In YDSE alternate bright and dark bands are obtained
Ratio of maximum and minimum intensities :
on the screen. These bands are called fringes.
2 2
Imax I1 I 2 I / I2 1 d = Distance between slits
Imin I1 I 2 I / I 1
2 D = Distance between slits and screen
2 2
a a a / a 1 = Wavelength of monochromatic light emitted from
1 2 1 2 source
a1 a 2 a1 / a 2 1
I max
1
I1 a I
also 1 min
I 2 a 2 I max
1
I
min
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 87
Note :- If the slits are vertical, the path difference (x) is
Screen d sin , so as increases, also increases. But if slits
4 Dark
3 Bright are horizontal path difference is d cos , so as
3 Dark
2 Bright increases, x decreases.
2 Dark
S1 1 Bright
1 Dark P
S d Central bright fringe
1 Dark (or central maxima
S2 1 Bright S1
2 Dark
2 Bright
3 Dark
3 Bright d C
4 Dark M
D S2 .. for vertical slits
(1) Central fringe is always bright, because at central
D
position = 0° or = 0
(2) The fringe pattern obtained due to a slit is more bright P
than that due to a point source.
(3) If the slit widths are unequal, the minima will not be C ....for horizontal slits
co mplete dark. Fo r very large width unifo rm S1 S2
d
illumination occurs.
(4) If one slit is illuminated with red light and the other slit 5.2 More about fringes
is illuminated with blue light, no interference pattern is (i) All fringes are of equal width. Width of each fringe is
observed on the screen.
D
(5) If the two coherent sources consist of object and it’s and angular fringe width
d d
reflected image, the central fringe is dark instead of
bright one. (ii) If the whole YDSE set up is taken in another medium then
changes so changes
5.1 Path difference
a 3
Path difference between the interfering waves meeting e.g. in water w w a a
w w 4
yd
at a point P on the screen is given by x d sin
D 1
(iii) Fringe width i.e. with increase in separation between
where x is the position of point P from central maxima. d
P
the sources, decreases.
(iv) Position of n th bright fringe from central maxima
S1 y n D
xn n ; n = 0, 1, 2, ....
d
d
M
C (v) Position of n th dark fringe from central maxima
S2
xn
2n 1D 2n 1 ; n = 1, 2, 3....
Screen 2d 2
D
(vi) In YDSE, if n1 fringes are visible in a field of view with
For maxima at P : x n; light of wavelength 1, while n2 with light of wavelength
where n = 0, 1, 2, ……. 2 in the same field, then n11 = n22 .
2n 1 (vii) When waves from two slits interfere in space, shape of
and For minima at P : x ;
2 frings is hyperbolic with foci as s1 and s 2 .
where n = 1, 2, ……. (viii) If an additional phase difference of is created in one of
the wave then the central fringe becomes dark.
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 88
5.3 Shifting of fringe pattern in YDSE
If a transparent thin film of mica or glass is put in the Air
path of one of the waves, then the whole fringe pattern
gets shifted.
Air
If film is put in the path of upper wave, fringe pattern Soap bubble in air
shifts upward and if film is placed in the path of lower
wave, pattern shift downward. 6.1 Thin films
t In thin films interference takes place between the waves
P
reflected from it’s two surfaces and waves refracted through it.
S1
d C
M
S2
Screen
D
D
Fringe shift = 1 t 1 t
d
Interference in reflected Interference in transmitted
Additional path difference = ( – 1)t
light light
2
Phase difference 1 t Condition of constructive Condition of constructive
interference (maximum interference (maximum
If shift is equivalent to n fringes then n
1 t intensity) intensity)
Where n is the no. of fringes shifted. Hence, thiickness 2 t cos r 2n 1 2 t cos r 2n
2 2
n For normal incidence r = 0 For normal incidence
of film introduced if n is known is t
1
so 2t 2n 1 2t = n
Shift is independent of the order of fringe (i.e. 2
shift of zero order maxima = shift of nth order maxima.
Condition of destructive Condition of destructive
Shift is independent of wavelength. interference interference
(minimum intensity) (minimum intensity)
6. ILLUSTRATIONS OF INTERFERENCE
2 t cos r 2n 2 t cos r 2n 1
Interference effects are commonly observed in thin films when 2 2
their thickness is comparable to wavelength of incident light (If it For normal incidence 2t = n For normal incidence
is too thin as compared to wavelength of light it appears dark and
if it is too thick, this will result in uniform illumination of film). Thin 2t = (2n ± 1)
2
layer of oil on water surface and soap bubbles shows various
colours in white light due to interference of waves reflected from Note:-
the two surfaces of the film.
The Thickness of the film for interference in visible light
Air is of the order of 10,000 Å.
Oil
Uses of interference effect :
(1) To determine wavelength of light, refractive index of
transparent sheet.
Oil film on water surface
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 89
(2) To test flatness of plane surfaces.
Shadow
(3) To design optical filters that allows a narrow band of
wavelength to pass through it.
Light
7. DOPPLER’S EFFECT IN LIGHT
The phenomenon of apparent change in frequency (or
wavelength) of the light due to relative motion between the source Aperture
of light and the observer is called Doppler’s effect.
According to special theory of relativity
Light
v' 1 v / c
v 1 v2 / c2 Shadow
If v = actual frequency, v’ =Apparent frequency, v = speed of
source w.r.t stationary observer, c = speed of light
Obstacle
Source of light moves Source of light moves
towards the stationary away from the stationary
observer (v << c) observer (v << c) 8.1 Types of diffraction
(i) Apparent frequency (i) Apparent frequency The diffraction phenomenon is divided into two types
v v
v 1 and v 1 and Fresnel diffraction Fraunhofer diffraction
c c
Apparent wavelength Apparent wavelength (i) If either source or screen (i) In this case both source
or both are at finite distances and screen are effectively
v v from the diffracting device at infinite distance from
1 1
c c (obstacle or aperture), the the diffracting device.
diffraction is called Fresnel
(ii) Doppler’s shift : Apparent (ii) Doppler’s shift : Apparent
type.
wavelength < actual wavelength > actual
(ii) Common examples : (ii) Common examples :
wavelength, So spectrum of wavelength, So spectrum Diffraction at a straight edge Diffraction at single slit,
the radiation from the source of the radiation from the narrow wire or small opaque double slit and diffraction
of light shifts towards the source of light shifts disc etc. grating.
violet end of spectrum. This towards the red end of
is called violet shift in
Doppler’s spectrum. This is called S
v Source Source
shift, . red shift in Doppler’s shift Screen
at
c Screen
Slit Slit
v (iii) Wave is spherical/cylindrical (iii) Wave front is plane and is
.
c easier to observe
8. DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT
It is the phenomenon of bending of light around the corners
of an obstacle/aperture of the size of the wavelength of light. 8.2 Diffraction of light at a single slit
In case of diffraction at a single slit, we get a central bright
band with alternate bright (maxima) and dark (minima) bands
of decreasing intensity as shown
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 90
8.3 Comparison between interference and diffraction
P Interference Diffraction
x
Results due to the superposition Results due to the super-
S1 of waves from two coherent position of wavelets from
source. different parts of same
d wave front. (single coherent
source)
S2
All fringes are of same width All secondary fringes are of
Screen
D
D same width but the central
d
Slit
maximum is of double the
width
l D
0 2 2
d
All fringes are of same intensity Intensity decreases as the
order of maximum increases.
O
Intensity of all minimum may be Intensity of minima is not
zero. Positions of n th maxima zero. Positions of n th
2 D
(i) Width of central maxima 0 and angular width and minima secondary maxima and
d minima
2 nD , D
X n Bright X n Bright 2n 1 ,
d d d
(ii) Minima occurs at a point on either side of the central D nD
X n Dark 2n 1 X n Dark
maxima, such that the path difference between the d d
waves from the two ends of the aperture is given by
= n; where n = 1, 2, 3 ..... Path difference for n th maxima for n th secondary maxima
i.e. d sin = n;
= n 2n 1
2
n
sin
d Path difference for n th minima Path difference for n th
(iii) The secondary maxima occurs, where the path = (2n – 1) minima = n
difference between the waves from the two ends of the
8.4 Diffraction and optical instruments
aperture is given by 2n 1 ; where n = 1, 2, 3 ..... The objective lens of optical instrument like telescope
2
or microscope etc. acts like a circular aperture. Due to
diffraction of light at a circular aperture, a converging lens
i.e. d sin 2n 1 cannot form a point image of an object rather it produces a
2
brighter disc known as Airy disc surrounded by alternate dark
2n 1 and bright concentric rings.
sin
2d
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 91
By Rayleigh’s criterion
(iii) Light can be polarised by transmitting through certain
1.22 crystals such as tourmaline or polaroids.
The angular half width of Airy disc = (where
D
9. 3 Polarization by Scattering
D = aperture of lens)
When a beam of white light is passed through a medium
Note:- containing particles whose size is of the order of
The lateral width of the image f (where f = focal wavelength of light, then the beam gets scattered.
length of the lens) When the scattred light is seen in a direction
Diffraction of light limits the ability of optical perpendicular to the direction of incidence, it is found
instruments to form clear images of objects when they to be plane polarized (as detected by the analyser).
are close to each other. The phenomenon is called polarization by scattering.
9. POLARISATION OF LIGHT
Light propagates as transverse EM waves. The
magnitude of electric field is much larger as compared
to magnitude of magnetic field. We generally prefer to
describe light as electric field oscillations.
Note : Transeverse nature of light is demonstrated by
polarisation
9.1 Unpolarised light
The light having electric field oscillations in all
directions in the plane perpendicular to the direction
9.4 Polarization of Light by Reflection
of propagation is called Unpolarised light. The
oscillation may be resolved into horizontal and vertical When unpolarized light is reflected from a surface, the
component. reflected light may be completely polarised, partially
polarized or unpolarized. This would depend on the
angle of incidence.
The angle of incidence at which the reflected light is
completely plane polarized is called polarizing angle or
Direction of
propagation
Brewster’s angle. (ip)
9.2 Polarised light
The light having oscillations only in one plane is called
Polarised or plane polarised light.
(i) The plane in which oscillation occurs in the polarised light
The angle of polarisation is related with refractive index
is called plane of oscillation.
is tan i p
(ii) The plane perpendicular to the plane of oscillation is called
plane of polarisation.
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 92
9.5 Polaroids
It is a device used to produce the plane polarised light. It Intensity = I0
is based on the principle of selective absorption and is A
P Amplitude = A0
more effective than the tourmaline crystal.
or
It is a thin film of ultramicroscopic crystals of quinine
idosulphate with their optic axis parallel to each other.
I1
Polaroid Intensity = I
Amplitude = A
Plane polarised light
(i) Polaroids allow the light oscillations parallel to the I = I0 cos2 and A 2 A 20 cos 2 A = A0 cos
transmission axis pass through them. If = 0°, I = I0, A = A0,
(ii) The crystal or polaroid on which unpolarised light is
If = 45°, I =I0/2, A A 0 / 2
incident is called polariser. Crystal or polaroid on which
polarised light is incident is called analyser. If = 90°, I = 0, A = 0
(ii) If Ii = Intensity of unpolarised light.
P A
Ii
So I 0 i.e. if an unpolarised light is converted into
2
plane polarised light (say by passing it through a
polaroid or a Nicol-prism), its intensity becomes half
Ordinary light Polarised light Polarised light
Ii
Transmission axes of the polariser and analyser are parallel to each and I cos 2
other, so whole of the polarised light passes through analyser 2
Note:-
P A
Percentage of polarisation
I max I min 100
No light
I max I min
Ordinary light Polarised light 9.7 Brewster’s law
Transmission axis of the analyser is perpendicular to the
polariser, hence no light passes through the analyser
Brewster discovered that when a beam of unpolarised
light is reflected from a transparent medium (refractive index =
Note:- ), the reflected light is completely plane polarised at a certain
angle of incidence (called the angle of polarisation p).
When unpolarised light is incident on the polariser, the
intensity of the transmitted polarised light is half the Also = tan p Brewster’s law
intensity of unpolarised light. (i) For i < p or i > p
(iii) Main uses of polaroids are in wind shields of automobiles,
Unpolarised Plane polarised
sun glassess etc. They reduce head light glare of cares light light
and improve colour contrast in old paintings. They are
also used in three dimensional motion pictures and in optical
stress analysis.
9.6 Malus law Partial
polarised
This law states that the intensity of the polarised light light
transmitted through the analyser varies as the square
Polarisation by reflection
of the cosine of the angle between the plane of
transmission of the analyser and the plane of the
polariser.
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 93
Both reflected and refracted rays becomes partially 11.1 Resolving power of Microscope
polarised
2 sin
(ii) For glass P 57 , for water P 53 R. P. of microscope
10. VALIDITY OF RAY-OPTICS
When a parallel beam of light travels upto distances as
large as few metres it broadens by diffraction of light
travels.
10.1 Fresnel Distance
Fresnel distance is the minimum distance a beam of
light can travel before its deviation from straight line
path becomes significant/noticeable. Resolving power of microscope is the inverse of distance
between two objects that can be just resolved
a2
ZF . here , a is aperture size 11.2 Resolving power of Telescope
Since wavelength of light is very small, deviation is 1 D
R.P. of telescope
very small and light can be assumed as travelling in a d 1.22
straight line.
where D is aperture of telescope.
Hence we can ignore broadening of beam by diffraction
upto distances as large as a few meters, i.e., we can
assume that light travels along straight lines.
Hence Ray optics can be taken as a limiting case of
waveoptics.
11. RESOLVING POWER
When two point objects are close to each other their
images of diffraction patterns are also close and overlap Too close objects such as binary stars, subtend very small
each other. angles on the telescope. To resolve them we need very
large apertuses. we use Rayligh’s criterion to determine
The minimum distance between two objects which can the resolving power of telescope as obtained above.
be seen seperately by the optical instrument is called
limit of resolution of the instrument.
1
Resolving Power (R.P.) =
Limit of Revolution
SCAN CODE
WAVE OPTICS
WAVE OPTICS 94
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
'
Laser light of wavelength 630 nm incident on a pair of slits n
produces an interference pattern in which bright fringes
are separated by 8.1 mm. A second light produces an D '
New fringe width, ' ...(2)
interference pattern in which the fringes are separated by d
7.2 mm. Calculate the wavelength of the second light.
Dividing (2) by (1), we get
d
Sol. Fringe width for same D and d ' ' / n 1
d
n
1 1 2 7.2 mm
2 1 × 630 nm = 560 nm
2 2 8.1mm '
1 n
Here = 2.0 mm
Example - 2
2.0
The distance between two slits in Young’s interference ' mm = 1.5 mm
1.33
experiment is 0.03 cm. The fourth bright fringe is obtained
at a distance of 1 cm from central fringe on a screen placed Example - 4
at a distance of 1.5 m from slits. Calculate the wavelength
In Young’s double slit experiment, using light of wavelength
of light used.
400 m, interference fringes of width ‘X’ are obtained. The
nD wavelength of light is increased to 600 nm and the
Sol. The distance of nth bright from central fringe is, y n separation between the slits is halved. If one wants the
d
observed fringe width on the screen to be same in the two
yn .d cases, find the ratio of the distance between the screen
wavelength
nD and the plane of interfering sources with the two
–2 –2 arrangements.
Here yn = 1cm = 1 × 10 m, d = 0.03 cm = 0.03 × 10 m,
D = 1.5 m and n = 4 D11 D
Sol. X or X ' 2 2
d1 d2
110 0.03 10 30 10
2 2 7
–7
= 5 × 10 m
D11 D2 2
4 1.5 6 Given X = X’
d1 d2
Example - 3
D2 1 d 2
In Young’s experiment, the width of fringes obtained with .
light of wavelength 6000 Å is 2.0 mm. What will be the D1 2 d1
fringe width if the entire apparatus is immersed in a liquid d1 d 1
of refractive index 1.33. Given 1 = 400 nm, 2 = 600 nm, d2 = 2
2 d1 2
D
Sol. Fringe width ...(1)
d D 2 400 nm 1 1
D1 600 nm 2 3
When apparatus is immersed in liquid, the wavelength of
light changes while D and d remain unchanged. If ’ is
1
wavelength of light in liquid, then That is, new distance of screen from sources should be
3
of its initial value.
WAVE OPTICS 95
Example - 5
1 1.0 450 109 –3
Find the ratio of intensities at two points on a screen in y '2 2 m = 4.5 × 10 m = 4.5 mm
2 0.15 103
Young’s double slit experiment when waves from the two
slits have a path difference of (i) 0 and (ii) . (b) When screen is moved away from the slits, D increases so
4
D
2 2
fringe width increases.
Sol. Intensity I a a 2a1a 2 cos
1 2
d
Let a1 = a2 = a (say), then Example - 7
2 2 2 2
I = a + a + 2a cos = 2a (1 + cos ) A slit of width ‘a’ is illuminated by light of wavelength,
700 nm. What will be the value of slit width ‘a’ when
I1 1 cos 1 (a) first minimum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?
I 2 1 cos 2
(b) first maximum falls at an angle of diffraction 30° ?
When path difference is 0, phase difference 1 = 0
Sol. (a) For first minimum, sin 1
a
When path difference is ,
4
a
2 sin 1
phase difference 2
4 2 –7
Here = 700 nm = 7.00 × 10 m, 1 = 30°
I1 1 cos 0 1 1 2 7.00 107 7.00 107
a 14 107
I2 1 cos 1 1 sin 30 0.5
2 –6
= 1.4 ×10 m
Example - 6
3
(b) For first maximum sin '1
In Young’s double slit experiment, the two slits 0.15 mm 2a
apart are illuminated by monochromatic light of wavelength
450 nm. The screen is 1.0 m away from the slits. 3 3 7.00 107
a –6
= 2.1 × 10 m
(a) Find the distance of second (i) bright fringe (ii) dark 2sin '1 2 sin 30
fringe, from the central maximum. Example - 8
(b) How will the fringe pattern change if the screen is moved A parallel beam of light of wavelength 600 nm is incident
away from the slits. normally on a slit of width ‘a’. If the distance between the
–3 slit and the screen is 0.8 m and the distance of 2nd order
Sol. (a) Given d = 0.15 mm = 0.15 × 10 m
maximum from the centre of the screen is 1.5 mm, calculate
–9
= 450 nm = 450 × 10 m the width of the slit.
D = 1.0 m –9 –7
Sol. Given = 600 nm = 600 × 10 m = 6.0 × 10 m, D = 0.8 m,
(i) Distance of second bright maximum from central maximum –3
y2 = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 10 m, n = 2, a = ?
n D th
Position of n maximum in diffraction of a single slit
(n = 2) (from relation yn = )
d
1 D 1 D
yn n a n
2D 2 1.0 450 109 –3
2 a 2 yn
y2 m = 6 × 10 = 6 mm
d 0.15 103
1 6.0 107 0.8
(ii) Distance of second dark fringe from central maximum (n Substituting given values a 2
2 1.5 103
1 D
= 2) [from relation yn = n ] 5
2 d –4 –3
× 4.0 × 0.8 × 10 m = 0.8 × 10 m = 0.8 mm
2
WAVE OPTICS 96
Example - 9 Sol. If ordinary unpolarised light of intensity I’0 is incident on
Light of wavelength 500 nm falls, from a distant source, on first polaroid (A, say)
a slit 0.50 mm wide. Find the distance between the two dark
I '0
bands, on either side of the central bright band of the Intensity of light transmitted from first polaroid is I0
2
diffraction pattern observed, on a screen placed 2 m from
the slits. Given angle between transmission axes of two polaroids A
and B is initially 90°.
Sol. The distance between two dark bands on either side of
central bright bands is equal to the total width of bright According to Malus law, intensity of light transmitted from
band. second polaroid (B, say) is
2 2
I = I0 cos I = I0 cos 90° = 0
2D
0 When one more polaroid (C say) is placed between A and B
a
making an angle of 45° with the transmission axis of either
–9
Given D = 2 m, = 500 nm = 500 × 10 m, of polaroids, then intensity of light transmitted from A is
–3
a = 0.50 mm = 0.50 × 10 m I '0
IA I0
2
2 2 500 109 –3
0 = 4 × 10 m = 4 mm Intensity of light transmitted from C is
0.50 103
2 I0
Example - 10 IC = I0 cos 45° = .
2
10. Light of wavelength 550 nm. is incident as parallel beam on
a slit of width 0.1 mm. Find the angular width and the linear Intensity of light transmitted from polaroid B is
width of the principal maximum in the resulting diffraction
2 I0 1 I0
pattern on a screen kept at a distance of 1.1 m from the slit. IB = IC cos 45° =
2 2 4
Which of these widths would not change if the screen
were moved to a distance of 2.2 m from the slit ? This means that the intensity becomes one-fourth of
intensity of light is transmitted from first polaroid.
–7
Sol. Given = 550 nm = 5.50 × 10 m, On further rotating the polaroid C such that if angle between
–3
a = 0.1 mm = 0.1 × 10 m, D = 1.1 m their transmission axes increases, the intensity decreases
and if angle decreases, the intensity increases.
Angular half width of principal maximum,
Example - 12
5.50 107
a 0.1 103 Two polaroids are set in crossed positions. A third polaroid
–3
is placed between the two making an angle with the pass
= 5.5 × 10 radians axis of the first polaroid. Write the expression of the intensity
–3
Total angular width = 2 = 11 × 10 radians of light transmitted from the second polaroid. In what
Total linear width, orientations will the transmitted intensity be (i) minimum
and (ii) maximum ?
= D × 2
–3
= 1.1 × 11 × 10 m = 12.1 mm Sol. Let intensity of incident unpolarised light on first polaroid
The angular width would not change. be I0.
Example - 11
Two polaroids are placed 90° to each other and the
transmitted intensity is zero. What happens when one more
polaroid is placed between these two bisecting the angle
between them. Take intensity of unpolarised light I0. Intensity of light transmitted through 1st polaroid P1 is
How will the intensity of transmitted light vary on further
I0
rotating the third polaroid ? I1 .
2
WAVE OPTICS 97
Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P3 is
2 2 2
'
I 3 3
I 2 0 cos 2
2
2
Angle between pass-axis of P3 and P2 is (90 – ) I ' 4I0 cos 2 (since K = 4I0)
3
Intensity of light transmitted through polaroid P2 is
2
I 2 1 1
I3 I 2 cos 90 0 cos 2 sin 2
2 K cos 2 K K
3 2 4
2
I0 I Example - 15
2 cos sin 2 0 sin 2
8 8
A beam of light consisting of two wavelength 650 nm and
(i) Intensity I3 will be minimum, when 520 nm, is used to obtain interference fringes in a Young’s
sin 2 = 0 = 0° double slit experiment on a screen 1 m away. The separation
between the slits is 1 mm.
(ii) Intensity I3 will be maximum when
(a) Find the distance of the third bright fringe on the screen
sin 2 = 1 = 45°
from the central maximum for wavelength 650 nm.
(b) What is the least distance from the central maximum
Example - 13
when the bright fringes due to both the wavelength
In Young’s double slit experiment the slits are separated by coincide ?
0.28 mm and the screen is placed 1.4 m away. The distance of
4th bright fringe is measured to be 1.2 cm from center of screen. –9
Sol. Given 1 = 650 nm = 650 × 10 m,
Determine the wavelength of light used in this experiment. –9
2 = 520 nm = 520 × 10 m
–3
Sol. Given d = 0.28 mm = 0.28 × 10 m, D = 1.4 m
9
nD1 3 1 650 10
nD (i) yn y3
Position of n th bright fringe from central fringe is y n d 1103
d
–3
–2 = 1.95 × 10 m = 1.95 mm
Here n = 4, y4 = 1.2 cm = 1.2 × 10 m
(ii) For least distance of coincidence of fringes, there must be a
.d 1.2 10
2
y4 m 0.28 103 m difference of 1 in order of 1 and 2.
Wavelength
4D 4 1.4 As 1 > 2. n1 < n2
–7
= 6 × 10 m = 600 nm If n1 = n, then n2 = n + 1
Example - 14 y n 1
y n 1
2
In Young’s double slit experiment using monochromatic
light of wavelength , the intensity at a point on the screen nD1 n 1 D 2
where path difference is is K units. What is the intensity d d
2 520 nm
of light at a point where path difference is . n1 n 1 2 n
3 1 2 650 520 nm
Sol. Intensity I = 4I0 cos 520
2 or n 4
130
When path difference is , phase difference is 2
2
I = 4I0 cos = 4I0 = K (given) nD1 4 1 650 109
Least distance y min
d 1 103
–3
When path difference, , the phase difference = 2.6 × 10 m = 2.6 mm
3
WAVE OPTICS 98
Example - 16 Sol. Condition for minima for diffraction pattern due to a single
slit is
In Young’s double slit experiment the angular width of a
fringe is found to be 0.2° on a screen placed 1 m away. The a sin = n
wavelength of light used is 600 nm. What will be the angular For first order minimum n = 1
width of the fringe if the entire experimental apparatus is
For small value of ,
4
immersed in water ? Take refractive index of water as . y
3 sin = tan =
D
y
Sol. Angular fringe width ...(1) a
D d D
If apparatus is dipped in water, changes
D 500 10 9 1 5
a 104 0.2 mm
3 y 2.5 10 3 2.5
w
nw 4 / 3 4
Example - 19
w
New angular fringe width w ...(2) What is Brewsters angle for air to glass transition ?
d
Refractive index of glass = 1.5.
w w 3 / 4 3
Sol. From Brewster’s law
4
n = tan ip
3 3 Given n = 1.5
w 0.2 0.15
4 4 –1 1
Brewster’s angle, ip = tan n = tan (1.5) = 56.3°
Example - 17
Example - 20
In a Young’s double slit experiment the angular width of a
Estimate the distance for which ray optics is good
fringe formed on a distant screen is 0.1°. The wavelength
approximation for an aperture of 4 mm and wavelength
of light used is 6000 Å. What is the spacing between the
400 nm.
slits ?
Sol. The distance for which ray optics is good approximation for
Sol. Angular fringe width an aperture ‘a’ and wavelength ‘’ is called the Fresnel
d
distance, given by
a2
Spacing between slits, d zF
–3 –7
0.1 Given a = 4 mm = 4 × 10 m, = 400 nm = 4 × 10 m
–7
Here = 6000 Å = 6 × 10 m, = 0.1° = radians
180
3 2
zF
4 10 40 m
6 107 6 107 180 4 107
d –4
= 3.44 × 10 m
0.1 /180 0.1 3.14
Example - 21
Example - 18 State two conditions for substained interference of light.
A parallel beam of light of wavelength 500 nm falls on a Also write the expression for the fringe width.
narrow slit and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed
on a screen 1 metre away. It is observed that the first Sol. Condition for sustained interference :
minimum is at a distance of 2.5 mm from the centre of the
screen, find the width of the slit. (i) The interfering sources must be conherent i.e. source must
have same frequency and constant initial phase.
WAVE OPTICS 99
(ii) Interfering waves must have same or nearly same amplitude, Example - 24
so that there may be contrast between maxima and minima.
In Young’s double slit experiment, explain with reason in
each case, how the interference pattern changes, when
D
Fringe width
d (i) width of the slits is doubled
where D = distance between slits and screen. (ii) separation between the slits is increased and
d = separation between slits. (iii) screen is moved away from the plane of slits.
= wavelength of light
D
Sol. The fringe width
Example - 22 d
Two identical coherent waves, each of intensity I, are
(i) When the width of the slit is doubled; the intensity of
producing an interference pattern. Find the value of the
interfering waves becomes four times, intensity of maxima
resultant intensity at a point of
becomes 16 times i.e., fringes become brighter.
(i) constructive interference and
(ii) destructive interference. 1
(ii) , when separation between the slits is increased the
d
Sol. Resultant intensity at any point having a phase difference fringe width decreases i.e., fringes come closer.
is
(iii) D, when screen is moved away from the plane of the
I R I1 I 2 2 I1 I 2 cos slits, the fringe width increases i.e., fringes become farther
away.
Here, I1 = I2 = I
Example - 25
I R I I 2 I.I cos 2I 2I cos
How will the angular separation and visibility of fringes in
(i) At a point of constructive interference Young’s double slit experiment change when
(i) screen is moved away from the plane of the slits.
= 2n (n = 0, 1, 2, ...)
(ii) width of source slit is increased.
cos = 1
Imax = 2I + 2I = 4I B
Sol. (i) Angular separation
D d
(ii) At a point of destructive interference = (2n – 1) It is independent of D; therefore, angular separation remains
2 unchanged if screen is moved away from the slits. But the
cos = 0 D
actual separation between fringes increases, so
d
Imin = 2I – 2I = 0 visibility of fringes increases.
Example - 23
(ii) When width of source slit is increased, then the angular
Two slits in Young’s double slit experiment are illuminated fringe width remains unchanged but fringes becomes less
by two different lamps emitting light of same wavelength. and less sharp; so visibility of fringes decreases. If the
Will you observe the interference pattern ? Justify your
s
answer. condition is not satisfied, the interference pattern
S d
disappears.
Sol. The light emitted by different lamps is not coherent, so the
waves emitted by source can not produce interference.
Where s is the size of the source and S is the distance of
source from the plane of the two slits.
WAVE OPTICS 100
Example - 26 and lower surface of soap film. The colours of soap solution
Give reasons for the following observations made from earth observed are those which satisfy the condition of maxima in
(i) Sun is visible before the actual sunrise. reflected lihgt.
(ii) Sun looks reddish at sunset. Example - 29
Sol. (i) Sun is visible before the actual sunrise due to refraction. How is a wavefront different from a ray ? Draw the
With increase of height the density and refractive index of geometrical shape of the wavefronts when (i) light diverges
air decreases. When sun is below the horizon, the light rays from a point source, and (ii) light emerges out of a convex
suffer refraction and appear to come from position above lens when a point source is placed at its focus.
the horizon; so sun is visible before the actual sun rise; the Sol. (a) A wavefront is a locus of particles of the medium that
difference of time is about 2 minutes. vibrating in the same phase. It is also a collection of a very
(ii) Sun looks reddish at sun set : At sunset or sunrise, the large number of rays. A ray is always perpendicular to the
sun-light travels a longer path through the atmosphere and surface of a wavefront giving the direction of propagation
reaches directly the observer’s eye. Since the violet and the of a wavefront.
blue light are strongly scattered, the light reaching the
observer is deprived of the violet and blue colour due to (i)
scattering and so it appears red. That is why sunsets and
sunrises appear red. Ray
Example - 27
Draw the diffraction pattern due to a single slit by a Point
monochromatic light. Source Spherical
wave point
Sol.
(ii)
V
F
V
V
V
V
Source at focus Refracted
plane
Convex lens wave front
Incident spherical
wave front
Example - 28
Example - 30
What are coherent sources of light ? Why are coherent Give two differences between interference and diffraction
sources required to produce interference of light ? Give of light. OR
an example of interference in every day life.
State three characteristic features which distinguish
Sol. Coherent Sources : Two sources giving light waves of same between interference pattern due to two coherently
frequency and constant initial phase are called coherent illuminated sources as compared to that observed in a
sources. difrraction pattern due to a single slit.
Necessity of coherent sources to produce interference of Sol. Difference between interference and diffraction
light : Intensity at any point in the region of superposition Interference Diffraction
is I a12 a 22 2a1a 2 cos (i) It is due to the super- (i) It is due to the superposition
If the interfering source are not coherent, then the phase position of two waves of secondary wavelets
difference at any point in the region of superposition will go coming from two originating from different
on changing with time. Then we shall get time-averaged coherent sources. parts of the same wavefront.
(ii) The width of the inter- (ii) The width of the diffraction
intensity which is equal to I a12 a 22 i.e., sum of intensities
ference bands is equal. bands is not the same
of individual waves. This means that there will be no
(iii) The intensity of all (iii) The intensity of central
modifications in intensity in the region of superposition
maxima (fringes) is maximum is maximum and
and hence no interference will be observed.
Example of Interference in Daily Life : The bubbles of same. goes on decreasing rapidly
colourless soap solution appear coloured in while light. This with increase of order of
is due to interference of white light rays reflected from upper maxima.
WAVE OPTICS 101
Example - 31
What are optical fibres ? Mention their one practical
application.
Sol. Optical Fibre : An optical fibre is a device based on total
internal refrection by which a light signal may be
transmitted from one place to another with a negligible
loss of energy. It is a very long and thin pipe of quartz
–4
(n = 1.7) of thickness nearly 10 m coated all around with
a material of refractive index 1.5. A large number of such Example - 33
fibres held together form a light pipe and are used for How can you distinguish between an unpolarised light
communication of light signals. When a light ray is incident and a linearly polarised light beam using a polaroid ?
on one end at a small angle of incidence, it suffers refraction Sol. Distinction of unpolarised and polarised light : The given
from air to quartz and strikes the quartz-coating interface at beam of light is made incident on a polaroid and the polaroid
an angle more than the critical angle and so suffers total is rotated slowly and the intensity of transmitted beam is
internal reflection and strikes the opposite face again at an observed.
angle greater than critical angle and so again suffers total
If there is no variation in intensity, the given beam is
internal reflection. Thus the ray with the fibre suffers multiple
unpolarised, but if the intensity varies with minimum
total internal reflections and finally strikes the other end at
intensity zero, twice in a rotation, the given beam is linearly
an angle less than critical angle for quartz-air interface and
polarised.
emerges in air.
Example - 34
An unpolarised light is incident on the boundary between
two transparent media. State the condition when the
reflected wave is totally plane polarised. Find out the
expression for the angle of incidence in this case.
Sol. Condition : The reflected ray is totally plane polarised,
when reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each
other.
As there is no loss of energy in total internal reflection, the
light signal is transmitted by this device without any
appreciable loss of energy.
Application : Optical fibre is used to transmit light signal at
distant places.
Example - 32
In a single slit experiment, the width of the slit is made
BOC = 90°
double the original width. How does this affect the size
and intensity of the central diffraction band ? Draw a plot If ip is angle of incidence r’ is angle of reflection and r the
of the intensity distribution. angle of refraction, then according to law of reflection
ip = r’
Sol. The angular size of central diffraction band, 2 2 1 . and from figure r’ + 90° + r = 180°
a a
ip + r = 90° ...(i)
When width of slit ‘a’ is doubled, the size of central band
becomes half and the intensity is doubled. r = (90° – ip) ...(ii)
From Snell’s law, refractive index of second medium relative
to first medium (air) say.
WAVE OPTICS 102
sin i p sin i p sin i p
n
sin r sin 90 i p cos i p
n = tan ip
–1
Angle of incidence, ip = tan (n).
Example - 35
If a light beam shows no intensity variation when
transmitted through a polaroid which is rotated; does it
mean that the light is unpolarised ? Explain briefly.
Sol. Yes, the incident light (of intenisty I0) is unpolarised.
Reason : If incident light is unpolarised, the intensity of
transmitted light through a polaroid is always I0/2, which is
constant.
But if incident light is polarised, the intensity variation I = I0
2
cos , necessarily takes place.
WAVE OPTICS 103
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Wave Optics Basics 8. Which one of the following phenomena is not explained by
1. In Huygen’s wave theory, the loucs of all points in the Huygen’s construction of wavefront?
same state of vibration is called (a) Refraction (b) Reflection
(a) a half period zone (b) a wavefront (c) Diffraction (d) Origin of spectra
(a) a ray (d) vibrator
Young’s double slit experiment,
2. Light waves are 9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
(a) electromagnetic waves in nature the slits is halved and the distance between the slits and the
(b) cosmic rays screen is doubled. The fringe width is:–
(A) Unchanged (B) Halved
(c) infra–red rays
(C) Doubled (D) Quadrupled
(d) invisible in atmosphere 10. In Young’s double slit experiment using sodium light (l =
3. The electromagnetic waves travel with a velocity 5898Å), 92 fringes are seen. If given colour (l = 5461Å) is
used, how many fringes will be seen
(a) equal to the velocity of sound
(A) 62 (B) 67
(b) equal to the velocity of light (C) 85 (D) 99
(c) less than the velocity of light 11. In Young’s experiment, one slit is covered with a blue filter
(d) greater than the velocity of light and the other (slit) with a yellow filter. Then the interference
pattern:–
4. Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory of light suggests that (A) Will be blue (B) Will be yellow
the light consists of oscillation of (C) Will be green (D) Will not be formed
(a) magnetic vector alone 12. In Young’s double slit experiment, a mica sheet of thickness
(b) electric vector alone t and refractive index m is introduced in the path of ray from
the first source S1. By how much distance the fringe pattern
(c) electric and magnetic vectors perpendicular to eath
will be displaced
other
d D
(d) parallel electric and magnetic vectors. (A) 1 t (B) 1 t
D d
5. In Huygen’s wave theory, the loucs of all points in the
same state of vibration is called d D
(C) 1 D (D) 1
d
(a) a half period zone (b) a wavefront
13. In Young’s double slit experiment, if monochromatic light is
(a) a ray (d) vibrator
replaced by white light:–
6. Huygen’s concept of secondary wave (A) All bright fringes become white
(a) allows us to find the focal length of a thick lens (B) All bright fringes have colours between violet and red
(b) is a geometrical method to find a wavefront (C) Only the central fringe is white, all other fringes are
coloured
(c) is used to determine the velocity of light (D) No fringes are observed
(d) is used to explain polarisation 14. In the young’s double slit experiment the central maxima is
7. Huygens’ principle of secondary wavelets may be used observed to be I0 . If one of the slits is covered, then intensity
to: at the central maxima will become:–
(a) find the velocity of light in vacuum
I0 I0
(b) explain the particle’s behaviour of light (A) (B)
2 2
(c) find the new position of a wavefront
I0
(d) explain photoelectric effect (C) (D) I0
4
WAVE OPTICS 104
15. In Young’s double slit experiment, one of the slits is so
painted that intensity of light emitted from it is half of that
of the light emitted from other slit. Then
(A) fringe system will disappear
(B) bright fringes will become brighter and dark fringes will
be darker (C)
(C) both bright and dark fringes will become darker
(D) dark fringes will become less dark and bright fringes
will become less bright.
16. In YDSE how many maxima can be obtained on the screen
if wavelength of light used is 200 nm and d = 700 nm :
(A) 12 (B) 7
(C) 18 (D) None of these
17. In YDSE, the source placed symmetrically with respect to
the slit is now moved parallel to the plane of the slits it is (D)
closer to the upper slit, as shown. Then,
19. In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal
widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in
the interference pattern.
(A) The intensifies of both the maxima and minima increase.
(A) The fringe width will increase and fringe pattern will (B) The intensity of the maxima increases and the minima
shift down. has zero intensity.
(B) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will (C) The intensity of the maxima decreases and that o f
shift up. minima increases
(C) The fringe width will decrease and fringe pattern will (D) The intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima
shift down. has zero intensity.
(D) The fringe width will remain same but fringe pattern will 20. Let S1 and S2 be the two slits in Young’s double slit
shift down. experiment. If central maxima is observed at P and angle
18. In a YDSE experiment if a slab whose refractive index can
be varied is placed in front of one of the slits then the S1PS2 , then the fringe width for the light of
variation of resultant intensity at mid–point of screen with wavelength l will be. (Assume q to be a small angle)
(A) / (B)
‘m’ will be best represented by 1 . [Assume slits of
(C) / (D) /2
equal width and there is no absorption by slab] 21. Two coherent narrow slits emitting light of wavelength in
the same phase are placed parallel to each other at a small
separation of 3. The light is collected on a screen S which
is placed at a distance D (>>l) from the slits. The smallest
distance x such that the P is a maxima.
(A)
(B) (A) 3D (B) 8D
D
(C) 5D (D) 5
2
WAVE OPTICS 105
3 27. The intensity ratio of the two interfering beams of light
22. Minimum thickness of a mica sheet having which is . What is the value of [(Imax – Imin)/(Imax + Imin)] ?
2
should be placed in front of one of the slits in YDSE is
(a) 2 (b) 2 / 1
required to reduce the intensity at the centre of screen to
half of maximum intensity is-
(A) l/4 (B) l/8 (c) 2/(1 + ) (d) 1 / 2
(C) l/2 (D) l/3
23. In the YDSE shown the two slits are covered with thin 28. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the two equally bright
sheets having thickness t & 2t and refractive index 2m and slits are coherent, but of phase difference /3. If the maximum
m. Find the position (y) of central maxima intensity on the screen is I0, the intensity at the point on the
screen equidistant from the slits is
(a) I0 (b) I0/2
(c) I0/4 (d) 3 I0/4
29. In an interference pattern produced by two indentical slits,
the intensity at the side of the central maximum is I. The
intensity at the same spot when either of the two slits is
closed is I0. Therefore
(a) I = I0
(b) I = 2 I0
tD (c) I = 4 I0
(A) zero (B)
d (d) I and I0 are not related to each other
tD 30. Two waves of same wavelength and amplitude interfere to
(C) (D) None of these
d give a minimum when phase difference is
24. In a YDSE with two identical slits, when the upper slit is
covered with a thin, perfectly transparent sheet of mica,
(a) 0 (b)
the intensity at the centre of screen reduces to 75% of the 2
initial value. Second minima is observed to be above this
3
point and third maxima below it. Which of the following (c) (d)
can not be a possible value of phase difference caused by 2
the mica sheet 31. In a double slit experiment, the first minimum on either side
13 of the central maximum occurs where the path difference
(A) (B) between the two paths is
3 3
17 11
(C) (D) (a) (b)
3 3 4 2
25. Two monochromatic and coherent point sources (c) (d) 2
of light are placed at a certain distance from eachother in
the horizontal plane. The locus of all those points in the 32. Two waves originating from sources S1 and S2 having zero
horizontal plane which have constructive interference will phase difference and common wavelength will show
be– completely destructive interference at a point P if (S1P –
(A) A hyperbola S2P) is
(B) Family of hyperbolas (a) 5 (b) 3 /4
(C) Family of straight lines
(D) Family of parabolas (c) 2 (d) 11/2
26. If the distance between the first maxima and fifth minima of 33. Two waves having the intensities in the ratio of 9 : 1 produce
a double slit pattern is 7 mm and the slits are separated by interference. The ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is
0.15 mm with the screen 50 cm from the slits, then equal to
wavelength of the light used is
(A) 600 nm (B) 525 nm (a) 10 : 8 (b) 9 : 1
(C) 467 nm (D) 420 nm (c) 4 : 1 (d) 2 : 1
WAVE OPTICS 106
34. Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I 40. Two point source separated by d = 5 m emit light of
and 4 I are superposed. The maximumm and minimum wavelength =2 m in phase. A circular wire of radius 20
possible intensities in the resulting beam are m is placed around the source as shown in figure.
(a) 5 I and I (b) 5 I and 3 I
(c) 9 I and I (d) 9 I and 3 I
35. What is the path difference for destructive interference ?
(a) n (b) n ( + 1)
n 1 2n 1
(c) (d)
2 2
36. If an inteference pattern has maximum and minimum
intensities in the ratio of 36 : 1 then what will be the ratio of (A) Points A and B are dark and points C and D are bright.
amplitudes (B) Points A and B are bright and point C and D are dark.
(C) Points A and C are dark and points B and D are bright.
(a) 5 : 7 (b) 7 : 4 (D) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark.
(c) 4 : 7 (d) 7 : 5 41. Which of the following statement is/are correct for coherent
37. When viewed in white light, soap bubbles show colours sources ?
because of I. Two coherent sources emit light waves of same
(a) interference (b) scattering wavelength.
(c) diffraction (d) disperscion II. Two coherent sources emit light wavers of same frequency
38. The diagram below shows, two sources A and B, vibrating III. Two coherent sources have zero or constant initial phase
in phase, in the same uniform medium and producing difference with respect to time
circular wave fronts. Choose the correct option from the codes given below:
(a) Only I (b) I and III
(c) II and III (d) I, II and III
42. In Young’s double slit experiment, the interference pattern is
found to have an intensity ratio between bright and dark
fringes, as 9. This implies that
(a) the intensities at the screen due to the two slits are 5
units and 4 units respectively
(b) the intensities at the screen due to the two slits are 4
units and 1 unit respectively
(c) the amplitude ratio is 3
Which phenomenon occurs at point P ? (d) the amplitude ratio is 2
(a) Destructive interference 43. In Young’s experiment the wavelength of red light is 7.8
–5 –5
× 10 cm and that of blue light is 5.2 × 10 cm. The value of
(b) Constructive interference th
n for which (n + 1)th blue bright band coincides with n red
(c) Reflection band is
(d) Refraction (a) 4 (b) 3
39. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference we (c) 2 (d) 1
require two sources which emit radiation of
44. We shift Young’s double slit experiment from air to water.
(a) nearly the same frequency Assuming that water is still and clear, it can be predicted that
(b) the same frequency the fringe pattern will
(c) different wavelength
(d) the same frequency and having a definite phase (a) remain unchanged (b) disappear
relationship (c) shrink (d) be enlarged
WAVE OPTICS 107
45. In Young’s double slit interference experiment, the distance (a) 0.24 cm (b) 2.21 cm
between two sources is 0.1 mm. The distance of the screen (c) 1.28 cm (d) 0.12 cm
from the sources is 20 cm. Wavelength of light used is 5460
52. In the Young’s double slit experiment using sodium light
Å. Then the angular position of the first dark fringe is
( = 5898 Å, 92 fringes are seen. If given colour ( = 5461 Å)
(a) 0.08° (b) 0.16° is used, how many fringes will be seen ?
(c) 0.20° (d) 0.32° (a) 62 (b) 67
46. The displacement of the interfering light waves are (c) 85 (d) 99
y1 = 4 sin t 53. In the two separate set-ups of the Young’s double slit
experiment, fringes of equal width are observed when lights
and y2 = 3 sin (t + /2)
of wavelengths in the ratio 1 : 2 are used. If the ratio of the
What is the amplitude of resultant wave ? slit separation in the two cases is 2 : 1, the ratio of the
(a) 5 (b) 7 distances between the plane of the slits and the screen, in
the two set ups in
(c) 1 (d) zero
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 1
47. In Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 2 : 1
the slit is halved and the distance between the slits and
54. When light wave suffers reflection at the interface between
screen is doubled. The fringe width is
air and glass, the change of phase of the reflected wave is
(a) unchanged (b) halved equal to
(c) double (d) quadrupled (a) zero (b) /2
48. In Young’s double slit experiment if the slit widths are in the (c) (d) 2
ratio 1 : 9, the ratio of the intensity at minima to that at
Diffraction
maxima will be
55. To observe diffraction, the size of an obstacle
(a) 1 (b) 1/9
(a) should be of the same order as wavelength
(c) 1/4 (d) 1/3
(b) should be much larger than the wavelength
49. In Young’s double slit interference experiment if the slit (c) have no relation to wavelength
separation is made 3 folds the fringe width becomes
(d) should be exactly /2
(a) 1/3 fold (b) 3 fold 56. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light.
(c) 3/6 fold (d) 6 fold What happens if the red light is replaced by blue light
50. Two slits separated by a distance of 1 mm are illuminated (a) no change
–7
with red light of wavelength 6.5 × 10 m. The interference (b) diffraction bands become narrower and crowded together
fringes are observed on a screen placed 1 m from the slits. (c) bands become broader and farther apart
The distance between third dark fringe and the fifth bright (d) bands disappear
fringe is equal to
57 Diffraction and interference indicate
(a) 0.65 mm (b) 1.63 mm (a) wave nature (b) particle nature
(c) 3.25 mm (d) 4.88 mm (c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of the above
51. In a double slit interference experiment the distance between 58. The condition for observing Fraunhofer diffraction from a
the slits is 0.05 cm and screen is 2 m away from the slits. The single slit is that the light wavefront incident on the slit
–5
wavelength of light is 6.0 × 10 cm. The distance between should be
the fringes is (a) spherical (b) cylinderical
(c) plane (d) elliptical
WAVE OPTICS 108
59. The main difference in the phenomenon of interference and 66. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate of
diffraction is that refractive index 1.55 at the polarising angle. The angle of
(a) diffraction is due to interaction of light from the same refraction is
wavefront whereas interference is the interaction of
(a) 53° (b) 32°49’
waves from two isolated sources.
(b) diffraction is due to interaction of light from same (c) 147°11’ (d) 0°
wavefront, whereas the interference is the interaction 67. From Brewster’s law for polarisation, it follows that the angle
of two waves derived from the same source. of polarisation depends upon
(c) diffraction is due to interaction of waves derived from (a) the wavelength of light
the same sources, whereas the interference is the
bending of light from the same wavefront. (b) plane of polarisation’s orientation
(d) diffraction is caused by reflected waves from a source (c) plane of vibration’s orientation
whereas interference caused is due to refraction of waves (d) none of the above
from a surface.
68. Choose the correct statement
60. The first diffraction minima due to a single slit diffraction is
at = 30° for a light of wavelength 5000 Å. The width of the (a) the Brewster’s angle is independent of wavelength of
slit is light
–5 –4
(a) 5 × 10 cm (b) 1.0 × 10 cm (b) the Brewster’s angle is independent of nature of
(c) 2.5 × 10 cm
–5 –5
(d) 1.25 × 10 cm reflecting surface
61. A slit of width a is illuminated by white light. The first (c) the Brewster ’s angle is different for different
minimum for red light ( = 6500 Å) will fall at = 30° when a wavelengths
will be
–4
(d) Brewster’s angle depends on wavelength but not on
(a) 3250 Å (b) 6.5 × 10 cm the nature of reflecting surface.
–4
(c) 1.3 micron (d) 2.6 × 10 cm
69. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at an
62. Light of wavelength is incident on a slit of width d . The angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle . If represents
resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen at a the refractive index of glass with respect to air, then the
distance D. The linear width of the principal maximum is
angle between reflected and refracted rays is
then equal to the width of the slit if D equals
(d) d/ (d) 2/d (a) 90° +
2 2 –1
(c) d /2 (d) 2 /d (b) sin ( cos )
63. Find the half angular width of the central bright maximum in (c) 90°
the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a slit of width 12 105 –1
(d) 90° – sin (sin /)
cm when the slit is illuminated by monochromatic light of
wavelength 6000 Å. 70. When unpolarised light is incident on a plane glass plate at
(A) 40° (B) 45° Brewster’s (polarising) angle, then which of the following
(C) 30° (D) 60° statements is correct
(a) reflected and refracted rays are completely polarised with
Brewsters Law their planes of polarisation parallel to each other.
64. If the light is polarised by reflection, then the angle between (b) reflected and refracted rays are completely polarised with
reflected and refracted light is their planes of polarisation perpendicular to each other
(a) (b) /2 (c) the reflected light is plane polarised but transmitted light
(c) 2 (d) /4 is partially polarised
(d) the reflected light is partially polarised but refracted light
65. A ray of light strikes a glass plate at an angle of 60°. If the
is plane polarised.
reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other,
the index of refraction of glass is 71. The angle of incidence at which reflected light in totally
polarized for reflection from air to glass (refractive index n), is
(a) (b) 3/2 –1 –1
3 (a) sin (n) (b) sin (1/n)
–1 –1
(c) tan (1/n) (d) tan (n)
(c) 3/ 2 (d) 1/2
WAVE OPTICS 109
Polarisation (a) I0 (b) I0/2
72. A polaroid is placed at 45° to an incoming light of intensity
(c) I0/4 (d) I0/8
I0 . Now the intensity of light passing through polaroid 77. In a Fraunhofer’s diffraction by a slit, if slit width is a,
after polarisation would be : wave length l, focal length of lens is f, linear width of
(A) I0 (B) I0 / 2 central maxima is :–
(C) I0 / 4 (D) Zero f fa
(A) (B)
73. A ray of light is incident on the surface of a glass plate at a
an angle of incidence equal to Brewster’s angle f. If µ 2f f
represents the refractive index of glass with respect to air, (C) (D)
a 2a
then the angle between reflected and refracted rays is:
(A) 90 + f 78. The angle of polarisation for any medium is 60°, what will
be critical angle for this :
(B) sin 1 ( cos )
(A) sin 1 3 (B) tan 1 3
(C) 90°
(C) cos 1 3 (D) sin 1 3
(D) 90 sin 1 (sin / )
79. Sound waves do not exhibit
74. A beam of light AO is incident on a glass slab ( = 1.54) in
a direction as shown in figure. The reflected ray OB is (a) refraction (b) interference
passed through a Nicol prism on viewing through a Nicol (c) diffraction (d) polarisation
prism, we find on rotating the prism that
80. Polarisation of light proves the
A N B
(a) corpuscular nature of light
(b) quantum nature of light
33° 33°
O (c) transverse nature of light
(d) longitudinal wave nature of light
81. Light waves can be polarised because they
(a) the intensity is reduced down to zero and remains zero
(a) have high frequencies
(b) the intensity reduces down somewhat and rises again
(b) have short wavelength
(c) there is no change in intensity
(c) are transverse
(d) the intensity gradually reduces to zero and then again
increases. (d) can be reflected
75. Two beams, A and B, of plane polarized light with mutually 82. Light transmitted by a Nicol crystal is
perpendicular planes of polarization are seen through a (a) plane polarised (b) unpolarised
polaroid. From the position when the beam A has
(c) circularly polarised (d) elliptically polarised
maximum intensity (and beam B has zero intensity), a
rotation of polaroid through 30° makes the two beams 83. Polaroid glass is used in sun glasses because
appear equally bright. If the initial intensities of the two (a) it reduces the light intensity to half on account of polarisation
IA (b) it is fashionable
beams are IA and IB respectively, then equals :
IB (c) it has good colour
(d) it is cheaper
(a) 3/2 (b) 1
(c) 1/3 (d) 3
76. A beam of unpolarized light of intensity I0 is passed
through a polaroid A and then through another polaroid B
which is oriented so that its principal plane makes an angle
of 45° relative to that of A. The intensity of the emergent
light is :
WAVE OPTICS 110
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. In a Young’s double slit experiment with light of wavelength (b) a L and bmin 4L
the separation of slits is d and distance of screen is D
such that D >> d >> . If the fringe width is , the distance 2
(c) a and bmin 4L
from point of maximum intensity to the point where intensity L
falls to half of maximum intensity on either side is :
2 2 2
(2015 Online) a and bmin
L L
(d)
(a) (b) 5. A single slit of width b is illuminated by a coherent
3
monochromatic light of wavelength . If the second and fourth
minima in the diffraction pattern at a distance 1 m from the slit
(c) (d)
4 2 are at 3 cm and 6cm respectively from the central maximum,
2. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between what is the width of the central maximum ? (i.e. distance
slits and the screen is 1.0 m and monochromatic light of between first minimum on either side of the central maximum)
600 nm is being used. A person standing near the slits is (2017 Online Set-1)
looking at the fringe pattern. When the separation between (a) 1.5 cm (b) 3.0 cm
the slits is varied, the interference pattern disappears for a (c) 4.5 cm (d) 6.0 cm
particular distance d0 between the slits. If the angular
6. A single slit of width 0.1 mm is illuminated by a parallel
1 beam of light of wavelength 6000 Å and diffraction bands
resolution of the eye is , the value of d0 is close to:
60 are observed on a screen 0.5 m from the slit. The distance
of the third dark band from the central bright band is :
(2016 Online Set-1)
(2017 Online Set-2)
(a) 1 mm (b) 2 mm
(a) 3 mm (b) 9 mm
(c) 4 mm (d) 3 m
(c) 4.5 mm (d) 1.5 mm
3. Linearly polarised light travelling along x-axis passes
7. An observer is moving with half the speed of light towards
through a polariser sheet in y-z plane having transmission a stationary microwave source emitting waves at frequency
10 GHz. What is the frequency of the microwave measured
axis y = z. If electric field oscillations in incident light is
by the observer ? (speed of light = 3 × 108 ms–1) (2017)
represented by E y E 0 sin kx t and
(a) 15.3 GHz (b) 10.1 GHz
(c) 12.1 GHz (d) 17.3 GHz
E z 3E 0 sin kx t then amplitude of electric field
8. In a Young’s double slit experiment, slits are separated by
in transmitted light will be: (2016 Online Set-2) 0.5 mm, and the screen is placed 150 cm away. A beam of
(a) 2E 0 cos15 (b) E 0 cos 45 light consisting of two wavelengths, 650 nm and 520 nm,
is used to obtain interference fringes on the screen. The
(c) 2E 0 (d) E 0 cos15
least distance from the common central maximum to the
4. The box of a pin hole camera, of length L, has a hole of point where the bright fringes due to both the wavelengths
radius a. It is assumed that when the hole is illuminated by coincide is: (2017)
a parallel beam of light of wavelength the spread of the (a) 1.56 mm (b) 7.8 mm
spot (obtained on the opposite wall of the camera) is the
(c) 9.75 mm (d) 15.6 mm
sum of its geometrical spread and the spread due to
9. A plane polarized monochromatic EM wave is traveling in
diffraction. The spot would then have its minimum size
vacuum along z direction such that at t = t1 it is found that
(say bmin) when : (2016)
the electric field is zero at a spatial point z1. The next zero
22 that occurs in its neighbourhood is at z2. The frequency
(a) a L and bmin L of the electromagnetic wave is : (2018 Online Set-2)
WAVE OPTICS 111
3×108 1.5×108 1 1
(1) z - z (2) z - z 1 2 1 4
2 1 2 1 (c) cos = (d) cos =
3 3
1
6×108 z 2 - z1 13. Unpolarized light of intensity I passes through an ideal
(3) z - z (4) t1 +
2 1 3×10 8 polarizer A. Another identical polarizer B is placed behind
10. Light of wavelength 550 nm falls normally on a slit of I
A. The intensity of light beyond B is found to be . Now
-5
width 22.0 ×10 cm. The angular position of the second 2
minima from the central maximum will be (in radians) : another identical polarizer C is placed between A andB.
(2018 Online Set-1) I
The intensity beyond B is now found to be . The angle
8
(a) (b) between polarizer A and Cis :
8
12
(2018)
(c) (d) (a) 45° (b) 60°
6 4
(c) 0° (d) 30°
11. A plane polarized light is incident on a polariser with its
14. The angular width of the central maximum in a single slit
pass axis making angle with x-axis, as shown in the figure.
diffraction pattern is 60°. The width of the slits is 1m.
At four different values of , = 80 ,380 , 1880 and 2180, the The slit is illuminated by monochromatic plane waves. If
another slit of same width is made near it, Young’s fringes
observed intensities are same. What is the angle between
can be observed on a screen placed at a distance 50 cm
the direction of polarization and x-axis ? from the slits. If the observed fringe width is 1 cm, what is
(2018 Online Set-2) slit separation distance?
(2018)
(a) 75 m (b) 100 m
(c) 25 m (d) 50 m
15. In an interference experiment the ratio of amplitudes of
a 1
coherent waves is 1 . The ratio of maximum and
a2 3
minimum intensities of fringes will be:
(a) 980 (b) 1280 (2019-04-08/Shift -1)
(c) 203 0
(d) 45 0 (a) 2 (b) 18
12. Unpolarized light of intensity I is incident on a system of (c) 4 (d) 9
two polarizers, A followed by B. The intensity of emergent 16. A wire of length 2L, is made by joining two wires A and B
I of same length but different radii r and 2r and made of the·
light is . If a third polarizer C is placed between A and B,
2 same material. It is vibrating at a frequency such that the
joint of the two wires forms a node. If the number of
I
the intensity of emergent light is reduced to . The angle antinodes in wire A is p and that in B is q then the value of
3
p/q is: (2019-04-08/Shift -1)
between the polarizers A and C is . Then :
(2018 Online Set-3)
1 1
2 4
(a) cos = 2 2 (b) cos =
3
3 17. The figure shows a Young’s double slit experimental setup.
It is observed that when a thin transparent sheet of
thickness t and refractive index is put in front of one of
the slits, the central maximum gets shifted by a distance
WAVE OPTICS 112
equal to n fringe widths. If the wavelength of light used is on P 1, the intensity of light transmitted by the three
, t will be: (2019-04-09/Shift -1)
polarizers in I. The ratio I 0 equals (nearly):
I
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
(a) 5.33 (b) 16.00
(c) 10.67 (d) 1.80
22. Two coherent sources produce waves of different
2nD nD intensities which interfere. After interference, the ratio of
(a) a 1 (b) a 1 the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity is 16. The
intensity of the waves are in the ratio:
n 2 D
(c) 1 (d) a 1 (2019-01-09/Shift -1)
(a) 16 : 9 (b) 25 : 9
18. Diameter of the objective lens of a telescope is 250 cm. For
(c) 4 : 1 (d) 5 : 3
light ofwavelength 600 nm coming from a distant object,
23. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are placed
the limit ofresolution ofthe telescopeis closeto:
0.320 mm apart. Light of wavelength = 500 nm is incident
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
on the slits. The total number of bright fringes that are
(a) 1.5 107 rad (b) 2.0 107 rad
observed in the angular range –30° < 30° < 30° is
(c) 3.0 107 rad (d) 4.5 107 rad
(2019-01-09/Shift -2)
19. A thin disc of mass M and radius R has mass per unitarea
(a) 640 (b) 320
r = kr2 where r is the distance from its centre. Itsmoment
(c) 321 (d) 641
of inertia about an axis going through its centre ofmass 24. In a Young’s double slit experiment with slit separation 0.1
and perpendicular to its plane is : (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
1
MR 2 2MR 2 mm, one observes a bright fringe at an angle rad by
(a) (b) 40
3 3 using light of wavelength λ1. When the light of wavelength
2
MR MR 2
(c) (d) λ2 is used, a bright fringe is seen at the same angle in the
6 2 same set up. Given that λ1 and λ2, are in visible range (380
20. In a double slit experiment, when a thin film of thickness t
nm to 740 nm), their possible values are:
and having refractive index μ is introduced in front of one
(2019-01-10/Shift -1)
of the slits, the maximum at the centre of the fringe pattern
(a) 625 nm, 500 nm (b) 380 nm, 525 nm
shifts by one fringe width. The value of t is ( is the (c) 380 nm, 500 nm (d) 400 nm, 500 nm
wavelength of the light used): (2019-04-12/Shift -1) 25. Consider a Young’s double slit experiment as shown in
2
(a) 1 (b) 2 1 figure. What should be the slit separation d in terms of
wavelength λ such that the first minimum occurs directly
(c) 1 (d) 2 1 in front of the slit (S1)? (2019-01-10/Shift -2)
21. Asystem of three polarizers Pl, P2, P3 is set up such that
the pass axis of P3 is crossed with respect to that of P1.
The pass axis of P2 is inclined at 60° to the pass axis of P3.
When a beam of unpolarized light of intensity I0 is incident
WAVE OPTICS 113
31. A beam of plane polarised light of large cross-sectional area
and uniform intensity of 3.3 Wm-2 falls normally on a polariser
(a) 2 52 (b)
5 2 (cross sectional area 3 10-4 m2 ) which rotates about its
axis with an angular speed of 31.4 rad/s. The energy of light
(c) 2 5 2
(d) 5 2
passing through the polariser per revolution, is close to:
26. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the path difference at a
(2020-09-04/Shift -1)
certain point on the screen, between two interfering waves
(a) 1.0×10-4 J (b) 1.0×10-5 J
is 1 th of wavelength. The ratio of the intensity at this point
8 (c) 5.0×10-4 J (d) 1.5×10-4 J
to that at the centre of a bright fringe is close to:
32. Orange light of wavelength 6000×10–10 m illuminates a single
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
slit of width 0.6 × 10–4 m.The maximum possible number of
(a) 0.74 (b) 0.85 diffraction minima produced on both sides of thecentral
(c) 0.94 (d) 0.80 maximum is ___________. (2020-09-04/Shift -2)
27. In a double-slit experiment, green light (5303Å) falls on 33. In the figure below, P and Q are two equally intense coherent
adouble slit having a separation of 19.44 μm anda width sources emitting radiation of wavelength 20 m. The
separation between P and Q is 5 m and the phase of P is
of4.05 μm. The number ofbright fringes between the first
ahead of that of Q by 90°. A, B and C are three distinct
andthe second diffraction minima is:(2019-01-11/Shift -2) points of observation, each equidistant from the midpoint
(a) 10 (b) 05 of PQ. The intensities of radiation at A,B,C will be in the
(c) 04 (d) 09 ratio: (2020-09-06/Shift -1)
28. Interference fringes are observed on a screen by
illuminating two thin slits 1 mm apart with a light source
( 632.8 nm). The distance between the screen and the
slits is 100 cm. If a bright fringe is observed on screen at a
distance of 1.27 mm from the central bright fringe, then the
path difference between the waves, which are reaching
this point from the slits is close to :(2020-09-02/Shift -1)
(a) 2.05 m (b) 2.87 nm (a) 4 : 1 : 0 (b) 2 : 1 : 0
(c) 2 nm (d) 1.27 m (c) 0 : 1 : 2 (d) 0 : 1 : 4
29. In a Young’s double slit experiment, 16 fringes are observed 34. A young’s double-slit experiment is performed using
in a certain segment of the screen when light of wavelength monochromatic light of wavelength . The intensity of light
700 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is changed to 400 at a point on the screen, where the path difference is , is K
nm, the number of fringes observed in the same segment of units. The intensity of light at a point where the path
the screen would be (2020-09-02/Shift -2) nK
difference is is given by , where n is an integer. The
(a) 28 (b) 24 6 12
(c) 30 (d) 18 value of n is ________ . (2020-09-06/Shift -2)
30. In a Young’s double slit experiment, light of 500 nm is used 35. A polarizer-analyzer set is adjusted such that the intensity
to produce an interference pattern. When the distance of light coming out of the analyzer is just 10% of the original
between the slits is 0.05 mm, the angular width (in degree) intensity. Assuming that the polarizer-analyzer set does not
of the fringes formed on the distance screen is close to : absorb any light, the angle by which the analyser need to
be rotated further to reduce the output intensity to be zero is
(2020-09-03/Shift -1)
(2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(a) 0.17º (b) 0.07º
(a) 45° (b) 71.6°
(c) 0.57º (d) 1.7º
(c) 90° (d) 18.4°
WAVE OPTICS 114
36. Visible light of wavelength 6000 10 8 cm falls normally 40. In a Young’s double slit experiment 15 fringes are observed
on a single slit and produces a diffraction pattern. It is on a small portion of the screen when light of wavelength
found that the second diffraction minima is at 60° from 500nm is used. 10 fringes are observed on the same section
the central maxima. If the first minimum is produced at of the screen when another light source of wavelength is
used. Then the value of is (nm)
1 ,then 1 is close to (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 20° (b) 30°
41 Let S1 and S2 be the two slits in Young’s double slit
(c) 45° (d) 25°
experiment. If central maxima is observed at P and angle
37. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
the slits is 0.15mm. In the experiment, a source of light of S1PS2 , then the fringe width for the light of wavelength
wavelength 589nm is used and the interference pattern is will be. (Assume q to be a small angle)
observed on a screen kept 1.5m away. The separation (A) /q (B) q
between the successive bright fringes on the screen is (C) 2/q (D) /2q
(2020-01-07/Shift -2) 42. Two point source separated by d = 5 mm emit light of
(a) 5.9 mm (b) 3.9 mm wavelength = 2 mm in phase. A circular wire of radius 20
(c) 6.9 mm (d) 4.9 mm mm is placed around the source as shown in figure.
38. In a double-slit experiment, at a certain point on the screen
the path difference between the two interfering waves is
1
th of a wavelength. The ratio of the intensity of light at
8
that point to that at the centre of a bright fringe is
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
(a) 0.568 (b) 0.853
(c) 0.672 (d) 0.760 (A) Points A and B are dark and points C and D are bright.
3
39. A wire of length L and mass per unit length 6 10 kg/m is (B) Points A and B are bright and point C and D are dark.
put under tension of 540N. Two consecutive frequencies (C) Points A and C are dark and points B and D are bright.
that it resonates at are: 420Hz and 490Hz. Then L in meters (D) Points A and C are bright and points B and D are dark.
is
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(a) 8.1m (b) 2.1m
(c) 1.1m (d) 5.1m
WAVE OPTICS 115
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. In figure, a wavefront AB moving in air is incident on a 6. A beam with wavelength falls on a stack of partially
plane glass surface xy. Its position CD after refraction reflecting planes with separation d. The angle that the
through a glass slab is shown also along with normals beam should make with the planes so that the beams
drawn at A and D. The refractive index of glass with respect reflected from successive planes may interfere
to air will be equal to constructively is (where n =1, 2, ……)
sin sin
(a) sin (b) sin
1 n 1 n
(a) sin (b) tan
d d
(c) (BD/AC) (d) (AB/CD)
Huygens Principle
1 n 1 n
2. Huygen wave theory allows us to know (c) sin (d) cos
2d 2d
(a) The wavelength of the wave
(b) The velocity of the wave 7. Two ideal slits S1 and S2 are at a distance d apart, and
illuminated by light of wavelength passing through an
(c) The amplitude of the wave
ideal source slit S placed on the line through S2 as shown.
(d) The propagation of wave fronts The distance between the planes of slits and the source
3. According to Huygen’s wave theory, point on any wave slit is D. A screen is held at a distance D from the plane of
front may be regarded as the slits. The minimum value of d for which there is
darkness at O is
(a) A photon (b) An electron
(c) A new source of wave (d) Neutron
4. Speed of light is
(a) the same in medium–1 and medium–2
(b) larger in medium–1 than in medium–2
(c) larger in medium–2 than in medium–1
(d) different at b and d
5. In Young’s double slit experiment how many maximas can
be obtained on a screen (including the central maximum)
on both sides of the central fringe if = 2000 Å and 3D
d = 7000 Å (a) (b) D
2
(a) 12 (b) 7
D
(c) 18 (d) 4 (c) (d) 3D
2
WAVE OPTICS 116
8. In a Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is 14. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slits are 2 mm
0.2 mm. If the wavelength of light used is increased by apart and are illuminated with a mixture of two wavelength
10% and the separation between the slits is also increased 0 = 750 nm and = 900 nm. The minimum distance from
by 10%, the fringe width will be the common central bright fringe on a screen 2m from the
slits where a bright fringe from one interference pattern
(a) 0.20 mm (b) 0.401 mm coincides with a bright fringe from the other is
(c) 0.242 mm (d) 0.165 mm (a) 1.5 mm (b) 3 mm
9. In Young’s double slit experiment, the phase difference (c) 4.5 mm (d) 6 mm
between the light waves reaching third bright fringe from
the central fringe will be ( = 6000 Å)
15. At a point having a path difference of the intensity will
4
(a) Zero (b) 2
be
(c) 4 (d) 6 2
(a) 0 (b) a
10. In Young’s experiment, if the distance between screen and (c) 2a
2 2
(d) a /2
the slit aperture is increased the fringe width will
16. To demonstrate the phenomenon of interference, we
(a) Decrease require two sources which emit radiation
(b) Increases but intensity will decrease (a) Of the same frequency & having a definite phase relationship
(c) Increase but intensity remains unchanged (b) Of nearly the same frequency
(d) Remains unchanged but intensity decreases (c) Of the same frequency
11. In a two slit experiment with monochromatic light fringes (d) Of different wavelengths
are obtained on a screen placed at some distance from 17. If the ratio of amplitude of two waves is 4 : 3, then the ratio
–2
the slits. If the screen is moved by 5 × 10 m towards of maximum and minimum intensity is
–5 (a) 16 : 18 (b) 18 : 16
the slits, the change in fringe width is 3 × 10 m. If
–3
separation between the slits is 10 m, the wavelength of (c) 49 : 1 (d) 94 : 1
light used is 18. In Young’s double slit experiment, the central bright fringe
(a) 6000 Å (b) 5000 Å can be identified
(c) 3000 Å (d) 4500 Å (a) By using white light instead of monochromatic light
(b) As it is narrower than other bright fringes
12 The maximum intensity in Young’s double slit experiment
is I0. Distance between the slits is d = 5, where is the (c) As it is wider than other bright fringes
wavelength of monochromatic light used in the experiment. (d) As it has a greater intensity than the other bright fringes
What will be the intensity of light in front of one of the 19. The figure below shows a double slit experiment. P and Q
slits on a screen at a distance D = 10d are the slits. The path lengths PX and QX are n and
(n + 2) respectively where n is a whole number and is
I0 3 the wavelength. Taking the central bright fringe as zero,
(a) (b) I0
2 4 what is formed at X
I0
(c) I0 (d)
4
13. In a Young’s double slit experiment, let be the fringe width,
and let I0 be the intensity at the central bright fringe. At a
distance x from the central bright fringe, the intensity will be
-
x 2x
(a) I 0 cos (b) I 0 cos
(a) First bright (b) First dark
2 x I0 2 x
(c) I 0 cos (d) cos (c) Second bright (d) Second dark
4
WAVE OPTICS 117
20. In the figure is shown Young’s double slit experiment. Q is
the position of the first bright fringe on the right side of O.
th
P is the 11 fringe on the other side, as measured from Q.
–10
If the wavelength of the light used is 6000 × 10 m, then
S1B will be equal to
1 2
(a) cos (b) cos 1
d d
1 1
(c) sin (d) sin
d 2d
–6 –6 25. In Young’s double slit experiment the y-coordinates of
(a) 6 × 10 m (b) 6.6 × 10 m
–7 –7 central maxima and 10th maxima are 2 cm and 5 cm
(c) 3.138 × 10 m (d) 3.144 × 10 m
respectively. When the YDSE apparatus is immersed
21. In a double slit experiment, instead of taking slits of equal in a liquid of refractive index 1.5 the corresponding
widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the other. Then in
y-coordinates will be
the interference pattern
(a) The intensities of both the maxima and the minima increase (a) 2 cm, 7.5 cm (b) 3 cm, 6 cm
(b) The intensity of the maxima increases and minima has (c) 2 cm, 4 cm (d) 4/3 cm, 10/3 cm
zero intensity 26. In Young’s double-slit experiment the fringe width is . If
(c) The intensity of the maxima decreases and that of entire arrangement is placed in a liquid of refractive index
minima increases n, the fringe width becomes
(d) The intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima
has zero intensity (a) (b) n
th n 1
22. In a double slit experiment if 5 dark fringe is formed
opposite to one of the slits, the wavelength of light is (c) /n (d) /n – 1
27. In a double slit arrangement fringes are produced using
d2 d2 light of wavelength 4800 Å. One slit is covered by a thin
(a) (b)
6D 5D plate of glass of refractive index 1.4 and the other with
another glass plate of same thickness but of refractive
d2 d2 index 1.7. By doing so the central bright shifts to original
(c) (d)
15 D 9D fifth bright fringe from centre. Thickness of glass plate is
23 Young’s double slit experiment is made in a liquid. The (a) 8 m (b) 6 m
10th bright fringe in liquid lies, where 6th dark fringes lies (c) 4 m (d) 10 m
in vacuum. The refractive index of the liquid is
approximately : 28. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity of light
coming from the first slit is double the intensity from the
(a) 1.8 (b) 1.54
second slit. The ratio of the maximum intensity to the
(c) 1.67 (d) 1.2
minimum intensity on the interference fringe pattern
24. A parallel beam of monochromatic light is used in a Young’s
observed is
double slit experiment. The slits are separated by a distance
d and the screen is placed parallel to the plane of the slits. (a) 34 (b) 40
The angle which the incident beam must make with the
(c) 25 (d) 38
normal to the plane of the slits to produce darkness at the
position of central brightness is
WAVE OPTICS 118
29. A monochromatic beams of light is used for the formation
of fringes on the screen by illuminating the two slits in the
Young’s double slit mica is interposed in the path of one S1
of the interfering beams then O
S2
(a) At O
(b) Above O
(c) Below O
(d) Anywhere depending on angle , thickness of plate t
(a) The fringe width increases and refractive index of glass
(b) The fringe width decreases 34. A flake of glass (refractive index 1.5) is placed over one of
the openings of a double slit apparatus. The interference
(c) The fringe width remains the same but the pattern shifts
pattern displaces itself through seven successive maxima
(d) The fringe pattern disappears towards the side where the flake is placed. if wavelength
30. When a thin transparent plate of thickness t and refractive of the diffracted light is = 600 nm, then the thickness of
index is placed in the path of one of the two interfering the flake is
waves of light, then the path difference changes by (a) 2100 nm (b) 4200 nm
(a) ( + 1) t (b) ( – 1) t (c) 8400 nm (d)None of these
35. What is the thickness of the plate ?
1 1
(c) (d) (a) 5 m (b) 0.005 m
t t
(c) 7 m (d) 0.007 m
31. In Young’s double slit experiment, a mica slit of thickness
t and refractive index is introduced in the ray from the 36. If the source is now changed to green light of wavelength
–7
first source S1. By how much distance the fringes pattern 10 m, the central fringe shifts to a position initially occupied
will be displaced by the 6th bright fringe due to red light. What will be refractive
index of glass plate for the 2nd light for changed source of
d D light ?
(a) 1 t (b) 1 t
D d
(a) 2.6 m (b) 1.6 m
d D
(c) 1 D (d) 1 (c) 1.2 m (d) 2.2 m
d
37. Change in fringe width produced due to change in
32. When one of the slits of Young’s experiment is covered wavelength is
with a transparent sheet of thickness 4.8 mm, the central –4
(a) 1.7 × 10 m
–4
(b) –0.47 × 10 m
th
fringe shifts to a position originally occupied by the 30 –4 –4
(c) –0.37 × 10 m (d) –0.27 × 10 m
bright fringe. What should be the thickness of the sheet if
4
the central fringe has to shift to the position occupied by 38. In YDSE, find the thickness of a glass slab (in × 10 Å)
th ( = 1.5) which should be placed before the upper slit S1 so
20 bright fringe
that central maximum now lies at a point where 5th bright
(a) 3.8 mm (b) 1.6 mm
fringe was lying earlier (before inserting the slab).
(c) 7.6 mm (d) 3.2 mm Wavelength of light used is 5000 Å.
33. A monochromatic beam of light falls on YDSE apparatus 39. The value of is
at some angle (say ) as shown in figure. A thin sheet of
(a) 0.21 (b) 0.42
glass is inserted in front of the lower slit S2. The central
bright fringe (path difference = 0) will be obtained (c) 0.12 (d) 0.50
WAVE OPTICS 119
40. A monochromatic light of = 5000 Å is incident on two Multiple Answer Questions (more than one correct)
–4
identical slits separated by a distance of 5 × 10 m. The 46. In the Young’s double slit experiment, the ratio of
interference pattern is seen on a screen placed at a distance intensities of bright and dark fringes is 9. This means that
of 1 m from the plane of slits. A thin glass plate of thickness
–6
1.5 × 10 m and refractive index = 1.5 is placed between (a) The intensities of individual sources are 5 and 4 units
one of the slits and the screen. Find the intensity at the respectively
centre of screen. (b) The intensities of individual sources are 4 and 1 units
41. Two coherent sources of different intensities send waves respectively
which interfere. The ratio of maximum intensity to the (c) The ratio of their amplitudes is 3
minimum intensity is 25. The intensities of the sources are (d) The ratio of their amplitudes is 2
in the ratio
47. In Young’s double slit experiment, white light is used.
(a) 25 : 1 (b) 5 : 1 The separation between the slits is b. the screen is at a
(c) 9 : 4 (d) 25 : 16 distance d (d b) from the slits. Some wavelengths are
42 The angle of incidence at which reflected light is totally missing exactly in front of one slit. These wavelengths are
polarized for reflection from air to glass (refraction
index n) is b2 2 b2
(a) (b)
–1 –1 d d
(a) sin (n) (b) sin (1/n)
–1 –1
(c) tan (1/n) (d) tan (n) b2 2 b2
(c) (d)
3d 3d
43. The phenomena of interference is shown by
(a) Longitudinal mechanical waves only 48. Four light waves are represented by
(i) y = a1 sin t (ii) y = a2 sin ( t + )
(b) Transverse mechanical waves only
(iii) y = a1 sin 2 t (iv) y = a2 sin 2 ( t + )
(c) Electromagnetic waves only
Interference fringes may be observed due to
(d) All the above types of waves superposition of
44. In the far field diffraction pattern of a single slit under (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (i) and (iii)
polychromatic illumination, the first minimum with the (c) (ii) and (iv) (d) (iii) and (iv)
wavelength 1 is found to be coincident with the third maximum 49. A transparent slab of thickness t and refractive index is
at 2. So inserted in front of upper slit of YDSE apparatus. The
(a) 31 = 0.32 (b) 31 = 2 wavelength of light used is . Assume that there is no
absorption of light by the slab. Mark the correct statement(s).
(c) 1 = 3.52 (d) 0.31 = 32
(a) The intensity of dark fringes will be 0, if slits are indentical.
45. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident at an
(b) The change in optical path due to insertion of plane is t.
angle to the normal of a slit of width e. The central point
O of the screen will be dark if (c) The change in optical path due to insertion of plate is ( – 1) t
(d) For making intensity zero at centre of screen, the
S1 5
thickness can be .
2 1
O
S2
50. In Young’s double slit experiment with a source of light of
wavelength 6320Å, the first maxima will occur when
(a) e sin = n where n = 1, 3, 5 ... (a) Path difference is 9480 Å
(b) e sin = n where n = 1, 2, 3 ...
(b) Phase difference is 2 radian
(c) e sin = (2n – 1) /2 where n = 1, 2, 3 ...
(c) Path difference is 6320 Å
(d) e cos = n where n = 1, 2, 3, 4 ...
(d) Phase difference is radian
WAVE OPTICS 120
Integer Type Questions 53. Assertion : When a light wave travels from a rarer to a
51. In a YDSE , = 6000 Å; d = 6mm and D = 2 m; denser medium, it loses speed. The reduction in speed
–1 imply a reduction in energy carried by the light wave.
(i) Find the fringe width (in × 10 mm).
–1 Reason : The energy of a wave is proportional to velocity
(ii) Find the position of the 3rd maxima (in × 10 mm).
of wave.
(a) A (b) B
p (c) C (d) D
(e) E
S1 54. Statement-1 : In calculating the disturbance produced by
a pair of superimposed incoherent wave trains, you can
add their intensities.
Statement-2 : I1 + I2 + 2 I1I2 cos . The average value of
S2 cos = 0 for incoherent waves.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
52. A monochromatic beam of light of 6000 Å is used in YDSE 55. Assertion : Corpuscular theory fails in explaining the
setup. The two slits are covered with two thin films of equal velocities of light in air and water.
thickness t but of different refractive indices as shown in Reason :According to corpuscular theory, light
the figure. Considering the intensity of the incident beam should travel faster in denser medium than, in rarer
–4
on the slits to be I0, find the point on the screen (in × 10 m) medium.
at which intensity is I0 and is just above the central maxima.
(a) A (b) B
(Assume that there is no change in intensity of the light
(c) C (d) D
after passing through the films.)
(e) E
56. Statement-1 : In Young’s double-slit experiment, if intensity
of each source is I0, then minimum and maximum intensity
is zero and 4I0, respectively.
Statement-2 : InYoung’s double-slit experiment, energy
conservation is not followed.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
57. Statment-1 : Young’s experiment, the fringe width for dark
fringes is same as that of the white fringes.
Statement-2 : In Young’s double-slit experiment, the fringes
are performed with a source of white light, then only black
Consider t = .6 m, d = 1mm, D = 1m, where d and D have and bright fringes are observed.
their usual meaning.
(a) A (b) B
Assertion Reason (c) C (d) D
(A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is 58. Statement-1 : In YDSE, if separation between the slits is
the correct explanation of the assertion. less than wavelength of light, then no interference pattern
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not can be observed.
the correct explanation of the assertion. Statement-2 : For interference pattern to be observed, light
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false. sources have to be coherent.
(D) If the assertion and reason both are false. (a) A (b) B
(E) If assertion is false but reason is true. (c) C (d) D
WAVE OPTICS 121
59. Assertion : No interference pattern is detected when 65. Assertion : Interference shows wave nature of light.
two coherent sources are infinitely close to each
Reason : Photoelectric effect proves particle nature of light.
other.
(a) A (b) B (c) C
Reason : The fringe width is inversely proportional to the
distance between the two slits. (d) D (e) E
(a) A (b) B (c) C 66. Assertion: In diffraction phenomenon different maximas
have different intensities.
(d) D (e) E
Reason: In interference different maximas have same
I intensities.
60. Assertion : In Young’s double slit experiment ratio m ax
Im in (a) A (b) B (c) C
is infinite. (d) D (e) E
Reason : If width of any one of the slits is slightly 67. Statement-1 : In Young’s experiment, for two coherent
increased, then this ratio will decrease.
2
(a) A (b) B (c) C source, the resultant intensity is givenby I = 4I0 cos .
2
(d) D (e) E
Statement-2 : Ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is
61. Assertion : Two coherent sources transmit waves of equal
intensity I0. Resultant intensity at a point where path 2
Imax
I1 I2 .
2
difference is is also I0. Imin
3 I1 I 2
Reason : In interference resultant intensity at any point is (a) A (b) B
the average intensity of two individual intensities.
(c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B (c) C
68. Statement-1 : While calculating intensities in interference
(d) D (e) E pattern, we can add the intensities of the individual waves.
62. Assertion : Thin films such as soap bubble or a thin layer Statement-2 : Principle of superposition is valid for linear
of oil on water show beautiful colours when illuminated waves.
by white light.
(a) A (b) B
Reason : It happens due to the interference of light
reflected from the upper surface of the thin film. (c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B (c) C Match the Following
(d) D (e) E 69. In Young’s double slit experiment, match the following two
63. Assertion : If a glass slab is placed in front of one of the columns.
slits, then fringe width will decrease. Coulmn I Column II
Reason : Glass slab will produce an additional path (a) When width of one (p) maximum intensity will
difference slit is slightly increased increase
(a) A (b) B (c) C (b) When one slit is (q) maximum intensity will
(d) D (e) E closed decrease
64. Assertion : Interference pattern is made by using blue (c) When both the (r) maximum intensity will
light instead of red light, the fringes becomes
narrower. Sources are made remain same
Reason : In Young’s double slit experiment, fringe width incoherent
(d) When a glass slab (s) frings pattern will disappear
D
is given by relation B . is inserted in front of
d
(a) A (b) B (c) C one of the slits
(d) D (e) E Note Assume absorption from glass slab to be negligible.
WAVE OPTICS 122
70. In normal YDSE experiment maximum intensity is 4I0. In 73. The phases of the light wave at c, d, e and f are c, d, e and
Column I, y-coordinate is given corresponding to centre f respectively. It is given that c f
line. In Column II resultant intensities are given. Match the
two columns. (a) c cannot be equal to d
Column I Column II (b) d can be equal to e
(a) y = D/d (p) I = I0 (c) (d – f) is equal to (c – e)
(b) y = D/2d (q) I = 2I0 (d) None of these
(c) y = D/3d (r) I = 4I0 Passage - 2
(d) y = D/4d (s) I = Zero
Using the following passage, Solve Q. 74 and 75
71. In normal YDSE experiment match the following two
columns. When light from two sources (say slits S1 and S2) interfere,
Column I Column II they from alternate dark and bright fringes. Bright fringes is
formed at all points where the path difference is an odd
(a) In YDSE apparatus (p) fringe width will increase
multiple of half wavelength. At the condition of equal
is immersed in a liquid 2
amplitudes, A1 = A2 = a, the maximum intensity will be 4a
(b) When wavelength (q) fringe width will decrease and the visibility improves. The resultant intensity can also
of ligth used in increased 2 2
be indicated with phase factors as I = 2a cos (/2). Using
(c) When distance (r) fringe width will remain this passage, answer the following questions.
between slits and constant
screen (D) is 74. If the path difference between the slits S1 and S2 is , the
2
increased
central fringe will have an intensity of
(d) When distance (s) fringe pattern will disappear
2
between two slits (a) 0 (b) a
2 2
(d) is increased (c) 2a (d) 4a
Passage - 1 75. If the slits S1 and S2 are arranged as shown, the ratio of
intensity of fringe at P and R is
Using the following passage, Solve Q. 72 and 73
R
The figure shows a surface XY separating two transparent
media, medium–1 and medium–2. The lines ab and cd (path difference)
represent wavefronts of a light wave travelling in medium– P
1 and incident on XY. The lines ef and gh represent
wavefronts of the light wave in medium–2 after refraction.
S1 S2
72. Light travels as a
(a) 0 (b)
h (c) 1 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
d
medium - 1 Passage - 3
e c Using the following passage, Solve Q. 76 to 77
X Y
f h
In Young’s double-slit experiment setup with light of
medium - 2
e wavelength = 6000 Å, distance betwen the two slits is
g
2mm and distance between the plane of slits and the screen
(a) parallel beam in each medium in 2m. The slits are of equal intensity. When a sheet of glass
(b) convergent medium of refractive index 1.5 (which permits only a fraction of the
incident light to pass through) and thickness 8000 Å is placed
(c) divergent beam in each medium
in front of the lower slit, it is observed that the intensity at a
(d) divergent beam in one medium and convergent beam point P, 0.15 mm above the central maxima, does not change.
in the other medium.
WAVE OPTICS 123
y
S1
S2
76. The phase difference at point P without inserting the slab is
(a) 3 /4 (b) /4
(c) 2 (d) /3
77. Intensity at point P is
(a) 3I0 (b) I0
(c) 2I0 (d) 8I0
WAVE OPTICS 124
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
(a) What is the shape of the interference fringes on the
1. In a double slit experiment instead of taking slits of
screen ?
equal widths, one slit is made twice as wide as the
other. Then, in the interference pattern (2000) (b) Calculate the ratio of the minimum to the maximum
intensities in the interference fringes formed near the
(a) the intensities of both the maxima and the minima
point P (shown in the figure).
increase
(c) If the intensity at point P corresponds to a maximum,
(b) the intensity of the maxima increases and the minima
has zero intensity calculate the minimum distance through which the
reflecting surface AB should be shifted so that the
(c) the intensity of the maxima decreases and that of the
intensity at P again becomes maximum.
minima increases
(d) the intensity of the maxima decreases and the minima 4. Two beams of light having intensities I & 4I interfere to
has zero intensity. produce a fringe pattern on a screen. The phase difference
between the beams is /2 at point A and at point B. Then
2. A vessel ABCD of 10 cm width has two small slits S1 and
S2 sealed with identical glass plates of equal thickness. the difference between the resultant intensities at A and B
The distance between the slits is 0.8 mm. POQ is the line is (2001)
perpendicular to the plane AB and passing through O, (a) 4I (b) 2I
the middle point of S1 and S2. A monochromatic light
(c) 5I (d) 7I
source is kept at S, 40 cm below P and 2 m from the
vessel, to illuminate the slits as shown in the figure below. 5. In Young’s double slit experiment, 12 fringes are observed
Calculate the position of the central bright fringe on the to be formed in a certain segment of the screen when light
other wall CD with respect to the line QQ. Now, a liquid is of wavelength 600 nm is used. If the wavelength of light is
poured into the vessel and filled upto OQ. The central changed to 400 nm, number of fringes observed in the
bright fringe is found to be at Q. Calculate the refractive same segment of the screen in given by (2001)
index of the liquid. (2001)
(a) 12 (b) 18
A (c) 24 (d) 30
D
6. In the ideal double-slit experiment when a glass-plate
P S1
Q (refractive index 1.5) of thickness t is introduced in the
O
40 cm S2 path of one of the interfering beams (wavelength ), the
intensity at the position where the central maximum
S B C occurred previously remains unchanged. The minimum
2m 10m thickness of the glass-plate is (2002)
(a) 2 (b) 2/3
3. A point source S emitting light of wavelength 600 nm is
placed at a very small height h above a flat reflecting (c) /3 (d)
surface AB (see figure). The intensity of the reflected light 7. Monochromatic light of wavelength 400 nm and 560 nm
is 36% of the incident intensity. Interference fringes are are incident simultaneously and normally on double slit
observed on a screen placed parallel to the reflecting apparatus whose slit separation is 0.1 mm and screen
surface at a very large distance D from it. (2001) distance is 1 m. Distance between areas of total darkness
will be (2004)
P
Screen
(a) 4 mm (b) 5.6 mm
(c) 14 mm (d) 28 mm
D 8. In Young’s double slit experiment intensity at a point is (1/4)
S
of the maximum intensity. Angular position of this point is
h (2005)
–1 –1
A B (a) sin (/d) (b) sin (/2d)
–1 –1
(c) sin (/3d) (d) sin (/4d)
WAVE OPTICS 125
9. Column I : Shows four situations of standard Young’s
double slit arrangement with the screen placed far away
from slits, S1 and S2. In each of these cases S1P0= S2P0,
S1P1 S2 P1 and S1P2 S2 P4 , where is the (b)
4 3
wavelength of the light used. In the cases B, C and D, a
transparent sheet of refractive index and thickness t is
pasted on slit S2. The thickness of the sheets are different
in different cases. The phase difference between the light
waves reaching a point P on the screen from the two slits
is denoted by (P) and intensity by I (P). Match each
situation given in Column I with the statement(s) in
(c)
Column II valid for that situation. (2009)
Column I Column II
(a) 1 t 0 (p) (P0) = 0
(d)
(b) 1 t (q) (P1) = 0
4
11. In the Young’s double slit experiment using a
monochromatic light of wavelenght the path difference
(in terms of an interger n) corresponding to any point
having half the peak intensity is (2013)
(c) 1 t (r) (P1) = 0
(a) 2n 1
(b) 2n 1
2
2 4
(c) 2n 1 (d) 2n 1
8 16
3 12. A light source, which emits two wavelengths 1 = 400 nm
(d) 1 t (s) (P0) > I (P1) and 2 = 600 nm, is used Young’s double slit experiment. If
4
recorded fringe widths for 1 and 2 are 1 and 2 = and
the number of fringes for them within a distance y on one
(t) I (P2) > I (P1) side of the central maximum are m1 and m2 respectively,
10. A light ray travelling in glass medium is incident on glass- then : (2014)
air interface at an angle of incidence . The reflected (R) (a) 2 > 1
and transmitted (T) intensities, both as function of , are (b) m1 > m2
plotted. The correct sketch is : (2011) (c) from the central maximum, 3rd maximum of 2 overlaps
with 5th minimum of 1
(d) the angular separation of fringes of 1 is greater than
2 .
13. A light source, which emits two wavelengths 1 = 400 nm
(a) and 2 = 600 nm, is used in a Young’s double slit experiment.
If recorded fringe widths for 1 and 2 are 1 and 2 and the
number of fringes for them within a distance y on one side of
the central maximum are m1 and m2, respectively, then (2014)
WAVE OPTICS 126
(a) 2 > 1 16. Two coherent monochromatic point surface S1 and S2 of
(b) m1 > m2 wavelength = 600 nm are placed symmetrically on either
side of the center of the circle as shown. The sources are
(c) From the central maximum, 3rd maximum of 2 overlaps
separated by a distance d = 1.8 mm. This arrangement
with 5th minimum of 1.
produces interference fringes visible as alternate bright and
(d) The angular separation of fringes for 1 is greater than 2 dark spots on the circumference of the circle. The angular
14. While conducting the Young’s double slit experiment, a separation between two consecutive bright spots is .
student replaced the two slits with a large opaque plate in Which of the following options is/are correct ? (2017)
the x-y plane containing two small holes that act as two
coherent point sources (S1, S2) emitting light of wave-
length 600 nm. The student mistakenly placed the screen
parallel to the x-z plane (for z > 0) at a distance D = 3 m
from the mid-point of S1S2, as shown schematically in the
figure. The distance between the sources d = 0.6003 mm.
The origin O is at the intersection of the screen and the
line joining S1S2. Which of the following is(are) true of
the intensity pattern on the screen? (2016)
(a) The angular separation between two consecutive bright
spots decreases as we move from P1 to P2 along the first
quadrant
(b) A dark spot will be formed at the point P2\
(c) The total number of fringes produced between P1 and
P2 in the first quadrant is close to 3000
(d) At P2 the order of the fringe will be maximum.
17. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the slit separation d is
0.3 mm and the screen distance D is 1m. A parallel beam of
(a) Semi circular bright and dark bands centered at point O light of wavelength 600 nm is incident on the slits at angle
(b) Hyperbolic bright and dark bands with foci as shown in figure. On the screen, the point O is
symmetrically placed about O in the x-direction
equidistant from the slits and distance PO is 11.0 mm.
(c) The region very close to the point O will be dark
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
(d) Straight bright and dark bands parallel to the x-axis
(2019/Shift -2)
15. For an isosceles prism of angle A and refractive index , it
is found that the angle of minimum deviation m=A. Which
of the following options is/are correct? (2017)
(a) At minimum deviation, the incident angle i1 and the
refracting angle r1 at the first refracting surface are related
by r1 (i1 / 2)
(b) For this prism, the refractive index and the angle of
1 (a) For = 0, there will be constructive interference at point
prism A are related as A cos 1 P.
2 2
0.36
(c) For the angle of incidence i1 = A, the ray inside the (b) For α = degree, there will be destructive
π
prism is parallel to the base of the prism
interference at point P.
(d) For this prism, the emergent ray at the second surface
will be tangential to the surface when the angle of incidence 0.36
(c) For α = degree, there will be destructive
π
A
at the first surface is i1 sin 1 sin A 4cos2 1 cos A interference at point O.
2 (d) Fringe spacing depends on
WAVE OPTICS 127
18. A parallel beam of light strikes a piece of transparent glass 19. A glass plate of refractive index 1.5 is coated with a thin
layer of thickness t and refractive index 1.8. Light of
having cross section as shown in the figure below. Correct
wavelength travelling in air is incident normally on the
shape of the emergent wavefront will be (figures are layer. It is partly reflected at the upper and the lower
schematic and not drawn to scale) – surfaces of the layer and the two reflected rays interfere.
(2020/Shift -1) Write the condition for their constructive interference. If
= 648 nm, obtain the least value of t for which the rays
interfere constructively. (2000)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
WAVE OPTICS 128
WAVE OPTICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
129
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 RAY OPTICS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b) 1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (c)
5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (c) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (c) 12. (d) 9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (b) 12. (d)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (d) 16. (a) 13. (c) 14. (a) 15. (d) 16. (b)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (c) 20. (d) 17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(b) 24. (a) 21. (0.32) 22. (b) 23.(a) 24. (a)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (c) 25. (d) 26. (a) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (d) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (a) 29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (b) 33. (d) 34. (a) 35.(d) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (a) 37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (a) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (a, c) 43. (b) 44. (a) 41. (d) 42. (090.00) 43. (001.58) 44. (a)
45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (b) 45. (001.00) 46. (006.25) 47. (005.00) 48. (b)
49. (b) 50. (a) 51. (b) 52. (d) 49. (050.00) 50. (005.00) 51. (d) 52. (a)
53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (d) 56. (d) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (60.00)
57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (d) 60. (a) 57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (a)
61. (c) 62. (a) 63. (b) 64. (a)
65. (d) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (c)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (b) 72. (d)
73. (b) 74. (c) 75. (a) 76. (c)
77. (b) 78. (b) 79. (d) 80. (b)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (b)
85. (c) 86. (d) 87. (b) 88. (b)
89. (b) 90. (c) 91. (c) 92. (b)
93. (a) 94. (c)
ANSWER KEY 130
EXERCISE - 3 : EXERCISE - 4 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (d)
5. (d) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (d) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c) 9. (c) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (a) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (b) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (b) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(a) 24. (b)
25. (6) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (c)
29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (a)
33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(b) 36. (d) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35.(c,d) 36. (a,b,c)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (c) 37. (a,c) 38. (a,c) 39. (a,d) 40. (a,c,d)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (a,b,c) 41. (a,b,c) 42. (a,b,d) 43. (a,d)
45. (d) 46. (d) 47. (c) 48. (c) 44. (15cm, –3/2) 45. (a) 4° ; (b) –0.04°
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (a)
46. (1.6) 47. (a) zero ; 1500 Å
53. (a) 54. (a,b,c) 55. (a,c) 56. (a,c)
57. (a,b,c,d) 58. (a,b,c,d) 59. (a,d) 60. (b,c) 3 R
48. 49. (6.06m)
61. (b,c,d) 62. (a,d) 63. (a,c) 64. (b,c) 3 1
65. (a,b,c) 66. (a,b,c) 67. (a,c) 68. (a,c)
50. (0.09 m/s, 0.3 m/s) 51. (60°)
69. (a,c) 70. (b,d) 71. (b,c) 72. (a,c)
73. (225) 74. (36) 75. (2) 76. (3) 52. (a) 60° , (b) 60° 53. (7)
77. (2) 78. (80) 79. (d) 80. (d) 54. (2) 55. (8)
81. (c) 82. (a) 83. (c) 84. (d) 56. (50.00) 57. (0.69)
85. (c) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (a) 58. (1.00) 59. (002.00)
89. (a) 90. (a) 91. (a)
60. (c)
92. (A R, Q; B P, R;C P,S; D P, R) 61. (a) P,Q,R,S; (b) Q; (c) P,Q,R,S; (d) P,Q,R,S
93. (A S; B P;C S; D Q)
62. (A p, r; B q,s, t;C p, r, t; D q,s)
94. (a-r; b-s;c-q;d-q)
63. (d) 64. (b) 65. (130)
95. (a-p; b-r; c-q;d-s)
96. (a - p,r; b -q,r; c - q,r;d - q,r)
131
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 WAVE OPTICS
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (b)
5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (d) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (b) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (b) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (c) 16. (0.50)
17. (d) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a) 17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23.(a) 24. (a) 21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(c) 24. (a)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d) 25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (200.00)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(d) 36. (a,d) 33. (b) 34. (9.00) 35.(d) 36. (d)
37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (d) 40. (d) 37. (a) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (750.00)
41. (d) 42. (b,d) 43. (c) 44. (c) 41. (a) 42. (d)
45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (c)
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (d)
53. (a) 54. (c) 55. (a) 56. (b)
57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (b)
65. (a) 66. (b) 67. (a) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (c) 71. (d) 72. (b)
73. (c) 74. (d) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (c) 78. (d) 79. (d) 80. (c)
81. (c) 71. (a) 82. (a) 83. (a)
ANSWER KEY 132
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 1. (a)
5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a)
2. (2 cm about point Q on side CD, m = 1.0016)
9. (d) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (a)
3. (a) Circular ; (b) 1 : 16; (c) 300 nm
13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a)
4. (a) 5. (b)
17. (c) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a)
6. (a) 7. (d)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23.(a) 24. (d)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a-p,s) ; (b-q) ; (c-t) ; (d-r, s,t)
29. (c) 30. (b) 31. (b) 32. (d) 10. (c) 11. (b)
33. (c) 34. (c) 35.(c) 36. (b)
12. (a,b,c) 13. (a,b,c)
37. (a) 38. (0005) 39. (a) 40. (0000)
14. (a,c) 15. (a,c,d)
41. (c) 42. (d) 43. (d) 44. (c)
45. (b) 46. (b,d) 47. (a,c) 48. (a,d) 16. (c,d) 17. (b)
49. (a,c,d) 50. (b,c) 51. (0.2mm) 52. (20) 18. (a) 19. (90mm)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (c)
57. (c) 58. (b) 59. (a) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (a)
65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (d)
69. (a p; b q,s; c q,s;d r)
70. (a r; b s;c p;d q)
71. (a q; b p;c p;d q)
72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (a) 75. (a)
76. (c) 77. (c)
Note
2
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Private Limited
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
Vedantu Innovations Private Ltd.
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or
by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by
any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the
publishers.
Notice : Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best of the resources and
knowledge. Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book
from sources regarded as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this
book. However, we as authors and publishers are not to be held responsible for
unintentional mistakes that might have crept in. Having stated that, errors (if any)
brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged and rectified in upcoming
editions.
Printed by
Colours Imprint
475C, Adugodi Main Road,
8th Block, Koramangala, Bengaluru 560 095
www.coloursimprint.com
3
4
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
It gives me immense pleasure to present to you a Ready Reckoner and Practice booklet by
Vedantu - ‘TATVA’. Tatva in Sanskrit, means a collection of “Core” content/truth and isn’t that
what Vedantu brings to your table - the Core? Vedantu, at all times, ensures that you have
easy accessibility to a collection of all essential concepts, theory, derivations, definitions, solved
examples, concept videos, and practice questions, important questions from competitive
examinations and pleased to say that all questions come with detailed solutions.
Tatva is the result of the constant endeavour and research done by our highly experienced
team of teachers and subject experts to compile relevant content for you to succeed in IIT JEE/
NEET and Olympiads. We strongly believe and vouch for the effectiveness and relevance of
this booklet to grab the desired rank in IIT JEE/ NEET.
Key Points on ‘How to obtain optimal benefits from ‘Tatva’ ?
We suggest starting with the Practice of ‘Tatva questions’ at the end of a chapter
after revision and Practice of basic questions.
For daily practice of questions attempt we strongly recommend session assignments
along with Vedantu live sessions
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you
revise concepts, mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary and eventually
clear all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
Attempt Tatva questions post revision of 11th and 12th Grade topics. Take one topic at
a time to solve. Attempt any revision test series for NEET/JEE once you have resolved
Tatva questions. Following this will not only help you during revision but also give a
major boost to your confidence.
First solve basic level questions and gradually progress to the advanced level.
Practice basic level questions regularly all through your journey of preparation.
Your success is our dream-come-true
I wish you all the best.
Anand Prakash
Founder, Academic Head
Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing
Top Ranks in JEE/NEET and Olympiads. He has
personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6,7 (JEE
ADVANCED) and AIR-1, 7, 9 (AIIMS), and thousands of
more students who have successfully cleared these
competitive exams in the last few years.
5
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Theodore Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of the creative Vedans who The managers who understood every aspect of what
strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you. Our the leadership were trying to accomplish and brought
heartfelt thanks to the Super Vedans who give wings so much of their own to the table and managed the
to the vision of Vedantu. execution of ‘Tatva’ immaculately.
Our leaders who have been our guiding light and Kiran Kumari Harish Rao
encouragement in every step: Bhavya Bangera Shraddha
Vamsi Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Sir Sushmitha Akshatha
Charubak Chakrabarti
Our gratitude to the insightful leadership and
guidance of our leaders who dreamt about ‘Tatva’, Our heartfelt gratitude to ourcreative content
steered the project in the right direction and were developers, the dedicated master teachers and the
instrumental in making this dream into a reality: DTP team who have put in their hard work, insights,
eagerness to execute and nurtured Tatva into ‘your
Sahil Bhatia Shubam Gupta ready handbook’ and to bring positive learning
Arshad Shahid Ajay Mittal experience to you.
JaideepSontakke Sudhanshu Jain
Physics Team
Teachers SME DTP
Aarzoo Walia Satyam Kumar Atul Singh (Team Lead) Jitender Singh
Ishani Mitra Santosh Kumar Nanda Pukhraj Singh Yamala Santhosh Kumar
Shubham Ghar Anmol Gupta Saurabh Sharma
Anand M Rohit Thakur
Vijayalakshmi Viswanathan
Pritesh Ranjan
Ravneet Wadhwa
A loud shout out for our media team - a bunch of creative minds with contagious energy. We cannot thank
them enough.
Suraj Bhan Singh
Gadde Ranjith
Ranjeeth Ramesh
Sreyoshi Biswas
Devika Ramachandran
Special thanks and appreciation for the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal,
Dipshi Shetty, Mohamed Anzar and Anuska Singh.
The journey of the imagination to the reality of ‘Tatva’ would not have been possible without our enthusiastic
Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated team of Teachers and our talented Tech
Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MODERN PHYSICS
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 8
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 18
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 39
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 46
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 57
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 69
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 135
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Solved Examples ..................................................................................................................... 91
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 94
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 101
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions ....................................................................... 109
Exercise - 4 : Previous Year JEE Advanced Questions .......................................................... 117
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 138
COMMUNICATION
Theory ..................................................................................................................................... 120
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions ............................................................................... 127
Exercise - 2 : Previous Year JEE Mains Questions ................................................................. 131
Answer Key ............................................................................................................................. 140
01
MODERN PHYSICS
Chapter 01 9
MODERN PHYSICS
1. NUCLEUS 1.4925 10 10
Since, 1 MeV = 1.602 × 10–13 J, we have eV
1.1 Isotopes 1.602 10 13
The atoms of an element, which have the same atomic number Or 1 a.m.u = 931.5 MeV
but different mass numbers, are called isotopes. 1.6 Nuclear size
16 17 18 35 37
(i) 8O , 8O , 8O (ii) 17cl , 17Cl
The volume of the nucleus is directly proportional to the number
206 207 208
(iii) 82Pb , 82Pb , 82Pb . of nucleons (mass number) constituting the nucleus. If R is the
radius of the nucleus having mass number A, then
1.2 Isotones
4
The atoms whose nuclei have same number of neutrons are called R3 A
3
isotones. 6C14, 7N15
Or R A1/3 Or R = R0 A1/3 R0 = 1.2 × 10–15m
1.3 Isobars
1.7 Nuclear density
The atoms, which have same mass number but different atomic Mass of the nucleus of the atom of mass number A = A a.m.u
numbers, are called isobars.
= A × 1.660565 × 10–27 kg. If R is radius of the nucleus, then
(i) 1H3 and 1He3 (ii) 2Li7 and 4Be7
4 4 4
(iii) 28Ar40 and 29Ca40 (iv) 32Ge76 and 34Se76 Volume of nucleus = R3 = (R0A1/3)3 = R 30 A
3 3 3
1.4 Atomic mass unit Taking R0 = 1.2 × 10–15m, we have
mass of nucleus
The atomic mass unit (a.m.u) is a very small unit of mass and it is Density of the nucleus, =
found to be very convenient in nuclear physics. volume of nucleus
Atomic mass unit is defined as 1/12th of the mass of one 6C12 A 1.66065 10 27
atom. 3
4 / 3 1.2 10 15 A
According to Avogadro’s hypothesis, number of atoms in 12 g
of 6C12 is equal to Avogadro number i.e. 6.023 × 1023. = 2.26 × 1017 kg m–3 (independent of A)
12 Discussion :
Therefore, the mass of one carbon atom (6C12) is i.e. The density of the nuclei of all the atoms is same as it is
6.023 10 23
–26
1.992678 × 10 kg. independent of mass number.
The high density of the nucleus ( 1017 kg m–3) suggests
1 the compactness of the nucleus. Such examples of high
Therefore, 1 a.m.u. 1.992678 10 26 kg
12 densities are met in the form of neutron stars.
or 1 a.m.u. = 1.660565 × 10–27 kg
1.8 Mass defect
1.5 Energy equivalent of atomic mass unit
The difference between the sum of the masses of the nucleons
According to Einstein’s mass-energy equivalence relation, the constituting a nucleus and the rest mass of the nucleus is known as
energy equivalent of mass m is given by E = mc2 mass defect. It is denoted by m.
Where c is speed of light. Let us calculate the mass defect in case of the nucleus of an atom
Suppose that m = 1 a.m.u = 1.660565 × 10–27 kg z
XA. The nucleus of the atom contains Z protons and (AZ)
neutrons. Therefore, if mN (zXA) is mass of the nucleus of the
Since, c = 2.998 × 108 ms1, the energy equivalent of 1 a.m.u is
given by 1 a.m.u = (1.660565 × 10–27 kg) × (2.998 × 108 ms1)2 atom ZXA, then the mass defect is given by
= 1.4925 × 10–10 J m = [Zmp + (AZ)mnmN(ZXA)]
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 10
The binding energy of a nucleus may be defined as the energy the number of atoms present at that time. The rate of
equivalent to the mass defect of the nucleus. It may be measured disintegration of the sample cannot be altered by changing
as the work required to be done to separate the nucleon an infinite the external factors, such as pressure, temperature etc. It is
distance apart, so that they no longer intract with each other. known as radioactive decay law.
According to radioactive decay law, the rate of disintegration at
If m is mass defect of a nucleus, then according to Einstein’s
any time t is directly proportional to the number of atoms present
mass-energy relation, binding energy of the nucleus = m c2
(in joule). dN dN
at time t i.e. N or N.
Here, mass defect m has to be measured in kilogram. In case, dt dt
mass defect is measured in a.m.u., then
Where the constant of proportionally is called decay constant of
Binding energy of the nucleus = m × 931.5 (in MeV)
the radioactive sample. It is also known as disintegration constant
Binding energy = [Zmp + (AZ)mn mN (ZXA)] × 931.5 MeV
or transformation constant. Its value depends upon the nature of
1.9 Binding Energy Per Nucleon the radioactive sample. Further, the negative sign indicates that
the number of the atoms of the sample decreases with the passage
The binding energy per nucleon is the average energy required
to extract one nucleon from the nucleus. of time.
binding energy dN
Thus, binding energy per nucleon From equation, we have dt.
A N
N t
1.10 Packing Fraction dN
Inhigrating N N 0 –λdt
Packing fraction = (mass defect)/A. 0
1.11 Natural Radioactivity Or log N =t
e
N0
The spontaneous transformation of an element into another with
N
the emission of some particle (or particles) or electromagnetic Or t
N0 = e
radiation is called natural radioactivity.
Or N = N0et
1.11.1 Laws of Radioactivity Decay
Rutherford and Soddy studied the phenomenon of radioactivity 1.11.2 Radioactive Decay Constant
in details and formulated the following laws, known as the laws According to radioactive decay law, Integrating, we have
of radioactive decay: dN
N
1. Radioactivity is a spontaneous phenomenon and one dt
cannot predict, when a particular atom in a given
radioactive sample will undergo distintegration. dN / dt
Or
N
2. When a radioactive atom disintegrates, either an -particle
(nucleus of helium) or a -particle (electron) is emitted. Hence, radioactive decay constant of a substance (radioactive) may
be defined as the ratio of its instantaneous rate of disintegration to
3. The emission of an -particle by a radioactive atom results
the number of atoms present at that time.
in a daughter atom, whose atomic number is 2 units less
Again, N = N0 e t
and mass number is 4 units less than that of the parent
If t = 1/
atom. then, N = N0 e 1/ = 1/e N0 = N0/(2.718) = 0.368 N0
A decay
Z2 Y A 4 Hence, radioactive decay constant of a substance may also be
ZX
defined as the reciprocal of the time, after which the number of
4. The emission of a -particle by a radioactive atom results in atoms of a radioactive substance decreases to 0.368 (or 36.8%) of
a daughter atom, whose atomic number is 1 unit more but their number present initially.
mass number is same as that of the parent atom.
A decay 1.11.3 Half Life
ZX Z1Y A
Consider that a radioactive sample contains N0 atoms at time
5. The number of atoms disintegrating per second of a
t = 0. Then, the number of atoms left behind after time t is given
radioactive sample at any time is directly proportional to
by N = N0 e t
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 11
From the definition of half life, it follows that when t = t1/2, N = N0/2. 1 curie (ci) = 3.7 × 1010 disintegrations s1
Setting the above condition in equation, we have There is also another unit of radioactivity, called Rutherford (rd).
N 0 / 2 N0 e t1/2 The activity of a radioactive sample is called one Rutherford, if it
undergoes 106 disintegration per second.
Or e t 1/ 2
1/ 2 Or e t1/ 2 2 1 Rutherford (rd) = 106 disintegration s1
Or T = loge 2 = 2.303 log10 2 = 2.303 × 0.3010 = 0.693
1.12 Nuclear fission
0.693 The process of splitting of a heavy nucleus into two nuclei of
Or t1/ 2
nearly comparable masses with liberation of energy is called
nuclear fission.
Thus, half life of a radioactive substance is inversely proportional
to its decay constant and is a characteristic property of its nucleus. 92
U235 + 0n1 [92U236] 56Ba141+ 36Kr92 + 30n1 + Q
It cannot be altered by any known method. Neutron reproduction factor is defined as the ratio of the rate of
production of neutrons to the rate of loss of neutrons. Thus,
1.11.4 Mean life or average life
rate of production of neutrons
The average life of a radioactive substance is defined as the k
average time for which the nuclei of the atoms of the radioactive rate of loss of neutrons
substance exist. It is defined by tavg. A fission reaction will be steady, in case k = 1. In case k > 1, the
fission reaction will accelerate and it will retard, in case k < 1.
1
t avg
1.12.1 Nuclear Reactor
1.11.5 Activity of radioactive substance Main parts and their functions :-
1. Fuel: It is a fissionable material mostly U235.
The activity of a radioactive substance may be defined as the
rate at which the nuclei of its atoms in the sample disintegrate. 2. Moderator: It is used to slow down the neutrons released
during the fission. The most common moderators are water,
If a radioactive sample contains N atoms at any time t, then its
heavy water and graphite.
dN 3. Control Rods: these rods are cadmium or boron, which control
activity at time t is defined as A =
dt the chain reaction by absorbing neutrons.
The negative sign shows that with the passage of time, the activity 4. Coolant and Heat Exchanger: The coolant takes away heat
of the radioactive substance decreases. from the reactor core and in turn heats the water in the heat
exchanger to produce steam. The commonly used coolants
dN are liquid sodium and heavy water.
Since according to the radioactive decay, law N the
dt 5. Radiation Shielding: These are thick concrete walls, which
equation may be expressed as A = N. Since, N =N0 et, we have stop the radiations from going out.
1.12.2 Radiation Hazards
A N 0 e t
Or 1. The exposure to radioation induces delecterious genetic
A A 0 e t effects.
Here, N0 = A0 is activity of the radioactive sample at time t = 0. 2. The strong -ray exposure can cause lung cancer.
3. The exposure to fast and slow neutrons can cause
1.11.6 Units of activity blindness.
The activity of a radioactive sample may be expressed as 4. The exposure to neutrons, protons and -particles can
disintegration per second. The practical unit of activity of a cause damage to red blood cells.
radioactive sample is curie (ci). 5. The exposure to -particles can cause disastrous effects.
The activity of a radioactive sample is called one curie, if it 6. The strong exposures to protons and neutrons can cause
undergoes 3.7 × 1010 disintegrations per second. Thus, serious damage to productive organs.
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 12
1.12.3 Safety Measures from Radiation Hazards 3. FREE ELECTRONS IN METALS
Following precautions are observed by the workers engaged in Electron is a fundamental constituent of the atom. A metal
this field: contains free electrons, which move about freely through the
atomic spaces in a random fashion. But as soon as an electron
1. The radioisotopes are transferred in thick walled lead leaves the metal, immediately an equal positive charge is produced
containers and are kept in rooms with thick walls of leads. on the surface of the metal. As a result, the electron is pulled
2. The radioisotopes are handled with the help of remote back into the metal and hence remains confined to it. The pull on
control devices. the electrons at the surface is found to depend on the nature of
metal surface and is described by a characteristic of the metal,
3. The workers are asked to wear lead aprons. called work function.
4. The radioactive contamination of the work area is avoided
Work Function
at all costs.
The minimum energy, which must be supplied to the electron so
2. CATHODE RAYS that it can just come out of the metal surface is called the work
function of the metal.
When a potential difference of 10 to 15 kV is applied across
the two electrodes of a discharge tube and pressure is reduced This process is called electron emission and may be achieved in
the following ways
to 0.01mm of mercury, the rays known as cathode rays are emitted
from the cathode. These rays are independent of the nature of (i) Thermoionic emission. In this process of electron
the gas in the discharge tube and their direction of propagation emission, the additional energy is supplied in the form of
heat. The emitted electrons are known as thermo-electrons.
is not affected by the position of the anode.
(ii) Photoelectric emission. In this process, as already
Properties of Cathode Rays discussed, the additional energy is supplied by means of
electromagnetic radiation. The emitted electrons are
Cathode rays have the following properties
known as photoelectrons.
1. Cathode rays travel along straight lines and cast sharp (iii) Secondary emission, in this process, the fast moving
shadows of the objects placed in their path. electrons on collision with the metal surface knock out
electrons, called the secondary electrons.
2. Cathode rays are shot out normally from the surface of
the cathode. (iv) Field emission. In this process, the electron are forced
out of metal surface by strong electric field
3. The direction of the cathode rays is not affected by the
position of the anode. 4. PHOTOELECTRIC EFFECT
4. The cathode rays exert mechanical pressure. The phenomenon of ejection from a metal surface, when light of
sufficiently high frequency falls upon it is known as the photoelectric
5. The cathode rays produce heat, when they fall upon
effect. The electrons so emitted are called photoelectrons.
matter.
Experimental Study of Photoelectric Effect : The apparatus
6. The cathode rays are deflected by electric and magnetic consists of an evacuated glass tube fitted with two electrodes.
fields. The electrode E is called emitting electrode and the other electrode
7. When cathode rays strike a solid target of high atomic C is called collecting electrode.
weight such as tungsten, they produce a highly When a suitable radiation is incident on the electrode E, electrons
penetrating radiation called the X-rays. are ejected from it. The electrons, which have sufficient kinetic
energy, reach the electrode C despite its negative polarity. The
8. Cathode rays ionise the gas through which they pass.
potential difference between the two electrodes acts as the
9. Cathode rays can excite fluorescence. retarding potential. As the collecting electrode is made more and
more negative, fewer and fewer electrons will reach the cathode
10. Cathode rays can produce chemical changes.
and the photo-electric current recorded by the ammeter with fall.
11. Cathode rays can penetrate through thin sheets of matter In case, the retarding potential equals V0, called the stopping
without puncturing them. potential, no electron will reach the cathode and the current will
become zero. In such a case, the work done by stopping potential
12. Cathode rays are found to have velocity upto one tenth
is equal to the maximum kinetic energy of the electrons i.e.
of the velocity of light.
eV0 = 1/2 m v2max
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 13
Light Rays Working - Photoemissive Cells : It consists of two electrodes, a
cathode C and anode a enclosed in a highly evacuated glass
+ V –
bulb. The cathode C is a semi-cylindrical plate coated with a
~ ~
photosensitive material, such as a layer of cesium deposited on
V silver oxide. The anode A is in the form of a wire, so that it does
A not obstruct the path of the light falling on the cathode.
When light of frequency above the threshold frequency for the
cathode surface is incident on the cathode, photoelectrons are
4.1 Laws of Photoelectric Emission emitted. If a potential difference of about 10V is applied between
1. The emission of photoelectrons takes place only, when the anode and cathode, the photoelectrons are attracted towards
the frequency of the incident radiation is above a certain the anode and the microammeter connected in the circuit will
critical value, characteristic of that metal. The critical record the current.
value of frequency is known as the threshold frequency
for the metal of the emitting electrode. 4.4 Applications of Photoelectric Cells
2. The emission of photoelectrons starts as soon as light 1. It is used in a television studio to convert the light and
falls on metal surface. shade of the object into electric currents for transmission
3. The maximum kinetic energy with which an electron is of picture.
emitted from a metal surface is independent of the intensity
of the light and depends only upon its frequency. 2. It is used in a photographic camera for the automatic
4. The number of photoelectrons emitted i.e. photoelectric adjustment of aperture.
current is independent of the frequency of the incident 3. It is used for automatic counting of the number of persons
light and depends only upon its intensity. entering a hall, a stadium etc.
4.2 Einstein's Photoelectric Equation 4. It is used for automatic switching of street lights and
traffic signals.
Einstein’s photo electric equation according is einsten,
light of furquency v, when it interactes with matter, be- 5. It is used for raising a fire alarm in the event of accidental
haves as of discrete packet of energy known as photon. fire in buildings, factories etc.
Energy of a photon E = hv, h is Plonck’s constant. The 6. It is used in burglar’s alarms for houses, bank and
minimum energy required to remove an electron from the
treasuries.
metal surface is known is photo electric work function of
the metal = hv0, where v0 = threshold frequencey. 5. DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION
It a photon of energy hv falls on the surface of a metal and
is hv0 is the work function of the metal, then hv = hv0 + 1/2 The various phenomena concerning rasdiation can be
mV2max. This is Einstein’s photo electric equation. divided into three parts:
4.3 Photoelectric Cell (i) The phenomena such as interference, diffraction,
polarisation etc. in which interaction of radiation takes
A photoelectric cell is an arrangement, which converts light
places with radiation itself. Such phenomena can be
energy into electrical energy. Photoelectric cells are of following
explained on the basis of electromagnetic (wave) nature
three types:
of radiation only.
1. Photoemissive cells 2. Photovoltaic cells
(ii) The phenomena such as photoelectric effect, Compton
3. Photoconductive cells
effect, etc. in which interaction of radiation takes place
A photo emissive cell may be of vacuum type or gas filled type. with matter. Such phenomena can be explained on the
Light
basis of quantum (particle) nature of radiation.
Rays
C + (iii) The phenomena such as rectilinear propagation,
reflection, refraction, etc. in which neither the interaction
of radiation takes place with radiation, nor of radiation
with matter. Such phenomena can be explained on the
basis of either of the two natures of the radiation.
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 14
6. DE-BROGLIE WAVES 4. The matter waves are not electromagnetic in nature. If the
velocity of the particle is comparable to the velocity of
Loius-Broglie put forward a bold hypothesis that matter
light, then mass of the particle is given by
should also possess dual nature.
The following observations led him to the duality hypothesis for m0
m=
matter. 1 v2 / c2
1. The whole energy in this universe is in the form of matter
and electromagnetic radiation. 6.2 De-Broglie Wavelength of Electron
2. The nature loves symmetry. As the radiation has got Consider that an electron of mass m and charge e is accelerated
dual nature, matter should also possess dual nature. through a potential difference V. If E is the energy acquired by
Thus, according to de-Broglie, a wave is associated with every the particle, then
moving particle. These waves are called de-Broglie waves or E = eV …(i)
matter waves. According to quantum theory of radiation, energy If v is the velocity of electron, then
of a photon is given by
E=h …(i) 2E
E = 1/2 m2 or v = …(ii)
Further, the energy of a relativistic particle is given by m
Now, de-Broglie wavelength of electron is given by
2 2
E m C
0 p2c2
h h
= m m 2 E/m
Since photon is a particle of zero rest mass, setting m0 = 0 in the
above equation, we have
h
E = pc …(ii) Or = …(iii)
2mE
From equation (i) and (ii) we have
substituting the value of E, we get
pc = h
h
h h = …(iv)
or p ( c = ) 2meV
c
Setting m = 9.1 × 1031 kg; e = 1.6 × 1019 C and h = 6.62 × 1034 Js,
we get
h
p
12.27
= ×1010 m
Therefore, the wavelength of the photon is given by V
h 12.27
…(iii) Or = A …(v)
p V
Hence, de-Broglie wavelength is given by For example, the de-Broglie wavelength of electrons, when
accelerated through a potential difference of 100 volt, will be
h
…(iv) 12.27
m
1.227 A
=
100
This is called de-Broglie relation.
Thus, the wavelength of de-Broglie wave associated with 100 eV
6.1 Conclusion electrons is of the order of the wavelength of X-rays.
1. Lighter the particle, greater is its de-Broglie wavelength. 7. THOMSON’S ATOM MODEL
2. The faster the particle moves, smaller is its de-Broglie
wavelength. The positive charge is uniformly distributed over the
entire sphere and the electrons are embedded in the sphere of
3. The de-Broglie wavelength of –particle is independent
positive charges just like seeds in a watermelon or plums in the
of the charge or nature of the particle.
pudding. For this
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 15
reason, Thomson’s atom model is also known as 8.1 Rutherford’s Atom Model
plum-pudding model. The total positive charge inside the atom
is equal to the total negative charge carried by electrons, so that On the basis of the results of -scattering experiment, Rutherford
every atom is electrically neutral. If the atom gets slightly suggested the following picture of the atom:
perturbed, the electrons in the atoms oscillate about their 1. Atom may be regarded as a sphere of diameter 10–10 m but
equilibrium position and result in the emission of radiation of whole of the positive charge and almost the entire mass
definite frequencies in the form of infra-red, visible or ultra-violet of the atom is concentrated in a small central core called
light. nucleus having diameter of about 10–14 m.
Failure of Thomson’s Atom Model 2. The nucleus is surrounded by electrons. In other words,
the electrons are spread over the remaining part of the
It had to be discarded, because of the following reasons: atom leaving plenty of empty space in the atom.
1. It could not explain the origin of the spectral lines in the
8.2 Drawbacks of Rutherford’s Atom Model
form of series as in case of hydrogen atom.
2. It could not account for the scattering of -particles through 1. When the electrons revolve round the nucleus, they are
large angles as in case of Rutherford’s -scattering continuously accelerated towards the centre of the
experiment. nucleus. According to Lorentz, an accelerated charged
particle should radiate energy continuously. Therefore,
8. RUTHERFORD’S ALPHA SCATTERING in the atom, a revolving electron should continuously
EXPERIMENT OBSERVATIONS emit energy and hence the radius of its path should go on
decreasing and ultimately it should fall into the nucleus.
1. Most of -particles were found to pass through the gold However, electrons revolve round the nucleus without
foil without any appreciable deflection. falling into it. Therefore, Rutherford’s atom model cannot
2. The different -particles in passing through the gold foil explain the stability of the atom.
undergo different amounts of deflections. A large number 2. If the Rutherford’s atom model is true, the electron can
of -particles suffer fairly large deflections. revolve in orbits of all possible radii and hence it should
3. A very small number of -particles (about 1 in 8000) emit continuous energy spectrum. However, the atoms
practically retracted their paths or suffered deflection of like hydrogen possess line spectrum.
nearly 180º.
8.3 Distance of Closest Approach
4. The graph between the total number of –particles N()
scattered through angle and the scattering angle was Consider an -particle of mass m possesses initial velocity u,
found to be as shown in fig. when it is at a large distance from the nucleus of an atom having
atomic number Z. At the distance of closest approach, the kinetic
energy of -particle is completely converted into potential
energy. Mathematically.
2
2
1 2e Ze r 1 . 2 Ze
1/2 mu = . 0
40 1/ 2 mu 2
4 0 r0
The experimental observations led Rutherford to the
following conclusions:-
+2e +Ze
1. Since most of the -particles passed undeviated, the atom
m u
has a lot of empty space in it.
r0
2. Since fast and the heavy -particles could be deflected
even through 180º, the whole of the positive charge and
practically the entire mass of the atom was confined to an
8.4 Impact Parameter
extremely small central core. It was called nucleus. Since 1
in about 8000 -particles is deflected through 180º, the size The scattering of an alpha particle from the nucleus of an atom
of the nucleus is about 1/10000th of the size of the atom. depends upon the impact parameter.
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 16
Impact Parameter of the alpha particle is defined as the (ii) A stable orbit is that in which the angular momentum of
perpendicular distance of the velocity vector of the alpha particle the electron about nucleus is an integral (n) multiple of
from the centre of the nucleus, when it is far away from the atom.
h h
It is denoted by b. . i.e. mvr = n ; n = 1 , 2 , 3 , .......(n 0).
2 2
1 Ze 2 cot / 2 (iii) The electron can absorb or radiate energy only if the
b= .
4 0 1 / 2 mu 2 electron jumps from a lower to a higher orbit or falls from
a higher to a lower orbit.
(iv) The energy emitted or absorbed is a light photon of
frequency and of energy E = h
10.1 For hydrogen atom : (Z = atomic number = 1)
h
(i) Ln = angular momentum in the nth orbit = n .
2
(ii) rn = radius of nth circular orbit = (0.529 Aº) n2 ;
(1Aº = 10-10 m) ; rn n2.
8.5 Discussion
13.6 eV
The following inference can be drawn from the above equation: (iii) En Energy of the electron in the nth orbit = i.e.
n2
1. If the impact parameter b is large, then cot /2 is also large
1
i.e. the angle of scattering is small and vice-versa. En
n2
Thus, if an -particle has large impact parameter, it gets
Note:-
scattered through a very small angle and may practically
go undeviated and if the -particle has small impact Total energy of the electron in an atom is negative,
parameter, it will be scattered through a large angle. indicating that it is bound.
2. If the impact parameter b is zero, then cot /2 = 0 or
/2 = 90º or = 180º. 13.6 V
Binding Energy (BE)n = – En = .
9. PHOTON n2
A photon is a packet of energy. It possesses energy (iv) En2 En1 = Energy emitted when an electron jumps
given by, E = h from n2th orbit to n1th orbit (n2 > n1) .
34
Where h = 6.62 × 10 Js is Plank’s constant and is
1 1
frequency of the photon. If is wavelength of the photon, E = (13.6 ev) 2 2 .
then, c = n1 n 2
Hence, c = 3 × 108 ms1 J velocity of light. Therefore, E = h E = h ; = frequency of spectral line emitted .
= hc/ 1
v wave no. [ no. of waves in unit length (1m)]
Energy of a photon is usually expressed in electron volt
(eV). 1eV = 1.6 × 1019 J
1 1 1
The bigger units are keV and MeV. =R 2 2 .
n
1 n 2
1keV = 1.6 × 1016 and 1 MeV = 1.6 × 1013 J
Where R = Rydberg's constant for hydrogen = 1.097 ×
10. BOHR ATOMIC MODEL 107 m-1 .
(v) For hydrogen like atom/species of atomic number Z :
Bohr adopted Rutherford model of the atom & added some
arbitrary conditions. These conditions are known as his Bohr radius 2 n2
rnz = n 0.529 A ;
postulates : Z Z
(i) The electron in a stable orbit does not radiate energy . i.e.
Z2
m v2 k z e2 Enz = (– 13.6) ev
2 n2
r r
Rz = RZ2 – Rydberg's constant for element of atomic no. Z .
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 17
Note:-
If motion of the nucleus is also considered, then m is
replaced by .
Where = reduced mass of electron – nucleus system
= mM/(m+M) .
Z2
In this case En = (–13.6 ev) 2 . , me - mass of electron
n me
30 40 50 50 70 80 90
10.2 Spectral Series Wavelength (pm)
(i) Lyman Series : (Landing orbit n = 1) .
That there is a minimum wavelength below which no X–
1 1 ray is emitted. This is called the cutoff wavelength or the threshold
Ultraviolet region R 2 2 ; n2 > 1
wavelength.
1 n2
For certain sharply defined wavelengths, the intensity
(ii) Balmer Series : (Landing orbit n = 2)
of X–rays is very large as marked K, K. These X–rays are known
as characteristics X-rays. Other wavelengths the intensity varies
Visible region R 1 1 ; n2 > 2
2 2 gradually and these X-rays are called continuous x-rays.
2 n2
Wavelengths of continuous x rays is given by
(iii) Paschan Series : (Landing orbit n = 3)
hc hc
min , where V is the accelerating voltage of
1 1 E eV
In the near infrared region R 2 2 ; n2 > 3
3 n2 electrons.
(iv) Bracket Series : (Landing orbit n = 4)
K EK
1 1
In the mid infrared region R 2 2 ; n2 > 4
4 n2
(v) Pfund Series : (Landing orbit n = 5)
L EL
1 1
In far infrared region R 2 2 ; n2 > 5
5 n 2 M EM
In all these series n2 = n1 + 1 is the line N EN
= n1 + 2 is the line E=0
= n1 + 3 is the line .... etc.
where n1 = Landing orbit Wavelength of characteristic spectrum
11. X–RAYS hc
for K
EK EL
V
hc hc
glass
anode
for K , for L ,
chamber EK EM E L EM
C
water
– 3
T
–
F 2
W (Z – b)
filament 1
target
window X-rays
x rays are emitted when fast moving electrons are stopped 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
by a metal target of high atomic number.
X ray spectrum Atomic number
SCAN CODE
MODERN PHYSICS
MODERN PHYSICS 18
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
h W
For photoelectric effect in sodium, the figure shows the VS 2 v2
plot of cut-off voltage versus frequency of incident e e
radiation. Calculate (i) threshold frequency (ii) work
Subtracting VS VS h (v2 v1)
function for sodium. 2 1 e
Sol. 6.4 1034 15 15
= (8 × 10 – 4 × 10 )
1.6 1019
= 16 volt.
Example - 3
o
Ultraviolet light of wavelength 2271 A from a 100 W
mercury source irradiates a photocell made of molybdenum
metal. If the stopping potential is –1.3 V, estimate the work
function of the metal. How would the photocell respond
5 –2
to a high intensity (~ 10 Wm ) red light of wavelength
o
6328 A produced by a He-Ne laser ?
(i) The threshold frequency is the frequency of incident light –34 8
at which kinetic energy of ejected photoelectron is zero. (h = 6.63 × 10 Js, c = 3 × 10 m/s)
From fig. threshold frequency
14
Sol. Einstein’s photoelectric equation is
v0 = 4.5 × 10 Hz
(ii) Work function, W = hv0 hc c
Ek = hv – W E k W sin ce v
–34 14
= 6.6 × 10 × 4.5 × 10 joule
Kinetic energy Ek = eV0,
6.6 1034 4.5 1014
= eV hc
1.6 1019 Work function W = eV0 ...(1)
= 1.85 eV o
–10
Given = 2271 A = 2271 × 10 m, V0 = 1.3 V
Example - 2
6.63 10 34 3 108 –19
By how much would the stopping potential for a Work function W = – 1.6 × 10 × 1.3
227110 10
given photosensitive surface go up if the frequency
–19 –19 –19
of the incident radiations were to be increased from = 8.76 × 10 – 2.08 × 10 = 6.68 × 10 J
15 15
4 × 10 Hz to 8 × 10 Hz ?
6.68 10 19
= = 4.2 eV
1.6 10 19
Sol. Stopping potential VS is given by
h W hc
eVS = hv – W VS = v Threshold wavelength 0 is given by W =
e e 0
15
when v1 = 4 × 10 Hz, Vs = VS (say) 1
hc 6.63 10 34 3 108 –7 o
0 19 m = 2.977 × 10 m = 2977 A
15
when v2 = 8 × 10 Hz, Vs = VS (say) W 6.68 10
2
As given wavelength 6328 Å is greater than threshold
h W
VS1 v1 wavelength 0 = 2977 Å, the photocell will not respond to
e e
red light produced by He-Ne laser, however intense it may be.
MODERN PHYSICS 19
Example - 4
6.63 1034
Define the term work function of a metal. The threshold =
2 9.11031 1.6 1019 100
frequency of a metal is f0. When the light of frequency 2f0
is incident on the metal plate, the maximum velocity of –10
= 1.227 × 10 m = 1.227 Å
electrons emitted is v1. When the frequency of the incident
radiation is increased to 5 f0, the maximum velocity of This wavelength belongs to X-ray spectrum.
electrons emitted is v2. Find the ratio of v1 to v2.
Example - 7
A particle is moving three times as fast as an electron. The
Sol. Work function : The work function of a metal is defined as
ratio of the de Broglie wavelength of the particle to that of
the minimum energy required to free an electron from its –4
an electron is 1.813 × 10 . Calculate the particle’s mass and
surface binding. –31
identify the particles. Mass of electron = 9.11 × 10 kg.
1 2
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is hv = hv0 + 2 mv
h
Sol. The de Broglie wavelength
In first case v = 2f0, v0 = f0, v = v1 mv
1 1
h2f0 = hf0 + 2 mv12 2 mv12 If e and p are wavelengths of electron and particle
= hf0 ...(1) respectively, then
In second case, v = 5f0, v0 = f0, v = v2 h h
e and p
1 1 m e ve m p vp
h(5f0) = hf0 + 2 mv22 2 mv22
= 4hf0 ...(2) p m e ve
2 e mp vp
v 1 v
1
Dividing v1 4 v1 2 .
2 2 Given vp = 3ve
Example - 5 p
–4
= 1.813 × 10
e
Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of a neutron of kinetic
–27
energy 150 eV. mass of neutron = 1.67 × 10 kg
me V3
1.813 × 10 = m 3V
–4
h p 3
Sol. de Broglie wavelength
2mE K
mp 1
–19 –17
Here EK = 150 eV = 150 × 1.6 × 10 J = 2.4 × 10 J me 3 1.813 10 4
3
6.63 10 34 –12 = 1.838 × 10
m = 2.335 × 10 m
[2 1.67 1027 2.4 1017 ] mp = 1.838 × 10 me
3
3 –31
= 0.02335 Å. = 1.838 × 10 × 9.11 × 10
–27
= 1.674 × 10 kg
Example - 6
Which is mass of neutron. Thus the given particle is neutron.
An electron is accelerated through a potential difference
of 100 V. What is the de-Broglie wavelength assciated The de Broglie wavelength associated with electron is of
with it ? To which part of the electromagnetic spectrum the same order as the size of electron ; but de Broglie
does this value of wavelength correspond ? wavelength associated with ball of size 5 mm is too much
small than the size of the ball. Hence wave nature of matter
h h is significant in atomic level and insignificant at macroscopic
Sol. de-Broglie wavelength,
p 2meV level.
MODERN PHYSICS 20
Example - 8 Example - 10
An electron and an alpha particle have the same de Broglie Find the (a) maximum frequency and (b) minimum
wavelength associated with them. How are their kinetic wavelength of X-rays produced by 30 kv electrons.
energies related to each other ?
3
Sol. Given electron = Sol. Given V = 30 kV = 30 × 10 volt
–19 3 –15
de Broglie wavelength associated with a particle of mass m Energy, E = eV = 1.6 × 10 × 30 × 10 = 4.8 × 10 joule
and energy E is (a) Maximum Frequency vmax is given by, E = hvmax
h
E 4.8 10 15
2mE vmax =
h 6.63 10 34
h h 18
= 7.24 × 10 Hz
2me E e 2m E
c 3 108
That is kinetic energy of electron and -particle are in inverse (b) Minimum wavelength, min =
ratio of these masses.
v max 7.24 1018
–11
= 4.1 × 10 m = 0.041 nm
Example - 9
15
Radiations of frequency 10 Hz are incident on two Example - 11
photosensitive surfaces P and Q. The energy flux of sunlight reaching the surface of earth is
3 2
Following observations are made 1.388 × 10 W/m . How many photons (nearly) per square
(i) for surface P, photoemission occurs but metre are incident on the earth per second ? Assume that
photoelectrons have zero kinetic energy. the photons in the sunlight have an average wavelength
of 550 nm.
(ii) for surface Q, photoemission occurs and the
photoelectrons have some kinetic energy.
Which of these has a higher work function ? hc
Sol. Energy of each photon E =
If the incident frequency is slightly reduced, what will
happen to the photoelectron emission in the two cases ?
6.63 10 34 3 108 –19
= = 3.62 × 10 J
550 109
Sol. (i) For surface P, Ek = 0, so energy of photon = work function
–34 15
Number of photons incident on earth’s surface per second
i.e., hv = W = hv0 = 6.6 × 10 × 10 per square metre
–19
= 6.6 × 10 joule
Total energy per square metre per sec ond
(ii) For surface Q, the photoelectrons have the same kinetic =
Energy of one photon
energy, so Einstein’s equation
hv = W + Ek, 1.388 103
=
3.62 10 19
work function of Q is less than that of P 21
–19
= 3.8 × 10 .
W < 6.6 × 10 joule
Example - 12
i.e., surface P has higher work function than surface Q (i) As
The work function of caesium metal is 2.14 eV. When light
frequency of incident radiation is reduced slightly, energy 14
of frequency 6 × 10 Hz is incident on the metal surface,
of photon will become less than work function of P, but will
photoemission of electrons occurs. What is the
be more than the work function Q, hence surface P will show
(a) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted electrons ?
no photoelectric emission, while surface Q will show
(b) stopping potential and
photoelectric emission ; but the kinetic energy of
photoelectrons from surface Q will be lower than initial value. (c) maximum speed of emitted electrons ?
MODERN PHYSICS 21
14
Sol. Given 0 = 2.14 eV, v = 6 × 10 Hz
hc
(a) Maximum kinetic energy of emitted electron e × 0.54 = 0 ...(2)
640.2 109
–34 14 –19
Ek = hv – 0 = 6.63 × 10 × 6 × 10 –2.14 × 1.6 × 10
In second case when iron source is the source of radiation,
–9
–19 0.54 10 19 i.e., ’ = 427.2 nm = 427.2 × 10 m, let V0’ be the new stopping
= 0.54 × 10 J= eV = 0.34 eV potential, then equation (1) gives
1.6 10 19
(b) Stopping potential v0 is given by hc
eV0’ = 0 ...(3)
427.2 109
E k 0.34 eV
Ek = eV0 V0 = = 0.34 V
e e Subtracting (2) from (3), we get
(c) Maximum speed (vmax) of emitted electrons is given by 1 1
e(V0’ – 0.54) = hc 9
9
1 2 427.2 10 640.2 10
mv max = Ek
2
hc 1 1 9
V0’ – 0.54 = 10
2E k 2 0.54 1019 5 e 427.2 640.2
or vmax = = 3.44 × 10 m/s
m 9.11031
6.63 10 34 3 108 640.2 427.2 9
Example - 13 = × 10
1.6 10 19 427.2 640.2
In an experiment of photoelectric effect, the slope of cut-
off voltage versus frequency of incident light is found to
–15 12.43107 (213) 109
be 4.12 × 10 Vs. Calculate the value of Planck’s constant. = = 0.96 V
427.2 640.2
Sol. Einstein’s photoelectric equation is Ek = hv – 0
V0’ = 0.96 + 0.54 = 1.5 V
or eV0 = hv – 0
Example - 15
h 0 The work function of the following metals is given :
or V0 = v
e e
Na = 2.75 eV ; K = 2.30 eV, Mo = 4.17 eV, Ni = 5.15 eV.
h Which of these metals will not give a photoelectric emission
Clearly, slope of V0 – v curve is . 0
e for a radiation of wavelength 3300 A from a He-Cd laser
placed 1 m away from the photocell ? What happens if the
h –15 –15 laser is brought nearer and placed 50 cm away ?
Give = 4.12 × 10 V – s h = 4.12 × 10 e joule second
e
–15 –19 –34 hc
= 4.12 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 = 6.59 × 10 Js Sol. Energy of incident photon, E =
Example - 14
0
Monochromatic radiation of wavelength 640.2 nm from a Here = 3300 A = 3300 × 10
–10 –7
m = 3.3 × 10 m
neon lamp irradiates a photosensitive material made of
caesium on tungsten. The stopping voltage is measured 6.63 10 34 3 108
to be 0.54 V. The source is replaced by an iron source and E= joule
3.3 10 7
its 427.2 nm line irradiates the same photocell. Predict the
new stopping voltage.
6.631034 3 108
= eV = 3.76 eV
Sol. In first case when source of radiation is neon lamp. 3.3 107 1.6 1019
–9
= 640.2 nm = 640.2 × 10 m, V0 = 0.54 V
Photoelectric emission is only possible if energy of incident
From Einstein’s photoelectric equation photon is equal to or greater than the work function. For Na
and K this condition is satisfied, hence photoelectric
hc
eV0 = –0 ...(1) emission is possible; but in the case of Mo and Ni, the
MODERN PHYSICS 22
energy of incident photon is less than the work function ; –24 –1
hence photoelectric emission is not possible.
= 2 9.11031 1.6 1019 56 = 4.04 × 10 kg ms
If source is brought nearer, then the intensity of incident
h 6.63 1034
radiation increases but frequency of a photon remains the (b) de Broglie wavelength = =
same ; therefore Mo and Ni will still not show photoelectric p 4.04 1024
effect ; however in the case of Na and K the current will = 1.64 × 10
–10
m = 0.164 nm
increase in same proportion as the increase in intensity takes
place. Example - 18
The wavelength of light from the spectral emission line of
Example - 16 sodium is 589 nm. Find the kinetic energy at which (a) an
–5 –2
Light of intensity 10 Wm falls on a sodium photocell of electron and (b) a 8neutron, would have the same de Broglie
2
surface area 2 cm . Assuming that the top 5 layers of wavelength.
sodium absorb the incident energy, estimate the time
–7
required for photoelectric emission in the wave picture of Sol. Given = 589 nm = 5.89 × 10 m
radiation. The work function for the metal is given to be
h h
about 2 eV. What is the implication of your answer ? The de Broglie wavelength =
p 2mE k
Sol. Surface area of 5 sodium layers
–4 2
At = 5 × 2 × 10 m = 10 m
–3 2 h2
2
–20 2 2mE k
Effective area of atom = 10 m
Number of sodium atoms in 5 layers, h2
Kinetic Energy Ek =
At 10 3 2m 2
= 20 = 1017
A atom 10
h2
(a) For electron Ek =
Number of free electrons in 5 layers = 10
17
2m 2
–5 –4 –9
Incident power P = IA = 10 × 2 × 10 = 2 × 10 W
(6.63 1034 ) 2 –25
Energy absorved per second per electron, Ek = = 6.96 × 10 J
2 9.11031 (5.89 107 ) 2
–27
P 2 109 –26 (b) For neutron m = 1.67 × 10 kg
= 2 × 10 J/s
N 1017
(6.63 1034 ) 2 –28
Time required Ek = = 3.79 × 10 J
2 1.67 1031 (5.89 107 ) 2
Work function
t = Energy absorbed per sec ond per electron Example - 19
(a) For what kinetic energy of a neutron will the associated
–10
de Broglie wavelength be 1.40 × 10 m.
2 1.6 1019 7
= = 1.6 × 10 s (b) Also find the de Broglie wavelength of a neutron, in
2 10 26
thermal equilibrium with matter, having an average kinetic
Experimentally no time lag is observed between incidence 3 –27
of light and emission of photoelectrons. energy kT at 300 K. [Mass of neutron = 1.67 × 10 kg]
2
Example - 17
Calculate the (a) momentum and (b) de Broglie wavelength h
Sol. (a) de Broglie’s wavelength, =
of the electrons accelerated through a potential difference 2mE k
of 56 V.
–31
h2 (6.63 1034 ) 2
Sol. For electron, mass m = 9.1 × 10 kg Kinetic energy, Ek =
2m 2 1.67 1027 (1.40 1010 ) 2
2
(a) Momentum p = 2mE k 2meV = 6.7 × 10
–21
J
MODERN PHYSICS 23
h h h h h h
(b) = de Broglie wavelength,
2mE k 3 3mkT mv rms 3kT 3mkT
2m kT m.
2 m
6.63 1034 6.63 1034
= =
3 1.67 10 27 1.38 10 23 300 3 28.0152 1.66 1027 1.38 1023 300
6.63 10 34 –10
6.63 1034 –11
= = 1.46 × 10 m = 0.146 nm = = 2.76 × 10 m = 0.276 Å
4.55 10 24 2.40 1023
Example - 20 Example - 22
An electron and a photon, each has a wavelength of 1.00 nm. Green light ejects photoelectrons from a given
Find photosensitive surface whereas yellow light does not.
What will happen in the case of violet and red light ? Give
(a) their momenta
reason for your answer.
(b) the energy of the photon and
(c) the kinetic energy of electron. Sol. Photoemission is possible only when energy of incident
photon is more than work function of metal. The given
–9
Sol. Given = 1.00 nm = 1.00 × 10 m surface will emit electrons with violet light but not with red
(a) Momenta of electron and photon are equal ; given by light. The reason is energy of photon of violet light is more
than work function, while red light photon has energy less
h 6.63 1034 than work function.
p= –25
= 6.63 × 10 kg ms
–1
1.00 109 Example - 23
The given graphs show the variation of photoelectric
c h
(b) Energy of photon, E = hv = h. c current (I) with the applied voltage (V) for two different
materials and for two different intensities of the incident
–25 8 –17
= pc = 6.63 × 10 × 3 × 10 J = 19.89 × 10 J radiations. Identify the pairs of curves that correspond to
different materials but same intensity of incident radiations.
19.89 1017 3
= eV = 1.24 × 10 eV = 1.24 keV
1.6 10 19
1 2
p2
(c) Kinetic energy of electron Ek = mev =
2 2m e
(6.63 1025 ) 2
= J
2 9.11031
–19
2.42 1019
= 2.42 × 10 J= eV = 1.51 eV Sol. The curves 1 and 3 correspond to the same intensity but
1.6 10 19
different materials.
Example - 21 The curves 2 and 4 correspond to same intensity but
What is the de Broglie wavelength of a nitrogen molecule different materials.
in air at 300 K ? Assume that the molecule is moving with Example - 24
the root mean square speed of molecule at this temperature.
Are matter waves electromagnetic ?
Atomic mass of nitrogen = 14.0076 u.
Sol. Matter waves are not electromagnetic. The reason is that
3kT electromagnetic waves are produced by accelerated charges
Sol. Root mean square speed, vrms = while matter waves or de Broglie waves are associated with
m
neutral particles. In fact de Broglie waves are the probability
Mass of nitrogen molecule, m = 2 × 14.0076 = 28.152 u = waves ; they tell the probability of location of particle in a
–27
28.0152 × 1.66 × 10 kg certain region of space.
MODERN PHYSICS 24
Example - 25 From graph
If the frequency of light falling on a metal is doubled, what For M1, hv3 = hv01 + eV1 ...(2)
will be the effect on photocurrent and the maximum kinetic For M2, hv3 = hv02 + eV2 ...(3)
energy of emitted photoelectrons ?
Subtracting (2) from (3), we get
Sol. The photocurrent does not depend on the frequency of h(v02 – v01) + e (V2 – V1) = 0
incident radiation, hence the photocurrent remains or h(v02 – v01) = e(V1 – V2)
unchanged. The maximum kinetic energy increases with
increase of frequency , given by h V1 V2
Slope of lines,
EK = hv – W e v02 v01
If frequency is doubled, EK’ = 2 hv – W Example - 27
E K ' 2hv W Two lines A and B shown in the graph represent the de
EK hv W 1
Broglie wavelength () as a function of (V is the
V
2hv 2W W W
= = 2 2 acceleration potential) for two particles having the same
hv W hv W charge. Which of the two represents the particle of smaller
i.e., maximum kinetic energy will increase to slightly more mass ?
than double value.
B
Example - 26
The given graphs show the variation of the stopping A
potential VS with the frequency (v) of the incident radiations
for two different photosensitive materials M1 and M2.
1/ V
(i) What are the values of work functions for M1 and M2 ?
(ii) The values of the stopping potential for M1 and M2 for
a frequency v3 (>v02) of the incident radiations are V1 h h 1
Sol. de Broglie wavelength or .
and V2 respectively. Show that the slope of the lines 2mqV 2mq V
equals V1 V2 . 1
v02 v01 The graph of versus is a straight line of slope
V
M1 M2
h 1
. The slope of line B is large, so particle B
2mq m
has smaller mass.
Example - 28
An electron and photon have same energy 100 eV. Which
v01 v02 has greater associated wavelength ?
Sol. de Broglie wavelength associated with electron
Sol. (i) Work function of M1, W1 = hv01
Work function for M2, W2 = hv02 h h2
e Ee ...(1)
(ii) From Einstein’s potoelectric equation hv = W + eVs 2mE e 2m e 2
h W Also wavelength of photon of energy Eph is
VS = v ...(1)
e e
hc 2 h 2 c2
h Eph = E ph 2
This is equation of a straight line of slope . ph ph
e
MODERN PHYSICS 25
Given Ee = Eph = E(say) = 100 eV Sol. From Einstein’s photoelectric equation
Dividing (2) by (1) and using (3), we get Ek = hv – W
eV0 = hv – W
h 2 c2 / 2 ph 2mc2 e2
E= or E =
h 2 / 2m e2 2ph h W
V0 = v
e e
e E Comparing with y = mx + c
ph 2mc2
W
2 The intercept will help to obtain the work function of
As E = 100 eV 2mc 1 MeV e
2
E < < 2mc the substance.
e < ph (i) Photoelectric Current : As the distance of the light source
That is, wavelength associated with photon is greater as from the cathode is reduced, the intensity of light is
compared to electron of same energy. increased. Thus, photoelectric current is increased because
more photo electrons will get emitted.
Example - 29
(ii) Stopping Potential : The stopping potential remains
Light from a source is incident on a metallic surface. The
unaffected by reducing the distance of the light source from
maximum kinetic energy is E and current is I. If the distance
the cathode, as frequency is not changed on reducing the
of source from metal is doubled, what will be the values of
distance between source of light and cathode.
kinetic energy and current.
Example - 31
1 What is the longest wavelength photon that can ionize a
Sol. Intensity from a point source I . By doubling distance
r2 hydrogen atom in its ground state ? Specify the type of
r, the intensity is reduced to one-fourth. radiation.
Therefore, photo current will become I/4 while kinetic energy hc
E will remain unchanged. Sol. Hence, the energy of the incident photon = hv = = 13.6eV
Example - 30
6.6 1034 3 108
Sketch a graph between frequency of incident radiations
13.6 1.6 1019
and stopping potential for a given photosensitive material.
What information can be obtained from the value of the = 0.910 × 10 m
–10
intercept on the potential axis ?
This radiation is in ultraviolet region.
A source of light of frequency greater than the threshold
frequency is at a distance of 1 m from the cathode of a Example - 32
photocell. The stopping potential is found to be V. If the In Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom, calculate the energy of
distance of the light source from the cathode is reduced, the photon emitted during a transition of the electron from
explain giving reasons, what change will you observe in the the first excited state to the ground state. Write in which
(i) photoelectric current region of the electromagnetic spectrum this transition lies.
(ii) stopping potential.
Sol. The energy levels of hydrogen atom are given by
B
Rhc 13.6
E n 2 2 eV
n n
For ground state n = 1
A E1 = –13.6 eV
O v0 Frequency (v)
For first excited state (n = 2)
D 13.6
E2 = = –3.4 eV
4
MODERN PHYSICS 26
Energy of photon emitted
6.6 10 34 3 108
hv = E2 – E1 = –3.4 – (–13.6) eV = 10.2 eV = eV
102.7 10 9 1.6 1019
As transition from higher state to n = 1 correspond to Lyman
series so the corresponding transition belongs to Lyman 66 3000
series. = 1027 16 = 12.04 eV
Example - 33
Now, E = | – 13.6 – (– 1.50)|
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV
= 12.1 eV
(i) What is the kinetic energy of an electron in the second
excited state ? Hence, transition shown by arrow D corresponds to
emission of = 102.7 nm.
(ii) If the electron jumps to the ground state from the second
excited state, calculate the wavelength of the spectral Example - 35
line emitted. The graph shows how the activity of a simple of radon–220
changes with time. Use the graph to determine its half-life.
Sol. The energy levels of H-atom are given by Calculate the value of decay constant of radon–220.
Rhc 13.6
En = 2
2 eV
n n
(i) For second excited state n = 3 2
13.6 13.6
E3 = 2
eV eV = –1.51 eV
(3) 9
th
Kinetic energy of electron in n state is Sol. From graph the half-life of simple is 16 days
K3 = – E3 = + 1.51 eV 0 .6 9 3 0 .6 9 3
–1 –1
Decay constant = T1 T1 day = 0.043 day .
(ii) The wavelength of emitted radiation from second excited 2 2
state (n = 3) to ground state (n = 1) is given by Example - 36
hc A radioactive isotope has a half-life of 5 years. After how
= E3 – E1 = – 1.51 eV + 13.6 eV = 12.09 eV much time is its activity reduced to 3.125% of its original
activity ?
hc 6.626 10 34 3 108 n
= m R 1
12.09 eV 12.09 1.6 1019 Sol. We know
R0 2
–7
= 1.027 × 10 m = 102.7 nm
R 3.125
Example - 34 Given R 3.125% 100
0
The energy level diagram of an element is given alongside.
Identify, by doing necessary calculations, which transition n n 5 n
3.125 1 1 1 1 1
corresponds to the emission of a spectral line of wavelength or or
100 2 32 2 2 2
102.7 nm.
n=5
Given T = 5 years
t
As n=
T
t
=5
34
hc 6.6 10 3 10 8 T
Sol. E = J
102.7 10 9 or t = 5 × 5 = 25 years
MODERN PHYSICS 27
Example - 37 Example - 39
11
A radioactive sample contains 2.2 mg of pure 6
C which 1
A radioactive material is reduced to of its original
has half-life period of 1224 seconds. Calculate 16
(i) the number of atoms present initially amount in 4 days. How much material should one begin
–3
(ii) the activity when 5 g of the sample will be left. with so that 4 × 10 kg of the material is left after 6 days.
n
N 1
Sol. (i) By definition 11 g of carbon C contains N
11
6 A
= 6.023 × Sol.
23 N0 2
10 atoms
Number of atoms in 2.2 mg = 2.2 × 10 g of
–3 11
C will be t
6 where n = is number of half lives.
T
2.2 103 23 19
= × 6.023 × 10 atoms = 12.046 × 10 atoms N 1 1
4
11 Given
(ii) Activity A = N N 0 16 2
4 n
log e 2 log e 2 1 1
Half-life Y2 = T or n = 4
1/ 2 2 2
log e 2 t
Activity A = N Given t = 4 days =4
T1/ 2 T
–6
where N = Number of atoms in 5 g (= 5 × 10 g) which is t 4
Half life, T = = 1 day
equal to T 4
n
5 106 m 1
6.023 1023 disintegration per second If m0 is initial mass of radioactive material, then .
11 m0 2
6
log e 2 0.6931 5 106 t 6
A= T N 6.023 1023 Here n = = 6, m = 4 × 10–3 kg m 1 1
1224 11 T 1
1/ 2 m0 2 64
14 –3
= 1.55 × 10 becquerel. or m0 = 64 m = 64 × 4 × 10 kg = 0.256 kg
Example - 38 Example - 40
40
The half-life of 238
U against -decay is 4.5 × 10 years.
9 Calculate the binding energy per nucleon 20
Ca nucleus.
92
238
Calculate the activity of 1 g sample of 92
U. [Given : m ( 4020 Ca) ] = 39.962589 u
9 9 7 mn (mass of a neutron) = 1.008665 u
Sol. T1/2 = 4.5 × 10 years = 4.5 × 10 × 3.15 × 10 seconds
mp (mass of a proton) = 1.007825 u
238 23
Number of atoms in 1 g sample of U is N = 6.023 × 10 × 2
92 1 u = 931 MeV/c ]
1 40
. Sol. Total Binding energy of 20 Ca nucleus
238
= 20mp + 20 mn – M ( 40
20 Ca)
log e 2
Activity of sample A = N = ×N = 20 × 1.007825 + 20 × 1.008665 – 39.962589
T1/ 2
= 0.367211 u = 0.367211 × 931 MeV = 341.87 Mev
0.6931 23 1
= 7 × 6.023 × 10 ×
341.87
4.5 10 9
3.15 10 238 Binding energy per nucleus = 40
MeV/nucleon
4
= 1.237 × 10 bacquerel. = 8.55 MeV/nucleon
MODERN PHYSICS 28
Example - 41 Sol. 56
Fe nucleus is most stable ; therefore, energy will be needed
26
Calculate the energy released if U
238
–nucleus emits an for the reaction to occur.
–particle. The reaction is
Calculate the energy released in MeV in the following m (5626 Fe) + Q 2 (1328 Al)
nuclear reaction
Difference of mass
238
U 90234 Th 42 He Q
92
= 2 × (27.98191) u – 55.93494 u
238
Given Atomic mass of U = 238.05079 u = 0.02888 u
234
Atomic mass of Th = 234.04363 u Energy needed, Q = 0.02888 × 931 MeV
Atomic mass of alpha particle = 4.00260 u = 26.88728 MeV
Is the decay spontaneous, give reason. Example - 44
Would the energy be released or needed for the following
Sol. The process is
D-T reaction :
238 234 4
92 U 90 Th 2 He Q 2
( particle) 1
H 13 H 24 He 10 n
The energy released to occur ?
2
Q = (MU – MTH — MHe) c Given m( 12 H) = 2.014102 u
2
= (238.05079 – 234.04363 – 4.00260)u × c
2 m ( 13 H) = 3.016049 u
= (0.00456 u) × c
931.5 MeV 2
m( 42 He) = 4.002603 u
= 0.00456 ×
c2
.c = 4.25 MeV
2
m( 10 n) = 1.008665 u and 1 u = 931 MeV/c
Yes, the decay is spontaneous (since Q is positive)
Calculate the energy in MeV.
Example - 42
A heavy nucleus X of mass number 240 and binding energy Sol. The given reaction is nuclear fusion reaction ; so energy
per nucleon 7.6 MeV is split into two fragments Y and Z of will be released in the reaction.
mass numbers 110 and 130. The binding energy per nucleon 2
1 H 13H 42 He 10 n Q
in Y and Z is 8.5 MeV per nucleon. Calculate the energy Q
Mas of nuclei before fusion
released per fission in MeV.
2 2 Mi = m (12 H) m(13 H)
Sol. Energy released Q = (MY + MZ)C – MX C
= 8.5 (110 + 130) MeV – 7.6 × 240 MeV = 2.014102 + 3.016049
= (8.5 – 7.6) × 240 MeV = 5.030151 u
= 0.9 × 240 MeV = 2.16 MeV Mass of nuclei after fusion
Example - 43 Mf = m( 42 He) m(10 n)
If a nucleus 56
26
Fe splits into two nuclei of 28
13
Al, would the = 4.002603 + 1.008665
energy be released or needed for this purpose to occur ? = 5.011268 u
Mass defect (m) = mi – mf
Given m ( 5626 Fe) = 55.934944
= 5.030151 – 5.011268
28
m ( Al) = 27.98191 u
13 = 0.018863 u
2
1 u = 931 MeV/c Energy released, Q = 0.018863 × 931 MeV
Calculate the energy in MeV. = 17.56 MeV
MODERN PHYSICS 29
Example - 45 1 –27 2 –13
× 6.68 × 10 v = 5.18 × 1.6 × 10 J
A nucleus 23
10
Ne undergoes -decay and becomes 23
11
Na . 2
Calculate the maximum kinetic energy of electrons emitted
assuming that the daughter nucleus and antineutrino carry 2
2 5.18 1.6 1013
v =
negligible kinetic energy. 6.68 1027
mass of 1023 Ne = 22.994466 u
2 5.18 1.6 1013
or v= 2.48 × 107 ms–1 = 1.57 × 107 ms–1.
mass of 1123 Na = 22.989770 u 6.68 1027
2
1 u = 931.5 MeV/c Example - 47
23
Calculate the ratio of energies of photons produced due to
Sol. The equation of -decay of Ne is
10 transition of electron of hydrogen atom from its
23 23
Ne 11 Na e v (i) second permitted energy level to the first level, and
10
(ii) highest permitted energy level to the second permitted
Mass difference, m = m N (1023 Ne) m N (1123 Na) me level.
Changing nuclear masses into atomic masses Sol. Energy of electron in permitted level
23 23
m = m(10 Ne) 10m e m(11 Na) 11m e m e En
Rhc
n2
23 23
= m (10 Ne) – m (11 Na)
(i) When an electron jumps from the second to the first
= 22.994466 – 22.989770 = 0.004696 u permitted energy level,
Maximum K.E., Q = 0.004696 u × 931.5 MeV/u
1 1 3
= 4.37 MeV Energy of photon = E2–1 = Rhc 2 2 Rhc
1 2 4
Example - 46 (ii) When an electron jumps from the highest permitted level
The nucleus of an atom of 235
92
Y, initially at rest, decays by (n = ) to the second permitted level (n = 2).
emitting an -particle as per the equation
1 1 Rhc
E–2 = Rhc 2
235
92 Y 231
90
4
X He + Energy
2
2 4
It is given that the binding energies per nucleon of the E 2 1 3Rhc / 4 3
parent and the daughter nuclei are 7.8 MeV and 7.835 MeV Ratio ; Ratio = 3 : 1
E 2 Rhc / 4 1
respectively and that of -particle is 7.07 MeV/nucleon.
Assuming the daughter nucleus to be formed in the Example - 48
unexcited state and neglecting its share in the energy of The spectrum of a star in the visible and the ultraviolet
the reaction, calculate the speed of the emitted -particle. region was observed and the wavelength of some of the
–27
Take mass of -particle to be 6.68 × 10 kg. lines that could be identified were found to be :
Sol. Energy released, Q = [M (
231 4
X) + M ( He) – M(
235
Y)]c
2 824 Å, 970 Å, 1120 Å, 2504 Å, 5173 Å, 6100 Å
= [(7.835 × 231) + (7.07 × 4) – (7.8 × 235)]MeV which of these lines cannot belong to hydrogen atom
7 –1
spectrum ? (Give Rydberg constant R = 1.03 × 10 m and
= [1809.9 + 28.28 – 1833] MeV
= 5.18 MeV 1
= 970 Å. Support your answer with suitable
–13 R
= 5.18 × 1.6 × 10 J
calculations.
This entire kinetic energy is taken by -particle as given.
Sol. For hydrogen atom, the wave number (i.e. reciprocal of
1 2 –13
i.e., mv = 5.18 × 1.6 × 10 J wavelength) of the emitted radiation is given by
2
MODERN PHYSICS 30
1 1 1 Example - 50
v R 2 2
n 2 n1 The half-life of 146 C is 5700 years. What does it mean ? Two
radioactive nuclei X and Y initially contain an equal number
1 of atoms. Their half lives are 1 hour and 2 hour respectively.
R 970 Å Calculate the ratio of their rates of disintegration after two
1 1 1 1 hours.
2 2 2 2
n 2 n1 n 2 n1
14
Sol. The half-life of 6 C is 5700 years. It means that one half of
For Lyman series of hydrogen spectrum, we take n2 = 1.
14
Hence the permitted values of can be given as : the present number of radioactive nuclei of 6 C will remain
undecayed after 5700 years.
970Å 970Å 970Å 970Å
, , ........... 1 N
3 / 4 8 / 9 15 /16 1 Number of nuclei X after 2 hours, NX = N0 0
(taking n1 = 2, 3, 4, ..........) 2 4
= 1293.3 Å, 1091 Å, 1034.6 Å, .................... 970 Å 1 N
2
Number of nuclei Y after 2 hours, NY = N0 2 0
For Balmer series of hydrogen spectrum, we take n2 = 2. 2 2
Hence the possible values of can be given as :
R X N0 / 4 1
970Å 970Å 970Å 970Å Ratio of rates of disintegration .
, , ........... R Y N0 / 2 2
5 / 36 3 /16 21/100 1/ 4
Example - 51
(taking n1 = 3, 4, 5, ..........)
Draw the graph showing the variation of binding energy per
= 698 Å, 5173.3 Å, 4619 Å, ...................... 3880 Å
nucleon with the mass number for a large number of nuclei
Hence = 824 Å, 1120 Å, 2504Å, 6100Å, of the given lines, 2 < A < 240 .. What are the main inferences from the graph ?
cannot belong to the hydrogen atom spectrum. How do you explain the constancy of binding energy in the
Example - 49 range 30 < A < 170 using the property that the nuclear force
is short-ranged. Explain with the help of this plot the release
The trajectories, traced by different -particles, in Geiger-
of energy in the process of nuclear fission and fusion.
Marsden experiment were observed as shown in the figure.
(a) What names are given to the symbols ‘b’ and ‘’ shown Sol. The variation of binding energy per nucleon versus mass
here. number is shown in figure.
o
(b) What can we say about the values of b for (i) = 0 (ii)
9.0
= radians. O
16
8.0 C12 Fe56
4 F
18
U 238
Hc N14
7.0
6.0
7
5.0 Li
4.0
3.0
2.0
O H
2
Target nucleus 1.0
0.0
Sol. (a) The symbol ‘b’ represents impact parametter and ‘’ 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240
represents the scattering angle. Mass Number
o
(b) (i) When = 0 , the impart parameter will be maximum and Inferences from graph
represent the atomic size.
1. The nuclei having mass number below 20 and above 180
(ii) When = radians, the impact parameter ‘b’ will be have relatively small binding energy and hence they are
minimum and represent the nuclear size. unstable.
MODERN PHYSICS 31
2. The nuclei having mass number 56 and about 56 have Sol. is the mean life time of radio nuclide T is the half-life period
maximum binding energy – 5.8 MeV and so they are most of radio nuclide, the relation is
stable.
4 12 16
= 1.44 T
3. Some nuclei have peaks, e.g., 2He , 6C , 8O ; this indicates
i.e., Mean life period = 1.44 × Half life period
that these nuclei are relatively more stable than their
neighbours.
Example - 54
Explanation of constancy of binding energy : Nuclear force
is short-ranged, so every nucleon interacts with their With the help of an example, explain how the neutron to
neighbours only, therefore binding energy per nucleon proton ratio changes during -decay of a nucleus.
remains constant.
238
Sol. Let us take the example of a-decay of U. The decay
Explanation of Nuclear Fission : When a heavy nucleus 92
(A 235 say) breaks into two lighter nuclei (nuclear fission), scheme is
the binding energy per nucleon increases i.e., nucleons get
238 234
more tightly bound. This implies that energy would be 92 U
90 Th 24 (or 24 He)
released in nuclear fission.
Explanation of Nuclear Fusion : When two very light nuclei 238 92 146
Neutron to proton ratio before -decay =
(A 10) join to form a heavy nucleus, the binding is energy 92 92
per nucleon of fused heavier nucleus more than the binding =1.59
energy per nucleon of lighter nuclei, so again energy would
be released in nuclear fusion. 234 90 144
Neutron to proton ratio after -decay = = 1.60
Example - 52 90 90
How does the size of a nucleus depend on its mass number?
Hence explain why the density of nuclear matter is 146 144
independent of the size of nucleus. 92 90
Sol. The radius (size) R of nucleus is related to its mass number This shows that the neutron to proton ratio increases during
(A) as -decay of a nucleus.
1/3 –15
R = R0A where R0 = 1.1 × 10 m Example - 55
If m is the average mass of a nucleon, then mass of nucleus
In a radioactive decay as follows
= mA, where A is mass number
e0
1
4 3 4 1/ 3 3 4 3
A A1 A2
Volume of nucleus = R (R 0 A ) R 0 A
3 3 3
The mass number and atomic number of A2 are 176 and 71
Density of nucleus, respectively, what are the mass numbers and atomic
numbers of A1 and A. Which of these elements are isobars.
mass mA m 3m
N =
volume 4 3 4 3 4R 30
R 0 A R 0 Sol. The reaction may be expressed as
3 3
A
Clearly nuclear density N is independent of mass number A. ZX
Z 1 Y A e0 v
Z 3 Y1 A 4 2 He 4
1
Example - 53 (A) (A1) (A2)
A radio nuclide sample has N0 nuclei at t = 0. Its number of Given Z – 3 = 71 Z = 74 and Z – 1 = 73
N0 Also A – 4 = 176 A = 180
undecayed nuclei get reduced to at t = . What does
e
Thus mass numbers of A1 and A are 180 each
the term stand for ? Write in terms of , the time interval
The atomic numbers of A1 and A are 73 and 74 respectively.
‘T’ in which half of the original number of nuclei of this
radio nuclide would have got decayed. The elements A and A1 are isobars.
MODERN PHYSICS 32
Example - 56 Example - 59
Explain why is the energy distribution of –rays Why is the mass of a nucleus always less than the sum of
continuous. the masses of constituents, neutrons and protons ?
If the total number of neutrons and protons in a nuclear
Sol. During -decay, a neutron is converted into a proton with reaction is conserved how then is the energy absorbed or
the emission of a -particle with an antineutrino evolved in the reaction ? Explain.
1
0 n
1p1 10 v Sol. 2 nd Part :
The energy produced in this decay is shared by -particle In fact the number of protons and number of neutrons are
and antineutrino ; therefore -particle may have varying the same before and after a nuclear reaction, but the binding
amount of energy starting from zero to a certain maximum energies of nuclei present before and after a nuclear reaction
value. are different. This difference is called the mass defect (M).
M = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn] – M
Example - 57 2
Einstein’s mass energy relation, E = mc
Why is the heavy water used as a moderator in a nuclear
reactor ? can express this mass difference in terms of energy as
2
Eb = Mc .
Sol. The basic principle of machanics is that momentum transfer This shows that if a certain number of neutrons and protons
is maximum when the mass of colliding particle and target are brought together to form a nucleus of a certain charge
particle are equal. Heavy water has negligible absorption and mass, an energy Eb will released in the process. The
cross-section for neutrons and its mass is small ; so heavy energy Eb is called the binding energy of the nucleus. If
water molecules do not absorb fast neutrons ; but simply we separate a nucleus into its nucleons we would have to
slow them. transfer a total energy equal to Eb, to the particles.
Example - 58
Example - 60
Draw a graph showing the variation of potential energy 8
betwen a pair of nucleons as a function of their separation. The temperature of a star is 3 × 10 K. Can nuclear fusion
Indicate the regions in which the nucleus force is occur at that star ? If yes which cycle is more probable :
(i) attractive, (ii) repulsive. Write two important conclusions carbon-nitrogen cycle or proton-proton cycle ?
which you can draw regarding the nature of the nuclear
Sol. Nuclear fusion is possible at the star, because it can take
forces. 7 7
place at or above temperature 2 × 10 K. Above 2 × 10 K
carbon-nitrogen cycle is more probable, therefore at the star
Sol. the probability of carbon-nitrogen cycle is greater.
Example - 61
In an oil drop experiment the following data were recorded :
A
plate separation 15 mm, distance of fall 10 mm, potential
–5 –2
difference 3.2 kV, viscosity of air 1.82 × 10 Nsm , radius
+100 Repulsive of drop 2.76 m, successive times of rise of the drop 42 s
B and 78 s. Calculate the change in charge on the drop
MeV between the two sets of observations. To how many
0
D electrons does this correspond ?
Attractive
-100 Sol. Under the influence of an electric field E, if the drop carrying
C 1 2 3 4
r (fm) a charge n1e moves upwards with velocity v1,
Part AB represents repulsive force and Part BCD represents En1e – mg = 6av1 ...(1)
attractive force. Similarly, if the drop carrying a charge n2e moves upwards
Conclusions : with velocity v2, then
(1) Nuclear forces are attractive and stronger, then electrostatic En2e – mg = 6av2 ...(2)
force. 6a
From Eqs. (1) and (2), (n2 – n1)e = (v 2 v1 )
(2) Nuclear forces are charge-independent. E
MODERN PHYSICS 33
–5 –2
Here, = 1.82 × 10 Nsm ;
1 1 1 3R 4 4
–6
a = 2.76 × 10 m ; R 2 2 or 2 = 1215 Å
2 1 2 4 3R 3 1.097 107
V 3.2 103 2 belongs to the Lyman series and lies in the ultraviolet
E=
5 –1
= 2.133 × 10 Vm ;
d 15 103 region.
(c) For the direct jump n = 3 to n = 1 :
1 1 –3
1 1
v2 – v1 = s t t = 10 × 10 1 1 1 8R
1 2 42 78 R 2 2
3 1 3 9
–4 –1
= 1.1 × 10 ms
9 9
6 (1.82 105 )(2.76 10 6 ) or 3
(n2 – n1)e = 1.110 4 8R 8 1.097 107 = 1026 Å
2.133 105
–19 which also belongs to the Lyman series and lies in the
= 4.883 × 10 C
ultraviolet region.
Hence the change in charge on the drop between the two
–19
sets of observations is 4.883 × 10 C. This corresponds to Example - 63
–19
3 electronic charges ( e = 1.6 × 10 C). A particle of charge equal to that of an electron, –e and
mass 208 times the mass of electron (called - meson)
Example - 62
moves in a circular orbit around a nucleus of charge +3e.
Electrons of energy 12.09 eV can excite hydrogen atoms. (Take the mass of the nucleus to be infinite). Assuming
To which orbit is the electron in the hydrogen atom raised that Bohr model of the atom is applicable to this system :
and what are the wavelengths of the radiations emitted as th
(i) derive an expression for the radius of the n Bohr orbit.
it drops back to the ground state ?
(ii) find the value of n for which the radius of the orbit is
Sol. The energies of the electron in different states are : approximately the same as that of the first Bohr orbit
E1 = – 13.6 eV for n = 1 for the hydrogen atom.
E2 = – 3.4 eV for n = 2 (iii) find the wavelength of the radiation emitted when the
-meson jumps from the third orbit to the first orbit.
and E3 = – 1.51 eV for n = 3 7 –1
(Rydberg’s constant = 1.097 × 10 m )
Evidently, the energy needed by an electron to go to the E3
level (n = 3 or M-level) is 13.6 – 1.51 = 12.09 eV. Thus the th
Sol. (i) We have the radius of the n orbit given by
electron is raised to the third orbit of principal quantum
number n = 3. 1
Substituting k = 4 , Z = 3 and m = 208 me, we get
Now an electron in the n = 3 level can return to the ground 0
state by making the following possible jumps :
(i) n = 3 to n = 2 and then from n = 2 to n = 1. n 2 h 2 4 0 0 n 2 h 2
rn
(ii) n = 3 to n = 1 (208 m e )3e 2 156m e e 2
Thus the corresponding wavelengths emitted are :
h
(a) For n = 3 to n = 2 : Further writing for h, we obtain
2
1 1 1 5R 36
R 2 2 or 1 0 n 2 h 2
1 2 3 36 5R rn
624 m e e2
36 (ii) The radius of first Bohr orbit for hydrogen is :
= = 6563 Å
5 1.097 107
h2 0 h 2
This wavelength belongs to the Balmer series and lies in the r1 (n = 1) or r1
visible region. km e e 2 m e e 2
(b) For n = 2 to n = 1 : For rn (-mesonic atom) = r1 (hydrogen atom), we have
MODERN PHYSICS 34
From conservation of energy,
0 n 2 h 2 0 h 2
E = hv + Er ...(2)
624 m e e 2 m e e 2
2
where Er is kinetic energy of recoiling atom and hv is energy
or n = 624 or n 25 of photon.
th
(iii) The energy for the n orbit is given by Eq. From conservation of momentum,
mk 2 Z2 e 4 pph = –pHe ...(3)
En = –
2n 2 h 2 Here negative sign indicates that He ion recoiles after
emission of photon. Since energy of photon is hv, its
1 h
Substituting m = 208 me, Z = 3, k = 4 and h = , we get hv
0 2 momentum can be expressed as .
c
234 m e e 4
En = p2 h 2 v2
02 n 2 h 2 Kinetic energy of recoiling of He ion =
+
, where
2m ' 2m 'c2
+
me e 4 hc 1872 Rhc m’ is mass of He ion. From Eq. (2)
= 1872 2 3 2 =
8
0 h c n n2
h 2 v2
E = hv +
me e4 2m 'c2
where R = is the Rydberg constant. 2 2 2 2
8 02 h 3 c or h v + (2m’c )hv – 2m’c E = 0
when the -meson jumps from the third orbit to the first On solving above quadratic equation for hv, we get
orbit, the difference in energy is radiated as a photon of
frequency v given by 2m 'c 2 (2m 'c 2 ) 2 4 2m 'c 2 E
hv =
hv = E3 – E1 2
c 2 2 2 E
As v = , we have = –m’c + m’c 1
m 'c 2
hc 1 1 Neglecting negative root, we have
= E3 – E1 = 1872 Rhc 2 2
1 3 2 E
2E 1 1
hv = m’c 1 m 'c 2 1 = m’c
2 2 m 'c2
1 1
or 1872R 1 2E
9 1 1
m 'c 2
9 9
or = 1872 8 R 2 E
1872 8 (1.097 107 ) hv = ...(4)
2E
–10 1 1
= 0.5478 × 10 m = 0.5478 Å. m 'c 2
Example - 64 Since energy of transition E is less than 13.6 × 4 (= 54.2 eV)
+
A stationary He ion emitted a photon corresponding to
the first line of the Lyman series. That photon liberated a 2 E
and rest energy of helium ion is 4 GeV, we can neglect
photoelectron from a stationary hydrogen atom in the m 'c 2
ground state. Find the velocity of the photoelectron. in denominator
Hence, hv E ...(5)
Sol. Energy of a photon emitted for transition n2 to n1 is given by
or 2hv E (where, h = h/2)
1 1 For first line of Lyman series n2 = 2 and n1 = 1.
E = RchZ 2 2
2
...(1)
n1 n 2
2
1 1
This energy is shared between recoiling helium ion and E = RchZ 2 2 = 3Rch ...(6)
1 2
photon.
MODERN PHYSICS 35
when photons of energy given by eq. (5) are incident on Example - 66
hydrogen atom, its electron may be liberated if the energy Find the ratio of de Broglie wavelength of molecules of
absorbed is equal to or more than ionisation energy. If the hydrogen and helium which are at temperatures 27°C and
energy of photon is more than ionisation energy, electrons 127°C respectively.
are liberated with certain kinetic energy.
h
1 1 Sol. de Broglie wavelength is given by =
Ionisation energy of hydrogen atom E’ = Rch 2 2 mv
1
Root-mean-square velocity of a gas particle at the given
= Rch temperature (T) is given as,
Since this is less than energy of incident photons, the excess
1 3
energy is transformed to kinetic energy of liberated electron, mv 2 kT
2 2
1 2
E – E’ = mv
2 3kT
v=
m
1 2 Rch
or mv = 2Rch or v = 2 where k = Boltzmann’s constant and m = mass of the gas
2 m particle and T = temperature of the gas in K.
On substituting numerical values, we get
mv = 3mkT
6
v = 3.1 × 10 m/s
h h
Example - 65 =
mv 3mkT
An -particle and a proton are fired through the same
magnetic fields which is perpendicular to their velocity
vectors. The -particle and the proton move such that H m He THe (4)(273 127) 8
radius of curvature of their path is same. Find the ratio of He m H TH = (2)(273 27)
=
3
their de Broglie wavelengths.
Example - 67
Sol. Magnetic force experienced by a charged particle in a 20
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon for 10 Ne, 56
26 Fe
magnetic field is given by,
and 238
92 U.
FB = qv B = qv B sin
In our case FB = qvB [as = 90°] Sol. Binding energy of nuclides is given by the equation
1 2
mv 2 B ( AZ X) = [Nmn + ZM( H) – M ( AZ X) ]c
Hence, Bqv = or mv = qBr
r On dividing binding energy by the mass number, we obtain
the binding energy per nucleon,
h h
The de Broglie wavelength = mv qBr B ( 20
1
= [10mn + 10M( H) – M ( 20 ]c
2
10 Ne) 10 Ne)
= [10 × 1.008665 + 10 × 1.007825 – 19.992440 ] × 931.5
particle q p rp
= 160.6 MeV
proton q r
B( 20
10 Ne)
Hence binding energy per nucleon =
r q 20
Since = 1 and = 2,
rp qp = 8.03 MeV/nucleon
1 Similarly for (56
26 Fe)
,
p 2 1 2
B (56
26 Fe)
= [30 mn + 26M( H) – M (56
26 Fe)
]c
MODERN PHYSICS 36
= [30 × 1.008665 + 26 × 1.007825 – 55.93492] × 931.5 Example - 69
= 492 MeV In the chain analysis of a rock, the mass ratio of two
B(56 radioactive isotopes is found to be 100 : 1. The mean lives
26 Fe) 9 9
Hence binding energy per nucleon = of the two isotopes are 4 × 10 year and 2 × 10 year
56
respectively. If it is assumed that at the time of formation
= 8.79 MeV/nucleon of the rock, both isotopes were in equal proportion,
238 1 calculate the age of the rock. Ratio of atomic weights of
binding energy for (92 U) = [146 mn + 92 M( H) –
the two isotopes is 1.02 : 1. (log10 1.02 = 0.0086)
238 2
M (92 U) ]c
Sol. At the time of formation of the rock, both isotopes have the
= [146 × 1.008665 + 92 × 1.007825 – 238.050783] × 931.5 same number of nuclei N0. Net 1 and 2 be the decay
= 1802 MeV constants of the two isotopes. If N1 and N2 are the numbers
of their nuclei after a time t, we have
238
(92 U)
Hence binding energy per nucleon = = 7.57 MeV/ N1 = N 0 e 1t and N2 = N 0 e 2 t
238
nucleon. All three nuclides have a binding energy per
56 N1
nucleon nearly 8 MeV, with Fe having the largest binding e ( 1 2 ) t ...(1)
N2
energy per nucleon
. Example - 68 Let the masses of the two isotopes at time t be m1 and m2
(a) Find the energy needed to remove a neutron from the and let their respective atomic weights be M1 and M2. We
have
42
nucleus of the calcium isotope 20 Ca .
m1 = N1M1 and m2 = N2M2
(b) Find the energy needed to remove a proton from this
nucleus. (c) Why are these energies different ? Mass of N1 m1 M 2
. ...(2)
41
N 2 m 2 M1
20 Ca = 40.962278 u, mass of neutron = 1.008665 u, mass
Substituting the values given in the problem, we get
of 42
20 Ca
= 40.974599 u, mass of proton = 1.007825 u.
N1 100 1 100
.
Sol. (a) 41
Ca nucleus is formed after removing a neutron from N2 1 1.02 1.02
20
42 Let 1 and 2 be the mean lives of the two isotopes.
20 Ca .
The mass of 41 1 1
20 Ca plus the mass of a free neutron = Then 1 and 2
1 2
40.962278 u + 1.008665 u = 41.970943 u
Difference between 41
Ca plus the mass of a free neutron 2 1 2 109 4 109
20
which gives 1 – 2 =
12 (2 109 ) (4 109 )
42
and the mass of 20 Ca is 0.012321 u ; so the binding energy –9
–0.25 × 10
of the missing neutron
Setting this value in Eq. (1), we get
= (0.012321 u)(931.49 MeV/u) = 11.5 MeV
42 N1 1 100
(b) When a proton is removed from Ca the resulting nucleus (0.25 10 9 )t or t = log e
N2 = e
20
0.25 109 1.02
41
is the potassium isotope 19 K . On a similar pattern as above
Example - 70
the binding energy for the missing proton can be calculated;
result is 10.27 MeV. Calculate the nearest distance of approach of an -particle
of energy 2.5 MeV being scattered by a gold nucleus
(c) Neutron and proton have different energies because only
(Z = 79).
attractive nuclear forces act on the neutron whereas the
proton was also acted upon by repulsive electric forces that Sol. The electrostatic potential at a distance x due to nucleus is
decrease its binding energy. given by Ze/40x, where Ze is the charge on the nucleus.
MODERN PHYSICS 37
The P.E. of an -particle when it is at a distance x from the Example - 72
nucleus is given by
A doubly ionised lithium atom is hydrogen-like with atomic
Ze 2Ze 2 number Z = 3. Find the wavelength of the radiation required
2e 2+
to excite the electron in Li from the first to the third Bohr
40 x (4 0 x)
orbit. Given the ionisation energy of hydrogen atom as
2e being the charge on -particle. 13.6 eV.
Since the -particle momentarily stops when its initial K.E. Sol. The energy of nth orbit of a hydrogen-like atom is given as,
is completely changed into P.E. here, hence
13.6 Z2
1 2Ze 2 En =
mv 2 n2
2 4 0 x 2+
Thus for Li atom, as Z = 3, the electron energies for the
first and third Bohr orbits are :
2Ze 2 1
or x=
4 0 mv 2 / 2 13.6 (3) 2
For n = 1, E1 = eV = – 122.4 eV
12
1
Now energy of -particle = mv2 = 2.5 MeV 13.6 (3) 2
2
For n = 3, E3 = eV = –13.6 eV
6 –19 (3) 2
= 2.5 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 J
= 2.5 × 1.6 × 10 J
–13 Thus the energy required to transfer an electron from E1
level to E3 level is,
Substituting the values, we get
E = E3 – E1 = –13.6 – (–122.4) = 108.8 eV
38 9
2 79 2.56 10 9 10 –14 Therefore, the radiation needed to cause this transition
x= = 9.101 × 10 m.
2.5 1.6 1013 should have photons of this energy.
Example - 71 hv = 108.8 eV
Find the ratio of minimum to maximum wavelength of The wavelength of this radiation is,
radiation emitted by electron in ground state of Bohr’s hc
hydrogen atom. = 108.8 eV
Sol. Energy of radiation corresponding to transition between
hc (6.63 1034 ) (3 108 )
two energy levels n 1 and n 2 is given by E = or = m = 114.25 Å.
108.8 eV 108.8 1.6 1019
1 1
13.6 2 2 eV. E is minimum when n1 = 1 and n2 = 2. Example - 73
n1 n 2 th
Consider a hydrogen-like atom whose energy in n excited
state is given by
1 1 3
Hence Emin = 13.6 eV = 13.6 × eV
1 4 4 13.6 Z2
En =
E is maximum when n1 = 1 and n2 = (when the atom is n2
ionised). when this excited atom makes a transition from excited
state to ground state most energetic photons have energy
1 Emax = 52.224 eV and least energetic photons have energy
Hence, Emax = 13.6 1 = 13.6 eV
Emin = 1.224 eV. Find the atomic number of atom and the
state of excitation.
E min 3
So,
E max 4 Sol. Maximum energy is liberated for transition En 1 and
minimum energy for En En–1
hc / max 3 min 3
or or E1
hc / min 4 max 4 Hence, E1 = 52.224 eV ...(1)
n2
MODERN PHYSICS 38
E1 E1 2.303 1.6565 1015
and = 1.224 eV ...(2) = log
n (n 1)2
2
4.986 10 11
10
1.298 1015
Solving above equations simultaneously, we get
2.303 1.6565 2.303
E1 = – 54.4 eV and n = 5 = log10 log10 1.2762
4.986 10 11
1.298 = 4.986 1011
13.6 Z2 9
= 4.89 × 10 s = 155.06 year.
Now E1 = = – 54.4 eV
12
Example - 75
Hence, Z = 2 248 13
The element curium 96 Cm has a mean life of 10 second.
i.e., gas is helium originally excited to n = 5 energy state.
Its primary decay modes are spontaneous fission and
Example - 74 -decay, the former with a probability of 8% and the latter
In nature, a decay chain series starts with 232 with a probability of 92%. Each fission releases 200 MeV
90 Th and finally
of energy. The masses involved in decay are as follows :
208
terminates at 82 Pb . A thorium ore sample was found to 248
–5 –7 232 96 Cm = 248.072220 u, 42 He = 4.002603 u and
contain 8 × 10 mL of helium at STP and 5 × 10 g of Th.
Find the age of the ore sample assuming the source of 244
Pu = 244.064100 u.
232 94
helium to be only to the decay of Th. Also assume
20
complete retention of helium within the ore (Half life of Calculate the power output from a sample of 10 cm atoms.
10 2
232Th = 1.39 × 10 year ) Given : 1u = 931 MeV/c .
–5 13 20
Sol. No. of helium atom in 8 × 10 mL, Sol. As the mean life of the sample is 10 sec., all the 10 atoms
13
have a probability of decay with 10 second.
8 105 6.0231023 15 We first calculate the energy released in -decay. The
= 2.15 × 10 atoms
22400 corresponding reaction is :
232 208
Now, Th decays to Pb and in the process given six 248 244
96 Cm
94 Pu 42 He
helium atoms.
232 = 208 + 6 × 4 The mass defect is,
232 –5 248 244
No. of Th atoms used up to give 8 × 10 mL helium m = m( Cm) – [m( Pu) + m ( 42 He) ]
2.15 1015 14
= 248.0722204 – [244.064100 + 4.002603] = 0.005517 u
= = 3.585 × 10 atoms of Th
6 Equivalent energy is,
232
Also, No. of Th atoms left undecayed, E = 0.005517 × 931= 5.136 MeV
Energy released in the decay of one atom is,
5 107 6.0231023 15
N= = 1.298 × 10 atoms E = Efission + E-decay
232
= 0.08 × 200 + 0.92 × 5.136
232
No. of Th atoms at start of decay,
= 20.725 MeV
14 15
N0 = 3.585 × 10 + 1.298 × 10 atoms 20
Total energy released from the decay of all 10 atoms,
15
= 1.6565 × 10 atoms 20
= 20.725 × 10 MeV
20 –13 8
0.693 0.693 = 20.725 × 10 × (1.6 × 10 ) = 3.316 × 10 J
Now, = T
1/ 2 1.39 1010
Total energy released
–11 Power output =
= 4.986 × 10 per year Mean life
2.303 N
Age of the ore, t = log10 0 3.316 108 1
N = Js = 3.3 × 10–5 watt.
1013
MODERN PHYSICS 39
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Property of photon PASSAGE
1. Photon of frequency v has a momentum associated with it.
If c is the velocity of light, the momentum is Question no. 66 are based on the following paragraph :
A nucleus of mass M + m is at rest and decays, into two
v daughter nuclei of equal mass M/2 each. Speed of light is c.
(a) (b) hvc
c 6. The binding energy per nucleon for the parent nucleus is E1
hv hv and that for the daughter nuclei is E2. Then
(c) (d) (a) E2 = 2E1 (b) E1 > E2
c2 c
(c) E2 > E1 (d) E1 = 2E2
Bohr’s Model of atom
2. If 13.6 eV energy is required to ionize the hydrogen atom, Bohr Model
then the energy required to remove an electron from n = 2
7. An electron makes transition inside a hydrogen atom. The
is
orbital angular momentum of the electron may change by
h
(a) 10.2 eV (b) zero (a) h (b)
(c) 3.4 eV (d) 6.8 eV
3. If the binding energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is
13.6 eV, the energy required to remove the electron from h h
2+ (c) (d)
the first excited state of Li is 2 4
(a) 30.6 eV (b) 13.6 eV 8. An electron in the ground state of hydrogen has an angular
(c) 3.4 eV (d) 122.4 eV momentum L1, and an electron in the first excited state of
lithium has an angular momentum L2.
4. Suppose an electron is attracted towards the origin by a
force k/r, where k is a constant and r is the distance of the (a) L1 = L2 (b) L1 = 4L2
electron from the origin. By applying Bohr model to this (c) L2 = 2L1 (d) L1 = 2L2
th
system, the radius of the n orbital of the electron is found Speed, radius, kinetic, potential, total energy of elec-
to be rn and the kinetic energy of the electron to be Tn. tron
Then which of the following is true.
9. If an electron has, orbital angular momentum quantum number
l = 7, then it will have an orbital angular momentum equal to
1
(a) Tn 2
, rn n 2 h h
n (a) 7 (b) 42
2 2
(b) Tn is independent of n, rn n
h h
(c) 7 (d) 56
1 2 2
(c) Tn , rn n
n 10. The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in the first to
the second excited state
1
(d) Tn , rn n 2 (a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
n
2+
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4
5. Energy required for the electron excitation in Li from the
11. In Bohr’s Model of hydrogen atom. The ratio between the
first to the third Bohr orbit is
period of revolution of an electron in orbit of n = 1 to the
period of revolution of the electron in the orbit n = 2
(a) 36.3 eV (b) 108.8 eV (a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1
(c) 122.4 eV (d) 12.1 eV (c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 8
MODERN PHYSICS 40
12. The ratio of areas between the electron orbits for the first 18. Hydrogen (1H1), Deuterium (1H2), singly ionised Helium
excited state to the ground state for the hydrogen atom is (2He4)+ and doubly ionised lithium (3Li6)+ + all have one
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 electron around the nucleus. Consider an electron
transition from n = 2 to n = 1. If the wave lengths of emitted
(c) 8 : 1 (d) 16 : 1
13. The kinetic energy of an electron in the first orbit of H atom radiation are 1 , , 3 and 4 respectively then
is 13.6 eV. The total energy of an electron in the second orbit approximately which one of the following is correct ?
+
of He is
(a) 1 22 23 4 (b) 1 2 4 3 9 4
(a) 13.6 eV (b) 3.4 eV
(c) –13.6 eV (d) –3.4 eV (c) 1 22 3 3 4 4 (d) 41 22 23 4
Transition series 19. The absorption transition between the first and the fourth
energy states of hydrogen atom are 3. The emission
14. Energy levels A, B, C of a certain atom correspond to
transitions between these states will be
increasing values of energy i.e., EA < EB < EC. If 1,2,3, are
the wavelengths of radiations corresponding to the (a) 3 (b) 4
transitions C to B, B to A and C to A respectively, which of (c) 5 (d) 6
the following statements is correct ? 20. Which of the following transitions in the hydrogen atom
C emit the photon of highest frequency ?
B (a) n = 2 to n = 6 (b) n = 6 to n = 2
(c) n = 1 to n = 2 (d) n = 2 to n = 1
A 21. The ratio of minimum to maximum wavelength in Balmer
1 2 series is
(a) 3 = 1 + 2 (b) 3 = (a) 5 : 9 (b) 5 : 36
1 2
2 2 2 (a) 1 : 4 (d) 3 : 4
(c) 1 + 2 + 3= 0 (d) 3 = 1 + 2
22. The transition from the state n = 4 to n = 3 in a hydrogen like
15. The ratio of the wavelength of the first line of Lyman series atom results in ultraviolet radiation. Infrared radiation will
to the first line of Balmer series is be obtained in the transition
(a) 1 : 4 (b) 5 : 27 (a) 2 1 (b) 3 2
(c) 27 : 20 (d) 20 : 27
(c) 4 2 (d) 5 4
16. The wavelength of the first line of Lyman series of hydrogen
23. Which of the following atoms has the lowest ionization
is 1216 Å. The wavelength of the second line of the same
potential ?
series will be
14
(a) 912 Å (b) 1026 Å (A) 7 N (b) 133
55 Cs
(c) 3648 Å (d) 6566 Å 40 16
(c) 18 Ar (d) 8 O
ATOMS AND NUCLEI
24. A hydrogen atom emits a photon corresponding to an
17. In a hydrogen like atom electron makes transition from an electron transition from n = 5 to n = 1. The recoil speed of
energy level with quantum number n to another with quantum hydrogen atom is almost
number (n – 1). If n >> 1, the frequency of radiation emitted –4 –1 –2 –1
(a) 10 ms (b) 2 × 10 ms
is proportional to : –1 2 –1
(c) 4 ms (d) 8 × 10 ms
1 1 25. Let v1 be the frequency of the series limit of the Lyman
(a) (b)
n n2 series, v2 be the frequency of the first line of the Lyman
series, and v3 be the frequency of the series limit of the
1 1 Balmer series.
(c) 4 (d)
n n3 (a) v1 – v2 = v3 (b) v2 – v1 = v3
1
(c) v3 = (v + v ) (d) v1 + v2 = v3
2 1 2
MODERN PHYSICS 41
Nucleus Nuclear fission and fusion
26. In 88Ra226 nucleus, there are 34. The function of a moderator in a nuclear reactor is
(a) 138 protons and 88 neutrons (a) absorb the dangerous gamma radiation
(b) 138 neutrons and 88 protons (b) react with the nuclear fuel to release energy
(c) provide neutrons to the fission process
(c) 226 protons and 88 electrons
(d) slow down fast neutrons so as to have greater probability
(d) 226 neutrons and 138 electrons
for nuclear fission to occur
27. 1 a.m.u. equals 35. The below is a plot of binding energy per nucleon Eb, against
–27 –27
(a) 1.67 × 10 g (b) 1.67 × 10 kg the nuclear mass M; A, B, C, D, E, F correspond to different
(c) 1.67 × 10 g
–29
(d) 1.67 × 10 g
27 nuclei. Consider four reactions :
(i) A + B C + (ii) C A + B +
28. Density D of nuclear matter varies with nucleon number A as
3 2 (iii) D + E F + and (iv) F D + E +
(a) D A (b) D A
0
(c) D A (d) D A
29. The net force between two nucleons 1 fm apart is F1 if both
are protons, F2 if both are neutrons, and F3 if one is a neutron
and the other is a proton.
(a) F1 < F2 < F3 (b) F2 < F1 < F3
(c) F1 < F2 = F3 (d) F1 = F2 < F3 where is the energy released ? In which reactions is
positive ?
27
30. If radius of the 13 Al nucleus is estimated to be 3.6 fermi, (a) (i) and (iv) (b) (i) and (iii)
then the radius of 125
Te nucleus be nearly (c) (ii) and (iv) (d) (ii) and (iii)
52
(a) 6 fermi (b) 8 fermi Nuclear Binding Energy
36. Mp denotes the mass of a proton and Mn denotes the mass
(c) 4 fermi (d) 5 fermi
of a neutron. A given nucleus of B.E. B contains Z protons
and N neutrons. The mass M (N, Z) of the nucleus is given
31. The binding energy per nucleon of deuteron H
2
1 and
by (c is velocity of light)
helium nucleus 4
2
He is 1.1 MeV and 7 MeV respectively.. (a) M (N, Z) = N Mn + ZMp – B/c2
If two deuteron nuclei react to form a single helium, nucleus (b) M (N, Z) = N Mn + ZMp + B/c2
then the energy released is (c) M (N, Z) = N Mn + ZMp – Bc2
(a) 13.9 MeV (b) 26.9 MeV (d) M (N, Z) = N Mn + ZMp + Bc2
(c) 23.6 MeV (d) 19.2 MeV 37. The binding energy per nucleon for the parent nucleus is E1
and that for the daughter nuclei is E2. Then
Mass defect (a) E1 > E2 (b) E2 > E1
32. Li nucleus has three protons and four neutrons. Mass of Li (c) E1 > 2 E2 (b) E2 = 2 E1
nucleus is 7.016005 amu. Mass of proton is 1.007277 amu. 38. If a star can convert all the He nuclei completely into oxygen
and mass of neutron is 1.008665 amu. Mass defect of lithium nuclei, the energy released per oxygen nucleus is [Mass of
nucleus is amu is He nucleus is 4.0026 amu and mass of Oxygen nucleus is
(a) 0.04048 amu (b) 0.4050 amu 15.9994 amu]
(c) 0.04052 amu (d) 0.04055 amu (a) 7.6 MeV (b) 56.12 MeV
33. If M0 is the mass of an oxygen isotope 8O , Mp and and Mn
17 (c) 10.24 MeV (d) 23.9 MeV
are the masses of a proton and a neutron, respectively, the 39. The binding energy of deutron is 2.2 MeV and that of 2He4
nuclear binding energy of the isotope is is 28 MeV. If two deutrons are fused to form one 2He4, then
2 2 the energy released is
(a) (Mo – 8Mp)c (b) (Mo – 8Mp – 9Mn)c
2 2 (a) 19.2 MeV (b) 23.6 MeV
(c) Mo c (d) (Mo – 17 Mn)c
(c) 25.8 MeV (d) 30.2 MeV
MODERN PHYSICS 42
40. An atom bomb weighing 1 kg explodes releasing 9 × 1013 (a) , , (b) , ,
joule of energy. What percentage of mass is converted (c) , , (d) , ,
into energy ?
(a) 1% (b) 2% Law of Radioactive decay
(c) 0.1% (d) 10% 48. The graph between the instantaneous concentration (N) of
a radioactive element and time (t) is
41. Consider the following reaction
1 H 2 1H 2
2 He4 Q
2 4 N N
If m (1H ) = 2.0141 u ; m (2He ) = 4.0024 u. The energy Q
(a) (b)
released (in MeV) in this fusion reaction is
(a) 12 (b) 6 t t
(c) 24 (d) 48
236
42. Consider the fission reaction 92 X117 Y117 n n
U N N
(c) (d)
i.e. two nuclei of same mass number 117 are found plus two
neutrons. The binding energy per nucleon of X and Y is 8.5 t t
236
MeV whereas of U is 7.6 MeV. The total energy liberated 49. The activity of a radioactive sample is measured as 9750
–1 –1
is counts (minute) at t = 0 and 975 counts (minute) at t = 5
(a) 2000 MeV (b) 200 MeV minute. The decay constant is nearly
–1 –1
(c) 20 MeV (d) 2 MeV (a) 0.922 min (b) 0.691 min
–1 –1
(c) 0.461 min (d) 0.230 min
Alpha, Beta, Gamma Decay
50. The half life of radon is 3.8 days. After how many days will
43. A nucleus nXm emits one alpha and two beta particles. The
resulting nucleus is 1
th of the radon sample remain behind
(a) n – 1X m–4
(b) n – 2X m–4 10
m–4
(c) n – 4X (d) n Xm – 4 (a) 1.262 days (b) 12.62 days
44. 6
C12 absorbs an energetic neutron and emits a particle. (c) 126.2 days (d) 1262 days
The resulting nucleus is
51. A fraction f1 of a radioactive sample decays in one half life,
(a) 7N14 (b) 7N13 and a fraction f2 decays in one mean life
(c) 7B13 (d) 6C13 (a) f1 > f2
45. A nuclear transformation is denoted by X n, 37 Li . (b) f1 < f2
Which of the following is the nucleus of element X ? (c) f1 = f2
12 10 (d) Data insufficient to arrive at a conclusion
(a) 6 C (b) 5 B
52. A radioactive isotope has a half life T years. How long will it
take the activity to reduce to 1% of its original value ?
11
(c) 95 B (d) 4 Be (a) 3.2 T years (b) 4.6 T years
7 (c) 6.6 T years (d) 9.2 T years
46. When 3 Li nuclei are bombarded by proton, and the
Half life
resultant nuclei are 84 Be , the emitted particle will be
53. Half-lives of two radioactive substances A and B are
(a) alpha particles (b) beta particles respectively 20 minutes and 40 minutes. Initially the samples
of A and B have equal number of nuclei. After 80 minutes,
(c) gamma photons (d) neutrons
the ratio of remaining numbers of A and B nuclei is
47. Consider particles, particles and -rays, each having an
energy of 0.5 MeV. In increasing order of penetrating (a) 1 : 16 (b) 4 : 1
powers, the radiations are (c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 1
MODERN PHYSICS 43
54. The half-life period of a radioactive substance is 5 min. The 62. Which of the following cannot be emitted by radioactive
amount of substance decayed in 20 min. will be substances during their decay ?
(a) 93.75% (b) 75% (a) Protons (b) Neutrinos
(c) Helium nuclei (d) Electrons
(c) 25% (d) 6.25%
63. The half-life period of a radioactive element X is same as the
55. Rn decays into Po by emitting an –particle with half life of mean life time of another radioactive element Y. Initially they
4 days. A sample contains 6.4 × 1010 atoms of Rn. After 12 have the same number of atoms. Then (2007)
days, the number of atoms of Rn left in the sample will be (a) X will decay faster than Y
10 10
(a) 3.2 × 10 (b) 0.53 × 10 (b) Y will decay faster than X
10 10
(c) 2.1 × 10 (d) 0.8 × 10 (c) Y and X have same decay rate initially
56. The half life of radium is about 1600 years. Of 100 g of radium (d) X and Y decay at same rate always.
existing now, 25 g will remain unchanged after 64. Radioactive element decays to form a stable nuclide, then
(a) 2400 yrs (b) 3200 yrs dN
(c) 4800 yrs (d) 6400 yrs the rate of decay of reactant will vary with time (t)
dt
57. C14 has half life 5700 years. At the end of 11400 years, the as shown in figure
actual amount left is
dN dN
(a) 0.5 of original amount dt dt
(b) 0.25 of original amount (a) (b)
(c) 0.125 of original amount t t
(d) none of the above
215 dN dN
58. The half life of At is 100 s. The time taken for the dt dt
215 1 (c) (d)
radioactivity of a sample of At to decay to th of its
16 t t
initial value is
De-Broglie relation
(a) 400 s (b) 6.3 s
65. The de-Broglie wavelength of a molecule of thermal energy
(c) 40 s (d) 300 s k B T (k B = Boltzmann constant and T = absolute
59. In N0 is the original mass of the substance of half-life period temperature), is
t1/2 = 5yr, then the amount of substance left after 15 yr, is
h h
N0 N0 (a) (b) 2mk B T
(a) (b) 2mk B T
8 16
N0 N0 h
(c) (d) (c) h 2mk B T (d)
2 4 4m 2 k B2 T 2
66 66. The de Broglie wavelength of a particle of mass m moving
60. Starting with a sample of pure Cu, 7/8 of it decays into Zn
with a kinetic energy E is
in 15 min. The corresponding half-life is
(a) 10 min (b) 15 min h h
(a) (b)
2mE 2mE
1
(c) 5 min (d) 7 min h
2 h
(c) (d)
2mE 2mE
61. The half-life of a radioactive substance is 20 min. The
approximate time interval (t2 – t1) between the time t2 when 67. After Absorbing a slowly moving neutron of mass mN
2/3 of it has decayed and time t1 when 1/3 of it had decayed (momentum ~ 0) a nucleus of mass M beaks into two nuclei
of masses m1 and 5m1 (6m1 = M + mN), respectively. If the
is de–Broglie wavelength of the nucleus with mass m1 is , then
(a) 14 min (b) 20 min de–Broglie wavelength of the other nucleus will be
(a) 25 (b) 5
(c) 28 min (d) 7 min
(c) /5 (d)
MODERN PHYSICS 44
68. For which of the following particles will it be most difficult Work function, threshold frequency
to experimentally verify the de-Broglie relationship? 74. The work function of a metal in 4 eV. For the emission of
(a) an electron (b) a proton photoelectrons of zero velocity from the metal surface, the
wavelength of the incident radiation should be
(c) an -particle (d) a dust particle
(a) 1700 Å (b) 2700 Å
69. The wavelengths involved in the spectrum of deuterium
(c) 3100 Å (d) 5900 Å
D are slightly different from that of hydrogent spectrum,
2
1
75. Photons of frequency v fall on a metal surface for which the
because
threshold frequency is v0. Then,
(a) sizes of the two nuclei are different
(a) All ejected electrons have the same kinetic energy h(v – v0)
(b) nuclear forces are different in the two cases
(b) the ejected electrons have a distribution of kinetic energy
(c) masses of the two nuclei are different
from zero to h(v – v0)
(d) attraction between the electron and the nucleus is
(c) the most energetic electrons have kinetic energy hv
different in the two cases.
70. Formation of covalent bonds in compounds exibits (2002) (d) the average kinetic energy of ejected electrons is hv0.
(a) wave nature of electron 76. Sodium and copper have work functions 2.3 eV and 4.5 eV
respectively. Then the ratio of the wavelengths is nearest to
(b) particle nature of electron
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1
(c) both wave and particle nature of electron
(d) none of the above (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
71. The surface a metal is illuminated with the light of 400 nm. 77. Two identical, photocathodes receive light of frequencies f1
The kientic energy of the ejected photoelectrons was found and f2. If the velocities of the photoelectrons (of mass m)
to be 1.68 eV. The work function of the metal is (hc = 1240 coming out are respectively v1 and v2, then
eV–nm)
2 2 2h
(a) 3.09 eV (b) 1.42 eV (a) v1 v 2 f1 f 2
m
(c) 1.51 eV (d) 1.68 eV
1/ 2
Experimental arrangement and analysis 2h
(b) v1 v 2 f1 f 2
72. Light of two different frequencies whose photons have m
energies 1 eV and 2.5 eV successively illuminate a metal of
work function 0.5 eV. The ratio of the maximum speeds of 2 2 2h
the emitted electrons will be
(c) v1 v 2 f1 f 2
m
(a) 1 : 5 (b) 1 : 4
1/ 2
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1 2h
(d) v1 v 2 f1 f 2
m
Dual Nature of Matter and Radiation
73. The anode voltage of a photocell is kept fixed. The wavelength 78. The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest
of the light falling on the cathode is gradually changed. The wavelength of light that can cause photoelectron emission
plate current I of photocell varies as follows from this substance is approximately
(a) 540 nm (b) 400 nm
(c) 310 nm (d) 220 nm
(a) (b) 79. The threshold frequency for a metallic surface corresponds
to an energy of 6.2 eV and the stopping potential for a
radiation incident on this surface is 5 V. The incident radiation
lies in
(a) ultra-violet region (b) infra-red region
(c) (d) (c) visible region (d) X-rays region
MODERN PHYSICS 45
Graphs PASSAGE
80. Which one of the following graphs represents correctly the Question no. 82 are based on the following paragraph.
variation of photoelectric current (i) with intensity (I) of
incident radiations
Current (i)
Current (i)
(a) (b)
Intensity (I) Intensity (I)
Wave property of electrons implies that they will show
Current (i)
Current (i)
diffraction effects. Davisson and Germer demonstrated this
by diffracting electrons from crystals. The law governing
(c) (d) the diffraction from a crystal is obtained by requiring that
Intensity (I) Intensity (I) electron waves reflected from the planes of atoms in a crystal
interfere constructively (figure)
81. The anode voltage of a photocell is kept fixed. The 82. Electrons accelerated by potential V are diffracted from a
wavelength of the light falling on the cathode is gradually crystal. If d = 1 Å and i = 30°, V should be about
–34 –31 –19
changed. The plate current I of the photocell varies as (h = 6.6 × 10 J.s, me = 9.1 × 10 kg, e = 1.6 × 10 C)
follows (a) 2000 V (b) 50 V
(c) 500 V (d) 1000 V
1
83. An alpha nucleus of energy mv2 bombards a heavy
(a) (b) 2
nuclear target of change Ze. Then the distance of closest
approach for the alpha nucleus will be proportional to
2
(a) v (b) 1/m
1 1
(c) (d) (c) (d)
v4 Ze
MODERN PHYSICS 46
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. As an electron makes a transition from an exited state
to the ground state of a hydrogen – like atom/ion: hc 1 1 1
(a) e
3 2 1
(2015)
(a) Kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increase hc 1 1 1
but total energy remains same (b) e
3 2 1
(b) Kinetic energy and total energy decrease but potential
energy increases hc 1 1 3
(c) e 2 2
(c) Its kinetic energy increases but potential energy and 3 2 1
total energy decrease
hc 1 1 1
(d) Kinetic energy, potential energy and total energy (d) e 2
3 2 1
decrease
6. A photoelectric surface is illuminated successively by
2. Let N be the number of particles emitted by 1 gram of
Na24 radioactive nuclei (half life = 15 hrs) in 7.5 hours, N
monochromatic light of wavelengths and . If the
is close to (Avogadro number = 6.023 × 1023/g. mole) : 2
(2015 Online) maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons in
the second case is 3 times that in the first case, the work
(a) 6.2 × 1021 (b) 7.5 × 1021 function of the surface is : (2016 Online Set-2)
(c) 1.25 × 1022 (d) 1.75 × 1022
hc hc
3. Half-lives of two radioactive elements A and B are 20 (a) (b)
3 2
minutes and 40 minutes, respectively. Initially, the samples
have equal number of nuclei. After 80 minutes, the ratio of hc 3 hc
decayed numbers of A and B nuclei will be : (2016) (c) (d)
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
7. Radiation of wavelength , is incident on a photocell. The
(c) 5 : 4 (d) 1 : 16 fastest emitted electron has speed V. If the wavelength is
4. A neutron moving with a speed ‘v’ makes a head on 3
changed to , the speed of the fastest emitted electron
collision with s stationary hydrogen atom in ground state. 4
The minimum kinetic energy of the neutron for which will be : (2016)
inelastic collision will take place is : 1 1
(2016 Online Set-2) 4 2 4 2
(a) V (b) V
(a) 10.2 eV (b) 16.8 eV 3 3
(c) 12.1 eV (d) 20.4 eV 1 1
3 2 4 2
5. When photons of wavelength λ1 are incident on an isolated (c) V (d) V
4 3
sphere, the corresponding stopping potential is found to
be V. When photons of wavelength λ2 are used, the 8. Arrange the following electromagnetic radiations per
quantum in the order of increasing energy : (2016)
corresponding stopping potential was thrice that of the
A : Blue light B : Yellow light
above value. If light of wavelength λ3 is used then find the
stopping potential for this case : (2016 Online Set-1) C : X-ray D : Radiowave
(a) A, B, D, C (b) C, A, B, D
(c) B, A, D, C (d) D, B, A, C
9. A hydrogen atom makes a transition from n= 2 to n = 1
and emits a photon. This photon strikes a doubly ionized
MODERN PHYSICS 47
lithium atom (z = 3) in excited state and completely removes (a)
the orbiting electron. The least quantum number for the
excited state of the ion for the process is :
(2016 Online Set-1)
(a) 2 (b) 3.5
(c) 3 (d) 5
(b)
10. A Laser light of wavelength 660 nm is used to weld Retina
detachment. If a Laser pulse of width 60 ms and power 0.5
kW is used the approximate number of photons in the
pulse are :
[TakePlanck’sconstant h = 6.62 × 10–34 Js]
(2017 Online Set-2)
(c)
20 18
(a) 10 (b) 10
(c) 1022 (d) 1019
11. Two deuterons undergo nuclear fusion to form a Helium
nucleus. Energy released in this process is : (given binding
energy per nucleon for deuteron = 1.1 MeV and for helium
= 7.0 MeV) (2017 Online Set-1) (d)
(a) 30.2 MeV (b) 32.4 MeV
(c) 23.6 MeV (d) 25.8 MeV
12. Imagine that a reactor converts all given mass into energy
and that it operates at a power level of 109 watt. The mass
of the fuel consumed per hour in the reactor will be :
(velocity of light, c is 3 × 108 m/s) (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) 0.96 gm (b) 0.8 gm 15. The acceleration of an electron in the first orbit of the
hydrogen atom (n = 1) is : (2017 Online Set-2)
(c) 4 × 10–2 gm (d) 6.6 × 10–5 gm
13. A particle A of mass m and initial velocity v collides with h2 h2
(a) (b)
2 m 2 r 3 82 m 2 r 3
m
a particle B of mass which is at rest. The collision is h2 h2
2 (c) (d)
head on, and elastic. The ratio of the de-Broglie 4 2 m 2 r 3 4m 2 r 3
16. The maximum velocity of the photoelectrons emitted from
wavelengths A to B after the collision is : (2017)
the surface is v when light of frequency n falls on a metal
surface. If the incident frequency is increased to 3n, the
A 1 A maximum velocity of the ejected photoelectrons will be :
(a) 3 (b) 2
B B (2017 Online Set-1)
A 2 A 1 (a) less than 3v (b) v
(c) 3 (d) 2
B B (c) more than 3v (d) equal to 3v
14. An electron beam is accelerated by a potential difference 17. A radioactive nucleus A with a half life T, decays into a
V to hit a metallic target to produce X-rays. It produces nucleus B. At t = 0, there is no nucleus B. At sometime t,
the ratio of the number of B to that of A is 0.3. Then, t is
continuous as well as characteristic X-rays. If min is the
given by : (2017)
smallest possible wavelength of x-ray in the spectrum, the
T log 2 log1.3
variation of log min with log V is correctly represented (a) t 2 log1.3 (b) t T log 2
in: (2017)
T
(c) t T log 1.3 (d) t log 1.3
MODERN PHYSICS 48
18. According to Bohr’s theory, the time averaged magnetic 23. An electron from various excited states of hydrogen atom
field at the centre (i.e. nucleus) of a hydrogen atom due to emit radiation to come to the ground state. Let n ,g be
the motion of electrons in the nth orbit is proportional to :
the de Broglie wavelength of the electron in the nth state
(n = principal quantum number) (2017 Online Set-1)
and the ground state respectively. Let n be the
(a) n–4 (b) n–5
wavelength of the emitted photon in transition from the
(c) n–3 (d) n–2 nth state to the ground state. For large n, (A, B are
19. Some energy levels of a molecule are shown in the figure. constants) : (2018)
The ratio of the r 1 / 2 , is given by: (2017) (a) 2n A +B 2n (b) 2n
B
(c) n A + (d) n A +B n
2n
24. An unstable heavy nucleus at rest breaks into two nuclei
which move away with velocities in the ratio of 8 : 27. The
ratio of the radii of the nuclei (assumed to be spherical) is:
(2018 Online Set-2)
(a) 8 : 27 (b) 4 : 9
4 2 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 2 : 3
(a) r (b) r
3 3 25. At some instant, a radioactive sample S1 having an activity
5 Ci has twice the number of nuclei as another sample S2
3 1
(c) r (d) r which has an activity of 10 Ci. The half lives of S1 and S2
4 3
are : (2018 Online Set-3)
20. The energy required to remove the electron from a singly (a) 20 years and 5 years, respectively
ionized Helium atom is 2.2 times the energy required to
(b) 20 years and 10 years, respectively
remove an electron from Helium atom. The total energy
required to ionize the Helium atom completely is : (c) 5 years and 20 years, respectively
(2018 Online Set-1) (d) 10 years and 20 years, respectively
(a) 20 eV (b) 34 eV 60
26. A solution containing active cobalt 27 Co having activity
(c) 79 eV (d) 109 eV
21. Both the nucleus and the atom of some element are in of 0.8 Ci and decay constant is injected in an animal’ss
their respective first excited states. They get de-excited body. If 1 cm3 of blood is drawn from the animal’s body
after 10 hrs of injection, the activity found was 300 decays
by emitting photons of wavelengths N , A respectively..
per minute. What is the volume of blood that is flowing in
N the body? ( 1 Ci = 3.7 ×1010 decays per second and
The ratio is closest to : (2018 Online Set-3)
A
at t = 10 hrs e- t = 0.84 ) (2018 Online Set-1)
(a) 10-6 (b) 10 (a) 6 liters (b) 7 liters
(c) 10-10 (d) 10-1 (c) 4 liters (d) 5 liters
22. If the series limit frequency of the Lyman series is VL, then 27. If the de Broglie wavelengths associated with a proton and
the series limit frequency of the P fund series is :
an -particle are equal, then the ratio of velocities of the
(2018) proton and the -particle will be : (2018 Online Set-2)
VL VL (a) 4 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
(a) (b) (c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4
16 25
(c) 25VL (d) 16VL
MODERN PHYSICS 49
34. A nucleus A, with a finite de-broglie wavelength A,
28. The de-Broglie wavelength B associated with the
undergoes spontaneous fission into two nuclei B and C
electron orbiting in the second excited state of hydrogen ofequal mass. B flies in the same direction as that of A,
atom is related to that in the ground state G by : whileC flies in the opposite direction with a velocity equal
(2018 Online Set-3) tohalf of that of B. The de-Broglie wavelengths B and
C ofB and C are respectively:
(a) B = 2G (b) B = 3 G
(2019-04-08/Shift -2)
(c) B = G /2 (d) B = G /3 (a) A , 2 A (b) 2A , A
29. Two electrons are moving with non-relativistic speeds A
A
perpendicular to each other. If corresponding de Broglie (c) A , (d) , A
2 2
wavelengths are 1 and 2 , their de Broglie wavelength 35. The electric field of light wave is given as
in the frame of reference attached to their centre of mass 2 x N
is: (2018 Online Set-1) E 10 –3 cos 7
2 6 1014 t xˆ
5 10 C
21 2 This light falls on a metal plate of work function 2eV. The
(a) CM = 1 = 2 (b) CM =
12 + 22 stopping potential of the photo - electrons is:
12375
1 1 1 + 2 Given, E in eV o (2019-04-09/Shift -1)
(c) = +
1 2 (d) CM = 1 in A
CM 2
30. A plane electromagnetic wave travels in free space along
the x-direction. The electric field component of the wave at (a) 2.0 V (b) 0.72 V
a particular point of space and time is E = 6 Vm–1 along y- (c) 0.48 V (d) 2.48 V
direction. Its corresponding magnetic field component, B 36. Taking the wavelength of first Balmer line in hydrogen
would be: spectrum (n = 3 to n = 2) as 660 nm, the wavelength of the
(2019-04-08/Shift -1) 2ndBalmer line (n = 4 to n = 2) will be (in nm, as nearest
(a) 2 × 10–8 T along z-direction integer);
(b) 6 × 10–8 T along x-direction 37. A He ion is in first excited state. Its ionization energy is:
(c) 6 × 10–8 T along z-direction
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(d) 2 × 10–8 T along y-direction
(a) 48.36 eV (b) 54.40 eV
31. Two particles move at right angle to each other. Their de
(c) 13.60 eV (d) 6.04 eV
Broglie wavelengths are 1 and 2 respectively. The particles
suffer perfectly inelastic collision. The de Broglie wavelength 38. 50W / m2 energy density of sunlight is normally incident
, of the final particle, is given by: on the surface of a solar panel. Some part of incident energy
(2019-04-08/Shift -1) (25%) is reflected from the surface and the rest is absorbed.
1 1 1 The force exerted on 1m 2 surface area will be close to
(a) 2
2
2 (b) 12
1
2 ( c 3 108 m / s )
2 1 1 (2019-04-09/Shift -2)
2 2
(c) (d) (a) 15 108 N (b) 20 10 8 N
2 1 2
32. Radiation coming from transitions n = 2 to n = l of hydrogen (c) 10 108 N (d) 35 10 8 N
atoms fall on He+ ions in n = l and n = 2 states. The possible 39. A particle ‘P’ is formed due to a completely inelastic collision
transition of helium ions as they absorb energy from the of particles ‘x’ and ‘y’ having de-Broglie wavelengths
radiation is : ' x ' and ' y ' respectively. If x and y were moving in opposite
(2019-04-08/Shift -1) directions, then the de-Broglie wavelength of ‘P’ is:
(a) n = 2 n = 3 (b) n = 1 n = 4 (2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(c) n = 2 n = 5 (d) n = 2 n = 4
33. The ratio of the mass densities of nuclei of 40Ca and 16O x y x y
isclose to : (a) (b)
x y x y
(2019-04-08/Shift -2)
(a) 1 (b) 0.1 (c) x y (d) x y
(c) 5 (d) 2
MODERN PHYSICS 50
40. Light is incident normally on a completely absorbing surface (a) 1.82 eV (b) 1.66 eV
2
with an energy flux of 25 Wcm . If the surface has an area (c) 1.95 eV (d) 2.12 eV
+
of 25 cm 2 , the momentum transferred to the surface in 40min 45. An excited He ion emits two photons in succession. With
wavelengths 108.5 nm and 30.4 nm, in making a transition to
time duration will be
ground state. The quantum number n, corresponding to its
(2019-04-10/Shift -2)
initial excited state is (for photon of wavelength , energy E
(a) 6.3 104 Ns (b) 1.4 106 Ns
1240eV
(c) 5.0 103 Ns (d) 3.5 106 Ns = in nm ) (2019-04-12/Shift -1)
41. A 2 mW laser operates at a wavelength of 500 nm. The
number of photons that will be emitted per second is: (a) n = 4 (b) n = 5
(c) n = 7 (d) n = 6
[Given Plank’s constant h 6.6 1034 Js , speed of light
46. The electron in a hydrogen atom first jumps from the third
c 3.0 108 m / s ] excited state to the second excited state and subsequently
(2019-04-10/Shift -2) to the first excited state. The ratio of the respective
(a) 5 1015 (b) 1.5 1016 1
(c) 2 10 16 (d) 110 16 wavelengths, , of the photons emitted in this process is:
2
42. Two radioactive substances A and B have decay constants
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
5 and respectively. At t 0, a sample has the same
number of the two nuclei. The time taken for the ratio of the 20 27
(a) (b)
2 7 5
1
number of nuclei to become will be:
e 7 9
(2019-04-10/Shift -2) (c) (d)
5 7
1 1 47. Consider an electron in a hydrogen atom, revolving in its
(a) (b)
2 4 O
second excited state (having radius 4.65 A ). The de-
1 2 Brogliewavelength of this electron is :
(c) (d)
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
43. In Li ,electron in first Bohr orbit is excited to a level by a
O O
(a) 3.5 A (b) 6.6 A
radiation of wavelength . When the ion gets deexcited to
the ground state in all possible ways (including intermediate O O
emissions), a total of six spectral lines are observed. What (c) 12.9 A (d) 9.7 A
is the value of ? (2019-04-10/Shift -2) 48. Half lives of two radioactive nuclei A and Bare 10 minutes
34
(Given: h 6.63 10 Js; c 3 10 ms ) 8 1 and 20 minutes, respectively. If, initially a sample has equal
number of nuclei, then after 60 minutes, the ratio of decayed
(a) 11.4 nm (b) 9.4 nm
numbers of nuclei A to that of B will be:
(c) 12.3 nm (d) 10.8 nm
44. The stopping potential V0 (in volt) as a function of frequency (2019-04-12/Shift -2)
( ) for a sodium emitter, is shown in the figure. The work (a) 3 : 8 (b) 1 : 8
function of sodium, from the data plotted in the figure, will (c) 8 : 1 (d) 9 : 8
be : (Given : Planck’s constant (h) = 6.63 × 10-34 Js, electron
charge, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C) 49. A sample of radioactive material A, that has an activity of 10
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) mCi (1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 decays/s), has twice the number of
nuclei as another sample of a different radioactive material
B which has an activity of 20 mCi. The correct choices for
half-lives of A and B would then be respectively:
(2019-01-9/Shift -1)
(a) 5 days and 10 days (b) 10 days and 40 days
(c) 20 days and 5 days (d) 20 days and 10 days
MODERN PHYSICS 51
50. Surface of certain metal is first illuminated with light of
wavelength 1 = 350 nm and then, by light of wavelength
2 = 540 nm. It is found that the maximum speed of he
photo electrons in the two cases differ by a factor of (2).
The work function of the metal (in eV) is close to:
1240
(Energy of photon = in nm eV ) (2019-01-9/Shift -1)
(a) 1.8 (b) 2.5
(c) 5.6 (d) 1.4
51. At a given instant, say t = 0, two radioactive substances A (a) Brown, Blue, Brown (b) Brown, Blue, Black
RB (c) Red, Green, Brown (d) Grey, Black, Brown
and B have equal activities. The ratio R of their activities
A 55. Consider the nuclear fission Ne20 2He4 C12
–3t
after time t itself decays with time t as e . If the half-life of Given that the binding energy/nucleon of Ne20, He4 and C12
A is ln 2 , the half-life of B is: are, respectively, 8.03 MeV 7.07 MeV and 7.86 MeV, identify
(2019-01-9/Shift -2)
the correct statement: (2019-01-10/Shift -2)
4 ln2 (a) energy of 12.4 MeV will be supplied
(a) 4 ln 2 (b)
2
(b) 8.3 MeV energy will be released
ln 2 (c) energy of 3.6 MeV will be released
(c) (d) 2 ln 2
4 (d) energy of 9.72 MeV has to be supplied
52. The magnetic field associated with a light wave is given at
56. A metal plate of area 1104 m 2 is illuminated by a radiation
the origin by B = B0 [sin(3.14 × 107)ct + sin(6.28 × 107)ct]. If
this light falls on a silver plate having a work function of 4.7 of intensity 16mW/m2. The work function of the metal is 5
eV, what will be the maximum kinetic energy of the eV. The energy of the incident photons is 10eV and only
photoelectrons? 10% of it produces photo electrons. The number of emitted
(c = 3 × 108 ms-1, h = 6.6 × 10-34J-s)
photo electrons per second and their maximum energy,
(2019-01-9/Shift -2)
9
(a) 6.82 eV (b) 12.5 eV respectively, will be: 1 eV 1.6 10 J
(c) 8.52 eV (d) 7.72 eV
(2019-01-10/Shift -2)
53. A parallel plate capacitor having capacitance 12 pF is 14 12
(a) 10 and 10 eV (b) 10 and 5 eV
charged by a battery to a potential difference of 10 V between 11
(c) 10 and 5 eV (d) 1010 and 5 eV
its plates. The charging battery is now disconnected and a
57. A hydrogen atom, initially in the ground state is excited by
porcelain slab of dielectric constant 6.5 is slipped between absorbing a photon of wavelength 980 Å. The radius of the
the plates. The work done by the capacitor on the slab is: atom in the excited state, in terms of Bohr radius a0, will be:
(hc = 12500 eV–Å)
(2019-01-10/Shift -2)
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
(a) 692 pJ (b) 508 pJ (a) 25a0 (b) 9a0
(c) 560 pJ (d) 600 pJ (c) 16a0 (d) 4a0
54. The Wheatstone bridge shown in the figure. here, gets 58. If the deBroglie wavelength of an electron is equal to 10–3
times the wavelength of a photon of frequency 6 × 1014 then
balanced when the carbon resistor used as R1 has the colour the speed of electron is equal to :
code (Orange, Red, Brown). The resistors R2 and R4 are 80 (Speed of light = 3 × 108 m/s)
Ω and 40 Ω, respectively. Assuming that the colour code Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 10–34 J.s
Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10–31 kg)
for the carbon resistors gives their accurate values, the
(2019-01-11/Shift -1)
colour code for the carbon resistor, used as R3, would be: 6
(a) 1.1 × 10 m/s (b) 1.7 × 106 m/s
(2019-01-10/Shift -2) 6
(c) l.8 × 10 m/s (d) l.45 × 106 m/s
MODERN PHYSICS 52
59. In a hydrogen like atom, when an electron jumps from theM- 232
64. In a radioactive decay chain, the initial nucleus is Th . At
shell to the L-shell, the wavelength of emitted radiationis . 90
If an electron jumps from N-shell to the L-shell, the the end, there are 6 and 4 -particles which are emitted.
wavelength of emitted radiation will be: A
If the end nucleus is Z X , A and Z are given by
(2019-01-11/Shift -2)
(2019-01-12/Shift -2)
27 16 (a) A = 208 ; Z = 80
(a) (b)
20 25 (b) A = 202 ; Z = 80
(c) A = 208 ; Z = 82
25 20
(c) (d) (d) A = 200 ; Z = 81
16 27 65. If the de Broglie wavelength of the electron in nth Bohr orbit
60. In a photoelectric experiment, the wavelength of the light
in a hydrogenic atom is equal to 1.5 a0 (a0 is Bohr radius),
incident on a metal is changed from 300 nm to 400 nm. The
decrease in the stopping potential is close then the value of n/z is
(2019-01-12/Shift -2)
hc (a) 0.40 (b) 1.50
to: 1240nm V
e (c) 1.0 (d) 0.75
(2019-01-11/Shift -2)
66. In a reactor, 2 kg of 92 U 235 fuel is fully used up in 30 days.
(a) 0.5 V (b) 1.5 V
(c) 1.0 V (d) 2.0 V The energy released per fission is 200 MeV. Given that the
61. A particle of mass m moves in a circular orbit in a central Avogadro number, N = 6.023 × 1026 per kilo mole and 1 eV =
potential field. If Bohr’s quantization conditions are applied, 1.6 × 10–19 J. The power output of the reactor is close to
radii of possible orbits and energy levels vary with quantum (2020-09-2/Shift -1)
number n as (a) 60 MW (b) 54 MW
(2019-01-12/Shift -1) (c) 125 MW (d) 35 MW
67. When radiation of wavelength is used to illuminate a
(a) rn n , E n n
metallic surface, the stopping potential is V. When the same
1 surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength 3, the
(b) rn n , E n
n
V
stopping potential is . If the threshold wavelength for
(c) rn n, E n n 4
1 the metallic surface is n then value of n will be ……….. .
2
(d) rn n , E n (2020-09-2/Shift -1)
n2
68. A particle is moving 5 times as fast as an electron. The ratio
62. A particle A of mass ‘m’ and charge ‘q’ is accelerated by a
of the de-Broglie wavelength of the particle to that of the
potential difference of 50 V. Another particle B of mas ‘4m’
electron is 1.878 × 10–4. The mass of the particle is close to :
and charge ‘q’ is accelerated by a potential difference of
(2020-09-2/Shift -2)
A
2500V. The ratio of de-Broglie wavelength is (a) 4.8 1027 kg
B
(2019-01-12/Shift -1) (b) 9.1 10 31 kg
(a) 10.00 (b) 0.07
(c) 9.7 1028 kg
(c) 14.14 (d) 4.47
63. When a certain photo-sensistive surface is illuminated with (d) 1.2 10 28 kg
monochromatic light of frequency v, the stopping potential
for the photo current is –V 0/2 . When the surface is 69. In a hydrogen atom the electron makes a transition from (n
illuminated by monochromatic light of frequency v/2, the + 1)th level to the nth level. If n >> 1, the frequency of radiation
stopping potential is –V0. The threshold frequency for emitted is proportional to :
photoelectric emission is : (2020-09-2/Shift -2)
(2019-01-12/Shift -2) 1 1
(a) (b)
5v 4 n2 n
(a) (b) v
3 3
1 1
(c) 3 (d)
3v n n4
(c) 2v (d)
2
MODERN PHYSICS 53
70. When the wavelength of radiation falling on a metal is
changed from 500 nm to 200 nm, the maximum kinetic energy 5
(a) = 0 (b) = 2 0
of the photoelectrons becomes three times larger. The work 2
function of the metal is close to : 3
(2020-09-03/Shift -1) (c) =40 (d) =
0
2
(a) 1.02 eV (b) 0.61 eV
(c) 0.52 eV (d) 0.81 eV 76. The specific heat of water = 4200 j kg-1K–1and the latent heat
71. In a radioactive material, fraction of active material remaining of ice = 3.4×105 J kg -1 , 100 grams of ice at 0 C is placed in
after time t is 9/16. The fraction that was remaining after t/2 200 g of water at 250C. The amount of ice that will melt as the
is : (2020-09-03/Shift -1) temperature of water reaches 00C is close to (in grams):
3 7 (2020-09-04/Shift -1)
(a) (b) (a) 63.8 (b) 64.6
4 8
(c) 61.7 (d) 69.3
4 3 77. In the line spectra of hydrogen atoms, difference between
(c) (d)
5 5 the largest and the shortest wavelengths of the Lyman series
72. Two sources of light emit X-rays of wavelength 1 nm and 0
is 304 A . The corresponding difference for the Paschenseries
visible light of wavelength 500 nm, respectively. Both the
sources emit light of the same power 200 W. The ratio of the 0
in is A :_______.
number density of photons of X-rays to the number density
of photons of the visible light of the given wavelengths is : (2020-09-04/Shift -1)
(2020-09-03/Shift -2) 78. Find the Binding energy per neucleon for 120
50 Sn . Mass of
1 1
(a) (b) proton mp = 1.00783 U, mass ofneutron mn = 1.00867 U and
500 250
(c) 500 (d) 250 mass of tin nucleus mSn = 119.902199 U. (take 1U = 931MeV)
(2020-09-04/Shift -2)
73. If a semiconductor photodiode can detect a photon with a
maximum wavelength of 400 nm, then its band gap energy is (a) 8.0 MeV (b) 9.0 MeV
:
Planck’s constant h = 6.63 × 10–34J.s. Speed of light c = 3 × (c) 7.5 MeV (d) 8.5 MeV
108 m/s
79. In a photoelectric effect experiment, the graph of stopping
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)
(a) 1.5 eV (b) 2.0 eV potential V versus reciprocalof wavelength obtained is
(c) 3.1 eV (d) 1.1 eV
74. The radius R of a nucleus of mass number A can be estimated shown in the figure. As the intensity of incident radiation
by the formula R = (1.3 1015 ) A1/3 m. It follows that the isincreased:
mass density of a nucleus is of the order of : (2020-09-04/Shift -2)
27
(M prot. M neut 1.67 10 kg)
(2020-09-03/Shift -2)
(a) 1017 kg m 3 (b) 1010 kg m 3
(c) 10 24 kg m 3 (d) 103 kg m 3
m
75. Particle A of mass m A = moving along the x-axis with
2
velocity V0 collides elastically with another particle B at rest
m
having mass m B = . If both particles move along the x- (a) Straight line shifts to right
3
axis after the collision, the change in de-Broglie (b) Straight line shifts to left
wavelength of particle A, in terms of its de-Broglie (c) Slope of the straight line get more steep
wavelength (0 ) before collision is:
(d) Graph does not change
(2020-09-04/Shift -1)
MODERN PHYSICS 54
80. Activities of three radioactive substances A, B and C are
(a) e P He (b) e He P
represented by the curves A, B and C, in the figure. Then
their half-lives T1 (A) : T1 (B) : T1 (C) are in the ratio : (c) e P He (d) e He P
2 2 2
7
(2020-09-05/Shift -1) 86. You are given that Mass of 3 Li 7.0160u , Mass of
4
2 He 4.0026u and Mass of 11 H 1.0079u. When 20g of
7 4
3 Li is converted into 2 He by proton capture, the energy
liberated, (in kWh), is: [Mass of nucleon = 1 GeV/c2]
(2020-09-06/Shift -1)
(a) 6.82 105 (b) 4.5 105
(c) 8 106 (d) 1.33 106
87. Assuming the nitrogen molecule is moving with r.m.s.
(a) 3 : 2 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 : 1
velocity at 400 K, the de-Broglie wavelength of nitrogen
(c) 4 : 3 : 1 (d) 2 : 1 : 3
molecule is close to : (Given : nitrogen molecule weight :
81. A beam of electrons of energy E scatters from a target having
4.64 × 10-26 kg, Boltzman constant : 1.38 × 10-23 J/K, Planck
atomic spacing of 1Å. The first maximum intensity occurs at
constant : 6.63 × 10-34 J.s)
60º Then E (in eV) is ………….. . (2020-09-06/Shift -2)
(Planck constant h = 6.64 × 10–34Js, 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19 J, (a) 0.44 Å (b) 0.34Å
electron mas m = 9.1 × 10–31 kg) (c) 0.20Å (d) 0.24Å
(2020-09-05/Shift -1) 88. Given the masses of various atomic particles mp = 1.0072
u, mn = 1.0087 u, me = 0.000548 u,
82. The correct match between the entries in column I and mv 0, md 2.0141u, where p proton, n neutron, e
column II are :
IRadiation IIWavelength electron, v antineutrino and d deuteron. Which of the
(A) Microwave (i) 100 m following process is allowed by momentum and energy
(B) Gamma rays (ii) 10–15 m conservation?
(C) A.M. radio waves (iii) 10–10 m (2020-09-06/Shift -2)
(D) X-rays (iv) 10–3 m (a) n + n deuterium atom (electron bound to the nucleus)
(2020-09-05/Shift -2) (b) e e
(a) (A) – (ii), (B) – (i), (C) – (iv), (D) – (iii)
(b) (A) – (iii), (B) – (ii), (C) – (i), (D) – (iv) (c) p n e v
(c) (A) – (iv), (B) – (ii), (C) – (i), (D) – (iii)
(d) n p d
(d) (A) – (i), (B) – (iii), (C) – (iv), (D) – (ii)
83. A radioactive nucleus decays by two different processes. 89. The time period of revolution of electron in its ground state
The half life for the first process is 10 s and that for the orbit in a hydrogen atom is 1.6 10 16 s . The frequency of
second is 100 s. The effective half life of the nucleus is
revolution of the electron in its first excited state in s is
1
close to :
(2020-09-05/Shift -2) :
(a) 55 sec. (b) 6 sec. (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(c) 12 sec. (d) 9 sec (a) 6.2 1015 (b) 1.6 1014
84. The surface of a metal is illuminated alternately with photons
(c) 7.8 1014 (d) 5.6 1012
of energies E1 4 eV and E 2 2.5 eV respectively. The
90. A beam of electromagnetic radiation of intensity
ratio of maximum speeds of the photoelectrons emitted in
the two cases is 2. The work function of the metal in (eV) is 6.4 105 W / cm 2 is comprised of wavelength,
…………… . 310nm . It falls normally on a metal (work
(2020-09-05/Shift -2) function 2 eV )of surface area 1cm 2 . If one in
85. An electron, a doubly ionized helium ion (He++) and a proton
are having the same kinetic energy. The relation between 103 photons ejects an electron, total number of electrons
their respective de-Broglie wavelengths ejected in ls is 102 (hc = 1240eV – nm, 1eV = 1.6 × 10–19J)then
e , and P is: x is
He (2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(2020-09-06/Shift -1)
MODERN PHYSICS 55
91. The activity of a radioactive substance falls from 700 s-1 to (c)
500 s-1 in 30 minutes. Its half-life is close to
(2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(a) 66 min (b) 62 min
(c) 52 min (d) 72 min
92. An electron (of mass m) and a photon have the same energy
E in the range of few eV. The ratio of the de Broglie
wavelength associated with the electron and the wavelength
of the photon is. (c = speed of light in vacuum)
(2020-01-07/Shift -1)
1 1
(d)
E 2 1 2E 2
(a) (b)
2m c m
1
1 1 E 2
(c) c 2mE 2 (d)
c 2m
93. When photons of energy 4 eV strikes the surface of a metal
A, the ejected photoelectrons have maximum kinetic
energyTA eV and de-Broglie wavelength A . The maximum
kinetic energy of photoelectrons liberated from another metal
95. An electron (mass m) with initial velocity v v0 iˆ v0 ˆj
B by photon of energy 4.50 eV is TB TA 1.5 eV. If the
de-Broglie wavelength of these photoelectrons B 2A is in an electric field E E0 kˆ . If 0 is initial de-Broglie
then the work function of metal B is wavelength of electron, its de-Broglie wavelength at time t
(2020-01-08/Shift -1) is given by
(a) 3 eV (b) 1.5 eV (2020-01-08/Shift -2)
(c) 2 eV (d) 4 eV 0
94. The graph which depicts the result of Rutherford gold foil e 2 E02t 2
(a) 1
experiement with particle is: : Scattering angle N : m 2 v02
Number of scattered particles is detected (Plots are
schematic and not to scale)
0
(2020-01-08/Shift -1) (b) e 2 E02 t 2
(a) 1
m 2 v02
0
(c) e2 E 2t 2
1
2m 2 v02
0
(d) e2 E 2 t 2
2
m2 v02
96. The first member of Balmer series of hydrogen atom has a
(b)
wavelength of 6561 Å. The wavelength of the second
member of the Balmer series (in nm) is
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
97. Radiation with wavelength 6561 A falls on a metal surface to
produce photoelectrons.The electrons are made to enter a
uniform magnetic field of 3×10"4 T. If the radius oflargest
circular path followed by electron is 10 mm, the work function
of metal is close to
(2020-01-09/Shift -1)
(a) 1.8 eV (b) 0.8 eV
(c) 1.1 eV (d) 1.6 eV
MODERN PHYSICS 56
98. Kinetic energy of the particle is E and it’s de–Broglie 100. An electron of mass m and magnitude of charge |e| initially
wavelength is On increasing its K.E by ΔE, it’s new de– at rest gets accelerated by a constant electric field E. The of
charge of de-Broglie wavelength of this electron at time
tignoring relativistic effects is
Broglie wavelength becomes . Then E is
2 (2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(2020-01-09/Shift -1)
(a) 3E (b) E e Et h
(a) (b) e E t
(c) 2E (d) 4E h
99. The energy required to ionise a hydrogen like ion in its
ground state is 9 Rydbergs. What is the wavelength of the h 2ht 2
radiation emitted when the electron in this ion jumps from (c) e Et 2
(d) e E
the second excited state to the ground stare ?
(2020-01-09/Shift -2) 101. Statement-I : Energy is released when heavy nuclei undergo
(a) 8.6 fission or light nuclei undergo fusion.
(b) 11.4
(c) 24.2 Statement-II : For heavy unclei, binding energy per nucleon
(d) 35.8 increases with increasing Z while for light nuclei it decreases
with increasing Z.
(a) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
(b) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is false.
(c) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true.
(d) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is a
correct explanation for Statement-I.
MODERN PHYSICS 57
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. In Bohr’s model, the atomic radius of the first orbit is r0 , 6. In the nuclear fusion reaction 12 H 13 H 42 He n, given
then the radius of the third orbit is
that the repulsive potential energy between the two nuclei
(a) r0/9 (b) r0
is –7.7 × 10–14 J, the temperature at which the gases must
(c) 9r0 (d) 3r0 be heated to initiate the reaction is nearly
[Boltzmann’s constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J/K]
2. Find the ratio of ionisation energy of Bohr’s hydrogen atom
(a) 109 K (b) 107 K
and hydrogen-like lithium atom. 5
(c) 10 K (d) 103 K
(a) 1/9 (b) 7/9 7. An electron has a mass of 9.1 × 10–31 kg. It revolves round
(c) 1/3 (d) none of the above the nucleus in a circular orbit of radius 0.529 × 10–10 metre
3. The ionisation potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 volt. at a speed of 2.2 × 106 m/s. The magnitude of its linear
The energy required to remove an electron in the n = 2 momentum in this motion is
state of the hydrogen atom is (a) 1.1 × 10–34 kg–m/s (b) 2.0 × 10–24 kg–m/s
(a) 27.2 eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) 4.0 × 10–24 kg–m/s (d) 4.0 × 10–31 kg–m/s
(c) 6.8 eV (d) 3.4 eV 8. The kinetic energy of the electron in an orbit of radius r in
4. If m is mass of electron, v its velocity, r the radius of hydrogen atom is
stationary circular orbit around a nucleus with charge Ze, (e = electronic charge)
then from Bohr’s first postulate, the kinetic energy
e2 e2
1 (a) 2 (b)
K mv 2 of the electron in C.G.S. system is equal to r 2r
2
e2 e2
(c) (d)
1 Ze 2 1 Ze 2
r 2r2
(a) (b)
2 r 2 r2 9. Ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 V. Hydrogen
atoms in the ground state are excited by monochromatic
Ze 2 Ze radiation of photon energy 12.1 eV. The spectral lines
(c) (d)
r r2 emitted by hydrogen atoms according to Bohr’s theory
will be
5. If in hydrogen atom, radius of nth Bohr orbit is rn, frequency
of revolution of electron in nth orbit is fn choose the correct (a) One (b) Two
option (c) Three (d) Four
10. An energy of 24.6 eV is required to remove one of the electrons
rn
rn from a neutral helium atom. The energy (in eV) required to
log –– remove both the electrons from a neutral helium atom is
r1
(a) 79.0 (b) 51.8
(a) (b)
(c) 49.2 (d) 38.2
o o log n
n 11. When an electron jumps from its ground state to the first
excited state, the average value of its potential energy ?
fn (a) rises
log ––
f1 (b) stays the same
(c) (d) Both (a) and (b) (c) falls
o (d) we cannot determine the answer without more
log n
information
MODERN PHYSICS 58
12. A ground-state electron (in a hydrogen atom) absorb a 17. An X-ray tube is operated at 50 kV. The minimum
photon of energy 3E0. How much kinetic energy does the wavelength produced is
electron now have ? (a) 0.5 Å (b) 0.75 Å
(a) E0 (b) 2E0 (c) 0.25 Å (d) 1 Å
18. As the electron in Bohr orbit of Hydrogen atom passes
(c) 3E0 (d) 4 E0
from state n = 2 to n = 1, the kinetic energy K and potential
13. Which of the following transitions in a hydrogen atom energy U change as
emits photon of the highest frequency
(a) K two-fold, U four-fold
(a) n = 1 to n = 2 (b) n = 2 to n = 1
(b) K four-fold, U two-fold
(c) n = 2 to n = 6 (d) n = 6 to n = 2
(c) K four-fold, U also four-fold
14. If max is 6563 Å, then wave length of second line for (d) K two-fold, U also two-fold
Balmer series will be 19. An electron jumps from the 4th orbit to the 2nd orbit of
hydrogen atom. Given the Rydberg’s constant R = 105
16 36 cm–1. The frequency in Hz of the emitted radiation will be
(a) (b)
3R 5R
3 3
4 (a) 10 5 (b) 1015
(c) (d) None of the above 16 16
3R
9 3
15. Which one of the series of hydrogen spectrum is in the (c) 1015 (d) 1015
16 4
visible region
20. If the wavelength of the first line of the Balmer series of
(a) Lyman series (b) Balmer series hydrogen is 6561 Å, the wavelength of the second line of
(c) Paschen series (d) Bracket series the series should be
(a) 13122 Å (b) 3280 Å
16. The energy levels of the hydrogen spectrum is shown in
figure. There are some transitions A, B, C, D and E. (c) 4860 Å (d) 2187 Å
Transition A, B and C respectively represent 21. Ratio of the wavelengths of first line of Lyman series and
first line of Balmer series is
–0.00 eV (a) 1: 3 (b) 27 : 5
n=6 –0.36 eV (c) 5 : 27 (d) 4 : 9
n=5 –0.54 eV
n=4 –0.85 eV 22. The mass number of He is 4 and that for sulphur is 32. The
C radius of sulphur nucleus is larger than that of helium, by times
n=3 –1.51 eV
B D
n=2 –3.39 eV (a) 8 (b) 4
A E (c) 2 (d) 8
23. One requires energy En to remove a nucleon from a nucleus
n=1 –13.5 eV and an energy ‘Ee’ to remove an electron from the orbit of
an atom. Then
(a) First member of Lyman series, third spectral line of (a) En = Ee (b) En < Ee
Balmer series and the second spectral line of Paschen (c) En > Ee (d) En > Ee
series 24. The Rutherford -particle experiment shows that most of
(b) Ionization potential of hydrogen, second spectral line the -particles pass through almost unscattered while
of Balmer series and third spectral line of Paschen some are scattered through large angles. What information
series does it give about the structure of the atom
(c) Series limit of Lyman series, third spectral line of Balmer (a) Atom is hollow
series and second spectral line of Paschen series (b) The whole mass of the atom is concentrated in a small
(d) Series limit of Lyman series, second spectral line of centre called nucleus
Balmer series and third spectral line of Paschen series (c) Nucleus is positively charged
(d) All the above
MODERN PHYSICS 59
25. Binding energy of a nucleus is 32. A metal block is exposed to beams of X-ray of different
(a) Energy given to its nucleus during its formation wavelength. X-rays of which wavelength penetrate most
(b) Total mass of nucleus converted to energy units (a) 2 Å (b) 4 Å
(c) Loss of energy from the nucleus during its formation (c) 6 Å (d) 8 Å
(d) Total K.E. and P.E. of the nucleons in the nucleus 33. During a negative beta decay
Mass defect
(a) An atomic electron is ejected
26. If m, mn and mp are the masses of ZXA nucleus, neutron and
proton respectively (b) An electron which is already present within the
nucleus is ejected
(a) m < (A – Z) mn + Zmp (b) m = (A – Z) mn + Zmp
(c) A neutron in the nucleus decays emitting an electron
(c) m = (A – Z) mp + Zmn (d) m > (A – Z) mn + Zmp
27. The masses of neutron and proton are 1.0087 a.m.u. and (d) A part of the binding energy is converted into electron
1.0073 a.m.u. respectively. If the neutrons and protons 235
34. What is the power output of 92U reactor if it takes 30 days
combine to form a helium nucleus (alpha particles) of mass to use up 2kg of fuel and if each fission gives 185 MeV. of
4.0015 a.m.u. The binding energy of the helium nucleus 26
usable energy ? Avogadro’s number = 6.02 × 10 per kilomole.
will be (1 a.m.u.= 931 MeV)
(a) 45 megawatt (b) 58.46 megawatt
(a) 28.4 MeV (b) 20.8 MeV
(c) 27.3 MeV (d) 14.2 MeV (c) 72 megawatt (d) 92 megawatt
35. If the decay or disintegration constant of a radioactive
28. The binding energy of deuteron 12 H is 1.112 MeV per
substance is , then its half life and mean life are
nucleon and an –particle 42 He has a binding energy of respectively
7.047 MeV per nucleon. Then in the fusion reaction
2 1 log e 2 log e 2 1
1 H 12 H 42 He Q, the energy Q released is (a) and (b) and
(a) 1 MeV (b) 11.9 MeV
(c) 23.8 MeV (d) 931 MeV 1 1
(c) log e 2 and (d) log 2 and
29. The binding energies per nucleon for a deuteron and an e
particle are x1 and x2 respectively. What will be the
36. A radioactive sample consists of two distinct species
energy Q released in the reaction 1 H 2 1H 2 2 He 4 Q having equal number of atoms initially. The mean life time
(a) 4 (x1 + x2) (b) 4 (x2 – x1) of one species is and that of the other is 5. The decay
products in both cases are stable. A plot is made of the
(c) 2 (x1 + x2) (d) 2 (x2 – x1)
total number of radioactive nuclei as a function of time.
30. If the binding energy per nucleon in Li7 and He4 nuclei are
respectively 5.60 MeV and 7.06 MeV, then energy of Which of the following figures best represents the form
reaction Li7 + p 2 2He4 is of this plot
(a) 19.6 MeV (b) 2.4 MeV N N
(c) 8.4 MeV (d) 17.3 MeV
31. Binding energy per nucleon plot against the mass number
for stable nuclei is shown in the figure. Which curve is correct (a) (b)
t t
D
Binding energy
B
per nucleon
N N
C
A
Mass number (c) (d)
t t
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
MODERN PHYSICS 60
37. Radioactive element decays to form a stable nuclide, then
42. The half-life of Bi 210 is 5 days. What time is taken by
dN
the rate of decay of reactant will vary with time (t) th
dt 7
part of the sample to decay
as shown in figure 8
(a) 3.4 days (b) 10 days
dN dN
dt dt (c) 15 days (d) 20 days
(a) (b) 43. The half life of the isotope 11 Na 24 is 15 hrs. How much
t t
7
time does it take for th of a sample of this isotope to decay
dN dN 8
dt dt
(a) 75 hrs (b) 65 hrs
(c) (d)
(c) 55 hrs (d) 45 hrs
t t 44. The half life of radioactive Radon is 3.8 days. The time at
38. The plot of the number (N) of decayed atoms versus activity the end of which 1/20th of the Radon sample will remain
(A) of a radioactive substance is undecayed is (Given log10e = 0.4343)
N N (a) 3.8 days (b) 16.5 days
(c) 33 days (d) 76 days
45. A radioactive isotope X with a half–life of 1.37 × 109 years
(a) (b) decays to Y which is stable. A sample of rock from the
A A
A B moon was found to contain both the elements X and Y
which were in the ratio of 1 : 7. The age of the rock is
N N
(a) 1.96 × 108 years (b) 3.85 × 109 years
(c) 4.11 × 109 years (d) 9.59 × 109 years
(c) (d) 46. The mean lives of a radio-active substances are 1620 years
A A
and 405 years for –emission and –emission respectively.
C D Find Out the time during which three-fourth of a sample will
39. In a radioactive substance at t = 0, the number of atoms is decay if it is decaying both by –emission and –emission
8 × 104. Its half life period is 3 years. The number of atoms simultaneously.
(a) 324 years (b) 449 years
1 10 4 will remain after interval
(a) 9 years (b) 8 years (c) 480 years (d) 425 years
(c) 6 years (d) 24 years
47. Assuming that all laws of thermodynamics can be applied
40. The half life period of radium is 1600 years. The fraction of
to a nucleus, the –decay of a nucleus may be regarded as
a sample of radium that would remain after 6400 years is
an
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2
(a) Isothermal process (b) Isobarric process
(c) 1/8 (d) 1/16
(c) Adiabatic process (d) Isochoric process
41. What percentage of original radioactive atoms is left after
five half lives 48. In the given reaction z X A z 1 Y A z 1 K A 4 z 1 K A 4 .
(a) 0.3% (b) 1% Radioactive radiations are emitted in the sequence
(c) 31% (d) 3.125% (a) , , (b) , ,
(c) , , (d) , ,
MODERN PHYSICS 61
49. A radioactive nucleus undergoes a series of decay 55. The minimum wavelength of X-rays produced by electrons
according to the scheme accelerated by a potential difference of volts is equal to
A A1 A 2 A 3 A4 eV eh
(a) (b)
If the mass number and atomic number of A are 180 and 72 hc cV
respectively, then what are these number for A4
hc cV
(a) 172 and 69 (b) 174 and 70 (c) (d)
eV eh
(c) 176 and 69 (d) 176 and 70
56. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is
50. Mosley’s law relates the frequencies of line X-rays with
the following characteristics of the target element increased. As a result, in the emitted radiation
(a) Its density (a) The intensity increases
(b) Its atomic weight (b) The minimum wavelength increases
(c) Its atomic number (c) The intensity decreases
(d) Interplaner spacing of the atomic planes
(d) The minimum wavelength decreases
51. The wavelength of the K line of characteristic X-ray
57. For harder X-rays
spectra varies with atomic number approximately
(a) The wavelength is higher
(a) Z (b) Z (b) The intensity is higher
1 1 (c) The frequency is higher
(c) (d)
Z2 Z (d) The photon energy is lower
52. Mosley measured the frequency (f) of the characteristic 58. For production of characteristic K X-rays, the electron
X-rays from many metals of different atomic number (Z) transition is
and represented his results by a relation known as
(a) n = 2 to n = 1 (b) n = 3 to n = 2
Mosley’s law. This law is (a, b are constants)
(c) n = 3 to n = 1 (d) n = 4 to n = 2
(a) f = a (Z – b)2 (b) Z = a (f – b)2
(c) f2 = a (Z – b) (d) f = a (Z – b)1/2 59. The wavelength of K line for an element of atomic number
43 is . Then the wavelength of K line for an element of
53. The intensity of X-rays from a Coolidge tube is plotted atomic number 29 is
against wavelength as shown in the figure. The minimum
wavelength found is c and the wavelength of the Kline 43 42
is k. As the accelerating voltage is increased (a) (b)
29 28
I 9 4
(c) (d)
4 9
60. The K X-ray emission line of tungsten occurs at = 0.021 nm.
The energy difference between K and L levels in this atom
is about
(a) (K – C) increases (b) (K – C) decreases
(a) 0.51MeV (b) 1.2 MeV
(c) K increases (d) K decreases
(c) 59 KeV (d) 13.6 eV
54. The characteristic X-ray radiation is emitted, when
61. When a beam of accelerated electrons hits a target, a
(a) The electrons are accelerated to a fixed energy continuous X-ray spectrum is emitted from the target.
(b) The source of electrons emits a monoenergetic beam Which of the following wavelength is absent in the X-ray
(c) The bombarding electrons knock out electrons from spectrum, if the X-ray tube is operating at 40,000 volts
the inner shell of the target atoms and one of the outer (a) 0.25 Å (b) 0.5 Å
electrons falls into this vacancy
(c) 1.5 Å (d) 1.0 Å
(d) The valence electrons in the target atoms are removed
as a result of the collision
MODERN PHYSICS 62
62. The minimum frequency of continuous X-rays is related 67. If an X–ray tube operates at the voltage of 10kV, find the
to the applied potential difference V as ratio of the de–Brogle wavelength of the incident electrons
to the shortest wavelength of X–rays produce(d) The
(a) V (b) V 11
specific charge of electron is 1.8 × 10 C/kg.
(a) 1 (b) 0.1
(c) V 3 / 2 (d) V 2
(c) 1.8 (d) 1.2
63. The figure shows the variation of photocurrent with anode
68. The momentum of a photon is 3.3 ×10–29 kg–m/sec. Its
potential for a photo-sensitive surface for three different
frequency will be
radiations. Let I a, Ib and Ic be the intensities and fa, fb and fc
be the frequencies for the curves a, b and c respectively (a) 3 × 103 Hz (b) 6 × 103 Hz
(c) 7.5 × 1012 Hz (d) 1.5 × 1013 Hz
Photo current 69. The approximate wavelength of a photon of energy 2.48
eV is
c
b (a) 500 Å (b) 5000 Å
a
(c) 2000 Å (d) 1000 Å
O Anode potential 70. There are n1 photons of frequency 1 in a beam of light. In
an equally energetic beam, there are n 2 photons of
(a) fa = fb and la lb (b) fa = fc and la = lc frequency 2. Then the correct relation is
(c) fa = fb and la = lb (d) fa fb and la = lb n1 1
n1
(a) 1 (b) n
64. The value of stopping potential in the following diagram n2 2 2
i (photoelectric n1 2 n 1 12
(c) n (d)
current)
2 1 n 2 22
71. The work function of a metal is 4.2 eV, its threshold
wavelength will be
–4V –3V –2V –1V 0 V (a) 4000 Å (b) 3500 Å
(c) 2955 Å (d) 2500 Å
(a) – 4V (b) – 3 V
72. Ultraviolet radiations of 6.2 eV falls on an aluminium
(c) – 2V (d) – 1 V
surface (work function 4.2 eV). The kinetic energy in joules
65. X-rays and gamma rays are both electromagnetic waves.
of the fastest electron emitted is approximately
Which of the following statements is true
(a) 3.2 × 10–21 (b) 3.2 × 10–19
(a) In general X-rays have larger wavelength than of
gamma rays (c) 3.2 × 10–17 (d) 3.2 × 10–15
(b) X-rays have smaller wavelength than that of gamma rays 73. A photon of energy 3.4 eV is incident on a metal having
work function 2 eV. The maximum K.E. of photo-electrons
(c) Gamma rays have smaller frequency than that of X-rays
is equal to
(d) Wavelength and frequency of X-rays are both larger
(a) 1.4 eV (b) 1.7 eV
than that of gamma rays
(c) 5.4 eV (d) 6.8 eV
66. Molybdenum is used as a target element for production
of X–rays because it is 74. Work function of lithium and copper are respectively
(a) A heavy element and can easily absorb high velocity 2.3 eV and 4.0 eV. Which one of the metal will be useful for
electrons the photoelectric cell working with visible light ?
(b) A heavy element with a high melting point (h = 6.6 10–34 J-s, c = 3 108 m/s)
(c) An element having high thermal conductivity
(a) Lithium (b) Copper
(d) Heavy and can easily deflect electrons
(c) Both (d) None of these
MODERN PHYSICS 63
75. According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation, the graph 79. Light of wavelength strikes a photo-sensitive surface
between the kinetic energy of photoelectrons ejected and and electrons are ejected with kinetic energy E. If the
the frequency of incident radiation is kinetic energy is to be increased to 2E, the wavelength
must be changed to ' where
Kinetic energy
Kinetic energy
a) (b) ’ = 2
2
(a) (b)
Frequency Frequency (c) (d) ’ >
2
80. A metal surface of work function 1.07 eV is irradiated with
light of wavelength 332 nm. The retarding potential
required to stop the escape of photo-electrons is
Kinetic energy
Kinetic energy
(a) 4.81 eV (b) 3.74 eV
(c) (d) (c) 2.66 eV (d) 1.07 eV
81. Photoelectric emission is observed from a metallic surface
Frequency Frequency
for frequencies 1 and 2 of the incident light rays (1 >2).
If the maximum values of kinetic energy of the
76. The stopping potential V for photoelectric emission from photoelectrons emitted in the two cases are in the ratio of
a metal surface is plotted along Y-axis and frequency of 1 : k, then the threshold frequency of the metallic surface
incident light along X-axis. A straight line is obtained as is
shown. Planck’s constant is given by
1 2 k1 2
(a) (b)
k 1 k 1
V Y
k 2 1 2 1
0 X (c) (d)
v k 1 k
82. Which one of the following is true in photoelectric emission
(a) Photoelectric current is directly proportional to the
(a) Slope of the line amplitude of light of a given frequency
(b) Product of slope on the line and charge on the electron (b) Photoelectric current is directly proportional to the
(c) Product of intercept along Y-axis and mass of the intensity of light of a given frequency at moderate
electron intensities
(d) Product of Slope and mass of electron (c) Above the threshold frequency, the maximum K.E. of
77. When a metal surface is illuminated by light of wavelengths photoelectrons is inversely proportional to the
400 nm and 250 nm, the maximum velocities of the frequency of incident light
photoelectrons ejected are and 2 respectively. The (d) The threshold frequency depends upon the
work function of the metal is (h = Planck’s constant, c = wavelength of incident light
velocity of light in air)
83. The cathode of a photoelectric cell is changed such that
(a) 2 hc × 106 J (b) 1.5 hc × 106 J the work function changes from W1 to W2 (W2>W1). If the
(c) hc × 106 J (d) 0.5 hc × 106 J current before and after change are I1 and I2, all other
conditions remaining unchanged, then
78. The work function of metal is 1 eV. Light of wavelength
3000 Å is incident on this metal surface. The velocity of (assuming h > W2)
emitted photo-electrons will be (a) I1= I2 (b) I1 < I2
3
(a) 10 m/sec (b) 1 × 10 m/sec (c) I1 > I2 (d) I1 < I2 < 2I1
4 6
(c) 1×10 m/sec (d) 1 × 10 m/sec
MODERN PHYSICS 64
84. If intensity of incident light is increased in PE then which 90. When radiation is incident on a photoelectron emitter, the
of the following is true stopping potential is found to be 9 volts. If e/m for the
electron is 1.8 × 1011 Ckg–1 the maximum velocity of the
(a) Maximum K.E. of ejected electron will increase
ejected electrons is
(b) Work function will remain unchanged
(a) 6 × 105 ms–1 (b) 8 × 105 ms–1
(c) Stopping potential will decrease (c) 1.8 × 106 ms–1 (d) 1.8 × 10 5 ms–1
(d) Maximum K.E. of ejected electron will decrease
91. When a point source of monochromatic light is at a
85. Threshold frequency for a metal is 10 15 Hz.Light of distance of 0.2 m from a photoelectric cell, the cut-off
= 4000 Å falls on its surface. Which of the following voltage and the saturation current are 0.6 volt and 18 mA
statements is correct
respectively. If the same source is placed 0.6 m away from
(a) No photoelectric emission takes place the photoelectric cell, then
(b) Photo-electrons come out with zero speed (a) The stopping potential will be 0.2 V
(c) Photo-electrons come out with 103 m/sec speed
(b) The stopping potential will be 0.6 V
(d) Photo-electrons come out with 105 m/sec speed
(c) The saturation current will be 6 mA
86. If the work function of a metal is ‘’ and the frequency of
(d) The saturation current will be 18 mA
the incident light is ‘’, there is no emission of
photoelectron if 92. The mass number of a nucleus is
(a) always less than its atomic number
(a) (b) (b) always more than its atomic number.
h h
(c) sometimes equal to its atomic number
(c) (d) (d) sometimes more than and sometimes equal to its atomic
h h number.
87. For intensity I of a light of wavelength 5000Å the 93. In Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom
photoelectron saturation current is 0.40 A and stopping 2
(a) the radius of the nth orbit is proportional to n
potential is 1.36 V, the work function of metal is
(b) the total energy of the electron in nth orbit in inversely
(a) 2.47 eV (b) 1.36 eV proportional to n
(c) 1.10 eV (d) 0.43 eV (c) the angular momentum of the electron in an orbit is an
88. Two identical photo-cathodes receive light of frequencies integral multiple of h/2
f1 and f2. If the velocities of the photo electrons (of mass m) (d) the magnitude of potential energy of the electron in any
coming out are respectively 1 and 2, then orbit is greater than its K.E.
1/ 2 94. Which of the following statement(s) is/(are) correct
2h
(a) 1 2 f1 f 2 (a) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is less than the sum
m
of the rest masses of its separated nucleons
2 2 2h
(b) 1 – 2 f1 f 2 (b) The rest mass of a stable nucleus is greater than the
m sum of the rest masses of its separated nucleons.
1/ 2
2h (c) In nuclear fusion, energy is released by fusing two
(c) 1 2 f1 f 2 nuclei of medium mass (approximately 100 a.m.u.)
m
(d) In nuclear fission, energy is released by fragmentation
2h of a very heavy nucleus
2
(d)
1
2
2 f1 f 2
m
95. From the following equations, pick out the possible nuclear
89. Stopping potential for photoelectrons reactions
(a) Does not depend on the frequency of the incident light
(b) Does not depend upon the nature of the cathode material (a) 6C13 + 1H1 6C14 + 4.3 MeV
(c) Depends on both the frequency of the incident light (b) 6C12 + 1H1 7N13 + 2 MeV
and nature of the cathode material (c) 7N14 + 1H1 8O15 + 7.3 MeV
(d) Depends upon the intensity of the incident light (d) U235 + 0n1 54X140 + 33Si94 + 20n1 + + 200 MeV
92
MODERN PHYSICS 65
96. A radioactive sample has initial concentration N0 of nuclei. 100. When a monochromatic point source of light is at a distance
(a) The number of undecayed nuclei present in the sample of 0.2 m from a photoelectric cell, the cut-off voltage and the
decays exponentially with time saturation current are respectively 0.6 V and 18.0 m (A). If
the same source is placed 0.6 m away from the photoelectric
(b) The activity (R) of the sample at any instant is directly
cell, then
proportional to the number of undecayed nuclei present
in the sample at that time (a) the stopping potential will be 0.2 V
(c) The number of decayed nuclei grows exponentially with (b) the stopping potential will be 0.6 V
time (c) the saturation current will be 6.0 mA
(d) The number of decayed nuclei grows linearly with time. (d) the saturation current will be 2.0 mA
One or more than one correct answer 101. The electric potential between a proton and an electron is
given by where V0 and r0 are constants and r is the radius of
97. An X-ray tube is operating at 50 kV and 20 mA. The target the electron orbit around the proton. Assuming Bohr’s model
x
material of the tube has a mass of 1.0 kg and specific heat to be applicable, it is found that r is proportional to n , where
495 J kg-1 °C–1. One percent of the supplied electric power n is the principal quantum number. Find the value of x.
is converted into X-rays and the entire remaining energy 102. A doubly ionized lithium atom is hydrogen like with atomic
goes into heating the target. Then number 3. Find the wavelength of the radiation required to
++
(a) A suitable target material must have a high melting excite the electron in Li from the first to be third Bohr orbit.
temperature Find the ionization energy (in Å) of the hydrogen atom is
(b) A suitable target material must have low thermal 13.6 eV.
conductivity Subjective Questions
(c) The average rate of rise of temperature of target would
103. In Rutherford scattering experiment, the number of particles
be 2 °C/s
observed at an angle of 10° is one million per minute. Find
(d) The minimum wavelength of the X-rays emitted is the difference in the number of particle (approximately) per
about 0.25 × 10–10m minute that will be observed at angles of 90° and 180° ?
98. When photons of energy 4.25 eV strike the surface of metal 104. The half life of radium is 1500 years. In how many years will
A, the ejected photoelectrons have maximum kinetic energy, 1 kg of pure radium lose 1 mg.
TA eV and de Broglie wavelength A. The maximum kinetic 105. An element of atomic number 9 emits K X-ray of wavelength
energy of photoelectrons liberated from another metal B by . Find the atomic number of the element which emits K X-
photons of energy 4.70 eV is TB = (TA – 1.50) eV. If the de ray of wavelength 4.
Broglie wavelength of these photoelectrons is B = 2A, then
106. The K X–rays emission line of tungsten occurs at = 0.021
(a) The work function of A is 2.25 eV
nm. What is the energy difference between K and L levels in
(b) The work function of B is 4.20 eV this atom (in KeV).
(c) TA = 2.00 eV 107. An electron falls from rest through a potential difference of
(d) TB = 2.75 eV 100 V. What is its de Broglie wavelength (in nm) ?
99. The threshold wavelength for photoelectric emission from Assertion Reason
a material is 5200 Å. Photoelectrons will be emitted when
Read the assertion and reason carefully to mark the correct
this material is illuminated with monochromatic radiation
option out of the options given below :
from a
(A) If both assertion and reason are true and the reason is
(a) 50 watt infrared lamp the correct explanation of the assertion.
(b) 1–watt infra-red lamp (B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is not
(c) 50 watt ultraviolet lamp the correct explanation of the assertion.
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) 1–watt ultraviolet lamp
(D) If the assertion and reason both are false.
(E) If assertion is false but reason is true.
MODERN PHYSICS 66
108. Assertion : Bohr had to postulate that the electrons in 113. Assertion : Radioactivity of 108 undecayed radioactive
stationary orbits around the nucleus do not radiate. nuclei of half life of 50 days is equal to that of 1.2 × 108
Reason : According to classical physics all moving number of undecayed nuclei of some other material with
electrons radiate. half life of 60 days
(a) A (b) B Reason : Radioactivity is proportional to half-life.
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B (c) C
(e) E (d) D (e) E
109. Assertion : Between any two given energy levels, the 114. Assertion : The ionising power of –particles is less
number of absorption transition is always less than number compared –particles but their penetrating power is more.
of emission transition. Reason : The mass of –particles is less than the mass of
Reason : Absorption transitions start from the lowest energy –particle.
level only and may end at any higher energy level. But (a) A (b) B (c) C
emission transitions may start from any higher energy level (d) D (e) E
and end at any energy level below it. A
115. Assertion : ZX undergoes 2–decays. 2–decays and
(a) A (b) B 2–decays and the daughter product is Z–2YA–8.
(c) C (d) D Reason : In –decay the mass number decreases by 4 and
(e) E atomic number decreases by 2. In –decay the mass
110. Assertion : Hydrogen atom consists of only one electron number remains unchanged, but atomic number increases
but its emission spectrum has many lines. by 1 only.
Reason : Only Lyman series is found in the absorption (a) A (b) B (c) C
spectrum of hydrogen atom whereas in the emission (d) D (e) E
spectrum, all the series are found. 116. Assertion : Intensity of X-rays can be controlled by
adjusting the filament current and voltage.
(a) A (b) B
Reason : The intensity of X-rays does not depend on
(c) C (d) D
number of X-ray photons emitted per second from the
(e) E target.
111. Assertion : According to classical theory, the proposed path (a) A (b) B (c) C
of an electron in Rutherford atom model will be parabolic.
(d) D (e) E
Reason : According to electromagnetic theory an 117. Assertion : The phenomenon of -X-ray production is
accelerated particle continuously emits radiation. basically inverse of photoelectric effect.
(a) A (b) B Reason : X-rays are electromagnetic waves.
(c) C (d) D (a) A (b) B (c) C
(e) E (d) D (e) E
112. Assertion : Penetrating power of X-rays increases with 118. Assertion : Photoelectric effect demonstrates the wave
the increasing the wavelength. nature of light.
Reason : The penetrating power of X-rays increases with Reason : The number of photoelectrons is proportional
the frequency of X-rays. to the frequency of light.
(a) A (b) B (c) C
(a) A (b) B (c) C
(d) D (e) E
(d) D (e) E
MODERN PHYSICS 67
119. Assertion : Kinetic energy of photo electrons emitted by 124. When a nucleus with atomic number Z and mass number A
a photosensitive surface depends upon the intensity of undergoes a radioactive decay process.
incident photon.
Column–I Column–II
Reason : The ejection of electrons from metallic surface is
possible with frequency of incident photon below the (A) If the process is decay (P) Z will increase but A will
threshold frequency. not decrease
(a) A (b) B (c) C (B)
+
If the process is decay (Q) Both Z and A will
(d) D (e) E decrease
120. Assertion : Photosensitivity of a metal is high if its work –
function is small. (C) If the process is decay (R) Z and A will remain
unchanged
Reason : Work function = hf0 where f0 is the threshold
frequency. (D) If the process is decay (S) Z will decrease but A
(a) A (b) B (c) C will not change
(d) D (e) E 125. When an electron moving at a high speed strikes a metal
Match the Column surface, then match the columns :
121. In Bohr’s atomic model for hydrogen like atoms match the 126. v versus z graph for characteristic X–rays is as shown in
following table :
figure. Match the following :
Column–I Column–II
(A) If electron jumps from (P) speed of electron will become v 1
n = 2 to n = 1 2 times 2 3
(B) If electron jumps from (Q) kinetic energy of electron 4
n = 1to n = 4 will become 4 times
(C) If electron jumps from (R) angular momentum of
z
n = 4 to n = 1 electron will become 2 times
(S) angular velocity of electron
Column–I Column–II
will become 4 times
(T) None (A) Line–1 (P) L
122. Regarding transition of electrons match the following table: (B) Line–2 (Q) L
Column–I Column–II (C) Line–3 (R) K
(A) n = 5 to n = 2 (P) Lymen series (D) Line–4 (S) K
(B) n = 8 to n = 4 (Q) Brackett series 127. When photons of energy 4.25 eV strike the surface of a
(C) n = 3 to n = 1 (R) Paschen metal A, the ejected photoelectrons have maximum kinetic
(D) n = 4 to n = 3 (S) Balmer energy TA eV and de Brogle wavelength A. The maximum
123. Match the following table : kinetic enegy of photoelectrons liberated from another metal
Column–I Column-II B by photons of energy 4.70 eV is TB = (TA – 1.50) eV. If the
(A) Sun (P) Nuclear fission de Broglie wavelength of these photoelectrons is B = 2A.
(B) Nuclear reactors (Q) Nuclear fusion Column–I Column–II
(C) Total binding energy (R) Energy is released (A) The work function of B (P) 2.25 eV
in a process is increased (B) The work function of A (Q) 2.00 eV
(D) Total binding energy (S) Energy is absorbed (C) TA (R) 4.20 eV
in a process is decreased
(D) TB (S) 2.75 eV
MODERN PHYSICS 68
Passage
Imagine another universe in which the value of planck’s
constant is 0.0663 Js, but in which the physical laws and all
other physical constants are the same as in our universe. In
this universe, two physics students are playing catch. They
are 12 m apart, and one throws a 0.25 kg ball directly towards
the other with a speed of 6.0 m/s
128. What is the uncertainty in the ball’s horizontal momentum,
in a direction perpendicular to that in which it is being
thrown, if the student throwing the ball knows that it is
3
located within a cube with volume 125 cm at the time she
throws it ?
(a) 2.1 kg m/s (b) 21.0 kg m/s
(c) 32 kg m/s (d) 0.21 kg m/s
129. By what horizontal distance could the ball miss the second
student ?
(a) 3 m (b) 30 m
(c) 17 m (d) 1.7 m
MODERN PHYSICS 69
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
5. The electron emitted in beta radiation originates from
Multiple Choise Question
(2001)
1. Electrons with energy 80 KeV are incident on the tungsten target
(a) inner orbits of atoms
of an X-ray tube. K shell electrons of tungsten have –72.5 keV
energy X-rays emitted by the tube contain (2000) (b) free electrons existing in nuclei
(a) a continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with a (c) decay of a neutron in a nucleus
minimum wavelength of about 0.155 Å. (d) photon escaping from the nucleus
(b) a continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with all 6. The transition from state n = 4 to n = 3 in a hydrogen like
the wavelengths. atom results in ultraviolet radiaiton. Infrared radiation will
(c) the characteristic X-ray spectrum of tungsten be obtained in the transition (2001)
(d) a continuous X-ray spectrum (Bremsstrahlung) with a (a) 2 1 (b) 3 2
minimum wavelength of about 0.155 Å and the (c) 4 2 (d) 5 4
characteristics X-ray spectrum of tungsten. 7. The intensity of X-rays from a coolidge tube is plotted
2. Imagine an atom made up of a proton and a hypothetical particle against wavelength as shown in the figure. The minimum
of double the mass of the electron but having the same charge wavelength found is c and the wavelength of the K line is
as the electron. Apply the Bohr atom model and consider all k. As the accelerating voltage is increased (2001)
possible transitions of this hypothetical particle to the first
excited level. The longest wavelength photon that will be
emitted has wavelength (given in terms of the Rydberg
constant R for the hydrogen atom equal to) (2000)
9 36
(a) (b)
5R 5R
18 4
(c) (d) (a) k – c increases (b) k – c decreases
5R R
3. Two radioactive materials X1 and X2 have decay constants (c) k increases (d) k decreases
10 and respectively. If initially they have the same number 8. A radioactive sample consists of two distinct species having
of nuclei, then the ratio of the number of nuclei of X1 to that equal number of atoms initially. The mean life of one species
of X2 will be 1/e after a time (2000) is and that of the other is 5. The decay products in both
cases are stable. A plot is made of the total number of
1 1
(a) 10 (b) 11 radioactive nuclei as a function of time. Which of the
following figure best represents the form of this plot ?
11 1
(c) 10 (d) 9
4. The electron in a hydrogen atom makes a transition from an
excited state to the ground state. Which of the following (a) (b)
statement is true ? (2000)
(a) Its kinetic energy increases and its potential and total
energy decreases
(b) Its kinetic energy decreases, potential energy increases
and its total energy remains the same
(c) Its kinetic and total energy decreases and its potential (c) (d)
energy increases
(d) Its kinetic, potential and total energy decreases
MODERN PHYSICS 70
9. The potential difference applied to an X-ray tube is 5 kV and (a) 4.8 MeV (b) 5.4 MeV
the current through it is 3.2 mA. Then the number of (c) 6.0 MeV (d) 6.8 MeV
electrons striking the target per second is (2002)
16 16 17. After 280 days, the activity of a radioactive sample is 6000
(a) 2 × 10 (b) 5 × 10
dps. The activity reduces to 3000 dps after another 140 days.
17 15
(c) 1 × 10 (d) 4 × 10 The initial activity of the sample in dps is : (2004)
2+
10. A hydrogen atom and a Li ion are both in the second (a) 6000 (b) 9000
excited state. If lH and lLi are their respective electronic angular (c) 3000 (d) 24000
momenta, and EH and ELi their respective energies, then
18. The energy of a photon is equal to the kinetic energy of a
(2002)
proton. The energy of the photon is E. Let 1 be the de-
(a) lH > lLi and |EH| > |ELi| (b) lH = lLi and |EH| < |ELi| Broglie wavelength of the proton and 2 be the wavelength
(c) lH = lLi and |EH| > |ELi| (d) lH < lLi and |EH| < |ELi|
215
1
11. The half-life of At is 100 s. The time taken for the of the photon. The ratio is proportional to (2004)
215 2
radioactivity of a sample of At to decay to 1/16th of its
0 1/2
initial value is (2002) (a) E (b) E
–1 –2
(a) 400 s (b) 6.3 s (c) E (d) E
(c) 40 s (d) 300 s 19. The figure show the variation of photocurrent with anode
12. Which of the following processes represents a gamma- potential for a photosensitive surface for three different
decay? (2002) radiations. Let Ia, Ib and Ic be the intensities and fa, fb and fc
A A3
be the frequencies for the curves a, b and c respectively
A A
(a) Z
X + Z 1 X+a+b (b) Z
X + 10 n Z2 X +c
A A A A
(c) Z
X Z
X+ f (d) Z
X + – 1e Z 1 X+g
13. The electric potential between a proton and an electron is
given by V V0 n r , where r0 is a constant. Assuming
r0
Bohr’s model to be applicable, write variation of rn with n, n
being the principal quantum number. (2003)
1
(a) rn n (b) rn (a) fa = fb and Ia Ib (b) fa = fc and Ia = Ic
n
(c) fa = fb and Ia = Ib (d) fb = fc and Ib = Ic
2
1
(c) rn n (d) rn 20. A photon collides with a stationary hydrogen atom is ground
n2
257
state inelastically. Energy of the colliding photon is 10.2 eV.
14. If the atom 100Fm follows the Bohr’s model and the radius After a time interval of the order of micro second another
257
of last orbit of 100Fm is n times the Bohr radius, then find photon collide with same hydrogen atom inelastically with
n an energy of 15 eV. What will be observed by the detector ?
(a) 100 (b) 200 (2003) (a) 2 photons of energy 10.2 eV (2005)
(c) 4 (d) 1/4
(b) 2 photons of energy 1.4 eV
15. The mass m of a uranium nucleus varies with its volume V
(c) One photon of energy 10.2 eV and an electron of energy
as (2003)
1.4 eV
1 (d) one photon of energy 10.2 eV and another photon of
(a) m V (b) m
V energy 1.4 eV
(c) m V (d) m V 2 21. K wavelength emitted by an atom of atomic number Z = 11
is . Find the atomic number for an atom that emits K
16. A nucleus of mass number 220, initially at rest, emits an - radiation with wavelength 4 (2005)
particle. If the Q value of the reaction is 5.5 MeV, the energy (a) Z = 6 (b) Z = 4
of the emitted -particle will be (2003)
(c) Z = 11 (d) Z = 44
MODERN PHYSICS 71
22. A beam of electron is used in an YDSE experiement. The slit
width is d. When the velocity of electron is increased, then
(a) E 236
92
U >E 137
53
I +E 97
39
Y + 2E (n)
(a) no interference is observed (2005) (b) E 236
U <E 137
I +E 97
Y + 2E (n)
92 53 39
(b) fringe width increases
(c) fringe width decreases (c) E 236
92
U <E 140
56
Ba + E 94
36
Kr + 2E (n)
(d) fringe width remains same.
23. If a star can convert all the He nuclei completely into oxygen (d) E 236
92
U =E 140
56
Ba + E 94
36
Kr + 2E (n)
nuclei. The energy released per oxygen nuclei is : 8. Electrons with de-Broglie wavelength fall on the target in
(Mass of the helium nucleus is 4.0026 amu and mass of an X-ray tube. The cut-off wavelength of the emitted X-ray
oxygen nucleus is 15.9994 amu) (2005) is (2007)
(a) 7.6 MeV (b) 56.12 MeV
2mc 2 2h
(c) 10.24 MeV (d) 23.4 MeV (a) 0 (b) 0
h mc
24. Half-life of a radioactive substance A is 4 days. The
probability that a nucleus will decay in two half-lives is : 2m 2 c2 2
(c) 0 (d) 0 =
h2
1 3
(a) (b) (2006) 29. Which one of the following statements is Wrong in the
4 4
context of X-rays generated from a X-ray tube ? (2008)
1 (a) Wavelength of characteristic X-ray decreases when the
(c) (d) 1
2 atomic number of the target increases.
25. The graph between 1/ and stopping potential (V) of three (b) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends
metals having work functions 1, 2 and 3 in an experiment on the atomic number of the target
of photoelectric effect is plotted as shown in the figure. (c) Intensity of the characteristic X-rays depends on the
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct ? (Here electric power given to the X-rays tube
is the wavelength of the incident ray). (2006) (d) Cut-off wavelength of the continuous X-rays depends
on the energy of the electrons in the X-ray tube.
30. A radioactive sample S1 having an activity of 5 Ci has twice
the number of nuclei as another sample S2 which has an
activity 10 Ci. The half lives of S1 and S2 can be (2008)
(a) 20 years and 5 years, respectively
(b) 20 years and 10 years, respectively
(c) 10 years each
(a) Ratio of work functions 1 : 2 : 3 = 1 : 2 : 4
(d) 5 years each
(b) Ratio of work functions 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 2 : 1
31. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between
(c) tan is directly proportional to hc/e, where h is Plank’s the two slits is d and the wavelenght of the light . The
constant and c is the speed of light. intensity of light falling on slit 1 is four times the intensity of
(d) The violet colour light can eject photoelectrons from light falling on slit 2. Choose the correct choice(s). (2008)
metals 2 and 3. (a) If d = , the screen will contain only one maximum
26. The largest wavelength in the ultraviolet region of the (b) If < d < 2, at least one more maximum (besides the
hydrogen spectrum is 122 nm. The smallest wavelength in central maximum) will be observed on the screen
the infrared region of the hydrogen spectrum (to the nearest (c) If the intensity of light falling on slit 1 is reduced so that
integer) is (2007) it becomes equal to that of slit 2, the intensities of the
(a) 802 nm (b) 823 nm observed dark and bright fringes will increase.
(c) 1882 nm (d) 1648 nm (d) If the intensity of light falling on slit 2 is increased so
27. In the options given below, let E denote the rest mass that it becomes equal to that of slit 1, the intensities of
energy of a nucleus and n a neutron. The correct option is the observed dark and bright fringes will increase.
(2007)
MODERN PHYSICS 72
32. Assume that the nuclear binding energy per nucleon (B/A) 34. Match List I of the nuclear process with List II containing
versus mass number is as shown in the figure. Use this plot parent nucleus and one of the end products of each process
to choose the correct choice (s) given below. [2008] and then select the correct answer using the codes given
B/A below the lists. (2013)
8 List I List II
6
15
4 P. Alpha decay 1. 8 O 17
7 N ...
2
238
0 A Q. decay
+
2. 92 U 234
90 Th ...
100 200
(a) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the 185
184
R. Fission 3. 83 Bi 82 Pb ...
range of 1 < A < 50 will release energy
(b) Fusion of two nuclei with mass numbers lying in the 239
S. Proton emission 4. 94 Pu 140
57 La ...
range of 51 < A < 100 will release energy
(c) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass number range of Code :
100 < A < 200 will release energy when broken into equal P Q R S
fragments
(a) 4 2 1 3
(d) Fission of a nucleus lying in the mass number range of
(b) 1 3 2 4
200 < A < 260 will release energy when broken into equal
fragments. (c) 2 1 4 3
33. Photoelectric effect experiments are performed using three (d) 4 3 2 1
different metal plates p, q, and r having work function p = 35. The radius of the orbit of an electon in a Hydrogen-like
2.0 eV. q = 2.5 eV and r = 3.0 eV, respectively. A light beam atom is 4.5 a0 where a0 is the Bohr radius. Its orbital angular
containing wavelengths of 550 nm, 450 nm and 350 nm with
equal intensities illuminates each of the plates. The correct 3h
momentum is . It is given that h is Planck constant and
I-V graph for the experiment is (2009) 2
R is Rydberg constant. The possible wavelength(s), when
the atom de-excites, is (are) (2013)
9 9
(a) (a) 32 R (b) 16 R
9 4
(c) 5 R (d) 3 R
36. If Cu is the wavelength of K X-ray line of copper (atomic
(b) number 29) and Mo is the wavelength of the
K X-ray line of molybdenum (atomic number 42), then the
ratio Cu/Mo is close to (2014)
(a) 1.99 (b) 2.14
(c) 0.50 (d) 0.48
(c) 37. A metal surface is illuminated by light of two different
wavelengths 248 nm and 310 nm. The maximum speeds of
the photoelectrons corresponding to these wavelengths
are u1 and u2 respectively. If the ratio u1:u2 =2:1 and hc =
1240 eV nm, the work function of the metal is nearly(2014)
(d) (a) 3.7 eV (b) 3.2 eV
(c) 2.8 eV (d) 2.5 eV
MODERN PHYSICS 73
38. A fission reaction is given by 42. The electrostatic energy of Z protons uniformly
236 140 94
distributed throughout a spherical nucleus of radius R is
92 U 54 Xe 38 Sr x y, where x and y are two
given by
236
particles. Considering 92 U to be at rest, the kinetic 3Z(Z 1)e 2
E
energies of the products are denoted by KXe, KSr, Kx (2 5 4 0 R
MeV) and Ky (2 MeV), respectively. Let the binding
236 140 94 The measured masses of the neutron, 11 H , 15
N and 158 O
energies per nucleon of 92 U, 54 Xe and 38Sr be 7.5 7
MeV, 8.5 MeV and 8.5 MeV, respectively. Considering are 1.008665 u, 1.007825 u, 15.000109 u and 15.003065 u,
different conservation laws, the correct option(s) is(are) respectively. Given that the radii of both the
15
N and
7
(2015)
15
(a) x = n, y = n, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV 8
O nuclei are same, 1 u = 931.5 MeV/c2 (c is the speed of
(b) x = p, y = e, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV light) and e2/(4 0) = 1.44 MeV fm. Assuming that the
(c) x = p, y = n, KSr = 129 MeV, KXe = 86 MeV difference between the binding energies of 15
7
N and 158 O
(d) x = n, y = n, KSr = 86 MeV, KXe = 129 MeV is purely due to the electrostatic energy. The radius of
39. Planck’s constant h, speed of light c and gravitational either of the nuclei is
constant G are used to form a unit of length L and a unit of (1 fm = 10–15m) (2016)
mass M. Then the correct option(s) is (are) (2015)
(a) 2.85 fm (b) 3.03 fm
(a) M c (b) M G
(c) 3.42 fm (d) 3.80 fm
(c) L h (d) L G 43. Light of wavelength ph falls on a cathode plate inside a
40. For photo-electric effect with incident photon wavelength vacuum tube as shown in the figure. The work function
, the stopping potential is V 0. Identify the correct of the cathode surface is and the anode is a wire mesh of
variation(s) of V0 with and 1/. (2015) conducting material kept at a distance d from the cathode.
A potential difference V is maintained between the
electrodes. If the minimum de Broglie wavelength of the
electrons passing through the anode is e, which of the
(a) (b) following statement(s) is(are) true? (2016)
(c) (d)
41. An accident in a nuclear laboratory resulted in deposition
of a certain amount of radioactive material of half-life 18
days inside the laboratory. Tests revealed that the
radiation was 64 times more than the permissible level (a) e increases at the same rate as ph for ph < hc/
required for safe operation of the laboratory. What is the (b) For large potential difference (V >> /e), e is
minimum number of days after which the laboratory can approximately halved if V is made four times
be considered safe for use? (2016) (c) e is approximately halved, if d is doubled
(a) 64 (b) 90 (d) e decreases with increase in and ph
(c) 108 (d) 120
MODERN PHYSICS 74
44. In a historical experiment to determine Planck’s constant, 232
47. In a radioactive decay chain 90 Th nucleus decays to
a metal surface was irradiated with light of different
wavelengths. The emitted photoelectron energies were 212
82 Pb nucleus. Let N and N be the number of and –
measured by applying a stopping potential. The relevant
particles, respectively, emitted in this decay process. Which
data for the wavelength () of incident light and the of the following statements is(are) true : (2018)
corresponding stopping potential (V0) are given below :
(a) N = 5 (b) N = 6
(µm) V0 (Volt)
0.3 2.0 (c) N = 2 (d) N = 4
0.4 1.0 40
48. In a radioactive sample, 19 K nuclei either decay into stable
0.5 0.4 40
20 Ca nuclei with decay constant 4.5 × 10-10 per year or into
Given that c = 3 × 10 m s and e = 1.6 × 10–19 C, Planck’s
8 –1
40
constant (in units of J s) found from such an experiment stable 18 Ar nuclei with decay constant 0.5 × 10-10 per year..
is (2016) 40 40
Given that in this sample all the stable 20 Ca and 18 Ar nuclei
–34 –34
(a) 6.0 × 10 (b) 6.4 × 10
40
are produced by the 19 K nuclei only. In time t × 109 years, if
(c) 6.6 × 10–34 (d) 6.8 × 10–34
40 40
the ratio of the sum of stable 20 Ca and 18 Ar nuclei to the
45. Highly excited states for hydrogen-like atoms (also called
40
Rydberg states) with nuclear charge Ze are defined by their radioactive 19 K nuclei is 99, the value of t will be. [Given ln
principal quantum number n, where n>>1. Which of the 10 = 2.3] (2019/Shift -1)
following statement(s) is (are) true? (2016)
(a) 9.2 (b) 1.15
(a) Relative change in the radii of two consecutive orbitals (c) 4.6 (d) 2.3
does not depend on Z
49. A free hydrogen atom after absorbing a photon of
(b) Relative change in the radii of two consecutive orbitals
wavelength λa gets excited from the state n = 1 to the state
varies as 1/n
n = 4. Immediately after that the electron jumps to n = m
(c) Relative change in the energy of two consecutive
state by emitting a photon of wavelength λ e . Let the change
orbitals varies as 1/n3
in momentum of atom due to the absorption and the emission
(d) Relative change in the angular momenta of two λa
consecutive orbitals varies as 1/n are Δpa and Δpe respectively. If λ =1/5, which of the
e
option(s) is/are correct?
46. A photoelectric material having work-function 0 is
[Use hc=1242 eV nm; 1nm=10-9 m, h and c are Planck’s
hc constant and speed of light respectively]
illuminated with lightof wavelength . The
0 (2019/Shift -2)
fastest photoelectron has a de Broglie wavelength d . A (a) The ratio of kinetic energy of the electron in the state n
= m to the state n = 1 is 1/4
change in wavelength of the incident light by results in
(b) m = 2
d
a change d. Then the ratio is proportional to : Δp a
(c) 1 2
Δp e
(2017) (d) λ e 418nm
50. A particle of mass m moves in circular orbits with potential
3d 3d
(a) (b) energy V (r) = Fr, where F is a positive constant and r is its
2 distance from the origin. Its energies are calculated using
the Bohr model. If the radius of the particle’s orbit is denoted
2d d by R and its speed and energy are denoted by v and E,
(c) 2 (d) respectively, then for the nth orbit (here h is the Planck’s
constant) -
(2020/Shift -1)
MODERN PHYSICS 75
55. A hydrogen-like atom (described by the Bohr model) is
(a) R n1/3 and v n 2/3
observed to emit six wavelengths, originating from all
(b) R n 2/3 and v n1/3 possible transitions between a group of levels. These levels
have energies between –0.85 eV and –0.544 eV (including
1/3 both these values). (2002)
3 n 2 h 2 F2
(c) E
(a) Find the atomic number of the atom.
2 42 m
(b) Calculate the smallest wavelength emitted in these
2 2 2 1/3
n h F transitions.
(d) E 2 2
(Take hc = 1240 eV-nm, ground state energy of hydrogen
4 m atom = –13.6 eV)
51. In an X-ray tube, electrons emitted from a filament (cathode) –4
56. Two metallic plates A and B each of area 5 × 10 m , are
2
carrying I current I hit a target (anode) at a distance d from
placed parallel to each other at separation of 1cm. Plate B
the cathode. The target is kept at a potential V higher than –12
carries a positive charge of 33.7 × 10 C. A monochromatic
the cathode resulting in emission of continuous and
characteristic X-rays. If the filament current I is decreased to beam of light, with photons of energy 5 eV each, starts
16
falling on plate A at t = 0 so that 10 photons fall on it per
1 square metre per second. Assume that one photoelectron is
, the potential difference V is increased to 2V and the
2 6
emitted for every 10 incident photons. Also assume that all
d the emitted photoelectrons are collected by plate B and the
separation distance , is reduced to then work function of plate A remains constant at the value 2 eV.
2
(2020/Shift -2) Determine : (2002)
(a) the cut-off wavelength will reduce to half, and the (a) the number of photoelectrons emitted upt to t = 10 s,
wavelengths of the characteristic X-rays will remain the
same (b) the magnitude of the electric field between the plates A
(b) the cut-off wavelength as well as the wavelengths of the and B at t = 10s and
characteristic X-rays will remain the same (c) The kinetic energy of the most energetic photoelectrons
(c) the cut-off wavelength will reduce to half, and the emitted at t = 10s when it reaches plate B.
intensities of all the X-rays will decrease
Neglect the time taken by the photoelectron to reach plate
(d) the cut-off wavelength will become two times larger, and –12 2 2
B. (Take 0 = 8.85 × 10 C /N-m ).
the intensity of all the X-rays will decrease 18
57. Characteristic X-rays of frequency 4.2 × 10 Hz are produced
52. A hydrogen like atom of atomic number Z is an excited state when transitions from L-shell to K-shell take palce in a certain
of quantum number 2n. It can emit a maximum energy photon of target material. Use Mosley’s law to determine the atomic
204 eV. If it makes a transition to quantum state n, a photon number of the target material. Given Rydberg’s constant
of energy 40.8 eV is emitted. Find, n, Z and the ground state energy 7 –1
R = 1.1 × 10 m . (2003)
(in eV) of this atom. Also calculate the minimum energy (in
58. A radioactive element decays by -emission. A detector
eV) that can be emitted by this atom during de-excitation.
records n beta particles in 2 s and in next 2 s it records 0.75
Ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. (2000)
2
n beta particles. Find mean life correct to nearest whole
53. When a beam of 10.6 eV photons of intensity 2.0 W/m number. Given ln |2| = 0.6931, ln |3| = 1.0986. (2003)
–4 2
falls on a platinum surface of area 1.0 × 10 m and work 238 9 238
59. A rock containing U is 1.5 × 10 years old. U disintegrates
function 5.6 eV. 0.53% of the incident photons eject 206 206
to form Pb Assuming that there was no Pb in the rock
photoelectrons. Find the number of photoelectrons emitted per initially and it is the only stable product formed by the decay,
second and their minimum and maximum energies (in eV). 206
calculate the ratio of number of nuclei of Pb to that of U
238
–19
Take 1 eV = 1.6 × 10 J. (2000) 238
in the rock at present. Half-life of U is 4.5 × 10 years
9
1/3
Integer Type (Given : 2 = 1.259) (2004)
235
54. In nuclear reactor U undergoes fission liberating 200 MeV 60. Wavelengths of Balmer series lying in the range of 450 nm
of energy. The reactor has a 10% efficiency and produces and 700 nm were used to eject photoelectrons from a metal
1000 MW power. If the reactor is to function for 10 years, surface of work function 2.2 eV. Determine the maximum
find the total mass of uranium required. (2001) kinetic energy in eV of the emitted photoelectron. Take
hc = 1242 eV nm. (2004)
MODERN PHYSICS 76
61. X-rays are incident on a target metal atom having 30 neutrons. 68. A freshly prepared sample of a radioisotope of half-life 1386
3
Theratio of atomic radiusof thetarget atomand 4 1/3
is (14) . s has activity 10 disintegrations per second. Given that ln
2 He
2 = 0.693, the fraction of the initial number of nuclei
(a) Find the mass number of target atom. (2005) (expressed in nearest integrer percentage) that will decay in
(b) Find the frequency of K line emitted by this metal. the first 80 s after preparation of the sample is (2013)
7 –1 8
(R = 1.1 × 10 m , c =3 × 10 m/s) 69. A nuclear power plant supplying electrical power to a village
th
62. If the wavelength of the n line of Lyman series is equal to uses a radioactive material of half life T years as the fuel.
the de-Broglie wavelength of electron in initial orbit of a The amount of fuel at the beginning is such that the total
hydrogen like element (Z = 11). Find the value of n.(2005) power requirement of the village is 12.5% of the electrical
63. An -particle and a proton are accelerated from rest by a power available from the plant at the time. If the plant is
potential difference of 100 V. After this, their de Broglie able to meet the total power needs of the village for a
p maximum period of nT years, then the value of n is(2015)
wavelengths are and p respectively. The ratio , to the 70. Consider a hydrogen atom with its electron in the nth orbital.
An electromagnetic radiation of wavelength 90 nm is used
nearest integer, is (2010)
to ionize the atom. If the kinetic energy of the ejected
64. To determine the half life of radioactive element, a student
electron is 10.4 eV, then the value of n is (hc = 1242 eV nm)
dN (t) dN (t) (2015)
plots a graph of ln versus t. Here is the rate
dt dt 71. For a radioactive material, its activity A and rate of change
of radioactive decay at time t. If the number of radioactive
nuclei of this element decreases by a factor of p after 4.16 dN dA
of its activity R are defined as A and R ,
years, find the value of p. (2010) dt dt
where N(t) is the number of nuclei at time t. Two radioactive
6 sources P(mean life ) and Q(means life 2) have the same
5 activity att = 0. Their rates of change of activities at t = 2
4 RP n
3 are RP and RQ, respectively. If R e , then the value of
Q
2
n is (2015)
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
72. An electron is an excited state of Li2+ ion has angular
Years
momentum 3h/2. The de Broglie wavelength of the electron
65. The activity of a freshly prepared radioactive sample is 10
10 in this state is p a0 (where a0 is the Bohr radius). The value
–9
disintegrations per second, whose mean life is 10 s. The of p is (2015)
–25
mass of an atom of this radioisotope is 10 kg. The mass
12
(in mg) of the radioactive sample is (2011) 73. The isotope 5 B having a mass 12.014 u undergoes -
66. A silver sphere of radius 1 cm and work function 4.7 eV is decay to 12 12
6 C. 6 C has an excited state of the nucleus
supspended from an insulating thread in free space. It is
under continuous illumination of 200 nm wavelength light. ( 12 * 12
6 C ) at 4.041 MeV above its ground state. If 5 B decays
As photoelectrons are emitted, the sphere gets charged and
acquires a potential. The maximum number of photoelectrons to 12 *
Z 6 C , the maximum kinetic energy of the -particle in
emitted from the sphere is A × 10 (where 1 < A < 10). The
value of Z is (2011) units of MeV is (1 u = 931.5 MeV/c2, where c is the speed of
67. A proton is fired from very far away towards a nucleus with light in vacuum). (2016)
charge Q = 120 e, where e is the electronic charge. It makes 74. A hydrogen atom in its ground state is irradiated by light
a closest approach of 10 fm to the the nucleus. The de- of wavelength 970 Å. Taking hc/e = 1.237 × 10–6 eV m and
Broglie wavelength (in units of fm) of the proton at its start
–27 – the ground state energy of hydrogen atom as –13.6 eV,
is [Take the proton mass, mp = (5/3) × 10 kg; h/e = 4.2 × 10
The number of lines present in the emission spectrum is
15
1 9 –15 (2016)
J-s/C; 4 = 9 × 10 m/F; 1 fm = 10 m] (2012)
0
MODERN PHYSICS 77
75. An electron in a hydrogen atom undergoes a transition
from an orbit with quantum number ni to another with
quantum number n f · Vi and V f are respectively the
initial and final potential energies of the electron. If
Vi
6.25 , then the smallest possible n is (2017)
Vf f
131
ASSERTION REASON
76. I is an isotope of Iodine that decays to an isotope of
(A) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
Xenon with a half-life of 8 days. A small amount of a serum
the correct explanation for Statement-I.
labelled with 131I is injected into the blood of a person. The
(B) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
activity of the amount of I injected was 2.4 10 5
131
not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
Becquerel (Bq). It is known that the injected serum will get
(C) If Statement I is true; Statement-II is false.
distributed uniformly in the blood stream in less than half
an hour. After 11.5 hours, 2.5 ml of blood is drawn from the (D) If Statement-I is false; Statement-II is true.
person’s body, and gives an activity of 115 Bq. The total 80. Statement-1 : If the accelerating potential in an X-ray tube
volume of blood in the person’s body, in liters is is increased, the wavelengths of the characteristic X-ray do
not change.
approximately (you may use e x 1 x for x 1 and
Statement-2 : When an electron beam strikes the target in
2 0.7 ). (2017) an X-ray tube, part of the kinetic energy is converted into
X-ray energy. (2007)
77. In a photoelectric experiment a parallel beam of
(a) A (b) B
monochromatic light with power of 200 W is incident on a
perfectly absorbing cathode of work function 6.25 eV. The (c) C (d) D
frequency of light is just above the threshold frequency so
Match the Column
that the photoelectrons are emitted with negligible kinetic
81. Some laws/process are given in Column I. Match these with
energy. Assume that the photoelectron emission efficiency
the physical phenomena given in Column II. (2006)
is 100%. A potential difference of 500 V is applied between
Column I Column II
the cathode and the anode. All the emitted electrons are
(A) Nuclear fusion (P) Converts some matter into
incident normally on the anode and are absorbed. The anode
experiences a force F = n × 10–4 N due to the impact of the energy
electrons. The value of n is ............ (2018) (B) Nuclear fission (Q) Generally possible for nuclei
with low atomic number
78. Consider a hydrogen-like ionized atom with atomic number
(C) -decay (R) Generally possible for nuclei
Z with a single electron. In the emission spectrum of this
with higher atomic number
atom, the photon emitted in the n = 2 to n = 1 transition has
energy 74. eV higher than the photon emitted in the n = 3 to (D) Exothermic nuclear (S) Essentially proceeds by weak
n = 2 transition. The ionization energy of the hydrogen atom reaction nuclear forces
is 13.6 eV. The value of Z is ........... (2018) 82. Some laws/processes are given in Column I. Match these
with the physical phenomena given in Column II (2007)
79. A monochromatic light is incident from air on a refracting
Column I Column II
surface of a prism of angle 75° and refractive index n0 = 3 . (A) Transition between (P) Characteristic X-rays
The other refracting surface of the prism is coated by a thin two atomic energy levels
film of material of refractive index n as shown in figure. The (B) Electron emission from (Q) Photoelectric effect
light suffers total internal reflection at the coated prism a material
surface for an incidence angle of 60°. The value of n2 is (C) Mosley’s law (R) Hydrogen spectrum
______. (D) Change of photon (S) -decay
(2019/Shift -2) energy into kinetic energy
of electrons
MODERN PHYSICS 78
83. Match the nuclear process given in column I with the Use the model described above to answer the following
appropriate option(s) in column II. (2015) three questions for a particle moving in the line x = 0 to x = a.
–34 –19
Column–I Column–II Take h = 6.6 × 10 J s and e = 1.6 × 10 C. (2009)
(A) Nuclear fusion (P) Absorption of thermal 87. The allowed energy for the particle for a particular value of
n is proportional to
235 –2 –3/2
neutrons by 92 U (a) a (b) a
–1 2
(c) a (d) a
60
(B) Fission in a nuclear reactor (Q) 27 Co nucleus –30
88. If the mass of the particle is m = 1.0 × 10 kg and a = 6.6 nm,
(C) decay (R) Energy production in the energy of the particle in its ground state is closest to
stars via hydrogen (a) 0.8 meV (b) 8 meV
conversion to helium
(c) 80 meV (d) 800 meV
(D) ray emission (S) Heavy Water
89. The speed of the particle, that can take discrete values is
(T) Neutrino emission
proportional to
Passage - 1 (a) n
–3/2
(b) n
–1
+ +
In a mixture of H – He gas (He is singly ionized He atom), 1/2
+ (c) n (d) n
H atoms and He ions are excited to their respective first
excited states. Subsequently, H atoms transfer their total PASSAGE - 3
+
excitation energy to He ions (by collisions). Assume that
Scientists are working hard to develop nuclear fusion reactor.
the Bohr model of atom is exactly valid. 2
+
Nuclei of heavy hydrogen, 1H, known as deuteron and
84. The quantum number n of the state finally populated in He denoted by D, can be thought of as a candidate for fusion
ions is (2008)
(a) 2 (b) 3 reactor. The D-D reaction is 12 H 12 H 32 He n energy..
(c) 4 (d) 5 In the core of fusion reactor, a gas of heavy hydrogen is
+ fully ionized into deuteron nuclei and electrons. This
85. The wavelength of light emitted in the visible region by He
ions after collisions with H atoms is (2008) collection of 12 H nuclei and electrons is known as plasma.
–7 –7
(a) 6.5 × 10 m (b) 5.6 × 10 m The nuclei move randomly in the reactor core and
–7 –7
(c) 4.8 × 10 m (d) 4.0 × 10 m occasionally come close enough for nuclear fusion to take
86. The ratio of the kinetic energy of the n = 2 electron for the H place. Usually, the temperatures in the reactor core are too
+
atom to that of He ion is : (2008) high and no material wall can be used to confine the plasma.
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 Special techniques are used to confine the plasma for a time
t0 before the particles fly away from the core. If n is the density
(c) 1 (d) 2
(number/volume) of deuterons, the product nt0 is called
PASSAGE - 2 Lawson number. In one of the criteria, a reactor is termed
14 3
When a particle is restricted to move along x-axis between successful if Lawson number is greater than 5 × 10 s/cm .
x = 0 and x = a, where a is of nanometre dimension, its energy It may be helpful to use the following : Boltzmann constant
can take only certain specific values. The allowed energies
of the particle moving in such a restricted region, correspond –5
e2 –9
to the formation of standing waves with nodes at its ends k = 8.6 × 10 eV/k ; = 1.44 × 10 eVm. (2009)
40
x = 0 and x = a. The wavelength of this standing wave is
related to the linear momentum p of the particle according to 90. In the core of nuclear fusion reactor, the gas becomes plasma
the de Broglie relation. The energy of the particle of mass m because of
p2 (a) strong nuclear force acting between the deuterons
is related to its linear momentum as E = . Thus, the
2m (b) Coulomb force acting between the deuterons
energy of the particle can be denoted by a quantum number
(c) Coulomb force acting between deuteron-electron pairs
‘n’ taking values 1, 2, 3, .... (n = 1, called the ground state)
corresponding to the number of loops in the standing wave. (d) the high temperature maintained inside the reactor core.
MODERN PHYSICS 79
91. Assume that two deuteron nuclei in the core of fusion reactor 95. In a CO molecule, the distance between C (mass = 12 a.m.u)
at temperature T are moving towards each other, each with
kinetic energy 1.5 kT, when the separation between them is 5 –27
large enough to neglect Coulomb potential energy. Also and O (mass = 16 a.m.u.), where 1 a.m.u. = × 10 kg, is
3
neglect any interaction from other particles in the core. The
minimum temperature T required for them to reach a close to
–15
separation of 4 × 10 m is in the range –10
9 9
(a) 2.4 × 10 m
(a) 1.0 × 10 K < T < 2.0 × 10 K –10
9 9 (b) 1.9 × 10 m
(b) 2.0 × 10 K < T < 3.0 × 10 K –10
9 9 (c) 1.3 × 10 m
(c) 3.0 × 10 K < T < 4.0 × 10 K
–11
9 9
(d) 4.0 × 10 K < T < 5.0 × 10 K (d) 4.4 × 10 m
92. Results of calculations for four different designs of a fusion PASSAGE - 5
reactor using D-D reaction are given below. Which of these The -decay process, discovered around 1900, is basically
is most promising based on Lawson criterion ?
12 –3
the decay of a neutron (n). In the laboratory, a proton (p)
(a) deuteron density = 2.0 × 10 cm , confinement time –
–3
= 5.0 × 10 s and the electron (e ) are observed as the decay products of
14 –3
(b) deuteron density = 8.0 × 10 cm , confinement time the neutron. Therefore, considering the decay of a neutron
–1
= 9.0 × 10 s as a two-body decay process, it was predicted theoretically
23 –3
(c) deuteron denisty = 4.0 × 10 cm , confinement time that the kinetic energy of the electron should be a constant.
–11
= 1.0 × 10 s But experimentally, it was observed that the electron kinetic
24 –3
(d) deuteron density = 1.0 × 10 cm , confinement time energy has a continuous spectrum. Considering a three
–12
=4.0 × 10 s –
decays process, i.e., n p + e + ve , around 1930, Pauli
PASSAGE - 4
The key feature of Bohr’s theory of spectrum of hydrogen explained the observed electron energy spectrum. Assuming
atom is the quantization of angular momentum when an
the anti-neutrino ( ve ) to be massless and possessing
electron is revolving around a proton. We will extend this to
a general rotational motion to find quantized rotational negligible energy, and the neutron to be at rest, momentum
energy of a diatomic molecule assuming it to be rigid. The and energy conservation principles are applied. From this
rule to be applied is Bohr’s quantization condition. (2010)
calculation, the maximum kinetic energy of the electron is
93. A diatomic molecule has moment of interia I. By Bohr’s 6
th
quantization condition its rotational energy in the n level 0.8 × 10 eV. The kinetic energy carried by the proton is only
(n = 0 is not allowed) is the recoil energy. (2012)
2
96. If the anti-neutrion had a mass of 3 eV/c (where c is the
1 h2 1 h2
(a) 2 2 (b) n 2 speed of light) instead of zero mass, what should be the
n 8 I 8 I
range of the kinetic energy K, of the electron ?
6
h2 h2
2
(a) 0 < K < 0.8 × 10 eV
n
(c) 2 n
(d) 2 6
8 I 8 I (b) 3.0 eV < K < 0.8 × 10 eV
6
94. It is found that the excitation frequency from ground to the (c) 3.0 eV < K < 0.8 × 10 eV
first excited state of rotation for the CO molecule is close to (d) 0 < K < 0.8 × 10 eV
6
4 11 97. What is the maximum energy of the anti-neutrino ?
× 10 Hz. Then the moment of inertia of CO molecule
–34 (a) Zero
about its centre of mass is close to (Take h = 2 × 10 Js) 6
–46 2 –46 2 (b) Much less than 0.8 × 10 eV
(a) 2.76 × 10 kg m (b) 1.87 × 10 kg m
6
–47 2 –47 2 (c) Nearly 0.8 × 10 eV
(c) 4.67 × 10 kg m (d) 1.17 × 10 kg m
(d) Much larger than 0.8×106 eV
MODERN PHYSICS 80
PASSAGE - 6 99. The kinetic energy (in KeV) of the alpha particle, when the
210
The mass of a nucleus A
is less that the sum of the masses nucleus 84 Po at rest undergoes alpha decay, is (2013)
ZX
of (A – Z) number of neutrons and Z number of protons in (a) 5319 (b) 5422
the nucleus. The energy equivalent to the corresponding (c) 5707 (d) 5818
mass difference is know as the binding energy of the nucleus. 100. A radioactive nucleus X decays to a nucleus Y with a decay
A heavy nucleus of mass M can break into two light nuclei –1
constant x = 0.1s , Y further decays to a stable nucleus Z
of masses m1 and m2 only if (m1 + m2) < M. Also two light –1
with a decay constant y = 1/30 s . Initially, there are only X
20
nuclei of mass m3 and m4 can undergo complete fusion and nuclei and their number is N0 = 10 . Set-up the rate
form a heavy nucleus of mass M’ only if (m3 + m4) > M’. The equations for the populations of X, Y and Z. The
masses of some neutral atoms are given in the table below : population of Y nucleus as a functions of time is given by
1 2 Ny(t) = {N0x/(x–y)} [exp (–yt) –expt (–xt)]. Find the time
1H 1.007825 u 1H 2.014102 u
at which NY is maximum and determine the populations X
6
6.01513 u 7
7.016004 u and Y at that instant. (2001)
3 Li 3 Li
101. In a photoelectric experiment set-up, photon energy 5 eV
152 206
64 Gd 151.919803 u 82 Pb 205.974455 u falls on the cathode having work function 3 eV. (a) If the
–5 2
3 4
saturation current is iA = 4 A for intensity 10 W/m , then
1H 3.016050 u 2 He 4.002603 u plot a graph between anode potential and current. (b) Also
–5 2
70 82 draw a graph for intensity of incident radiation 2 × 10 W/m .
30 Zn 69.925325 u 34 Se 81.916709 u
(2003)
209 210
83 Bi 208.980388 u 84 Po 209.982876 u 102. The potential energy of a particle of mass m is given by
98. The correct statement is : (2013)
(a) the nucleus 36 Li can emit and alpha particle
Vx = E 0forfor0xx11
0
(b) The nucleus 210
can emit a proton If the total energy of the particle is 3E0, determine the ratio
84 Po
of de-Broglie wavelengths in the two ranges of x mentioned
(c) Deuteron and alpha particle can undergo complete fusion above. (2005)
70 82
(d) The nuclei 30 Zn and 34 Se can undergo complete fusion
MODERN PHYSICS 81
MODERN PHYSICS
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
02
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
Chapter 02 83
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES
1. ENERGY BANDS IN SOLIDS band to the conduction band. For example when the temperature
In case of a single isolated atom, there are single energy is increased the forbidden band is decreased so that some
levels in case of solids, the atoms are arranged in a systematic electrons are liberated into the conduction band.
space lattice and hence the atom are greatly influenced by Hence, semiconducotrs behave as conductors at elevated
neighbouring atoms. The closeness of atoms results in the temperatures.
intermixing of electrons of neighbouring atoms of course, for the
12.3 Conductors
valence electrons in the outermost shells which are not strongly
In case of conductors, there is no forbidden energy gap
bounded by nucleus. Due to intermixing the number of permissible
and the valence energy gap and conduction band overlap each
energy levels increases or there are significant changes in the
other. Here plenty of free electrons are available for electric
energy levels. Hence in case of a solid, instead of single energy
conduction. A slight potential difference across the conductor
levels associated with the single atom, there will be bands of energy
levels. cause the free electrons to constitute electric current. The most
important point in conductors is that due to the absence of
1.1 Valence Band, Conduction Band & Forbidden Energy Gap forbidden band, there is no structure to establish holes. The
total current in conductors is simply a flow of electrons.
The band formed by a series of energy levels containing
the valence electrons is known as valence band. The valence 2. SEMICONDUCTORS
band may be defined as a band which is occupied by the valence
electrons or a band having highest occupied band energy. A substance which has resistance in between conductors
The conduction band may also be defined as the lowest unfilled and insulators is known as semiconductor.
energy band. The separation between conduction band and Semiconductors have the following properties.
valence band is known as forbidden energy gap. There is no (i) They have resistance less than insulators and more than
allowed energy state in this gap and hence no electron can stay conductors.
in the forbidden energy gap. (ii) The resistance of semiconductor decreases with the
1.2 Insulators, Semiconductors and Conductors increase in temperature and vice versa.
(iii) When suitable metallic impurity like arsenic, gallium etc.
On the basis of forbidden energy band, the insulators, is added to a semiconductors, its current conducting
semiconductors and conductors are described as follows: properties change appreciably.
1.2.1 Insulators
2.1 Effect of temperatue on Semiconductors
In case of insulators, the forbidden energy band is very At very low temperature (say 0 K) the semiconductor
wide. Due to this fact electrons cannot jump from valence band crystal behaves as a perfect insulator since the covalent bonds
to conduction band. In insulators the valence electrons are are very strong and no free electrons are available. At room
bonded very tightly to their parent atoms. Increase in temperature temperature some of the covalent bonds with break due to the thermal
enables some electrons to go to the conduction band. energy supplied to the crystal. Due to the breaking of the bonds,
As, energy required is very high, hence, electron jump is almost some electrons become free which were engaged in the formation of
impossible. these bonds.
The absence of the electron in the covalent bond is represented
Conduction Band
by a small circle. This empty place or vacancy left behind in the
E
crystal structure is called a hole. Since an electron has a unit
E gap
negative charge, the hole carries a unit positive charge.
Valence Band
2.2 Mechanism of conduction of Electrons and Holes
When the electrons are liberated on breaking the covalent
1.2.2 Semiconductors bonds, they move randomly through the crystal lattice.
In semiconductors, the forbidden band is very small. When an electric field is applied, these free electrons have a
Germanium and silicon are the examples of semiconductors. A steady drift opposite to the direction of applied field. This
semiconductor material is one whose electrical properties lies constitute the electric current. When a covalent bond is broken,
between insulators and good conductors. When a small amount a hole is created. For one electron set free, one hole is created.
of energy is supplied, the electrons can easily jump from valence Thus, thermal energy creates an electron-hole pairs.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 84
Hence, there are as many holes as free electrons. These holes The doping material is either pentavalent atoms (bismuth,
move through the crystal lattice in a random fashion like liberated antimony, arsenic, phosphorus which have five valence
electrons. When an external electric field is applied, the holes electrons) or trivalent atoms (gallium, indium, aluminium, boron
drift in the direction of applied field. Thus they constitute electric which have three valence electrons). The pentavalent doping
current. atom is known as donor atom because it donates one electron to
the conduction band of pure semiconductor.
There is a strong tendency of semiconductor crystal to form a
covalent bonds. Therefore, a hole attracts an electron from the The doping materials are called impurities because they alter the
neighbouring atom. Now a valence electron from nearby covalent structure of pure semiconductor crystals.
bond comes to fill in the hole at A. This results in a creation of 2.4.2.1 N–Type Extrinsic Semiconductor
hole at B. The hole has thus effectively shifted from A to B. This
hole moves from B to C from C to D and so on. When a small amount of pentavalent impurity is added to
a pure semiconductor crystal during the crystal growth, the
This movement of the hole in the absence of an applied field is resulting crystal is called as N-type extrinsic semiconductor.
random. But when an electric field is applied, the hole drifts
In case of N-type semiconductor, the following points should be
along the applied field. remembered
2.3 Carrier Generation and Recombination (i) In N-type semiconductor, the electrons are the majority
charge carriers while positive holes are minority charge
The electrons and holes are generated in pairs. The free
carriers.
electrons and holes move randomly within the crystal lattice. In
such a random motion, there is always a possibility that a free (ii) Although N-type semiconductor has excess of electrons
but it is electrically neutral. This is due to the fact that
electron may have an encounter with a hole. When a free electron
electrons are created by the addition of neutral pentavalent
meets a hole, they recombine to re-establish the covalent bond.
impurity atoms to the semiconductor i.e., there is no
In the process of recombination, both the free electron and hole
addition of either negative changes or positive charges.
are destroyed and results in the release of energy in the form of
heat. The energy so released, may in turn be re-absorbed by 2.4.2.2 P–Type Extrinsic Semiconductor
another electron to break its covalent bond. In this way a new
electron hole pair is created. When a small amount of trivalent impurity is added to a
pure crystal during the crystal growth, the resulting crystal is
Thus the process of breaking of covalent bonds and called a P-type extrinsic semiconductor.
recombination of electrons and holes take place simultaneously.
In case of P-type semiconductor, the following points should be
When the temperature is increased, the rate of generation of
remembered
electrons and holes. This is turn increases, the densities of
electrons and hole increases. As a result, the conductivity of (i) In P-type semiconductor materials, the majority carriers
semiconductor increases or resistivity decreases. This is the are positive holes while minority carriers are the electrons.
reason that semiconductors have negative temperature coefficient (ii) The P–type semiconductor remains electrically neutral
of resistance. as the number of mobile holes under all conditions remains
2.4 Pure or Intrinsic Semiconductor and equal to the number of acceptors.
impure or Extrinsic Semiconductors
2.5 P–N Junction Diode
2.4.1 Intrinsic semiconductor
A semiconductor in an extremely pure form is known as When a P-type material is intimately joined to N-type, a
intrinsic semiconductor or a semiconductor in which electrons P-N junction is formed. In fact, merely-joining the two pieces a P-
and holes are solely created by thermal excitation is called a pure N junction cannot be formed because the surface films and other
or intrinsic semiconductor. In intrinsic semiconductor the number irregularities produce major discontinuity in the crystal structure.
of free electrons is always equal to the number of holes. Therefore a P-N junction is formed from a piece of semiconductor
2.4.2 Extrinsic Semiconductors (say germanium) by diffusing P-type material to one half side
The electrical conductivity of intrinsic semiconductor can and N-type material to other half side.When P-type crystal is
be increased by adding some impurity in the process of placed in contact with N-type crystal so as to form one piece, the
crystallization. The added impurity is very small of the order of assembly so obtained is called P-N junction diode.
one atom per million atoms of the pure semiconductor. Such 2.5.1 Forward Bias
semiconductor is called impurity or extrinsic semiconductor. The When external d.c. source is connected to the diode with
process of adding impurity to a semiconductor is known as doping. p–section connected to +ve pole and n–section connected to –
ve pole, the junction diode is said to be forward biased.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 85
The upper end of RL will be at +ve potential w.r.t. the lower end.
The magnitude of output across RL during first half at any instant
2.5.2 Reverse Bias
will be proportional to magnitude of current through RL, which in
When an external d.c. battery is connected to junction turn is proportional to magnitude of forward bias and which
diode such that its P–section is connected to –ve pole and n– ultimately depends upon the value of a.c. input at that time.
section is connected to +ve pole, the junction diode is said to be
reverse biased. A.C.
input
Note:-
P–N JUNCTION is such a device (any way) which offers
low resistance when forward biased and behaves like an D.C.
insulator when reverse biased. input
Symbol :
Thus output across RL will vary in accordance with a.c.
input. During second half, junction diode get reverse biased and
P N
hence no output will be obtained. Thus a discontinuous supply
is obtained.
2.8 Full Wave Rectifier
A rectifier which rectifies both halves of a.c. input is called
2.6 Junction Diode as Rectifier full wave rectifier.
An electronic device which converts a.c. power into d.c. 2.8.1 Principle
power is called a rectifier.
Junction Diode offers low resistive path when forward
2.7 Half Wave Rectifier biased and high resistive path when reverse biased.
2.7.1 Principle
2.8.2 Arrangement
Junction diode offers low resistive path when forward
biased and high resistive path when reverse biased. The a.c. supply is fed across the primary coil (P) of step
down transformer. The two ends of S–coil (secondary) of
2.7.2 Arrangement transformer are connected to P-section of junction diodes D1
The a.c. supply is fed across the primary coil (P) of step and D2. A load resistance RL is connected across the n–sections
down transformer. The secondary coil ‘S’ of transformer is of two diodes and central tapping of secondary coil. The d.c.
connected to the junction diode and load resistance RL. The output is obtained across secondary.
output d.c. voltage is obtained across RL.
2.8.3 Theory
2.7.3 Theory
Suppose that during first half of input cycle upper end of
Suppose that during first half of a.c. input cycle the s-coil is at +ve potential. The junction diode D1 gets forward
junction diode get forward biased. The conventional current will biased, while D2 gets reverse biased. The conventional current
flow in the direction of arrow heads. due to D1 will flow along path of full arrows.
When second half of input cycle comes, the condition will be
P N
exactly reversed. Now the junction diode D2 will conduct and
the conventional current will flow along path of dotted arrows.
Since current during both the half cycles flows from right to left
~ through load resistance RL, the output during both the half cycles
will be of same nature.
The right end of RL is at +ve potential w.r.t. left end. Thus in full
wave rectifier, the output is continuous.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 86
The majority carriers (e–) in emitter are repelled towards
base due to forward biase. The base contains holes as majority
carriers but their number density is small as it is doped very
lightly (5%) as compared to emitter and collector. Due to this the
probability of e– and hole combination in base is small. Most of
e– (95%) cross into collector region where they are swept away
by +ve terminal of battery VCB.
Corresponding to each electron that is swept by collector,
an electron enters the emitter from -ve pole of collector – base
battery.
If Ie, Ib, Ic be emitter, base and collector current respectively then
using Kirchoff first law
Ie I b Ic
2.9 Transistor 2.9.2 Action p–n–p Transistor
It is three sectioned semiconductor, in which three The p–type emitter is forward biased by connecting it to
sections are combined so that the two at extreme ends have the +ve pole of emitter-base battery and p–type collector is reverse
same type of majority carriers, while the section that separates biased by connected it to –ve pole of collector-base battery. In
them has the majority carriers in opposite nature. The three this case, majority carriers in emitter i.e. holes are repelled towards
sections of transistor are called emitter (E), Base (B), collector base due to forward biased. As base is lightly doped, it has low
(C). number density of e–. When hole enters base region, then only
5% of e– and hole combination take place. Most of the holes
Symbol :
reach the collector and are swept away by –ve pole of VCB battery.
E n–p–n C E p–n–p C
–
B B
2.9.1 Action of n-p-n Transistor
2.10 Common base Amplifier
n–p–n In this base of the transistor is common to both emitter
Ie E C Ic and collector.
(a) Amplifier circuit using n-p-n transistor : The emitter is
forward biased using emitter base battery (VEB) & due to
V EB VCB this, resistance of output circuit is large.
B Ib
– + – +
forward bias reverse bias
n-p-n
Input Ie E C Ic Output
Fig. shows that, the n-type emitter is forward biased by voltage IR
cc voltage
Rc
connecting it to -ve pole of VEB (emmitter-base battery) and n- ~ Vcb
type collector is reverse biased by connected it to +ve pole of +
VEB Vcc
VCB (collector-base battery). B Ib –
– +
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 87
Low input voltage is applied across emitter-base circuit. 2. When no a.c. signal voltage is applied to the input circuit
and amplified signal is obtained across collector-base circuit. If but emitter base circuit is closed let us consider, that Ie, Ib
I e, Ib, Ic be the emitter, base and collector-current respectively and Ic be the emitter current, base current and collector
then, current respectively. Then according to Kirchhoff’s first
law Ie = Ib + Ic
Ie I b I c …(i)
When current Ic flows in collector circuit, a potential drop
IcRc occurs across the resistance connected in collector - base
circuit and base collector voltage will be
Vcb Vcc Ic R c …(ii)
(b) Amplifier circuit using p–n–p Transistor
3. When the positive half cycle of input a.c. signal voltage
comes, it supports the forward biasing of the emitter-base
circuit. Due to this, the emitter current increases and
consequently the collector current increases. As a result
of which, the collector voltage Vc decreases.
4. Since the collector is connected to the positive terminal of
VCE battery, therefore decreases in collector voltage means
the collector will become less positive, which means
1. When the positive half cycle of input a.c. signal voltage negative with respect to initial value. This indicates that
comes, it supports the forward biasing of the emitter–base during positive half cycle of input a.c. signal voltage, the
circuit. Due to this, the emitter current increases and output signal voltage at the collector varies through a
consequently the collector current increases. negative half cycle.
2. As Ic increases, the collector voltage Vc decreases. 5. When negative half cycle of input a.c. signal voltage
comes, it opposes the forward biasing of emitter-base
3. Since the collector is connected to the negative terminal circuit, due to this the emitter current decreases and hence
of VCC battery of voltage VCB, therefore, the decrease in collector current decreases; consequently the collector
collector voltage means the collector will become less voltage Vc increases i.e., the collector becomes more
negative. This indicates that during positive half cycle of positive. This indicate that during the negative half cycle
input a.c. signal voltage, the output signal voltage at the of input a.c. signal voltage, the output signal voltage varies
collector also varies through the positive half cycle. through positive half cycle.
4. During negative half cycle of input a.c. signal voltage,
the output signal voltage at the collector also varies 2.12 Common base Amplifier
through the negative half cycle. Thus in common base A.C. Current Gain : It is defined as the ratio of change in collector
transitor amplifier circuit the input signal voltage and the current and the change in emitter current at constant base to
output collector voltage are in the same phase. collect voltage. It is denoted by ac
2.11 Common Emitter Amplifier I
ac c [VCB = const.]
Amplifier circuit using n–p-n transitor I e
1. The input (emitter base) circuit is forward biased with Voltage gain : It is defined as the ratio of change in output voltage
battery VBB of voltage VEB, and the output (collector- to the change in input voltage. It is denoted by Av.
emitter) circuit is reversed biased with battery VCC of
voltage VCE. Due to this, the resistance of input circuit is I c R out
I c R out
Av =
low and that of output circuit is high. Rc is a load resistance I e R in I e R in
connected in collector circuit.
Or Av = AC × resistance gain,
where Rout/Rin is called resistance gain.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 88
Power gain : It is defined as the ratio of change in output 3. ANALOG SIGNALS
power to the change in input power. Therefore,
Signals which varies continuously with time is called
change in output power
I c R out analog signal. A typical analog signal is shown in figure. Circuit
a.c. power gain =
change in input power I e R in used for generating analog signal is called analog electronic circuit.
I c2 Rout V
I 2e Rin
0 t
2
Or a.c. power gain = αac × resistance gain.
2.13 Common Emitter Amplifier V
a.c. current gain : It is defined as the ratio of the change 0 t
in collector to the change in base current. It is denoted
by ac.
4. DIGITAL SIGNALS
Ic
Therefore, ac = I [Vce = const.] Signals having either of the two levels, 0 or 1, are called
b v
digital signals.
Its value is quite large as compared to 1 and lies between V
15 to 50. 5V
1
0V
Voltage gain : It is the ratio of the change in output voltage 0 t
to the change in input voltage. It is denoted by A.
V
I c R out
I c R out
t
Av = 0
I b R in I b R in 0V
1 (–5V)
Or Av = ac × resistance gain.
5. LOGIC GATES
a.c. power gain : It is the ratio of the change in output
power to the change in input power. A digital circuit which either stops a signal or allows it to
pass through it is called a gate. A logic gate is an electronic
change in output power I c R out
2 circuit which makes logical decisions. Logic gate has one or more
a.c. power gain = = inputs but one output. Logic gates are the basic building blocks
change in input power I b 2 R in
for most of the digital systems. Variables used at the input and
Or a.c. power pain = 2ac × resistance gain. output are 1’s and 0’s. These are three basic logic gates:
(i) OR gate (ii) AND gate
2.14 Relation between and
(iii) NOT gate.
For both the types of amplifier, we have
5.1 OR Gate
ie = ib + ic
Dividing both sides of the above equation by Ic, we get OR gate is an electronic device that combines A and B
to give Y as output. In this figure two inputs are A and B and
ie ib output is Y. In Boolean algebra OR is represented by +.
1
ic ic
1/ = (1/) + 1 or 1/ = (1/) 1 = (1)/ A
Y=A+B
or = / (1) B
Rearranging also gives another relation i.e. Truth Table: A truth table may be defined as the table
1 which gives the output state for all possible input combinations.
Logic operations of OR gate are given in its truth table for all
possible input combinations.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 89
Input Output
A Y' = A+B Y
A B Y
0 0 0 B Y = A+B
0 1 1
1 0 1 Truth Table :
1 1 1 A B Y’ Y
0 0 0 1
5.2 AND Gate
0 1 1 0
In an AND gate there are two or more inputs and one
1 0 1 0
output. In Boolean algebra AND is represented by a dot (.).
1 1 1 0
A Boolean expression for NOT gate is Y = A B and it is
Y=A. B
B read as Y equals A OR B negated. A NOR function is the reverse
of OR function.
Truth Table
In put Output A
Y = A+B
A B Y B
0 0 0
0 1 0 Truth Table :
1 0 0
In put Output
1 1 1
A B Y
5.3 NOT Gate 0 0 1
NOT gate is an electronic circuit which has one input and 0 1 0
one output. This circuit is so called because output is NOT the 1 0 0
same as input. 1 1 0
5.5 NAND Gate
–
A Y=A
A NAND gate has two or more inputs and one output.
Actually a NAND gate is a NOT–AND gate. If a NOT gate is
connected at the output of an AND gate, we get NAND gate as
Boolean expression for NOT gate is Y = A .
shown in figure and its truth table is given in table.
Truth Table:
In put Output A Y' = A . B Y
B Y = A+B
A Y
0 1
1 0 A B Y’ Y
0 0 0 1
5.4 NOR Gate
0 1 0 1
A NOR gate has two or more inputs and one output. 1 0 0 1
Actually NOR gate is a NOT-OR gate. If a NOT gate is connected 1 1 1 0
at the output of an OR gate, we get NOR gate as shown in figure
and its truth table is shown as under in the table.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 90
Truth Table :
Boolean expression for NAND gate, is Y = A . B and is read as Y
In put Output
equals A and B negated.
Logical symbol of NAND gate is shown in figure and its truth A B Y
table in table. 0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
A
Y=A. B 1 1 0
B
Like NOR gate, NAND gate can also be used to realize all basic
gates : OR, AND and NOT. Hence it is also known as universal
Gate.
SCAN CODE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND
ELECTRONIC DEVICES
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 91
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
= (12 – 0.7)v = 113 v
Find current passing through 2 and 4 resistance in the
V0 11.3
circuit shown in figure. So, L = A = 2.26 mA
R 5 103
Example - 3
The current gain of a transistor in a common base
arrangement in 0.98. Find the change in collector current
corresponding to a change of 5.0 mA in emitter current.
What would be the change in base current ?
Sol. In the given circuit diode D1 is forward biased and D2 reverse
biased. Hence, D1 will conduct but D2 won’t. Therefore, Sol. Given, = 0.98 and ie = 5.0 mA
current through 4 resistance will be zero while through 2
i c
From the definition of ,
10 i e
resistance current will be 5 A.
2 Change in collector current,
Example - 2 ic = () (ie) = (0.98) (5.0) mA = 4.9 mA
(a) Calculate the value of V0 and i if the silicon and Futher, change in base current, ib = ie – ic = 0.1 mA
germanium diode start conducting at 0.7 V and 0.3 V
Example - 4
respectively.
A transistor is connected in common emitter configuration.
The collector supply is 8 V and the voltage drop across a
resistor of 800 in the collector circuit is 0.5 V. If the
current gain factor () is 0.96, find the base current.
0.96
Sol. 24
1 1 0.96
The collector current is,
Voltage drop across collector resistor
ic
(b) If the Ge diode connection is now reversed, what will resistance
be the new values of v0 and i ?
0.5
Sol. (a) Ge diode will start conducting before the silicon diode 0.625 10 3 A
800
does so. The effective forward voltage across Ge diode is
(12 – 0.3) V = 11.7 V. This will appear as the output voltage ic
From the definition of = i
across the load, i.e., b
V0 = 11.7 volt
0.625 103
26 10 –3 A
The current through RL , 24
11.7 Example - 5
i A
5 103
In a common emitter amplifier, the load resistance of the
= 2.34 mA
output circuit is 500 times the resistance of the input circuit.
(b) When Ge diode is reversed, Si diode conducts and V0 If = 0.98, then find the voltage gain and power gain.
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 92
Example - 8
R
Sol. Given = 0.98 and out 500
R in How many AM broadcast stations can be accomodated in
a 100 kHz bandwidth if the highest frequency modultating
0.98 a carriage is 5 kHz ?
49
1 1 0.98
Sol. Any station being modulated by a 5 kHz signal will produce
R out and upper side frequency 5 kHz above its carrier and a
(i) Voltage gain = () R = (49) (500) = 24500 lower side frequency 5 kHz below its carrier, thereby
in
requiring a bandwidth of 10 kHz. Thus,
2 R out
Number of stations accomodated
Power gain = R = (49) (500) = 1200500
2
(ii)
in Total bandwidth 100
= 10
Bandwidth per station 10
Example - 6
Example - 9
Write the truth table for the logical function D = (A OR B)
How many 500 kHz waves can be on a 10 km transmission
AND B.
line simultaneously ?
Sol. Let be the wavelength of 500 kHz signal. Then,
Sol. A OR B is a logical function, say it is equal to X, i.e.,
c 3.0 108
m 600 m
X = A OR B f 5.0 106
Now D = X AND B The number of cycle on the line can be found from,
The corresponding truth table is as under.
d 10 103
n 16.67
A B X= A OR B D = (A ORB) AND B y 600
1 0 1 0
Example - 10
0 1 1 1
A two wire transmission line has a capcitance of 20 pF/m
0 0 0 0 and a characteristic impedance of 50.
1 1 1 1 (a) What is the inductance per metre of this cable ?
(b) Determine the impedence of an infinitely long section
Example - 7
of such cable.
Convert the decimal number 10.625 into its binary
equivalent. Sol. (a) The characteristic impedance,
Sol. Integral part is 10. It can be converted into its binary part by Z L/C
using divide by 2 rule. 2
L = (Z ) (C)
(10)10 – (1010)2 2 –12
= (50) (20 × 10 ) H
Also, 0.625 × 2 = 1.250
= 0.05 H
0.250 × 2 = 0.5
0.5 × 2 = 1 (b) The characteristic impedence of a transmission line is
the impedence that an infinite length of line would present
(0.625)10 = (10)2
to a power supply at the input end of the line. Thus,
So, (10.625)10 = (1010.101)2
Z Z0 50
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 93
Example - 11 Example - 12
T.V. transmission tower at a paticular station has a height The core of an optical fibre is made of glass with refractive
of 160 m. index equal to 1.55 and clad has refractive index 1.51.
Calculate :
(a) What is the coverage range ?
(a) the critical angle for total internal reflection.
(b) How much population is covered by transmission, if
the average population density around the tower is 1200 (b) maximum acceptance angle at the air-core interface.
2
per km ?
(c) By how much the height of tower be increased to double
n
its coverage range. Given, radius, radius of earth = 6400 km ? Sol. (a) c sin 1 2
n1
Here, n1 = refractive index of core = 1.55
Sol. (a) Coverage range d = 2 Rh
and n2 = refractive index of clad = 1.51
2 6400 103 160 m 1.51
c sin 1 55.8
1.55
= 42.254 km
(b) Population covered = (population density) × (area (b) Maximum acceptance angle at the air-core interface
covered)
2
= (1200) × (d ) = sin
1
n12 n 22
3
= 2400 × 3.14 × 6.4 × 10 × 0.16
sin 1 1.55 1.51
2 2
= 77.17 lac
(c) Coverage range h
= 20.4°
Therefore coverage range can be doubled by making height
of the tower four times of 640 m. So, height of the tower
should be increased by 480 m.
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 94
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Properties of semiconductor materials 8. At elevated temperature, few of covalent bonds of Si or Ge
1. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled are broken and a vacancy in the bond is created. Effective
from room temperature to 77K, the resistance of charge of vacancy or hole is :
(a) copper increases and germanium decreases (a) positive
(b) each of them decreases (b) negative
(c) each of them increases (c) neutral
(d) copper decreases and germanium increases (d) sometimes positive and sometimes negative
2. A piece of copper and another of germanium are cooled 9. In pure form, Ge or Si, a semiconductor is called:
from room temperature to 80 K. The resistance of : (a) intrinsic semiconductor, ne = nh = ni
(a) each of them increases (b) extrinsic semiconductor, ne = nh = ni
(b) each of them decreases (c) doped semiconductor
(c) cooper increases and germanium decreases 10. If I is total current through an intrinsic semiconductor and
(d) cooper decreases and germanium increases Ie is electron current and Ih is hole current, then :
3. One serious drawback of semiconductor devices is, that : Ie
Ih
(a) they are costly (a) Ie (b) I I
I h
(b) they pollute the environment
(c) they do not last for long time (c) Ie – Ih = I (d) Ie + Ih = I
(d) they cannot be used to withstand high voltage. 11. In equilibrium condition, the rate of generation of electron-
hole pairs:
4. By increasing the temperature, the specific resistance of
a conductor and a semiconductor (a) is more than rate of recombination of electron and hole pairs
(a) increases for both (b) decreases for both (b) is less than rate of recombination of electron and hole
pairs
(c) increases, decreases (d) decreases, increases
5. At absolute zero, Si acts as : (c) equals to rate of recombination of electron and hole
pairs
(a) non-metal
(d) is always zero
(b) metal
12. A pure semicondutor behaves as a good conductor at :
(c) insulator
(a) room remperature (b) low temperature
(d) None of these
(c) high temperature (d) Both (b) and (c)
6. A pure semiconductor at room temperature has
3 13. The probability of electrons to be found in the conduction
(a) more electrons/m in its conduction band than holes/
3
band of an intrinsic semicondutor at a finite temperature:
m in its valence band.
(a) decreases exponentially with increasing band gap.
3
(b) more electrons/m in its conduction band than a (b) increases exponentially with increasing band gap.
typical metal.
(c) decreases with increasing temperature.
3
(c) more electrons/m in its valence band than at T = 0 K. (d) is independent of the temperature and the band gap.
(d) None of the above. 14. The gap between the valence and conduction bands of a
7. An n-type and p-type silicon semiconductor can be certain semiconductor is 0.85 eV. When this semiconductor
obtained by doping pure silicon with : is used to form a light emitting diode, the wavelength of the
(a) sodium and magnesium, respectively light emitted.
–6
(b) phosphorus and boron, respectively (a) is in a range above 1.5×10 m
–6
(c) boron and phosphorus, respectively (b) is in a range below 1.5×10 m
–6
(d) indium and sodium, respectively (c) is always 1.5×10 m
–6
(d) is in a range centered on 1.5×10 m.
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 95
15. Carbon is more resistive than germanium and silicon. Then, 22. In a p-type semiconductor, the majority and minority charge
order of energy gap is : carriers are respectively,
(a) C > Ge > Si (b) C > Si > Ge (a) protons and electrons (b) electrons and protons
(c) Si > Ge > C (d) C = Si = Ge (c) electrons and holes (d) holes and electrons
16. If ne is number density of electrons in conduction band 23. Which statement is correct ?
and nh is number density of holes in valence band, then
(a) n-type germanium is negatively charged and p-type
for an extrinsic semiconductor at room temperature, (ni =
germanium is positively charged
number density of intrinsic pairs)
(b) both n-type and p-type germanium are neutral.
ne 2 nh 2 (c) n-type germanium is positively charged and p-type
(a) n n i (b) n n i
h e germanium is negatively charged
(d) both n-type and p-type germanium are negatively
(c) n e n h n i2 (d) n e n h n i2 charged
17. The forbidden energy gap in the energy bands of P-N Junction
germanium at room temperature is about :
24. The forward characteristic of p-n junction is shown in the
(a) 1.1 eV (b) 0.1 eV
figure. What is the dynamical resistance of p-n junction at
(c) 0.67 eV (d) 6.7 eV 0.9 V ?
18. When germanium is doped with phosphorus, the doped
material has :
(a) excess positive charge
(b) excess negative charge
(c) more negative current carriers
(d) more positive current carriers
N and P type semicondutors
19. A silicon specimen is made into a p-type semiconductor
7
by doping, on an average, one Indium atom per 5×10
(a) 130 (b) 100
silicon atoms. If the number density of atoms in the silicon
28 3 (c) 50 (d) 30
specimen is 5×10 atoms/m , then the number of acceptor
atoms in silicon per cubic centimeter is : 25. In the reverse-biased p-n junction, the current is of the
30 3 13 3 order of :
(a) 2.5×10 atoms/cm (b) 1.0×10 atoms/cm
15 3 36 3
(a) ampere (b) milliampere
(c) 1.0×10 atoms/cm (d) 2.5×10 atoms/cm
(c) microampere (d) nanoampere
20. Acceptor atoms introduced into a pure semiconductor at 26. The depletion layer in the p-n junction region is caused
room temperature : by:
(a) increase the number of electrons in the conduction (a) drift of holes
band (b) diffusion of charge carriers
(b) increase the number of holes in the valence band (c) migration of impurity ions
(d) drift of electrons
(c) lower the Fermi level.
27. Due to diffusion of electrons from n to p-side,
(d) increase the electrical resistivity. I. electron-hole combination across p-n junction occurs.
21. An n-type and p-type silicon can be obtained by doping II. an ionised acceptor is left in the p-region.
pure silicon with : III. an ionised donor is left in the n-region.
(a) arsenic and phosphorous, respectively IV. electrons of n-side comes to p-side and electron-hole
(b) indium and aluminium, respectively combination takes palce in p-side
(c) phosphorous and indium, respectively Correct options are :
(a) I and II (b) II and III
(d) aluminium and boron, respectively
(c) II and IV (d) II, III and IV
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 96
28. Which of these are correct ? 33. The circuit shown in the figure contains two diodes D1
I. In forward biasing, holes from p-side crosses junction and D2, each with a forward resistance of 50 and with
and reach n-side. infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is 6V,
II. In forward biasing, electrons from n-side crosses the current through the 100 resistance (in amperes) is :
junction and reach p-side.
III. In n-side, holes are minority charge carriers.
IV. In p-side, electrons are minority charge carriers.
(a) I, II and III (b) I, III and IV
(c) II, III and IV (d) I, II, III and IV
29. Which of the given statements are correct regarding
unbiased p-n junction ?
I. Drift and diffusion currents occur p to n-side. (a) zero (b) 0.02
II. Initially, diffusion current is large and drift current is (c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
small. 34. Find VAB for the following circuit :
III. Finally, diffusion and drift current grow to be equal in
magnitude
IV. Under equilibrium there is no net current across p-n
junction plane.
(a) I and IV (b) I, II and III
(c) II, III and IV (d) All of these
(a) 10 V (b) 20 V
P-N Junction diodes
(c) 30 V (d) None of these
30. When the forward bias voltage of a diode is changed from
0.6 V to 0.7 V the current changes from 5 mA to 15 mA. 35. Two ideal p-n junction diodes are connected in an
Then its forward bias resistance is : electrical circuit with resistances to a battery of 12V as
(a) 0.01 (b) 0.1 shown in the figure. What will be the current flowing in
the circuit?
(c) 10 (d) 100
31. In the given circuit, if the forward voltage drop for the
diode is 0.5 V, the current is
(a) 0.2A (b) 1.7A
(a) 3.4 mA (b) 2 mA (c) 2A (d) 2.4A
(c) 2.5 mA (b) 3 mA 36. In forward biasing of the p-n junction,
32. Current in the circuit shown here is : (a) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to p-
side and the depletion region becomes thin.
(b) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to p -
side and the depletion region becomes thick.
(c) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to n-
side and the depletion region becomes thin.
(d) the positive terminal of the battery is connected to n-
(a) (5/40) A (b) (5/50)A side and the depletion region becomes thick.
(c) (5/10) A (d) (5/20) A
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 97
37. Symbol of a p-n junction diode is an arrow, its direction 43. A Zener diode is connected to a battery and a load as
indicates : shown below:
The currents I, IZ and IL are respectively
(a) nothing its just a symbol
(b) direction of flow of electrons
(c) direction of conventional current when it is forward
biased
(d) direction of electric field
38. In forward bias, forward current obtained from the p-n
(a) 12.5 mA, 7.5 mA, 5 mA
junction diode is :
(b) 15 mA, 7.5 mA, 7.5 mA
(a) due to injection of electrons in p-side
(c) 12.5 mA, 5 mA, 7.5 mA
(b) due to injection of holes in n-side
(d) 15 mA, 5 mA, 10 mA
(c) both (a) and (b)
44. A zener diode differs from a p-n junction that
(d) due to flow of electrons from negative terminal of
(a) zener diode is made from very lightly doped p-n junction
supply to its positive terminal
(b) zener diode is made from a heavily doped p-n junction
39. For the given circuit of p-n junction diode, which of the
(c) zener diode is made from a metal piece
following statement is correct ?
(d) zener diode is made from a heavily doped p-type
semiconductor
45. Dynamic resistance of a diode is given by :
V V
(a) rd (b) rd
I I
Threshold voltage Breakdown voltage
(a) in forward biasing, the voltagte across R is V (c) rd (d) rd
Current Current
(b) In forward biasing, the voltatge across R is 2V
46. The electrical circuit used to get smooth DC output from a
(c) In reverse biasing, the voltage across R is V
rectifier circuit is called :
(d) In reverse biasing, the voltage across R is 2V
(a) oscillator (b) filter
40. Which of the following is NOT true when a reverse bias (c) amplifier (d) logic gates
is applied to a p-n junction ? 47. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 200 V is connected to a
(a) Electrons flow from the p to the n side. diode and resistor R in the cirucuit shown so that half-
(b) Holes flow from the p to the n side. wave rectification occurs. If the forward resistance of the
diode is negligible compared to R, the rms voltage (in volt)
(c) the electric field in the depletion zone increases
across R is approximately :
(d) The potential difference across the depletion zone
increases
41. Reverse bias applied to a junction diode
(a) raises the potential barrier
(b) increasing the minority carriers of current
(c) increases the minority carriers of current
(d) lowers the potential barrier
42. Zener diode is used for : (a) 200 (b) 100
(a) rectification (b) amplification
(c) 200 / 2 (d) 280
(c) stabilization (d) modulation
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 98
48. A p-n photodiode is fabricated from a semiconductor with 52. An n-p-n transistor circuit is arranged as shown in figure.
a band gap of 2.5 eV. It can detect a signal of wavelength: It is :
(a) 4000 nm (b) 6000 nm
(c) 4000 Å (d) 6000 Å
Transistors
49. The emitter of transistor is doped the heaviest because it:
(I) acts as a supplier of charges carriers. (a) a common-base amplifier circuit
(II) dissipates maximum powder. (b) a common-emitter amplifier circuit
(III) has a large resistance. (c) a common-collector amplifier circuit
(d) none of the above
(IV) has small resistance.
53. A transistor is used in common-emitter mode as an amplifer.
Which of the above statements are correct ? Then :
(a) I and IV (b) I, II and III (a) the base-collector junction is forward biased
(c) I and III (d) None of these (b) the base-emitter junction is reverse biased
(c) the input signal is connected in series with the voltage
50. When a transistor is biased as follows:
applied to the base-emitter junction
(d) the input signal is connected in series with the voltage
applied to the base-collector junction
54. A transistor is operated in common emitter configuration
at constant collector voltage Vc = 1.5 V, such that a change
in the base current from 100 A to 150 A produces a
change in the collector current from 5 mA to 10 mA. The
current gain is :
Then, it is said to be in :
(a) 50 (b) 67
(a) solid state
(c) 75 (d) 100
(b) active state
55. In common emitter amplifier, the current gain is 62. The
(c) inactive state collector resistance and input resistance are 5 k and
(d) passive state 500 respectively. If the input voltage is 0.01 V, the output
51. A transistor connected in common emitter configuration voltage.
has input resistance RCE = 2 and load resistance of 5 k. (a) 0.62 V (b) 6.2 V
If = 60 and an input signal 12 mV is applied, calculate the (c) 62 V (d) 620 V
voltage gain, the power gain and the value of output 56. When npn transistor is used as an amplifier.
voltage. (a) electrons move from collector to base
(b) holes move from emitter to base
(c) electrons move from the base to collector
(d) holes move from base to emitter
57. The minimum potential difference between the base and
emitter required to switch a silicon transistor ‘ON’ is
approximately
(a) 1 V (b) 3 V
(c) 5 V (d) 4.2 V
58. Consider a p-n junction as a capacitor formed with p and n
materials acting as thin metal electrons and depletion layer
width acting as separation between them. Basing, on this
(a) AV = 150, Vout = 1.8 V, and power gain = 9000 assume that n-p-n transistor is working as an amplifier in
(b) AV = 20, Vout = 1 V, and power gain = 2000 CE configuration. If C1 and C2 are the base emitter and
(c) AV = 150, Vout = 1.5 V, and power gain = 8500 collector emitter junction capacitance, then
(a) C1 > C2 (b) C1 < C2
(d) AV = 20, Vout = 1.5 V, and power gain = 2000
(c) C1 = C2 (d) C1 = C2 = 0
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 99
59. A n-p-n transistor power amplifier in CE configuration gives 68. The current gain of the common base n-p-n transistor is
(a) voltage amplification only 0.96. What is the curent gain if it is used as common-
emitter amplifier ?
(b) currents amplification only
(a) 16 (b) 24
(c) both current and voltage amplification
(c) 20 (d) 32
(d) only
69. The current gain for a transistor working as common base
60. A transistor having a equal to 80 has a change in base amplifier is 0.96. If the emitter current is 7.2 mA, then the
current of 250 amp, then the change in collector current base current is :
is :
(a) 0.29 mA (b) 0.35 mA
(a) (280/80) amp (b) (250 + 80) amp
(c) 0.39 mA (d) 0.43 mA
(c) (250 – 80) amp (d) 250 × 80 amp
70. When the emitter current of a transistor is changed by 1
61. In an n-p-n transistor circuit, the collector current is 9 mA.
mA, its collector current changes by 0.990 mA. The
If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the collector, then
common base short current gain for the transistor is:
the emitter current is :
(a) 0.099 (b) 1.01
(a) 10 mA (b) 9 mA
(c) 8 mA (d) 8.1 mA (c) 1.001 (d) 0.990
62. In the case of constant and of transistor : Logic gates
(a) (b)
71. The correct option for getting X = 1 from the given circuit
(c) (d)
is
63. In an n-p-n circuit transistor, the collector current is 10
mA. If 80% electrons emitted reach the collector, then :
(a) the emitter current will be 7.5 mA
(b) the base current will be 2.5 mA
(c) the base current will be 3.5 mA
(d) the emitter current will be 15 mA
64. In a common base amplifier, the phase difference between
the input signal voltage and output voltage is
(a) A = B = C = 1 (b) A = B = 1 and C = 0
(a) (b)
(c) A = C = 1 and B = 0 (d) A = 0 and B = C = 1
(c) (d) 0
72. To get an output 1 from the circuit shown in the figure, the
65. The current gain of a transistor in common base mode is input must be
0.995. It gain in the common emitter mode is
(a) 200 (b) 99
(c) 0.995 (d) None of these
66. For a transistor, in a common-emitter arrangement, the AC
current gain is given by :
(a) Ic / IB vc constant (b) IB / Ic vc constant (a) A = 0, B = 1, C = 0 (b) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0
(c) A = 1, B = 0, C = 1 (d) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
(c) Ic / Ie vc constant (d) Ie / Ic vc constant 73. In the given circuit, the output Y becomes zero for the
inputs :
67. The correct relationship between the two current gains
and in a transistor is :
(a) (b)
(c) (d) (a) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0 (b) A = 0, B = 1, C = 1
(c) A = 0, B = 0, C = 0 (d) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 100
74. Output Y is given by : 79. The circuit in the below figure represents which of the
logic operations?
(a) OR (b) AND
(a) (X + Y) Z (b) (X – Y) Z
(c) NOT (d) NOR
(c) X . Y Z (d) X Y . Z 80. The output of NAND gate is 0,
75. Identify the gate and match A, B, Y in bracket to check. (a) if both inputs are 0
(b) if one input is 0 and the other input is 1
(c) if both inputs are 1
(d) either if both inputs are 1 or if one of the inputs is 1 and
other 0.
81. How many NAND gates are used to form AND gate ?
(a) AND (A = 1, B = 1, Y = 1)
(b) OR (A = 1, B = 1, Y = 0) (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) NOT (A = 1, B = 1, Y = 1) (c) 3 (d) 4
(d) XOR (A = 0, B = 0, Y = 0) 82. In the circuit below, A and B represent two inputs and C
represents the output.
76. The following configuration of gate is equivalent to :
(a) NAND (b) XOR
(c) OR (d) None of these
77. In a negative logic, voltage representation the following The circuit represents
waveform corresponds to : (a) NOR gate (b) AND gate
(c) NAND gate (d) OR gate
83. The combination of gates shown below yields
(a) 0000000000 (b) 0101101000
(c) 1111111111 (d) 1010010111
78. The following circuit represents :
(a) OR gate (b) NOT gate
(c) XOR gate (d) NAND gate
(a) OR gate (b) XOR gate
(c) AND gate (d) NAND gate
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 101
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
1. A 2V battery is connected across AB as shown is the figure. (a) Zener diode, Simple diode, Light dependent resistance,
The value of the current supplied by the battery when in Solar cell
one case battery’s positive terminal is connected to A and
(b) Solar cell, Light dependent resistance, Zener diode,
in other case when positive terminal of battery is connected
to B will respectively be : Simple diode
(c) Zener diode, Solar cell, Simple diode, Light dependent
(2015 Online) resistance
(d) Simple diode, Zener diode, Solar cell, Light dependent
resistance
4. If a, b, c d are inputs to a gate and x is its output, then, as
per the following time graph, the gate is : (2016)
(a) 0.4 A and 0.2 A (b) 0.2 A and 0.4 A
(c) 0.1 A and 0.2 A (d) 0.2 A and 0.1 A
2. The value of the resistor, Rs, needed in the dc voltage
regulator circuit shown here, equals : (2015 Online)
(a) AND (b) OR
(c) NAND (d) NOT
5. For a common emitter configuration, if and have their
Vi VL Vi VL usual meanings, the incorrect relationship between and
(a) n 1 I (b)
L n 1 IL is : (2016)
Vi VL Vi VL (a)
1
(b)
1
(c) (d)
nIL nIL
3. Identify the semiconductor devices whose characteristics 2 1 1
(c) (d) 1
are given below, in the order (a), (b), (c), (d) : (2016) 1 2
6. The truth table given in figure represents :
(2016 Online Set-1)
A B Y
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
(a) AND – Gate (b) OR – Gate
(c) NAND – Gate (d) NOR – Gate
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 102
7. An experiment is performed to determine the I–V 12. What is the conductivity of a semiconductor sample
characteristics of a Zener diode, which has a protective having electron concentration of 5 × 10 18 m–3, hole
resistance of R=100 , and a maximum power of dissipation concentration of 5 × 1019 m–3, electron mobility of 2.0 m2 V–
1 –1
rating of 1 W. The minimum voltage range of the DC source s and hole mobility of 0.01 m2 V–1 s–1 ?
in the circuit is : (2016 Online Set-1) (Take charge of electron as 1.6 × 10–19 C) (2017)
(a) 0 – 5 V (b) 0 – 8 V (a) 1.68 (W-m) –1
(b) 1.83 (W-m) –1
(c) 0 – 12 V (d) 0 – 24 V (c) 0.59 (W-m)–1 (d) 1.20 (W-m)–1
8. To get an output of 1 from the circuit shown in figure the 13. The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown in the figure.
input must be : (2016 Online Set-2) The ratio of forward to reverse bias resistance is :
(2017 Online Set-1)
(a) a = 0, b = 0, c = 1
(b) a = 1, b = 0, c = 0
(c) a = 1, b = 0, c = 1
(d) a = 0, b = 0, c = 1
9. An unknown transistor needs to be identified as a npn or
pnp type. A multimeter, with +ve and –ve terminals, is (a) 10 (b) 10–6
used to measure resistance between different terminals of (c) 106 (d) 100
transistor. If terminal 2 is the base of the transistor then 14. The current gain of a common emitter amplifier is 69. If the
which of the following is correct for a pnp transistor? emitter current is 7.0 mA, collector current is :
(2016 Online Set-1) (2017 Online Set-2)
(a) +ve terminal 1, –ve terminal 2, resistance high (a) 9.6 mA (b) 6.9 mA
(b) +ve terminal 2, –ve terminal 1,resistance high (c) 0.69 mA (d) 69 Ma
(c) +ve terminal 3, –ve terminal 2, resistance high 15. The reading of the ammeter for a silicon diode in the given
(d) +ve terminal 2, –ve terminal 3, resistance low circuit is : (2018)
10. In a common emitter amplifier circuit using an n-p-n
transistor, the phase difference between the input and the
output voltages will be : (2017)
(a) 45° (b) 90°
(c) 135° (d) 180°
11. A particle is executing simple harmonic motion with a time
period T. At time t = 0, it is at its position of equilibrium. (a) 11.5 mA (b) 13.5 mA
The kinetic energy-time graph of the particle will look like: (c) 0 (d) 15 mA
(2017) 16. In a common emitter configuration with suitable bias, it is
given that RL is the load resistance and RBE is small signal
dynamic resistance (input side). Then, voltage gain,
current gain and power gain are given, respectively, by :
(a) (b)
is current gain, IB, IC and IE are respectively base,
collector and emitter currents. (2018 Online Set-1)
R L I C 2 R L R L I E 2 R L
(c) (d) (a) R , I , R (b) R , I , R
BE B BE BE B BE
2 R L I C 2 RL 2 R L I C RL
(c) R , I , R (d) R , I , R
BE E BE BE B BE
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 103
17. Truth table for the following digital circuit will be :
(a) 40 µA (b) 100 µA
(2018 Online Set-2) (c) 7 µA (d) 10 µA
21. An NPN transistor is used in common emitter configuration
as an amplifier with 1k load resistance. Signal voltage of
10 mV is applied across the base-emitter. This produces a
3mA change in the collector current and 15 A change in
(a) (b) the base current of the amplifier. The input resistance and
voltage gain are:
(2019-04-09/Shift -1)
(a) 0.67 k ,300 (b) 0.67 k ,300
(c) 0.67 k , 200 (d) 0.33k ,300
22. The specific heats, C p and Cv of a gas of diatomic
(c) (d) molecules, A, are given (in units of J mol 1k 1 ) by 29 and
22, respectively, Another gas of diatomic molecules, B, has
the corresponding values 30 and 21, If they are treated as
18. In the given circuit, the current through zener diode is : ideal gases, then:
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
(a) A is rigid but B has a vibrational mode.
(b) A has a vibrational mode but B has none.
(c) A has one vibrational mode and B has two
(d) Both A and B have a vibrational mode each.
23. The logic gate equivalent to the given logic circuit is:
(2018 Online Set-3)
(a) 5.5 mA (b) 6.7 mA
(c) 2.5 mA (d) 3.3 mA
(2019-04-09/Shift -2)
19. The reverse breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is 5.6 V (a) NAND (b) OR
in the given circuit.
(c) NOR (d) AND
I1
24. Two coaxial discs, having moments of inertia I1 and , are
2
1
rotating with respective angular velocities 1 and ,
2
about their common axis. They are brought in contact with
The current Iz through the Zener (in mA) is : each other and thereafter they rotate with a common angular
velocity. If Er and Ei are the final and initial total energies,
(2019-04-08/Shift -1)
then (Ef– Ei) is : (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
20. A common emitter amplifier circuit, built using an
npntransistor, is shown in the figure. Its CE current gain is I112 I112
250,RC = 1 k and VCC = 10 V. What is the minimum (a) (b)
12 6
basecurrent for VCE to reach saturation?
(2019-04-08/Shift -2) 3 I112
(c) I112 (d)
8 24
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 104
25. The figure represents a voltage regulator circuit using a 28. Figure shows a DC voltage regulator circuit, with a
Zener diode. The breakdown voltage of the Zener diode is Zenerdiode of breakdown voltage = 6V. If the unregulated
6 V and the load resistance is RL 4 k . The series inputvoltage varies between 10 V and 16 V, then what is
themaximum Zener current?
resistance of the circuit is Ri 1k | . If the battery voltage (2019-04-12/Shift -2)
VBvaries from 8 V to 16 V, what are the minimum and maximum
values of the current through Zener diode?
(2019-04-10/Shift -2)
(a) 0.5 mA; 6 mA (b) 1 mA; 8.5 mA
(c) 0.5 mA; 8.5 mA (d) 1.5 mA; 8.5 mA
26. The truth table for the circuit given in the figure is: (a) 2.5 mA (b) 1.5 mA
(c) 7.5 mA (d) 3.5 mA
29. Ge and Si diodes start conducting at 0.3 V and 0. 7 V
respectively. In the following figure if Ge diode connections
are reversed, the value of V0 changes by : ( assume that the
Ge diode has large breakdown voltage)
(2019-04-12/Shift -1) (2019-04-09/Shift -2)
A B Y A B Y
0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 1 0
(a) (b)
1 0 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 0
A B Y A B Y
0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 1 0 (a) 0.8 V (b) 0.6 V
(c) (d) (c) 0.2 V (d) 0.4 V
1 0 0 1 0 1 30. To get output ‘1’ at R, for the given logic gate circuit the
1 1 0 1 1 1 input values must be:
27. A plane electromagnetic wave having a frequency = 23.9 (2019-04-10/Shift -1)
GHz propagates along the positive z-direction infree space.
The peak value of the Electric Field is 60 V/m.Which among
the following is the acceptable magneticfield component in
the electromagnetic wave ?
(2019-04-12/Shift -2)
(a) B 2 10 sin 0.5 10 z 1.5 10 t iˆ
7 3 11
(b) B 2 10 sin 0.5 10 z 1.5 10 t iˆ
–7 3 11
(a) X = 0, Y = 1
(b) X = 1, Y = 1
(c) B 60 sin 0.5 103 x 1.5 1011 t kˆ (c) X = 1, Y = 0
(d) X = 0, Y = 0
(d) B 2 10 –7 sin 1.5 10 2 x 0.5 1011 t ˆj
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 105
31. For the circuit shown below, the current through the Zener
diode is:
(2019-04-10/Shift -2)
(2019-01-12/Shift -2)
(a) 25 A and 3.5 V (b) 20 and 3.5 V
(a) 9 mA (b) 5 mA
(c) 25 and 2.8 V (d) 20 and 2.8 V
(c) Zero (d) 14 mA
36. In the following digital circuit, what will be the output at ‘Z’,
32. In the given circuit the current (in mA) through Zener Diode when the input (A, B) are (1, 0), (0, 0), (1, 1), (0, 1) :
is close to : (2020-09-02/Shift -2)
(2019-04-11/Shift -1)
(a) 0, 1, 0, 0 (b) 1, 1, 0, 1
(c) 0, 0, 1, 0 (d) 1, 0, 1, 1
33. The circuit shown below contains two ideal diodes, each 37. When a diode is forward biased, it has a voltage drop of 0.5
with a forward resistance of 50 . If the battery voltage is V. The safe limit of current through the diode is 10 mA. If a
6V,the current through the 100 resistance (in amperes) is: battery of emf 1.5 V is used in the circuit, the value of minimum
resistance to be connected in series with the diode so that
(2019-04-11/Shift -2)
the current does not exceed the safe limit is :
(2020-09-03/Shift -1)
(a) 300 (b) 200
(c) 50 (d) 100
38. Take the breakdown voltage of the zener diode used in the
given circuit as 6v. For the input voltage shown in figure
below, the time variation of the output voltage is: (Graphs
drawn are schematic and not to scale)
(a) 0.036 (b) 0.020 (2020-09-04/Shift -1)
(c) 0.027 (d) 0.030
34. The output of the given logic circuit is ______.
(a)
(2019-01-12/Shift -1)
(a) AB AB (b) AB AB
(c) AB (d) AB (b)
35. In the figure, given that VBB supply can vary from O to 5.0 V,
VCC 5V, dc 200 , RB 100k , RC 1 K and VBE 1.0V .
The minimum base current and the input voltage at which
the transistor will go to saturation, will be, respectively:
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 106
(b)
(c)
(d) (c)
39. Identify the operation performed by the circuit given below: (d)
(2020-09-04/Shift -2)
42. For the given input voltage waveform Vin(t), the output
voltage waveform V0(t), across the capacitor is correctly
depicted by :
(2020-09-06/Shift -1)
(a) NOT (b) OR
(c) AND (d) NAND
40. With increasing biasing voltage of a photodiode, the
photocurrent magnitude :
(2020-09-05/Shift -1)
(a) increases initially and saturates finally
(b) remains constant (a)
(c) increase linearly
(d) increases initially and after attaining certain value, it
decreases
41. Two zener diodes (A and B) having breakdown voltages of
6 V and 4 V respectively, are connected as shown in the
circuit below. The output voltage V0 variation with input
voltage linearly increasing with time, is given by (Vinput = 0 V
at t = 0)
(b)
(figures are qualitative)
(2020-09-05/Shift -2)
(c)
(a)
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 107
(d)
43. Identify the correct output signal Y in the given combination
(2020-09-06/Shift -2)
of gates (as shown) for the given inputs A and B.
45. Which of the following gives reversible operation?
(2020-01-07/Shift -1)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(2020-09-06/Shift -1)
46. In the figure, potential difference between a and b is
(a)
(b)
(2020-01-07/Shift -2)
(a) 0V (b) 15V
(c) 10V (d) 5V
(c) 47. Choose the correct Boolean expression for the given circuit
diagram:
(d)
(2020-01-08/Shift -1)
44. The output characteristics of a transistor is shown in the (a) A.B (b) A B
figure. When VCE is 10V and I C 4.0mA , then value of (c) A + B (d) A.B
ac is __________.
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 108
48. In the given circuit, value of Y is (2020-01-09/Shift -2)
CV CV CV
(a) CV , (b) ,
e e 2e
CV VC CV
(c) , (d) , CV
e 2 e
52. The current (i) in the network is
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
(a) 1
(b) 0
(c) Will not execute (2020-01-09/Shift -2)
(d) Toggles between 0 and 1 (a) 0A (b) 0.3A
49. The series combination of two batteries both of the same (c) 0.2A (d) 0.6A
emf 10V , but different internal resistanceof 20Ω and 5Ω , is
53. The circuit shown below is working as a 8V dc regulated
connected to the parallel combination of two resistors 30Ω
voltage source. When 12V is used as input, the power
and RΩ. The voltage difference across the battery of internal
dissipated (in mW ) in each diode id; (considering both
resistance 20Ω is zero, the value of R(in Ω) is
zener diode are identical).
(2020-01-08/Shift -2)
50. In the given circuit both diodes are ideal having zero forward
resistance and built-inpotential of 0.7 V. Find the potential
of point E in volts
(2020-01-09/Shift -1)
51. Two identical capacitors A and B charged to the same
(2020-01-09/Shift -2)
potential 5V are connected in two different circuit as shows
below at time t = 0. If the charges on capacitors A and B at
time is t = CR is QA and QB respectively, then (Here is the
base of natural logarithm)
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 109
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. The nature of binding for a crystal with alternate and evenly 8. When the temperature of silicon sample is increased from
spaced positive and negative ions is 27°C to 100°C, the conductivity of silicon will be
(a) Covalent (b) Metallic (a) Increased (b) Decreased
(c) Dipolar (d) Ionic (c) Remain same (d) Zero
2. The temperature coefficient of resistance of a conductor is 9. A potential difference of 2V is applied between the opposite
faces of a Ge crystal plate of area 1 cm2 and thickness 0.5 mm.
(a) Positive always (b) Negative always If the concentration of electrons in Ge is 2 1019/m3 and
(c) Zero (d) Infinite m2
mobilities of electrons and holes are 0.36 and
3. Which one of the following is the weakest kind of bonding volt sec
in solids
m2
(a) Ionic (b) Metallic 0.14 respectively, then the current flowing
volt sec
(c) Vander Waals (d) Covalent through the plate will be
4. Atomic radius of fcc is (a) 0.25 A (b) 0.45 A
(c) 0.56 A (d) 0.64 A
a a 10. A Ge specimen is doped with Al. The concentration of
(a) (b)
2 2 2 acceptor atoms is ~1021 atoms/m3. Given that the intrinsic
concentration of electron hole pairs is ~ 10 19 / m 3 , the
3 3 concentration of electrons in the specimen is
(c) a (d) a
4 2 (a) 1017/m3 (b) 1015/m3
(c) 104/m3 (d) 102/m3
5. A piece of copper and the other of germanium are cooled
11. Bonding in a germanium crystal (semi- conductor) is
from the room temperature to 80 K, then which of the
(a) Metallic (b) Ionic
following would be a correct statement
(c) Vander Waal’s type (d) Covalent
(a) Resistance of each increases
12. In an insulator, the forbidden energy gap between the
(b) Resistance of each decreases valence band and conduction band is of the order of
(c) Resistance of copper increases while that of germanium (a) 1 MeV (b) 0.1 MeV
decreases (c) 1eV (d) 5eV
(d) Resistance of copper decreases while that of germanium 13. Which is the correct relation for forbidden energy gap in
conductor, semi conductor and insulator
increases
(a) Eg)c > Egsc > Eginsulator
6. To obtain P–type Si semiconductor, we need to dope pure
(b) Eginsulator > Egsc > Egconductor
Si with
(c) Egconductor > Eginsulator > Egsc
(a) Aluminium (b) Phosphorous
(d) Egsc > Egconductor > Eginsulator
(c) Oxygen (d) Germanium 14. In extrinsic semiconductors
7. Let np and ne be the number of holes and conduction (a) The conduction band and valence band overlap
electrons respectively in a semiconductor. Then (b) The gap between conduction band and valence band
(a) np > ne in an intrinsic semiconductor is more than 16 eV
(c) The gap between conduction band and valence band
(b) np = ne in an extrinsic semiconductor
is near about 1 eV
(c) np = ne in an intrinsic semiconductor
(d) The gap between conduction band and valence band
(d) ne > np in an intrinsic semiconductor will be 100 eV and more
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 110
15. Which of the following energy band diagram shows the N- 22. A semiconductor doped with a donor impurity is
type semiconductor (a) P–type (b) N–type
Conduction Conduction (c) NPN type (d) PNP type
(a) band (CB) (b)
band (CB) 23. In a semiconducting material the mobilities of electrons
and holes are e and h respectively. Which of the following
Impurity
Eg 1eV 1eV level
is true
(a) e >h (b) e <h
Valance Valance
band (VB) (c) e = h (d) e < 0; h > 0
band (VB)
24. Which of the following statements is not true
(c) Valance (d) Valance (a) The resistance of intrinsic semiconductors decrease
band (VB) band (VB) with increase of temperature
1eV Impurity (b) Doping pure Si with trivalent impurities give P–type
level 1eV semiconductors
(c) The majority carriers in N–type semiconductors are holes
Conduction Conduction
band (CB) band (CB) (d) A PN–junction can act as a semiconductor diode
25. The majority charge carriers in P-type semiconductor are
16. Carbon, silicon and Germanium atoms have four valence
(a) Electrons (b) Protons
electrons each. Their valence and conduction band are
(c) Holes (d) Neutrons
separated by energy band gaps represented by (Eg)C. (Eg)Si
26. In P–type semiconductor, there is
and (E g)Ge respectively. Which one of the following
(a) An excess of one electron (b) Absence of one electron
relationship is true in their case
(c) A missing atom (d) A donor level
(a) (Eg)C > (Eg)Si (b) (Eg)C = (Eg)Si
27. In a P-type semiconductor
(c) (Eg)C < (Eg)Ge (d) (Eg)C < (Eg)Si
(a) Current is mainly carried by holes
17. The probability of electrons to be found in the conduction
(b) Current is mainly carried by electrons
band of an intrinsic semiconductor at a finite temperature
(c) The material is always positively charged
(a) Decreases exponentially with increasing band gap (d) Doping is done by pentavalent material
(b) Increases exponentially with increasing band gap 28. A silicon specimen is made into a P-type semi-conductor
(c) Decreases with increasing temperature by doping, on an average, one Indium atom per 5 × 107
(d) Is independent of the temperature and the band gap silicon atoms. If the number density of atoms in the silicon
18. In a semiconductor, the concentration of electrons is specimen is 5 × 1028 atoms /m3 then the number of acceptor
8 × 1014/cm3 and that of the holes is 5 × 1012/cm3. The atoms in silicon per cubic centimetre will be
semiconductor is
(a) 2.5 × 1030 atoms /cm3
(a) P–type (b) N–type
(b) 1.0 × 1013 atoms /cm3
(c) Intrinsic (d) PNP-type
(c) 1.0 × 1015 atoms /cm3
19. A N-type semiconductor is
(d) 2.5 × 1036 atoms /cm3
(a) Negatively charged (b) Positively charged
29. In a PN-junction diode
(c) Neutral (d) None of these
20. When Ge crystals are doped with phosphorus atom, then (a) The current in the reverse biased condition is generally
it becomes very small
(a) Insulator (b) P-type (b) The current in the reverse biased condition is small but
the forward biased current is independent of the bias
(c) N-type (d) Superconductor
voltage
21. Which impurity is doped in Si to form N-type semi-
conductor? (c) The reverse biased current is strongly dependent on
the applied bias voltage
(a) Al (b) B
(d) The forward biased current is very small in comparison
(c) As (d) None of these
to reverse biased current
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 111
30. In the case of forward biasing of PN-junction, which one 36. In the circuit, if the forward voltage drop for the diode is
of the following figures correctly depicts the direction of 0.5V, the current will be
flow of carriers
0.5V
– + N – + N
P –
– + P –
– +
–
– + –
– +
–
– + –
– +
– + – +
(a) (b) 8V
Vp Vp
– + N – + N
P –
– + P –
– +
–
– + –
– + (a) 3.4 mA (b) 2 mA
–
– + –
– +
– + – + (c) 2.5 mA (d) 3 mA
(c) (d)
37. Current in the circuit will be
Vp Vp
31. In forward bias, the width of potential barrier in a P-N
junction diode
(a) Increases
(b) Decreases i
(c) Remains constant
5V
(d) First increases then decreases
32. The dominant mechanisms for motion of charge carriers in 5 5
(a) A (b) A
forward and reverse biased silicon P-N junctions are 40 50
(a) Drift in forward bias, diffusion in reverse bias 5 5
(c) A (d) A
(b) Diffusion in forward bias, drift in reverse bias 10 20
(c) Diffusion in both forward and reverse bias 38. The circuit shown in following figure contains two diode
D1 and D2 each with a forward resistance of 50 ohms and
(d) Drift in both forward and reverse bias with infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is
34. In the circuit given below, the value of the current is 6 V, the current through the 100 ohm resistance (in amperes) is
+ 4V PN 300 + 1V
(a) 0 amp (b) 10–2 amp D1
(c) 102 amp (d) 10–3 amp
35. A 2V battery is connected across the points A and B as D2
shown in the figure given below. Assuming that the
resistance of each diode is zero in forward bias and infinity 6V
in reverse bias, the current supplied by the battery when (a) Zero (b) 0.02
its positive terminal is connected to A is (c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
39. Find VAB
30V
VAB
A B
(a) 0.2 A (b) 0.4 A (a) 10 V (b) 20 V
(c) Zero (d) 0.1 A (c) 30 V (d) None of these
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 112
40. If the following input signal is sent through a PN-junction 43. In the circuit given below, V(t) is the sinusoidal voltage
diode, then the output signal across RL will be source, voltage drop VAB(t) across the resistance R is
D1 D2
10V
P N
0V R
RL VAB
–10V ~ V(t)
20V
(a) (b) (a) Is half wave rectified
–10V (b) Is full wave rectified
(c) Has the same peak value in the positive and negative
10V half cycles
(c) (d) (d) Has different peak values during positive and negative
–20V half cycle
44. The output current versus time curve of a rectifier is shown
41. Which one is reverse-biased in the figure. The average value of the output current in
10V
this case is
–5V
(a) 15V (b)
–10V
Current Is
–5V Time
–10V
(c) (d) (a) 0 (b) i0/
10V (c) 2i0/ (d) i0
45. Different voltages are applied across a P-N junction and
42. In the given figures, which of the diodes are forward biased?
the currents are measured for each value. Which of the
following graphs is obtained between voltage and current
+5V
+10V I I
R
1. 2.
+5V (a) (b)
–V +V –V +V
I
I
–12V
–10V (c) (d)
3. 4. R
–V +V
–V +V
–5V
46. The resistance of a germanium junction diode whose V– I
is shown in figure is (Vk = 0.3V)
I
10mA
5. R
–10V
V
Vk 2.3V
(a) 1, 2, 3 (b) 2, 4, 5
(a) 5 k (b) 0.2 k
(c) 1, 3, 4 (d) 2, 3, 4
10
(c) 2.3 k (d) k
2 .3
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 113
47. In a common emitter transistor, the current gain is 80. What 53. In an NPN transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA.
is the change in collector current, when the change in base If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the collector, the
current is 250 A emitter current (iE) and base current (iB) are given by
(a) 80 250 A (b) (250 – 80) A (a) iE = – 1 mA, iB = 9 mA (b) iE = 9 mA, iB = – 1 mA
(c) (250 + 80) A (d) 250/80 A (c) iE = 1 mA, iB = 11 mA (d) iE = 11 mA, iB = 1 mA
48. The transfer ratio of a transistor is 50. The input resistance 54. In the CB mode of a transistor, when the collector voltage
of the transistor when used in the common-emitter is changed by 0.5 volt. The collector current changes by
configuration is 1 K. The peak value for an A.C input 0.05 mA. The output resistance will be
voltage of 0.01 V peak is (a) 10 k (b) 20 k
(a) 100 A (b) 0.01 mA (c) 5 k (d) 2.5 k
(c) 0.25 mA (d) 500 A 55. In NPN transistor the collector current is 10 mA. If 90% of
49. An NPN-transistor circuit is arranged as shown in figure. electrons emitted reach the collector, then
It is (a) Emitter current will be 9 mA
(b) Emitter current will be 11.1 mA
N (c) Base current will be 0.1 mA
P RL
N V out (d) Base current will be 0.01 mA
V in 56. In the study of transistor as an amplifier, if =Ic/Ie and
=Ic/Ib, where Ic, Ib and Ie are the collector, base and emitter
currents, then
(a) A common base amplifier circuit 1
(a) (b)
(b) A common emitter amplifier circuit 1
1
(c) A common collector amplifier circuit (c) (d)
1
(d) Neither of the above
57. For the transistor circuit shown below, if = 100, voltage drop
50. Consider an NPN transistor amplifier in common-emitter between emitter and base is 0.7 V then value of VCE will be
configuration. The current gain of the transistor is 100. If the
collector current changes by 1 mA, what will be the change
in emitter current
(a) 1.1 mA (b) 1.01 mA C
(c) 0.01 mA (d) 10 mA 18V
VCE
B
51. In the following common emitter configuration an NPN E
transistor with current gain = 100 is used. The output
voltage of the amplifier will be 5V
(a) 10 V (b) 5 V
(c) 13 V (d) 0 V
Vout
1mV ~
Junction Transistor
58. When NPN transistor is used as an amplifier
(a) Electrons move from base to collector
(a) 10 mV (b) 0.1 V
(b) Holes move from emitter to base
(c) 1.0 V (d) 10 V (c) Electrons move from collector to base
52. If l1, l2, l3 are the lengths of the emitter, base and collector (d) Holes move from base to emitter
of a transistor then 59. If = 0.98 and current through emitter ie = 20 mA, the value
(a) l1 = l2 = l3 (b) l3< l2> l1 of is
(c) l3< l1< l2 (d) l3> l1> l2 (a) 4.9 (b) 49
(c) 96 (d) 9.6
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 114
60. For a common base configuration of PNP transistor 66. Sum of the two binary numbers (100010)2 and (11011)2 is
Ic (a) (111101)2 (b) (111111)2
0.96 then maximum current gain in common emitter
Ie
(c) (101111)2 (d) (111001)2
configuration will be
67. Figure gives a system of logic gates. From the study of
(a) 12 (b) 24
truth table it can be found that to produce a high output (1)
(c) 6 (d) 5
at R, we must have
61. For a transistor the parameter = 99. The value of the
parameter is
X
(a) 0.9 (b) 0.99 P
(c) 1 (d) 9 Y R
62. For a transistor, in a common emitter arrangement, the
alternating current gain is given by O
I I B
(a) C (b)
(a) X = 0, Y = 1 (b) X = 1, Y = 1
I B VC I C VC
(c) X = 1, Y = 0 (d) X = 0, Y = 0
I I 68. A gate has the following truth table
(c) C (d) E
P 1 1 0 0
I E VC I C VC
Q 1 0 1 0
63. A common emitter amplifier is designed with NPN R 1 0 0 0
transistor ( = 0.99). The input impedance is 1 K and
The gate is
load is 10 K. The voltage gain will be
(a) NOR (b) OR
(a) 9.9 (b) 99
(c) NAND (d) AND
(c) 990 (d) 9900
69. Which logic gate is represented by the following
Digital Electronics combination of logic gates
64. Given below are four logic gate symbol (figure). Those for
OR, NOR and NAND are respectively
A
A y y
A Y
B B
(1) (2)
B
A y A y
B B
(3) (4) (a) OR (b) NAND
(a) 1, 4, 3 (b) 4, 1, 2 (c) AND (d) NOR
(c) 1, 3, 4 (d) 4, 2, 1 70. Which of the following gates will have an output of 1
65. For the given combination of gates, if the logic states of 1 0
(a) (b)
inputs A, B, C are as follows A = B = C = 0 and A = B = 1, 0 1
C = 0 then the logic states of output D are
0 0
(c) (d)
1 1
A y
B G2 71. The output of a NAND gate is 0
G1
D (a) If both inputs are 0
C (b) If one input is 0 and the other input is 1
(c) If both inputs are 1
(a) 0, 0 (b) 0, 1
(d) Either if both inputs are 1 or if one of the inputs is 1 and
(c) 1, 0 (d) 1, 1
the other 0
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 115
72. Which gates is represented by this figure 79. The combination of the gates shown in the figure below
produces
A
y
B
A
A
(a) NAND gate (b) AND gate
Y
(c) NOT gate (d) OR gate
B
73. The truth-table given below is for which gate B
A 0 0 1 1
B 0 1 0 1
(a) NOR gate (b) OR gate
C 1 1 1 0
(c) AND gate (d) XOR gate
(a) XOR (b) OR
80. Holes are charge carriers in
(c) AND (d) NAND
(a) Intrinsic semiconductors (b) Ionic solids
74. A truth table is given below. Which of the following has
(c) P-type semiconductors (d) Metals
this type of truth table
81. Which of the following statements concerning the depletion
A 0 1 0 1
zone of an unbiased PN junction is (are) true
B 0 0 1 1
(a) The width of the zone is independent of the densities of
y 1 0 0 0
the dopants (impurities)
(a) XOR gate (b) NOR gate
(b) The width of the zone is dependent on the densities of
(c) AND gate (d) OR gate the dopants
75. The logic behind ‘NOR’ gate is that it gives (c) The electric field in the zone is produced by the ionized
(a) High output when both the inputs are low dopant atoms
(b) Low output when both the inputs are low (d) The electric field in the zone is provided by the electrons
(c) High output when both the inputs are high in the conduction band and the holes in the valence band
(d) None of these
Assertion/Reason
76. Which of the following logic gate is an universal gate (A) Assertion and Reason are true and the Reason is the correct
(a) OR (b) NOT explanation of the Assertion.
(c) AND (d) NOR (B) Assertion and Reason are true but the Reason is not a
77. The given truth table is of correct explanation of the Assertion.
(C) Assertion is true but the Reason is false.
A X (D) Assertion is false but the Reason is true.
82. Assertion : The resistance of an intrinsic semiconductor
0 1
decreases with the increase in temperature.
1 0 Reason : The concentration of electrons becomes more
than the concentration of holes in an intrinsic
(a) OR gate (b) AND gate semiconductor when heated.
(c) NOT gate (d) None of above (a) A (b) B
78. This symbol represents (c) C (d) D
83. Assertion : If the temperature of a semiconductor is
A increased then it’s resistance decreases.
Y Reason : The energy gap between conduction band &
B
valence band is very small
(a) NOT gate (b) OR gate (a) A (b) B (c) C
(c) AND gate (d) NOR gate (d) D (e) E
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 116
84. Assetion : The electrical conductivity of n-type 89. Assertion : In the following circuit the potential drop across
semiconductor is higher than that of p-type the resistance is zero.
semiconductor at a given temperature and voltage applied. – 2V
Reason : The mobility of electron is higher than that of
hole.
(a) A (b) B – 5V
(c) C (d) D
Reason :The given resistance has low value.
85. Assertion : The number of electrons in a P-type silicon
(a) A (b) B (c) C
semiconductor is less than the number of electrons in a
pure silicon semiconductor at room temperature. (d) D (e) E
Reason : It is due to law of mass action. 90. Assertion : Zener diode works on a principle of breakdown
voltage.
(a) A (b) B (c) C
(d) D (e) E Reason :Current increases suddenly after breakdown
voltage.
86. Assertion : The temperature coefficient of resistance is
positive for metals and negative for p-type semiconductor. (a) A (b) B (c) C
Reason : The effective charge carriers in metals are (d) D (e) E
negatively charged whereas in p-type semiconductor, they 91. Assertion : The color of light emitted by a LED depends
are positively charged. on its forward biasing.
(a) A (b) B Reason : The reverse biasing of p-n junction will increase
(c) C (d) D the width of depletion layer.
87. Assertion : The dominant mechanism for motion of charge (a) A (b) B
carriers in forward and reverse biased silicon P-N junction (c) C (d) D
are drift in both forward and reverse bias. 92. Assertion : NAND or NOR gates are called digital building
Reason : In reverse biasing, no current flow through the blocks.
junction. Reason : The repeated use of NAND (or NOR) gates can
(a) A (b) B (c) C produce all the basic or complicated gates.
(d) D (e) E (a) A (b) B
88. Assertion : When PN–junction is forward biased then (c) C (d) D
motion of charge carriers at junction is due to diffusion. In
93. Assertion : The following circuit represents ‘OR’ gate
reverse biasing. The cause of motion of charge is drifting.
Reason : In the following circuit emitter is reverse biased A
and collector is forward biased. Y
B X
+1V
C Reason : For the above circuit Y X A B A B
B
(a) A (b) B (c) C
0V
E (d) D (e) E
–2V 94. In semiconductor the concentrations of electrons and holes
are 8 1018/m3 and 5 1018/m3 respectively. If the mobilities
(a) A (b) B (c) C
of electrons and hole are 2.3 m2/volt-sec and 0.01 m2/volt-
(d) D (e) E sec respectively, then semiconductor is
(a) N-type and its resistivity is 0.34 ohm-metre
(b) P-type and its resistivity is 0.034 ohm-metre
(c) N-type and its resistivity is 0.034 ohm-metre
(d) P-type and its resistivity is 3.40 ohm-metre
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 117
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
Subjective Question
Objective Questions
3 5. A triode has plate characteristics in the form of parallel
1. The plate resistance of a triode is 3 × 10 and its mutual
–3
lines in the region of our interest. At a grid voltage of –1 V
conductance is 1.5 × 10 A/V. The amplification factor of the anode current I (in mA) is given in terms of plate
the triode is : (1981) voltage V by the algebraic relation :
–5
(a) 5 × 10 (b) 4.5 I = 0.125 V – 7.5
5
(c) 45 (d) 2 × 10 For grid voltage of –3 V, the current at anode voltage of
2. Two identical p-n junctions may be connected in series 300 V is 5 mA. Determine the plate resistance (rp)
with a battery in three ways, as shown in figure. The transconductance (gm) and the amplification factor () for
potential drops across the two p-n junctions are equal in the triode. (1987)
(1982) 6. The impurity atoms with which pure silicon should be
doped to make a p-type semiconductor are those of
(a) phosphorus (b) boron (1988)
(c) antimony (d) aluminium
Fill in the Blanks
7. For the given circuit shown in figure to act as full wave
rectifier, the a.c. input should be connected across .........
and ......... the d.c. output would appear across ......... and
........ (1991)
(a) circuit 1 and circuit 2 (b) circuit 2 and circuit 3
(c) circuit 3 and circuit 1 (d) circuit 1 only
3. For a given plate voltage, the plate current in a triode
valve is maximum when the potential of : (1985)
(a) the grid is positive and plate is negative
(b) the grid is zero and plate is positive 8. In an n-p-n transistor circuit, the collector current is 10 mA.
If 90% of the electrons emitted reach the collector (1992)
(c) the grid is negative and plate is positive
(a) the emitter current will be 9 mA
(d) the grid is positive and plate is positive
(b) the base current will be 1 mA
True/False (c) the emitter current will be 11 mA
4. For a diode the variation of its anode current Ia with the (d) the base current will be –1 mA
anode voltage Va at two different cathode temperature T1 9. In a ............. biased p-n junction, the net flow of holes is
and T2 is shown in the figure. The temperature T2 is greater from the n region to the p region. (1993)
than T1. (1986)
10. The probability of electrons to be found in the conduction
band of an intrinsic semiconductor at a finite temperature.
(1995)
(a) increases exponentially with increasing band gap
(b) decreases exponentially with increasing band gap
(c) decreases with increasing temperature
(d) is independent of the temperature and the band gap
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 118
11. A full-wave rectifier circuit along with the out-put is shown 14. In a p-n junction diode not connected to any circuit,
in figure. The contribution(s) from the diode 1 is (are) (1998)
(1996) (a) the potential is the same everywhere
(b) the p-type side is at a higher potential than the n-type
side
(c) there is an electric field at the junction directed from
the n-type side to the p-type side.
(d) there is an electric field at the junction directed from
the p-type side to the n-type side.
15. A transistor is used in common emitter mode as an amplifier
then (1998)
(a) the base emitter junction is forward biased
(b) the base emitter junction is reverse biased
(c) the input signal is connected in series with the voltage
aplied to bias the base emitter junction
(d) the input signal is connected in series with the voltage
(a) C (b) A,C applied to bias the base collector junction
(c) B, D (d) A, B, C, D
12. The electrical conductivity of a semiconductor increases
when em radiation of wavelength shorter than 2480 nm is
incident on it. The band gap (in eV) for the semiconductor
is (1997)
(a) 0.9 (b) 0.7
(c) 0.5 (d) 1.1
13. A full - wave rectifier the circuit shown in the figure contains
two diodes each with a forward resistance of 50 ohms and
with infinite backward resistance. If the battery voltage is
6V, the current through the 100 ohm resistance (in amperes)
is
(1997)
(a) zero (b) 0.02
(c) 0.03 (d) 0.036
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES 119
SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC
DEVICES
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
03
COMMUNICATION
Chapter 03 121
COMMUNICATION
1. INTRODUCTION (ii) Signal Signal is the information converted in elec-
Communication means transmission of information. Eve- trical form. Signals can be analog or digital. Sound and picture
ryone experiences the need to impart or recieve information signals inTV are analog.
continuously in the surrounding and for this , we speak, It is defined as a single–valued function of time which
listen,send message by a messenger, use coded signalling has a unique value at every instant of time.
methods through smoke or flags or beating of drum etc. and these (1) Analog Signal :– A continuously varying signal (Volt-
days we are using telephones, TV, radio, satellite communica- age or Current) is called an analog signal. A decimal number with
tion etc. The aim of this chapter is to introduce the concepts system base 10 is used to deal with analog signal.
of communication namely the mode of communication, the need (2) Digital Signal :–
of modulation, production and detection of amplitude modula- A signal that can have only discrete stepwise values is
tion. called a digital signal. A binary number system with base 2 is
used to deal with digital signals.
Elements of a Communication System :
Every communication system has three essential ele-
ments-
(i) transmitter (ii) medium/channel (iii) receiver
Information Message Transmitter Transmitted Channel
Received
Receiver
Message User of
source signal signal signal signal information
Noise
Transmitter converts the message signal into an electric
signal and transmits through channel. The receiver receives the
transmitted signal and reconstructs the original message signal
to the end user. There are two basic modes of communication:
(i) point-to-point and (ii) broadcast.
In point-to-point communication mode, communication
takes place over a link between a single transmitter and a re-
ceiver as in telephony. In the broadcase mode, there are a large (iii) Noise : There are unwanted signals that tend to
number of receivers corresponding to a single transmitter. Ra- disturb the transmission and processing of message signals. The
dio and television are most common examples of braoadcast source of noise can be inside or outside the system.
mode of communication. However the communication system can (iv) Transmitter : A transmitter processes the incoming
be classified as follows : message signal to make it suitable for trans-mission through a
Types of Communication Systems channel and subsequent reception.
(v) Receiver : A receiver extracts the desired message
On the basis of nature of On the basis of signal On the basis of On the basis of type
Information transmitted transmission Channel of modulation signals from the received signals at the channel output.
(1) Speech Transmission (1) Analog (1) Line communication (1) Continuous wave
(Radio) (2) Digital (a) Two wire Transmission modulation (vi) Attenuation : It is the loss of strength of a signals
(2) Picture Transmission line (a) Amplitude
(TV) (b) Coaxial cable (b) Frequency while propagating through a medium. It is like damping of
(3) Fascimile Transmission (c) Optical fibre (c) phase
(FAX) (2) Space communication (2) Pulse Modulation oscillations.
(4) Data Transmission (a) PAM PPM
(Internet) (vii) Amplification : It is the process of increasing the
(b) PTM
amplitude (and therefore the strength) of a signal using an
(c) PCM PWM
electronic circuit called the amplifier. Amplification is absolutely
Basic terminology Used in Electronic Communication necessary to compensate for the attenuation of the signal in
systems : communication systems.
(i) Transducer. Transducer is the device that converts (viii) Range : It is the largest distance between the source
one form of energy into another. Microphone, photo detectors and the destination upto which the signal gets received with
and piezoelectric sensors are types of transducer. They convert sufficient strength.
information into electrical signal.
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 122
(ix) Bandwidth : It is the frequency range over which an (ii) Bandwidth for digital signal
equipment operates or the portion of the spectrum occupied by Basically digital signals are rectanglar waves and these
the signal. can be splitted into a superposition of sinusoidal waves of
(x) Modulation : The original low frequency message/ frequencies n0, 20, 30, 40, n0, where n is an integer extend-
information signal connot be transmitted to long distances. So, ing to infinity. This implies that the infinite band width is re-
at the transmitter end, information contained in the low fre- quired to reproduce the rectangular waves. However, for prac-
quency message signal is superimposed on a high frequency tical purposes, higher harmonics are neglected for limiting the
wave, which acts as a carrier of the information. This process bandwidth.
is known as modulation.
(xi) Demodulation : The process of retrieval of original Band width of Transmission Medium
information from the carrier wave at the receiver end is termed Different types of transmission media offer different band
as demodulation. This process is the reverse of modulation. width in which some of are listed below
(xii) Repeater : A repeater acts as a receiver and a trans-
mitter. A repeater picks up the signal which is comming from the Frequency Bands
transmitter, amplifies and retransmits it with a change in carrier Service Frequency range Remarks
frequency. Repeaters are necessary to extend the range of a Wire Normally
750 MHz
communication system as shown in figure A communication 1 (most common : operated below
(Bandwidth)
satellite is basically a repeater station in space. Coaxial Cable) 18 GHz
Free space Few hundred kHz to
2
(radio waves) GHz
(i) Standard AM
540kHz -1600 kHz
broadcast
Mount (ii) FM 88-108 MHz
ain
VHF (Very)
54-72 MHz high
76-88 MHz frequencies) TV
(iii) Television
174-216 MHz UHF (Ultra
Use of repeater station to increase the range of 420-890 MHz hight
communication frequency) TV
BANDWIDTH Mobile to base
(iv) Cellular
Bandwidth of signals : 896-901 MHz Station
mobile
840-935 MHz Base station to
Different signals used in a comminication system such radio
mobile
as voice, music, picture, computer data etc. all have different (v) Satellite 5.925-6.425 GHz Uplinking
ranges of frequency. The difference of maximum and minimum Communication 3.7 - 4.2 GHz Downlinking
frequency in the range of each signal is called bandwidth of that One single
signal. Optical 1THz-1000 THz optical fibre
Bandwidth can be of message signal as well as of trans- 3 communication (microwaves- offers
using fibres ultra violet) bandwidth >
mission medium. 100 GHz
(i) Bandwidth for analog signals
Bandwdith for some analog sinals are listed below :
Propagation of Electromagnetic Waves :
Signal Frequency range Bandwidth
required In case of radio waves communication, an antenna at the
Speech 300 – 3100 Hz 3100 – 300 transmitter radiates the electromagnetic waves
= 2800 Hz (em waves). The em waves travel through the space and reach
Music High frequencies produced 20 kHz the receiving antenna at the other end. As the em wave travels
by musical instrument
Audible range away from the transmitter, their strength keeps on decreasing.
= 20 Hz – 20 kHz Many factors influence the propagation of em waves including
4.2 MHz
Picture - 6 MHz
TV
the path they follow. The composition of the earth's atmosphere
Contains both
voice and picture also plays a vital role in the propagation of em waves, as
summarised below.
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 123
Table 4 Layers of atmosphere and their interaction with the propagating em waves
Atmospheric Height over earth's Exists during Frequencies most
stratum (layer) surface (approx) likely affected
1. Troposphere 10 km Day and night VHF (upto several GHz)
2. Ionosphere
(i) D (part of 65-75 km Day only Reflects LF, absorbs MF &
stratosphere) HF to some degree
(ii) E (part of 100 km Day only Helps surface waves,
stratosphere) reflects HF
(iii) F1 (Part of 170-190 km Daytime, merges Partially absorbs HF waves
Mesosphere) with F2 at night yet allowing them to reach F2
(iv) F2 300 km at night, Day and night Efficiently reflects HF waves
(Thermosphere) 250-400 km particularly at night
during daytime
Ground Wave Propagation : Space wave propagation :
(a) The radio waves which travel through atmosphere fol- (a) The space waves are the radiowaves of very high fre-
lowing the surface of earth are known as ground waves quency (i.e. between 30 MHz. to 300 MHz or more).
or surface waves and their propagation is called ground (b) the space waves can travel through atmosphere from
wave propagation or surface wave propagation. transmitter antenna to receiver antenna either derectly or
(b) The ground wave transmission becomes weaker with after reflection from ground in the earth's troposphere
increase in frequency because more absorption of ground region. That is why the space wave propagation is also
waves takes place at higher frequency during propaga- called as tropospherical propagation or line of sight
tion through atmosphere. propagation.
(c) The ground wave propagation is suitabel for low and (c) The range of communication of space wave propagation
medium frequency i.e. upto 2 or 3 MHz only. can be increased by increasing the heights of transmit-
(d) The ground wave propagation is generally used for local ting and receiving antenna.
band broadcasting and is commonly called medium wave. (d) If the transmitting antenna is at a height hT, then you can
(e) The maximum range of ground or surface wave propa- show that the distance to the horizontal dT is given as
gation depends on two factors :
(i) The frequency of the radio waves and d T 2Rh T , where R is the radius of the earth (ap-
(ii) Power of the transmitter
proximately 6400 km). dT is also called the radio maximum
Sky Wave Propagation : line-of sight distance d m between the two antennas
having heights hT and hR above the earth is given by :
(a) The sky waves are the radio waves of frequency between
2 MHz to 30 MHz. dM 2Rh T 2Rh R
(b) The ionoopheric layer acts as a reflector for a certain where hR is the height of receiving antenna.
range of frequencies (3 to 30 MHz). Electromagnetic Modulation
waves of frequencies higher than 30 MHz penetrate the * It is a process by which any electrical signal called input
ionosphere and escape. baseband or modulating signal, is mounted onto another signal
(c) The highest frequency of radiowaves which when sent of high frequency which is known as carrier signal.
straight (i.e. normally) towards the layer of ionosphere * It is defined as the process by which some characteristic
gets refelcted from ionosphere and returns to the earth (called parameter) of carrier signal is varied in accordance with
1/2
is called critical frequency. If is given by fc = 9 (Nmax) , the instantaneous value of the baseband signal.
where N is the number density of electron/m . 3 * The signal which results from this process is known
as modulated signal.
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 124
Need for Modulation : viz Ac, c and , of the carrier wave can as per the
(i) To aviod interference : parameter of the message or information signal. This
If many modulating signals travel directly through the results in three types of modulation : (i) Amplitude
same transmission channel, they will interfere with each modulation (AM) (ii) Frequency modulation (FM) and (iii)
other and result in distortion. Phase modulation (PM), as shown in figure.
(ii) To design antennas of practicable size : 1
0 (a)
The minimum height of antenna (not of antenna tower) -1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
should be l/4 where l is wavelength of modulating sig- 1
m(t) 0 (b)
nal. This minimum size becomes impracticable because the -1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
frequency of the modulating signal can be upto 5 kHz 2
cm(t)for AM 0 (c)
which corresponds to a wavelength of 3 × 108/5 × 103 = -2
60 km. This will require an antenna of the minimum height 10 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
cm(t)for FM 0 (d)
of /4 = 15 km. This size of an antenna is not practical. -1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
(iii) Effective Power Radiated by an Antenna : 1
A theoretical study of radiation from a linear antenna cm(t)for PM 0 (e)
-1
(length l) shows that the power radiated is proportional 0 0.5 2 2.5 3
2
Time
to (frequency)2 i.e. / . For a good transmission, we Modulation of a carrier wave :
need high powers and hence this also points out to the (a) a sinusoidal carrier wave
need of using high frequency transmission. (b) a modulating signal :
The above discussion suggests that there is a need for (c) amplitude modulatin :
translating the original low frequency baseband message (d) Frequency modulation : and
signal into high frequency wave before transmission. In (e) Phase modulation
doing so, we take the help of a high frequency signal, Carrier Wave Pulses :
which we already know now, is known as the carrier wave, Similarly, the significant characteristics of a pulse are :
and a process known as modulation which attaches Pulse Amplitude, Pulse duration or pulse Width, and pulse
information to it. The carrier wave may be continuous Position (denoting the time of rise or fall of the pulse amplitude)
(sinusoidal) or in the form of pulses, as shown in figure. Hence, different types of pulse modulation are (a) pulse ampli-
Time period T 2 tude modulation (PAM), (b) Pulse duration modulation (PDM)
=
T or pulse width modulation (PWM), and (c) Pulse position
Amplitude
Time modulation (PPM).
Exp. A separate high freq. wave (i.e. carrier wave) is
(a)
needed in modulation why ?
Pulse
duration Ans. This is because we cannot change any of the character-
istics (amplitude, frequency or phase) of the audio sig-
Pulse nal as this would change the message to be communi-
Pulse
Pulse fall cated. So keeping the audio signal same, the amplitude
amplitude
rise of freq. or phase of the high freq. carrier wave is modi-
fied in accordance with the modulating (i.e. audio signal)
(b) signal.
Carrier wave : Sinusoidal
Amplitude Modulation :
A sinusoidal carrier wave can be represented as c(t) =
In amplitude modulation the amplitude of the carrier is
ACsin (ct + )
varied in accordance with the information signals. Let
where c(t) is the signal strength (voltage or current), AC
c(t) = Ac sinc t represent carrier wave and m(t) = Am
is the amplitude, c (= 2fc) is the angular frequency and
sin m t represent the message or the modulating signal
is the initial phase of the carrier wave. Thus, modula-
where m = 2fm is the angular frequency of the mes-
tion can be affected by varying, any of three parameters,
sage signal. The modulated signal cm(t) can be written
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 125
as cm (t) = (Ac + Am sin mt) sin ct
BANDPASS
A m(t) x(t) SQUARE y(t) FILTER AM Wave
+
A c 1 m sin m t sin c t ...(1) Am sin mt LAW DEVICE CENTRED
Ac (Modulating Singna) AT c
c (t) Bx(t) + Cx(t)2
Ac sinct
Note that the modulated signal now contains the mes- (carrier)
sage signal & it can be written as :
cm(t) = Ac sinct + µAc sinmt sinct ......(2) Here the modulating signal Am sin mt is added to the
Here µ = Am/Ac is the modulation index carrier signal Ac sin c t to produce the signal x (t). This
In paractice, µ is kept < 1 to avoid distortion. signal x (t) = Am sin m t + Ac sinct is passed through
Using the trignomatric relation sinA sinB a square law device which is a non-linear device which
= (cos (A – B) – cos (A + B), we can write cm (t) of eq. produces an output
(15.4)as cm(t) y(t) = B x (t) + Cx2 (t) ...(4)
where B and C are constants.
µA c µA c
= Ac sinct + cos(c –m) t – cos(c + m) t...(3) Thus, y(t) = BAm sinm t + BAc sin ct + C [Am2 sin2
2 2
m t + Ac2 sin2 ct + 2Am Ac sinmt sinct] ...(5)
Here c – m and c + m are respectively called the 2
CA CA 2m
called the lower side and upper side frequencies. The = BA m sinm t + BA c sin ct A 2c
m
2 2
modulated signal now consists of the carrier wave of
CA 2c
frequency c plus two sinusoidal waves each with a cos 2m t cos 2c t + CAm Ac cos (c – m) t – CAmAc
2
frequency slightly different from, know as side bands. cos (c + m) t ....(6)
The frequency spectrum of the amplitude modulated where the trigonometric relations sin2A = (1 – cos2A)/
signal is shown in figure :
2 and the relation for sinA sinB mentioned earlier are used.
Ac
In equation (6), there is a dc term C/2 (A2m A2c ) and
µAc
Amplitude
2 sinusoids of frequencies m, 2m, c – m and c +
m. The output of the band pass filter therefore is of the
same form as equation (3) and is therefore an AM wave.
It is to be mentioned that the modulated signal connot
be transmitted as such. The modulator is to be followed
(e-m) e (e+m) in radians by a power amplifier which provides the necesary power
As long as the broadcast frequencies (carrier waves) are and then the modulated signal is fed to an antenna of
sufficiently spaced out so that sidebands do not over- appropriate size for radiation as shown in figure.
lap, different stations can operate without interfering with
TRANSMITTING
each other. m(t) AMPLITUDE POWER
ANTENNA
MODULATOR AMPLIIFIER
Exp.2 A message signal of frequency 10 kHz and peak voltage Message signal
of 10 volts is used to modulate a carrier of frequency 1 Carrier
Mhz and peak voltage of 20 volts. Determine (a) modu-
Detection of Amplitude Modulated Wave :
lation index, (b) the side bands produced.
Sol. (a) Modulation index = 10/20 = 0.5 The transmitted message gets attenuated in propagating
(b) The side bands are at (1000 + 10 kHz) = 1010 kHz and through the channel. The receiving antenna is therefore
to be followed by an amplifier and a detector. In addi-
(1000–10 kHz) = 990 kHz. tion, to facilitate further processing, the carrier frequency
Producation of Amplitude modulated Wave : is usually changed to a lower frequency by what is called
Ampitude modulation can be produced by a veriety of an intermediate frequency (IF) stage preceding the de-
methods. A conceptually simple method is shown in the tection. The detected signal may not be strong enough
to be made use of and hence in required to be amplified.
block diagram of figure. A block diagram of a typical receiver is shown in figure.
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 126
RECEIVING
ANTENNA
Facsimile (FAX) :
FAX is abbreviation for facsimile which means exact
OUTPUT
reproduction. A fax machine sends a printed document
AMPLIFIER IF STAGE DETECTOR AMPLIFIER
or a photograph besides speech, music or coded data
Detection is the process of recovering the modulating from one place to another by data communication sys-
signal from the modulated carrier wave. We just saw that tem which, as we already know, consists of three ele-
the modulated carrier wave contains the frequencies c ments.
and c ± m . In order to obtain the original message (i) Transmitter
(ii) Transmission channel
signal m(t) of angular frequency m, a simple method is
(iii) Receiver
shown in the from of a block diagram in figure.
It scans the contents of a document (as an image, not
m(t)
AM Wave ENVELOPE
(a)
RECTIFIER
(b)
DETECTOR (c)
OUTPUT test) to create electronic signals. These signals arethen
sent to the destination (another FAX machine) in an
orderly manner using telephone lines. At the destination,
time time
time the signals are reconverted into a replica of the original
AM input wave Rectified wave Output (without RF component)
document.
The modulated signal of the form given in (a) of above
Mobile telephony
figure is passed through a rectifier to produce the out-
The concept of mobile telephony was developed first in
put shown in (b). This envelope of signal (b) is the
1970's and it was fully implemented in the following
message signal In order to retrieve m(t), the signal is
decade. The central concept of this system is to divide
passed through an envelope detector (which may con-
the serice area into a suitable number of cells centred on
sist of a simple RC circuit).
an office called MTSO (Mobile Telephone Switching
The internet
Office). Each cell contains a low-power transmitter called
Students must be quite familiar with internet these days.
a base station and castomers. When a mobile receiver
The information provided by different these days. The
crosses the coverage area of one base station, it is
information provided by different bodies all over the
necessary for the mobile user to be transferred to another
world is centralised at one place. Which is then used by
base station. This procedure is called handover or
anyone having a computer and internet facility. It's main
handoff. This process is carried out very rapidly, to the
uses are :
extent that the consumer does not even notice it. Mobile
(a) Emial (b) File transfer
telephones operate typically in the UHF range of frequen-
(c) WWW - World Wide Web (d) E-commerce
cies (about 800-950 MHz).
(e) Chatting
SCAN CODE
COMMUNICATION
COMMUNICATION 127
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
1. Major parts of a communication system are : 9. In frequency modulation :
(a) transmitter and receiver (a) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as
(b) receiver and communication channel frequency of carrier wave
(c) transmitter and communication channel (b) the frequency of modulated wave varies as
(d) transmitter, receiver and communication amplitude of modulating wave
channel (c) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as
2. Communication channel consists of : amplitude of carrier wave
(a) transmission line (b) optical fiber (d) the frequency of modulated wave varies as
(c) free space (d) all of these frequency of modulating wave
3. Audio frequency range is from : 10. The principal used for the transmission of
light signals through the optical fiber is :
(a) 20 Hz to 20 kHz
(a) reflection
(b) 200 Hz to 2000 Hz
(b) refraction
(c) 2k Hz to 20 kHz
(c) interference
(d) 20 kHz to 200 kHz
(d)total internal reflection
4. Basic components of a transmitter are :
11. Modulation is the process of superposing :
(a) message signal generator and antenna
(a) low frequency audio signal on high
(b) modulator and antenna
frequency waves
(c) signal generator and modulator
(b) low frequency radio signal on low
(d) message signal generator, modulator and frequency audio waves
antenna
(c) high frequency radio signal on low
5. Range of frequencies allotted for commercial frequency audio signal.
FM radio broadcast is :
(d) high frequency audio signal on low
(a) 88 to 108 MHz (b) 88 to 108 kHz frequency radio waves
(c) 8 to 88 MHz (d) 8 to 88 kHz 12. What happens inside optical fibers ?
6. The most commonly used two wire lines are : (a) Diffraction
(a) parallel wire lines (b) Polarization
(b) twisted pair wire lines (c) Interference
(c) co-axial wire lines (d)Total internal reflection
(d) all of these 13. In frequency modulated wave
7. A digital signal possesses : (a) frequency varies with time
(a) continuously varying values (b) amplitude varies with time
(b) only two discrete values (c) both frequency and amplitude varies with
(c) only four discrete values time.
(d) none of the above (d) both frequency and amplitude are time.
8. Modern communication systems are : 14. An oscillator is producing FM waves of
(a) analog circuits frequency 2 kHz with a variation of 10 kHz.
(b) digital circuits What is the modulating index ?
(c) combination of analog and digital (a) 0.02 (b) 5.0
(d) none of the above (c) 0.67 (d) 1.5
COMMUNICATION 128
15. For effective modulation and transmission of 18. Modulation is the phenomenon of :
message signal, which one of the following (a) superimposing the audio frequency signal
condition is true ? over a carrier wave
(a) Frequency of message signal < frequency (b) separating the audio frequency signal from
of carrier wave the carrier wave
(b) Frequency of message signal > frequency (c) separating carrier wave from the
of carrier wave modulated wave
(c) Amplitude of message signal > amplitude (d) any of (a), (b), or (c)
of carrier wave 19. The modulating frequency is 5 kHz and the
(d) Amplitude of message signal < amplitude carrier frequency is 100 kHz. What is the
of carrier wave band width of AM transmission ?
16. The time variations of signals are given as in (a) 105 kHz (b) 95 kHz
A, B and C. Point out the true statement from (c) 2.5 kHz (d) 10 kHz
the following.
20. Why is it difficult to transmit audio signals
directly ?
(a) A very high antenna is needed for their
propagation
(b) Audio signals have a very high frequency
(c)Audio signals can’t propagate
independently
(d) Audio signals can’t propagate through air
21. Degree of modulation :
(a) can take any value
(b) should be less than 100%
(c) should exceed 100%
(d) none of the above
22. If the maximum and minimum voltage of an
AM wave are Vmax and Vmin respectively
then modulation factor :
Vmax
(a) m
Vmax Vmin
Vmin
(a) A, B and C are analogue signals (b) m
Vmax Vmin
(b) A and B are analogue, but C is digital
signal. Vmax Vmin
(c) m
(c) A and C are digital but B is analogue Vmax Vmin
signal.
Vmax Vmin
(d) A and C are analogue but B is digital (d) m
Vmax Vmin
signal.
23. The AM wave is equivalent to the summation
17. Which of the following device is full duplex ?
of :
(a) Mobile phone (b) Walky-talky (a) two sinusoidal waves
(c) Loud speaker (d) Radio (b) three sinusoidal wave
(c) four sinusoidal waves
(d) none
COMMUNICATION 129
24. The process of recovering the audio signal 29. The types of modulation which are possible,
from the modulated wave is known as : are :
(a) amplification (b) rectification (a) one only (b) two only
(c) modulation (d) demodulation (c) three only (d) none of these
25. In frequency modulation : 30. The AM wave contains three frequencies viz :
(a) phase angle of the carrier wave is varied f c f c fs f c fs
(a) , ,
2 2 2
(b) amplitude of the carrier wave is kept
(b) 2 fc, 2( fc+ fs), 2(fc – fs)
constant
(c) fc, ( fc + fs), (fc – fs)
(c) amplitude of carrier wave may also be
(d) fc, fc, fc
varied
31. In AM waves, the amplitude of each side band
(d) phase angle of carrier wave is kept frequency is :
constant. (a) Ec (b) mEc
26. Demodulation is the : mEc
(c) (d) 2mEc
(a) process of decoupling of modulating wave 2
from the carrier wave 32. In frequency modulation the amount of
frequency deviation depends on the :
(b) process of coupling modulated wave with
(a) frequency of audio signal
modulating
(b) amplitude of audio signal
(c) process of separating carrier wave from (c) both the frequency and amplitude of audio
the modulated wave signal
(d) none of the above
(d) process of combining the message signal
33. For a carrier frequency of 100 kHz and a
with the carrier wave
modulating frequency of 5 kHz, what is the
27. For transmitting audio signal properly : band width of AM transmission ?
(a) it is first superimposed on high frequency (a) 5 kHz (b) 10 kHz
(c) 20 kHz (d) 200 kHz
carrier wave
34. Electromagnetic waves with frequencies
(b) it is first superimposed on low frequency greater than the critical frequency of
carrier wave ionosphere cannot be used for communication
using sky wave propagation, because :
(c) it is sent directly without superimposing
(a) the refractive index of the ionosphere
on any wave becomes very high for f>fc
(d) none of the above (b) the refractive index of the ionosphere
28. If a carrier wave of 1000 kHz is used to carry becomes very low for f>fc
the signal, the length of transmitting antenna (c) the refractive index of the ionosphere
becomes very high for f<fc
will be equal to :
(d) None of the above
(a) 3 m (b) 30 m
(c) 300 m (d) 3000 m
COMMUNICATION 130
35. To cover a population of 20 lakh, a 42. The electromagnetic waves of frequency 80
transmission tower should have a height : MHzto 200 MHz :
(radius of the earth = 6400 km, population per (a) can be reflected by troposphere
square km = 1000) (b) can be reflected by ionosphere
(a) 25 m (b) 50 m (c) can be reflected by mesosphere
(c) 75 m (d) 100 m (d) can not be reflected by any layer of earths
36. The area of region covered by the TV atmosphere
broadcast by a TV tower of 100 m height is : 43. In satellite communication, the
6 communication satellite :
(radius of the earth = 6.4 × 10 m)
8 2 (a) acts as a reflector for a beam of modulated
(a) 12.8 × 10 km
microwave from transmitter sent directly
3 2
(b) 1.28 × 10 km towards it
3 2 (b) acts as a reflector for signal reaching
(c) 0.64 × 10 km
there, without any change in frequency
3 2
(d) 12.8 × 10 km (c) receives the coming modulated
37. The sky wave propagation is suitable for microwave signal, amplifies it and returns
radio-wave of frequency : it to earth at a different frequency
(a) upto 2 MHz (d) none of these
(b) from 2 MHz to 20 MHz 44. The maximum distance upto which TV
(c) from 2 MHz to 30 MHz transmission from a TV tower of height h can
be received is proportional to :
(d) from 2 MHz to 80 MHz
1/2
38. An antenna is of height 500 m. What will be (a) h (b) h
its range (Radius of earth is 6400 km) ? 3/2 2
(c) h (d) h
(a) 800 km (b) 100 km
(c) 50 km (d) 80 km
39. Refractive index of ionosphere is :
(a) zero (b) more than one
(c) less than one (d) one
40. The optical fibers have in an inner core of
refractive index n1 and a cladding of
refractive index n2 ,such that :
(a) n1 = n2 (b) n1 < n2
(c) n1 < n2 (d) n1 >
41. The ground wave propagation is suitable for
radio waves of frequency :
(a) upto 2 MHz
(b) from 2 MHz to 20 MHz
(c) from 2 MHz to 30 Hz
(d) none of these
COMMUNICATION 131
EXERCISE - 2 :PREVIOUS YEAR COMPETITION QUESTIONS
1. A single of 5 kHz frequency is 1
(a) f c 200Hz;f w 50Hz;
amplitudemodulatedon a carrier wave of 2
frequency 2 MHz. The frequencies of the 2
resultant single is/are : (JEE 2015) (b) f c 150Hz;f w 50Hz;
3
(a) 2 MHz only
1
(b) 2005 kHz, and 1995 kHz (c) f c 150Hz;f w 30Hz;
3
(c) 2005 kHz, 200 kHz and 1995 kHz
1
(d) 2000 kHz and 1995 kHz (d) f c 200Hz;f w 30Hz;
2
2. Choose the correct statement : (JEE 2016) 5. In amplitude modulation, sinusoidal carrier
(a) In amplitude modulation the amplitude of frequency used is denoted by c and the signal
the high frequency carrier wave is made frequency is denoted by m . The bandwidth
to vary in proportion to the amplitude of
the audio signal.
m of the signal is such that
m c .
(b) In amplitude modulation the frequency of Which of the following frequencies is not
contained in the modulated wave ?
the high frequency carrier wave is made
(JEE 2017)
to vary in proportion to the amplitude of
the audio signal. m
(b) c
(a)
(c) In frequency modulation the amplitude of
(c) m c m
the high frequency carrier wave is made (d) c
to vary in proportion to the amplitude of 6. A signal of frequency 20 kHz and peak
the audio signal. voltage of 5 Volt is used to modulate a carrier
(d) In frequency modulation the amplitude of wave of frequency 1.2 MHz and peak voltage
25 Volts. Choose the correct statement.
the high frequency carrier wave is made
(JEE 2017)
to vary in proportion to the frequency of (a) Modulation index = 5, side frequency
the audio signal. bands are at 1400 kHz and 1000 kHz
3. An audio signal consists of two distinct (b) Modulation index = 5, side frequency
sounds :onea human speech signal in the bands are at 21.2 kHz and 18.8 kHz
frequency band of 200 Hz to 2700 Hz, while (c) Modulation index = 0.8, side frequency
bands are at 1180 kHz and 1220 kHz
the other is high frequency music signal in the
(d) Modulation index = 0.2, side frequency
frequency band of 10200 Hz to 15200 Hz. The bands are at 1220 kHz and 1180 kHz
ratio of the AM signal bandwidth required to 7. A signal is to be transmitted through a wave
send both the signals together to the AM ofwavelength , using a linear antenna. The
signal bandwidth required to send just the length 1 of the antenna and effective power
human speech is : radiated Peff will be given respectively as : (K
(JEE 2016) is constant of proportionality) (JEE 2017)
2
(a) 3 (b) 5 1
(a) , Peff K
(c) 6 (d) 7
4. A modulated signal C m (t) has the form 1
(b) , Peff K
Cm (t) 30sin 300t 10 cos 200t cos 400t 8
3
.The carrier frequency f c , the modulating 1
(c) , Peff K
frequency(message frequency) f w , and the 16
modulation index are respectively given by:
1
1 2
(d) , Peff K
(JEE 2016) 5
COMMUNICATION 132
8. A telephonic communication service is 13. The modulation frequency of an AM radio
working atcarrier frequency of 10 GHz. Only station is 250 kHz, which is 10% of the carrier
10 % of it is utilizedfor transmission. How wave. If another AM station approaches you
many telephonic channels canbe transmitted for license what broadcast frequency will you
simultaneously if each channel requiresa allot ? (JEE 2019)
bandwidth of 5kHz? (a) 2750 kHz
(NEET 2018) (b) 2900 kHz
(c) 225 kHz
2 104 (b) 2 10
5
(a) (d) 2000 kHz
14. An amplitude modulated signal is plotted
(c) 2 10 (d) 2 10
8 3
below :
9. The number of amplitude modulated broadcast
stations that can be accommodated in a 300
kHz band width for the highest modulating
frequency 15 kHz will be :(NEET 2018)
(a) 10
(b) 15
(c) 20
(d) 8 Which one of the following best describes the
10. The carrier frequency of transmitter is above signal ? (JEE 2019)
provided by atank circuit of a coil of
inductance 49 H and a capacitance of 2.5 nF.
5
(a) 9 sin 2.5 10 t sin 2 10 t V
4
It is modulated by an audio signal of 12 kHz.
The frequency range occupied by the side
4
(b) 1 9 sin 2 10 t sin 2.5 10 t V
5
bands is :
(NEET 2018) (c) 9 sin 2 10 t sin 2.5 10 t V
4 5
(a) 13482 kHz – 13494 kHz
(b) 442 kHz – 466 kHz (d) 9 sin 4 10 t sin 5 10 t V
4 5
(c) 63 kHz -75 kHz
(d) 18 kHz -30 kHz 15. To double the covering range of a TV
11. A carrier wave of peak voltage 14V is used for transmissiontower, its height should be
transmitting a message signal. The peak multiplied by : (JEE 2019)
voltage of modulating given to achieve a
1 (b) 2
modulation index of 80% will be :
(a) 2
(NEET 2018)
(a) 7V
(b) 28V (c) 4 (d) 2
(c) 11.2V 16. In a line of sight radio communication, a
(d) 22.4V distance of about 50 km is kept between the
12. In a communication system operation at
wavelength 800 nm, only one percent of transmitting and receiving antennas. If the
source frequency is available as signal height of the receiving antenna is 70m, then
bandwidth. The number of channels
accommodated for transmitting TV signals of the minimum height of the transmitting
band width 6 MHz are (Take velocity of light antenna should be: (Radius of the Earth =
c 3 108 m / s, h 6.6 10 34 J s)
6.4 106 m ) (JEE 2019)
(JEE 2019)
(a) 3.7510
6 (a) 20 m (b) 51 m
(b) 3.86 10
6
(c) 32 m (d) 40 m
(c) 6.2510
5
(d) 4.87 10
5
COMMUNICATION 133
17. A signal A cos t is transmitting using 22. The wavelength of the carrier waves in
0 sin 0 t ,modulated (AM) signal is: modern optical fiber communication network
is close to: (JEE 2019)
(JEE 2019)
A A
(a) 2400 nm (b) 1500 nm
0 sin 0 t sin 0 t sin 0 t (c) 600 nm (d) 900 nm
2 2
(a) 23. Given below in the left column are different
modes of communication using the kinds of
0 sin 0 1 0.01Asin t t waves given in the right column.
(b) A. Optical P. Ultrasound
0 sin 0 t Acos t communication
(c)
0 A cos t sin 0 t
(d) B. Radar Q. Infrared Light
18. The physical sizes of the transmitter and
receiverantenna in a communication system
C. Sonar R. Microwaves
are : (JEE 2019)
(a) Independent of both carrier and
modulation frequency D. Mobile Phones S. Radio Waves
(b) Inversely proportional to carrier
frequency From the options given below, find the most
(c) Inversely proportional to modulation appropriate match between entries in the left
frequency and right column. (JEE 2019)
(d) Proportional to carrier frequency (a)A-S, B-Q, C-R, D-P
19. In an amplitude modulator circuit the carrier
(b)A-Q, B-S, C-P, D-R
wave is given by, C(t) 4 sin 20000 t while
(c) A-R, B-P, C-S,D-Q
modulating signal is given by
(d) A-Q, B-S, C-R, D-P
m(t) 2 sin 2000 t . The value of
24. A message signal of frequency 100 MHz peak
modulation index and lower side band voltage 100 V is used to execute amplitude
frequency are: (JEE 2019) modulation on a carrier wave of frequency
(a) 0.5 and 10 kHz 300 GHz and peak voltage 400 V. The
(b) 0.4 and 10 kHz modulation index and the difference between
(c) 0.3 and 9 kHz the two sideband frequencies respectively are:
(d) 0.5 and 9 kHz (JEE 2019)
20. An amplitude modulated signal is given by 4 & 2 10 Hz
8
(a)
(b) 4 &1 10 Hz
8
V(t) 10 1 0.3cos 2.2 10 4 t sin 5.5 10 5 t
(c) 0.25 &1 10 Hz
8
Here t is in seconds. The sideband frequencies 0.25& 2 108 Hz
(in kHz). Given 22 / 7 (JEE 2019) (d)
25. An amplitude modulated wave is represented
(a) 1785 and 1715 by the expression.
m 5 1 0.6cos6280t sin 211104 t
(b)1715 and 1785
(c)89.25 and 85.75
(d) 892.5 and 857.5 Volts. The minimum and maximum
amplitudes of the amplitude modulated wave
21. A 100 V carrier wave is made to very between are, respectively (JEE 2020)
160 V and 40 V by a modulating signal. What
is the modulation index? (JEE 2019) 3
V, 5V
(a) 0.3 (b) 0.5 2 5V,8V
(a) (b)
(c) 0.6 (d) 0.4
(c) 3V,5V (d) 2V,8V
Note:
COMMUNICATION
Please share your valuable feedback by
scanning the QR code.
135
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 MODERN PHYSICS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b)
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (b) 4. (d)
5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (b,c) 8. (c) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (d)
9. (d) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (b) 10. (a) 11. (c) 12. (c)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (b) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (c)
17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (d) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (d) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (d) 23.(b) 24. (c) 21. (a) 22. (b) 23.(c) 24. (c)
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (d) 25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (a) 28. (b)
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (a) 29. (b) 30. (a) 31. (a) 32. (d)
33. (b) 34. (d) 35.(a) 36. (a) 33. (a) 34. (d) 35.(c) 36. (489.00)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (c) 37. (c) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (b) 41. (a) 42. (a) 43. (d) 44. (b)
45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (a) 48. (d) 45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (d)
49. (c) 50. (b) 51. (b) 52. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (c) 52. (d)
53. (c) 54. (a) 55. (d) 56. (b) 53. (b) 54. (a) 55. (d) 56. (c)
57. (b) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (c) 57. (c) 58. (d) 59. (d) 60. (c)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (c) 61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (d) 64. (c)
65. (b) 66. (b) 67. (d) 68. (d) 65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (009.00) 68. (c)
69. (c) 70. (a) 71. (b) 72. (c) 69. (c) 70. (b) 71. (a) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (c) 75. (b) 76. (c) 73. (c) 74. (a) 75. (c) 76. (c)
77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (a) 80. (c) 77. (10553) 78. (d) 79. (d) 80. (d)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 81. (050.00)
82. (a) (A) – (ii), (B) – (i), (C) – (iv), (D) – (iii)
(b) (A) – (iii), (B) – (ii), (C) – (i), (D) – (iv)
(c) (A) – (iv), (B) – (ii), (C) – (i), (D) – (iii)
(d) (A) – (i), (B) – (iii), (C) – (iv), (D) – (ii)
ANSWER KEY
136
83. (d) 84. (002.00) 85. (a) 86. (d)
87. (d) 88. (d) 89. (c) 90. (11.00)
91. (b) 92. (d) 93. (d) 94. (b)
95. (a) 96. (486.00) 97. (c) 98. (a)
99. (b) 100. (c) 101. (b)
EXERCISE - 3 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS 81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (b)
85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (c) 88. (b)
89. (c) 90. (c) 91. (b) 92. (c,d)
93. (a,c,d) 94. (a,d) 95. (a,d) 96. (a,b,c)
97. (a,c,d) 98. (a,b,c) 99. (c,d) 100. (b,d)
101. (0001) 102. (114.2Å) 103. (173)
104. (29909 yrs.) 105. (0005)
106. (59 KeV) 107. (122 nm)
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. 108. (b) 109. (a) 110. (b) 111. (c)
1. (c) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (a) 112. (c) 113. (c) 114. (b) 115. (a)
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 116. (c) 117. (b) 118. (d) 119. (d)
9. (c) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (b) 120. (b) 121. (A - P, Q; B - T, C - T)
13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (b) 16. (c)
122. (A - S; B - Q; C - P; D - R)
17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (c)
123. (A - Q, R; B - P, R; C - R; D - S)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (d)
25. (c) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (c) 124. (A - Q; B - S ; C - P; D - R)
29. (b) 30. (d) 31. (c) 32. (a) 125. (A - R; B - R; C - P)
33. (c) 34. (b) 35.(b) 36. (d) 126. (A - S; B - R; C - Q; D - P)
37. (c) 38. (d) 39. (a) 40. (d)
127. (A - R; B - P; C - Q)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b)
128. (d)
45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (c) 48. (b)
49. (a) 50. (c) 51. (c) 52. (a) 129. (d)
53. (a) 54. (c) 55. (c) 56. (d)
57. (c) 58. (c) 59. (c) 60. (c)
61. (a) 62. (b) 63. (a) 64. (a)
65. (a) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (d)
69. (b) 70. (c) 71. (c) 72. (b)
73. (a) 74. (a) 75. (d) 76. (b)
77. (a) 78. (d) 79. (c) 80. (c)
ANSWER KEY 137
83. (A–R,T; B–P,S; C–P,Q,R,T; D–P,Q,R,T)
EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
84. (c) 85. (c) 86. (a) 87. (a)
88. (b) 89. (d) 90. (d) 91. (a)
92. (b) 93. (d) 94. (b) 95. (c)
96. (d) 97. (c) 98. (c) 99. (a)
100. (a)
DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a)
5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (d)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (c)
13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (c) 16. (b)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (c) 23.(c) 24. (b)
25. (a,c) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (a)
29. (b) 30. (a) 31. (a,b) 32. (b,d)
33. (a) 34. (c) 35.(a,c) 36. (b)
37. (a) 38. (d) 39. (a,c,d) 40. (a,c)
41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (b) 44. (b)
45. (a,b,d) 46. (a) 47. (a,c) 48. (a)
49. (a,b) 50. (b,c) 51. (a,c)
52. (n = 2, Z = 4, –217.6 eV, 10.58 eV)
53. (6.25 × 10 , zero, 5.0 eV)
11
54. (3.845 × 10 kg)
4
55. (a) Z = 3; (b) 4052.3 nm
56. (a) 5 × 10 ; (b) 2 × 10 N/C; (c) 23 eV
7 3
57. (Z = 42)
58. (7) 59. (0.259) 60. (0.55 eV.)
61. (a) 56; (b) 1.55 × 10 Hz
18
62. (n = 24) 63. (0003) 64. (0008) 65. (0001)
66. (0007) 67. (0007) 68. (0004) 69. (0003)
70. (0002) 71. (0002) 72. (0002) 73. (0009)
74. (0006) 75. (0005) 76. (0005) 77. (0024)
78. (3.00) 79. (1.50) 80. (a)
81. (A - p, q; B - p, r; C - p, s; D - p, q, r)
82. (–P,R; B–Q,S; C–P; D–Q)
138
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 SEMICONDUCTORS AND ELECTRONIC DEVICES
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (b)
5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (a,c) 6. (b) 7. (d) 8. (c)
9. (a) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (c) 9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (c) 12. (a)
13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (c) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (a)
17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (c) 20. (b) 17. (c) 18. (d) 19. (10.00) 20. (a)
21. (c) 22. (d) 23.(b) 24. (c) 21. (b) 22. (b) 23.(b) 24. (d)
25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (d) 25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (d)
29. (c) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (b) 29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (a) 32. (0.00)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35.(c) 36. (a) 33. (b) 34. (c) 35.(a) 36. (c)
37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (a) 40. (b) 37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (c) 40. (a)
41. (a) 42. (c) 43. (a) 44. (d) 41. (d) 42. (b) 43. (None of these)
45. (a) 46. (b) 47. (b) 48. (c) 44. (150.00) 45. (c) 46. (c) 47. (d)
49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (a) 52. (b) 48. (b) 49. (30) 50. (12.00) 51. (a)
53. (c) 54. (d) 55. (b) 56. (d) 52. (b) 53. (40.00)
57. (a) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (d)
61. (a) 62. (c) 63. (b) 64. (d)
65. (a) 66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (b)
69. (a) 70. (d) 71. (b) 72. (c)
73. (d) 74. (d) 75. (a) 76. (b)
77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (b) 80. (c)
81. (b) 82. (d) 83. (a)
ANSWER KEY 139
EXERCISE - 3 : ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 4: PREVIOUS YEAR JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (True)
5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (8 k, 12.5 × 10 A/V, 100)
–3
6. (b,d)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (d) 12. (d) 7. (b and d, a and c) 8. (b,c)
13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a) 9. (Reverse) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (c)
17. (a) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (c) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (a,c)
21. (c) 22. (b) 23.(a) 24. (c)
25. (a) 26. (c) 27. (b) 28. (a)
29. (c) 30. (a) 31. (c) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (b) 35.(a) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (a) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (c)
45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (d)
49. (b) 50. (b) 51. (c) 52. (d)
53. (d) 54. (a) 55. (d) 56. (b)
57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (c)
65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (c) 68. (d)
69. (c) 70. (c) 71. (c) 72. (a)
73. (d) 74. (b) 75. (a) 76. (d)
77. (c) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (a,c)
81. (b,c) 82. (a) 83. (a) 84. (a)
85. (a) 86. (a) 87. (d) 88. (b)
89. (b) 90. (a) 91. (d) 92. (a)
93. (a) 94. (a)
140
Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 COMMUNICATION
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEAR JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (d) 1.(c) 2. (a) 3.(b) 4.(b)
5.(a) 6.(d) 7.(b) 8.(b) 5.(a) 6.(d) 7.(a) 8.(d)
9.(b) 10.(d) 11.(a) 12.(d) 9.(b) 10.(a) 11.(b) 12.(c)
13.(a) 14.(b) 15.(a) 16.(d) 3.(c) 14.(d) 15.(c) 16.(c)
17.(a) 18.(a) 19.(d) 20.(a) 17.(c) 18.(a) 19.(b) 20.(d)
21.(b) 22.(d) 23.(a) 24.(d) 21.(c) 22.(c) 23.(b) 24.(b)
25.(a,b) 26.(a,c) 27.(a) 28.(c)
25.(d)
29.(c) 30.(c) 31.(c) 32.(a)
33.(b) 34.(a) 35.(b) 36.(b)
37.(c) 38.(d) 39.(c) 40.(b)
41.(a) 42.(d) 43.(c) 44.(a)
Note
You might also like
- GC Agarwal Physics Book Free Download PDFNo ratings yetGC Agarwal Physics Book Free Download PDF3 pages
- Lorentz - Pvcombiner 1000 125 4 Manual - en PDFNo ratings yetLorentz - Pvcombiner 1000 125 4 Manual - en PDF10 pages
- Presentation On Busbar Arrangement, 87B & 50BF Protection0% (1)Presentation On Busbar Arrangement, 87B & 50BF Protection55 pages
- JEE - MODULE 4 - PHY - Heat & Thermodynamics100% (2)JEE - MODULE 4 - PHY - Heat & Thermodynamics91 pages
- Ve-F3nqvnVqlaTlDp Nwl232gSwmKUZB 3 - s4km2V9Qy1vH4ErLaENo ratings yetVe-F3nqvnVqlaTlDp Nwl232gSwmKUZB 3 - s4km2V9Qy1vH4ErLaE160 pages
- JEE MODULE 3 PHY Waves and Mechanical Properties of Solids and Fluids100% (2)JEE MODULE 3 PHY Waves and Mechanical Properties of Solids and Fluids168 pages
- JEE - MODULE 2 - PHY - Magnetism, EMI - AC100% (1)JEE - MODULE 2 - PHY - Magnetism, EMI - AC170 pages
- JEE - MODULE 2 - PHY - +1 NM - Mechanics 2100% (2)JEE - MODULE 2 - PHY - +1 NM - Mechanics 2267 pages
- JEE - MODULE 1 - PHY - +1 NM - Mechanics 150% (2)JEE - MODULE 1 - PHY - +1 NM - Mechanics 1195 pages
- Jee - Module 1 - Maths - Algebra & Vector Algebra100% (2)Jee - Module 1 - Maths - Algebra & Vector Algebra207 pages
- Click Here: LAST UPDATE DATE ANF TIME: Wednesday, May 6, 2020 2:07:57 PMNo ratings yetClick Here: LAST UPDATE DATE ANF TIME: Wednesday, May 6, 2020 2:07:57 PM6 pages
- Sanjeev Kumar-Objective Physics For The JEE Main 2015-Pearson India (2014) PDF100% (1)Sanjeev Kumar-Objective Physics For The JEE Main 2015-Pearson India (2014) PDF737 pages
- Class 11Th Physics Yt - Padhai Ak Mazza Magic Handbook100% (3)Class 11Th Physics Yt - Padhai Ak Mazza Magic Handbook492 pages
- 750+ Blockbuster Problems in Physics For JEE Main Disha Experts100% (2)750+ Blockbuster Problems in Physics For JEE Main Disha Experts209 pages
- Mechanics 1 PDF Chapter NLM is Given Free 1100% (1)Mechanics 1 PDF Chapter NLM is Given Free 190 pages
- Arihant 40 Days Crash Course For JEE Mains 2022 Physics100% (1)Arihant 40 Days Crash Course For JEE Mains 2022 Physics517 pages
- NTA Based JEE Main Practice Question Bank PHYSICS100% (1)NTA Based JEE Main Practice Question Bank PHYSICS476 pages
- (IIT JEE IITJEE Physics Main Advanced) N N Ghosh and H N Ghosh - A Complete Course in IIT Physics Part 1 Upto Calorimetry by N N Ghosh and H N Ghosh For IIT JEE Oswal Publication-Oswal Publication (20100% (1)(IIT JEE IITJEE Physics Main Advanced) N N Ghosh and H N Ghosh - A Complete Course in IIT Physics Part 1 Upto Calorimetry by N N Ghosh and H N Ghosh For IIT JEE Oswal Publication-Oswal Publication (20315 pages
- HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS (WWW - Crackjee.xyz)100% (1)HEAT & THERMODYNAMICS (WWW - Crackjee.xyz)210 pages
- (IIT JEE) Sunil Batra-Physics 41 Years (1978-2018) JEE Advanced (IIT-JEE) + 17 Yrs JEE Main (2002-2018) (2018) PDF100% (2)(IIT JEE) Sunil Batra-Physics 41 Years (1978-2018) JEE Advanced (IIT-JEE) + 17 Yrs JEE Main (2002-2018) (2018) PDF553 pages
- Vedantu Tatva Practice Book 11 NEET PHYSICS Mechanics Part-1 (Vedantu) (Z-Library)No ratings yetVedantu Tatva Practice Book 11 NEET PHYSICS Mechanics Part-1 (Vedantu) (Z-Library)201 pages
- Vedantu JEE physics tatva 1st Edition Vedantu - The ebook with rich content is ready for you to download100% (5)Vedantu JEE physics tatva 1st Edition Vedantu - The ebook with rich content is ready for you to download51 pages
- JEE - MODULE 2 - MATHS - +1 NM Trigonometry & Calculus-1100% (1)JEE - MODULE 2 - MATHS - +1 NM Trigonometry & Calculus-1152 pages
- Electrical System Design of A 185 Square Meter Single-Dwelling UnitNo ratings yetElectrical System Design of A 185 Square Meter Single-Dwelling Unit20 pages
- Interfacing of A Stepper Motor With An 8051 MicrocontrollerNo ratings yetInterfacing of A Stepper Motor With An 8051 Microcontroller33 pages
- Medical & Commercial Power Supplies Custom Power Supplies Custom Docking Stations Custom Battery ChargersNo ratings yetMedical & Commercial Power Supplies Custom Power Supplies Custom Docking Stations Custom Battery Chargers36 pages
- 1992 Nonintrusive Appliance Load MonitoringNo ratings yet1992 Nonintrusive Appliance Load Monitoring22 pages
- Film Capacitors For Industrial ApplicationsNo ratings yetFilm Capacitors For Industrial Applications32 pages
- Sheet L 1 of 11: CH 24: LT Control CablesNo ratings yetSheet L 1 of 11: CH 24: LT Control Cables11 pages
- KSG-1K-SM / KSG-1.5K-SM / KSG-1.9K-SM / KSG-2K-SM KSG 1K SM/KSG 1.5K SM/KSG 1.9K SM/KSG 2K SMNo ratings yetKSG-1K-SM / KSG-1.5K-SM / KSG-1.9K-SM / KSG-2K-SM KSG 1K SM/KSG 1.5K SM/KSG 1.9K SM/KSG 2K SM2 pages
- Solenoid Valves-Dust Collector-353-CAT-60059GBNo ratings yetSolenoid Valves-Dust Collector-353-CAT-60059GB2 pages
- Why Jabil PCB Is Suitable For Today's Advanced ElectronicsNo ratings yetWhy Jabil PCB Is Suitable For Today's Advanced Electronics5 pages
- Application Note: Vishay General SemiconductorNo ratings yetApplication Note: Vishay General Semiconductor1 page
- A Transformerless Bidirectional DC-DC Converter Based On Power Units With Unipolar and Bipolar Structure For MVDC InterconnectionNo ratings yetA Transformerless Bidirectional DC-DC Converter Based On Power Units With Unipolar and Bipolar Structure For MVDC Interconnection5 pages
